technical specificationslegacy.rockymountainbidsystem.com/xfer/publicsolicitation... · technical...

27 of 768 S\CP\07-690 Zones 2 & 3 Pump Station\07-690 & 06-688 Project Manual

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Project 07-690 & 06-688

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01060 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01062 MAJOR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS 01340 SUBMITTALS 01560 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS 01600 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01601 JOB CONDITIONS 01650 FACILITY START-UP 01710 CLEANING 01800 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

02072 DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING 02110 SITE CLEARING 02140 DEWATERING 02165 CONTRACTOR DESIGNED EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 02200 EARTHWORK 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 02260 TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING 02270 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 02271 STONE REVETMENT (RIP RAP) 02364 SOIL NAIL WALLS AND SHOTCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION 02423 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02444 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES 02512 FOUNDATION AND WALL DRAIN SYSTEMS 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE STRUCTURES 02930 SEEDING

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

03108 FORMWORK 03208 REINFORCEMENT 03308 CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03311 CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03348 CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03350 CONCRETE TESTING 03431 PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

04050 COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 04110 CEMENT AND LIME MORTARS 04155 MASONRY ACCESSORIES

of 768 S\CP\07-690 Zones 2 & 3 Pump Station\07-690 & 06-688 Project Manual

04210 BRICK MASONRY 04220 CONCRETE MASONRY 04510 MASONRY CLEANING

DIVISION 5 - METALS

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05313 METAL DECK 05505 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07120 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07162 DAMPPROOFING 07176 LIQUID WATER REPELLENT 07190 UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07550 SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07900 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08332 STEEL ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS 08525 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08700 FINISH HARDWARE 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09905 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10444 SIGNAGE 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11005 EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 11060 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 11065 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: SUMP 11072 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: VERTICAL TURBINE (LINE SHAFT) 11076 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: SUBMERSIBLE NON-CLOG

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13219 HYDROPNEUMATIC SURGE TANKS 13440 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS CONTROL: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 13441 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTIONS


13442 PRIMARY ELEMENTS AND TRANSMITTERS 13446 CONTROL AUXILIARIES 13447 TELEMETRY SYSTEM 13448 CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES 13449 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) FOR INSTRUMENTATION

AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14305 BRIDGE CRANES

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 15061 PIPE: STEEL 15062 PIPE: DUCTILE 15063 PIPE: COPPER 15064 PIPE: PLASTIC 15065 CATHODIC PROTECTION 15073 PIPE: CAST-IRON SOIL 15090 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS 15100 VALVES: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 15103 BUTTERFLY VALVES 15104 BALL VALVES 15106 CHECK VALVES 15107 DUCKBILLED SLEEVE TYPE CHECK VALVES 15114 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES 15183 PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 15605 HVAC: EQUIPMENT 15890 HVAC: DUCTWORK 15970 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 15990 HVAC SYSTEMS: BALANCING AND TESTING

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

16010 ELECTRICAL: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 16060 GROUNDING 16120 WIRE AND CABLE - 600 VOLT AND BELOW 16121 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16135 ELECTRICAL: EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16265 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE 16275 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 16410 SAFETY SWITCHES 16440 SWITCHBOARDS 16441 PANELBOARDS 16442 MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT 16460 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16490 OVERCURRENT AND SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16491 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) 16492 ELECTRICAL METERING DEVICES 16493 CONTROL EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES 16500 LIGHTING


SECTION 01060 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT SIGNS

A. Furnish one of each of the following signs: 1. Contractor's standard sign approved by Owner. 2. Owner to install signs for construction.

B. Install in location approved by Owner.

C. Signs not listed in this Specification permitted only upon approval of Owner.

1.2 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Within fourteen (14) days after the award of Contract, or as may be otherwise requested by the Owner, Contractor shall submit a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, at least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Owner and/or Owner's Representative and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Owner as provided below the schedule of values submitted in accordance with the above paragraph. Contractor shall have an additional ten days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Owner.

1. Contractor's schedule of values will be acceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work.

1.3 PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS

A. At least once each month during construction of the Work, provide a professional photographer to take progress pictures as directed by Owner or Owner's Representative. Furnish two glossy prints (approximately 8 x 10 IN) and each negative, with all rights of reproduction, to Owner. Provide number of photographs as follows:

1. Five (5) ground level color photos per month, per site (two sites). 2. Contractor shall schedule and coordinate photographer with Engineer's Field

Representative. 3. Photographically impose a site plan key map on each photograph in the upper right

hand corner and show by arrow the subject and the direction from which the photograph was taken. Date all photographs.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Construction Meetings: 1. See Special Conditions. 2. Contractor to provide meeting notes.


B. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Coordinate and schedule with Resident Project Representative and Engineer for

each material, product or system specified. Conferences to be held prior to initiating installation, but not more than two (2) weeks before scheduled initiation of installation. a. Conferences may be combined if installation schedule of multiple components

occurs within the same two (2) week interval. b. Review manufacturers recommendations and Contract Documents

Specifications. 2. Contractor's Superintendent and individual who will actually act as foreman of the

installation crew (installer), if other than the Superintendent, shall attend.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

A. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products furnished under this Contract, stored on or off-site.

B. Contractor shall confine all materials storage, equipment storage and employee and subcontractor parking to the areas shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall not store materials or equipment, nor shall employees of the Contractor or subcontractors park automobiles on public streets, or in the parking and storage areas designated for use by other Contractors.

C. Contractor shall restore all areas used for materials storage, equipment storage, or employee and subcontractor parking to their original condition or better, unless specified otherwise.

1.6 EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY

A. See Special Conditions.

B. Confine construction operations to the immediate vicinity of the work as indicated on Drawings and use due care in placing construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and pipeline materials and supplies, so as to cause the least possible damage to property and interference with traffic.

1.7 EXCESS SOIL WASTE

A. Excess soil shall be disposed of off-site unless otherwise directed by the Owner.

B. At the completion of the work Contractor shall grade any soil disposal areas to blend with the surrounding topography and re-vegetate with native grass.

1.8 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS

A. Protect streets and roads that are closed to traffic by effective barricades with acceptable warning signs as approved by the City of Thornton.

B. Provide suitable barriers, signs, and lights to the extent required to adequately protect the public.

C. Provide suitable warning signs and lights at obstructions, such as material piles and equipment.

D. Illuminate barricades and obstructions with warning lights from sunset to sunrise.

E. Install and maintain barricades, signs, lights, and other protective devices in conformity with applicable laws and regulations, and where within railroad and highway rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction.

F. Obtain all necessary construction / traffic control permits from City of Thornton.


1.9 LINES AND GRADE

A. Construct all Work to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated on the Drawings. 1. Remove and reconstruct improperly located Work.

B. Use established control points as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Provide all survey, layout, and measurement work required. 1. Work to be performed by a qualified professional registered land surveyor

acceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative. 2. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve all

permanent reference points during construction. a. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Owner or

Owner's Representative. b. Report to Owner or Owner's Representative when any reference point is lost or

destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations.

c. Require surveyor to replace Project control points and all Federal, State, City, County and private land monuments that may be lost or destroyed. 1) Establish replacements based on original survey control. 2) Comply with local and State requirements for monument replacement and

restoration. 3. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar

appropriate means. a. Site improvements.

1) Stakes for grading, fill, and topsoil placement. 2) Utility slopes and invert elevations.

b. Tank centerline c. Batter boards for structures. d. Building foundation, column locations and floor levels. e. Controlling lines and levels required for the mechanical and electrical trades.

4. From time to time, verify layouts by the same methods. 5. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses. 6. On request of Owner or Owner's Representative, submit documentation to verify

accuracy of field work.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND PERMITS

A. Contractor is responsible for securing and paying for all applicable Federal, State, County, and Local Permits for the Work.

B. Contractor is responsible for complying with all Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, codes, and ordinances applicable to the Work.

C. Other standards and codes that apply to the Work are designated in the Specifications.

D. Comply with Utility, Right of Way and Building permits. This specifically includes, but is not limited to City of Thornton Building permit (for pump station) and City of Thornton Right-of-Way, Construction and Traffic Control permits.

E. Contractor is responsible for obtaining a Construction Stormwater Permit through the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) prior to commencing Work.

1.11 ACCESS BY GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS

A. Authorized representatives of governmental agencies shall at all times have access to the Work where it is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall provide proper facilities for access and inspection.


1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to:

1. Make all parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.

B. Provide products as specified or as required to complete cutting and patching operations.

C. Inspection: 1. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or

to movement during cutting and patching. 2. After uncovering Work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products

or performance of the Work. 3. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Owner or Owner's

Representative in writing; do not proceed with the Work until the Owner or Owner's Representative has provided further instructions.

D. Preparation: 1. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural value or

integrity of the affected portion of the Work. 2. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. 3. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project that may be

exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water. 4. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to

comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. 5. Restore work that has been cut or removed; install new products to provide

completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 6. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through

surfaces.

1.13 UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to avoid damage to any existing utilities in the area and shall be responsible for damage to such utilities. Notify applicable utilities prior to commencing work, if damage occurs, or if conflicts or emergencies arise during work. The Contractor shall notify the respective utility prior to construction to coordinate utility crossings. The Contractor shall cover all costs associated with repair and/or replacement of a damaged utility or associated damage caused by the utility break.

B. The Contractor shall pothole and verify all existing utilities a minimum of five days prior to laying pipe. Notify Owner immediately of any conflicts with proposed profile grades shown on the drawings. Minimum separation consistent with City of Thornton Standards shall be maintained between the pipelines and existing utilities. Information shall be transferred to a plan set and immediately submitted to Owner or Owner's Representative noting any differences discovered.

C. Contractor is responsible for providing and paying for all water required for all construction related activities.


1.14 SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT DISCLAIMER

A. A soils investigation and report has been made by HP Geotech, Inc., and is available for inspection by bidders through the Project Manager or at the Engineers Office. A test boring log, legend and notes are included in these supplementary conditions. Such information is intended for design and estimating purposes only. It is made available to bidders so that they may have access to identical subsurface information available to the City, and is not intended as a substitute for personal investigations, interpretations and judgment of the bidders.

B. The City does not warrant the adequacy of boring logs and other records of subsurface investigations, and such information is not considered to be a part of the contract. When a log of test borings is included in the subsurface investigation record, the data is shown in the individual log of each test boring apply only to that particular boring and are not intended to be conclusive as to the character of any material between or around test borings. The boring log information is for informational purposes only. If bidders use such information in preparing a proposal, they do so at their own risk, and bidders are soley responsible for all conclusions, deductions and inferences drawn from the soils investigation report.

C. Bidders are encouraged to obtain their own soils investigation report prior to any construction.

1.15 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor alone shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site in connection with his work, including safety of all persons and property, preparatory to and during performance of the work. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours.

B. The Construction Documents, and the construction hereby contemplated are to be governed, at all times, by applicable provisions of local and State laws and regulations, and Federal laws, including but not limited to, the latest amendments of the following: Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Standards Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, and Williams and Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, including rules and regulations pursuant thereto, applicable to the Work and performance of the Contract (OSHA). The duty of the Owner or Owner's Representative to conduct construction review of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site.

C. All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner and all storage places shall be marked clearly "DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES", and shall be in the care of competent watchmen at all times.

1.16 VIDEO RECORDING EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall videotape the proposed tank site and pump station locations, and pipeline route prior to construction to note pre-construction conditions. Prior to videotaping the Contractor shall stake the tank centerline and perimeter, pump station building corners, pipe centerlines and limits of construction clearly showing the work area. A copy of the tape shall be submitted to the Owner for record purposes. The Owner must receive a copy of the tape no less than two working days before any site clearing begins.

B. Prior to starting work on a project, the Contractor shall walk the project with City of Thornton representatives to determine the condition of the public improvements and adjacent property.


1.17 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for negotiations of any waivers or alternate arrangements required to enable transportation of materials to the site.

B. Maintain conditions of access road to site such that access is not hindered as the result of construction related deterioration.

C. Maintain in good repair temporary structures, fences, barricades, and other related items.

D. Electrical Power and Lighting. The electrical power required during construction shall be provided, and paid for, by the Contractor. This service shall be installed by a qualified electrical contractor. The Contractor shall provide lighting in all spaces at all times where necessary for good and proper workmanship, for inspection or for safety.

E. Special Hazards. Each Contractor and his subcontractor's Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance shall provide adequate protection against the following special hazards:

1. Excavation 2. Flooding

F. Inspections by Federal and State Agencies. Authorized representatives and agents of the State and Federal Government shall be permitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records.

G. Water. See Special Conditions.

H. Sanitary facilities: See Special Conditions.

I. Telephone service required during construction shall be provided by each Contractor.

J. Fire station driveway access will be available at all times. Contractor will coordinate with fire department for work. Trenches will be covered at end of construction each day by contractor.

1.18 DATA AND MEASUREMENTS

A. The data given in the specifications and shown on the Plans and Drawings is believed to be accurate but the accuracy is not guaranteed. The Contractor must take all levels, locations, measurements, and verify all dimensions of the job site prior to construction and must adapt his work into the exact construction. Scale measurements taken from prints are not considered for more than reference, larger scale drawings take precedence over smaller scale, and shop drawings take precedence over all others.

1.19 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY, INCLUDING EASEMENTS

A. General. Carefully protect all public and private property affected by construction operations. Such restorations shall include clearing of rock and debris, seeding, sodding, and transplanting of lawns, hedges, or ornamental plantings and repair or replacement of driveways, driveway culverts, walks, or other private facilities.

B. Take every precaution to protect trees from damage by boarding or wrapping of trunks, tying back limbs, etc. On all standing trees, marked or otherwise, any broken limbs shall be neatly removed, any scarred or barked areas shall be neatly repaired, any cut roots shall be trimmed and all painted with a tree paint approved by the Owner or Owner's Representative.

C. Repair of Lawn or "Kept" Areas. Any area stripped of vegetation shall not be left for more than thirty (30) days without topsoiling and seeding. This includes stockpiled dirt, regardless of its location.


D. All areas disturbed by construction shall be regraded to original contours leaving the ground free from lumps, ridges and depressions which would cause standing water.

E. All lawn or "kept" areas shall be reseeded as per Section 02930.

F. Properly care for all areas, and supply sufficient water to insure proper growth of grass. Replant all areas where grass is not established until a good growth of grass is established.

G. Topsoil as defined in this section shall be original topsoil removed and stockpiled for this purpose.

H. Restoration of Driveways, Driveway Culverts, and Pavements. Saw all asphaltic and concrete drives and pavements prior to excavation. Protect wet area from cracks or other change. Replace all drives, driveway culverts, and pavements with materials similar in color, surface, texture and alignment of the existing pavements and in accordance with the pavement replacement detail on the Plans. Coordinate any driveway closing with the property Owner.

1.20 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL

A. If during the course of construction, evidence of deposits of historical or archeological interest is found, the Contractor shall cease operations affecting the find and shall notify Owner. No further disturbance of the deposits shall ensue until the Contractor has been notified by Owner that Contractor may proceed. Owner will issue a notice to proceed after appropriate authorities have surveyed the find and made a determination to Owner. Compensation to the Contractor, if any, for lost time or changes in construction resulting from the find, shall be determined in accordance with changed or extra work provisions of the Contract Documents. The site has been previously investigated and has no known history of historical or archaeological finds.

1.21 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:

1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, product data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. 7. Delivered material quantities and costs. 8. Project photographs. 9. TV and video films. 10. Copies of project correspondence and testing results.

B. In addition to recording changes in the Work, record corrections to any discrepancies discovered between the Drawings and actual field conditions including, but not limited to, location and elevation of underground utilities and structures.

C. Ensure entries are complete, accurate, and legible enabling future reference by Owner.

D. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

E. Record information concurrent with construction progress. Failure to comply may result in progress payments being withheld until requirements are met to the satisfaction of Engineer. If Owner requires Engineer to make information concurrent with progress, all costs incurred by Engineer shall be deducted from Contractor's payment.

F. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following:

1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.


2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

G. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:

1. Measured depths of foundations. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. All structures and manhole locations shall be field tied to a minimum of three

physical features and noted on the as-recorded drawings.

H. Have updated record drawings available at each construction meeting.

I. Submit documents to Engineer prior to request for final Application for Payment.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01062 MAJOR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. A listing of the equipment for the Project, which is considered to be major

equipment. 2. A listing of the approved suppliers of said major equipment. 3. Certain instructions concerning the bidding of major equipment.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers or suppliers, as used in the context of "approved manufacturers or suppliers of major equipment," shall mean the manufacturers or suppliers listed in Article 1.4 of this Section.

1.3 INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDING MAJOR EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish, for base bid, equipment by any of the suppliers listed in Article 1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT, or as added to Article 1.4 by addendum.

B. Name only one of said suppliers in the schedule of major equipment suppliers found in the Bid Form. The supplier named on the bid form must provide the equipment for which they are listed unless the contractor provides written documentation from the named supplier indicating otherwise.

C. Proposal shall be considered irregular and subject to rejection if the Bidder: 1. Fails to list an approved supplier for each item. 2. Lists more than one approved supplier for each item.

D. If the Bidder fails to list an approved supplier, the Owner has the sole right to select one of the suppliers from the list of acceptable Manufacturers of Major Equipment in Article 1.4.

E. If the Bidder lists more than one approved supplier, the Owner has the sole right to select one of the suppliers so listed.

F. Requests for prequalification of equipment to be listed in Article 1.4 must comply specifically with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to Special Conditions.

1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT

A. Major Equipment and Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Part 1, Pipelines:

a. Butterfly valves, Section 15103: 1) Clow. 2) Dresser. 3) Mueller.


4) Pratt. 2. Part 2, Pump Station:

a. Vertical turbine pumps, Section 11072: 1) Fairbank Morse. 2) Goulds

b. Hydropneumatic surge tanks, Section 13219: 1) Charlatte of America. 2) PULSCO.

c. Butterfly valves, Section 15103: 1) Clow. 2) Dresser. 3) Mueller. 4) Pratt.

d. Globe valves, Section 15114: 1) Cla-Val.

e. Ball Valves (Pump Control Valves), Section 15104 1) Pratt 2) Willamette

f. Variable frequency drives (VFDs), Section 16265: 1) ASEA-Brown Bovari (ABB). 2) Allen-Bradley. 3) Cutler-Hammer. 4) Robicon. 5) Square D Company. 6) Toshiba.

g. Motor control centers, Section 16442: 1) Allen-Bradley. 2) Cutler Hammer. 3) General Electric Company. 4) Square D Company. 5) Siemens.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01340 SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanics and administration of the submittal process for:

a. Shop Drawings. b. Samples. c. Miscellaneous submittals. d. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. General content requirements for Shop Drawings. 3. Content requirements for Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Sections in Divisions 2 through 16 identifying required submittals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions. 2. Product data and samples are Shop Drawing information.

B. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: 1. Data collected for the Owner's use. 2. Contain information related to the operation and maintenance of equipment and

packaged systems.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Submittals other than Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals. 2. Representative types of miscellaneous submittal items include but are not limited to:

a. Construction schedule. b. Concrete, soil compaction, and pressure test reports. c. HVAC test and balance reports. d. Installed equipment and systems performance test reports. e. Manufacturer's installation certification letters. f. Instrumentation and control commissioning reports. g. Warranties. h. Service agreements. i. Construction photographs. j. Survey data. k. Cost breakdown (Schedule of Values).

1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Schedule of Shop Drawings: 1. Submitted and approved within 20 days of receipt of Notice to Proceed. 2. Account for multiple transmittals under any specification section where partial

submittals will be transmitted.


B. Shop Drawings: Submittal and approval prior to 50 percent completion.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Equipment Record Sheets: Initial submittal within 60 days after date Shop Drawings are approved.

1.4 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. All submittals and all pages of all copies of a submittal shall be completely legible. 2. Submittals which, in the Engineer's sole opinion, are illegible will be returned without

review.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Scope of any submittal and letter of transmittal:

a. Limited to one specification section. b. Do not submit under any specification section entitled (in part) "Basic

Requirements" unless the product or material submitted is specified in a "Basic Requirements" section.

2. Numbering letter of transmittal: a. Include as prefix the specification section number followed by a series number,

"-xx", beginning with "01" and increasing sequentially with each additional transmittal.

b. If more than one submittal under any specification section, assign consecutive series numbers to subsequent transmittal letters.

3. Describing transmittal contents: a. Provide listing of each component or item in submittal capable of receiving an

independent review action. b. Identify for each item:

1) Manufacturer and Manufacturer's drawing or data number. 2) Contract Document tag number(s). 3) Unique page numbers for each page of each separate item.

c. When submitting "or-equal" items that are not the products of named manufacturers, include the words "or-equal" in the item description.

4. Contractor stamping: a. General:

1) Contractor's review and approval stamp shall be applied either to the letter of transmittal or a separate sheet preceding each independent item in the submittal. a) Contractor's signature and date shall be original ink signature. b) Shop Drawing submittal stamp shall read "(Contractor's Name) has

satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval as stipulated under General Conditions Paragraph 6.17D."

c) Letters of transmittal may be stamped only when the scope of the submittal is one item.

2) Submittals containing multiple independent items shall be prepared with an index sheet for each item listing the discrete page numbers for each page of that item, which shall be stamped with the Contractor's review and approval stamp. a) Individual pages or sheets of independent items shall be numbered in a

manner that permits Contractor's review and approval stamp to be associated with the entire contents of a particular item.

b. Electronic stamps: 1) Contractor may electronically embed Contractor's review and approval

stamp to either the letter of transmittal or a separate index sheet preceding each independent item in the submittal.

2) Contractor's signature and date on electronically applied stamps shall be original ink signature.


5. Resubmittals: a. Number with original root number and a suffix letter starting with "A" on a (new)

duplicate transmittal form. b. Do not increase the scope of any prior transmittal. c. Account for all components of prior transmittal.

1) If items in prior transmittal received "A" or "B" Action code, list them and indicate "A" or "B" as appropriate. a) Do not include submittal information for items listed with prior "A" or "B"

Action in resubmittal. 2) Indicate "Outstanding-To Be Resubmitted At a Later Date" for any prior "C"

or "D" Action item not included in resubmittal. a) Obtain Engineer's approval to exclude items.

6. For 8-1/2 x 11 IN, 8-1/2 x 14 IN, and 11 x 17 IN size sheets, provide three (3) copies of each page for Engineer plus the number required by the Contractor. a. The number of copies required by the Contractor will be defined at the

Preconstruction Conference, but shall not exceed 5. b. All other size sheets:

1) Submit one (1) reproducible transparency or high resolution print and one (1) additional print of each drawing until approval is obtained.

2) Utilize mailing tube; do not fold. 3) The Engineer will mark and return the reproducible to the Contractor for his

reproduction and distribution. 7. Provide clear space (3 IN SQ) for Engineer stamping of each component defined in

PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS - Contractor Stamping. 8. Contractor shall not use red color for marks on transmittals.

a. Duplicate all marks on all copies transmitted, and ensure marks are photocopy reproducible.

b. Outline Contractor marks on reproducible transparencies with a rectangular box. 9. Transmittal contents:

a. Coordinate and identify Shop Drawing contents so that all items can be easily verified by the Engineer.

b. Identify equipment or material use, tag number, drawing detail reference, weight, and other project specific information.

c. Provide sufficient information together with technical cuts and technical data to allow an evaluation to be made to determine that the item submitted is in compliance with the Contract Documents.

d. Submit items such as equipment brochures, cuts of fixtures, product data sheets or catalog sheets on 8-1/2 x 11 IN pages. 1) Indicate exact item or model and all options proposed.

e. When a Shop Drawing submittal is called for in any specification section, include as appropriate, scaled details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics, capacities, test data, anchoring details, installation instructions, storage and handling instructions, color charts, layout drawings, rough-in diagrams, wiring diagrams, controls, weights and other pertinent data in addition to information specifically stipulated in the specification section. 1) Arrange data and performance information in format similar to that provided

in Contract Documents. 2) Provide, at minimum, the detail specified in the Contract Documents.

f. If proposed equipment or materials deviate from the Contract Drawings or Specifications in any way, clearly note the deviation and justify the said deviation in detail in a separate letter immediately following transmittal sheet.

10. Samples: a. Identification:

1) Identify sample as to transmittal number, manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation, tag number, standard specification section or drawing detail reference, color, range, texture, finish and other pertinent data.


2) If identifying information cannot be marked directly on sample without defacing or adversely altering samples, provide a durable tag with identifying information securely attached to the sample.

b. Include application specific brochures, and installation instructions. c. Provide Contractor's stamp of approval on samples or transmittal form as

indication of Contractor's checking and verification of dimensions and coordination with interrelated work.

d. Resubmit samples of rejected items.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Prepare in the format and detail specified in specification requiring the

miscellaneous submittal.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Number transmittals for Operation and Maintenance Manual with original root

number of the approved Shop Drawing for the item. 2. Submittal format:

a. Interim and final submittals: 1) Submit electronically on Compact Disk (CDROM) in Portable Document

Format (PDF). 2) Each manual shall have a Table of Contents or Index with each listed item

linked to its corresponding topic. 3) All pages within the PDF document are to be generated at actual size for

optimal resolution quality (i.e., 22 IN x 34 IN drawings rendered as such, etc.).

4) Ensure all pages are rotated properly so that the majority of the text or drawing border is upright on the screen.

5) Do not password protect and/or lock the PDF document. 6) Submit two (2) paper copies.

b. Final submittals: 1) Ensure that all comments and annotations that are made on the interim

submittals are addressed. 3. Identify resubmittals with the original number plus a suffix letter starting with "A." 4. Paper copy submittals:

a. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals printed on 8-1/2 x 11 IN size heavy first quality paper with standard three-hole punching and bound in stiff metal hinged binder constructed as a three-ring style. 1) Provide binders with titles on front and on spine of binder. 2) Tab each section of manuals for easy reference with plastic-coated dividers. 3) Provide index for each manual. 4) Provide plastic sheet lifters prior to first page and following last page.

b. Reduce drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8-1/2 x 11 IN or 11 x 17 IN size. 1) However, where reduction is not practical to ensure readability, fold larger

drawings separately and place in vinyl envelopes which are bound into the binder.

2) Identify vinyl envelopes with drawing numbers. 5. Transmittal contents:

a. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals is applicable but not necessarily limited to: 1) Major equipment. 2) Equipment used with electrical motor loads of 1/6 HP nameplate or greater. 3) Specialized equipment including valves and instrumentation and control

system components for HVAC and process systems such as meters, recorders, and transmitters.

4) Valves greater than 12 IN DIA. 5) Water control gates.


b. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following detailed information, as applicable: 1) Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting operations. 2) Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking

instructions. 3) Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operation, regulation

and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions. 4) Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 5) Guide to "troubleshooting." 6) Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 7) Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and

electrical diagrams, including elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, word description of wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams.

8) Test data and performance curves. 9) As-constructed fabrication or layout drawings and wiring diagrams if

different than approved Shop Drawings. 10) A list of recommended spare parts with a price list and a list of spare parts

provided under these Specifications. 11) Copies of installation instructions, parts lists or other documents packed

with equipment when delivered. 12) Instrumentation or tag numbers relating the equipment back to the Contract

Documents. 13) Include a filled-out, type-written copy of the Equipment Record Sheet,

Exhibits C1 and C2 as the first page(s) of each Operation and Maintenance Manual. a) Complete maintenance requirements in detail. Simple reference to the

Manual is not acceptable. 14) For equipment items involving components or subunits, an Equipment

Record Sheet for each operating component or subunit is required.

1.5 TRANSMITTAL OF SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Samples and Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Transmit all submittals to:

HDR 303E. 17th Avenue, Suite 700 Denver, CO 80203 Attn: Dan Stillwell, P.E.

2. Utilize two (2) copies of attached Exhibit "A" to transmit all Shop Drawings and

samples. 3. Utilize two (2) copies of attached Exhibit "B" to transmit all Operation and

Maintenance Manuals. 4. All submittals must be from Contractor.

a. Submittals will not be received from or returned to subcontractors. b. {Operation and Maintenance Manual submittal stamp may be Contractor's

standard approval stamp.} 5. Provide submittal information defining specific equipment or materials utilized on the

project. a. Generalized product information, not clearly defining specific equipment or

materials to be provided, will be rejected.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Transmit under Contractor's standard letter of transmittal or letterhead. 2. Submit in triplicate or as specified in individual specification section.


3. Transmit to:

HDR 303 E. 17th Avenue, Suite 700 Denver, CO 80203 Attn: Dan Stillwell, P.E.

4. Provide copy of letter of transmittal without attachments to {Owner's} {Engineer's}

Resident Project Representative. a. Exception for concrete, soils compaction and pressure test reports.

1) Transmit one copy of test reports to Resident Project Engineer. 2) Transmit one copy of test reports to location and individual indicated above

for other miscellaneous submittals.

C. Expedited Return Delivery: 1. Include prepaid express envelope or airbill in submittal transmittal package for any

submittals Contractor expects or requires express return mail. 2. Inclusion of prepaid express envelope or airbill does not obligate Engineer to

conduct expedited review of submittal.

D. Electronic submittals will not be accepted.

E. Fax Transmittals: 1. Permitted on a case-by-case basis to expedite review when approved by Engineer. 2. Requires hard copy transmittal to immediately follow.

a. Engineer will proceed with review of fax transmittal. b. Engineer's approval or rejection comments will be recorded and returned on

hard copy transmittal. 3. Provisions apply to both:

a. Initial transmittal contents. b. Supplemental information required to make initial transmittal contents complete.

1.6 ENGINEER'S REVIEW ACTION

A. Shop Drawings and Samples: 1. Items within transmittals will be reviewed for overall design intent and will receive

one of the following actions: a. A - FURNISH AS SUBMITTED. b. B - FURNISH AS NOTED (BY ENGINEER). c. C - REVISE AND RESUBMIT. d. D - REJECTED. e. E - ENGINEER'S REVIEW NOT REQUIRED.

2. Submittals received will be initially reviewed to ascertain inclusion of Contractor's approval stamp. a. Submittals not stamped by the Contractor or stamped with a stamp containing

language other than that specified herein will not be reviewed for technical content and will be returned without any action.

3. In relying on the representation on the Contractor's review and approval stamp, Owner and Engineer reserve the right to review and process poorly organized and poorly described submittals as follows: a. Submittals transmitted with a description identifying a single item and found to

contain multiple independent items: 1) Review and approval will be limited to the single item described on the

transmittal letter. 2) Other items identified in the submittal will:

a) Not be logged as received by the Engineer.


b) Be removed from the submittal package and returned without review and comment to the Contractor for coordination, description and stamping.

c) Be submitted by the Contractor as a new series number, not as a re-submittal number.

b. Engineer, at Engineer's discretion, may revise the transmittal letter item list and descriptions, and conduct review. 1) Unless Contractor notifies Engineer in writing that the Engineer's revision of

the transmittal letter item list and descriptions was in error, Contractor's review and approval stamp will be deemed to have applied to the entire contents of the submittal package.

4. Submittals returned with Action "A" or "B" are considered ready for fabrication and installation. a. If for any reason a submittal that has an "A" or "B" Action is resubmitted, it must

be accompanied by a letter defining the changes that have been made and the reason for the resubmittal.

b. Destroy or conspicuously mark "SUPERSEDED" all documents having previously received "A" or "B" Action that are superseded by a resubmittal.

5. Submittals with Action "A" or "B" combined with Action "C" (Revise and Resubmit) or "D" (Rejected) will be individually analyzed giving consideration as follows: a. The portion of the submittal given "C" or "D" will not be distributed (unless

previously agreed to otherwise at the Preconstruction Conference). 1) One copy or the one transparency of the "C" or "D" drawings will be marked

up and returned to the Contractor. a) Correct and resubmit items so marked.

b. Items marked "A" or "B" will be fully distributed. c. If a portion of the items or system proposed are acceptable, however, the major

part of the individual drawings or documents are incomplete or require revision, the entire submittal may be given "C" or "D" Action. 1) This is at the sole discretion of the Engineer. 2) In this case, some drawings may contain relatively few or no comments or

the statement, "Resubmit to maintain a complete package." 3) Distribution to the Owner and field will not be made (unless previously

agreed to otherwise). 6. Failure to include any specific information specified under the submittal paragraphs

of the Specifications will result in the submittal being returned to the Contractor with "C" or "D" Action.

7. Calculations required in individual specification sections will be received for information purposes only, as evidence calculations have been performed by individuals meeting specified qualifications, and will be returned stamped "E. Engineer's Review Not Required" to acknowledge receipt.

8. Transmittals of submittals which the Engineer considers as "Not Required" submittal information, which is supplemental to but not essential to prior submitted information, or items of information in a transmittal which have been reviewed and received "A" or "B" Action in a prior submittal, will be returned with Action "E. Engineer's Review Not Required."

9. Samples may be retained for comparison purposes. a. Remove samples when directed. Include in bid all costs of furnishing and

removing samples. 10. Approved samples submitted or constructed, constitute criteria for judging

completed work. a. Finished work or items not equal to samples will be rejected.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Engineer will review and indicate one of the following review actions:

a. ACCEPTABLE.


b. FURNISH AS NOTED. c. REVISE AND RESUBMIT. d. REJECTED.

2. Acceptable submittals will be retained with the transmittal form returned with a request for {five} additional copies.

3. Deficient submittals will be returned along with the transmittal form which will be marked to indicate deficient areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


EXHIBIT A Shop Drawing Transmittal No. ____________ (Spec Section) (Series) Project Name: Date Received:

Project Owner: Checked By:

Contractor: HDR Engineering, Inc. Log Page:

Address: Address: HDR No.:

Spec Section:

Drawing/Detail No.:

Attn: Attn: 1st. Sub

ReSub.

Date Transmitted: Previous Transmittal Date:

Item No.

No. Copies

Description Manufacturer Mfr/Vendor Dwg or Data No.

Action Taken*

Remarks: * The Action Designated Above is in Accordance with the Following Legend:

A - Furnish as Submitted B - Furnish as Noted C - Revise and Submit 1. Not enough

information for review.

2. No reproducibles submitted.

3. Copies illegible. 4. Not enough copies

submitted. 5. Wrong sequence number. 6. Wrong resubmittal number. 7. Wrong spec. section. 8. Wrong form used. 9. See comments.

D - Rejected E - Engineer's review not required 1. Submittal not required. 2. Supplemental Information. Submittal retained for

informational purposes only. 3. Information reviewed and approved on prior submittal. 4. See comments.

Comments:

By Date

Distribution: Contractor File Field Owner Other


EXHIBIT B

O&M Manual Transmittal No. _____-___ (Spec Section) (Series) Project Name: Date Received:

Project Owner: Checked By:

Contractor: Owner: Log Page:

Address: Attn:

Address: Attn:

HDR No.:

1st. Sub. ReSub.

. Date Transmitted: Previous Transmittal Date:

No. Copies

Description of Item Manufacturer Dwg. or Data No.

Action Taken*

Remarks:

To:

From:

HDR Engineering, Inc.

Date:

* The Action designated above is in accordance with the following legend: A - Acceptable, provide two additional copies and final electronic copy B - Furnish as Noted C - Revise and Resubmit

This Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittal is deficient in the following area: 1. Equipment record sheets. 2. Functional description. 3. Assembly, disassembly,

installation, alignment, adjustment & checkout instructions.

4. Operating instructions.

5. Lubrication & maintenance instructions. 6. Troubleshooting guide. 7. Parts list and ordering instructions. 8. Organization (index and tabbing). 9. Wiring diagrams & schematics specific to installation. 10. Outline, cross section & assembly diagrams. 11. Test data & performance curves. 12. Tag or equipment identification numbers. 13. Other - see comments.

D - Rejected

Comments:

By Date

Distribution: Contractor File Field Owner Other


EXHIBIT C1 Equipment Record Page 1 of 2

Equipment Maintenance Data Summary Project Name Page

of

Equip. Description Date Installed Date Started

Equip. Location Cost Estimated Life

Project Equip. Tag No.

Shop Dwg. Trans. No.

Spec. Sec.

Equip. Manuf.

Manuf. Address Phone

Local Vendor

Vendor Address Phone

BREAK-IN MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (INITIAL OIL CHANGES, ETC.)

D W M Q S A Hours

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS D W M Q S A Hours

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA

Part No. Part Name Quantity Equip. Make Serial No. ID No. Model No. Frame No. HP V. Amp. HZ PH RPM SF Duty Code Ins. Cl. Des. Type Nema C Amb. Temp. Rise Rating Misc. MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Equip. Make Serial No. ID No. Model No. Frame No. HP RPM Cap. Size TDH Imp. Sz. Des. CFM PSI Assy. No. Case No. Misc. Lubricant information on following page


EXHIBIT C2 Equipment Record Page 2 of 2

Lubrication Summary

Equipment Description Project Equip. Tag No. Page of

Lubricant Point

Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE # ISO

1

2

3

4 Lubr

ican

t Typ

e

5

Lubricant Point


1

2

3

4 Lubr

ican

t Typ

e

5

Lubricant Point


1

2

3

4 Lubr

ican

t Typ

e

5

Lubricant Point


1

2

3

4 Lubr

ican

t Typ

e

5

Lubricant Point


1

2

3

4 Lubr

ican

t Typ

e

5

Lubricant Point


1

Lubr

ican

t Typ

e

2


SECTION 01560 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Addresses: 1. Minimizing the pollution of air, water, or land; control of noise, the disposal of solid

waste materials, and protection of deposits of historical or archaeological interest.


1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Prior to the start of any construction activities submit:

a. A detailed proposal of all methods of control and preventive measures to be utilized for environmental protection.

b. A drawing of the work area, haul routes, storage areas, access routes and current land conditions including trees and vegetation.

c. A copy of the NPDES permit for storm water discharges from construction activities.

d. A copy of the approved pollution prevention plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Employ and utilize environmental protection methods, obtain all necessary permits, and fully observe all local, state, and federal regulations.

B. Land Protection: 1. Except for any work or storage area and access routes specifically assigned for the

use of the Contractor, the land areas outside the limits of construction shall be preserved in their present condition. Contractor shall confine his construction activities to areas defined for work within the Contract Documents.

2. Manage and control all borrow areas, work or storage areas, access routes and embankments to prevent sediment from entering nearby water or land adjacent to the work site.

3. Restore all disturbed areas including borrow and haul areas and establish permanent type of locally adaptable vegetative cover.

4. Unless earthwork is immediately paved or surfaced, protect all side slopes and backslopes immediately upon completion of final grading.

5. Plan and execute earthwork in a manner to minimize duration of exposure of unprotected soils.


6. Except for areas designated by the Contract Documents to be cleared and grubbed, the Contractor shall not deface, injure or destroy trees and vegetation, nor remove, cut, or disturb them without approval of the Engineer. Any damage caused by the Contractor's equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to its original condition at the Contractor's expense.

C. Surface Water Protection: 1. Apply for and obtain a permit from the local environmental agency for storm water

discharges. 2. Prepare pollution prevention plan that has been approved by the local environmental

agency. 3. Utilize, as necessary, erosion control methods to protect side and backslopes,

minimize and the discharge of sediment to the surface water leaving the construction site as soon as rough grading is complete. These controls shall be maintained until the site is ready for final grading and landscaping or until they are no longer warranted and concurrence is received from the Engineer. Physically retard the rate and volume of run-on and runoff by: a. Implementing structural practices such as diversion swales, terraces, straw

bales, silt fences, berms, storm drain inlet protection, rocked outlet protection, sediment traps and temporary basins.

b. Implementing vegetative practices such as temporary seeding, permanent seeding, mulching, sod stabilization, vegetative buffers, hydroseeding, anchored erosion control blankets, sodding, vegetated swales or a combination of these methods.

c. Providing Construction sites with graveled or rocked access entrance and exit drives and parking areas to reduce the tracking of sediment onto public or private roads.

4. Discharges from the construction site shall not contain pollutants at concentrations that produce objectionable films, colors, turbidity, deposits or noxious odors in the receiving stream or waterway.

D. Solid Waste Disposal: 1. Collect solid waste on a daily basis. 2. Provide disposal of degradable solid waste to an approved solid waste disposal site. 3. Provide disposal of nondegradable solid waste to an approved solid waste disposal

site or in an alternate manner approved by Engineer and regulatory agencies. 4. No building materials wastes or unused building materials shall be buried, dumped,

or disposed of on the site. 5. Fuel and Chemical Handling: 6. Store and dispose of chemical wastes in a manner approved by regulatory

agencies. 7. Take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases, herbicides, and

insecticides from entering drainage ways. 8. Do not allow water used in onsite material processing, concrete curing, cleanup, and

other waste waters to enter a drainage way(s) or stream. 9. The Contractor shall provide containment around fueling and chemical storage

areas to ensure that spills in these areas do not reach waters of the state.

E. Control of Dust: 1. The control of dust shall mean that no construction activity shall take place without

applying all such reasonable measures as may be required to prevent particulate matter from becoming airborne so that it remains visible beyond the limits of construction. Reasonable measures may include paving, frequent road cleaning, planting vegetative groundcover, application of water or application of chemical dust suppressants. The use of chemical agents such as calcium chloride must be approved by the State of Colorado DOT.


2. Utilize methods and practices of construction to eliminate dust in full observance of agency regulations.

3. The Engineer will determine the effectiveness of the dust control program and may request the Contractor to provide additional measures, at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Burning: 1. Do not burn material on the site. If the Contractor elects to dispose of waste

materials by burning, make arrangements for an off-site burning area and conform to all agency regulations.

G. Control of Noise: 1. Control noise by fitting equipment with appropriate mufflers.

H. Completion of Work: 1. Upon completion of work, leave area in a clean, natural looking condition. 2. Ensure all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction of

required permanent work are removed.

I. Historical Protection: 1. If during the course of construction, evidence of deposits of historical or

archaeological interests is found, cease work affecting find and notify Engineer. Do not disturb deposits until written notice from Engineer is given to proceed.

2. The Contractor will be compensated for lost time or changes in construction to avoid the find based upon normal change order procedures.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01600 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Scheduling of product delivery. 2. Packaging of products for delivery. 3. Protection of products against damage from:

a. Handling. b. Exposure to elements or harsh environments.


C. Payment: 1. No payment will be made to Contractor for equipment or materials not properly

stored and insured or without approved shop drawings. a. Previous payments for items will be deducted from subsequent progress

estimate(s) if proper storage procedures are not observed.

1.2 DELIVERY

A. Scheduling: 1. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow timely installation

and to avoid prolonged storage.

B. Packaging: 1. Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer's original unbroken cartons or other

containers designed and constructed to protect the contents from physical or environmental damage.

C. Identification: 1. Clearly and fully mark and identify as to manufacturer, item, and installation location.

D. Protection and Handling: 1. Provide manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)EXECUTION

2.1 PROTECTION, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Manufacturer's Instruction: 1. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written

directions. a. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage to items while

in storage. b. Handle products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and instructions. 2. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry. 3. When space heaters are provided in equipment, connect and operate heaters during

storage until equipment is placed in service.


2.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect Deliveries: 1. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to unloading. Reject all

products or equipment that are damaged, used, or in any other way unsatisfactory for use on Project.

B. Monitor Storage Area: 1. Monitor storage area to ensure suitable temperature and moisture conditions are

maintained.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01601 JOB CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Job conditions.


1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Prior to installation of material, equipment and other work, verify with subcontractors, material or equipment manufacturers, and installers that the substrate or surface to which those materials attach is acceptable for installation of those materials or equipment. (Substrate is defined as building surfaces to which materials or equipment is attached to i.e., floors, walls, ceilings, etc.).

B. Correct unacceptable substrate until acceptable for installation of equipment or materials.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01650 FACILITY START-UP

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures and actions, required of the Contractor, which are necessary to achieve

and demonstrate Substantial Completion. 2. Requirements for Substantial Completion Submittals.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Project Classified System (PCS): A defined part of the Project, consisting of an arrangement of items, such as equipment, structures, components, piping, wiring, materials, or incidentals, so related or connected to form an identifiable, unified, functional, operational, safe, and independent system.

B. Pre-Demonstration Period: The period of time, of unspecified duration after initial construction and installation activities during which Contractor, with assistance from manufacturer's representatives, performs in the following sequence: 1. Finishing type construction work to ensure the Project or each PCS has reached a

state of Substantial Completion. 2. Equipment start-up. 3. Personnel training.

C. Demonstration Period: A period of time, of specified duration, following the Pre-Demonstration Period, during which the Contractor initiates process flow through the Project Classified System and starts up and operates the Project Classified System, without exceeding specified downtime limitations, to prove the functional integrity of the mechanical and electrical equipment and components and the control interfaces of the respective equipment and components comprising the Project Classified System as evidence of Substantial Completion.

D. Substantial Completion: See, General Conditions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 1340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.

B. Submit in the chronological order listed below prior to the completion of the Pre-Demonstration Period. 1. Master operation and maintenance training schedule:

a. Submit 30 days (minimum) prior to first training session for Owner's personnel. b. Schedule to include:

1) Target date and time for Owner witnessing of each system initial start-up. 2) Target date and time for Operation and Maintenance training for each

system, both field and classroom. 3) Target date for initiation of Demonstration Period.

c. Submit for review and approval by Owner.


d. Include holidays observed by Owner. e. Attend a schedule planning and coordination meeting 90 calendar days prior to

first anticipated training session. 1) Provide a status report and schedule-to-complete for requirements

prerequisite to manufacturer's training. 2) Identify initial target dates for individual manufacturer's training sessions.

f. Owner reserves the right to insist on a minimum 7 days' notice of rescheduled training session not conducted on master schedule target date for any reason.

g. Schedule to be resubmitted until approved. 2. Substantial Completion Submittal:

a. File Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for Inspection. b. Approved Operation and Maintenance manuals received by Engineer minimum

1 week prior to scheduled training. c. Written request for Owner to witness each system pre-demonstration start-up.

Request to be received by Owner minimum 1 week before scheduled training of Owner's personnel on that system.

d. Equipment installation and pre-demonstration start-up certifications. e. Letter verifying completion of all pre-demonstration start-up activities including

receipt of all specified items from manufacturers or suppliers as final item prior to initiation of Demonstration Period.

1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Phased Construction: Part 1 and Part 2 will be constructed concurrently.

B. Schedule of Events: 1. Part 1, Pipeline:

1) System start-up involving flow process must coordinate with Part 2, Pump Station, and shall not proceed with start-up prior to:

2) Connection with Part 1 Work. 2. Part 2, Pump Station:

a. System start-up involving flow process must coordinate with Part 1, Pipeline, and shall not proceed with start-up prior to: 1) Connection with Part 2 Work. 2) Substantial Completion of Part 2 Work.

1.5 COST OF START-UP

A. Contractor to pay all costs associated with System start-up.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Facility Start-up Divided into Two Periods: 1. Pre-Demonstration Period including:

a. Completion of construction work to bring Project to a state of Substantial Completion.

b. Start-up of Equipment. c. Training of Personnel. d. Completion of the filing of all required submittals. e. Filing of Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for

Inspection. 2. Demonstration Period including:


a. Demonstration of functional integrity of facility or PCS. b.

3.2 PRE-DEMONSTRATION PERIOD

A. Completion of Construction Work: 1. Complete the work to bring the PCS to a state of substantial completion.

B. Equipment Start-up: 1. Requirements for individual items of equipment are included in Divisions 2 through

16 of these Specifications. 2. Prepare the equipment so it will operate properly and safely and be ready to

demonstrate functional integrity during the Demonstration Period. 3. Perform Equipment Start-up to extent possible without introducing process flow. 4. Introduce process flow to complete Equipment Start-up for the following systems:

a. Part 1, Pipeline: 1) Piping System

b. Part 2, Pump Station: 1) Pump System, including pumps, variable frequency drives, and control

valves. 2) Surge Control System, including hydropneumatic tank. 3) HVAC System. 4) Instrumentation for Process Control System.

5. Procedures include but are not necessarily limited to the following: a. Test or check and correct deficiencies of:

1) Power, control, and monitoring circuits for continuity prior to connection to power source.

2) Voltage of all circuits. 3) Phase sequence. 4) Cleanliness of connecting piping systems. 5) Alignment of connected machinery. 6) Vacuum and pressure of all closed systems. 7) Lubrication. 8) Valve orientation and position status for manual operating mode. 9) Tankage for integrity using process flow. 10) Pumping equipment using process flow. 11) Instrumentation and control signal generation, transmission, reception, and

response. See Section 13440. 12) Tagging and identification systems. 13) All equipment: Proper connections, alignment, calibration and adjustment.

b. Calibrate all safety equipment. c. Manually rotate or move moving parts to assure freedom of movement. d. "Bump" start electric motors to verify proper rotation. e. Perform other tests, checks, and activities required to make the equipment

ready for Demonstration Period. f. Documentation:

1) Prepare a log showing each equipment item subject to this paragraph and listing what is to be accomplished during Equipment Start-up. Provide a place for the Contractor to record date and person accomplishing required work. Submit completed document before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion certification.

6. Obtain certifications, without restrictions or qualifications, and deliver to Engineer: a. Manufacturer's equipment installation check letters. b. Instrumentation Supplier's Instrumentation Installation Certificate.

C. Personnel Training: 1. See individual equipment specification sections.


2. Conduct all personnel training after completion of Equipment Start-up for the equipment for which training is being conducted. a. Personnel training on individual equipment or systems will not be considered

completed unless: 1) All pretraining deliverables are received and approved before

commencement of training on the individual equipment or system. 2) No system malfunctions occur during training. 3) All provisions of field and classroom training specifications are met.

b. Training not in compliance with the above will be performed again in its entirety by the manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Field and classroom training requirements: a. Hold classroom training on-site. b. Notify each manufacturer specified for on-site training that the Owner reserves

the right to video record any or all training sessions. Organize each training session in a format compatible with video recording.

c. Training instructor: Factory trained and familiar with giving both classroom and "hands-on" instructions.

d. Training instructors: Be at classes on time. Session beginning and ending times to be coordinated with the Owner and indicated on the master schedule. Normal time lengths for class periods can vary, but brief rest breaks should be scheduled and taken.

e. Organize training sessions into maintenance verses operation topics and identify on schedule.

f. Plan for minimum class attendance of 10 people at each session and provide sufficient classroom materials, samples, and handouts for those in attendance.

g. Instructors to have a typed agenda and well prepared instructional material. The use of visual aids, e.g., films, pictures, and slides is recommended for use during the classroom training programs. Deliver agendas to the Engineer a minimum of 7 days prior to the classroom training. Provide equipment required for presentation of films, slides, and other visual aids.

h. In the on-site training sessions, cover the information required in the Operation and Maintenance manuals submitted according to Section 01340 and the following areas as applicable to PCS's. 1) Operation of equipment. 2) Lubrication of equipment. 3) Maintenance and repair of equipment. 4) Troubleshooting of equipment. 5) Preventive maintenance procedures. 6) Adjustments to equipment. 7) Inventory of spare parts. 8) Optimizing equipment performance. 9) Capabilities. 10) Operational safety. 11) Emergency situation response. 12) Takedown procedures (disassembly and assembly).

i. Address above Paragraphs 1), 2), 8), 9), 10), and 11) in the operation sessions. Address above Paragraphs 3), 4), 5), 6), 7), and 12) in the maintenance sessions.

j. Maintain a log of classroom training provided including: Instructors, topics, dates, time, and attendance.

D. Complete the filing of all required submittals: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Training material.


E. Filing of Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for Inspection of Project or PCS: 1. File the notice when the following have been completed:

a. Construction work (brought to state of Substantial Completion). b. Equipment Start-up. c. Personnel Training. d. Submittal of required documents.

2. Engineer will review required submittals for completeness within 5 calendar days of Contractor's notice. If complete, Engineer will complete inspection of the Work, within 10 calendar days of Contractor's notice.

3. Engineer will inform Contractor in writing of the status of the Work reviewed, within 14 calendar days of Contractor's notice. a. Work determined not meeting state of Substantial Completion:

1) Contractor: Correct deficiencies noted or submit plan of action for correction within 5 days of Engineer's determination.

2) Engineer: Reinspect work within 5 days of Contractor's notice of correction of deficiencies.

3) Reinspection costs incurred by Engineer will be billed to Owner who will deduct them from final payment due Contractor.

b. Work determined to be in state of tentative Substantial Completion: Engineer to prepare tentative "Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion."

c. Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion: 1) Certificate tentatively issued subject to successful Demonstration of

functional integrity. 2) Issued for Project as a whole or for one or more PCS. 3) Issued subject to completion or correction of items cited in the certificate

(punch list). 4) Issued with responsibilities of Owner and Contractor cited. 5) Executed by Engineer. 6) Accepted by Owner. 7) Accepted by Contractor.

d. Upon successful completion of Demonstration Period, Engineer will endorse certificate attesting to the successful demonstration, and citing the hour and date of ending the successful Demonstration Period of functional integrity as the effective date of Substantial Completion.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION PERIOD

A. General: 1. Demonstrate the functional integrity of the mechanical, electrical, and control

interfaces of the respective equipment and components comprising the PCS as evidence of Substantial Completion.

2. Duration of Demonstration Period: 120 consecutive hours. 3. If, during the Demonstration Period, the aggregate amount of time used for repair,

alteration, or unscheduled adjustments to any equipment or systems that renders the affected equipment or system inoperative exceed 10 percent of the Demonstration Period, the demonstration of functional integrity will be deemed to have failed. In the event of failure, a new Demonstration Period will recommence after correction of the cause of failure. The new Demonstration Period shall have the same requirements and duration as the Demonstration Period previously conducted.

4. Conduct the demonstration of functional integrity under full operational conditions. 5. Owner will provide operational personnel to provide process decisions affecting

plant performance. Owner's assistance will be available only for process decisions. Contractor will perform all other functions including but not limited to equipment operation and maintenance until successful completion of the Demonstration Period.


6. Owner reserves the right to simulate operational variables, equipment failures, routine maintenance scenarios, etc., to verify the functional integrity of automatic and manual backup systems and alternate operating modes.

7. Time of beginning and ending any Demonstration Period shall be agreed upon by Contractor, Owner, and Engineer in advance of initiating Demonstration Period.

8. Throughout the Demonstration Period, provide knowledgeable personnel to answer Owner's questions, provide final field instruction on select systems and to respond to any system problems or failures which may occur.

9. Provide all labor, supervision, utilities, chemicals, maintenance, equipment, vehicles or any other item necessary to operate and demonstrate all systems being demonstrated.

10. Contractor shall turn valves at Owner’s direction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01710 CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Intermediate and final cleaning of Work not including special cleaning of closed

systems specified elsewhere.


1.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store cleaning products and cleaning wastes in containers specifically designed for those materials.

1.3 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants disturbed by cleaning process will not fall on newly painted surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: 1. Compatible with surface being cleaned. 2. New and uncontaminated. 3. For Manufactured Surfaces: Material recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING - GENERAL

A. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions.

B. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with laws and safety orders of governing authorities.

C. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains or sewers.

D. Dispose of degradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site.

E. Dispose of nondegradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site or in an alternate manner approved by Engineer and regulatory agencies.

F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.

G. Do not drop or throw materials from heights greater than 4 FT or less than 4 FT if conditions warrant greater care.

H. On completion of work, leave area in a clean, natural looking condition. 1. Remove all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction

of required permanent Work.


I. Do not burn on-site.

3.2 INTERIOR CLEANING

A. Cleaning During Construction: 1. Keep work areas clean so as not to hinder health, safety or convenience of

personnel in existing facility operations. 2. At maximum weekly intervals, dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. 3. Vacuum clean interior areas when ready to receive finish painting.

a. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis, until substantial completion.

B. Final Cleaning: 1. Complete immediately prior to Demonstration Period. 2. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other

foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces. 3. Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses, lamps and trims clean. 4. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. 5. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. 6. Ventilating systems:

a. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction.

b. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.

7. Replace all burned out lamps. 8. Broom clean process area floors. 9. Mop office and control room floors.

3.3 EXTERIOR (SITE) CLEANING

A. Cleaning During Construction: 1. Construction debris:

a. Confine in strategically located container(s): 1) Cover to prevent blowing by wind. 2) Haul from site minimum once a week.

b. Remove from work area to container daily. 2. Vegetation: Keep weeds and other vegetation trimmed to 3 IN maximum height. 3. Soils, sand, and gravel deposited on paved areas and walks:

a. Remove as required to prevent muddy or dusty conditions. b. Do not flush into storm sewer system.

B. Final Cleaning: 1. Remove trash and debris containers from site.

a. Re-seed areas disturbed by location of trash and debris containers. 2. Clean paved roadways.


A. Immediately prior to Demonstration Period, conduct an inspection with Engineer to verify condition of all work areas.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01800 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. All openings and penetrations in construction.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07840 - Firestopping. 4. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. 6. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

4. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).

B. Obtain prior approval from Engineer when any opening larger than 100 SQ IN must be made in existing or newly completed construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hazardous Areas: Areas shown in the Contract Documents as having Class I or Class II area classifications.

B. Washdown Areas: Areas having floor drains or hose bibs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the

submittal process. 2. For each structure provide dimensioned or scaled (minimum 1/8 IN = 1 FT) plan

view drawings containing the following information: a. Vertical and horizontal location of all required openings and penetrations. b. Size of all openings and penetrations. c. Opening type. d. Seal type.

3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for standard manufactured products.


A. For purposes of this Section, all water table level elevation is below project elevations.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pipe Sleeves: Steel, ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black.

B. Pipe Sleeves Penetrating into Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel, 1/4 IN minimum thickness.

C. Backing Rod and Sealant: See Section 07900.

D. Modular Mechanical Seals: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Link-Seal. 2. 304 stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers.

E. Sheet Metal Sleeves: Steel, ASTM A36, 12 GA.

F. Commercial Wall Castings: 1. For unclassified areas both sides of penetration:

a. Ductile iron, class equal to connecting piping system. 2. For wet/corrosive areas either side of penetration:

a. Stainless steel, 304L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION

A. Perform HVAC penetrations in accordance with NFPA 90A.

B. Perform electrical penetrations in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 501.

C. Install sleeves and castings in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter #6.

D. Hot dip galvanize (or paint in accordance with Section 09905) all steel sleeves installed.

E. When mechanical or electrical work cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for building-in of boxes, sleeves, insets, fixtures or devices necessary to permit installation later. Lay out chases, holes or other openings which must be provided in masonry, concrete or other work.

F. Where pipes, conduits or ducts pass through floors in washdown areas, install sleeves with top 3 IN above finish floors. In non-washdown areas, install sleeves with ends flush with finished surfaces.

G. Size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts which will receive sealant seal such that free area to receive sealant is minimized and seal integrity may be obtained.

H. For insulated piping and ducts, size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts large enough to accommodate full thickness of insulation.

I. Do not cut into or core drill any beams, joists, or columns.

J. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists, or columns.

K. Do not install recesses in beams, joists, columns, or slabs.

L. Field Cutting and Coring: 1. Saw or core drill with non-impact type equipment. 2. Mark opening and drill small 3/4 IN or less holes through structure following opening

outline.


3. Sawcut opening outline on both surfaces. Knock out within sawcuts using impact type equipment. Do not chip or spall face of surface to remain intact. Do not allow any overcut with saw kerf.

M. Precast-Prestressed Concrete Construction: 1. Do not cut openings nor core drill vertically or horizontally through stems of

members. 2. Do not locate or install sleeves or recess sleeves vertically or horizontally through or

in stems of members. 3. Cast openings and sleeves into flanges of units. 4. Cast openings larger than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimension in units at

time of manufacture. 5. Cast openings smaller than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimensions in flanges

of units at time of manufacture or field cut.

N. Where alterations are necessary or where new and old work join, restore adjacent surfaces to their condition existing prior to start of work.

O. Provide waterstop plate/anchor flange for piping, ducts, castings and sleeves cast-in-place in concrete. 1. For fabricated units, weld plate to sleeve, pipe, or ductwork. 2. For commercial castings, cast water stop/anchor with wall pipe. 3. Plate is to be same thickness as sleeve, pipe, casting or ductwork. 4. For fabricated units, diameter of plate or flange to be 4 IN larger than outside

diameter of sleeve, pipe or ductwork. 5. For commercial castings, waterstop/anchor size to be manufacturer standard. 6. Provide continuous around entire circumference of sleeve, pipe, or ductwork.

P. Where area is blocked out to receive sheet metal sleeve at later date: 1. If blockout size is sufficient to allow placement, utilize dowels for interface of initially

placed concrete and sleeve encasement concrete which is placed later. a. Size blockout based on sleeve size required plus 4 to 6 IN each side of sleeve

for concrete encasement. b. Provide #4 dowels at 12 IN spacing along each side of blockout with minimum of

two dowels required per side. 2. If blockout size is not sufficient to allow placement of dowels, provide keyway along

all sides of blockout. a. Size blockout based on sleeve size required plus 2 to 4 IN each side of sleeve

for concrete encasement.

Q. For interior wall applications where backer rod and sealant are specified, provide backer rod and sealant at each side of wall.

R. Use full depth expanding foam sealant for seal applications into hazardous areas and applications where multiple pipes, conduits, etc. pass through single sleeve. Use full depth compressible sealant for applications involving single components passing through sleeves and for penetrations into non hazardous area.

S. Do not make duct or conduit penetrations below high water levels when entering or leaving tankage, wet wells, or other water holding structures.

T. Modular Mechanical Seals: 1. Utilize one seal for concrete thickness less than 8 IN and two seals for concrete, 8

IN thick or greater. 2. Utilize two seals for piping 16 IN diameter and larger if concrete thickness permits. 3. Install seals such that bolt heads are located on the most accessible side of the

penetration.

U. Backer Rod and Sealant: 1. Install in accordance with Section 07900.


2. Provide backer rod and sealant for modular mechanical seal applications. Apply on top side of slab penetrations and on interior, dry side wall penetrations.

3.2 SCHEDULES

A. General Schedule of Penetrations through Floors, Roofs, Foundation Base Slabs, Foundation Walls, Foundation Footings, Partitions and Walls for Ductwork, Piping, and Conduit: 1. Provide the following opening and penetration types:

a. Type A - Block out 2 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct, pipe, or conduits.

b. Type B - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve.

c. Type C - Fabricated sheet metal sleeve or pipe sleeve cast-in-place. Provide pipe sleeve with water ring for wet and/or washdown areas.

d. Type D - Commercial type casting or fabrication. e. Type E - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast

pipe, duct or conduit spools. f. Type F - Integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit. g. Type G - Saw cut or line-drill and remove area 1 IN larger than outside

dimensions of duct, pipe or conduit. h. Type H - Core drill. i. Type I - Block out area. At later date, place new concrete with integrally cast

sheet metal or pipe sleeve. 2. Provide seals of material and method described as follows.

a. Category 1 - Modular Mechanical Seal. b. Category 2 - Roof curb and flashing according to SMACNA specifications unless

otherwise noted on Drawings. Refer to Section 07600 and roofing specification sections for additional requirements.

c. Category 3 - 12 GA sheet metal drip sleeve set in bed of silicon sealant with backing rod and sealant used in sleeve annullus.

d. Category 4 - Backer rod and sealant. e. Category 5 - Full depth compressible sealant with escutcheons on both sides of

opening. f. Category 6 - Full depth compressible sealant and flanges on both sides of

opening. Flanges constructed of same material as duct, fastened to duct and minimum 1/2 IN larger than opening.

g. Category 7 - Full depth compressible sealant and finish sealant or full depth expanding foam sealant depending on application.

3. Furnish openings and sealing materials through new floors, roofs, partitions and walls in accordance with Schedule A, Openings and Penetrations for New Construction.

4. Furnish openings and sealing materials through existing floors, roofs, partitions and walls in accordance with Schedule B, Openings and Penetrations for Existing Construction.


SCHEDULE A. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION

DUCTS PIPING CONDUIT

APPLICATIONS OPENING

TYPE SEAL

CATEGORY OPENING

TYPE SEAL

CATEGORY OPENING

TYPE SEAL

CATEGORY Through floors with bottom side a hazardous location

C F I

7 Not Req

7

D F

I (1)

Not Req Not Req

7

C F

7 Not Req

Through floors on grade above water table

C F I

4 Not Req

4

C F

I (1)

7 Not Req

7

C F

I (1)

4 Not Req

7

Through slab on grade below water table

F Not Req F Not Req F Not Req

Through floors in washdown areas

C I

4 4

C H (2) I (1)

4 3 4

F H (2) I (1)

Not Req 3 7

Through walls where one side is a hazardous area

C F I

7 Not Req

7

D F

I (1)

Not Req Not Req

7

C F

7 Not Req

Through exterior wall below grade above water table

C F I

7 Not Req

7

C D F

I (1)

1 Not Req Not Req

1

F I (1)

Not Req 7

Through wall from tankage or wet well (above high water level) to dry well or dry area

C F I

7 Not Req

7

C D F

H (2)

1 Not Req Not Req

1

C F

H (2) I (1)

7 Not Req

7 7

Through wall from tankage or wet well (below high water level) to dry well or dry area

F Not Req F Not Req F Not Req

Through exterior wall above grade

A B C

6 6 6

A B D

H (2)

5 5

Not Req 5

C H (2)

5 4

Roof penetrations A 2 A 2 A 2

Through interior walls and slabs not covered by the above applications

A C

4 4

A C

4 4

A C F

4 4

Not Req

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02072 DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition, cutting and patching of existing construction where shown on Drawings,

or as required to accommodate new work shown or specified.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03348 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Indicating manufacturer and type of:

a. Proposed nonshrink grout. b. Epoxy bonding adhesive. c. Proposed materials and methods to be used for matching and repairing existing

construction.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: 1. Salvage items, designated for Owner's salvage, as a functional unit. 2. Clean, list and tag for storage. 3. Protect from damage and deliver to location designated. 4. Salvage each item with auxiliary or associated equipment required for operation.


A. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of work.


A. Coordinate and reschedule work as required to preclude interference with other operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Nonshrink grout:

a. Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill. b. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders. c. Sika Grout 212 by Sika.

2. Epoxy bonding adhesive: a. Euco No.452 MV by Euclid Chemical Co.


b. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation.

B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Special Conditions.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Temporary Partitions: 1. Plywood: 1/2 IN minimum for interior or exterior use. 2. Paneling: 1/4 IN minimum for interior use.

B. Nonshrink Grout: 1. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive and nonstaining. 2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions at jobsite. 3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. Mass expansion not to be

created by gas liberation or by other means. 4. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days to be 6500 psi. 5. Coat exposed edges of grout with a cure/seal compound recommended by grout

manufacturer.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: 1. Two component, moisture insensitive adhesive manufactured for the purpose of

bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary partitions as required in public areas. 1. Construct partitions of braced plywood in exterior areas. 2. Adequately braced paneling may be used in interior areas.

B. Provide covered passageways where necessary to ensure safe passage of persons in or near areas of work.

C. Provide substantial barricades and safety lights as required.

D. Provide temporary dustproof partitions where indicated or necessary. 1. Prevent infiltration of dust into occupied areas.

E. Provide temporary weather protection as necessary.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Cutting and Removal: 1. Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for installation of

new work. 2. Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to receive new work. 3. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections.

B. Modification of Existing Concrete: 1. Where indicated, remove existing concrete and finish remaining surfaces as

specified in Section 03348. a. Protect remaining concrete from damage. b. Make openings by sawing through the existing concrete. c. Concrete may be broken out after initial saw cuts in the event concrete

thickness prevents cutting through. d. Where sawing is not possible, make openings by drilling holes around perimeter

of opening and then chipping out the concrete. 1) Holes shall be sufficient in number to prevent damage to remaining

concrete.


2. Oversize required openings in existing concrete 1 IN on all sides and build back to required opening size by means of nonshrink grout epoxy bonded to the existing concrete.

3. Where oversized openings cannot be made, remove the concrete to the required opening size and cut back exposed reinforcing 1 IN from face of concrete and fill resulting holes with nonshrink grout.

C. Removal of Existing Anchor Bolts or Other Protruding Elements: 1. Removal within a distance of 8 FT above finished floor or operating level elevation. 2. Removed to a depth of 1/2 IN from finished surface. 3. Fill void with non-shrink grout.

D. Matching and Patching: 1. Walls, ceilings, floors or partitions:

a. Repair abutting walls, ceilings, floors or partitions disturbed by removal. b. Match and patch existing construction disturbed during installation of new work.

2. Methods and materials: a. Similar in appearance, and equal in quality to adjacent areas for areas or

surfaces being repaired. b. Subject to review of Engineer.

E. Salvaged Items: 1. Thoroughly dry and clean all metal surfaces. 2. Prime all bare metal in accordance with Section 09905. 3. Clean and lubricate motors and other moving parts. 4. Brace motors attached to flexible mountings until reinstallation. 5. Dispose of items or materials not designated for Owner's salvage or reuse. Promptly

remove from site. 6. Do not store or sell Contractor salvaged items or materials on site.

F. Clean Up: 1. Transport debris and legally dispose of off site.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Site clearing, tree protection, stripping topsoil and demolition.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 4. Section 02260 - Topsoiling and Finished Grading. 5. Section 02270 - Soil Erosion and Sediment Control.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect existing trees and other vegetation to remain against damage. 1. Do not smother trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials

within drip line. 2. Avoid foot or vehicular traffic or parking of vehicles within drip line. 3. Provide temporary protection as required.

B. Repair or replace trees and vegetation damaged by construction operations. 1. Repair to be performed by a qualified tree surgeon. 2. Remove trees which cannot be repaired and restore to full-growth status. 3. Replace with new trees of minimum 4 IN caliper.

C. Owner will obtain authority for removal and alteration work on adjoining property.

3.2 SITE CLEARING

A. Topsoil Removal: 1. Strip topsoil to depths encountered.

a. Remove heavy growths of grass before stripping. b. Stop topsoil stripping sufficient distance from such trees to prevent damage to

main root system. c. Separate from underlying subsoil or objectionable material.

2. Stockpile topsoil where directed by Engineer. a. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. b. Seed or cover storage piles to prevent erosion.

3. Do not strip topsoil in wooded areas where no change in grade occurs. 4. Borrow topsoil: Reasonably free of subsoil, objects over 2 IN DIA, weeds and roots.

B. Clearing and Grubbing: 1. Clear from within limits of construction all trees not marked to remain.

a. Include shrubs, brush, downed timber, rotten wood, heavy growth of grass and weeds, vines, rubbish, structures and debris.

2. Grub (remove) from within limits of construction all stumps, roots, root mats, logs and debris encountered.


a. Totally grub under areas to be paved. b. Grubbing in lawn areas:

1) In cut areas, totally grub. 2) In fill areas, where fill is less than 3 FT totally grub ground. 3) Where fill is 3 FT or more in depth, stumps may be left no higher than 6 IN

above existing ground surface.

C. Disposal of Waste Materials: 1. Do not burn combustible materials on site. 2. Remove all waste materials from site. 3. Do not bury organic matter on site.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon completion of the site clearing, obtain Engineer's acceptance of the extent of clearing, depth of stripping and rough grade.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02140 DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Responsibilities and execution for dewatering of excavations for structures and

pipelines. 2. The need for dewatering shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with

the Contract Documents.

B. Related Sections include but not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 – General Requirements. 3. Division 2 – Site Work.


A. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The Contractor shall employ a specialty dewatering subcontractor with experience in

the field of dewatering system design, installation, operation, and maintenance. The Contractor shall document successful completion of at least five (5) projects in soils and ground water conditions similar to the project.

2. The Contractor’s dewatering system shall be designed by a Colorado Licensed Engineer experienced in the design, installation, and operation of dewatering systems. The design shall acknowledge the type of excavation and support system proposed for the project.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Dewatering consists of the design, furnishing, installation, operation, maintenance, monitoring, reporting, and removal of a dewatering system(s) to achieve completion of all work performed under this Contract without damage to adjacent improvements and materials.

B. The Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain groundwater control systems for the construction of the Project. The groundwater control systems shall be adequate to keep excavations free from water and in a hydrostatically-controlled condition during construction, and shall dewater and dispose of the water so as not to cause injury to public or private property, cause a nuisance or a menace to the public, or adversely impact the water quality of the local watershed.

C. During all subsurface work, Contractor shall keep excavation free of water and control surface runoff so as to prevent entry or collection of water in excavations or in other isolated areas of the site. The dewatering system shall include any deep wells, wellpoints, sumps, and other equipment, appurtenances, and related earthwork necessary to perform the function.

D. Before installation of dewatering systems, Contractor shall submit the method, installation and details of the dewatering system proposed to be used to the Engineer for review.


E. Review by the Engineer of the method, installation, and operation and maintenance details submitted by the Contractor shall not in any way relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for errors therein or from the entire responsibility for complete and adequate design and performance of the system in controlling the water level and hydrostatic pressures in excavated areas. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper design, installation, proper operation, maintenance, and any failure of any component of the dewatering system for this Contract.

F. Direct point discharges from dewatering operations to the local watershed are prohibited. After appropriate SW3P treatment, the water may be released through SW3P features to the local storm drain system.

G. The selection of dewatering wells, sumps, subsurface drains, and the configuration of dewatering systems shall be a Contractor responsibility. Provisions described in this specification shall govern the performance aspects of the dewatering systems designed and selected by the Contractor. The need for and details of the dewatering system(s) shall not be grounds for an increase in the Bid Price.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300.

B. Drawings and complete design data showing methods and equipment proposed to be utilized in dewatering.

C. As a minimum, submit the following for each dewatering system utilized: 1. Drawings indicating the location and size of deep wells, observation wells,

wellpoints, sumps, vacuum headers, flow rate meters, discharge lines, means to clarify discharge water before it reaches adjacent creeks, and any other groundwater control system component.

2. Capacities and details of pumps, prime movers, and standby equipment. 3. Detailed description of the dewatering schedule, operation, maintenance and well

abandonment procedures, if wells are used. 4. Projected drawdown in wells with elevations, if wells are used. 5. Plan view drawing indicating estimated zone of influence with groundwater

elevations, if wells are used. 6. Detailed description of methods for controlling settlement of existing utilities and

structures. 7. Estimated dewatering system discharge flow rate.

D. Coordinate and submit dewatering plan concurrent with submittals specified in Section 02165.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Sumps: 1. The Contractor shall size sumps such that they maintain excavations in a dewatered

condition. 2. Contractor shall size sump pumps and all piping to remove all anticipated

groundwater and stormwater runoff. 3. Sumps shall handle any leakage through the temporary shoring walls.

B. Standby Equipment: 1. Maintain on site sufficient equipment and materials for necessary modifications and

to ensure continuous and successful operation of the dewatering and monitoring systems.


C. Dewatering Effluent Piping: 1. PVC pressure rated pipe.

a. ASTM 2241 or ASTM D1785 Schedule 40.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General: 1. Contractor shall maintain dewatering system such that it is in continuous operation

without any interruptions. 2. Dewatering water shall not be discharged directly into surface water bodies. The

Contractor shall provide at a minimum a sediment/clarification basin before allowing water to flow overland to adjacent creeks or the local storm drain system. The Contractor shall submit location, size and layout of basin for review.

3. Supply a separate electrical service for dewatering and dedicate it solely to the operation of the dewatering systems.

4. Maintain water levels a minimum of 2 feet below the bottom of all excavations at all times and under all conditions.

5. Keep excavations free of water during excavation, construction of structures, installation of pipelines, placing of materials described in Section 02200.

6. Control runoff from groundwater seeps so as to prevent entry or collection of water in excavations or in other isolated areas of the site.

7. The dewatering system will include any sumps, deep wells, well points, pumps, and other equipment, appurtenances, and related earthwork necessary to perform the function.

8. Design and operate dewatering systems so as to prevent removal of the natural soils.

9. Do not start dewatering prior to the Engineer’s review and acceptance of the method, installation, and details of the proposed dewatering system.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sumps: 1. Construct sumps to maintain excavations in a dewatered condition.

B. Well development: 1. Develop all wells and wellpoints after installation to remove fines from drilling and

construction activities.

C. Dewatering system protection and dewatering effluent pipelines: 1. Protect all dewatering wells throughout construction. 2. Wells and dewatering effluent pipelines damaged during the construction shall be

reinstalled and redeveloped at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Maintain excavations in a dewatered condition continuously and without interruptions: 1. Dewatering will be a continuous operation. 2. Do not shut down dewatering systems between shifts, on holidays, or weekends, or

during work stoppage without written permission from the Engineer.


A. General: 1. Monitor dewatering effluent daily for visual signs of contamination.

B. Dewatering Wells: 1. Record and make available to the Engineer on a daily basis:

a. The location and number of dewatering wells and sump pumps in operation. b. Total flow indicated on the flow meters.


c. The rate of flow at the time of the recording. 2. Consistency is an important factor in ensuring that water level data are accurate;

therefore, assign and make known to the Engineer specific member(s) of workforce responsible for collecting and reporting the required information.

C. Perform any additional testing or monitoring as necessary to assure provision of a properly functioning dewatering system.

3.4 DEMOBILIZATION

A. Upon written authorization of the Engineer, remove all dewatering system elements with the exception of those observation wells so designated by the Engineer

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02165 CONTRACTOR DESIGNED EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for excavation support systems such as sheeting, shoring, and

bracing of trenches, and open excavations greater than 4 feet in depth.

B. Related Sections include but not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 – General Requirements. 3. Division 2 – Site Work.


A. Referenced Standards: This section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following documents. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and that of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail: 1. ASTM A36, Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A328, Steel Sheet Piling. 3. ASTM A572, Structural Steel. 4. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code. 5. OHSA, Occupational Safety and Health Act. 6. IBC, International Building Code, 2006 Edition with all local amendments.

B. Support of excavation shall be designed, and shop drawings signed and stamped, by a Structural Engineer, licensed to practice in the State of Colorado and experienced in the design of excavation support systems.

C. The excavation support system shall be installed by a qualified subcontractor with at least 5 years experience installing similar systems or the prime contractor if prime contractor meets the same requirements for sub-contractor.


A. Where excavation support systems are necessary, they shall be furnished, placed, maintained and, except as shown or specified otherwise, removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and selection of methods for areas shown on the Drawings and in conformance with OSHA and the design criteria as specified herein. Note that on the Drawings, the reference to “Vertical Slope Restraint” shall be considered interchangeable with the term “Excavation Support System” used in these specifications.

B. Excavation Support Systems description: 1. Design requirements:

a. The design, planning, installation, and removal, if required, of all sheeting, shoring, soil-nailing, H piles, lagging and bracing and laying back slopes shall be accomplished in such a manner as to maintain the required excavation for structures and pipeline construction and to maintain the undisturbed state of the soils below and adjacent to the excavation.

b. The method of support shall be selected by the Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01300: Submittals.

B. Prior to commencing excavation work requiring excavation support systems such as sheeting, shoring, and bracing, the Contractor shall submit its plans for excavation support systems to the Engineer for review. No excavations shall be started until the submittal review of the excavation support system is complete. Said review by the Engineer of the Contractor’s design shall not be construed as a detailed analysis for adequacy of the support system, nor shall any provision of the above requirements be construed as relieving the Contractor of its overall responsibility and liability for the work. Information to be provided shall be made in accordance with these Contract Documents and shall include the following: 1. Method of installation and removal of all sheeting, sheet piling, soldier piles, shoring

and bracing. Design shall be performed by a licensed Colorado Professional Engineer and shall comply with applicable requirements of the Building Code and OSHA with respect to excavation and construction.

C. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01300. 1. The proposed excavation support system for each construction component where

excavation support systems will be used. 2. Arrangement, size, and details for each excavation support system, and

construction methods to be used for the installation of each system. 3. Pile installation methods, sequence connection details, bracing preloading. 4. Depths below the main excavation bottom elevation to which the support system will

be installed. 5. Elevations of ground surface, struts, and shores, as applicable. 6. Permissible depth to which excavation may be carried before supports must be

installed and preloaded. 7. Full excavation depth load to be carried by various excavation support system

members. 8. Preloads as required. 9. Proposed sequence of strut and shore removal as applicable and as related to

backfilling operations. 10. Dewatering. 11. Predrilling, if required.

D. The above shop drawings shall be coordinated by the Contractor with other shop drawing submittals for work specified elsewhere in which support of excavation is required.

E. Contingency plan for alternative procedures to be implemented if the excavation support system is found to perform unfavorably or if obstructions are encountered driving.

1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Shop drawings for the various excavation support systems shall be prepared in accordance with the following criteria: 1. Design the excavation support system and all components to support the earth

pressures, unrelieved hydrostatic pressures, utility loads, equipment, traffic, and construction loads including impact, and other surcharge loads in such manner as will allow the safe and expeditious construction of the permanent structures to minimize ground movement or settlement, and to prevent damage to or movement of adjacent structures, access drives, and utilities. Design for loads appropriate for conditions presented in the geotechnical report.

2. Design support members to resist the maximum loads expected to occur during the excavation and support removal stages.


3. In running sand and silt and gravel, provide dewatering and positive means for securing timber lagging to the soldier piles to prevent shifting or falling off of the lagging, and positive means for preventing sloughing and containing material behind lagging.

4. No portion of the excavation support system’s vertical face will be permitted to penetrate the design lines as indicated on the Drawings for the permanent structures or utilities to be constructed within the excavation.

5. Vertical support capacity shall be provided for wall systems and internal bracing elements, for loads due to vertical force components of tieback anchors, the weight of the structural system themselves, and live load on any portion of the system.


A. Provisions shall be made for contingencies as follows: 1. Provide contingency plan for alternative procedures to be implemented if

unfavorable performance is evidenced. 2. Keep on hand materials and equipment necessary to implement contingency plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel sheet piling shall be of appropriate weight and length.

B. Fabricated connections, walers, and accessories, steel H-piles, W shapes, and other structural steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 as noted. Unless otherwise approved, conform to Sections 05505 and 05120.

C. Wood Lagging: Untreated hardwood of sufficient thickness as required by design.

D. Pile Driving Hammer: Vibratory and/or impact type hammer of sufficient size for installations capable of consistently delivering driving energy to the pile.

E. Other Engineered system may be used with materials as required by the engineered design that are consistent with all other contract requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The construction excavation support systems such as of sheeting, shoring, soldier piles and bracing shall not disturb the state of soil adjacent to the trench or excavation and below the excavation bottom. Sheeting, shoring, soldier piles and bracing shall be removed after placement and compaction of initial backfill, except as noted otherwise.

B. Damage to existing utilities during installation of excavation support system shall be avoided. If damage occurs, it shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner, and to the satisfaction of the utility owner.

C. Water control measures shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02140.

D. Shoring shall extend below the planned bottom of excavation or measures shall be implemented to provide support and retention of the excavation below the shoring.

3.2 SOLDIER PILES

A. Soldier piles shall be installed by necessary methods to tip elevation shown on approved shop drawings.


B. Prebored holes shall be filled with a low strength grout mix designed by the Contractor.

3.3 SHEETING AND WOOD LAGGING

A. Sheeting and wood lagging shall be installed in such a manner as to minimize the gap between the boards, unless specifically approved. As installation progresses, the voids between the excavation face and the lagging or sheeting shall be backfilled with sand or geotextile and sand rammed into place. Materials such as geotextile shall be used where necessary to allow drainage of groundwater without loss of soil or packing material.

B. If unstable material is encountered, suitable measures shall be taken to retain it in place or to otherwise prevent soil displacement.

C. Extend lagging down to final subgrade.

D. A sufficient quantity of material shall be on hand for sheeting, shoring, bracing, and other operations for protection of work and for use in case of emergency.

3.4 STEEL SHEET PILING

A. Steel sheet piling shall not impact adjacent utilities, and structures. Installation methods shall be adapted to existing subsurface conditions and for installation of sheet piling to the full depth of penetration required, and to proper alignment and plumbness, specified herein, without damage to the sheet piling or rupture of its interlocks.

B. Steel sheet piling shall be installed in plumb position with each pile interlocked with adjoining piles for its entire length so as to form a continuous diaphragm throughout the length of each run of wall, bearing tightly against original ground. Install sheeting to depth required for design. Exercise care during installation so that interlocking members can be extracted without injury to adjacent ground. The installation equipment shall be suitable to the type and nature of the subsurface materials anticipated to be encountered. The equipment, the methods of installation, cutting, and splicing shall conform to the approved shop drawings.

C. See Section 02361.

3.5 OBSTRUCTIONS DURING DRIVING

A. If driving obstructions are encountered, special provisions approved by the Engineer should be taken to prevent pile damage and achieve the Contractors design tip elevations. Obstructions may consist of a sudden increase in penetration resistance and lateral deviation in the horizontal position of the sheet pile resulting from hitting an obstruction such as a boulder.

B. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether an obstruction is encountered and will confer with the Contractor to select remedial course of action.

3.6 INTERNAL BRACING SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. All bracing support members shall be installed and maintained in tight continuous contact with each other and with the surface being supported.

B. Bracing members shall be preloaded as necessary in accordance with the design.

C. Struts shall be provided with intermediate bracing as needed to enable them to carry their maximum design load without distortion or buckling. Provide diagonal bracing as necessary to maintain the stability of the system. Web stiffeners, plates, or angles shall be provided as needed to prevent rotation, crippling, or buckling of connectors at points of bearing between structural steel members. Allow for eccentricities resulting from field fabrication and assembly.


3.7 SOIL-NAILED WALLS AND SHOTCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION

A. Comply with Section 02364.

3.8 INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING

A. Shoring Wall Monitoring: 1. The Contractor shall establish horizontal control survey points (movement

measurement points) on the tops of soldier piles, sheet piles, and soil-nailed walls at a spacing not greater than 20 feet horizontal spacing on all sides of the excavation shoring system.

2. Perform at least two initial baseline surveys on different days of horizontal position of the shoring to an accuracy of 0.01 foot.

3. On a weekly basis until backfilling is complete perform survey measurements and submit to the Engineer/Owner.

3.9 REMOVAL OF SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Where removal is required, wholly or in part, such removal shall be performed in a manner that will not disturb or damage adjacent new or existing construction or utilities. Fill all voids immediately with materials and procedures approved by the Engineer.

B. Support systems for excavations that will have structures or pipes installed in future work shall remain in place.

C. All damage to property resulting from removal shall be promptly repaired at no cost to the Owner. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the extent and determination of the materials and methods for repair.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Earthwork.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02140 - Dewatering. 4. Section 02165 - Contractor Designed Excavation Support Systems. 5. Section 07190 - Under Slab Vapor Retarder.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. D698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3). c. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3(2,700 kN-m/m)). d. D2487, Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil

Classification System). e. D3786, Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted Goods and

Nonwoven Fabrics: Diaphragm. f. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a

Vibratory Table. g. D4254, Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of

Relative Density. h. D4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of

Geotextiles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Product technical data including:

a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.

b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certifications. 4. Test reports:

a. Soils inspection and testing results.

B. Samples: 1. Submit samples and source of fill and backfill materials proposed for use. 2. Submit samples and source of borrow materials proposed for use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fill and Backfill: Selected material approved by Soils Engineer from site excavation or from off site borrow. 1. This material shall not be used for structural or non-expansive fill unless the material

satisfies the requirements for structural fill and is specifically approved by the Soils Engineer.

2. This material shall have a plasticity index less than 25 and a liquid limit not exceeding 40% free from organics, trash, rubble, or other deleterious materials, and shall have no particle size greater than 6 IN in diameter.

B. Structural Fill, non-expansive fill/backfill: 1. Material approved by Soils Engineer for placement below foundations, adjacent to

below-grade walls, and elsewhere as specified in the Contract Documents. 2. Suitable material shall have a plasticity index less than 18, a liquid limit not

exceeding 40%, free from organics, trash, rubble, or other deleterious materials, and shall have no particle size greater than 4 IN in diameter. a. Class 1 structural backfill per CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and

Bridge Construction shall be an acceptable material specification. 3. For bidding purposes, on-site excavated materials shall NOT be acceptable for use

as structural fill.

C. Granular Fill Under Slabs: ASTM C33 Grade 57/67 (or equivalent), chinked with pea gravel and sand to provide a stable and uniform surface; Class 5 ABC shall be permissible.

D. Drainage/Fill material: Conform to ASTM C33, Size No. 67.

E. Geotextile Filter Fabric: 1. Nonwoven type. 2. Equivalent opening size: 50-100 (U.S. Standard Sieve). 3. Permeability coefficient (cm/second): 0.07 minimum, 0.30 maximum. 4. Grab strength: 90 LBS minimum in either direction in accordance with ASTM D4632

requirements. 5. Mullen burst strength: 125 psi minimum in accordance with ASTM D3786

requirements.

F. Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 07190.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Protect existing surface and subsurface features on-site and adjacent to site as follows: 1. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent

damage to existing items indicated to remain in place. 2. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other established reference

points and property corners. a. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at own expense to full satisfaction of Owner

and controlling agency. 3. Verify location of utilities.

a. Omission or inclusion of utility items does not constitute non-existence or definite location.


b. Secure and examine local utility records for location data. c. Take necessary precautions to protect existing utilities from damage due to any

construction activity. d. Repair damages to utility items at own expense. e. In case of damage, notify Engineer at once so required protective measures

may be taken. 4. Maintain free of damage, existing sidewalks, structures, and pavement, not

indicated to be removed. a. Any item known or unknown or not properly located that is inadvertently

damaged shall be repaired to original condition. b. All repairs to be made and paid for by Contractor.

5. Provide full access to public and private premises, fire hydrants, street crossings, sidewalks and other points as designated by Owner to prevent serious interruption of travel.

6. Maintain stockpiles and excavations in such a manner to prevent inconvenience or damage to structures on-site or on adjoining property.

7. Avoid surcharge or excavation procedures which can result in heaving, caving, or slides.

B. Salvageable Items: Carefully remove items to be salvaged, and store on Owner's premises unless otherwise directed.

C. Dispose of waste materials, legally, off site. 1. Burning, as a means of waste disposal, is not permitted.

3.2 SITE EXCAVATION AND GRADING

A. The work includes all operations in connection with excavation, borrow, construction of fills and embankments, rough grading, and disposal of excess materials in connection with the preparation of the site(s) for construction of the proposed facilities.

B. Excavation and Grading: Perform as required by the Contract Drawings. 1. Contract Drawings may indicate both existing grade and finished grade required for

construction of Project. a. Stake all units, structures, piping, roads, parking areas and walks and establish

their elevations. b. Perform other layout work required. c. Replace property corner markers to original location if disturbed or destroyed.

2. Preparation of ground surface for embankments or fills: a. Before fill is started, scarify to a minimum depth of 6 IN in all proposed

embankment and fill areas. b. Where ground surface is steeper than one vertical to four horizontal, plow

surface in a manner to bench and break up surface so that fill material will bind with existing surface.

3. Protection of finish grade: a. During construction, shape and drain embankment and excavations. b. Maintain ditches and drains to provide drainage at all times. c. Protect graded areas against action of elements prior to acceptance of work. d. Reestablish grade where settlement or erosion occurs.

C. Borrow: 1. Provide necessary amount of approved fill compacted to density equal to that

indicated in this Specification. 2. Include cost of all borrow material in original proposal. 3. Fill material to be approved by Soils Engineer prior to placement.

D. Construct embankments and fills as required by the Contract Drawings: 1. Construct embankments and fills at locations and to lines of grade indicated.


a. Completed fill shall correspond to shape of typical cross section or contour indicated regardless of method used to show shape, size, and extent of line and grade of completed work.

2. Provide approved fill material which is free from roots, organic matter, trash, frozen material, and stones having maximum dimension greater than 6 IN. a. Ensure that stones larger than 4 IN are not placed in upper 6 IN of fill or

embankment. b. Do not place material in layers greater than 8 IN loose thickness. c. Place layers horizontally and compact each layer prior to placing additional fill.

3. Compact by sheepsfoot, pneumatic rollers, vibrators, or by other equipment as required to obtain specified density. a. Control moisture for each layer necessary to meet requirements of compaction.

3.3 ROCK EXCAVATION

A. All excavation shall be unclassified.

B. Use of explosives shall be prohibited unless subgrade material cannot be ripped with a CAT D-9 dozer with a single ripper tooth, and approval is obtained from Engineer and Owner for use of explosives.

C. The use of explosives, if required and approved, shall be limited to the magnitude and location of the charge that will not cause damage to adjacent existing construction and utilities through shock vibrations or other stress loadings. 1. Provide adequate blanket protection to ensure that there will not be fragments of

rock or other debris flying through the air when discharging explosives. 2. Contractor to employ personnel certified by the City of Thornton to execute blasting

operations if the city requires such certification. a. Any damage to existing construction or other features caused by blasting

operations to be repaired and paid for by Contractor. 3. Explosive permits shall be obtained from the City of Thornton as per City

requirements.

D. Where explosives and blasting are used, comply with all laws and ordinances of municipal, state and Federal agencies relating to the use of explosives. 1. Use qualified personnel for blasting and take proper precautions to protect persons,

property or the work from damage or injury from blast or explosion. 2. Conduct preblast survey in the company of the Engineer to aid in determining any

damage caused by blasting.


A. Include in bid price the cost of inspection services indicated herein as being performed by the Soils Engineer.

B. Moisture density relations, to be established by the Soils Engineer required for all materials to be compacted.

C. Extent of compaction testing will be as necessary to assure compliance with Specifications.

D. Give minimum of 24 HR advance notice to Soils Engineer when ready for compaction or subgrade testing and inspection.

E. Should any compaction density test or subgrade inspection fail to meet Specification requirements, perform corrective work as necessary.

F. Pay for all costs associated with corrective work and retesting resulting from failing compaction density tests.


3.5 COMPACTION DENSITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Obtain approval from Soils Engineer with regard to suitability of soils and acceptable subgrade prior to subsequent operations.

B. Provide dewatering system as necessary to successfully complete compaction and construction requirements. See specification 02140.

C. Remove frozen, loose, wet, or soft material and replace with approved material as directed by Soils Engineer.

D. Stabilize subgrade with well graded granular materials as directed by Soils Engineer.

E. Assure by results of testing that compaction densities comply with the following requirements: 1. Sitework:

LOCATION COMPACTION DENSITY Under Paved Areas, Sidewalks and Piping: Cohesive soils 100 percent per ASTM D698 Cohesionless soils 80 percent relative density per ASTM

D4253 and ASTM D4254 Unpaved Areas: Cohesive soils 95 percent of ASTM D698 Cohesionless soils 75 percent relative density per ASTM

D4253 and ASTM D4254

2. Structures: LOCATION COMPACTION DENSITY

Inside of structures under foundations, under equipment support pads, under slabs-on-grade and scarified existing subgrade under fill material

100 percent per ASTM D698

Outside structures next to walls and any other structure exterior member

95 percent per ASTM D698

3.6 EXCAVATION, FILLING, AND BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES

A. General: 1. In general, work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, excavation for structures

and below-grade, removal of underground obstructions and undesirable material, backfilling, filling, and fill, backfill, and subgrade compaction.

2. Obtain fill and backfill material necessary to produce grades required. a. Materials and source to be approved by Soils Engineer. b. Excavated material approved by Soils Engineer may also be used for general fill

and backfill, but not structural fill. 3. In this Section of the Specifications, the word "foundations" includes footings, base

slabs, foundation walls, mat foundations, grade beams, and any other support placed directly on soil.

4. In the paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications, the word "soil" also includes any type of rock subgrade that may be present at or below existing subgrade levels.

5. In Section 3.7 of this Specification, the terms fill/backfill shall also signify structural/non-expansive fills, as required for use in this Specification.

B. Excavation Requirements for Structures: 1. General:

a. Do not commence excavation for foundations for structures until Soils Engineer approves:


1) The removal of topsoil and other unsuitable and undesirable material from existing subgrade.

2) Density and moisture content of site area compacted fill material meets requirements of specifications.

3) Site surcharge or mass fill material can be removed from entire construction site or portion thereof.

4) Surcharge or mass fill material has been removed from construction area or portions thereof.

b. Engineer grants approval to begin excavations. 2. Dimensions:

a. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated or specified. b. Allow additional space as required for construction operations and inspection of

foundations. c. See Drawings for over-excavation requirements.

3. Removal of obstructions and undesirable materials in excavation includes, but is not necessarily limited to, removal of old foundations, existing construction, unsuitable subgrade soils, expansive type soils, over-excavation, and any other materials which may be concealed beneath present grade, as required to execute work indicated on Contract Drawings. a. If undesirable material and obstructions are encountered during excavation,

remove material and replace as directed by Soils Engineer. 4. Level off bottoms of excavations to receive foundations, floor slabs, equipment

support pads, or compacted fill. 5. Remove loose materials and bring excavations into approved condition to receive

concrete or fill material. a. Where compacted fill material must be placed to bring subgrade elevation up to

underside of construction, scarify existing subgrade upon which fill material is to be placed to a depth of 6 IN and then compact to density stated in this Specification Section before fill material can be placed thereon.

b. Do not carry excavations lower than shown for foundations and over-excavation, except as directed by Soils Engineer or Engineer.

6. Make excavations large enough for working space, forms, dampproofing, waterproofing, wall drainage systems, construction operations, and inspection.

7. Notify Soils Engineer and Engineer as soon as excavation is completed in order that subgrades may be inspected. a. Do not commence further construction until subgrade under compacted fill

material, under foundations, under floor slabs-on-grade, under equipment support pads, and under wall footings has been inspected and approved by the Soils Engineer as being free of undesirable material, being of compaction density required by this specification, and being capable of supporting the allowable foundation design bearing pressures and superimposed foundation, fill, and building loads to be placed thereon.

b. Soils Engineer shall be given the opportunity to inspect subgrade below fill material both prior to and after subgrade compaction.

c. Place fill material, foundations, wall footings, floor slabs-on-grade, and equipment support pads as soon as weather conditions permit after excavation is completed, inspected, and approved and after forms and reinforcing are inspected and approved.

d. Before concrete or fill material is placed, protect approved subgrade from becoming loose, wet, frozen, or soft due to weather, construction operations, or other reasons.

8. Dewatering: a. Where groundwater is or is expected to be encountered during excavation,

install a dewatering system to prevent softening and disturbance of subgrade below foundations and fill material, to allow foundations and fill material to be placed in the dry, and to maintain a stable excavation side slope.


b. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 2 FT below the bottom of any excavation.

c. Review soils investigation before beginning excavation and determine where groundwater is likely to be encountered during excavation.

d. Contractor shall employ dewatering specialist for selecting and operating dewatering system. See specification 02140.

e. Keep dewatering system in operation until dead load of structure exceeds possible buoyant uplift force on structure.

f. Dispose of groundwater to an area which will not interfere with construction operations or damage existing construction. 1) Install groundwater monitoring wells as necessary.

g. Shut off dewatering system at such a rate to prevent a quick upsurge of water that might weaken the subgrade.

9. Subgrade remediation: a. If subgrade under foundations, fill material, floor slabs-on-grade, or equipment

support pads is in a frozen, loose, wet, or soft condition before construction is placed thereon, remove frozen, loose, wet, or soft material and replace with approved compacted material as directed by Soils Engineer.

b. Provide compaction density of replacement material as stated in this specification section.

c. Loose, wet, or soft materials, when approved by Soils Engineer, may be remediated by a compacted working mat of well graded crushed stone.

d. Compact stone mat thoroughly into subgrade to avoid future migration of fines into the stone voids.

e. Remove and replace frozen materials as directed by Soils Engineer. f. Method of remediation shall be performed as directed by Soils Engineer. g. Do not place further construction on the repaired subgrades, until the subgrades

have been approved by the Soils Engineer. 10. Do not place floor slabs-on-grade including equipment support pads until subgrade

below has been approved, piping has been tested and approved, reinforcement placement has been approved, and Contractor receives approval to commence slab construction. a. Do not place building floor slabs-on-grade including equipment support pads

when temperature of air surrounding the slab and pads is or is expected to be below 40 DegF before structure is completed and heated to a temperature of at least 50 DegF.

11. Protection of structures: a. Prevent new and existing structures from becoming damaged due to

construction operations or other reasons. b. Prevent subgrade under new and existing foundations from becoming wet and

undermined during construction due to presence of surface or subsurface water or due to construction operations.

12. Shoring: a. Shore, sheet pile, slope, or brace excavations as required to prevent them from

collapsing. b. Remove shoring as backfilling progresses but only when banks are stable and

safe from caving or collapse. c. All earthwork shoring shall be designed and maintained by the Contractor, see

specification 02165. 13. Drainage:

a. Control grading around structures so that ground is pitched to prevent water from running into excavated areas or damaging structures.

b. Maintain excavations where foundations, floor slabs, equipment support pads or fill material are to be placed free of water.

c. Provide pumping required to keep excavated spaces clear of water during construction.


d. Should any water be encountered in the excavation, notify Engineer and Soils Engineer.

e. Provide free discharge of water by trenches, pumps, wells, well points, or other means as necessary and drain to point of disposal that will not damage existing or new construction or interfere with construction operations.

14. Frost protection: a. Do not place foundations, slabs-on-grade, equipment support pads, or fill

material on frozen ground. b. When freezing temperatures may be expected, do not excavate to full depth

indicated, unless foundations, floor slabs, equipment support pads, or fill material can be placed immediately after excavation has been completed and approved.

c. Protect excavation from frost if placing of concrete or fill is delayed. d. Where a concrete slab is a base slab-on-grade located under and within a

structure that will not be heated, protect subgrade under the slab from becoming frozen until final acceptance of the Project by the Owner.

e. Protect subgrade under foundations of a structure from becoming frozen until structure is completed and heated to a temperature of at least 50 DegF.

C. Fill and Backfill Inside of Structure and Below Foundations, Base Slabs, Floor Slabs, Equipment Support Pads and Piping: 1. General:

a. Subgrade to receive fill or backfill shall be free of undesirable material as determined by Soils Engineer and scarified to a depth of 6 IN and compacted to density specified herein.

b. Surface may be stepped by at not more than 12 IN per step or may be sloped at not more than 2 percent.

c. Do not place any fill or backfill material until subgrade under fill or backfill has been inspected and approved by Soils Engineer as being free of undesirable material and compacted to specified density.

2. Obtain approval of fill and backfill material and source from Soils Engineer prior to placing the material.

3. Vapor barrier: Install a continuous vapor barrier under the electrical room as required by Section 07190 and shown on Contract Drawings.

4. Fill and backfill placement: a. Prior to placing fill and backfill material, optimum moisture and maximum density

properties for proposed material shall be obtained from Soils Engineer. b. Place fill and backfill material in thin lifts as necessary to obtain required

compaction density. c. Compact material by means of equipment of sufficient size and proper type to

obtain specified density. d. Use hand operated equipment for filling and backfilling next to walls. e. Do not place fill and backfill when the temperature is less than 40 DegF and

when subgrade to receive fill and backfill material is frozen, wet, loose, or soft. f. Use vibratory equipment to compact granular material; do not use water.

5. Where fill material is required below foundations, place fill material, conforming to the required density and moisture content, outside the exterior limits of foundations located around perimeter of structure the following horizontal distance whichever is greater: a. As required to provide fill material to indicated finished grade. b. Minimum 5 FT depth, or as indicated on the Drawings. c. Distance equal to depth of compacted fill below bottom of foundations. d. As directed by Soils Engineer.

D. Filling and Backfilling Outside of Structures. 1. This paragraph of this Specification applies to fill and backfill placed outside of

structures above bottom level of both foundations and piping but not under paving.


2. Provide material as approved by Soils Engineer for filling and backfilling outside of structures.

3. Fill and backfill placement: a. Prior to placing fill and backfill material, obtain optimum moisture and maximum

density properties for proposed material from Soils Engineer. b. Place fill and backfill material in thin lifts as necessary to obtain required

compaction density. c. Compact material with equipment of proper type and size to obtain density

specified. d. Use only hand operated equipment for filling and backfilling next to walls and

retaining walls. e. Do not place fill or backfill material when temperature is less than 40 DegF and

when subgrade to receive material is frozen, wet, loose, or soft. f. Use vibratory equipment for compacting granular material; do not use water.

4. Backfilling against walls: a. Do not backfill around any part of structures until each part has reached

specified 28-day compressive strength and backfill material has been approved. b. Do not start backfilling until concrete forms have been removed, trash removed

from excavations, pointing of masonry work, concrete finishing, dampproofing, waterproofing, and wall drainage systems have been completed.

c. Bring backfill and fill up uniformly around the structures and individual walls, piers, or columns.

d. See Drawings for non-expansive fill requirements adjacent to below-grade walls.

E. Backfilling Outside of Structures Under Piping or Paving: 1. When backfilling outside of structures requires placing backfill material under piping

or paving, the material shall be placed from bottom of excavation to underside of piping or paving at the density required for fill under piping or paving as indicated in this Section.

2. This compacted material shall extend transversely to the centerline of piping or paving a horizontal distance each side of the exterior edges of piping or paving equal to the depth of backfill measured from bottom of excavation to underside of piping or paving.

3. Provide special compacted bedding or compacted subgrade material under piping or paving as required by other sections of these Specifications.

3.7 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Erosion Control: 1. Conduct work to minimize erosion of site. 2. Construct stilling areas to settle and detain eroded material. 3. Remove eroded material washed off site. 4. Clean streets daily of any spillage of dirt, rocks or debris from equipment entering or

leaving site.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Excavation, trenching, backfilling and compacting for all underground utilities.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 4. Soil erosion and sediment control. 5. Section 02515 - Precast Concrete Manhole Structures. 6. Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements. 7. Pipe: Ductile.



a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). c. D1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). d. D2487, Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil

Classification System). e. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of

Soils Using a Vibratory Table. f. D4254, Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of

Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.

B. Qualifications: Hire an independent soils laboratory to conduct in-place moisture-density tests for backfilling to assure that all work complies with this Specification. 1. Registered professional engineer licensed in Colorado for design of trench shoring

systems or other trench safety plans.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation: All excavation will be defined as unclassified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Submit respective pipe or conduit manufacturer's data regarding bedding methods

of installation and general recommendations.


4. Submit sieve analysis reports on all granular materials.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Trench shield (trench box) certification if employed:

a. Specific to Project conditions. b. Re-certified if members become distressed. c. Certification by registered professional structural engineer, registered in the

state where the Project is located. d. Engineer is not responsible to, and will not, review and approve.


A. Avoid overloading or surcharge a sufficient distance back from edge of excavation to prevent slides or caving. 1. Maintain and trim excavated materials in such manner to be as little inconvenience

as possible to public and adjoining property owners.

B. Provide full access to public and private premises and fire hydrants, at street crossings, sidewalks and other points as designated by Owner to prevent serious interruption of travel.

C. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other established points and reference points and if disturbed or destroyed, replace items to full satisfaction of Owner and controlling agency.

D. Verify location of existing underground utilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Backfill Material: 1. As approved by Engineer.

a. Free of rock cobbles, roots, sod or other organic matter, and frozen material. b. Moisture content at time of placement: 3 percent plus/minus of optimum

moisture content as specified in accordance with ASTM D698 and ASTM D155 to the extent that it is applicable.

2. Gravel trench backfill materials: a. Uniformly graded gravel defined below:

Sieve Size 3 IN 1 IN ¾ IN 3/8 IN No. 4 No. 20 Percent Passing by Weight 100 90 70 60 40 5

B. Subgrade Stabilization Materials: Provide subgrade stabilization material in accordance with Section 02210.

C. Bedding Materials: 1. As approved by the Soils Engineer. 2. Granular bedding materials:

a. ASTM C33, gradation 67 (3/4 IN to No. 4 sieve) defined below: Sieve Size 1 IN 3/4 IN 3/8 IN No. 4 No. 20 Percent Passing by Weight 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 0

1) Well-graded crushed stone. 2) Well graded crushed gravel.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Remove and dispose of unsuitable materials as directed by Soils Engineer to site provided by Contractor.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavation: Remove rock excavation, clay, silt, gravel, hard pan, loose shale, and loose stone as directed by Soils Engineer.

B. Excavation for Appurtenances: 1. 12 IN (minimum) clear distance between outer surface and embankment. 2. See Section 02200 for applicable requirements. 3. See Section 02515 for applicable requirements.

C. Groundwater Dewatering: 1. Where groundwater is, or is expected to be, encountered during excavation, install a

dewatering system to prevent softening and disturbance of subgrade to allow subgrade stabilization, pipe, bedding and backfill material to be placed in the dry, and to maintain a stable trench wall or side slope.

2. Groundwater shall be drawn down and maintained at least 3 FT below the bottom of any trench or manhole excavation prior to excavation.

3. Review soils investigation before beginning excavation and determine where groundwater is likely to be encountered during excavation. a. Employ dewatering specialist for selecting and operating dewatering system.

4. Keep dewatering system in operation until dead load of pipe, structure and backfill exceeds possible buoyant uplift force on pipe or structure.

5. Dispose of groundwater to an area which will not interfere with construction operations or damage existing construction.

6. Install groundwater monitoring wells as necessary. 7. Shut off dewatering system at such a rate to prevent a quick upsurge of water that

might weaken the subgrade. 8. Cost of groundwater dewatering shall be included in the lineal foot unit price of the

pipe installation.

D. Trench Excavation: 1. Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth shown on Drawings and necessary

to accommodate work. a. Support existing utility lines where proposed work crosses at a lower elevation.

1) Stabilize excavation to prevent undermining of existing utility. 2. Open trench outside buildings, units, and structures:

a. No more than the distance between two manholes, structures, units, or 300 LF, whichever is less.

b. Field adjust limitations as weather conditions dictate. 3. Trenching within buildings, units, or structures:

a. No more than 100 LF at any one time. 4. Any trench or portion of trench, which is opened and remains idle for 7 calendar

days, or longer, as determined by the Owner, may be directed to be immediately refilled, without completion of work, at no additional cost to Owner. a. Said trench may not be reopened until Owner is satisfied that work associated

with trench will be prosecuted with dispatch. 5. Observe following trenching criteria:

a. Trench size: 1) Excavate width to accommodate free working space. 2) Maximum trench width at top of pipe or conduit may not exceed outside

diameter of utility service by more than the following dimensions:


OVERALL DIAMETER OF UTILITY SERVICE EXCESS DIMENSION

33 IN and less 18 IN more than 33 IN 24 IN

3) Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to 1 FT above top of pipe,

conduit, or utility service. 4) Keep trenches free of surface water runoff.

a) Include cost in Bid. b) No separate payment for surface water runoff pumping will be made.

E. Trenching for Electrical Installations: 1. Observe Paragraph 3.2C. "Trench Excavation". 2. Modify for electrical installations as follows:

a. Open no more than 600 LF of trench in exterior locations for trenches more than 12 IN but not more than 30 IN wide.

b. Any length of trench may be opened in exterior locations for trenches which are 12 IN wide or less.

c. Do not over excavate trench. d. Cut trenches for electrical runs with minimum 30 IN cover, unless otherwise

specified or shown on Drawings. e. See Division 16 for additional requirements.

3.3 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR PIPE LAYING

A. Over-Excavation: 1. Backfill and compact to 90 percent of maximum dry density per ASTM D698. 2. Backfill with granular bedding material as option.

B. Rock Excavation: 1. Excavate minimum of 6 IN below bottom exterior surface of the pipe or conduit. 2. Backfill to grade with suitable earth or granular material. 3. Form bell holes in trench bottom.

C. Subgrade Stabilization: 1. Stabilize the subgrade when directed by the Owner. 2. Observe the following requirements when unstable trench bottom materials are

encountered. a. Notify Owner when unstable materials are encountered.

1) Define by drawing station locations and limits. b. Remove unstable trench bottom caused by Contractor failure to dewater,

rainfall, or Contractor operations. 1) Replace with subgrade stabilization with no additional compensation.

3.4 BACKFILLING METHODS

A. Do not backfill until tests to be performed on system show system is in full compliance to specified requirements.

B. Carefully Compacted Backfill: 1. Furnish where indicated on Drawings, specified for trench embedment conditions

and for compacted backfill conditions up to 12 IN above top of pipe or conduit. 2. Comply with the following:

a. Place backfill in lifts not exceeding 8 IN (loose thickness). b. Hand place, shovel slice, and pneumatically tamp all carefully compacted

backfill.


c. Observe specific manufacturer's recommendations regarding backfilling and compaction.

d. Compact each lift to specified requirements.

C. Common Trench Backfill: 1. Perform in accordance with the following:

a. Place backfill in lift thicknesses capable of being compacted to densities specified.

b. Observe specific manufacturer's recommendations regarding backfilling and compaction.

c. Avoid displacing joints and appurtenances or causing any horizontal or vertical misalignment, separation, or distortion.

D. Water flushing for consolidation is not permitted.

E. Backfilling for Electrical Installations: 1. Observe Paragraph 3.4C. or D. "Backfilling Methods." 2. Modify for electrical installation as follows:

a. Observe notes and details on electrical drawings for fill in immediate vicinity of direct burial cables.

3.5 COMPACTION

A. General: 1. Place and assure bedding, backfill, and fill materials achieve an equal or "higher"

degree of compaction than undisturbed materials adjacent to the work. 2. In no case shall degree of compaction below "Minimum Compaction" specified be

accepted.

B. Compaction Requirements: 1. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings or more stringently by other sections of these

Specifications, comply with following trench compaction criteria:

MINIMUM COMPACTIONS

LOCATION SOIL TYPE DENSITY

2. Bedding material:

All locations Cohesionless soils 75 percent of max relative density by ASTM D4253 and D4254

3. Carefully compacted backfill:

All applicable areas Cohesive soils 95 percent of max dry density by

ASTM D698 and ASTM D1557 Cohesionless soils 75 percent of max relative density by ASTM D4253 and D4254


4. Common trench backfill:

Under pavements Cohesive soils 100 percent of max roadways surfaces, dry density by within highway ASTM D698 right-of-ways

Cohesionless soils 75 percent of relative

density by ASTM D4253 and D4254

Under turfed, sodded Cohesive soils 90 percent of max plant seeded, non- dry density by traffic areas ASTM D698

Cohesionless soils 60 percent of relative density by ASTM D4253 and D4254


A. Testing: 1. Perform in-place moisture-density tests as directed by the Owner. 2. Perform tests through recognized testing laboratory approved by Owner. 3. Costs of "Passing" tests paid by Owner. 4. Perform additional tests as directed until compaction meets or exceeds

requirements. 5. Cost associated with "Failing" tests shall be paid by Contractor. 6. Reference to Engineer in this section will imply Soils Engineer when employed by

Owner and directed by Engineer to undertake necessary inspections as approvals as necessary.

7. Assure Owner has immediate access for testing of all soils related work. 8. Ensure excavations are safe for testing personnel.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02260 TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Topsoiling and finished grading.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02110 - Site Clearing. 4. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 5. Section 02270 - Soil Erosion and Sediment Control. 6. Section 02930 - Seeding, Sodding and Landscaping.

C. Location of Work: All areas within limits of grading and all areas outside limits of grading which are disturbed in the course of the work.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Project Data: Test reports for furnished topsoil.


A. Verify amount of topsoil stockpiled and determine amount of additional topsoil, if necessary to complete work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: 1. Original surface soil typical of the area. 2. Existing topsoil stockpiled under Section 02110. 3. Capable of supporting native plant growth.

2.2 TOLERANCES

A. Finish Grading Tolerance: 0.1 FT plus/minus from required elevations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Correct, adjust and/or repair rough graded areas. 1. Cut off mounds and ridges. 2. Fill gullies and depressions. 3. Perform other necessary repairs. 4. Bring all sub-grades to specified contours, even and properly compacted.


B. Loosen surface to depth of 2 IN, minimum.

C. Remove all stones and debris over 2 IN in any dimension.

3.2 ROUGH GRADE REVIEW

A. Reviewed by Engineer in Section 02110, Site Clearing.

3.3 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Do not place when subgrade is wet or frozen enough to cause clodding.

B. Spread to compacted depth of 4 IN for all disturbed earth areas.

C. If topsoil stockpiled is less than amount required for work, furnish additional topsoil at no cost to Owner.

D. Provide finished surface free of stones, sticks, or other material 1 IN or more in any dimension.

E. Provide finished surface smooth and true to required grades.

F. Restore stockpile area to condition of rest of finished work.

3.4 ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon completion of topsoiling, obtain Engineer's acceptance of grade and surface.

B. Make test holes where directed to verify proper placement and thickness of topsoil.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02270 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Soil erosion and sediment control.



A. Referenced Standards: 1. Erosion control standards: "Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and

Sediment Control in Developing Areas" by the U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, College Park, Maryland.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Straw bales, twine tied.

B. Pipe Riser and Barrel: 16 GA corrugated metal pipe (CMP) of size indicated.

C. Stone for Stone Filter: 2 IN graded gravel or crushed stone.

D. Grass Seed: Annual ryegrass.

E. Silt Fence

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare an Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan to be approved by the City.

B. Prior to General Stripping Topsoil and Excavating: 1. Install perimeter dikes and swales. 2. Excavate and shape sediment basins and traps. 3. Construct pipe spillways and install stone filter where required. 4. Machine compact all berms, dikes and embankments for basins and traps. 5. Install straw bales where indicated.

a. Provide two stakes per bale. b. First stake angled toward previously installed bale to keep ends tight against

each other.

C. Construct sediment traps where indicated on Drawings during rough grading as grading progresses.

D. Temporarily seed basin slopes and topsoil stockpiles: 1. Rate: 1/2 LB/1000 SF. 2. Reseed as required until good stand of grass is achieved.


3.2 DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD

A. Maintain Basins, Dikes, Traps, Stone Filters, Straw Bales, Etc.: 1. Inspect regularly especially after rainstorms. 2. Repair or replace damaged or missing items.

B. After rough grading, sow temporary grass cover over all exposed earth areas not draining into sediment basin or trap.

C. Construct inlets as soon as possible. 1. Excavate and tightly secure straw bales completely around inlets as detailed on

Drawings.

D. Provide necessary swales and dikes to direct all water towards and into sediment basins and traps.

E. Do not disturb existing vegetation (grass and trees).

F. Excavate sediment out of basins and traps when capacity has been reduced by 50 percent. 1. Remove sediment from behind bales to prevent overtopping.

G. Topsoil and Fine Grade Slopes and Swales, Etc.: 1. Seed and mulch as soon as areas become ready.

3.3 NEAR COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Eliminate basins, dikes, traps, etc.

B. Grade to finished or existing grades.

C. Fine grade all remaining earth areas, then seed and mulch.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02271 STONE REVETMENT (RIP RAP)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Stone revetment (rip rap) for protection of slopes against erosion.

a. Drainage outflow area. b. Slope rip rap.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 4. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities. 5. Section 02270 - Soil Erosion and Sediment Control.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

a. T103, Soundness of Aggregates by Freezing and Thawing. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C88, Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.

b. C127, Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. 3. Corps of Engineers Specifications:

a. CRD-C100-75, Method of Sampling Concrete Aggregate and Aggregate Sources, and Selection of Material for Testing.

4. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.3 SUBMITTALS



3. Certifications. 4. Test reports. 5. Submit all tests and certification in a single coordinated submittal. Partial submittals

will not be accepted.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stone: 1. Durable broken quarry run stone. 2. Does not disintegrate on exposure to water or weathering. 3. Free from structural fractures and defects.


4. Not containing shale, unsound sandstone, or other material which will disintegrate. 5. Graded within limits specified. 6. Breadth and thickness of any stone: Not less than one-third of its length. 7. Ensure that dirt and fines accumulated from interledge layers or from blasting or

handling operation is less than 2 percent by weight. 8. Gradation of the material: Well-graded from small to large of the sizes as indicated

on the Drawings.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform all tests at an approved independent laboratory.

B. Obtain samples in conformance with Corps of Engineers Specification CRD C100-75.

C. Source Tests: 1. Supply certified tests and service records to determine acceptability and application

of stone materials. 2. In event suitable test reports or a service record that is satisfactory are not available,

as in case of newly operated sources, subject material to tests necessary to determine its acceptability for use.

3. Tests to which materials to be subjected include: a. Specific gravity. b. Soundness in magnesium sulfate. c. Soundness in freezing and thawing. d. Such other tests as may be considered necessary to demonstrate satisfactorily

that materials are acceptable including petrographic analysis, abrasion, absorption, and wetting and drying.

e. Material Acceptability Tests: 4. Initial test: On material from each ledge sampled prior to start of construction.

a. Specific gravity. b. Soundness in magnesium sulfate. c. Soundness in freezing and thawing.

5. Control tests: a. Perform control tests including one specific gravity, one soundness in

magnesium sulfate, and one soundness in freezing and thawing.

D. Specific Gravity Test: 1. Conform with ASTM C127. 2. Not less than 2.40 minimum.

E. Soundness in Magnesium Sulfate: 1. Conform with ASTM C88, except maintain samples immersed in solution at a

temperature of 80 DegF (26 DegC) +2 DegF. 2. Not more than 12 percent loss at five cycles.

F. Soundness of Aggregates in Freezing and Thawing: 1. Conform with AASHTO T103 method as modified herein. 2. Ensure loss at 12 cycles of not more than 10 percent. 3. Maintain temperature of cold liquid in range of -5 to 0 DegF (-20 to -18 DegC). 4. Maintain thaw fluid temperature in range of 45 to 50 DegF (7 to 10 DegC). 5. Permit length of freezing and of thawing cycles of 2 HRS with 1 HR of freezing

following by 1 HR of thawing. 6. Perform thawing by circulating thaw fluid around pan containing stone immersed in a

depth of 1/4 IN rather than by total immersion.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Trim and dress all areas to required cross sections.

B. Bring areas that are below allowable minus tolerance limit to grade by filling with material similar to adjacent material.

C. Compact to density specified for backfill in accordance with Section 02200.

D. Do not place any stone material on prepared base prior to inspection by Engineer.

3.2 PLACING

A. Place stone revetment material on prepared foundation within limits indicated.

B. Place on prepared base to produce a well-graded mass of stone with minimum percentage of voids.

C. Place to required thickness and grades.

D. Place to full thickness in a single operation to avoid displacing the underlying material.

E. Distribute entire mass to conform to gradation specified. 1. Do not place stone by dumping into chutes or by similar method likely to cause

segregation.

F. Keep finished stone revetment free from objectionable pockets of small stones or clusters of larger stone. 1. Hand place as necessary to obtain a well-graded distribution.

G. Ensure a final tolerance of within 3 IN from indicated slope and grade lines.

H. Place stone revetment in conjunction with embankment construction to prevent mixture of embankment and stone revetment materials.

I. Maintain stone revetment until accepted.

J. Replace any displaced material to lines and grades shown.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02364 SOIL NAIL WALLS AND SHOTCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Soil nail wall design, installation, and testing.

a. Soil nail walls for temporary earth restraint. b. Shotcrete slope armoring and protection without the use of soil nails.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 00 - Contract Forms. 3. Division 1 - General Requirements. 4. Section 03108 - Formwork 5. Section 03208 - Reinforcement 6. Section 03308 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning 7. Section 03311 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing 8. Section 03350 - Testing

C. General Description: 1. This specification includes requirements for the complete design and installation of

soil nail retaining wall systems. The Contractor shall furnish all engineering, field investigations, labor, material and incidental items necessary to completely install soil nail retaining wall systems as shown on the design drawings, and as specified herein.

2. The walls shall be constructed from the top down as the soil in front of the wall is removed and the nails are installed and grouted at each level. The exposed soil face shall be protected with a steel mesh or deformed-bar reinforced shotcrete facing. Drainage systems shall be installed prior to applying shotcrete.

3. Shotcrete slope protection shall be applied to laid-back excavations where the depth of a cut exceeds 10 FT, and the in-situ claystone will be exposed for 14 days or longer.

D. Measurement and Payment: 1. Payment: Soil nail walls will be paid for at the contract lump sum price. The cost

shall include full compensation for all engineering, labor, equipment, materials, Contractor-performed material and field tests, and incidentals necessary to design, fabricate, excavate and construct the soil nail walls in accordance with all requirements stated in the Contract Documents. a. Use of soil nail for temporary earth restraint shall be at the Contractor’s option.

The cost of all temporary earth restraint systems shall be included in the contract lump sum price.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

a. Manual of Steel Construction. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. 116R, Cement and Concrete Technology. b. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight

Concrete. c. 212.3R, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. d. 226.3R, Use of Fly Ash in Concrete.


e. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting. f. 306R, Cold Weather Concreting. g. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. h. 347R, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. i. 506, Guide to Shotcrete.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A82, Standard Specifications for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. c. A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement. d. A325, Standard Specification of Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105

ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. e. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billett-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement (Including Supplementary Requirements S1) f. A775, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. g. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Field. h. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. i. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens. j. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. k. C138, Standard Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content

(Gravimetric) of Concrete. l. C143, Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. m. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. n. C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Concrete Curing. o. C173, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method. p. C192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Laboratory. q. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Pressure Method. r. C260, Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. s. C289, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates

(Chemical Method). t. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. u. C618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated natural

Pozzolan for use as a Mineral admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. v. E329, Standard Specifications for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or

Inspection of Materials used in Construction/ 4. Federal Specification:

a. LLL-3-810B Building Board, (Hardboard) Hard Pressed, Vegetable Fiber.

B. Quality Control: 1. Work shall be performed in accordance with all requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 2. Qualification: Submit proof of four projects similar in scope on which Contractor has

designed and installed soil nails or ground anchors in the past two years. The Contractor’s staff on this project shall include a supervising Engineer, licensed in the state where the wall will be constructed and having at least three years of experience in the construction of nail or ground anchor walls.

3. Construction Concrete Testing Agency: a. Owner to employ and pay for services of a testing laboratory to:

1) Perform testing of shotcrete placed during construction. b. Engineer shall approve selection of testing agency. c. Concrete Testing Agency shall meet requirements of ASTM E329.


4. Do not begin concrete production until proposed shotcrete and grout mixes have been approved by Engineer and Testing Agency. a. Approval of concrete mix designs by Engineer does not relieve Contractor of his

responsibility to provide concrete that meets the requirements of this Specification.

5. Adjust shotcrete mix designs when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, strength tests, or other circumstances warrant. a. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved by Engineer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Anchor Bond Length: That length of anchor (soil nail) which is bonded to a passive subgrade zone and which satisfactorily transmits the required anchor loads to the subgrade.

B. Production Anchors/Production Nails: Anchors indicated in the design drawings or otherwise required for support or stability of the soil nail wall.

C. Installer or Applicator: Installer or Applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product at the Project site. 1. Installer and Applicator are synonymous.

D. Soils Engineer: Geotechnical consultant having experience in the design and construction of soil nail walls hired by the Owner to be the project’s technical resource and quality assurance guarantor. 1. The Soils Engineer for soil-nailing may be utilized by the Contractor for design of

Contractor’s scope.

E. Engineer: Engineer-of-Record for the Project as outlined in the Contract Documents.

F. Shotcrete: Pneumatically applied concrete conforming to ACI 506.

G. Test Panel: See Quality Control paragraph.

H. Additional works and terms used in this Specification are defined in Cement and Concrete Terminology, ACI 116R.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings Design Calculations: Prepared and sealed by a licensed Professional

Engineer in the state where the wall will be constructed. a. Drawings shall show details of construction procedures, sequencing, and

excavation in addition to details of soil nailing and wall system. b. The Drawings shall also show wall location relative to existing buildings and

landmarks. c. Actual wall locations shall be verified by the Contractor in the field.

2. Product and Material data for the following: a. Soil nail bar, nut, plates, and other anchorages. b. Wall reinforcement. c. Wall drainage systems. d. Shotcrete mix design.

1) Mix proportions. 2) Strength results. 3) Water-cement ratio. 4) Source of materials with mill certificates.

e. Grout mix design. f. Epoxy coating material with certificates.


C. Testing Instruments: Submit for approval information on the test jack calibration results. The test jack and pressure gauge must be tested together within one (1) year of use in the field.

D. Contractor and installer qualifications.

E. Results of all: 1. Soil nail load tests. 2. Concrete grout strength tests. 3. Strength test results of in-place shotcrete including air content and ambient

temperatures (Reference Field Quality Control (Shotcrete) paragraph).

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage and Handling of Materials: 1. Cement and Fly Ash:

a. Store in moistureproof, weathertight enclosures. b. Do not use if caked or lumpy.

2. Aggregate: a. Store to prevent segregation and contamination with other sizes or foreign

materials. b. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. c. Allow sand to drain until moisture content is uniform prior to use.

3. Admixtures: a. Protect from contamination, evaporation, freezing or damage. b. Maintain within temperature range recommended by manufacturer. c. Completely mix solutions and suspensions prior to use.

4. Reinforcing Steel: a. Support and store all reinforcing steel above ground.

B. Delivery: 1. Reinforcing steel: Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags with permanent

mark numbers. a. Mark numbers to match shop drawing mark numbers.

1.6 SUBSURFACING INFORMATION

A. Existing geotechnical data, including soil boring results, shall be made available for design and estimating purposes during bid preparation. The Contractor, at his own expense, may make additional investigations prior to bid with the permission of the Owner.

B. Upon award, Contractor shall arrange and pay for additional geotechnical investigations required for design and installation of soil nail wall.

1.7 ACCEPTABLE WALL CONTRACTORS/INSTALLERS

A. Hayward Baker, Inc., Ft. Worth, Texas; (817) 625-4241.

B. Any Installer or Contractor meeting the requirements of this specification and other provisions of the Contract Documents.

1.8 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

A. Soil-nailed wall construction as specified herein shall be supplied as temporary soil-nailed walls, at any location where earth restraint is required, and use of the soil-nailed option complies with the Contract Documents (contractor’s option).


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS/MATERIALS

A. Soil nail bars and nuts shall conform to ASTM A615 Grade 60 or Grade 70, threaded as necessary. Plates shall be ASTM A36 or Grade 50 Structural Steel. Soil nail bars and nuts shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60 ksi. Cone nuts without washers are acceptable for use. Bars, nuts, and plates shall be completely epoxy coated per ASTM A775 for permanent wall applications.

B. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. Welding wire fabric: ASTM A185, minimum yield strength 60,000 psi.

C. Grout shall consist of Type I, II, I/II, or III (high early strength) Portland Cement. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi.

D. Fly Ash: 1. ASTM C618, Class F or C. 2. Non-staining: Hardened concrete containing fly ash to be uniform light gray color. 3. Maximum loss on ignition: 6 percent. 4. Compatible with other concrete components. 5. Obtain proposed fly ash from a source approved by the state highway department in

the state where the Project is located.

E. Admixtures: 1. Air Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260. 2. Water-Reducing, retarding and accelerating admixtures:

a. ASTM C494 Type A through E. b. Conform to Provisions of ACI 212.3R. c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless specifically approved in

writing by the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. d. Follow manufacturer instructions. e. Use chloride-free admixtures only.

3. Do not use calcium chloride. 4. Pozzolanic admixtures: ASTM C618 5. Provide admixtures of the same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in

establishing required concrete proportions in the mix design.

F. Water: Potable, clean, free of oils, acids and organic matter.

G. Aggregates: 1. Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C33 2. Fine Aggregate: clean, natural sand.

a. No manufactured or artificial sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed rock, natural gravel, or other inert granular material.

a. Maximum amount of clay or shale particles: 1 percent. 4. See Section 03308 for aggregate requirements pertaining to cast-in-place facades.

2.2 CONCRETE MIXES (SHOTCRETE FACING AND SLOPE PROTECTION)

A. Shotcrete mix design shall conform with ACI 506 and to the requirements listed in this specification.

B. Shotcrete concrete shall be produced by the wet-mix process and have a minimum compressive strength at seven (7) days of 3,000 psi and at 28 days of 4,000 psi. Shotcrete will be accepted based on 28-day strengths.

C. The following materials shall be used: 1. Type I or II Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150. 2. Aggregates which are clean and uniform grading.


D. Silica fume, if used, shall not exceed 10 percent of the cement weight and shall be an admixture with a minimum of 90% Si02 with a proven record of performance for use in shotcrete.

E. Premixed and prepackaged Portland cement concrete product specifically manufactured as a shotcrete product may be provided for the on-site mixed shotcrete upon approval from the Engineer and Testing Agency. The pre-mixed concrete shall contain cement, aggregate, and other materials conforming to requirements of this specification.

F. Slump: 1 1/2 IN minimum to 3 IN maximum.

G. Air Entrainment: Total percent air content by volume of concrete: 6.5%, plus or minus 3%.

H. Water-cement ratio: Maximum ratio of water to cementitious materials shall be 0.40 for all shotcrete.

I. Substitutions of fly ash: Maximum 20 percent by weight of cement at a rate or 1 lb fly ash for 1 lb of Portland cement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL NOTES

A. Prior to start of soil nail installation, the Contractor shall locate all existing utilities and report to the Engineer actual filed locations which may conflict with the work as designed.

B. If actual wall heights vary by more than one (1) foot, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Soils Engineer so the design can be verified or adjusted.

3.2 SEQUENCE OF INSTALLATION

A. Slope shall be trimmed as shown a maximum of two (2) feet below each row of nails. All rock encountered shall be pre-split to form a uniform wall surface. Excavation methods shall be used so as not to disturb prior lifts. Slope of excavated wall shall be as determined by Contractor unless otherwise specified.

B. Excavation shall proceed in stages, exposing the minimum amount of soil or rock face which will allow the practical and expeditious application of the initial layer of shotcrete and installation of soil nails, while assuring the stability of the excavated face and minimizing ground movements. Rock blasting shall be prohibited.

C. Excavation surfaces shall be cleaned of all loose material, mud, rebound from previously placed shotcrete and other foreign matter that would adversely affect the shotcrete bond. Dampen the excavation surface immediately prior to shotcrete application.

D. Vertical Wall Drains: Provide as required and shown on the plans, prefabricated, fully wrapped preformed geocomposite drains. The core, not less than 0.25 IN thick or more than 0.50 IN thick, shall be either a preformed grid of embossed plastic or a system of plastic pillars and interconnections forming a semirigid mat. The core material when covered with filter fabric shall be capable of maintaining a drainage void for the entire height of permeable liner. Preformed drains shall be no wider than 12 IN unless special methods are used to ensure adherence of the shotcrete to the fabric and to preclude the fabric from sagging under the weight of the shotcrete. They shall be suitably outletted at the bottom of the structure. When splicing of drains is required, full flow thru the splice shall be maintained and splices shall be suitably protected from damage and contamination during subsequent shotcreting. The shotcrete shall be of full thickness over the drain.


E. Install welded wire fabric or deformed bar reinforcement as shown on the design drawings. Allow for the required lap lengths at horizontal and vertical joints.

F. Place shotcrete to the minimum depth shown on the approved, Contractor-prepared design drawings. Overexcavated areas shall be built up to maintain a neat, uniform shotcrete face. Shotcrete to within 12 inches of the bottom of the exposed excavation to allow for reinforcing overlap. Immediately after completion, keep shotcrete continuously moist for at least 24 hours. Cure as specified for concrete in the Contract Documents.

G. Install soil nails as described in this Specification. At the Contractor’s option and with the approval of the Soils Engineer, soil nails may be installed prior to shotcreting.

H. After allowing grout and shotcrete facing to cure per Specification, torque nuts to specified load using a torque wrench or equivalent approved method.

I. Repeat the above steps until wall is completed. Construction sequence for each lift shall be completed within a five-day cycle. Time spans required for the following operations are as follows: 1. Excavation: Max. of 24 hours. 2. Shotcreting: Within 24 hours after excavation. 3. Nail Install: Within 24 hours after excavation; within 4 hours after drilling. 4. CURLING/TORQUING: Minimum of 24 hours after installation.

J. Shotcrete slope protection as described herein shall be installed without the use of nails where described in 1.1, C, 3.

3.3 SOIL NAIL INSTALLATION

A. Drill holes for soil nails at the location shown in the approved plans. Provide soil nails at the location shown in the approved plans. Provide soil nail length necessary to develop adequate load capacity to satisfy testing acceptance criteria for the design load required, but less than length shown on approved plans. Core drilling, rotary drilling, percussion drilling, auger drilling or driven casing can be used. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to choose drilling methods that will maintain open drill holes and do not promote mining and loosening of the soil at the perimeter of the drill hole or fracture soils with weak stratification planes by use of high flush volumes and pressures. At the ground surface, the drill hole shall be located within six (6) inches of the location shown. At the point of entry the nail angle shall be within plus or minus three (3) degrees of that shown on the approved plans. The nails shall not extend beyond the limits of the permanent easement, unless otherwise approved. Subsidence or physical damage by such operations shall be cause for immediate cessation of operations and repair at Contractor’s expense.

B. Soil nails which encounter rock shall be evaluated by the Soils Engineer. The soil nail may be shortened, relocated, or eliminated as directed by the Soils Engineer.

C. Install nail with centralizers prior to or after placing grout in the nail hole, at the option of the Contractor. Centralizers shall be placed at 10 FT maximum on center (2 minimum), with the last centralizer approximately 1 FT from the end of each nail. 1. A minimum nail grout cover of one (1) IN shall be maintained. 2. Centralizers may be omitted when grouting through hollow-stem augers if a still

grout (8 IN or less slump) and pressure-injection is used. 3. Centralizers shall be constructed from non-corrosive materials.

D. Grout shall be placed in the hole from the lowest point and shall completely encase the soil nail bar. Care shall be taken to ensure no air voids or caving occur.

E. Holes shall be completely filled with grout and an initial set of grout shall occur prior to installation of bearing plates.


F. Provide grouting equipment capable of continuous mixing and producing a grout free of lumps. Nails shall be placed in each drilled hole within 15 minutes of grout installation.

G. Soil nails shall be installed within four (4) hours of drilling. Mortar packing and secondary grouting to the wall face shall be accomplished as soon as practical after nail installation. Provide secondary grouting to the small ungrouted zone at the wall face, place a bearing plate over the bar and dry-packed with cement mortar to provide and even bearing against the shotcrete face prior to torquing.

3.4 SHOTCRETE APPLICATION AND CURE

A. Shotcrete mixing, application, and cure shall conform to ACI 506 and to the requirements stated in this Specification. All nozzlemen shall be ACI-certified.

B. Batching and mixing: Aggregate and cement may be batched by weight or by volume. Provide mixing equipment capable of thoroughly mixing the materials in sufficient quantity to maintain placing continuity.

C. Delivery Equipment: Provide equipment cable of delivering the premixed material accurately, uniformly, and continuously through the delivery hose. Follow recommendations of the equipment manufacturer on the type and size of the nozzle to be used and on cleaning, inspections, and maintenance of the equipment.

D. Provide a supply of clean, dry air adequate for maintaining sufficient nozzle velocity for all parts of the work and, if required, for simultaneous operation of the suitable blow pipe for clearing away rebound. The compressor shall be capable of providing a minimum of 315 CFM per operating nozzle.

E. Shotcrete shall not be placed on any surface which is frozen, spongy, or where free water is present.

F. Shotcrete shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit, or when weather conditions are such that a satisfactory product cannot be achieved. Discontinue shotcreting in heavy rains or in the presence of runoff.

G. Shotcrete shall provide a complete cover over both sides of the welded wire fabric or other reinforcement. Use support chairs or slab bolsters as required to hold the reinforcing at the required location on the shotcrete depth.

H. Apply shotcrete with the same equipment and the same technique as used to construct the approved test panels. Nozzle operators constructing the test panel shall be the same operators used to place the shotcrete in the Work. Thickness measuring pins shall be installed on 5-foot centers in each direction. The pins shall be non-corrosive. Other methods may be utilized to field-determine shotcrete thickness if the Contractor can satisfactorily demonstrate the reliability of the other methods.

I. Application of the shotcrete shall be performed perpendicular to the surface in order to secure maximum compaction of the shotcrete. Control thickness, method of support, air pressure and water content of shotcrete to prevent sagging of sloughing.

J. Shotcrete shall be applied from the bottom upward to prevent accumulation of rebound on the surface still to be covered. Shotcrete shall emerge from the nozzle in a steady, uninterrupted flow.

K. Shotcrete shall be placed in several passes to build up layers and completely encase the reinforcing. When an additional layer of shotcrete is to be applied, the previous layer shall be allowed to develop initial set and all laitance, loose material and rebound shall be removed by brooming or scraping. All laitance that has been allowed to develop final set shall be removed by sandblasting. The total thickness shall be as indicated on the design drawings.


L. Hold nozzle at such a distance and angle to place material behind reinforcement before material is allowed to accumulate on the front face. Do not place shotcrete through more than on layer of reinforcing in one application unless demonstrated by preconstruction tests that steel can be properly encased.

M. Construction joints shall be tapered and the surface of the joints shall be thoroughly wetted before placement of adjacent sections.

N. Check for hollow areas by sounding with a hammer. Use approved methods to correct deficient areas. Discontinue shotcreting or provide suitable means to screen the nozzle stream if wind or air currents cause separation of the stream during placement. Deficient areas shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.

O. Curing: 1. Immediately after completion, keep shotcrete continually moist for at least 24 hours.

Use one of the following materials or methods. a. Continuous sprinkling. b. Absorptive mat or fabric, sand, or other covering kept continuously wet.

2. Provide additional final curing immediately following the initial curing and before the shotcrete has dried. Use one of the following materials or methods. a. Continue the method used in initial curing. b. Application of impervious sheet material conforming to ASTM C171.

3. Continue curing for the first seven days after shotcreting or until the required seven-day strength is obtained. During the curing period, maintain shotcrete above 38 Deg. F (2 Deg. C) and in a moist condition as specified.

P. Repair surface defects as soon as possible after initial placement of the shotcrete. All shotcrete which lacks uniformity; exhibits segregation, honeycombing, or delamination; or which contains any dry patched, slugs, voids, or sand pockets shall be removed and replaced with fresh shotcrete.

Q. Special attention shall be given to eye and dust protection hazards when shotcrete is to be applied. Cement and other admixtures are caustic and my cause skin and respiratory irritation unless safety measures are taken in addition to required ventilation. During the application of shotcrete, provide nozzlemen and helpers with gloves, face shields, and adequate protective clothing.

3.5 FIELD TESTING (SOIL NAILS)

A. Entire soil nail load testing program shall be under the direction and supervision of the Soils Engineer. Test nails shall be installed at locations specified by the Soils Engineer. Test nails shall verify the soil nail shearing force that was assumed in the designs. If indicated by testing results, modification in the design shall be made by the Soils Engineer using the field data.

B. Equipment: A dial gauge capable of measuring to 0.001-of-an inch shall be used to measure movement. A hydraulic jack and gauge calibrated as a unit shall be used to apply the test load. The pressure gauge shall be graduated in 100 psi increments or less and used to measure the applied load. The test loads shall be applied incrementally.


C. Pullout Testing: Install 1 nail/per horizontal row but no more than 3 percent of the total number of nails as non service nails and load test to ultimate design load or pullout failure. Pullout failure is defined as movement in excess of 0.04 inches between the one minute and 10 minute reading or 0.08 inches per log cycle of time over a maximum load hold period of 60 minutes. The test nails shall be installed and tested at each level at a rate consistent with construction operations. The test length of nail shall be chosen to cause pullout failure prior to steel yield, but it shall not be less than 8 feet. A minimum ungrouted or unbonded zone of 3 feet in length to the face shall be provided. The method of installation and size of drill hole shall be the same as for production nails. A minimum factor of safety of 1.67 shall be used to determine ultimate loads from working loads.

D. Each test nail shall be grouted in place as part of a regular production grouting process. After grouting, the nail shall not be loaded for a minimum of three (3) days.

E. The pullout test shall be made by incrementally loading the nail. The nail movement shall be measured and recorded to the nearest 0.001 of-an-inch with respect to an independent fixed reference point at each increment of load. The test shall be monitored with a pressure gauge. The load hold period shall start as soon as each test load is applied. Movement shall be recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 10 minutes. If the load hold is extended, the nail movement shall be recorded at 15, 25, 30, 45 and 60 minutes. Each increment of load shall be no greater than 25 percent of the design load of the nail tested. The loading shall be terminated at failure or earlier at the option of the Contractor if the design ultimate unit bond stress is demonstrated.

F. Test results shall be given to the Engineer immediately upon completion of the test.

G. Reaction loads produced by the testing apparatus shall be uniformly spread over the shotcrete surface without overloading the shotcrete facing. Reaction points from the test apparatus shall not be closer than 10 inches to the nail being tested.

H. Testing shall be performed in the presence of the Soils Engineer.

I. Acceptance Criteria: The nail is deemed acceptable if the unit bond stress at a failure load is equal or greater than the design ultimate unit bond stress, or if the design ultimate load is achieved without nail failure. Unacceptable test results shall result in modifications to design and/or construction procedures. Any modifications of design or construction procedures shall be at no change in the contract prices and the verification testing procedures shall be repeated as required by the Engineer. Graphs shall be plotted during the test of deflection against load.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (SHOTCRETE)

A. Pre-Construction Testing: 1. Test panels shall be made by each application crew using the equipment, materials,

mixture proportions, and procedures for the job prior to commencement of the Work. 2. A test panel at least 30 IN x 30 IN shall be made for each mixture being considered

and fore each shooting position to be encountered in the job. The test panels shall be fabricated to the same thickness as in the structure, but not less than 4 inches.

3. Take at least five 4 IN diameter cores from each panel to be tested according to ASTM C39.

B. Construction Testing 1. Take 4 IN diameter cores from the in-place structure and rest according to ASTM

C39. A minimum of three cores shall be taken from each 1,000 SQ. FT. of in-place shotcrete facing. a. Do not repair core holes with shotcrete. Fill core holes solid with repair mortar

after thoroughly cleaning and dampening, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.


2. Alternatively, make one test panel with minimum dimensions of 18 IN x 18 IN gunned in the same position as the Work facing represented for each 1000 SQ. FT. of in-place facing. Panel shall be gunned during the course of the Work by the Contractor’s regular nozzlemen. Test panels shall be field-cured in the same manner as the Work, except for the test panels soaked in water for a minimum 40 hours prior to testing. The Contractor shall take a minimum of three 4 IN diameter cores from each panel and test in accordance with ASTM C39.

3. The average compressive strength of each set of three cores shall equal or exceed 85 percent of the minimum design compressive strength specified in the Contract Documents.

3.7 SCHEDULE/FINISHES

A. Finish: Unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents, provide an undisturbed gun finish of shotcrete as applied from the nozzle without hard finishing.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02423 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Storm drainage systems. 2. Storm drainage pipe. 3. Inlets, headwalls, flumes and flared end sections.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02110 - Site Clearing. 4. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 5. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities. 6. Section 02260 - Topsoiling and Finished Grading.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

a. M36, Corrugated Steel Culverts and Underdrains. b. M190, Standard Specification for Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert

Pipe and Pipe Arches. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C14, Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. b. C76, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and

Sewer Pipe. c. C361, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure Pipe. d. C506, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain

and Sewer Pipe. e. C507, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert Storm

Drain and Sewer Pipe. 3. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction for the State of Colorado:

a. Standard Details.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



3. Certifications. 4. Test reports. 5. Submit all tests and certification in a single coordinated submittal. Partial submittals

will not be accepted.

B. Submit schedules and details for structures and joints.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.


a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process. b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Warrant that the infiltration will not exceed the amount specified in paragraph 3.03 B during the 1-year good repair period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cold applied asphalt joint:

a. Kalktite 340 Compound. b. Tufflex. c. Plastico. d. Or equal.

2. Preformed flexible pipe joint sealing compound: a. RAM-NEK. b. BIDCO C-56. c. Or equal.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): 1. Reinforced concrete culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe: ASTM C76, Classes III, IV,

and V.

B. Concrete Pipe (CP): 1. Concrete culvert, storm drain, and sewer pipe: ASTM C14, Class 2.

C. RCP and CP Joint Sealer: 1. Rubber gasket: ASTM C361.

D. Flared End Sections: 1. Conform to State of Colorado specifications. 2. Bituminous coated: AASHTO M190, Type A. 3. Jointing: Same as pipe.

E. Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP): AASHTO M36, {16} GA. 1. Bituminous coated: AASHTO M190, Type A. 2. Jointing: Connecting bands of same base metal coated as pipe.

F. CMP Joint Sealer: 1. Cold applied asphalt joint compound. 2. Preformed flexible pipe joint sealing compound.

G. Concrete and Reinforcement for Inlets, Headwalls, and Flumes: 1. Comply with Section 3208 & 3308. 2. Conform to Drawings.

H. Concrete and Reinforcement for Concrete Flared End Sections: 1. Comply with Section 3208 & 3308. 2. Conform to Drawings.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Comply with Section 02221.


A. Verify and coordinate installation.

B. Exfiltration Test: 1. Perform an exfiltration test on each reach of sewer between manholes.

a. Test the first reach after backfilling and prior to installing any of the remaining pipe, or any additional reach.

b. Single or multiple reaches may be tested thereafter, at Contractor's option. c. Subject each manhole to at least one test. d. Provide all necessary piping between the reach to be tested and the water

supply, and other necessary materials and equipment. e. Air testing may be allowed.

1) Submit complete information to Engineer for review describing the proposed test method, scheduling, and duration, including the method of testing manholes before beginning testing.

2. Procedure: a. Block off all manhole openings, except those connecting with the reach being

tested. b. Fill the line.

1) Average depth: 10 FT above invert, except as required by manhole depth. 2) Depth at lower end: 25 FT maximum above crown. 3) Depth at upper end: 5 FT minimum above crown.

c. Add and measure water as required to maintain a constant level. 1) Exfiltration: 100 GAL maximum per inch of nominal diameter per mile per

day. 2) Manholes are considered section of 48 IN pipe.

d. Maintain test for at least 2 HRS, or as long as necessary in Engineer's opinion, to locate all leaks.

3. Repair and retest any reach that exceeds the allowable exfiltration.

C. Infiltration Test: 1. If at any time prior to expiration of the correction or warranty period infiltration

exceeds 200 GAL/IN of nominal DIA/mile/day, locate the leaks and make repairs.

D. Lamp Test: 1. Each section between manholes will be lamped by Engineer. 2. Furnish suitable assistants to help Engineer. 3. A minimum of 95 percent of a true circle will be required in the lamp test to indicate

a properly constructed pipeline. 4. Repair any sections not passing the lamp test.

E. In case of conflict, do not relocate piping without prior approval from the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02444 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Chain link fencing and gates.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 4. Section 03002 - Concrete.



a. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

b. A392, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric. c. A824, Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire

for use with Chain-Link Fence. d. F552, Terminology Relating to Chain-Link Fencing. e. F567, Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence. f. F626, Standard Specification for Fence Fittings. g. F900, Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. h. F1043, Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal

Industrial Chain Line Fence Framework. i. F1083, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 2. American Welding Society (AWS). 3. Chain Link Manufacturer's Institute for "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric

and Accessories." 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

B. Qualifications: 1. Installer bonded and licensed in the Project state. 2. Installer shall have a minimum two (2) years experience installing similar fencing. 3. Utilize only AWS certified welders. 4. Electric gate operators to be UL listed. 5. Grounding by an electrician licensed in Project state.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. See ASTM F552.

B. NPS: Nominal pipe size, in inches.

C. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the

field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.


1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Scaled plan layout showing spacing of components, accessories, fittings, and post

anchorage. 4. Mill certificates. 5. Source quality control test results. 6. Automatic gate system:

a. Electrical circuitry and control wiring. b. Intercom system. c. Detector loop layout. d. Locking plan. e. Method of installation of detector loop. f. Sealant material for detector loops.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Fence systems:

a. Cyclone. b. Page-Wilson Corporation (Page Fence Division). c. Anchor Fence, Inc. d. Or approved equal.

2. Electric gate operators: a. Richards - Wilcox. b. Robot Industries, Inc. c. Electric Operators. d. Or approved equal.


2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Chain Link Fabric: 1. Fabric type:

a. ASTM A392 zinc-coated steel: 1) Coated before weaving, 2.0 OZ/SF.

2. Wire gage: match existing fence. 3. Mesh size: match existing fence IN. 4. Selvage treatment:

a. Top: Knuckled. b. Bottom: Knuckled.

B. Concrete: See Section 03002.

C. Line Post: 1. ASTM F1083 pipe:

a. Schedule 80, NPS 2.

D. Corner or Terminal Posts:


1. ASTM F1083 pipe: a. Schedule 80, NPS 2-1/2.

E. Brace and Rails: 1. ASTM F1083 pipe:

a. Schedule 80, NPS 1-1/4.

F. Tension Wire: 1. Top and bottom of fabric:

a. ASTM A824, galvanized steel, Class 3.

G. Fence Fittings (Post and Line Caps, Rail and Brace Ends, Sleeves-Top Rail, Tie Wires and Clips, Tension and Brace Bands, Tension Bars, Truss Rods): 1. ASTM F626.

H. Swing Gate: 1. ASTM F900. 2. Materials as specified for fence framework and fabric. 3. Hardware:

a. Galvanized per ASTM A153. b. Hinges to permit 180-degree inward gate opening.


A. Test related fence construction materials to meet the following standards: 1. Posts and rails:

a. ASTM F1043, Heavy Industrial.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with: 1. Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Lines and grades shown on Drawings. 3. In accordance with ASTM F567.

B. Do not start fence installation before final grading is complete and finish elevations are established.

C. Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.

D. Place fence with bottom edge of fabric at maximum clearance above grade, as shown on Drawings. 1. Correct minor irregularities in earth to maintain maximum clearance.

E. Space line posts at equal intervals not exceeding 10 FT OC.

F. Provide post braces for each gate, corner, pull and terminal post and first adjacent line post.

G. Install tension bars full height of fabric.

H. Rails: Fit rails with expansion couplings of outside sleeve type. 1. Rails continuous for outside sleeve type for full length of fence.

I. Provide expansion couplings in top rails at not more than 20 FT intervals.

J. Anchor top rails to main posts with appropriate wrought or malleable fittings.

K. Install bracing assemblies at all end and gate posts, as well as side, corner, and pull posts. 1. Locate compression members at mid-height of fabric.


2. Extend diagonal tension members from compression members to bases of posts. 3. Install so that posts are plumb when under correct tension.

L. Pull fabric taut and secure to posts and rails. 1. Secure so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. 2. Secure to posts at not over 15 IN OC, and to rails at not over 24 IN OC, and to

tension wire at not over 24 IN OC. 3. Use U-shaped wire conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe

and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least two (2) full turns. 4. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazards to persons or clothing.

M. Install post top at each post.

N. Gates: 1. Construct with fittings or by welding. 2. Provide rigid, weatherproof joints. 3. Assure right, non-sagging, non-twisting gate. 4. Coat welds with rust preventive paint, color to match pipe.

O. Install electric gate operator in accordance with NEC.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02512 FOUNDATION AND WALL DRAIN SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Foundation drain systems behind retaining walls, building walls, and other buried

structures.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 4. Section 02221- Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities. 5. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

a. M278, Standard Specification for Class OS46 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C14, Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. b. D3034 Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and

Fittings.


A. Foundation Drainage System: 1. System which drains by gravity, connects to and drains into storm drain system.

B. Wall Drainage System: 1. Continuous drainage system that conveys subsurface water downward along

foundation walls. 2. Wall drainage system either ties to foundation drainage system or discharges

through wall weep holes as shown on the Drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01300. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:

a. Layout diagram of drainage system(s). 3. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Type, size and manufacturer of drain pipe. d. Type, size and gradation of filter material. e. Type and manufacturer of filter fabric. f. Type and manufacturer of drainage composite and proposed installation details.

4. Certifications. 5. Test reports.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Filter fabric:

a. Mirafi 140N by Mirafi Inc. b. Propex 4545 by Amoco Fabrics Co.

2. Drainage Composite: a. Mirafi G100W by Mirafi Inc. b. American Wick Drain c. Or approved equal.

B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2.2 DRAIN PIPE

A. Drain Pipe: 1. Inside diameter: 4 IN, unless otherwise noted. 2. Provide fittings so that thickness, weight, material and quality correspond to that of

the drain pipe approved for use. a. PVC pipe:

1) ASTM D3034, SDR 35. 2) Perforations in accordance with AASHTO M278, except perforations not to

be greater than 5/16 IN DIA.

B. Filter Material: 1. Free-draining granular material used in the drain system should consist of minus 2-

inch aggregate with less than 50 percent passing the #4 sieve and less than 3 percent passing the #200 sieve.

C. Filter Fabric: 1. Nonwoven polypropylene fabric. 2. Not less than 4 OZ/SY. 3. Resistant to the chemical actions of the soil and water and nonbiodegradable. 4. Fabric to prevent the migration of soil particles into the filter material while allowing

the free flow of water from the subsoil to the drain pipe.

D. Drainage Composite: 1. Semi-rigid drainage composite designed for vertical applications with non-woven

filter fabric bonded to one or both sides. 2. Minimum flow rate of 18 gals/min/ft in the vertical orientation according to ASTM

D4716.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FOUNDATION DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Lay filter fabric with 12 IN minimum laps at splices. Spread filter material in same direction as fabric overlap. Patch tears and holes in fabric with piece of same fabric material large enough to cover the tear or hole plus a 12 IN overlap.


B. Lay drain pipe lines firmly bedded in filter material to true grades and alignment with invert elevation shown on Drawings. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, install pipes sloped to point of discharge with perforations down and joints closed. Make joints with sleeve type couplings or tapered couplings. Provide couplings suitable for holding pipe firmly in alignment without use of sealing compounds or gaskets. Face bells upgrade away from point of discharge. Use 1/8 bends for change in direction; use Y fittings at intersections.

C. Test drain lines with water to assure free flow before covering. Remove obstructions and retest until satisfactory.

D. Provide 4 IN (min) coverage of filter material around drain pipes. Compact filter material with vibrator tamper to density required to preclude settlement and to avoid damage to drain pipe and to filter fabric. Avoid damage to foundation.

E. Install standard pipe (non-perforated) to catch basins or manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 15064 and Drawings.

3.2 WALL DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Install wall drains in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, requirements of wall system designer, and Contract Documents. 1. Where foundation drains are incorporated, extend wall drainage composite into filter

material surrounding foundation drain. 2. Where weep drains are incorporated, connect to drainage composite as

recommended by manufacturer. 3. Reference Drawings for additional details.

B. Label, handle, and store drainage composites in accordance with ASTM D4873 and as specified.

C. Wrap each roll in an opaque and waterproof layer of plastic during shipment and storage. Do not remove the plastic wrapping until deployment.

D. Repair or replace, as directed by the Engineer, drainage composite or plastic wrapping damaged as a result of storage and handling.

E. Do not expose drainage composite to temperatures in excess of 71DegC (160 DegF) or below 0 DegC (32 DegF) unless recommended by the Manufacturer.

F. Do not use hooks, tongs or other sharp instruments for handling the drainage composite.

G. Do not lift rolls by use of cables or chains in contact with the drainage composite.

H. Do not drag drainage composite along the ground.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Asphaltic concrete vehicular paving.



A. Referenced Standards: 1. Federal Specifications (FS):

a. TT-P-115F, Paint, Traffic (Highway, White and Yellow). 2. Construction standards: State of Colorado, Department of Transportation, Standard

Specifications for Road and Bridge, as amended to date. 3. City of Thornton, Standards and Specifications for the Design and Construction of

Public Improvements.

B. Miscellaneous: 1. Should conflicts arise between standard specifications of government agencies

mentioned herein and Contract Documents, Contract Documents shall govern.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Asphalt design mix.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Asphaltic Concrete: Per Colorado Department of Highways, Section 401, Type “C”.

B. Line Paint: 1. Nonreflective. 2. White. 3. FS TT-P-115F.

2.2 MIXES

A. Submit mix design to Engineer for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION


A. Construct to line, grade and section as shown on Drawings and in accordance with referenced State Specifications.

B. Install a 6 IN Class 6 road base with a 6 IN thick asphalt surfacing Grading C in accordance with Section 401 of the CDOT specifications or match existing pavement if the existing pavement is of greater thickness.

C. A tack coat shall be applied immediately after the4 base has been compacted to the required density and shaped to the required profile and cross section. In case the tack coat is not applied immediately, the Contractor shall maintain the base in a smooth condition free from loose surface material at no cost to the Owner until the tack coat is applied.

D. Tolerance of Finished Grade: +0.10 FT from required elevations.

E. Line Painting: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces which are to receive paint. 2. Make completely dry before paint is applied. 3. Do not paint until minimum of 5 days has elapsed from time surface is completed. A

longer period may be required if directed by Engineer. 4. Do not apply paint over wet surfaces, during wet or damp weather, or when

temperature is below 40 DegF. 5. Lay out markings and striping in accordance with Drawings. Width of painted lines:

4 IN.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02515 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Precast concrete manholes, vault structures and appurtenant items.

a. Manhole sections and appurtenances b. Valve vaults and appurtenances

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities. 4. Section 03208 - Reinforcement. 5. Section 03308 - Concrete Materials and Proportioning. 6. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.



a. M198, Standard Specification for Asbestos-Cement Underdrain Pipe. b. Standard Specification for Highway Bridges.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. c. C478, Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. d. C923, Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures

and Pipes. e. D4022, Coal Tar Roof Cement.

3. Building Code: 2003 International Building Code. 4. Occupational, Health and Safety Administration (OSHA):

a. Standard 1926.74, Requirements for Precast Concrete.

B. Qualifications 1. Product Supplier:

a. At least 10 years experience in design and construction of precast concrete utility structures.

2. Professional Engineer in charge of structural design: b. Licensed to practice engineering in the state of Colorado.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions for requirements for the mechanics

and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:

a. Include detailed diagrams of manholes showing typical components and dimensions, reinforcements and other details.


b. Itemize, on separate schedule, sectional breakdown of each manhole structure with all components and refer to drawing identification number or notation.

c. Indicate knockout elevations for all piping entering each manhole. d. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Manhole rings, covers, steps and frames:

a. Neenah Foundry. b. Deeter Foundry.

2. Black mastic joint compound: a. Kalktite 340. b. Tufflex. c. Plastico.

3. Premolded joint compound: a. Ram Nec. b. Kent Seal.

4. Emulsified fibrated asphalt compound: a. Sonneborn Hydrocide 700B Semi-Mastic.


2.2 MANHOLE STRUCTURE COMPONENTS

A. Manhole Components: 1. Reinforcement: ASTM C478. 2. Minimum wall thickness: 5 IN. 3. Minimum base thickness: 12 IN. 4. Provide the following components for each manhole structure:

a. Base (precast) with integral bottom section or (cast-in-place). b. Precast bottom section(s). c. Precast barrel section(s). d. Precast eccentric transition section. e. Precast adjuster ring(s). f. Precast concrete transition section. g. Precast flat top.

5. Unless dimensioned or specifically noted on Drawings, provide manhole section with minimum 48 IN inside dimensions.

B. Nonpressure Type Frames and Cover: 1. Cast iron frame and covers: ASTM A48, Class 35 (minimum). 2. Use only cast iron of best quality, free from imperfections and blow holes. 3. Furnish frame and cover of heavy-duty construction a minimum total weight of 450

LBS. 4. Machine all horizontal surfaces. 5. Furnish unit with solid nonventilated lid with concealed pickholes.

a. Letter covers "SEWER" for all collection system manholes, "DRAIN" for all gravity unit drains returning flow to the headworks, and "STORM" for storm sewer systems.

6. Ensure minimum clear opening of 24 IN DIA.

C. Pressure Type Frame and Cover: 1. Provide covers meeting the requirements of Paragraph 2.2B and as modified below.


2. Furnish frame and bolted cover of heavy-duty construction. a. Equip unit with six (6) stainless steel countersunk 3/8 IN DIA by 1-1/2 IN long

bolts with stainless steel washers. 3. Provide solid lid and minimum 1/8 IN thick x 1/2 IN wide continuous strip neoprene

gasket. 4. Furnish unit with a minimum of six (6) anchorage holes and six (6) 6 IN long x 3/4 IN

DIA stainless steel anchor bolts.

D. Access Doors: See Drawings and Specification Section 08305.

E. Special Coatings and Joint Treatment: 1. Joints of precast sections:

a. Black mastic compound: ASTM D4022. 2. Aluminum components embedded in concrete:

a. See Section 09905 for protective coating for aluminum embedded in concrete. 3. Vertical wall surfaces:

a. Emulsified fibrated asphalt compound meeting ASTM D1227 Type I for all exterior and interior vertical wall surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DESIGN

A. Design all precast components to resist all loadings required by the building code and the Contract Documents for the Project application, including but not limited to soil, surcharge, hydrostatic, vertical live load, wind and seismic forces, as applicable.

B. Uplift: 1. Integral precast base sections shall be designed by the supplier to resist flotation, as

required. 2. Use groundwater elevation shown on the Contract Drawings for flotation calculation.

a. If groundwater elevations are not shown on the Drawings, use either 100 year flood elevation or top of manhole/vault structure as basis for flotation calculations.

b. Factor of safety against flotation shall be 1.25 (minimum).

C. Precast Lids: 1. Manholes or vaults constructed in paved areas shall be designed to support

AASHTO HS-20 loadings. 2. Manholes or vaults constructed in unpaved areas shall be designed to support a

minimum uniform live load of 100 pounds per square foot (PSF).

D. See Contract Drawings for additional loading requirements, as applicable.

3.2 MANHOLE AND VAULT CONSTRUCTION

A. General: 1. Construct cast-in-place concrete base slabs.

a. The contractor shall coordinate any deviations from the design shown in the Contract Drawings, such as uplift design requirements resulting from a change from cast-in-place to precast base slab.

2. Make inverts with a semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside contour of the adjacent sewer sections.

3. On all straight runs, lay pipe through manhole and cut out top half of pipe. a. See detail on Drawings. b. If pipes deflect at manhole, shape as specified in Paragraphs 2 and 4.

4. Shape inverts accurately and steel trowel finish.


a. For changes in direction of the sewer and entering branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert using as large a radius as manhole inside diameter will permit.

b. Pour base slab integral with bottom barrel section.

B. Build each manhole to dimensions shown on plans and at such elevation that pipe sections built into wall of manhole will be true extensions of line of pipe.

C. For all horizontal mating surfaces between concrete and concrete or concrete and metal, above established high groundwater elevation shown trowel apply to clean surface black mastic joint compound to a minimum wet thickness of 1/4 IN immediately prior to mating the surfaces.

D. For horizontal joints that fall below established high groundwater elevation shown, install a resilient O-ring type gasket or pre-molded joint compound.

E. Seal all pipe penetrations in manhole. 1. Form pipe openings smooth and well shaped. 2. After installation, seal cracks with, non shrink grout. 3. After grout cures, wire brush smooth and apply two coats coal tar epoxy to ensure

complete seal.

F. Set and adjust frame and cover final 6 IN (minimum) to 18 IN (maximum) to match finished pavement or finished grade elevation using precast adjuster rings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02930 SEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Seeding

B. Maintaining seeded areas until acceptance

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act and be equal in quality to standards for Certified Seed.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals 1. Certificates: State, federal or other inspection certificates shall accompany the

invoice for materials showing source or origin. Submit to Project Representative prior to acceptance of the material.


A. Grass Seeding: Shall be done within the following dates: From September 1 to October 15. Fall planting and seeding shall be done with the approval of the Project Representative only when the ground is not frozen, snow-covered, or in an otherwise unsuitable condition for planting. If special conditions exist that warrant a variance in the specified planting dates or conditions, a written request shall be submitted to or originated from the Project Representative stating the special conditions and proposed variance.


A. Seed: Deliver seed in sealed standard containers stating correct name and composition on the outside of the container. Seed damaged in transit or storage will not be accepted.

B. Material will be inspected upon arrival at project site.

C. Immediately remove the unacceptable material from job site.

1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Beginning work means acceptance of existing conditions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty for Seeded Areas: Warrant areas in seed to be in a healthy, vigorous growing condition, and for consistency and completion of coverage for a period of one year from date of acceptance as a full stand of grass. After time of seed germination, reseed any spots where seed has not germinated within the total seeding area. Continue this procedure until a successful stand of grass is growing and accepted by the Project Representative.

B. During the original warranty period, replace at once with comparable blend/mix, areas that die due to natural causes, etc., or which in Project Representative’s opinion are unhealthy.


C. Replacement will not be required in any season definitely unfavorable for seeding.

D. Install replacements in a manner to achieve quality as originally specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. All seed shall be furnished in bags or containers clearly labeled to show the name and address of the supplier, the seed name, the lot number, net weight, the percent of weed seed content, and the guaranteed percentage of purity and germination. All brands furnished shall be free from such noxious seeds such as Russian or Canadian Thistle, European Bindweed, Johnson Grass and Leafy Spurge. The Contractor shall furnish to the Project Representative a signed statement certifying that the seed furnished is from a lot that has been tested within six months prior to the date of delivery. Seed which has become wet, moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not be acceptable. Seed shall be certified to be a hardy strain of the following seeds at the indicated rates of pure live seed per acre.

B. Computations for quantity of seed required are based on the percent of purity and percent of germination: pounds of seed x purity x germination = pounds of pure live seed (PLS).

C. Seed and seed labels shall conform to all current State and Federal regulations and will be subject to the testing provisions of the Association of Official Seed Analysis.

D. Provide the following primed seed mixtures and rates:

Dryland Mix Seed: Species LBS per Acre Blue Grama 1.1 Sideoats Grama 3.2 Western Wheatgrass 5.7 Green Needlegrass 3.6 Switchgrass 3.6 Big Bluestem 7.8 Prairie Sandreed 5.0

2.2 FERTILIZER

A. For soil preparation of seed areas, the fertilizer shall be treble super phosphate (18-46-0) at a rate of 150 lbs/acre.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Areas to receive seed are indicated on the Landscape Drawings.

B. Protect existing underground improvements from damage.

C. Grade disturbed areas to a smooth, even surface with a loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake, and remove ridges and fill depressions, as required, to obtain positive drainage. Limit fine grading to areas which can be seeded within the immediate future. Moisten prepared seed areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting seed. Do not create a muddy soil condition.


D. Restore seed areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting.

E. Scheduling 1. Seeding/Sodding: Perform on a section-by-section basis, upon approval of Project

Representative and immediately after irrigation installation and finish grading except for seasonal limitations.

2. Embankments and Slopes: Complete in a continuous manner.

3.2 SEEDING APPLICATION

A. Seed shall be installed using a drill seeder. Drill seed immediately after preparation of bed. Fall seeding between September 1 to October 15. Where slopes allow, seed drilling shall be done in two separate applications crossing at opposite angles. Where cross drilling is not possible, drill seed in two parallel swaths. Drill specified seed mix with a grassland drill at specified seeding rate. Hydromulch with wood fiber mulch at a rate of 2,000 pounds mulch material per acre. Apply a natural plantago-based tackifier at a rate of 150 per acre. Apply the hydromulch in one pass and the tackifier in a second pass over the area. Areas not mulched within 24 hours after seeding must be reseeded with the specified mix at the Contractor’s expense prior to mulching.

B. Seed indicated areas within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of construction operations.

C. Planting Depth: Drill seed 1/4” depth.

D. Seeding Rates: 1. Seed Mix: 30 pounds pure live seeds/acre. 2. Apply half of seed (15 pounds/acre) in each direction or swath.

3.3 FERTILIZER

A. For soil preparation of seed areas the fertilizer shall be treble super phosphate (18-46-0) at a rate of 150 lbs/acre.

3.4 MAINTENANCE AND ACCEPTANCE OF SEED AREAS

A. Seed Establishment Period 1. That period necessary to achieve germination with no bare spots larger than 6-

inches square. Eighty percent (80%) grass coverage is required. 2. For first 12 months after seeding, mow area to a 4-inch height when vegetation is 6-

8 inches tall, mowing up to one time per month. Leave clippings on-site. After fourth mowing, apply a broadleaf herbicide at label rates and according to label directions. Make herbicide applications twice a year, about end of June and October 1.

B. Preliminary Acceptance 1. Upon seed establishment, the Contractor shall notify the Project Representative to

review the work. If coverage and germination is acceptable, the Project Representative shall notify the Contractor of Initial Acceptance.

C. Maintenance shall begin immediately after Initial Acceptance and shall continue until Final Acceptance.

D. Maintenance Requirement: Maintain seeded areas, including watering of seed areas, spot weeding and reseeding to achieve and establish a uniform stand of grass free of weeds and undesirable grass species.


1. Watering: the Contractor shall be responsible for watering seeded areas twice a day for a period of two weeks, or until seedlings are established. Apply only the amount of water necessary to establish and maintain seeded areas in healthy condition. Reduce amount of water applied after seed is established. Avoid standing water, surface wash or erosion from over-watering.

2. Protection: a. Provide suitable signs, erected at important points, notifying the public to keep

off. Provide barricades as needed. b. Repair: Reseed areas that have been washed out or are eroded or do not meet

coverage requirements per square foot, as stated in Paragraph 3.04, A, 1 above.

3.5 EROSION CONTROL

A. Area: Apply an erosion control blanket to any areas, which are vulnerable to soil erosion. 1. If Contractor fails to control such areas and soil erosion subsequently occurs,

Contractor shall re-establish finish grade, soil preparation, seed bed, and apply erosion control at his own expense.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03108

FORMWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork requirements for concrete construction.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 – General Requirements. 3. Section 03208 – Reinforcement. 4. Section 03308 – Concrete, Materials, and Proportioning. 5. Section 03431 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete.



a. 116R, Cement and Concrete Terminology. b. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. c. 347R, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

2. 2006 International Building Code with Colorado amendments.

B. Qualifications: 1. Formwork, shoring and reshoring (as applicable) to be designed by a professional

structural engineer currently registered in the state where the Project is located and having minimum of 3 years’ experience in this type of design work.

C. Design Requirements: 1. Design and engineering of formwork, shoring and reshoring as well as its

construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Design formwork for loads, lateral pressures and allowable stresses outlined in ACI

347R and for design considerations, wind loads, allowable stresses and other applicable requirements of the controlling local building code. Where conflicts occur between the above two standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

3. Design formwork to limit maximum deflection of form facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view to 1/240 of span between structural members.

4. Minimize the size of form ties and carefully select spacing to minimize potential for development of shrinkage induced cracks.

D. Formwork Removal: 1. The removal of formwork for walls, and suspended beams, shall comply with ACI

318 and 347R. 2. Develop a procedure and schedule for removal of shores and installation of

reshores and for calculating the loads transferred to the structure during this process. a. Perform structural calculations as required to prove that all portions of the

structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its own weight plus the loads placed thereon.

b. When developing procedure, schedule, and structural calculations, consider the following at each stage of construction.


1) The structural system that exists. 2) Effects of all loads during construction. 3) Strength of concrete. 4) The influence of deformations of the structure and shoring system on the

distribution of dead loads and construction loads. 5) The strength and spacing of shores and shoring systems used, as well as

the method of shoring, bracing, shore removal, and reshoring, including the minimum time intervals between the various operations.

6) Any other loading or condition that affects the safety of serviceability of the structure during construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Words and terms used in these Specifications are defined ACI 116R.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer and type of proposed form materials. d. Manufacturer and type of proposed form ties. e. Manufacturer and type of proposed form coating material.

2. Formwork designer qualifications. 3. Formwork and shoring removal procedure and schedule incorporating impact of mix

designs and ambient conditions to be expected; reference Quality Assurance paragraph.

4. If requested, submit structural analysis and concrete strength data used in planning and implementing form removal and shoring.

5. Certification of engineering design for formwork supporting elevated concrete construction, including walls and columns over 15 FT tall and elevated slabs and floor systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Stay-in-place forms:

a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation.

B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Special Conditions.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Forms for Surfaces Exposed to View: 1. Wood forms:

a. New 5/8 or ¾ IN 5-ply structural plywood of concrete form grade. b. Built-in-place or prefabricated type panel. c. 4 x 8 FT sheets for built-in-place type except where small pieces will cover

entire area. d. When approved, plywood my be reused.

2. Metal forms: a. Metal forms excluding aluminum may be used.


b. Forms to be tight to prevent leakage, free of rust and straight without dents to provide members of uniform thickness.

B. Forms for Surfaces Not Exposed to View: 1. Wood or metal sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. Do not use aluminum forms

where the aluminum will be in contact with fresh concrete.

C. Lumber: Straight, uniform width and thickness; and free from knots, offsets, holes, dents, and other surface defects.

D. Chamfer Strips: Clear white pine, surface against concrete planed.

E. Form Release: Nonstaining and shall not prevent bonding of future finishes to concrete surface.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Form Ties: 1. Commercially fabricated for use in form construction. Do not use wire ties intended

for securing rebar. 2. Constructed so that ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling

at surfaces of the concrete. 3. 3/4 IN minimum to 1 IN maximum diameter cones on both ends. 4. Embedded portion of ties to be not less than 1-1/2 IN from face of concrete after

ends have been removed. 5. Provide ties with built-in waterstops in all walls that will be in contact with:

a. Exterior below grade walls of all structures. 6. “Taper ties” shall not be used for below grade concrete construction.

B. Stay-In-Place Forms: 1. Ribbed expanded metal leave-in-place concrete forms commercially fabricated to

provide an intentionally rougher surface. 2. Hot-dipped galvanized. 3. Similar to “Stay-Form” by Alabama Metal Industries Corporation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Form Surface Treatment: 1. Before placing of either reinforcing steel or concrete, cover surfaces of forms with an

approved coating material that will effectively prevent absorption of moisture and prevent bond with concrete, will not stain concrete or prevent bonding of future finishes. A field applied form release agent or sealer of approved type or a factory applied nonabsorptive liner may be used.

2. Do not allow excess form coating material to stand in puddles in forms nor in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed.

B. Provide temporary openings at base of column and wall forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is placed, and to limit height of free fall of concrete to prevent aggregate segregation. Temporary openings to limit height of free fall of concrete shall be spaced no more than 8 FT apart.

C. Clean surfaces of forms, reinforcing steel and other embedded materials of any accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before concrete is placed.


3.2 ERECTION


B. Tolerances: 1. Variation from plumb:

a. In lines and surfaces of columns, pilasters, walls, and in risers. 1) Maximum in any 10 FT of height: 1/4 IN. 2) Maximum for entire height: 1/2 IN.

b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other exposed to view lines: 1) Maximum in any 20 FT length: 1/4 IN. 2) Maximum for entire length: 1/2 IN.

2. Variation from level or from grades specified: a. In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits and in arises, measured before removal of

supporting shores. 1) Maximum in any 10 FT of length: 1/4 IN. 2) Maximum in any bay or in any 20 FT length: 3/8 IN. 3) Maximum for entire length: 3/4 IN.

b. In exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other exposed to view lines: 1) Maximum in any bay or in 20 FT length: 1/4 IN. 2) Maximum for entire length: 1/2 IN.

3. Variation of linear structure lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls, and partitions: a. Maximum in any bay: 1/2 IN. b. Maximum in any 20 FT of length: 1/2 IN. c. Maximum for entire length: 1 IN.

4. Variation in sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings: Maximum of +1/2 IN.

5. Variation in horizontal plan location of beam, column and wall centerlines from required location: Maximum of +1/2 IN.

6. Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thickness of slabs and walls: Maximum of -1/4 IN, +1/2 IN.

7. Footings and foundations: a. Variations in concrete dimensions in plan: -1/2 IN, +2 IN. b. Misplacement or eccentricity:

1) 2 percent of footing width in direction of misplacement but not more than 2 IN.

c. Thickness: 1) Decrease in specified thickness: 5 percent. 2) Increase in specified thickness: No limit except that which may interfere with

other construction. 8. Establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and until final completion and

acceptance of Project, sufficient control points and bench marks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances.

9. Regardless of tolerances listed allow no portion of structure to extend beyond legal boundary of Project.

10. To maintain specified tolerances, camber formwork as required to compensate for anticipated deflections in formwork prior to hardening of concrete.

11. Where specific, more restrictive tolerances are called out on the Drawings, these specific tolerances shall govern.

C. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from concrete.


D. Place 3/4 IN chamfer strips in permanently exposed to view edges and corners of forms to produce 3/4 IN wide beveled edges.

E. At construction joints, overlap contact surface of form sheathing for flush surfaces exposed to view over hardened concrete in previous placement by at least 1 IN. Hold forms against hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at construction joint and to maintain a true surface. Where possible, locate juncture of built in-place wood or metal forms at architectural lines, control joints, or construction joints.

F. Construct wood forms for wall openings to facilitate loosening, if necessary, to counteract swelling.

G. Anchor formwork to shores or other supporting surfaces or members so that movement of any part of formwork system is prevented during concrete placement.

H. Provide runways for moving equipment with struts or legs, supported directly on grade, formwork, or structural member without resting on reinforcing steel.

I. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts and take up all settlement during concrete placing operation. Securely brace forms against lateral deflection. Fasten wedges used for final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement in position after final check.

J. Stay-In-Place Forms: 1. Support stay-in-place forms as required to maintain the formwork in proper position. 2. Hold the edge of stay-in-place forms back a minimum of 2 IN from all smooth formed

concrete surfaces. 3. Stay-in-place forms may be used at the Contractor’s options at:

a. Surfaces that will be backfilled with soil. Maintain a minimum of 3 IN of concrete cover over all reinforcing.

b. Roughened construction joints. c. Other locations approved by Engineer.

3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its weight and loads placed thereon.

B. When required for concrete curing in hot weather, for repair of surface defects, or when finishing is required at an early age, remove forms as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations or lack of support. See paragraph 1.2D for additional requirements.

C. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Perform any needed repairs or treatment required on such sloping surfaces at once, followed by curing specified in Section 03311.

D. Where no reshoring is planned, leave forms and shoring used to support weight of concrete in place until concrete has attained its specified 28-day compressive strength. Where a reshoring procedure is planned, supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has reached the concrete strength required by the formwork designer's structural calculations.

E. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that non-load-carrying form facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing shores and supports, facing material may be removed when concrete has sufficiently hardened to resist damage from removal.


3.4 RESHORING

A. No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its weight and loads placed thereon.

B. While reshoring is underway, no superimposed dead or live loads shall be permitted on the new construction.

C. During reshoring do not subject concrete in structural members to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads that structural members can adequately support.

D. Place reshores as soon as practicable after stripping operations are compete but in no case later then end of working day on which stripping occurs.

E. Tighten reshores to carry their required loads without overstressing.

F. Where no reshoring is planned, leave forms and shoring used to support weight of concrete in place until concrete has attained its specified 28-day compressive strength. Where a reshoring procedure is planned, supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has reached the concrete strength required by the formwork designer’s structural calculations.

G. For floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete leave original supporting shores in place or reshore. Reshoring system shall have a capacity sufficient to resist anticipated loads. Locate reshores directly under a shore position above.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03208 REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bar requirements for concrete construction.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05505 – Metal Fabrications.



a. SP-66, ACI Detailing Manual. b. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement. b. A497, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for

Concrete Reinforcement. c. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement (Including Supplementary Requirements S1). d. A706, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. e. A767, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. 3. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. D1.4, Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

a. Manual of Standard Practice.

B. Qualifications: 1. Welding operators, processes and procedures to be qualified in accordance with

AWS D1.4. 2. Welding operators to have been qualified during the previous 12 months prior to

commencement of welding.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Mill certificates for all reinforcing. d. Manufacture and type of proprietary rebar mechanical splices. e. Manufacturer and type of rebar adhesive anchor including installation

instructions. 2. Qualifications of welding operators, welding processes and procedures. 3. Rebar number, sizes, spacing, dimensions, configurations, locations, mark numbers,

lap splice lengths and locations, concrete cover and rebar supports.


4. Sufficient rebar details to permit installation of reinforcing. 5. Rebar details in accordance with ACI SP-66. 6. Locations where proprietary rebar mechanical splices are required or proposed for

use. 7. Shop drawings shall be in sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing without

reference to Contract Drawings. Shop drawings shall not be prepared by reproducing the plans and details indicated on the Contract Drawings but shall consist of completely redrawn plans and details as necessary to indicate complete fabrication and installation of all reinforcing steel.


A. Support and store all reinforcing above ground.

B. Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags with permanent mark numbers which match the shop drawing mark numbers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES

A. Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rebar adhesive anchors:

a. See Specification Section 05505. 2. Rebar mechanical splices:

a. Lenton Rebar Splicing by Erico, Inc. b. Richmond dowel bar splicer system by Richmond Screw and Anchor Co., Inc. c. Bar-Grip Systems by Barsplice Products, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60, deformed.

B. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706. 1. All instances of welding to be approved by Engineer.

C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or ASTM A497.

D. Smooth Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60 with metal end cap to allow longitudinal movement equal to joint width plus 1 IN.

E. Galvanized Rebars: ASTM A767 with minimum Class II coating thickness.

F. Proprietary Rebar Mechanical Splices: To develop in tension and compression a minimum of 125 percent of the yield strength of the rebars being spliced.

G. Welding Electrodes: 1. E90 meeting requirements of AWS D1.4.

H. Rebar Adhesive Anchors: 1. See Specification Section 05505.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, Hangers, and Other Rebar Supports: 1. Plastic-coated tips in contact with forms. 2. Plastic coating meeting requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

B. Utilize protective plastic caps at mechanical splices.


2.4 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: 1. Sheared lengths: +1 IN. 2. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties and spirals: +1/2 IN. 3. All other bends: +0 IN, -1/2 IN.

B. Minimum diameter of bends measured on the inside of the rebar to be as indicated in ACI 318 paragraph 7.2.

C. Ship rebars to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags. 1. Place on each tag the mark number of the rebar corresponding to the mark number

indicated on the shop drawing. 2. Mark numbers on tags to be so placed that the numbers cannot be removed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Tolerances: 1. Rebar placement:

a. Clear distance to formed surfaces: +1/4 IN. b. Minimum spacing between bars: -1/4 IN. c. Top bars in slabs and beams:

1) Members 8 IN deep or less: +1/4 IN. 2) Members between 8 IN and 2 FT deep: -1/4 IN, +1/2 IN. 3) Members more than 2 FT deep: -1/4 IN, +1 IN.

d. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within +1 IN. e. Lengthwise of members: +2 IN.

2. Minimum clear distances between rebars: a. Beams, walls and slabs: Distance equal to rebar diameter, 1.33 times the

maximum aggregate size, or 1 IN, whichever is greater. b. Columns: Distance equal to 1-1/2 times the rebar diameter or 1-1/2 IN,

whichever is greater. c. Beam and slab rebars shall be threaded through the column vertical rebars

without displacing the column vertical rebars and still maintaining the clear distances required for the beam and slab rebars.

B. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide splice lengths for reinforcing as follows: 1. For rebars: Class B splice meeting the requirements of Paragraph 12.15 of ACI 318. 2. For welded wire fabric: Splice lap length measured between outermost cross wires

of each fabric sheet shall not be less than 1 spacing of cross wires plus 2 IN, nor less than 1.5 x development length nor less than 6 IN. Development length shall be as required for the yield strength of the welded wire fabric in accordance with Paragraph 12.8 of ACI 318.

3. Provide splices of reinforcing not specifically indicated or specified subject to approval of Engineer. Mechanical proprietary splice connectors may only be used when approved or indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Welding: 1. Obtain approval by the Engineer prior to welding reinforcing. 2. Perform welding of rebars in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.4. 3. Have each welder place an approved identifying mark near each completed weld.


E. Placing Rebars: 1. Assure that reinforcement at time concrete is placed is free of mud, oil or other

materials that may affect or reduce bond. 2. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of both will be accepted as

being satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided dimensions and weights including heights of deformations on a cleaned sample is not less than required by applicable ASTM specification that governs for the rebar supplied.

3. Rebar support: a. Uncoated rebar:

1) Support rebars and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction loads or placing of concrete.

2) On ground, provide supporting concrete blocks or metal bar supports with bottom plate. a) Do not use concrete blocks to support slab-on-grade reinforcing where

the slab on grade is 6 IN or less in thickness. 3) Over formwork, provide plastic-coated metal chairs, runners, bolsters,

spacers, hangers and other rebar support. Only tips in contact with the forms need to be plastic coated.

4. Where parallel horizontal reinforcement in beams is indicated to be placed in two or more layers, rebars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above rebars in the bottom layer with clear distance between layers to be 1 IN. Place spacer rebars at 3 FT maximum centers to maintain the required 1 IN clear distance between layers.

5. Extend reinforcement to within 2 IN of concrete perimeter edges. If perimeter edge is formed by earth or stay-in-place forms, extend reinforcement to within 3 IN of the edge.

6. To assure proper placement, furnish templates for all column vertical bars and dowels.

7. Do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete unless approved by Engineer. Do not bend reinforcing by means of heat or pounding.

8. Do not tack weld reinforcing. 9. Embed rebars into hardened concrete utilizing adhesive anchor system specifically

manufactured for such installation: a. Drill hole in concrete with diameter and depth as required to develop the yield

strength of the bar according to manufacturer's requirements. b. Clean hole per manufacturer’s requirements. c. Place adhesive in drilled hole. d. Insert rebar into hole and adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.


A. Reinforcement Congestion and Interferences: 1. Notify Engineer whenever the specified clearances between rebars cannot be met. 2. Do not place any concrete until the Engineer submits a solution to rebar congestion

problem. 3. Rebars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing

steel, conduits, or embedded items. 4. If rebars are moved more than one bar diameter, obtain Engineer's approval of

resulting arrangement of rebars. 5. No cutting of rebars shall be done without written approval of Engineer.

B. Owner shall employ a testing laboratory to perform and report following: 1. Review and approve Contractor proposed welding procedures and processes for

conformance with AWS D1.4.


2. Test three samples of each bar size and each type of weld in accord with AWS D1.4. The tensile strength of each test shall be not less than 125 percent of the required yield strength of the rebar tested.

3. Conduct nondestructive field tests (radiographic or magnetic particle) on not less than one random sample for each 10 welds. In addition if any welds are found defective, test five previous welds performed by same welder.

4. Visually inspect each weld for presence of cracks, undercuts, inadequate size and other visible defects.

C. The Contractor shall ensure that all welders are qualified in accordance with AWSD 1.4.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03308

CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete materials, strengths and proportioning for concrete work. 2. Grouting:

a. Base plates for columns and equipment. b. Patching cavities in concrete. c. As specified and indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Related Section include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of Contract. 2. Division 1 – General Requirements. 3. Section 03108 – Formwork. 4. Section 03208 – Reinforcement. 5. Section 03348 – Concrete finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 6. Section 03350 – Testing. 7. Section 03450 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete.



a. 116R, Cement and Concrete Terminology b. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight

Concrete. c. 211.2, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Lightweight

Concrete. d. 212.3R, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. e. 226.3R, Use of Fly Ash in Concrete. f. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C33, Standard Specification Concrete Aggregates. b. C39, Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens. c. C94, Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. d. C138, Standard Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content

(Gravimetric) of Concrete. e. C143, Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. f. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. C173, Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Volumetric Method. h. C192, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Laboratory. i. C231, Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Pressure Method. j. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. k. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. l. C618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. m. C1116, Standard Specification for Fiber - Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete.


3. Corps of Engineers Specification: a. CRD-C621, Specification for Non-Shrink Grout.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Words and terms used in these Specifications are defined in Cement and Concrete Terminology ACI 116R.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's instructions. c. Concrete mix designs as required by Section 03350.

1) Manufacturer and type of proposed admixtures. 2) Manufacturer and type of proposed non-shrink grout and grout cure/seal

compound. 3. Certifications:

a. Certification of standard deviation value in psi for ready mix plant supplying the concrete.

b. Certification that the pozzolan meets the quality requirements stated in this Section, and supplier's certified test reports for each shipment of pozzolan delivered to concrete supplier.

c. Certification that the class of coarse aggregate meets the requirements of ASTM C33 for type and location of concrete construction.

d. Certification of aggregate gradation. 4. Test reports:

a. Cement mill reports for all cement to be supplied.


A. Storage of Materials: 1. Store cement and pozzolan in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos which will

exclude moisture and contaminants. 2. Arrange aggregate stockpiles and use in a manner to avoid excessive segregation

and to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. a. Wash coarse aggregates as required herein.

3. Allow sand to drain until it has reached a relatively uniform moisture content before use.

4. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. 5. Do not use bottom 6 IN layer of stockpiled material in contact with ground. 6. Store admixtures in such a manner as to avoid contamination, evaporation, or

damage. a. For those used in form of suspensions or nonstable solutions, provide agitating

equipment to assure thorough distribution of ingredients. b. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and temperature changes which would

adversely affect their characteristics and performance.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Non-shrink grout:

a. Master Builders Technology "Masterflow 713." b. Gifford Hill "Supreme Grout." c. U.S. Grout "Five Star Grout." d. Sika "Sika Grout 212." e. L & M, “Crystex.” f. Or approved equal.

2. Epoxy grout: a. Ceilcote. b. Exxon Chemical Co. c. Sika. d. U.S. Grout. e. Or approved equal.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cement: 1. ASTM C150, Type II or I/II for all cast-in-place concrete unless otherwise noted. 2. ASTM C150, Type I for precast concrete.

B. Fly Ash: 1. ASTM C618, Class F. 2. Non-staining. 3. Suited to provide hardened concrete of uniform light grey color. 4. Maximum loss on ignition: 4 percent. 5. Compatible with other concrete ingredients and having no deleterious effects on the

hardened concrete. 6. Produced by source approved by the Colorado DOT for use in bridge concrete. 7. Cement and fly ash type used shall correspond to that upon which selection of

concrete proportions was based in the mix design.

C. Admixtures: 1. Air entraining: ASTM C260. 2. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating: Conform to ASTM C494, Types A

through E, and provisions of ACI 212.3R. 3. High range water reducers (superplasticizers):

a. Conform to ASTM C494, Types F or G. 4. Pozzolan: ASTM C618. 5. Admixtures to be chloride free. Do not use calcium chloride. 6. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in establishing

required concrete proportions in the mix design.

D. Water: 1. Potable, containing less than 50 ppm of chlorides. 2. Clean and free from deleterious substances. 3. Free of oils, acids and organic matter.

E. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete:


1. ASTM C33. 2. Fine and coarse aggregates to be regarded as separate ingredients. 3. Coarse aggregate:

a. For lean concrete, concrete fill, and concrete topping less than 3-IN in thickness: ASTM C33, size number 7 (maximum 1/2 IN).

b. For all other concrete: ASTM C33, size number 57 (maximum 1 IN) or size number 67 (maximum ¾ IN).

c. Use only washed aggregates. 4. Fine aggregates to be natural, not manufactured. 5. Pozzolan or other additives shall not be used to compensate for alkali reactivity of

aggregates.

F. Maximum total chloride ion content for concrete mix including all ingredients measured as a weight percent of cement: 1. 0.10 for all cast-in-place concrete. 2. 0.06 for precast concrete. 3. Do not use calcium chloride.

G. Sand Cement Grout (referred to as "Grout" on the Drawings): 1. Approximately 3 parts sand, 1 part portland cement, 6 plus/ minus 1 percent

entrained air and water to produce a slump which allows grout to completely fill required areas and surround adjacent reinforcing. a. Provide sand in accordance with requirements for fine aggregate for concrete.

2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 3000 psi minimum, but shall be at least strength of parent concrete when used for construction joint bonding.

H. Nonshrink Grout: 1. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive, and nonstaining. 2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions at jobsite. 3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. Mass expansion shall not be

created by gas liberation or by other means. 4. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 6500 psi. 5. In accordance with CRD-C621.

I. Epoxy Grout: 1. Adhesive:

a. Ceilcote "HT648" grout. b. Exxon Chemical Company "Escoweld 2505." c. Sika "Sikadur Hi-Mod." d. U S Grout "Five Star Epoxy Grout." e. Or equal.

2. Aggregate: a. Ceilcote "HT648." b. Exxon Chemical Company "Escoweld 2510." c. Sika aggregate. d. U S Grout aggregate. e. Or equal.

3. Aggregate manufacturer shall be the same as the adhesive manufacturer. 4. The aggregate shall be compatible with the adhesive. 5. Each component to be furnished in separate package for job site mixing.

J. See Section 03311 for Grout Schedule of use.

2.3 MIXES

A. General: 1. Provide concrete capable of being placed without aggregate segregation and, when

cured, of developing all properties specified.


2. All concrete to be normal weight concrete, weighing approximately 145 to 150 LBS per cubic foot at 28 days after placement.

3. All ready-mix concrete shall comply with ASTM C94. 4. Blend in all components and additives at batch plant, unless noted otherwise. 5. Provide fly ash content for ready mixed concrete.

B. Minimum 28-Day Compressive Strengths: 1. Normal weight fill concrete ....................……….2,500 psi. 2. Normal weight lean concrete...............…………2,500 psi. 3. Pavement, curbs, sidewalks……………………..3,000 psi. 4. Normal weight all other cast-in-place concrete. 4,000 psi. 5. Precast concrete (vaults, manholes)..………….5,000 psi.

C. Air Entrainment: 1. Provide air entrainment in all exterior concrete resulting in a total air content percent

by volume as follows: a. 1-inch and 3/4 IN maximum aggregate size: 6 +/- 1 1/2 percent total air content. b. 1/2 IN maximum aggregate size: 6 1/2 +/- 1 1/2 percent total air content. c. 3% maximum air for interior concrete slabs to be trowel-finished.

D. Slump: 1. 5 IN maximum, 1 IN minimum measured at point of discharge for beams, columns

and walls, for mixes without superplasticizer. 2. 8 IN maximum after addition of superplasticizer (reference “Proportioning”

paragraph). 3. 4 IN maximum, 1 IN minimum measured at point of discharge into all other concrete

construction members. 4. Concrete of lower than minimum slump may be used provided it can be properly

placed and consolidated. 5. Provide additional water at ready mix plant for concrete that is to be pumped to

allow for slump loss due to pumping. Provide only enough additional water so that slump of concrete at discharge end of pump hose does not exceed maximum slump specified.

E. Proportioning: 1. General:

a. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement by methods of placement and consolidation employed without permitting materials to segregate or excessive free water to collect on surface.

b. Proportion ingredients to produce proper place ability, durability, strength and other required properties.

2. Normal weight concrete minimum cement content and maximum water to cement ratios:

Specified Strength (psi) at 28 days

Minimum Cement Content

(Sacks/CY)

Minimum Cement (Lbs/CY)

Maximum Water Cement Ratio By

Weight 5,000 6.5 611 0.42 4,000 6 564 0.45

3,000 5.5 517 0.48

2,500 5 471 0.50


3. Fly Ash:

a. For cast-in-place concrete only, 15 to 20 percent by weight of Portland cement content per cubic yard shall be replaced with fly ash at a rate of 1 LB fly ash for 1 LB cement.

4. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: a. Use in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Add to mix at batching plant.

5. High range water reducers (superplasticizers): a. Use in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Maximum concrete slump before addition of admixture to be 3 IN. Maximum

slump after addition to be 8 IN. c. Reference Section 03311 “Placing of Concrete” for additional requirements.

6. Concrete mix proportioning methods for normal weight concrete: a. Method 1:

1) Used when combination of materials proposed is to be evaluated and proportions selected to be on a basis of trial mixes.

2) Produce mixes having suitable proportions and consistencies based on ACI 211.1, using at least three different water cement ratios or cement contents which will produce a range of compressive strengths encompassing the required average strength.

3) Design trial mixes to produce a slump within 0.75 IN of maximum specified, and for air entrained concrete, air content within 0.5 percent specified.

4) For each water cement ratio or cement content, make at least three compression test cylinders for specified test age, and cure in accordance with ASTM C192. Test for strength at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C39.

5) From results of these tests, plot a curve showing relationship between water cement ratio or cement content and compressive strength.

6) From this curve select water cement ratio or cement content to be used to produce required average strength.

7) Use cement content and mixture proportions such that maximum water cement ratio is not exceeded when slump is maximum specified.

8) Base field control on maintenance of proper cement content, slump, air content and water cement ratio.

9) See paragraph hereafter for definition of required average strength. b. Method 2:

1) In lieu of trial mixes, field test records for concrete made with similar ingredients may be used.

2) Use of proposed concrete mix proportions based on field test records subject to approval by Engineer based on information contained in field test records and demonstrated ability to provide the required average strength.

3) Field test records to represent materials, proportions and conditions similar to those specified. Changes in the materials, proportions and conditions within the test records shall have not been more restricted than those for the proposed concrete mix.

4) Field test records to consist of less than 30 but not less than 10 consecutive tests, provided the tests encompass a period of not less than 45 consecutive days.

5) Required concrete proportions may be established by interpolation between the strengths and proportions of two or more test records, each of which meets the requirements of this Section.

7. Required average strength: Required average strength to exceed the specified 28-day compressive strength by the amount determined or calculated in accordance with paragraph 5.3 of ACI 318 using the standard deviation of the proposed concrete production facility as described in paragraph 5.3.1 of ACI 318



A. To assure stockpiles are not contaminated or materials are segregated, perform any test for determining conformance to requirements for cleanliness and grading on samples secured from aggregates at point of batching.

B. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Perform tests per Section 03350 requirements.

B. Perform strength test on any concrete to which water has been added at the jobsite.

C. Reference Section 03311 for grout use schedule.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03311 CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Mixing, placing, jointing, and curing of concrete construction.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 – General Requirements. 3. Section 03108 – Formwork. 4. Section 03208 – Reinforcement. 5. Section 03308 – Concrete, Materials, and Proportioning. 6. Section 03348 – Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surfaces Defects. 7. Section 03350 – Testing. 8. Section 03431 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 9. Section 07900 – Joint Sealants.



a. 116R, Cement and Concrete Terminology. b. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. c. 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. d. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting. e. 306R, Cold Weather Concreting. f. 308, Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. g. 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. c. C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. d. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete. e. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete

(Bituminous Type). f. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or

Expanded Rubber. g. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete

Paving and Structural Construction (Non-Extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

3. Corps of Engineers: a. CRD-C572, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Waterstops.

4. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA): a. Check List for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.

B. Qualifications: 1. Ready Mixed Concrete Batch Plant: Certified by NRMCA.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




b. Manufacturer's mixing and installation instructions. 1) Procedure for adding high-range water reducer (as applicable).

c. Scaled (minimum 1/8 IN per foot) drawings showing proposed locations of construction joints and joint keyway dimensions.

d. Manufacturers and types: 1) Joint fillers. 2) Curing agents (if proposed). 3) Construction joint bonding agent. 4) Waterstops.

3. Certifications a. Ready mix concrete plant certification. b. Waterstops: Products shipped meet or exceed the physical properties specified.

B. Samples: 1. Waterstops

a. Extruded or molded section: Each size and shape. b. Fabricated intersection fittings: Each size and shape. c. Must be representative in all respects:

1) Materials. 2) Fabrication. 3) Obtain approval before manufacture of sections.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. Copies of concrete delivery tickets. 2. Description of proposed curing method.

D. A concrete installation meeting shall be held prior to the initial concrete placement. Attendance will be required of the concrete supplier, contractors superintendent and foremen responsible for concrete placement, concrete placing representative and testing agency. The agenda will include but is not limited to the following: 1. Scheduling and notification of concrete placements and notification of testing

agency. 2. Delivery time from batch plant and maximum waiting period prior to placing

concrete. 3. Review of approved design mix including the limits of water that can be added and

who is authorized to add water. 4. Additional test cylinders to be made for any load in which water has been added on

site. 5. Curing procedures. 6. Temperature control. 7. Test cylinder storage and protection.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND MEETINGS

A. Adjust concrete mix, designs when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, strength test results or other circumstance warrant. 1. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved by concrete

supplier and Engineer. At Engineer’s request, revised mix design may be subject to additional testing prior to approval. This additional preconstruction testing shall be paid for by Contractor.

B. Preconstruction Conference 1. Required Meeting Attendees:

a. CONTRACTOR including pumping, placing and finishing, and curing subcontractors.

b. Ready-mix producer.


c. Admixture representative. d. Testing and sampling personnel. e. ENGINEER.

2. Schedule and conduct prior to incorporation of respective products into Project. Notify ENGINEER of location and time.

3. Agenda shall include: a. Admixture types, dosage, performance, and redosing at site. b. Mix designs, test of mixes, and Submittals. c. Placement methods, techniques, equipment, consolidation, and form pressures. d. Slump and placement time to maintain slump. e. Finish, curing, and water retention. f. Protection procedures for weather conditions. g. Other specified requirements requiring coordination.

4. Conference minutes as specified in Division 1.


A. Deliver: 1. Concrete:

a. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready mixed concrete. b. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Contractor at the time of delivery. c. Ticket to show:

1) Mix identification. 2) Quantity delivered. 3) Amount of material in each batch. 4) Outdoor temperature in the shade. 5) Time at which cement was added. 6) Time of delivery. 7) Time of discharge. 8) Amount of water available to be added at project site (if any), based on

water held back during batching and maximum W/C ratio. 9) Amount of water added at project site (if any) will be noted on delivery ticket.


A. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design has been approved by Engineer. 1. Approval of concrete mix design does not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to

provide concrete that meets the requirements of this Specification

B. Do not backfill against walls until concrete in supporting structure has attained the specified 28 day compressive strength.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Neoprene Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Permaglaze. b. Rubatex. c. Williams Products.

2. Materials: a. Closed cell neoprene. b. ASTM D1056, Class SC, 2 to 5 psi compression deflection, Grade SCE-41.

B. Asphalt Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Manufacturers:


2. W R Meadows. a. J and P Petroleum Products.

3. Materials: ASTM D994.

C. Fiber Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Materials: ASTM D1751.

D. Waterstops, PVC: 1. Manufacturers

a. Greenstreak Plastics Products. b. W R Meadows. c. Vinylex Corp. d. Or equal.

2. Cast-in-place type: Corp of Engineer’s Specification CRD-C572. 3. Materials; Virgin PVC compound not containing any scrap or reclaimed materials or

pigment. 4. Thickness: 3/8 IN, unless otherwise noted. 5. Profiles as listed, unless otherwise specified

a. 6 IN width: 3/16 x 3/8 IN x 6 IN with center bulb 1/4 IN ID, 11/16 IN OD, similar to Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #705.

b. Split Rib: 3/8 IN x 6 IN, similar to Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #724, or 3/8 IN x 4 IN, similar to Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #721. 1) Use only where specifically permitted.

6. Factory fabricated intersection fittings, to be field butt spliced onto straight runs. 7. Factory prepunched (12 IN centers, each edge) for wire supports. 8. See Drawings for application and other requirements.

E. Waterstops, Preformed – Strip Type: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Greenstreak (Hydrotite). b. Adeka Ultra Seal (MC-2010M). c. De Neef (Swellseal Plus).

2. Nonbentonite composition, hydrophilic. 3. Manufactured solely for the purpose of preventing water from traveling through

construction joints. 4. Volumetric expansion limited to 3 times maximum.

F. Water Swelling Sealant. 1. Single component, gun applied. 2. Moisture cured. 3. Minimum 70% volumetric expansion swelling capability. 4. Compatible with strip-type waterstop.

G. Epoxy Construction Joint Bonding Agent. 1. “Corr-Bond” by Euclid. 2. “Sika Armatec 110” by Sika Corp. 3. “CR 246” by Sto.

H. Sand cement grout, non-shrink grout and epoxy grout: See Section 03308.

I. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Specification Special Conditions.


A. The central concrete plant shall conform to the check list for certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities of the NRMCA


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General:

B. Complete formwork. 1. See Section 03108. 2. Remove earth, snow, ice, water, and other foreign materials from areas that will

receive concrete. 3. Secure reinforcement in place. 4. See Section 03208. 5. Position expansion joint material, anchors and other embedded items. 6. Obtain approval of reinforcement and formwork erection and placement prior to

concreting. 7. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow, unless adequate protection is

provided and approval is obtained. a. Plan size of crews with due regard for effects of concrete temperature and

atmospheric conditions on rate of hardening of concrete as required to obtain good surfaces and avoid unplanned cold joints.

b. Do not allow rainwater to increase mixing water nor to damage surface finish. 8. Prepare all construction joints for proper bond per paragraph 3.4C. 9. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from inner surfaces of conveying

equipment and formwork. 10. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated required depth when sloping to

drains. For foundations on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide slab of required uniform thickness, unless noted otherwise.

C. Preparation of Subgrade for Foundations On Ground: 1. Obtain approval of subgrade prior to placing compacted fill and foundations on

ground. 2. Maintain subgrade at a temperature above 32 DegF before concrete placing begins

for a sufficient amount of time to remove frost. 3. Moisten subgrade and compacted fill to eliminate absorption. Keep moist at time of

concreting. Allow no free-standing water on subgrade or soft or muddy spots when concrete is placed.

D. Edge Forms and Screeds: 1. Set accurately to produce specified elevations and contours of finished surface. 2. Sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds, if required. 3. Use strike off templates, or approved vibrating type screeds, to align concrete

surfaces to contours of screed strips.

3.2 CONCRETE MIXING

A. General: 1. Provide all concrete from a central plant conforming to Check List for Certification of

Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities of the NRMCA. 2. Batch, mix, and transport in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Control of Admixtures: 1. Charge admixtures into mixer as solutions.

a. Measure by means of an approved mechanical dispensing device. b. Solution considered a part of mixing water. c. Admixtures that cannot be added in solution may be weighed or measured by

volume if so recommended by manufacturer. 2. Add separately, when two or more admixtures are used in concrete, to avoid

possible interaction that might interfere with efficiency of either admixture, or adversely affect concrete.


3. Complete addition of retarding admixtures within one minute after addition of water to cement has been completed, or prior to beginning of last three quarters of required mixing, whichever occurs first.

C. Tempering and Control of Mixing Water: 1. Mix concrete only in quantities for immediate use. 2. Discard concrete which has set. 3. Discharge concrete from ready mix trucks within time limit and drum revolutions

stated in ASTM C94. 4. Addition of water at the jobsite:

a. See Section 03308 for specified water cement ratio and slump. b. Do not exceed maximum specified water cement ratio or slump. c. Incorporate water by additional mixing equal to at least half of total mixing

required. d. Perform strength test on any concrete to which water has been added at the

jobsite. See Section 03350. e. Prior to addition of water at the jobsite, a water/cement ratio analysis will be

performed by the Contractor from information provided on the delivery ticket. Provided that the total amount of water to meet the maximum water/cement ratio has not been added, the remaining water quantity to meet the maximum water/cement ratio may be added to the mix.

f. If the maximum amount of water has been added to the mix or if insufficient data is provided on the delivery ticket to determine the water/cement ratio, then no additional water may be added.

3.3 PLACING OF CONCRETE

A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304R, 304.2R, and 350. 2. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet or snow, unless adequate protection is

provided and approval is obtained. 3. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by

foreign materials. 4. Begin placement only when work of other trades affecting concrete is complete. 5. Deposit concrete:

a. Continuously to avoid cold joints. b. In layers of 12 to 18 IN maximum.

6. Locate construction joints at locations specified or approved by Engineer. a. Plan size of crews with due regard for effects of concrete temperature and

atmosphere conditions to avoid unplanned cold joints. 7. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete, which is being integrated with fresh

concrete, is still workable. 8. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by

foreign materials. 9. Spreaders:

a. Temporary: 1) Remove as soon as concrete placing renders their function unnecessary.

b. Embedded: 1) Obtain approval of Engineer. 2) Materials: Concrete or metal. 3) Ends of metal spreaders coated with plastic coating 2 IN from each end.

10. Do not begin placing of concrete in supported elements until concrete previously placed in supporting members is no longer plastic and has been in place at least a minimum of 2 HRS.

11. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation. a. Maximum free fall: 4 FT. b. Free fall exceeding 4 FT:


1) Place concrete by means of hopper, elephant trunk or tremie pipe extending down to within 4 FT or less of surface placed upon.

12. Perform the following operations before bleeding water has an opportunity to collect on surface: a. Spread. b. Consolidate. c. Straightedge. d. Darby or bull float.

B. High-Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): 1. Manufacturer's representative to instruct the Contractor as to the proper use and

dosage of the admixture. 2. Perform concrete slump test both prior to and after addition of the admixture to the

concrete.

C. Cold Weather Concrete Placement: 1. Comply with ACI 306R. 2. Do not place concrete on substrates that are below 32 DegF or contain frozen

material. 3. Maintain all materials, forms, reinforcement, subgrade and any other items which

concrete will come in contact with free of frost, ice or snow at time of concrete placement.

Temperature of concrete when discharged at site: AIR TEMPERATURE DEGF

MINIMUM CONCRETE TEMPERATURE, DEGF FOR SECTIONS WITH LEAST DIMENSION LESS THAN 12 IN

MINIMUM CONCRETE TEMPERATURE, DEGF FOR SECTIONS WITH LEAST DIMENSION 12 IN OR GREATER

above 30 60 55 0 to 30 65 60 below 0 70 65

4. Heat substrate, forms, and reinforcement so the temperature thereof will be between

45 and 70 DegF, when temperature of surrounding air is 40 DegF or below at time concrete is placed. Remove all frost from substrate, forms and reinforcement before concrete is placed.

5. Combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added, if water or aggregate is heated above 90 DegF.

6. Do not mix cement with water or with mixtures of water and aggregate having a temperature greater than 90 DegF.

7. Do not place foundations on ground if temperature is below 40 DegF or if temperature surrounding the slab will be below 40 DegF before structure is enclosed and heated.

D. Hot Weather Concrete Placement: 1. Comply with ACI 305R. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing, or add flake ice or well crushed ice of a size that will

melt completely during mixing for all or part of mixing water if high temperature, low slump, flash set, cold joints, or shrinkage cracks are encountered.

3. Temperature of concrete when placed: a. Not to exceed 90 DegF. b. Not so high as to cause:

1) Shrinkage cracks. 2) Difficulty in placement due to loss of slump. 3) Flash set.


4. Temperature of forms and reinforcing when placing concrete:

a. Not to exceed 90 DegF. b. May be reduced by spraying with water to cool below 90 DegF.

1) Leave no standing water to contact concrete being placed. 5. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking and/or slab curling due to evaporation of

moisture.

E. Consolidating: 1. Consolidate in accordance with ACI 309R except as modified herein. 2. Consolidate by vibration so that concrete is thoroughly worked around

reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of forms. a. Eliminate:

1) Air or stone pockets. 2) Honeycombing or pitting. 3) Planes of weakness.

3. Internal vibrators: a. Minimum frequency of 8000 vibrations per minute. b. Insert and withdraw at points approximately 18 IN apart for vibrators 2 to 3 ½

inches in diameter, closer for smaller vibrators. 1) Allow sufficient duration at each insertion to consolidate concrete but not

sufficient to cause segregation. 2) For 24 IN and thicker walls, insert vibrators at 6 IN from each form.

c. Use in: 1) Beams and girders of framed slabs. 2) Walls. 3) Vibrating concrete around all waterstops.

d. Size of vibrators shall be in accordance with Table 5.1.5 of ACI 309R. 4. Obtain consolidation of slabs with internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe

screeds, or other approved means. 5. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. 6. Provide spare vibrators on jobsite during all concrete placing operations. 7. Bring a full surface of mortar against form by vibration supplemented if necessary by

spading to work coarse aggregate back from formed surface, where concrete is to have an as-cast finish.

8. Use suitable form vibrators located just below top surface of concrete, where internal vibrators cannot be used in areas of congested reinforcing.

9. Prevent construction equipment, construction operations, and personnel from introducing vibrations into freshly placed concrete after the concrete has been placed and consolidated.

F. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that required quality of concrete is maintained. 1. Use truck mixers, agitators, and non-agitating units in accordance with ASTM C94.

a. Discharge conveyor runs into equipment specially designed for spreading concrete.

2. Metal or metal lined chutes: a. Slope not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3

horizontal. b. Chutes more than 20 FT long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may

be used provided they discharge into a hopper before distribution. c. Provide end of each chute with a device to prevent segregation.


3. Pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment:

a. Designed for concrete application and having adequate pumping capacity. b. Control pneumatic placement so segregation is avoided in discharged concrete. c. Loss of slump in pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall not exceed

1-1/2 IN. d. Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. e. Provide pumping equipment without Y sections.

3.4 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Construction Joints: 1. Locate joints as indicated on Contract Drawings or as shown on approved shop

drawings. 2. Unplanned construction joints will not be allowed. If concrete cannot be completely

placed between planned construction joints, then it must be removed. 3. Allow a minimum of 48 hrs before placement of adjoining concrete construction. 4. In general, locate joints near third point of spans of slabs, beams and girders unless

a beam intersects a girder at this point, in which case, offset joint in girder a distance equal to twice the width of the beam.

5. Locate joints in walls at underside of floors or slabs and at tops of foundations or floor slabs, unless shown otherwise.

6. Make joints perpendicular to main reinforcement with all reinforcement continuous across joints.

7. Provide roughened construction joints at all non-keyed surfaces and where shown or otherwise indicated on Drawings. a. Clean the previously hardened concrete interface and remove all laitance. b. Intentionally roughen the interface to a full amplitude of ¼ IN. c. Provide smooth surface as required to install strip type waterstops.

8. Provide continuous keyways where indicated on Drawings. Construction joint keyways shall have the following dimensions, unless shown otherwise on Drawings or directed otherwise by Engineer. a. Wall keyways:

1) Keyway width, not less than 1/3 and not more than 1/2 the wall thickness measured perpendicular to wall faces.

2) Keyway depth to be not less than 1-1/2 IN. 3) Place keyway in wall center unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

b. Keyways in footings, foundations, base slabs, and structural or elevated slabs: 1) Keyway height not less than 1/3 and not more than 1/2 the footing or slab

thickness. 2) Keyway depth not less than 1-1/2 IN. 3) Keyway in footing or slab center unless shown otherwise on Drawings.

B. Construction Joint Spacing – Unless otherwise specified: 1. General - Structures not intended to contain liquid:

a. Wall vertical construction joints: 1) 40 FT maximum centers. 2) At wall intersections, 10 FT maximum from corner.

b. Base slab, floor, and roof slab construction joints: 1) Placements to be approximately square. 2) Maximum side dimension of a slab pour to be 75 FT.

C. Bonding at Construction Joints: 1. Obtain bond between concrete pours at construction joints. Before new concrete is

placed, all construction joints shall be prepared and coated with epoxy bonding adhesive, cement grout, or other Engineer approved bonding product.


2. General - Use cement grout for all construction joints except as otherwise specified

herein. a. Roughen the surface of the hardened concrete to uniformly expose the coarse

aggregate. b. Remove laitance, loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the

surface, or at the Contractor's option, use an approved chemical retarder which delays but does not prevent setting of the surface of the mortar in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Retarded mortar shall be removed within 24 HRS after placing to produce a clean exposed aggregate bonding surface.

c. Dampen the hardened concrete (but do not saturate or allow standing water) immediately prior to placing of fresh grout.

d. Cover the hardened concrete of horizontal joints with a coat of cement grout (see Specification Section 03308). 1) Place grout as thick as possible on vertical surfaces. 2) Place 3 IN layer of grout in bottoms of wall lifts immediately before placing

specified concrete and at least 1/2 IN thick on other horizontal surfaces. Vibrate grout and first lift of concrete simultaneously.

3) Place fresh concrete before the grout has attained its initial set. 3. Use epoxy bonding agent at all joints in beams, girders, and slabs. Exception: 3 IN

of grout shall be used as noted above for all wall/slab and horizontal wall-to-wall joints. a. Joints receiving an adhesive shall be prepared, and the adhesive applied in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Epoxy adhesive shall have adequate working life to allow new concrete to be

placed while the adhesive has not begun to lose its effectiveness. Otherwise, use alternate Engineer approved bonding method.

D. Control joints: 1. Shall be located in members as indicated on Drawings. 2. Time cutting properly with set of concrete, if saw cut joints are required or permitted.

a. Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw.

b. Complete before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking. c. For wall control joints, chamfer strips or PVC inserts shall be used in lieu of saw

cutting.

E. Expansion Joints: 1. Do not permit reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to concrete

(except smooth dowels bonded on only one side of joint) to extend continuously through an expansion joint.

2. Use neoprene expansion joint fillers. 3. Seal expansion joints as shown on Drawings. See Section 07900 for additional

requirements.

F. Waterstops: 1. Lap all types of waterstop to create water tight joints. 2. Do not mix different types of waterstop materials in the same structure without

specific approval from the Engineer. 3. Contractor is responsible for waterstop selection and installation to provide leak-tight

joints, to the minimum standard shown in the Contract Documents.

G. Preformed strip type: 1. Install in a bed of swelling sealant on smooth surface of hardened concrete by use

of nails, screws or other means as recommended by manufacturer to prevent movement of waterstop during placement of new concrete.


2. Roughened joints shall be especially prepared during concrete placement to provide smooth surface for proper waterstop installation.

3. Waterstop to be continuous with splices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. Unless otherwise noted, use in joints against existing concrete and where indicated on Drawings.

H. PVC Waterstops: 1. Position waterstop accurately in forms. 2. Secure waterstops in correct position using hog rings or grommets spaced 12 IN

maximum along the length and passed through the edge of the waterstops. Tie wire to adjacent reinforcing.

3. Hold horizontal waterstops in place with continuous supports. 4. Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Do not displace reinforcement from

required location. 5. Waterstops to be continuous. 6. Splice ends and intersections with perpendicular butt splice using electrical splicing

iron in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Use prefabricated “T” and corner fittings.

I. Other Embedded Items: 1. Place sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or

for its support, prior to initiating concreting. a. Give Contractor, whose work is related to concrete or supported by it, ample

notice and opportunity to furnish and install embedded items before concrete placement.

2. Do not place electrical conduit, drains, or pipes in or through concrete slabs, walls, columns, foundations, beams or other structural members unless approved by Engineer.

J. Placing Embedded Items: 1. Position expansion joint material, waterstops, and other embedded items accurately. 2. Support against displacement. 3. Fill voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots temporarily with readily removable

material to prevent entry of concrete into voids. 4. Provide adequate means for anchoring waterstop in concrete.

a. Provide means to prevent waterstops in the forms from being displaced by the concrete.

b. Work concrete under the waterstops by hand, so as to avoid the formation of air and rock pockets, when placing concrete around waterstops.

3.5 FINISHING

A. See Section 03348. 1. Coordinate mixing and placing with finishing.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF GROUT

A. Grout Schedule of Use: 1. Sand cement grout:

a. General use. b. Construction joint bonding. c. Toppings or fill less than 1-1/2 IN thick.

2. Non-shrinking non-metallic grout: a. Filling form tie holes. b. Under column and beam base plates. c. Under equipment bases. d. Other uses indicated on the Drawings.

3. Epoxy grout:


a. Patching cavities in concrete. b. Grouting of equipment base plates where driving motor is 500 HP and above. c. Other uses indicated on the Drawings.

B. Grout Installation: 1. Sand cement grout:

a. Cure grout by one of methods specified. 2. Non-shrink non-metallic grout:

a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout. b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 HRS prior to grouting. c. Mix in a mechanical mixer. d. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout. e. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. f. Provide under beam, column, and equipment base plates, and in other locations

indicated on the Drawings. g. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the top of base plates. Do not

extend grout to top of metal bases, while tapering at 1:1 beyond this extremity. h. Provide forms where base plates and bed plates do not confine grout. i. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth. j. Where a taper is not possible, finish edges flush at the bottom of the base plate,

bed plate, member or piece of equipment. k. Coat exposed edges of grout with cure or seal compound recommended by the

grout manufacturer. Alternatively, protect against rapid moisture loss by covering with wet rags or polyethylene sheets; wet cure grout for 7 days minimum.

3. Epoxy grout: a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface. c. Completely fill all cavities without voids. d. Grout base and bed plates as specified for non-shrinking, non-metallic grout. e. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as required to assure proper

placement.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury immediately after placement, and maintain with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement, hardening, and compressive strength gain. Follow recommendations of ACI 308 except as modified herein.

B. Apply one of the following curing procedures immediately after completion of placement and finishing, for concrete surfaces not in contact with forms. 1. Ponding or continuous sprinkling. 2. Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet. 3. Application of sand kept continuously wet. 4. Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150 DegF) or mist spray. 5. Application of waterproof sheet materials, conforming to ASTM C171. 6. Application of other moisture retaining covering as approved. 7. Application of a curing compound conforming to ASTM C309.

a. Engineer’s approval is required for use of this for slab curing. 1) Method will not be approved during hot weather concreting (as defined by

ACI 305R) for such applications. b. Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations

immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from concrete surface, or when forms are removed.


c. Do not use on any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded or applied to unless it is proven that curing compound will not prevent bond.

d. All surfaces shall be covered with a minimum of two coats of curing compound. Curing compound shall be spray-applied. 1) Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next coat. 2) Apply second coat perpendicular to the application direction of the first coat. 3) One coat application will not be permitted.

C. Curing Concrete In Contact with Forms: 1. Minimize moisture loss from and temperature gain of concrete placed in forms

exposed to heating by sun by keeping forms wet and cool until they can be safely removed.

2. After form removal, cure concrete until end of time prescribed. a. Use one of methods listed above.

3. Forms left in place shall not be used as a method of curing in hot weather. 4. The term "hot weather," where used in these specifications, is defined in ACI 305R. 5. In hot weather, remove forms from vertical surfaces as soon as concrete has gained

sufficient strength so that the formwork is no longer required to support the concrete.

D. Continue curing for at least 7 days. If one of curing procedures indicated above is used initially, it may be replaced by one of other procedures indicated any time after concrete is 1 day old, provided concrete is not permitted to become surface dry during transition.

E. Cold Weather: 1. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R. 2. Maintain temperature of concrete above 55 Def F for a minimum of 3 days during

cold weather. This curing period shall not be reduced. 3. Use heating, covering, insulating, or housing of the concrete work to maintain

required temperature without injury due to concentration of heat. 4. Do not use combustion heaters unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of

concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide. 5. Interior slabs in areas intended to be heated shall be adequately protected so that

frost does not develop in the supporting subgrade.

F. Hot Weather: 1. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R. 2. Make provision for cooling forms, reinforcement and concrete, windbreaks, shading,

fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material. 3. Provide protective measures as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing

operations will allow.

G. Rate of Temperature Change: 1. Keep changes in temperature of air immediately adjacent to concrete as uniform as

possible, during and immediately following curing period. 2. Do not exceed a temperature change of 5 DegF in any 1 HR or 50 DegF in any 24

HR period.

H. Protection from Mechanical Injury: 1. Protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses,

heavy shock, and excessive vibration. 2. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction equipment,

materials, or methods, and by rain or running water. 3. Do not load self supporting structures in such a way as to overstress concrete.



A. Tests in accordance with Section 03350. 1. Perform a strength test on all concrete to which water has been added at the jobsite.

a. Perform strength test after water has been added and additional mixing has been performed.

B. Field samples of fabricated waterstop fittings (crosses, tees, etc.) will be selected at random by the Engineer for testing by a laboratory at the Owner's expense. When tested, they shall have a tensile strength across the joints equal to at least 600 psi.

C. Leakage at horizontal and vertical joints containing waterstops will be repaired to Engineer’s satisfaction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03348 CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete finishing, sealing, and repair of surface defects. 2. Crack repairs.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 – General Requirements. 3. Section 02515 – Precast Concrete Manhole Structures. 4. Section 03108 – Formwork. 5. Section 03208 – Reinforcement. 6. Section 03308 – Concrete, Materials, and Proportioning. 7. Section 03311 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing. 8. Section 03350 – Testing. 9. Section 03431 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete.



a. 116R, Cement and Concrete Terminology. b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. b. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete. 3. Federal Specification (FS):

a. CEGS 03300.

B. Initial Engineer-approved construction of each type of finish shall constitute minimum standard of quality for balance of construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Vertical Surface Defects: 1. Any void in the face of the concrete deeper than 1/8 IN, such as:

a. Tie holes. b. Air pockets (bugholes). c. Honeycombs. d. Rock holes.

2. Scabbing: Scabbing is defect in which parts of the form face, including release agent, adhere to concrete.

3. Foreign material embedded in face of concrete. 4. Fins 1/8 IN or more in height.

B. Installer and Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 1. Installer and applicator are synonymous.

C. Other words and terms used in these Specifications are defined in ACI 116R.


1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Schedule of concrete structures indicating finishes of concrete surfaces. 3. Certification of aggregate gradation. 4. Certification that products being used will not interfere with bonding of future finishes

(if applicable).


A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements for materials used.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty equal to specified manufacturer's standard warranty for all products used.


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Bonding agents:

a. Euclid Chemical Co. b. Master Builders Inc. c. L & M Construction Chemicals Inc. d. Sika.

2. Two component epoxy adhesive for crack repairs: a. Sika b. Euclid Chemical c. Contech Group


1.8 MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent (only for use in repair of surface defects): 1. High solids acrylic latex base liquid for interior or exterior application as a bonding

agent to improve adhesion and mechanical properties of concrete patching mortars. 2. Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex-Con." 3. Master Builders Technology Inc. "Acryl-Set." 4. L & M Construction Chemicals "Everbond." 5. Sika "Sikadur 32 HiMod".

B. Cement: 1. ASTM C150, Type II Portland except where Type I approved for use in parent

concrete.


C. Aggregate: 1. Sand: Maximum size #30 mesh sieve. 2. For exposed aggregate finish surfaces: Same as surrounding wall.

D. Water: Potable.

1.9 MIXES

A. Bonding Grout: 1. One part cement to one part aggregate. 2. Mix cement and aggregate. 3. Mix bonding agent and water together in separate container in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. 4. Add bonding agent/water mixture to cement/aggregate mixture. 5. Mix to consistency of thick cream. 6. Bonding agent itself may be used as bonding grout if approved by manufacturer.

B. Patching Mortar: 1. One part cement to two and one-half parts aggregate by damp loose volume.

a. Mix white Portland cement with gray Portland cement to produce color matching surrounding concrete.

2. Mix cement and aggregate. 3. Mix bonding agent and water together in separate container in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. 4. Add only enough bonding agent/water mixture to cement/ aggregate mixture to allow

handling and placing. 5. Let stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, until mix has reached stiffest

consistency to allow placement.

1.10 PREPARATION

A. Repair surface defects within 24 HRS after removal of forms. 1. Chip, wire brush or abrasive blast to completely open defects down to sound

concrete. a. If chipping is necessary, make edges perpendicular to surface or slightly

undercut. b. No featheredges will be permitted.

B. Repair all concrete defects occurring prior to the end of the Contractor’s project warranty period as directed by Engineer. 1. Concrete defects requiring repair shall include, but not necessarily limited to,

cracking, voids, honeycomb, air pockets, spalling, scaling, dusting, popouts, rust stains, exposed rebars or any other defect as determined by Engineer to be detrimental to the durability or structural integrity of the concrete member.

2. Method and materials used for repairing defects to be approved by Engineer.

C. Repairing Surface Defects: 1. Fill and repair using patching mortar mix specified in Article 2.3. 2. Clean surfaces to remove dust, dirt, laitence, form oil, grease, or other

contaminants. a. If required by bonding agent manufacturer, etch surfaces with a muriatic acid

solution followed by a thorough rinse with clean water. b. Test concrete to determine pH level and continue flushing with clean water until

surface pH is within acceptable limits. 3. Dampen area to be patched and an area at least 6 IN wide surrounding it prior to

application of bonding grout. 4. Brush bonding grout into the surface after the surface water has evaporated.


5. Allow bonding grout to set for period of time required by bonding agent manufacturer before applying premixed patching mortar.

6. Fill tie holes and areas where honeycombed or defective concrete has been removed. a. Fill tie holes in liquid containing structures with nonshrink nonmetallic grout. See

Section 03308. b. Other holes and surface defects may be filled with patching mortar. c. Consolidate grout or mortar into place and strike off so as to leave patch slightly

higher than surrounding surface. 7. Leave undisturbed for at least 60 minutes before finishing level with surrounding

surface. a. Do not use metal tools in finishing a patch in a formed wall which will be

exposed or coated with other materials. 8. Keep areas damp for 7 days or in accordance with bonding agent manufacturer's

directions.

D. Repair leaking cracks and joints with a low viscosity, swellable injection resin intended for leak repair. 1. Contractor shall coordinate injection apparatus, crack width, injection materials, and

proposed application with the manufacturer. 2. Clean cracks by removing loose material, dirt and other contaminants. 3. Prepare cracks in accordance with resin manufacturer’s instruction. 4. Remove injection apparatus and seal material from concrete surfaces. 5. Leaks shall be repaired to a stop-leak condition without cause for additional

compensation. 6. Injection method sand materials shall require approval by Engineer.


A. Do not repair surface defects or apply wall or floor finishes when temperature is or is expected to be below 50 DegF. 1. If necessary, enclose and heat area to between 50 and 70 Deg F during repair of

surface defects and curing of patching material.

B. Bonding Agent: 1. Apply to concrete slabs as required by manufacturer. 2. Use in conjunction with patching mix (reference Article 2.3).

C. Vertical Wall Surface Finishes: 1. General: Give concrete surfaces finish as specified below after removal of formwork

and repair of surface defects. 2. Finish #1 - As cast rough form finish:

a. Selected forming materials are not required. b. Prepare surface in accordance with paragraph 3.1 and repair the following

surface defects: 1) Tie holes. 2) Honeycombs deeper than 1/4 IN. 3) Air pockets deeper than 1/4 IN. 4) Rock holes deeper than 1/4 IN.

c. Chip or rub off fins exceeding 1/4 IN in height. d. Provide finish at unexposed surfaces such as foundations and backfilled

surfaces of walls not to be waterproofed or receive drainage composite. 3. Finish #2 - Smooth form finish:

a. Form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture. Use forms specified for surfaces exposed to view in accordance with Section 03108.

b. Prepare surface in accordance with paragraph 3.1 and repair the following surface defects: 1) Tie holes.


2) Honeycombs deeper than 1/8 IN or larger than 1/8 IN DIA. 3) Air pockets deeper than 1/8 IN or larger than 1/8 IN DIA. 4) Rock holes deeper than 1/8 IN or larger than 1/8 IN DIA. 5) Scabbing.

c. Chip or rub off fins exceeding 1/8 IN in height. d. Provide finish for:

1) Inside walls of tanks and manholes. 2) Exposed precast surfaces. 3) Exposed surfaces not specified to receive another finish.

4. Finish #3 - Smooth Rubbed Finish. a. Form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture. Use forms

specified for surfaces exposed to view in accordance with Section 03108. b. Prepare surface in accordance with paragraph 3.1-A. and repair all surface

defects. c. Begin finish operation within one day after form removal. d. Wet surface and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform color

and texture is achieved. e. No cement grout shall be used other than the cement paste drawn from

concrete wall itself by the rubbing procedure. f. Provide this finish on all exposed to view exterior surfaces.

5. Finish #4 - NOT USED (Grout Cleaned Finish). 6. Finish #6 - NOT USED (Cork Floated Finish). 7. Finish #7 - NOT USED (Abrasive Blasted).

D. Related Unformed Surfaces (Except Slabs): 1. Strike smooth tops of walls or buttresses, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed

surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces after concrete is placed. 2. Float surface to a texture consistent with that of formed surfaces. 3. Continue treatment uniformly across unformed surfaces.

E. Horizontal Slab Surface Finishes: 1. General:

a. Tamp concrete to force coarse aggregate down from surface. Screed with straightedge, eliminate high and low places, bring surface to required finish elevations; slope uniformly to drains.

b. Dusting of surface with dry cement or sand during finishing process is not permitted.

c. Water shall not be added to the surface to aid finishing. d. Reference Article 3.3 for tolerances. e. Unspecified slab finish: When type of finish is not indicated, use following

finishes as applicable: 1) Surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious applications:

Scratched finish. 2) Surfaces intended to receive roofing or membrane. Floated finish. 3) Interior floors: Troweled finish. 4) Exterior slabs, sidewalks, platforms, steps, and landings, not covered by

other finish materials: Broom or belt finish. 5) All slabs to receive a floated finish before final finishing.

2. Underside of concrete slab finish: Match finish as specified for adjacent vertical surfaces.

3. Scratched slab finish: After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class B tolerance, roughen surface with stiff brushes or rakes before final set.

4. Floated finish: a. After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do no

further work until ready for floating.


b. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Use wood or cork float.

c. During or after first floating, check planeness of entire surface with a 10 FT straightedge applied at not less than two different angles.

d. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots to produce a surface with Class B tolerance throughout (unless noted otherwise).

e. Refloat slab immediately to a uniform sandy texture. 5. Troweled Finish:

a. Float finish surface to true, even plane. b. Power trowel, and finally hand trowel. c. First troweling after power troweling shall produce a smooth surface which is

relatively free of defects, but which may still show some trowel marks. d. Perform additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. e. Final trowel when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. f. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling. g. Leave finished surface essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and

appearance and plane to a Class A tolerance. h. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove any defects that would

show through floor covering by grinding. i. Do not power-trowel concrete with more than 3% air content.

6. Broom or belt finish: Immediately after concrete has received a float finish as specified, give it a transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across surface.


A. Horizontal slab finishes will be accepted provided: 1. Applicable specification requirements are satisfied. 2. Water does not pond in areas sloped to drain. 3. Gap between a 10 FT straightedge placed anywhere and the finished surface does

not exceed: a. Class A tolerance: 1/8-IN.

1) Troweled surfaces. b. Class B tolerance: 1/4 IN.

1) Provide at all exposed to view concrete, unless otherwise noted. c. Class C tolerance: 1/2 IN.

1) Only acceptable for surfaces not exposed to view in completed construction. 4. Accumulated deviation from intended true plane of finished surface does not exceed

1/2 IN. 5. Accuracy of floor finish does not adversely affect installation and operation of

movable equipment, floor supported items, or items fitted to floor (doors, tracks, etc.).

B. Unacceptable finishes shall be replaced or corrected as approved in writing by Engineer, provided strength and appearance are not adversely affected. High spots to be removed by grinding and/or low spots filled with a patching compound or other remedial measures to match adjacent surfaces.

1.13 PROTECTION

A. All horizontal slab surfaces receiving applied toppings or hardener sealer compound shall be kept free of traffic and loads for minimum of 10 days following installation of topping or compound.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03350 CONCRETE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Materials and concrete testing as required to establish cementitious mix designs. 2. Testing of concrete materials and operations during construction for compliance with

Contract Documents. 3. In-place testing of concrete, if required. 4. Mortar, masonry grout, and concrete masonry unit testing, per Division 4.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 – General Requirements. 3. Section 02515 – Precast Concrete Manhole Structures. 4. Section 03308 – Concrete, Materials, and Proportioning. 5. Section 03348 – Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 6. Section 03431 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND PAYMENT

A. Owner: Approve Testing Agency and pay for construction testing of concrete and other cement-containing products produced by or for the Contractor for incorporation into the Work per the Contract Documents. 1. Payments for items as described under paragraph “Contractor” below shall not be

made from construction testing allowance.

B. Contractor: Retain the services of a qualified Testing Agency to perform testing services for the following: 1. Testing of materials and mixes proposed by the Contractor for compliance with the

Contract Documents and retesting in the event of changes. 2. Additional testing or retesting of concrete, grout, or other cement-containing

products occasioned by their failure, by test or inspection, to meet requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. Jobsite water addition: a. Owner shall charge Contractor for any additional strength testing required due to

jobsite water addition. 4. In-place testing of concrete as may be required by Engineer when strength of

structure is considered potentially deficient. 5. Other testing services needed or required by Contractor such as:

a. Field curing of test specimens and testing of specimens for determining when forms, form shoring, or reshoring may be removed.



a. T260, Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials.

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. b. 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):


a. C31, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

b. C39, Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

c. C42, Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.

d. C94, Standard Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete. e. C138, Standard Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content

(Gravimetric) of Concrete. f. C143, Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement. g. C172, Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete. h. C173, Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Volumetric Method. i. C192, Standard Method for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in

Laboratory. j. C231, Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Pressure Method. k. C780, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Mortars for Unit Masonry. l. C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. m. E329, Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for

Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. n. E447, Standard Test Methods for Compromise Strength of Masonry Prisms.

B. 2006 International Building Code with local Colorado amendments.

C. Qualifications: 1. Testing Agency:

a. Meeting requirements of ASTM E329 and C94 and be approved by Engineer. b. Provide evidence of recent inspection by Cement and Concrete Reference

Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards, and correction of deficiencies noted.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Testing Agency: An independent professional testing firm or service hired by Contractor to perform testing and analysis services on materials, mixes, structures, procedures, and other items as directed, and as provided in the Contract Documents. 1. Contractor selected agency must be approved in writing by Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


a. Concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use. Include results of all testing performed to qualify materials and to establish mix designs. Place no concrete until approval of mix designs has been received in writing. Submittal for each concrete mix design to include: 1) Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse aggregates. 2) Test for aggregate organic impurities. 3) Proportioning of all materials. 4) Type of cement with mill certificate. 5) Brand, class, and certificate of conformance, of fly ash proposed for use

along with other submittal data as required by Section 03308. 6) Slump and unit weight. 7) Brand, type and quantity of air entrainment and any other proposed

admixtures.


8) Total chloride ion content per cubic yard of concrete determined in accordance with AASHTO T260.

9) 28-day compression test results and any other data required by Section 03308 to establish concrete mix design.

3. Certifications: a. Testing Agency qualifications.

4. Test results: a. Strength test results on concrete placed during construction including dates cast

and tested, mix design, project description, slump, air content, atmospheric and concrete temperatures, and unit weights.

b. Strength test results on concrete core samples of in-place construction if required.

c. Results of load testing in-place concrete, if required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING AGENCY SERVICES

A. Review and test Contractor's proposed materials for compliance with the Contract Documents, including special building code inspection requirements.

B. Review and test Contractor's proposed cementitious mix design(s).

C. Conduct tests on concrete, grout, mortar, and other cement-containing products produced by or for Contractor for incorporation into the work during the construction of the Project for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Strength tests using the following procedures:

a. Secure concrete samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Obtain each sample from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding selection of test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement.

b. For each strength test mold and cure 5 (five) cylinders from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Record any deviations from requirements on test report.

c. Field cure one cylinder for the 7-day test. Laboratory cure the remaining. d. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. Test two cylinders at 28 days for

strength test result and field-cured sample at 7 days for information. Hold remaining 2 cylinders in reserve. 1) Strength test result: Average of strengths of two cylinders from the same

sample tested at 28 days. If one or more cylinders in a test manifest evidence of improper sampling, molding, handling, curing, or testing, discard and test reserve cylinder(s); average strength of remaining cylinders shall be considered strength test result. Should two or more cylinders in a test show any of above defects, discard entire test.

2. Frequency shall be as follows: a. Concrete sand cement grout; one strength test consisting of 3 IN DIA x 6 IN high

cylinders for each 4 HR period of grout placement or fraction thereof. b. Concrete topping, concrete fill and lean concrete; one strength test consisting of

6 IN DIA x 12 IN high cylinders for each 10 CY of each type of concrete or fraction thereof placed.

c. All other concrete; one strength test to be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 60 CY or fraction thereof for each mix type placed in any 1 day.


1) If total volume of concrete on project is such that frequency of testing required in above paragraph will provide less than five strength tests, tests shall then be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are provided.

D. Determine slump of concrete sample for each load of concrete delivered. Take sample as specified in ASTM C94. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C143.

E. Determine air content of concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with either ASTM C231, C173, or C138. Take sample as specified in ASTM C94.

F. Determine unit weight of concrete for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C138 or ASTM C567.

G. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test.

H. Payment responsibility: 1. Payment for services described in 3.1, A and B shall be made by Contractor at the

Contractor’s own expense. 2. Payment for services described in 3.1, C-G shall be made by the Owner.

3.2 OTHER AS-NEEDED TESTING SERVICES

A. Following services to be performed by Testing Agency when necessary and paid for by Contractor at his own expense: 1. Additional testing and inspection required because of changes in materials or

proportions requested by Contractor. 2. Additional testing of materials or concrete occasioned by their failure, by test or

inspection, to meet Specification requirements. 3. Perform strength test on any concrete to which water has been added at the jobsite. 4. Other testing services needed or required by Contractor, such as field cured test

specimens for determining when forms, form shoring, or reshoring may be removed. a. An extra strength test is required for concrete subject to either live load or shore

removal prior to 28 days after placing concrete.

3.3 DUTIES AND AUTHORITIES OF TESTING AGENCY

A. Testing Agency to inspect, sample and test materials and production of concrete as required by these Contract Documents and by Engineer. When it appears that any material furnished or work performed by Contractor fails to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents, Testing Agency to report such deficiency to Engineer and Contractor.

B. Testing Agency to report all test and inspection results to Engineer and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test reports to include exact location in the work at which batch represented by a test was deposited. Reports of strength tests to include detailed information on storage and curing of specimens prior to testing.

C. Limited Authority of Testing Agency: Any Testing Agency or agencies and their representatives retained by Contractor or Owner for any reason are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of Contract Documents, nor to reject, approve or accept any portion of the Work.

3.4 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR

A. Provide and fund all necessary testing services for qualification of proposed materials and establishment of concrete mix designs.

B. Use of Testing Agency and approval by Engineer of proposed concrete mix design shall in no way relieve Contractor of responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with Contract Documents.


C. To facilitate testing and inspection, perform the following: 1. Furnish any necessary labor to assist Testing Agency in obtaining and handling

samples at site or other sources of materials. 2. Provide and maintain for sole use of Testing Agency adequate facilities for safe

storage and proper curing of concrete test specimens on site as required by ASTM C31.

D. Notify Engineer and Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations (minimum of 24 HRS) to allow for completion of quality tests and for assignment of personnel.

3.5 EVALUATION OF TEST RESULTS

A. Test results for standard molded and cured test cylinders to be evaluated separately for each mix design. Such evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in accordance with specified quality standards. For evaluation of potential strength and uniformity, each mix design shall be represented by at least three strength tests. A strength test shall be the average of at least two cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days.

B. Acceptance: 1. Strength level of each specified compressive strength shall be considered

satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the

required specified 28-day compressive strength. b. No individual strength test falls below the required specified 28-day compressive

strength by more than 500 psi. 2. Field cured cylinders shall have compressive strengths of at least 85% of that

obtained from a corresponding laboratory cured specimen at same age. If this strength cannot be met, Engineer shall have the right to direct additional field curing methods and/or other corrective measures.

3.6 TESTING OF CONCRETE-IN-PLACE

A. In-place testing of concrete may be required by Engineer when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient as specified in paragraph 3.7 D.

B. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in structure or for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests shall not be used as the basis for acceptance or rejection.

C. Core Tests: 1. Where required, obtain and test cores in accordance with ACI 318 and ASTM C42.

If concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 DegF, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and test dry. If concrete in structure will be wet or subjected to high moisture atmosphere under service conditions, test cores after immersion in water for at least 40 HRS and test wet. Testing wet or dry to be determined by Engineer.

2. Take three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores shall be determined by Engineer so as to least impair strength of structure. If, before testing, one or more of cores shows evidence of having been damaged subsequent to or during removal from structure, damaged core shall be replaced.

3. Concrete in area represented by a core test will be considered adequate if average strength of three cores is equal to at least 85 percent of specified strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of specified strength.

4. Fill core holes with nonshrink grout. Finish to match surrounding surface when exposed in a finished area.


3.7 ACCEPTANCE

A. Completed concrete work which meets applicable requirements will be accepted without qualification. 1. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements but which

has been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted without qualification. 2. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which

cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected as provided in these Contract Documents. In this event, modifications may be required to assure that concrete work complies with requirements. Modifications, as directed by Engineer, to be made at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Dimensional Tolerances: 1. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than permitted by tolerances

shall be considered potentially deficient in strength and subject to modifications required by Engineer.

2. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines larger than permitted by tolerances may be rejected and excess material subject to removal. If removal of excess material is permitted, accomplish in such a manner as to maintain strength of section and to meet all other applicable requirements of function and appearance.

3. Concrete members cast in wrong location may be rejected if strength, appearance or function of structure is adversely affected or misplaced items interfere with other construction.

4. Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding limits of tolerances and which are exposed to view, may be rejected. Repair or remove and replace if required.

5. Finished slabs exceeding tolerances may be required to be repaired provided that strength or appearance is not adversely affected. High spots may be removed with a grinder, low spots filled with a patching compound, or other remedial measures performed as permitted or required.

C. Appearance: 1. Concrete surfaces exposed to view with defects which, in opinion of Engineer,

adversely affect appearance as required by specified finish shall be repaired by approved methods.

2. Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for defective appearance unless, in the opinion of the Engineer, the defects impair the strength or function of the member.

D. Strength: 1. Strength of structure in-place will be considered potentially deficient if it fails to

comply with any requirements which control strength of structure, including but not necessarily limited to following: a. Low concrete strength as specified in Article 3.5. b. Reinforcing steel size, configuration, quantity, strength, position, or arrangement

at variance with requirements in Section 03208 or requirements of the Contract Drawings or approved shop drawings.

c. Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a manner as to reduce strength.

d. Curing time and procedure not meeting requirements of these Specifications. e. Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes of temperature during early

stages of hardening and strength development. f. Mechanical injury, construction fires, accidents or premature removal of

formwork likely to result in deficient strength. g. Concrete defects such as voids, honeycomb, cold joints, spalling, cracking, etc.,

likely to result in deficient strength.


2. Structural analysis and/or additional testing may be required when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient.

3. Core tests may be required when strength of concrete in place is considered potentially deficient.

4. If core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain or if structural analysis does not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required and their results evaluated in accordance with Chapter 20 of ACI 318.

5. Correct or replace concrete work judged inadequate by structural analysis or by results of core tests or load tests with additional construction, as directed by Engineer, at Contractor's expense.

6. Contractor to pay all costs incurred in providing additional testing and/or structural analysis required.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03431 PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Precast and prestressed concrete.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03208 - Reinforcement. 4. Section 03308 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 5. Section 03350 - Testing. 6. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.



a. Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. 211.2, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete.

b. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard

Quality. c. A416, Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for

Prestressed Concrete. d. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete

Reinforcement. e. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. f. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural

Concrete. h. E329, Standard Specifications for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or

Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 4. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. A5.1, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. A5.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc

Welding. c. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. d. D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI):

a. MNL 116, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products.

b. PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 7. Building code:

a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition

including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.


B. Qualifications: 1. Provide precast and prestressed concrete units produced by an active member of

PCI. 2. Provide units manufactured by plant which has regularly and continuously engaged

in manufacture of units of same type as those required for a minimum of three (3) years.

3. Assure manufacturer's testing facilities meet requirements of ASTM E329. 4. Welding operators and processes to be qualified in accordance with:

a. AWS D1.1 for welding steel shapes and plates. b. AWS D1.4 for welding reinforcing bars.

5. Welding operators to have passed qualification tests for type of welding required during the previous 12 months prior to commencement of welding.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Sizes, types and manufacturer of neoprene bearing pads. d. Hardware to be utilized to support suspended appurtenances.

3. Shop Drawings and erection plans for precast units, their connections and supports showing: a. Member size and location. b. Size, configuration, location and quantity of reinforcing bars and prestressing

strands. c. Initial prestress forces. d. Size and location of openings verified by Contractor. e. Size, number, and locations of embedded metal items and connections. f. Required concrete strengths. g. Identification of each unit using same standard marking numbers as used to

mark actual units. 4. Calculations for members and connections designed by fabricator.

a. Calculations to be sealed by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the State in which the Project is constructed.

b. Perform calculations using the dead load of the members plus the superimposed uniform and concentrated loads shown on the Drawings and indicated in this Specification Section.

c. Indicate the following: 1) Design for maximum moment, maximum shear and maximum torsion. 2) Final top and bottom flexural stresses resulting from the stresses due to

maximum moment and prestress force. 3) Ultimate moment capacity. 4) Final top and bottom flexural stresses, ultimate moment capacity, and

ultimate shear capacity, if affected, for members with reduced cross sections due to openings or penetrations.

5. Submit certification, when so required on Drawings, showing that embedded connection items will adequately support the indicated loads. a. Connection items to have an ultimate load capacity of at least two (2) times the

required indicated load. 6. Concrete mix design(s) including submittal information defined in Section 03350. 7. Copies of source quality control tests. 8. Certification of manufacturer's testing facility qualifications.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors:

a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW, Inc. b. KSM Division, Omark Industries.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Embedded Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A36.

B. Bearing Pads: 1. Neoprene. 2. Section 18, Division 2 of the AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. 3. 60 durometer strength.

C. Cement: 1. Comply with ASTM C150, Type I.

D. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete: 1. ASTM C33 with coarse aggregate meeting the gradation for size 67 as stated in

ASTM C33. 2. Provide aggregates approved for bridge construction by the State Highway

Department in the state where the precast units are fabricated or in the state where the Project is located.

3. All fine aggregate to be natural not manufactured.

E. Water: 1. Potable, clean. 2. Free of oils, acids, and organic matter.

F. Maximum total chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cement and admixtures measured as a weight percent of cement to not exceed 0.06 for prestressed concrete and 0.10 for all other precast concrete.

G. Prestressing Strands: 1. Either 250K or 270K high tensile strength uncoated seven (7) wire strand. 2. Manufacture and test strands in accordance with ASTM A416.

H. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: See Section 03208.

I. Headed Studs: 1. ASTM A108. 2. Minimum yield strength: 50,000 psi. 3. Minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi.

J. Deformed Bar Anchors: 1. ASTM A496. 2. Minimum tensile strength: 80,000 psi. 3. Minimum yield strength: 70,000 psi.

K. Electrodes: 1. E70 series conforming to AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5 for welding steel shapes and

plates. 2. E90 series conforming to AWS A5.5 for welding rebar.


2.3 MIXES


B. Do not begin fabrication of units until concrete mix design(s) have been approved by Engineer.

2.4 DESIGN

A. General Design Requirements: 1. Design units and connections in accordance with ACI 318 and the PCI Design

Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 2. Design units for spans, dead load of members, dead and live loads indicated on the

Drawings with concentrated loads placed in their actual locations. a. Contractor shall verify weights and locations of concentrated loads imposed by

equipment. 3. Design units taking into account reduced cross section at openings and

penetrations. 4. Provide all reinforcing in units as indicated.

a. Where not indicated, design and provide all reinforcing and prestressing strands subject to approval of Engineer.

5. Design double tee flanges to carry all dead and live loads to be placed thereon. a. Do not place concentrated equipment loads on flanges but support the loads on

the double tee legs, except where noted on the Drawings.

B. Specific Design Requirements: 1. Flange connections shall be utilized to minimize differential deflections between

double-T units under crane-imposed moving loads. a. All deflections at crane supports shall comply with crane system requirements.

2. Connection details shown on the Drawings reflect a minimum stand and for the precast construction. All connection designs shall be verified/performed by the fabrication.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Do not fabricate units until Shop Drawings have been approved by Engineer and returned to Contractor and support locations have been field verified by Contractor.

B. Manufacture, quality, dimensional and erection tolerances of all units to be in accordance with both PCI MNL 116 and PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete.

C. Cast all members in smooth rigid forms which will provide straight, true members of uniform thickness and uniform color and finish.

D. Use non-shirk grout to fill all air pockets and voids, and to repair chipped edges.

E. Finish all repairs smooth and to match adjacent surface texture and color.

F. Where units are to receive concrete topping, provide units having heavy broom or scratched finish on top surface for bond. 1. Provide roughness of top surface to provide bond with topping and design for

horizontal shear at topping and unit interface in accordance with requirements of Paragraph 17.5 of ACI 318.

2. Make all other surfaces smooth.

G. Incorporate embedded plates, angles, and flange welding strips into members at time of manufacture. 1. Provide embedded items as shown on the Drawings unless prior approval is

received from Engineer to do otherwise.


2. Provide manufacturer's standard flange welding strips provided such welding strips are approved by Engineer.

3. Provide welding strips on all flange edges of all double tee units. 4. Provide maximum spacing for strips as shown on Drawings. 5. Cast lifting handles into units at or near support points.

a. Remove lifting handles after units are erected.

H. Cast openings larger than 6 IN SQ or 6 IN DIA in units at time of manufacture. 1. Make smaller openings by neat cutting or neat drilling by trades requiring them. 2. Coordinate sizes and locations of all openings before fabrication of units.

I. Make provisions for support of lighting fixtures, ducts, piping, conduits and other suspended work. 1. When drilled expansion bolts or powder-driven fasteners are approved for use,

coordinate prestress strand location with prestress concrete member supplier so that drilled expansion bolts or powder-driven fasteners do not hit or are drilled or driven into prestress strands.

2. Install powder-driven fasteners by means of a low velocity powder-actuated tool complying with requirements of OSHA. a. Assure that the load to be supported by each in place drilled expansion bolt or

powder-driven fastener does not exceed the maximum allowable load recommended by the bolt or fastener manufacturer for the concrete strength encountered and for the type, size and embedment length of expansion bolt or driven fastener installed.

J. Automatically weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors to members to provide full penetration weld between studs, bar anchors and members they are attached to.

K. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 and reinforcing steel per AWS D1.4.

L. Minimum concrete compressive strength at time of strand release: 3500 psi.

M. Mark each unit as indicated on the erection plans. 1. Place mark on non-exposed-to-view surface.

N. Coat or finish ends of exposed prestressing strands to prevent rusting.

O. Fabricate the following types of precast and prestressed units (all units to be made with normal weight concrete unless noted otherwise on Drawings): 1. Prestressed double tees of sizes indicated on Drawings.

a. Weight of double tees, based on an 10 FT-0 IN wide section, not to exceed following:

DEPTH NORMAL WEIGHT

CONCRETE 24 IN 47 psf 32 IN 64 psf


A. During production of precast concrete units, conduct strength tests of concrete placed in units as required in Specification Section 03350 for concrete placed during fabrication. 1. Results of strength tests to be sent immediately to Engineer, Contractor and Owner. 2. Test reports to indicate units they represent.

B. When approved by Engineer, strength tests may be made by precast manufacturer after he has submitted certification that his testing facilities meet the requirements of ASTM E329.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify acceptability and location of supports to receive units. 1. Check bearing surfaces to determine that they are level and uniform.

B. Verify compressive strengths of concrete and masonry supports. 1. Do not start erection of units until supports have reached their 28 day required

compressive strengths. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sequence erection to provide a balance of loads across supports. B. Give consideration to possible lack of stability or capacity of partially completed

structure.

C. Contractor to be responsible for guying, shoring, and bracing of frame, walls and individual members as necessary to resist forces due to wind, erection, or any other source that may occur before structure is completed.

D. Use only erection equipment adequate for placing units at lines and elevations indicated on Drawings. 1. Do not damage units or existing construction during erection. 2. Erect units using lifting handles cast into the units.

E. Place each leg of all double tees on a 3/8 IN thick neoprene pad held 1 IN back from edge of support. 1. Pad dimensions equal to length of bearing -1 IN x bearing width +2 IN.

F. After erection, verify that there is no direct contact between bottom of units and supporting members. 1. Where direct contact occurs, install additional layers of bearing material to raise

units off supports.

G. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 and reinforcing steel per AWS D1.4.

H. After all precast units are erected and all precast unit connections have been made, coat all exposed surfaces of the connections with the same prime and finish paint as required on the adjacent precast concrete units. 1. See Section 09905.


A. Causes for rejection of units include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Cracked units. 2. Chipped, broken, or spalled edges. 3. Units not within allowable casting tolerances. 4. Voids or air pockets which, in opinion of Engineer, are too numerous or too large. 5. Non-uniform finish or appearance. 6. Low concrete strength. 7. Improperly placed embedded items and/or openings. 8. Exposed wire mesh, reinforcing or prestressing strands. 9. Damages caused to prestressing by post-installed anchors or other appurtenant

items.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 04050 COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cold weather protection. 2. Hot weather protection.



A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)/American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)/The

Masonry Society (TMS): a. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specification for Masonry Structures.

2. Brick Industry Association (BIA): a. Technical Notes 1 - All-Weather Construction.

3. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAWC): a. Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Masonry Construction.

4. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA): a. TEK 3-1C, All Weather Concrete Masonry Construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot Weather Construction: Per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 hot weather construction is defined as occurring when ambient temperatures exceed 100 DegF or 90 DegF when the wind velocity is greater than 8 mph.

B. Cold Weather Construction: Per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Cold Weather Construction is defined as occurring when ambient temperature falls below 40 DegF or when the temperature of the masonry units is below 40 DegF.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION AND APPLICATION

A. General: 1. Comply with NCMA and BIA recommendations and practices. 2. Do not use frozen or ice coated materials. 3. At end of each day or at shutdown, cover tops of all walls not enclosed or sheltered

with clear polyethylene minimum 6 mil thick. Extend down each side of wall minimum of 16 IN and secure.

B. Temporary Facilities: 1. Construct and maintain temporary protection required to permit continuous and

orderly progress of work. 2. Provide and maintain heat sufficient to assure temperature above 32 DegF within

protected areas. 3. Remove all temporary facilities after completion of work.


C. Cold Weather Construction and Protection Requirements Prior to and During Installation: 1. Air temperature: 32 to 40 DegF.

a. Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 DegF.

2. Air temperature: 25 to 32 DegF. a. Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40

and 120 DegF. b. Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used.

3. Air temperature: Below 25 DegF. a. Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40

and 120 DegF. b. Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used. c. Maintain temperature of units until laid at not less than 20 DegF. d. Provide heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain air

temperature above freezing. e. Provide windbreaks or shelters when wind is in excess of 15 mph.

1) Wind breaks or shelters shall be translucent.

D. Cold Weather Construction and Protection Requirements after Installation: 1. Air temperature: 32 to 40 DegF.

a. Protect from rain or snow for not less than 24 HRS by covering with weather-resistive translucent membrane.

2. Air temperature: 25 to 32 DegF. a. Completely cover with translucent weather-resistive membrane for not less than

24 HRS. 3. Air temperature: 20 to 25 DegF.

a. Completely protect with insulating blankets for not less than 24 HRS or provide other protection approved by Engineer.

4. Air temperature: Below 20 DegF. a. Provide enclosed translucent shelters and heating to maintain air temperature

on each side of wall above 32 DegF for 24 HRS. b. Do not allow rapid drop in temperature after removal of heat.

E. Hot Weather Construction and Protection Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of IMIAWC and ACI/ASCE/TMS. 2. Storage and preparation of materials.

a. Cover or shade masonry units and mortar materials from direct sun. b. Maintain sand in a damp loose condition.

1) Sand moisture shall be maintained at minimum 8 percent. 2) Sprinkle with cool water as required to maintain moisture content.

c. Use cool water for mixing mortars. d. Avoid using tools and equipment that have been sitting in the sun.

1) Sprinkle mortar boards, mortar pans, wheel barrows, mixers, etc. with cool water.

e. Wet brick units having high initial rates of absorption. f. Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to use.

3. Installation: a. Masonry units shall be placed within one minute of the spreading of the mortar.

1) Mortar beds shall not be spread more than 4 FT ahead of the masonry unit being placed.

b. Provide wind screens and shading partitions as required to eliminate direct sunlight exposure.

c. Wet installed units using fog spray of clean water. d. Cover installed work immediately after installation to slow rate of loss of

moisture from units.


e. Fog-spray new masonry work until damp. Repeat fog spraying minimum of three times per day until masonry work has cured for 72 HRS. 1) In high humidity conditions, Engineer reserves the right to discontinue fog

spraying if operation is found to be introducing excessive amounts of moisture into the Work.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 04110 CEMENT AND LIME MORTARS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cement and lime mortars and masonry grout.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03308 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 4. Section 04210 - Brick Masonry. 5. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers/The Masonry

Society (ACI/ASCE/TMS). a. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specification for Masonry Structures.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C109, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement

Mortars (Using 2 IN or Cube Specimens). b. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. c. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. d. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. e. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. f. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. g. C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. h. C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. i. C780, Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of

Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. j. C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Fire Resistance Directory.

4. Building code: a. International Code Conference (ICC):

1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition including all State of Colorado amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

B. Qualifications: 1. Testing Laboratory shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the testing of

mortar and grout. 2. Technician conducting tests shall have minimum of 5 years experience in the testing

of mortar and grout.

C. Mock-Ups: 1. Provide mortar for mock-up panels specified in Section 04210 and Section 04220.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Coarse grout and fine grout are defined by the aggregate size used in accordance with ASTM C476.

B. Coarse aggregate and fine aggregate are defined in ASTM C404, Table 1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Proposed mortar mix design. c. Proposed masonry grout mix design.

3. Test results: a. Strength test results for all mortar and masonry grout (both coarse and fine

grout) placed during construction. b. Preconstruction mortar test results. c. Preconstruction masonry grout test results. d. Slump test results of all masonry grout placed during construction.

B. Samples: 1. Actual colored mortar samples for color selection by Engineer. Color card and

plastic simulations are not acceptable.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Qualifications of testing lab and technician.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C150, Type I or II. 2. No air entrainment. 3. Natural color. 4. Maximum percent of alkalis: 0.60 in accordance with ASTM C150, Table 1A.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 1. Type SA not acceptable. 2. Lime substitutes are not acceptable.

C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, free of gypsum.

D. Masonry Grout: ASTM C476.

E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.

F. Water: Potable.

G. Mortar Pigments: 1. Commercial colorants suitably compounded for use in mortar mixes. Do not exceed

manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratios.


2.2 MIXES

A. Type "S" mortar shall be used: 1. Wherever a fire-resistance classification or rating is shown for unit masonry

construction provide mortar of type which has been tested and listed by UL for construction indicated.

2. Comply with ASTM C270, Table No. 1. 3. Do not use masonry cement. 4. Mix materials minimum of 3 minutes and maximum of 5 minutes. 5. Adjust consistency to satisfaction of mason. 6. Use no anti-freeze additives.

B. Masonry Grout: 1. Comply with ASTM C476. 2. Use no anti-freeze additives. 3. Mix 5 minutes minimum. 4. Slump: 8 to 11 IN. 5. At Contractor's option, manufactured grout meeting the above minimum

requirements may be used. 6. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 2,000 psi.


A. Perform preconstruction laboratory tests on proposed mortar and masonry grout mix prior to start of masonry work. 1. Perform tests far enough in advance so that any necessary retesting can be

accomplished before masonry construction begins. a. Test mortar per ASTM C109. b. Test grout per ASTM C1019.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Use coarse grout in spaces with least dimension over 2 IN.

C. Use fine grout for grouting door frames. 1. Grout all door frames unless specifically noted not to be grouted.

D. Consolidate all grout while installing. 1. Consolidate grout pours 12 IN or less in height by mechanical vibration or by

puddling. 2. Consolidate grout pours exceeding 12 IN in height by mechanical vibration and

reconsolidate by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred.

E. Use colored mortar for veneer masonry.


A. Mortar: 1. Perform one ASTM C780 annex A-1, A-5, A-6 and A-7 test per week on field mortar

used during masonry construction. 2. If standard gray mortar begins to stiffen, it may be retempered by adding water and

remixing.


a. Standard gray mortar shall not be retempered more than one time. 3. Colored mortar shall not be retempered. 4. All mortar must be used within 1-1/2 HRS after initial mixing.

B. Engineer reserves right to alter mix design based on initial rate of absorption of masonry units.

C. Masonry Grout: 1. Use grout within 1-1/2 HRS after initial mixing. 2. Use no grout after it has begun to set. 3. Do not retemper grout after initial mixing. 4. Place grout in lifts not exceeding 4 FT.

D. Masonry Grout Testing: 1. Conduct compressive strength tests and slump tests on all masonry grout used

during masonry construction. 2. Perform all compressive strength test sampling, testing and reporting per ASTM

C1019. 3. Perform all slump test sampling, testing, and reporting per ASTM C143. 4. Frequency of sampling: One sample (three specimens) collected each grouting

operation during masonry construction. 5. Compressive strength testing:

a. One strength test shall be the average of three specimens from the same sample, tested at 28 days.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 04155 MASONRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04210 - Brick Masonry. 4. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry. 5. Section 05505 - Metal Fabrications.



a. A82, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. c. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. d. A951, Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement. e. A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

f. D624, Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.

g. D2287, Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds.

2. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC):

1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

B. Mock-Ups: 1. Provide specified products for inclusion into mock-up panels required by Section

04210. 2. Coordinate with built-in items and veneer coursing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Detailed drawings of all factory or field formed thru wall flashing. d. Tear resistance of flashing material. e. Manufacturer's recommendations for flashing adhesive. f. Manufacturer's data sheet on each product.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Masonry anchors, horizontal joint reinforcing veneer anchorage system and

miscellaneous anchors: a. Dur-O-Wal. b. Heckman. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Wire Bond.

2. Thru wall flashing: a. EPDM:

1) Carlisle Syntech Systems, Inc. 2) Firestone Building Products Co.

b. Stainless steel: 1) Heckman Building Products. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

3. Preformed control joint inserts: a. Dur-O-Wal. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

4. Grout screen: a. Wire Bond. b. Dur-O-Wal. c. Heckman Building Products. d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.


2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Wall Flashing: 1. Stainless steel, ASTM A167 Type 304, 2D finish, 26 GA. 2. Maximum lengths of 10 FT. 3. Factory fabricated. 4. Factory fabricated one-piece inside and outside corners with a minimum return of 16

IN on each leg. a. Weld all joints and grind smooth.

5. Provide 1/2 IN drip on exterior side of wall. 6. Refer to the Drawings for required profiles. 7. Lap sealant: VULKEM 922.

B. Thru Wall Flashing: 1. 40 mil EPDM manufactured specifically for thru wall flashing.

a. Tear resistance: ASTM D624, 150 LB/IN minimum. b. Width as required.

1) Provide single piece full width, no horizontal joints will be allowed unless approved in writing by Engineer.

c. Factory precut wherever possible. d. Factory fabricated inside and outside corners when available.

C. Flashing Adhesive: As recommended by flashing manufacturer for sealing laps, sealing to vertical masonry and concrete surfaces and sealing to stainless steel surfaces.

D. Weep Ropes: 5/16 IN diameter braided cotton sash cord.

E. Veneer Anchorage System for New Concrete Back-up: 1. Anchors, dovetail:


a. Galvanized, ASTM A153. b. 16 GA corrugated steel with dovetail.

1) 1 IN wide x 5 1/2 IN long minimum or as required by Project conditions. a) Provide minimum 2 IN embedment into veneer mortar joint.

c. Or 3/16 IN DIA triangular wire tie. 1) Length as required to provide minimum 2 IN embed into veneer mortar joint. 2) Similar to Dur-O-Wal # D/A 720 Series

2. Dovetail slots: a. Galvanized, ASTM A153. b. 22 GA steel. c. 1 IN wide, 1 IN deep, nominal 5/8 IN throat with filler.

F. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. General:

a. Conform to ASTM A951. b. Cold drawn steel wire, ASTM A82. c. 9 GA side rods. d. 9 GA cross rods. e. Galvanized, ASTM A153, Class B2. f. Prefabricated corner and tee sections with minimum length of 30 IN from point

of intersection. 2. Single wythe wall joint reinforcing:

a. Ladder design at walls with vertical reinforcing. b. Truss design at walls without vertical reinforcing.

G. Anchors at Intersecting Load-Bearing Walls (Rigid Steel Masonry Anchors): 1 x 1/4 x 24 IN (or length as shown on Drawings or as required by wall condition) galvanized steel, ASTM A153, G60 minimum coating, with ends turned up 2 IN.

H. Grout Screen: 1. Polypropylene monofilament. 2. 1/4 x 1/4 IN mesh. 3. Width of grout screen to be 2 IN less than nominal width of CMU.

I. Preformed Control Joint Inserts: 1. ASTM D2287. 2. Hardness: 85 durometer. 3. Shear strength: Minimum 2831 LBS/per/FT/joint. 4. Similar to Dur-O-Wal #D/A 2002 or Hohmann & Barnard #VS Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Thru Wall Flashing: 1. Install to provide positive drainage of cavity moisture. 2. Extend flashing horizontally beyond each edge of lintel or sills to next vertical mortar

joint but not less than 4 IN and turn up edge one (1) full veneer course. a. Seal all joints.

3. Where thru wall flashing steps up or down in the wall, provide end dam at step. a. End dam shall extend up or down to tie into thru wall flashing step. b. Seal all joints for continuous watertight barrier.

4. At concrete back-up, secure upper edge of flashing with adhesive and seal. 5. Adhere vertical surface of flashing to back-up wall with adhesive recommended by

flashing manufacturer.


6. Lap and seal flashing at all inside and outside corners to provide continuous uninterrupted barrier.

C. Stainless Steel Base Wall Flashing: 1. Install flashing to provide positive drainage of cavity moisture. 2. Where flashing steps up or down in the wall provide end dam at the step.

a. End dam shall extend up or down to tie into the thru wall flashing step. b. Solder and seal all joints for continuous water and air tight barrier.

3. Lap flashing 2 IN. a. Seal all laps by applying two (2) beads of lap sealant on each side of the lap

joint. b. Sealant beads shall extend full width of flashing both vertical and horizontal

surfaces. c. Provide means for maintaining drip leg alignment at lap.

4. Install flashing into bed of sealant.

D. Rope Weeps: 1. Provide weep joints at maximum 16 IN OC in head joint of first course of veneer

immediately above thru base flashing. a. Weeps shall be formed by placing short lengths of cotton sash cord in the

mortar and trimming the cord flush with the surface. b. At pedestrian openings, provide weeps on each side of opening. Do not provide

weeps above pedestrian door openings. c. At openings other than pedestrian doors, weeps may be provided above

opening if required by spacing pattern.

E. Butt joints of preformed control joint inserts tightly together and secure with adhesive or sealant acceptable to insert manufacturer.

F. Anchoring Veneer: 1. Veneer with concrete back-up:

a. Anchor veneer to new construction using dovetail anchors and slots. b. Provide veneer anchorage at not more than 16 IN OC vertically and 16 IN OC

horizontally.

G. Reinforcing Masonry: 1. General:

a. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing in all concrete masonry wall construction. 1) Embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for entire length with minimum cover

of 5/8 IN on exterior side of walls and 1/2 IN at other locations. a) For interior partitions, the "exterior" side of the wall is considered the

side having the most corrosive atmosphere. 2) Lap reinforcement minimum of 12 IN at ends.

a) Remove cross wires on one (1) side of the lap splice and bend the side rods slightly so the lap is provided with 12 IN of uninterrupted wire lap occurring in the same plane.

3) Do not bridge control joints with horizontal joint reinforcing. 4) Do not bridge expansion joints with horizontal joint reinforcing. 5) At corners and wall intersections use prefabricated "L" and "T" horizontal

joint reinforcing sections. 6) Cut and bend as required.

b. Install reinforcing at 16 IN OC vertically unless noted otherwise on Drawings. c. Install reinforcing 8 IN OC for a minimum of 24 IN at starter courses.

1) Do not install horizontal joint reinforcing in veneer mortar joint having through-wall flashing.


d. In concrete masonry, install horizontal joint reinforcing 8 IN OC in courses on each side of vertical control joints and on each jamb of openings for full height of joint or opening. 1) Extend reinforcing minimum 24 IN beyond joint or jambs of opening.

e. In concrete back-up construction, install veneer horizontal joint reinforcing 8 IN OC and install dovetail anchors at 8 IN OC in courses on each side of vertical control joints and on each jamb of openings for full height of joint or opening. 1) Extend reinforcing minimum 24 IN beyond the edge of the dovetail anchors. 2) Locate dovetail anchors within 4 IN of the edge of the opening. 3) Terminate horizontal joint reinforcing at edge of dovetail anchors. 4) Cut horizontal joint reinforcing around dovetail anchors but do not

completely separate joint reinforcing into individual pieces. f. In concrete masonry, reinforce masonry openings over 12 IN wide with

horizontal joint reinforcing placed in three (3) horizontal joints above lintel and two (2) horizontal joints below sill. 1) Extend minimum of 24 IN beyond jambs of opening.

g. In concrete back-up construction, reinforce masonry openings over 12 IN wide with horizontal joint reinforcing and dovetail anchors placed in two (2) horizontal joints above lintel and below sill. 1) Extend reinforcing minimum 24 IN beyond jambs of openings.

a) Locate dovetail anchors within 4 IN of edge of opening. b) Terminate horizontal joint reinforcing at edge of dovetail anchors.

2) Cut horizontal joint reinforcing around dovetail anchors but do not completely separate joint reinforcing into individual pieces.

2. Reinforcing concrete masonry: a. At intersecting (interior/exterior or interior/interior) load-bearing walls, provide

rigid steel anchors 16 IN OC vertically, embed ends in grout filled cores. 1) Alternate rigid steel anchors with horizontal joint reinforcing.

b. At intersecting non-load bearing walls or at intersecting (interior/exterior or interior/interior) load bearing/non-load bearing walls provide grout screen in mortar joint at 16 IN OC vertically. 1) Extend minimum 6 IN into each wall. 2) Alternate grout screen with horizontal joint reinforcing.

c. Install vertical reinforcing bars where indicated on Drawings. 1) Provide means necessary to ensure position of vertical steel reinforcing

meets requirements of Building Code. d. Anchor intersecting concrete masonry (regardless of load bearing capacity) to

intersecting concrete or concrete back-up using dovetail slots and anchors. 1) Provide dovetail anchors at 16 IN OC or as noted on Drawings.

3. Repair all galvanized coatings damaged as a result of welding. a. See Section 05505 for galvanizing repair system.

4. Reinforcing veneer: a. Reinforce veneer with joint reinforcement placed in veneer mortar joints:

1) In new concrete back-up construction alternate veneer horizontal joint reinforcing with dovetail anchors.

H. Remove all excess mortar and grout as walls are being constructed and protect wall cavities from filling with mortar, grout and other construction debris.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 04210 BRICK MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Brick masonry.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04050 - Cold and Hot Weather Masonry Construction. 4. Section 04110 - Cement and Lime Mortars. 5. Section 04155 - Masonry Accessories. 6. Section 04510 - Masonry Cleaning. 7. Section 07176 - Liquid Water Repellent. 8. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.



a. C216, Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale).

B. Mock-Ups: 1. After final brick selection has been made and prior to permanent wall construction,

construct sample wall, minimum 6 FT high x 6 FT long x 2 FT long corner, utilizing all specified components of exterior wall for Engineer review and acceptance, including partial glass block panel opening with lintel and sill components.

2. Sample wall shall constitute minimum standard of quality for actual construction. Maintain sample wall during construction.

3. If not acceptable, construct additional sample walls as required. 4. Remove when directed. 5. Build sample wall in conjunction with sample wall required for concrete masonry

construction. 6. Sample wall to include all special corners and other special brick detailing including

all special shapes. a. Step construction of sample wall to allow observation of all specified

components. b. Sample wall shall include as a minimum all special shapes, all types of brick

coursing, cavity insulation, veneer reinforcing, thru wall flashing, weep joints, glass block, minimum 12 IN long brick support angle properly flashed, typical control joint construction and liquid water repellent. 1) Sample wall shall include inside and outside corner showing thru wall

flashing lapping, jointing and sealing. 2) Sample wall shall include example of flashing condition at bearing end of

lintels as outlined in Section 04155.

C. All brick provided on this Project shall be from same production run. 1. Produce special shapes and solid units in manner which will ensure matching of

color and texture with field brick. a. Solid units shall be 100 percent solid.

2. Special shapes shall be factory fabricated unless noted otherwise.


1.3 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Results of cavity wall flood test.

B. Samples: 1. Minimum 12 x 12 IN banded brick sample incorporating actual brick and mortar color

being used on Project for Engineer review. 2. Samples of all special shapes prior to incorporating into sample wall.


A. Deliver units on pallets with tight covers or deliver in cubes and store on dunnage.

B. Inspect masonry upon delivery to assure color match with sample wall and dimensional quality and trueness of brick units.

C. Return unacceptable units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Brick: Any manufacturer whose products comply with the specified requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Brick: 1. Size: Modular. 2. Color range and finish: To be selected from manufacturers standard color range

and match the color of the Thornton Water Treatment Plant. 3. ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 4. Include in bid special shaped, sized or cut brick units required for complete

installation. a. Special shaped brick shall be fabricated in manufacturing plant and shall not be

field fabricated by saw cutting unless otherwise noted.

B. Accessories: See Section 04155.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Verify that all required accessory items are correct.

C. General: 1. Build cavity walls to thickness indicated. 2. Build in flashing, reinforcing, weeps, vents and related accessory items.

a. See Section 04155 for installation of accessory items. 3. Install field brick in running bond.


a. Provide special coursing where indicated on the Drawings. 4. Perform all cutting with masonry saws using saw blades as recommended by

masonry unit manufacturer. 5. Drill holes with power drill using drill bits as recommended by masonry unit

manufacturer. 6. Holes made by chipping not acceptable. 7. Cut as required to provide pattern required. 8. Use 100 percent solid units where cutting or laying would expose holes or

depressing. a. Fill solid with mortar all units in first course directly below thru wall flashing.

9. Avoid use of less than half size units whenever possible. 10. Do not install damaged units. 11. Wet brick having absorption rates greater than 0.025 OZ/SI/MIN.

a. Wet brick in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 12. Install brick work in conjunction with concrete unit masonry work.

D. Laying and Tooling: 1. Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate spacing of bond patterns and

joints. Properly locate openings, movement type joints, returns and offsets. 2. Lay brick with completely filled bed and head joints.

a. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to completely fill head joints and shove into place.

b. Do not slush head joints. c. See Section 04110 for mortar and grout. d. In cavity wall construction, taper mortar on inside edge of veneer to prevent

mortar from falling into cavity. e. Protect cavity during laying of brick as required to prevent mortar droppings from

filling cavity. 3. Maintain nominal 3/8 IN joint widths.

a. Cut joints flush where concealed. b. Tool exposed joints concave. c. Compress mortar in below grade joints. d. Provide wider joints where noted on the Drawings. e. Where brick sets on top of steel support, omit the mortar joint on top of the

support under the brick and set the brick directly on the thru wall flashing or the steel support member unless a mortar joint is required to maintain coursing.

4. During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. 5. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide neat, uniform

appearance. 6. Remove brick units disturbed after laying.

a. Clean and relay in fresh mortar. b. Do not pound units to fit. c. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean and reset in fresh mortar.

7. Where work is stopped and later resumed, rack back 1/2 brick unit length in each course. a. Wet units lightly. b. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

8. As work progresses, build-in items indicated and specified. a. Fill in solidly with mortar around built-in items.

E. Control Joints and Sealants: 1. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints where indicated on drawings.

a. Rake out all mortar from joint. 1) Exercise care not to damage thru wall flashing when cleaning mortar from

vertical joints. b. Locate control joints at points of natural weakness in masonry and as

recommended from brick manufacturers.


2. See Section 07900 for sealant installation requirements.

F. Steel Lintels: 1. Provide loose steel lintels (unless indicated otherwise) at all openings. Refer to

drawings for size. a. Steel lintels shall be galvanized (G90).


A. Protect against weather when work is not in progress. 1. Cover top of walls with waterproof membrane, extend at least 4 FT down both sides

of wall and anchor in place.

B. Protect against cold and hot weather as specified in Section 04050.

C. Remove and replace loose, stained, or damaged bricks. 1. Provide new units to match. 2. Install in fresh mortar. 3. Point to eliminate evidence of replacement.

D. Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and

arises: a. 1/4 IN in 10 FT. b. 3/8 IN in a story height not to exceed 20 FT. c. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.

2. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 IN in any story or 20 FT maximum. b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.

3. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 IN in any bay or 20 FT. b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.

4. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls and partitions: a. 1/2 IN in any bay or 20 FT. b. 3/4 IN in 40 FT or more.

5. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thicknesses of walls from dimensions shown on Drawings: a. Minus 1/4 IN. b. Plus 1/2 IN.

E. Inspect wall to ensure that mortar droppings have not plugged weep joints or filled cavity.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean brick masonry as wall is being constructed using fiber brush, wooden paddles and scrapers. After all brick construction is complete, wash wall using specified brick cleaning solution. Refer to Section 04510.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 04220 CONCRETE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry construction (CMU).

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03208 - Reinforcement. 4. Section 04050 - Cold and Hot Weather Masonry Construction. 5. Section 04110 - Cement and Lime Mortars. 6. Section 04155 - Masonry Accessories. 7. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)/American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)/The

Masonry Society (TMS): a. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specification for Masonry Structures.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C90, Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. c. C1314, Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.

3. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA): a. TEK 2-3A, Architectural Concrete Masonry Units. b. TEK 3-4B, Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction.

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Building Materials Directory.



B. All masonry units of any one particular type, color or face style shall be from the same production run. 1. Special shapes shall be factory fabricated unless noted otherwise.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions to be in accordance with Standard Unit Nomenclature Table 1, NCMA TEK 2-3A.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


a. Manufacturer's information on aggregate and cement type used in manufacture.


3. Certifications:

a. Certification that concrete masonry units meet or exceed requirements of standards referenced.

4. Qualifications of testing lab and technician. 5. Test results for all masonry testing.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.


A. Deliver units on pallets with tight covers or deliver in cubes and store on dunnage.

B. Protect units from damage.

C. Inspect units upon delivery to assure color match with sample wall, dimensional quality, and trueness of unit. 1. Return damaged or otherwise unacceptable units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Featherlite Building Products Corporation.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Modular normal (heavy) weight units, ASTM C90. Provide aggregate in accordance

with ASTM C33. a. Total linear drying shrinkage: ASTM C90, 0.065 percent maximum. b. Weight: Minimum of 125 LB/CF. c. Medium weight or light weight units are not acceptable.

2. Face shell and web thickness: ASTM C90, Table 1. 3. Water absorption: ASTM C90 Table 2. 4. Compressive strength: ASTM C90, Table 2. 5. Dimensional Tolerance: ASTM C90.

B. Reinforcing Bars: Refer to Section 03208 and as indicated on Drawings.

C. Mortar: Refer to Section 04110.

D. Masonry Grout: Refer to Section 04110.

E. Masonry Accessories: Refer to Section 04155.

F. Sealants: Refer to Section 07900.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Color: standard grey. 2. Design compressive strength: f'm=1,500 psi minimum.

a. Determine in accordance with unit strength method per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


3. Fire resistive units: UL listed. 4. Fabricated in the manufacturing plant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that anchors and flashings are correct.

B. Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate spacing of bond patterns and joints. Properly locate openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. General: 1. Build single-wythe walls to actual thickness of masonry units. 2. Build in flashing, reinforcing, and related accessory items.

a. See Section 04155 for installation of accessory items. 3. Perform all cutting with masonry saws using saw blades as recommended by

masonry unit manufacturer. 4. Drill holes with power drill using drill bits as recommended by masonry unit

manufacturer. 5. Holes made by chipping unit will not be accepted. 6. Install field units in running bond.

a. Provide special coursing where indicated on the Drawings. 7. Cut as required to maintain bond pattern. 8. Use solid units where cutting or laying would expose holes and as noted on

Drawings. 9. Avoid use of less than half size units, whenever possible. 10. Do not use chipped, cracked, spalled, stained or imperfect units exposed in finish

work. 11. Do not wet concrete masonry units. 12. Build chases and recesses as indicated and required for work of other trades.

Provide not less than 8 IN of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses unless detailed otherwise on the Drawings.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Install grouted hollow units under lintel bearing points.

a. Refer to Section 04110 for grouting.

D. Laying and Tooling: 1. Lay masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints.

a. Provide full mortar bed on all block cross webs and completely fill head joints. 1) Do not slush head joints. 2) Protect cells requiring grout fill from mortar droppings. 3) Omit mortar from head joint at weeps.

2. Maintain nominal 3/8 IN joint widths. a. Cut joints flush where concealed. b. Tool exposed joints concave. c. Compress mortar in below ground joints. d. Provide wider joints where noted on Drawings.

1) In no case shall any mortar joint be more than 3/4 IN wide.


e. Where masonry sets on top of steel support omit the mortar joint on top of the support under the veneer and set masonry directly on top of the thru wall flashing or the steel support member unless a mortar joint is required to maintain coursing.

3. During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, and completely fill with mortar. 4. Point-up all joints at corners, openings, and adjacent work to provide neat, uniform

appearance. 5. Remove masonry disturbed after laying.

a. Clean and relay in fresh mortar. b. Do not pound units to fit. c. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean, and reset in fresh mortar.

6. Where work is stopped and later resumed, rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course. a. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

7. As work progresses, build in items indicated on Drawings and specified. a. Fill in solidly with mortar around built-in items. b. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place

grout screen in joint below and fill core solid with mortar.

E. Concrete Masonry Lintels, Control Joints, and Sealants: 1. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints where indicated on Drawings.

a. Rake out mortar in joint. 2. Refer to Section 07900 for sealant installation requirements.

a. Seal control and expansion joints. 3. Provide concrete masonry unit lintels wherever openings more than 12 IN wide are

indicated on drawings without other structural support or other supporting lintels. a. See lintels schedule on drawings for size and type required.

F. Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and

arises: a. 1/4 IN in 10 FT. b. 3/8 IN in a story height not to exceed 20 FT. c. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.

2. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 IN in any story or 20 FT maximum. b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.

3. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 IN in any bay or 20 FT. b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.

4. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls, and partitions: a. 1/2 IN in any bay or 20 FT. b. 3/4 IN in 40 FT or more.

5. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thicknesses of walls from dimensions shown on Drawings: a. Minus 1/4 IN. b. Plus 1/2 IN.

G. Protect against weather when work is not in progress. During inclement weather conditions, cover top of walls with translucent waterproof membrane, extend at least 4 FT down both sides of walls and anchor in place.

H. Protect against cold/hot weather as specified in Section 04050.



A. Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction: 1. At a minimum, provide bracing in accordance with NCMA TEK 3-4B. 2. Contractor is responsible for adequately bracing all masonry during construction.

B. Remove and replace loose, stained, or damaged units as directed by Engineer. 1. Provide new units to match. 2. Install in fresh mortar. 3. Point to eliminate evidence of replacement.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean concrete masonry as the wall is being constructed using fiber brushes, wooden paddles and scrapers. No acid-based cleaning solutions shall be used unless approved in writing by Engineer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 04510 MASONRY CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Masonry cleaning.



A. Qualifications: 1. Use experienced workmen familiar with product and its application.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Letter stating that Contractor is experienced in this type of masonry cleaning.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Product technical data including:

a. Manufacturer's application instructions. b. Manufacturer's dilution recommendations. c. Manufacturer's recommendations on neutralizing rinse.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cleaning solution: Detergent type.

a. Pro So Co. b. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

2. Cleaning solution for manganese or vanadium stained masonry: a. Pro So Co. b. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Detergent-Type Cleaning Solution: 1. Similar to Pro So Co. "Sure Clean #600" detergent masonry cleaner.

B. Manganese or Vanadium-Stained Masonry: 1. Similar to Pro So Co. "Vanatrol."

C. Water: Potable.

D. Neutralizing rinse as required by manufacturer.


2.3 MIXES

A. Dilute cleaning solution with potable water at rate which will provide for the weakest solution allowable for cleaning wall.

B. If project conditions require solution of greater than 5 percent acid obtain permission from Engineer in writing prior to applying solution to wall surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Allow 7 days after completion of masonry work before start of cleaning, or longer as indicated by manufacturers requirements.

B. Remove excess mortar using wooden paddles and scrapers.

C. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be cleaned.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces subject to potential damage by cleaning solution.

B. Apply masonry cleaner to exposed-to-view masonry surfaces. 1. Do not use wire brushes. 2. Use only tools free of rust. 3. Apply solution using fibered wall-washing brush.

C. Thoroughly rinse and pre-soak walls.

D. Flush all loose mortar and dirt from surface.

E. Wet to prevent "run-off" streaking.

F. Scrape off mortar and reapply cleaning solution.

G. After scrubbing, clean thoroughly with pressurized water.

H. Apply neutralizing rinse as recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel, including the fabrication and erection of framing and bracing

members, including connections.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05313 - Metal Deck. 4. Section 05505 - Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

a. Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings (referred to herein as AISC Specification).

b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges dated March 7, 2000. c. Quality Certification Program for Fabricators d. Erector Certification Program. e. Manual of Steel Construction.

2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. B18.22.1, Plain Washers. 4. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A2, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Girder Rails of Plain, Grooved, and Guard Types.

b. A6, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling.

c. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. d. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless. e. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished. f. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. g. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI

Tensile Strength. h. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105

ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. i. A490, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150

ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. j. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete

Reinforcement. k. A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. l. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. m. A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium

Structural Steel. n. A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes.


o. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. p. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Caps Screws and

Studs. q. F959, Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension

Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. r. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield

Strength. 5. Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts as

approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) of the Engineering Foundation (referred to herein as Specification for Structural Joints).

6. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.1, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. A5.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc

Welding. c. A5.17, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc

Welding. d. A5.18, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc

Welding. e. A5.20, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding. f. A5.23, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged

Arc Welding. g. A5.28, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded

Arc Welding. h. A5.29, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding. i. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel (referred herein as AWS Code). j. Steel stud connectors and their installation to comply with requirements of AWS

Code. 7. Building code:

1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition including all State of Colorado amendments, referred to herein as the Building Code.

B. Qualifications: 1. Steel fabricator:

a. Minimum of 5 years experience in fabrication of structural steel and shall be certified under AISC Quality Certification Program Category I.

b. Use a professional engineer on fabrication staff. 2. Steel erector:

a. Minimum of 5 years of experience in erection of structural steel. b. With an active and enforced quality assurance program in place, as described in

the Building Code. 3. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:

a. Prepare Shop Drawings under National Institute of Steel Detailing Quality Procedures Program certification.

b. Complete Shop Drawings for all of the work showing clearly all pieces, sizes, dimensions, details, connections materials and shop coatings. 1) All Shop Drawings must be checked and signed "approved" before

submittal. 2) Show all cuts, copes, and holes. 3) Indicate all shop and field bolts.


4) Indicate all shop and field welds using AWS symbols. c. Prepare complete erection drawings showing the location and marks of all

pieces. 1) Copies of up-to-date erection drawings shall accompany the Shop

Drawings. a) Use match marks on the erection drawings to indicate the sheet number

on which each particular member is detailed. d. Correct any incorrect or unacceptable material or fabrication due to incorrect

detailing, shop work, or erection, without additional charge. 3. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Source and certification of quality for high-strength bolts, nuts and washers.

4. Certifications: a. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for all major components and

fasteners incorporated into work. b. Copies of current welding certificates for each welder assigned to perform

welding indicating compliance with testing specified by AWS. c. Welder qualification data and prequalified procedures.

5. Test reports: a. Certified copies of mill tests. b. Manufacturer's load test and temperature sensitivity data for expansion anchor

bolts and adhesive anchor bolts.


A. Handle and store steel members above ground on skids or other supports. 1. Keep free of dirt and other foreign material and protect against corrosion.

1.5 DEFINITION

A. Code: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

B. Owner: May mean the Owner's Designated Representative for Construction as defined by the Building Code.

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dipped galvanizing per ASTM A153 with minimum coating of 2.0 OZ of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by standard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. High-strength bolts:

a. Bethlehem Steel Corporation. b. Lewis Bolt & Nut Company. c. Nucor Fasteners. d. St. Louis Screw and Bolt Company.

2. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: a. Nelson Stud Welding Division, TRW, Inc. b. Stud Welding Products, Inc.

3. Expansion anchor bolts: See Section 05505. 4. Adhesive anchors bolts: See Section 05505. 5. Anchor bolt sleeves:


a. Sinco/Wilson.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel, Structural Shapes and Plate (unless noted otherwise on Drawings): 1. All W-shapes and WT-shapes: ASTM A572, Grade 50.

a. Provide ASTM A572, Grade 50 with special requirements per AISC Technical Bulletin #3, New Shape Material, dated March 3, 1997.

b. ASTM A992 may be used in lieu of ASTM A572, Grade 50. 2. All other plates and rolled shapes: ASTM A36, unless indicated on the Drawings to

be Grade 50.

B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36.

C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B (Type E or S) (Fy=35).

D. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): 1. Round: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy=42). 2. Square or rectangular: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy=46).

E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers, ASTM A325 with ASTM A563 nuts, galvanized: 1. High-strength bolts:

a. Provide two (2) ASTM F436 washers for all bolts. b. Provide beveled washers at connections of sloped/tapered sections.

F. Bolts and Nuts, Unfinished: ASTM A307, Grade A.

G. Washers, Plain (Unfinished Bolts): ASME B18.22.1, Type B.

H. Welding Electrodes (AWS): 1. Shielded metal arc: AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5, E70XX or E801X-X. 2. Submerged arc: AWS A5.17 or AWS A5.23, F7XX-EXXX or F8XX-EXXX-XX. 3. Gas metal arc: AWS A5.18, E70S-X or E70U-1 or AWS A5.28, ER805-XX, E80C-

XXX. 4. Flux cored arc: AWS A5.20, E7XT-X (except 2, 3, 10, GS), AWS A5.29, E7XT-X or

E8XTX-X, E8XTX-XM.

I. Anchor Rods and Bolts: 1. ASTM F1554, Grade 55 with weldability supplement S1 for threaded rods,

galvanized. 2. ASTM A307, Grade A for headed bolts, galvanized. 3. ASTM F593 Type 304 or 316 stainless steel with matching nut and washer.

J. Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: 1. Studs: ASTM A108, complying with AWS Code Section 7, Type B; minimum yield

strength 50,000 psi, minimum tensile strength 60,000 psi. a. Uniform diameter. b. Heads: Concentric and normal to shaft. c. Weld end: Chamfered and solid flux.

2. Deformed anchor bars: a. ASTM A496, complying with AWS Code Section 7 Type C. b. Minimum yield strength: 70,000 psi. c. Minimum tensile strength: 80,000 psi. d. Straight, unless indicated otherwise. e. Solid flux.

3. After welding, remove ceramic ferrules and maintain free from any substance which would interfere with function, or prevent bonding to concrete.

K. Nonshrink Grout: See Division 3.


L. Crane Rails: 1. Controlled-cooled, open-hearth carbon steel ASCE rails per ASTM A2, Class A, #1

rails, unless noted otherwise, of size and weight as required by crane supplier. 2. Furnish rails with milled tight end joints suitable for crane service, with standard

drilling, removable end stops and all related accessories required, including: a. Joint bars: Match rail section and properties, drilled to match rail drilling. b. Joint bar bolts and nuts: High strength. c. Hardened washer: ASTM F436 for bar bolts. d. Except as indicated otherwise, two-bolt type fixed or floating rail clamps to suit

the conditions, of forged or pressed steel, complete with ASTM A325 bolts, reversible fillers, and self-locking nut or nut and lock washer.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Comply with requirements of applicable Building Codes and AISC Specification with modifications and additional requirements specified herein. 1. Identify high-strength steel material in fabricated members in accordance with ASTM

A6.

B. Minimize the amount of field welding. 1. Shop assemble components into largest size possible commensurate with

transportation and handling limitations. 2. Shop connections: Bolted with high-strength bolts or welded.

C. Provide as a minimum, two (2) 3/4 IN DIA, high-strength bolts for all bolted connections.

D. Provide bearing type connections for all bolted connections, unless specified otherwise or required to be slip-critical by the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints.

E. One-sided or other types of eccentric connections not indicated will not be permitted without prior approval, or unless shown as one-sided on the Drawings.

F. Field Connections: Provide bolts for all field connections except where shown otherwise on the Drawings. 1. Use high-strength bolts unless shown or specified otherwise. 2. Use of high-strength bolts: Conform to RCSC's Specifications for Structural Joints

Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts, as approved by Specification for Structural Joints, and published by AISC.

3. Unfinished bolts may be used for attaching stair treads to stringers. 4. If structural steel details (field welds versus shop welds, etc.) shown on design

Drawings are not compatible with selected erection procedures, submit proposed modifications for review.

5. Connections to structural steel provided by others: Provide all connectors and coordinate location of bolt holes to match connection holes in steel provided by others.

G. Fabricate and erect beams with non-specified camber in accordance with AISC Specification Chapter L1.

H. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. 1. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Make holes clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. 3. Remove outside burrs resulting from drilling or reaming operations with tool making

1/16 IN bevel. 4. Provide holes in members to permit connection of work of other trades or

contractors.

I. Make allowance for draw in all cross bracing to provide small amount of initial tension in members.

J. Make splices only where indicated or where approved.


K. Cope at 45 degrees, corners of stiffener plates at junction of member flanges with webs.

L. Flame cut bevels for welds, provided such cutting is done automatically. 1. Leave free of burrs and slag by grinding or planing the cut edges.

M. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp steel edges shall be ground to approximately 1/8 IN radius.

N. Tolerances (unless noted otherwise on Drawings): 1. ASTM A6: When material received from the mill does not satisfy ASTM A6

tolerances for camber, profile, flatness or sweep, the Contractor is permitted to perform corrective work by the use of controlled heating, and mechanical straightening, subject to the limitations of the AISC specification.

2. Fabrication tolerance: a. Member length:

1) Both ends finished for contact bearing: 1/32 IN. 2) Framed members 30 FT or less: 1/16 IN. Over 30 FT: 1/8 IN.

b. Member straightness: 1) Compression members: 1/1000 of axial length between points laterally

supported. 2) Non-compression members: ASTM A6 tolerance for wide flange shapes.

c. Specified member camber (except compression members): 1) 50 FT or less: +1/2 IN. 2) Members received from mill with 75 percent of specified camber require no

further cambering. 3) Beams/trusses without specified camber shall be fabricated so after

erection, camber is upward. 4) Camber shall be measured in fabrication shop in unstressed condition.

d. At bolted splices, depth deviation shall be taken up by filler plates. 1) At welded joints, adjust weld profile to conform to variation in depth. 2) Slope weld surface per AWS requirements.

e. Finished members shall be free from twists, bends and open joints. 1) Sharp kinks, bends and deviation from the above tolerances are cause for

rejection of material. f. Crane runway tolerances shall comply with crane system requirements and

tolerances stated herein.

2.4 WELDING

A. Comply with AWS Code, and other requirements indicated herein, for all welding, techniques of welding employed, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used to correct defective work. 1. Qualify joint welding procedures or test in accordance with AWS qualification

procedures.

B. Test and qualify welders, welding operators and tackers in compliance with AWS Code for position and type of welding to which they will be assigned. 1. Conduct tests in presence of approved testing agency. 2. Certification within previous 12 months will be acceptable, provided samples of the

welder's work are satisfactory.

C. Before Starting Welding: 1. Carefully plumb and align members in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Fully tighten bolts. 3. Comply with Section 5 of AWS Code for assembly and surface preparation. 4. Preheat base metal to temperature stated in AWS Code.

a. When no preheat temperature is given in AWS Code and base metal is below 50 DegF, preheat base metal to at least 70 DegF.

b. Maintain temperature during welding.


c. Preheat surface of all base metal within distance from point of welding equal to thickness of thicker part being welded or 3 IN, whichever is greater, to specified preheat temperature.

d. Maintain this temperature during welding. 5. Each welder shall use identifying mark at welds.

D. Make flange welds before making web welds.

E. Where groove welds have back-up plates, make first three (3) passes with 1/8 IN round electrodes. 1. Use backup plates in accordance with AWS Code, extending minimum of 1 IN either

side of joint.

F. Flame cut edges of stiffener plates at shop or field butt weld. 1. Do not shear.

G. Grind flush web fillets at webs notched to receive backup plates for flange groove welds.

H. Low Hydrogen Electrodes: Dry and store electrodes in compliance with AWS Code.

I. Do not perform welding when ambient temperature is lower than 0 DegF or where surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow, or high wind, or when welders are exposed to inclement conditions.

J. Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: 1. Automatically end welded in accordance with the AWS Code and manufacturer's

recommendations. 2. Fillet welding of headed studs and deformed bar anchors is not allowed unless

approved by Engineer.

K. Test in-place studs in accordance with requirements of AWS Code to ensure satisfactory welding of studs to members. 1. Replace studs failing this test.

L. When headed stud-type shear connectors are to be applied, clean top surface of members to receive studs in shop to remove oil, scale, rust, dirt, and other materials injurious to satisfactory welding. 1. Do not shop paint or galvanize metal surfaces to receive field applied studs.

2.5 SHOP COATING

A. Refer to Section 09905 and coordinate shop primer, surface preparation and coating with field applied primers and coatings where specified.

B. Provide suitable methods of handling and transporting painted steel to avoid damage to coating.

C. Do not coat following surfaces: 1. Machined surfaces, surfaces adjacent to field welds, and surfaces fully embedded in

concrete. 2. All other members for which no coating is specified. 3. Contact surfaces at bolted slip-critical connections, unless surface condition

conforms to Part 3b of the Specification for Structural Joints.

D. Clean thoroughly all surfaces not coated before shipping. 1. Remove loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil and grease. 2. Protect machined surfaces.


A. OWNER pays for inspection and testing: 1. Testing:


a. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to inspect and test structural steel shop and field work for compliance with Specifications.

b. Contractor responsible for testing to qualify shop and field welders and as needed for Contractor's own quality control to ensure compliance with Contract Documents.

c. Contractor provides sufficient notification and access so inspection and testing can be accomplished.

d. Contractor pays for retesting of failed tests and for additional testing required when defects are discovered.

B. Responsibilities of Testing Agency: 1. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with Section 6 of AWS Code including

the following non-destructive testing: a. Visually inspect all welds. b. In addition to visual inspection, test 50 percent of full penetration welds and 20

percent of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant. c. Test 20 percent of liquid dye penetrant tested full penetration welds with

ultrasonic or radiographic testing. 2. Inspect high-strength bolting in accordance with Section 9 of the Specification for

Structural Joints. a. Verify proper pretension for slip-critical bolted connection. b. Verify direct tension indicator gaps.

3. Inspect structural steel which has been erected. 4. Inspect stud welding in accordance with Article 7.8, AWS Code. 5. Prepare and submit inspection and test reports to Engineer.

a. Assist Engineer to determine corrective measures necessary for defective work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Contractor is solely responsible for safety. 1. Construction means and methods and sequencing of work is the prerogative of the

Contractor. a. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many structural members

is not realized until structural assembly is complete; e.g., until slabs, decks, bracing or rigid connections are installed.

2. Partially complete structural members shall not be loaded without an investigation by the Contractor.

3. Until all elements of the permanent structure and lateral bracing system are complete, provide temporary bracing designed, furnished, and installed by the Contractor for the partially complete structure.

B. Adequate temporary bracing to provide safety, stability and to resist all loads to which the partially complete structure may be subjected, including wind, construction activities, and operation of equipment is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Use temporary guys, braces, shoring, connections, etc., necessary to maintain the

structural framing plumb and in proper alignment until permanent connections are made, the succeeding work is in place, and temporary work is no longer necessary.

2. Use temporary guys, bracing, shoring, and other work to prevent injury or damage to adjacent work or construction from stresses due to erection procedures and operation of erection equipment, construction loads, and wind.


3. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the temporary bracing system and must consider the sequence and schedule of placement of such elements and effects of loads imposed on the structural steel members by partially or completely installed work, including work of all other trades. a. If not obvious from experience or from the Drawings, the Contractor shall confer

with the Engineer to identify those structural steel element that must be complete before the temporary bracing system is removed.

4. Remove and dispose of all temporary work and facilities off-site.

C. Examine work-in-place on which specified work is in any way dependent to ensure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work. 1. Report defects in work-in-place which may influence satisfactory completion of the

work. 2. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of work-in-place.

D. Field Measurement: 1. Take field measurements as necessary to verify or supplement dimensions

indicated on the Drawings. 2. Contractor responsible for the accurate fit of the work.

E. Check the elevations of all finished footings or foundations and the location and alignment of all anchor bolts before starting erection. 1. Notify Engineer of any errors or deviations found by such checking.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Framing member location tolerances after erection shall not exceed the frame tolerances listed in Article 3.3.

B. Erect plumb and level; introduce temporary bracing required to support erection loads.

C. Use light drifting necessary to draw holes together. 1. Drifting to match unfair holes is not allowed.

D. Welding: 1. Conform to AWS D1.1 and requirements of this Specification. 2. When joining two (2) sections of steel of different ASTM designations, welding

techniques shall be in accordance with a qualified AWS D1.1 procedure.

E. Shore existing members when unbolting of common connections is required. 1. Use new bolts for rebolting connections.

F. Clean stored material of all foreign matter accumulated during erection period.

G. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly.

H. Set beam base and bearing plates accurately, as indicated, on nonshrink grout. 1. Set and anchor each base plate to proper line and elevation. 2. Use metal wedges, shims or setting nuts as required and tighten anchor bolts.

a. Use same metal as base plate. b. Cut off protrusions of wedges and shims flush with edge of base plate.

3. Fill sleeves around anchor bolts with nonshrink grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bottom of plate and bearing surface, where grout is

indicated or required. 5. Refer to Division 3 for nonshrink grout requirements.

I. Install high strength bolts with hardened washers. 1. Install and tighten in accordance with Section 8 of Specifications for Structural

Joints. 2. Coordinate installation with inspection.

a. Do not start installation until coordination with Testing Agency is complete.


3. Bearing-type connections: High-strength bolts shall be tightened to snug-tight condition.

4. Slip-critical connections: Perform calibration testing for all methods of installation of high-strength bolts in accordance with Section 8(b) of Specification for Structural Joints, using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts. a. Turn-of-nut tightening: Torque wrenches shall be used only by laboratory

personnel. b. Calibrated wrench tightening: Calibrate on a daily basis.

5. In the event any bolt in a connection is found to be defective, check and retighten all bolts in the connection.

J. Do not use gas cutting to correct fabrication errors. 1. In case members do not fit or holes do not match, ream out the holes and insert the

next larger size bolt. a. If the connections require new holes, then drill new holes. b. Make no such corrections without prior approval of the Engineer.

2. Burning of holes: Not permitted.

K. Prior to making field connections to existing structural steel, remove completely all paint from existing steel which will be in contact with new steel and new welds.

L. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in welded construction.

M. Provide beveled washers to give full bearing to bolt head or nut where bolts are to be used on surfaces having slopes greater than 1 in 20 with a plane normal to bolt axis.

N. After bolts are tightened, upset threads of A307 unfinished bolts and anchor bolts to prevent nuts from backing off.

O. Crane Runways: 1. Erect crane runways complete with beams, crane rails, crane stops, and other

required components as indicated. 2. Stagger crane rail joints with respect to each other on opposite sides of the runway

and do not coincide with crane runway joints. 3. Center crane rails on top of crane runways and secure to runways with tight clamps

and/or floating clamps as appropriate; provide clamps in pairs spaced not over 3 FT OC along rail length, with each clamp secured with two (2) high-strength bolts and self-locking nuts (or nuts and lock washers), with reversible fillers used at each clamp to allow for alignment. a. Do not use hook bolt type clamps.

4. Tolerances: a. Center-to-center of crane rails: Not exceed plus or minus 1/4 IN from indicated

dimension. b. Crane rail horizontal misalignment: Not exceed 1/4 IN per 50 FT of runway with

a maximum of 1/2 IN total deviation. c. Vertical misalignment between crane rails and along a crane rail measured at

centerlines of columns: Not to exceed 1/4 IN per 50 FT of runway with a maximum of 1/2 IN total deviation.

5. Tight-fitting joints between rail sections and install so top of crane rails are flush at all joints.

6. Secure the joints with joint bars on each side of rail, bolted together through rail with high-strength bolts, nuts and spring washers.

P. After erection, grind smooth all sharp surface irregularities resulting from field cutting or welding; power tool clean welds, bolts, washers and abrasions to shop coat removing all rust and foreign matter.

Q. Expansion anchor bolts and adhesive anchor bolts: See Section 05505.



A. Testing Agency responsibilities are described in Article 2.6.

B. Erected Frame Tolerance (Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings): 1. Overall finished dimensions shall not exceed cumulative effect of rolling, fabrication

and erection tolerance. 2. Erection tolerances are defined relative to member working points and working lines

as follows: a. Actual centerline of top flange or surface at each end for horizontal members. b. Actual center of member at each end for all other members. c. Other points may be used, providing they are based on these definitions. d. Working line is straight line connecting member working points.

3. Tolerances on position and alignment are as specified in the Code, unless otherwise modified. "Adjustable items" such as lintels, wall supports, curb angles, window mullions and similar members shall be provided with adjustable connections to supporting structural frame.

4. Steel erector shall certify the location of erected structural steel is acceptable for plumbness, level and aligned within tolerances specified. a. Such certification can be provided upon completion of any part of work and shall

be done prior to start of work by other trades that may be supported, attached or applied to structural steel work.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR OF SHOP PRIMER PAINT

A. After erection, clean all steel of mud or other foreign materials, and repair any damage. 1. Touchup coatings to comply with Section 09905.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05313 METAL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured metal form deck.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

a. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A446, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip

Process Structural (Physical) Quality. c. A611, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural

Quality. d. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.

e. A780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dipped Galvanized Coatings.

f. A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

g. D746, Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact.

h. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

4. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): a. Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and Cellular

Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution. 5. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Member of SDI.

a. Structural design of manufactured deck shall be prepared by a qualified professional engineer retained by the manufacturer.

2. Qualification of welding work: a. Qualify welding processes, operations, and operators in accordance with

requirements of AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. b. Welding operators to have been qualified during the 12-month period prior to

commencement of welding, and be experienced in welding light gage metal.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:

a. Detailed Shop Drawings showing the following: 1) Complete framing and erection layouts. 2) Location, length, type, cross section, thickness, and markings of metal deck

units. a) Size and location of openings. b) Accessories and reinforcing.

3) Sequence and procedure to be followed for erecting, fastening, and securing the deck units.

4) Shop applied coatings. 5) Location of required shoring for metal form decks. 6) Details and gages of accessories and miscellaneous items showing closure

strips. 7) Welding procedures for installation including size, number, type and location

of all welds required to install deck units. 8) Recommended welding rod size, type, burn off rate and welder setting for

deck thickness to be joined. a) Define welds by use of standard AWS welding symbols.

9) Correct fitting of members and accessories. 10) Size and location of all openings in deck and all conditions requiring closure

panels and supplementary framing. 11) Shop Drawings shall not be reproductions of the Contract Drawings.

3. Product technical data including: a. Metal deck manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. b. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for:

1) Welds and welding procedure. 2) Galvanizing repair paint. 3) Screws. 4) Joint sealing compound.

c. Manufacturer's load tables for deck to be furnished on this project, including: 1) Allowable superimposed load for metal form deck. 2) Allowable unshored span lengths for form deck.

4. Manufacturers certification that metal deck complies with specified requirements: a. Manufacturer member of SDI. b. Deck material, manufacturing, and shop testing and inspection are in

accordance with SDI requirements. c. Welders.

5. Test reports.


A. Deliver, store, and handle metal deck as recommended by SDI. 1. Exercise care to avoid damage to deck.

B. Protect materials from rusting, denting or crushing. 1. Store metal deck on project site off the ground with one end elevated to provide

drainage and protected from the elements with a waterproof covering, ventilated to avoid condensation.

2. Prevent rust, deterioration and accumulation of foreign material.



A. Do not overload supporting members. 1. Until the entire assembly is complete, the structural elements may not be stable or

capable of supporting code or stated design loads.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 2 IN deep metal form deck:

a. Vulcraft, Type 2 C.


2.2 METAL FORM DECK

A. Metal Form Deck: 1. 20 GA (minimum), 2 IN deep (nominal). 2. Minimum superimposed load capacity:

a. As required for concrete placement plus 20 PSF live load, consistent with shoring proposed.

b. Design in accordance with SDI Design Manual. 3. Fabricate deck from steel conforming to Section A3 of the AISI Specification for the

Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 4. Finish: Galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A924 G60 zinc coating. 5. Metal closures and pour-stops:

a. Manufacturers standard, 20 GA minimum. b. Finish: Galvanizing conforming to ASTM A924 G60, minimum. c. Form to configuration required to provide mortar-tight closures.

B. Provide form deck to act as bottom form for cast-in-place concrete slabs.

C. Maximum Deflection: 1. Deck as a form: Less than 1/240 of span or 1/2 IN, whichever is smaller, under the

weight of wet concrete and steel deck. 2. Slab with deck: Less that 1/360 under total loads.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Minimum Deck Thickness: 1. Where gage of metal is indicated, provide the following:

a. Minimum uncoated decimal thickness:

GAGE DESIGN THICKNESS 22 0.0295 IN 20 0.0358 IN 18 0.0474 IN 16 0.0598 IN

b. The delivered thickness of the uncoated steel shall not be less than 95 percent

of the design thickness. 2. The steel used shall have a minimum yield stress of 33 ksi.

B. Fabrication:


1. Fabricate deck units in lengths to span three or more support spacings with flush, telescoped or nested 2 IN end laps. a. Joints occur on supporting members. b. Provide deck units having overlapping male and female type side laps or joints

to provide positive vertical and lateral alignment of adjacent deck units.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Closure Strips: 1. Form to configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends and

sides of deck. 2. Minimum thickness before galvanizing 0.0358 IN (20 GA).

B. Metal Closures and Pour Stops: Form to configuration required to provide mortar-tight closures at open sides and ends of deck.

C. Galvanized coating for metal deck accessories shall conform to ASTM A924 G60 zinc coating for form deck, G90 zinc coating for roof deck applications.

D. Galvanized Repair Paint: For repair of damaged galvanized surfaces, comply with Section 09905.

E. Screws: 1. Self-drilling, self-tapping, #12 size minimum hex washer head sheet metal screws. 2. Carbon steel by Hilti or equal.

a. Organic zinc chromate coated, Hilti Kwik-cote or equal.

F. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A36 or A572 Grade 50.

G. Sheet Metal Accessories: Same material and finish as deck members.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which metal deck is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Do not start placement of metal deck until supporting work is in place and secured.

D. Deck will be subject to rejection if: 1. Metal deck units do not comply with requirements of SDI specifications and

requirements herein. 2. Metal deck is improperly manufactured, painted or installed. 3. Metal deck is damaged so that strength is impaired. 4. Metal deck is not installed as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install form deck units and accessories as indicated, in accordance with SDI Design Manual, manufacturer's recommendations, final approved Shop Drawings and as specified herein. 1. Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories as needed to complete the deck

installation.

B. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of structure.

C. Do not overload metal deck or supporting members: 1. Contractor is solely responsible for safety, construction means, methods and

sequencing of the Work.


2. Until the entire assembly is complete, the structural elements may not be stable or capable of supporting code or stated design loads.

3. Use care to assure deck construction loads are less than the recommendation of the SDI Design Manual, except where temporary shoring is installed.

D. Place each deck unit on supporting structural frame, adjust to final position, accurately align with ends bearing on supporting members. 1. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 IN of bearing of form deck on supports, tape the joint as

needed to prevent concrete leakage. 2. Interlock units at sides without stretching, contracting, or deforming. 3. Place deck units flat and square and secure to framing without warp or excessive

deflection. 4. Place units in accurate and close alignment for entire length of run and with close

registration of flutes of one unit with those of abutting unit.

E. Plug weld sizes specified are effective fusion diameter of welds. 1. Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material and have good fusion to

supporting members. 2. Do not burn through deck.

F. Prevent overtorquing of screw fasteners by using a tool with a depth limiting nosepiece and a clutch.

G. Fastening of Metal Form Deck: 1. Secure deck units to supporting frame and side laps as follows:

a. Fasten edge ribs of panels at each support. b. At each end of each unit and at intermediate supports: 5/8 IN puddle welds at

12 IN OC with not less than two welds per support. c. At perimeter parallel to deck: 5/8 IN puddle welds or 3/8 x 1-1/4 IN seam welds

at 18 IN OC. d. At side laps: Self-drilling sheet metal screws spaced not more than 2 FT OC. e. At sheet metal closures used at ends or sides: Self-drilling sheet metal screws

or tack welds at 2 FT OC.

H. Shoring for Form Deck: 1. Design and install temporary shoring for composite form deck for span conditions

and lengths where required in the SDI Design Manual. 2. Shoring to support form deck for the construction loads listed in the SDI Design

Manual or for the actual loads applied during construction, whichever is greater. a. Indicate shoring on installation Shop Drawings.

3. Locate shoring so as not to overstress supporting construction. 4. Do not remove shores until concrete has reached at least 75 percent of its specified

compressive strength.

I. Remove and replace deck which is structurally weak or unsound or which has burn holes due to improper welding or damage which Engineer declares defective.

J. Cut and fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. 1. Make cutting and fitting neat, square and trim.

a. Cut deck by mechanical means, not by burning. 2. Neatly and accurately install reinforcing at all openings except:

a. Circular openings less than 6 IN DIA. b. Rectangular openings having no side dimension greater than 6 IN.

3. Reinforce openings that have not been framed between 6 and 12 IN with 20 GA flat steel sheet 12 IN greater in each dimension than opening. a. Place sheet around opening and fusion weld to top surface of deck at each

corner and midway along each side.


K. Install metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of roof deck, and in voids between deck and other construction. 1. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation.

L. Install metal closures to close all openings and gaps between form deck and other construction, at objects projecting through deck, at locations where deck changes direction, and at open ends of deck units where deck units terminate. 1. Weld into position to provide a complete installation.

M. Install pour stops continuous around the perimeter of the floor: 1. Locate so that the floor slab terminates beyond the perimeter support centerline a

distance as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Weld into position adequately to resist forces due to placement and finishing of

concrete and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

N. Clean and Touch Up: 1. Remove all surplus materials and debris from surface of deck after installation. 2. Wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on top surfaces of

deck units and supporting steel members in compliance with Section 09905. 3. Touch-up damaged galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in

compliance with Section 09905.


A. Remove and replace defective or damaged deck units.

B. Testing: Welds and screw fasteners shall be visually inspected prior to concrete placement.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05505 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Custom fabricated metal items and certain manufactured units not otherwise

indicated to be supplied under work of other sections. 2. Design of all temporary bracing not indicated on Drawings.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Division 3 - Concrete. 4. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry. 5. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA):

a. ADM-1, Aluminum Design Manual. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

a. Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):

a. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 4. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

a. Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design (ASD). b. Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings (referred to herein as AISC

specification). 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. A14.3, Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders. b. MBG 531, Metal Bar Grating Manual. c. MBG 532, Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual.

6. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A6, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel

Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. b. A36, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. c. A47, Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. d. A48, Specification for Gray Iron Castings. e. A53, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded

and Seamless. f. A108, Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. g. A123, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. h. A153, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. i. A197, Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. j. A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. k. A307, Specification Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. l. A312, Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. m. A325, Specification of Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength. n. A490, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength.


o. A496, Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. p. A500, Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. q. A501, Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing. r. A536, Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. s. A554, Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. t. A563, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. u. A572, Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Colombium-Vanadium

Structural Steel. v. A666, Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat

Bar. w. A668, Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial

Use. x. A780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dipped

Galvanized Coatings. y. A786, Specification for Rolled Steel Floor Plates. z. A924, Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated

by the Hot-Dip Process. aa. A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes For Use in Building

Framing. bb. B26, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. cc. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate. dd. B221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. ee. B308, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes. ff. B429, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and

Tube. gg. B632, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. hh. F467, Specification for Non-Ferrous Nuts for General Use. ii. F468, Specification for Non-Ferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for

General Use. jj. F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. kk. F594, Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.

7. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.1, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc

Welding. b. D1.1, Structural Welding Code Steel. c. D1.2, Structural Welding Code Aluminum. d. D1.3, Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel.

8. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. AMP 510, Metal Stairs Manual.

9. Research Council on Structural Connections: a. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts,

referred to herein as Specification for Structural Joints. 10. U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

a. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA Safety and Health Standards for General Industry, referred to herein as OSHA Standards.




B. Qualifications: 1. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS. 2. Fabricator shall have minimum of 5 years experience in fabrication of metal items

specified. 3. Engineer for contractor-designed systems and components: Professional structural

engineer licensed in the State of Colorado.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the


B. Hardware: As defined in ASTM A153.

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing per ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 with minimum coating of 2.0 OZ of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by standard.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings and details:

a. Submit drawings for all fabrications and assemblies. 1) Include erection drawings, plans, sections, details and connection details.

b. Identify materials of construction, shop coatings and third party accessories. 3. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Provide manufacturer's standard allowable load tables for the following:

1) Grating. 2) Expansion anchor bolts. 3) Adhesive anchor bolts. 4) Castings, trench covers and accessories.

4. Contractor designed systems and components, including but not limited to ladders and connections not fully detailed: Certification that manufactured units meet all design loads specified. a. Shop Drawings and engineering design calculations:

1) Indicate design live loads. 2) Sealed by a professional structural engineer. 3) Engineer will review for general compliance with Contract Documents.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Certification of welders and welding processes.

a. Indicate compliance with AWS.


A. Deliver and handle fabrications to avoid damage.

B. Store above ground on skids or other supports to keep items free of dirt and other foreign debris and to protect against corrosion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors:

a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW Inc. b. Stud Welding Products, Inc.

2. Expansion anchor bolts: a. Hilti Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Powers Fasteners.

3. Epoxy adhesive anchor bolts: a. Hilti Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Powers Fasteners.

4. Self-tapping concrete anchors: a. ITW Hilti Buildex.

5. Castings, trench covers and accessories: a. Neenah Foundry Co. b. Deeter Foundry Co. c. Barry Craft Construction Casting Co. d. McKinley Iron Works.

6. Ladders: a. Any manufacturer capable of meeting the requirements of this Specification

Section. 7. Galvanizing repair paint:

a. ZRC Products. 8. Ladder safety extension post:

a. Bilco.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel: 1. Structural:

a. W-shapes and WT-shapes: ASTM A992 or ASTM A572, Grade 50. b. All other plates and rolled sections: ASTM A36.

2. Pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B or ASTM A501. 3. Structural tubing:

a. ASTM A500, Grade B (46 ksi minimum yield). 4. Bolts, nuts and washers, high strength:

a. ASTM A325, galvanized. b. Provide two washers with all bolts.

5. Bolts and nuts: a. ASTM A307, Grade A. b. Galvanized, ASTM A153.

6. Welding electrodes: AWS D1.1, E70 Series. 7. Steel forgings: ASTM A668.

B. Iron: 1. Ductile iron: ASTM A536. 2. Gray cast iron: ASTM A48 (minimum 30,000 psi tensile strength). 3. Malleable iron: ASTM A47, ASTM A197.


C. Stainless Steel: 1. Minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of 75,000 psi.

a. Bars, shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304. b. Tubing and pipe: ASTM A269, ASTM A312 or ASTM A554, Type 304 or 316. c. Strip, plate and flat bars: ASTM A666, Type 304 or 316, Grade A. d. Bolts and nuts: ASTM F593, Type 303, 304 or 316.

2. Minimum yield strength of 25,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of 70,000 psi. a. Strip, plate and flat bar for welded connections, ASTM A666, Type 304L or

316L. 3. Welding electrodes: In accordance with AWS for metal alloy being welded.

D. Aluminum: 1. Alloy 6061-T6, 32,000 psi tensile yield strength minimum.

a. ASTM B221 and ASTM B308 for shapes including beams, channels, angles, tees and zees.

2. ASTM B26 for castings. 3. ASTM F468, alloy 2024 T4 for bolts. 4. ASTM F467, alloy 2024 T4 for nuts. 5. Electrodes for welding aluminum: AWS D1.2, filler alloy 4043 or 5356.

E. Washers: Same material and alloy as found in accompanying bolts and nuts.

F. Embedded Anchor Bolts: 1. ASTM A307, A36, or A572, galvanized. 2. Type 304 or 316 for wet applications.

a. Wet applications shall be defined as exterior locations and locations inside the pump station below elevation 5352.

G. Expansion Anchor Bolts and Adhesive Anchor Bolts: 1. Galvanized. 2. Type 304 or 316 stainless for wet applications.

a. Wet applications shall be defined as exterior locations and locations inside the pump station below elevation 5352.

3. Provide minimum edge distance cover and spacing as recommended by manufacturer, or as indicated on Drawings whichever is larger. a. Minimum embedment as recommended by manufacturer or eight diameters of

bolt, whichever is larger. b. Notify Engineer if required depth of embedment cannot be achieved at a

particular anchor bolt location. c. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation and torque.

4. Submit manufacturer's load test data to verify at least the anchor bolt capacities at the following embedment depths: a. Data must be based on actual tests performed in unreinforced mass of concrete

of not more than 4000 psi compressive strength. b. Capacity must be at a concrete temperature of at least 130 DegF.

ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER (IN)

EMBEDMENT (IN)

MINIMUM ULTIMATE TENSION CAPACITY (KIP)*, **

3/8 3 4.8 1/2 4 8.1 5/8 5 11.4 3/4 6 15.4 7/8 7 20.0 1 8 24.7 1-1/4 10 34.3


* Data must be based on actual tests preformed in unreinforced mass concrete of not more than 4000 psi compressive strength.

** Capacity must be at a concrete temperature of at least 130 DegF.

5. Expansion anchor bolts: a. Kwik Bolt by Hilti, Inc. b. Trubolt by ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Powerbolt by Powers Fasteners.

6. Adhesive anchor bolts: a. HVA Adhesive Anchor System by Hilti. b. HIT HY 150 Adhesive Anchor by Hilti. c. HSE 2411 Epoxy Adhesive Anchor by Hilti. d. EPCON Ceramic 6 Epoxy by ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. Power Fast by Powers Fasteners. f. Needle Capsule Anchor Systems by Powers Rawl.

7. Self-tapping concrete anchors: a. “Tapcon” by ITW Buildex. b. “Kwick- Conn II” by Hilti. c. 1/4 IN DIA with 5/16 IN hex head.

1) Minimum embedment as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Headed Studs: ASTM A108 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi.

I. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 with a minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 psi.

J. Iron and Steel Hardware: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 when required to be galvanized.

K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: 1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds and abrasions. 2. Dried film shall contain not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight. 3. Similar to ZRC by ZRC Products. 4. VOC: 0 LBS per GAL.

L. Dissimilar Materials Protection: See Section 09905.


A. Ladders: 1. Material:

a. Steel: ASTM A36, ASTM A53, or ASTM A500. 2. Rails:

a. Spacing: Nominal 18 IN from centerline of rails except at top. 1) Minimum clear distance between rails to be 16 IN.

b. Steel: 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 IN square tubing, minimum thickness 0.125 IN 1-1/2 IN nominal diameter schedule 40 pipe.

c. Brackets for wall supported units: Provide 3/8 x 2-1/2 IN x length required angle brackets welded to side rails with punched holes for 3/4 IN bolts. 1) Maximum spacing: 6 FT OC.

d. For floor supported units provide 3/8 x 2-1/2 x 4 IN rectangular bracket or 3/8 x 6 x 6 IN square plate welded to rails with punched holes for 3/4 IN bolts. 1) Provide wall brackets on floor supported units if vertical run is over 6 FT.

3. Rungs: a. Minimum 1 IN DIA or 1 IN square extruded, with integral serrated non-slip finish

on all sides. b. Shop or field-applied grit tape and cap type non-slip finish is not acceptable.

4. Minimum distance from centerline of rung to wall or any obstruction: 7 IN.


5. Rung spacing: a. Uniform, 12 IN (maximum). b. Top rung shall be 3 IN (maximum) lower than landing or platform. c. Spacing of bottom rung from grade or platform may vary but shall not exceed 14

IN. 6. As a minimum, design ladder in accordance with OSHA Standards, ANSI A14.3,

and applicable building codes. a. Ladders shall be designed to support a minimum concentrated live load of 300

LBS. b. Maximum allowable stresses per AISC Specification and AA Specification. c. Maximum lateral deflection: Side rail span/240 when lateral load of 100 LBS is

applied at any location. 7. Construction:

a. Steel. b. Fully welded type. c. All welds to be full penetration welds, where applicable. d. All ladders of a particular material shall have consistent construction and

material shapes and sizes unless detailed otherwise on the Drawings. e. Provide cap at top and bottom of side rails. f. Rungs shall not extend beyond the outside face of the siderail.

8. Finish: a. Steel: Galvanized after fabrication.

9. Ladder safety extension post: a. Telescoping tubular stainless steel section that automatically locks into place

when fully extended. b. Non-ferrous corrosion-resistant spring and hardware. c. Factory assembled with all hardware necessary for mounting to ladder. d. Similar to "LadderUp" safety post by Bilco.

B. Bollards: 1. 8 IN DIA extra strength steel pipe, ASTM A53.

a. Galvanized and painted. b. See Section 09905 for painting requirements.

2. Minimum 48 IN projection above ground. 3. Minimum 48 IN embedment in concrete.

C. Steel Grating: 1. ANSI MBG 531. 2. Bearing bars:

a. Rectangular 2 x 3/16 IN unless shown otherwise on Drawings. b. Maximum 1-3/16 IN OC spacing.

3. Cross bars: a. Welded, swagged or pressure locked to bearing bars. b. Maximum 4 IN OC spacing.

4. Top edges of bars: Serrated. 5. Removable grating sections: Not wider than 3 FT. 6. Finish:

a. Galvanized. b. Clips and bolts: Galvanized. c. Seat angles: Galvanized steel.

7. Ends and perimeter edges: Banded. 8. Openings through grating: Reinforced to provide required load carrying capacity

and banded with 4 IN high toe plate. 9. Provide joints at openings between individual grating sections.

D. Heavy-Duty Castings, Trench Covers, and Accessories: 1. Prefabricated, cast iron ASTM A48 or ductile iron ASTM A536.


2. Design load: AASHTO HS-20 wheel loading for indicated span. 3. Machine horizontal mating surfaces.

E. Access Cover: 1. Tank type manhole frame and solid lid: ASTM A48 or ASTM A536, cast iron. 2. Unless shown otherwise, design of cover shall be such that top of frame extends

several inches above slab to prevent surface water from entering tank. 3. Equip lid with four stainless steel screws to secure lid to frame.

F. Loose Lintels: 1. Steel, ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 Grade 50, sizes as indicated on Drawings. 2. Hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A123 and painted.

G. Hose Rack: 1. Fabricate in accordance with details indicated on the Drawings.

a. Grind smooth all welds after fabrication. 2. For galvanized steel units, galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM

A123. 3. Provide U-bolt mounting to fit size of member being mounted to. 4. Provide stainless steel fasteners, anchor bolts and U-bolts. 5. Material: Galvanized steel.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication.

B. Form materials to shapes indicated with straight lines, true angles, and smooth curves. 1. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp edges.

a. Round all corners to approximately 1/32 - 1/16 IN nominal radius.

C. Provide drilled or punched holes with smooth edges. 1. Punch or drill for field connections and for attachment of work by other trades.

D. Weld Permanent Shop Connections: 1. Welds to be continuous fillet type unless indicated otherwise. 2. Full penetration butt weld at bends in ladder side rails. 3. Weld structural steel in accordance with AWS D1.1 using Series E70 electrodes

conforming to AWS A5.1. 4. Weld aluminum in accordance with AWS D1.2. 5. All headed studs to be welded using automatically timed stud welding equipment. 6. Grind smooth welds that will be exposed.

E. Conceal fastenings where practicable.

F. Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as is practicable.

G. Tolerances: 1. Rolling:

a. ASTM A6. b. When material received from the mill does not satisfy ASTM A6 tolerances for

camber, profile, flatness, or sweep, the Contractor is permitted to perform corrective work by the use of controlled heating and mechanical straightening, subject to the limitations of the AISC specifications.

2. Fabrication tolerance: a. Member length:

1) Both ends finished for contact bearing: 1/32 IN. 2) Framed members:

a) 30 FT or less: 1/16 IN. b) Over 30 FT: 1/8 IN.

b. Member straightness:


1) Compression members: 1/1000 of axial length between points laterally supported.

2) Non-compression members: ASTM A6 tolerance for wide flange shapes. c. Specified member camber (except compression members):

1) 50 FT or less: Minus 0/plus 1/2 IN. 2) Over 50 FT: Minus 0/plus 1/2 IN (plus 1/8 IN per 10 FT over 50 FT). 3) Members received from mill with 75 percent of specified camber require no

further cambering. 4) Beams/trusses without specified camber shall be fabricated so after

erection, camber is upward. 5) Camber shall be measured in fabrication shop in unstressed condition.

d. At bolted splices, depth deviation shall be taken up by filler plates. 1) At welded joints, adjust weld profile to conform to variation in depth. 2) Slope weld surface per AWS requirements.

e. Finished members shall be free from twists, bends and open joints. 1) Sharp kinks, bends and deviation from above tolerances are cause for

rejection of material.

H. Fabricate grating, ladders and accessories using galvanized steel. 1. Finish:

a. Aluminum: Mill finished unless scheduled or otherwise specified or, if approved by Engineer, finished in manufacturer's standard.

b. Steel: Galvanized. c. Coat surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials.

1) See Section 09905. 2. See Section 09905 for preparation and painting of ferrous metals and other

surfaces.

I. Maximum tolerance for difference in depth between checkered plate or grating depth and seat or support angle depth: 1/8 IN.

J. Maximum distance between edge of grating or checkered plate and face of embedded seat angle or face of wall or other structural member: 1/4 IN.


A. Surface Preparation: 1. Refer to Section 09905 for surface preparation requirements.

B. Shop Applied Paint Coating Application: 1. Refer to Section 09905 for painting requirements.

C. OWNER pays for inspection and testing: 1. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to inspect

and test structural steel shop and field work for compliance with Specifications. 2. Contractor responsible for testing to qualify shop and field welders and as needed

for Contractor's own quality control to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Contractor provides sufficient notification and access so inspection and testing can

be accomplished. 4. Contractor pays for retesting of failed tests and for additional testing required when

defects are discovered.

D. CONTRACTOR pays for inspection and testing: 1. Employ and pay for the services of a qualified independent testing agency to inspect

and test all structural steel work for compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Independent testing agency shall have a minimum of five (5) years performing

similar work and shall be subject to Owner's approval.

E. Responsibilities of Testing Agency:


1. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with Section 6 of AWS Code including the following non-destructive testing: a. Visually inspect all welds. b. In addition to visual inspection, test 50 percent of full penetration welds and 20

percent of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant. c. Test 20 percent of liquid dye penetrant tested full penetration welds with

ultrasonic or radiographic testing. 2. Inspect high-strength bolting in accordance with Section 9 of the Specification for

Structural Joints. a. Verify direct tension indicator gaps.

3. Inspect structural steel which has been erected. 4. Inspect stud welding in accordance with Article 7.8, AWS Code. 5. Prepare and submit inspection and test reports to Engineer.

a. Assist Engineer to determine corrective measures necessary for defective work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide items to be built into other construction in time to allow their installation. 1. If such items are not provided in time for installation, cut in and install.

B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate. 1. Installation of product constitutes installer's acceptance of substrate condition for

product compatibility.

C. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation. 1. Field welding aluminum is not permitted unless approved in writing by Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Set metal work level, true to line, plumb. 1. Shim and grout as necessary.

B. Contractor is solely responsible for safety. 1. Construction means and methods and sequencing of work is the prerogative of the

Contractor. 2. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many structural members is

not realized until structural assembly is complete; e.g., until slabs, decks, and diagonal bracing or rigid connections are installed.

3. Partially complete structural members shall not be loaded without an investigation by the Contractor.

4. Until all elements of the permanent structure and lateral bracing system are complete, temporary bracing for the partially complete structure will be required.

C. Adequate temporary bracing to provide safety, stability and to resist all loads to which the partially complete structure may be subjected, including construction activities and operation of equipment is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Plumb, align, and set structural steel members to specified tolerances. 2. Use temporary guys, braces, shoring, connections, etc., necessary to maintain the

structural framing plumb and in proper alignment until permanent connections are made, the succeeding work is in place, and temporary work is no longer necessary.

3. Use temporary guys, bracing, shoring, and other work to prevent injury or damage to adjacent work or construction from stresses due to erection procedures and operation of erection equipment, construction loads, and wind.


4. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the temporary bracing system and must consider the sequence and schedule of placement of such elements and effects of loads imposed on the structural steel members by partially or completely installed work, including work of all other trades. a. If not obvious from experience or from the Drawings, the Contractor shall confer

with the Engineer to identify those structural steel element that must be complete before the temporary bracing system is removed.

5. Remove and dispose of all temporary work and facilities off-site.

D. Examine work-in-place on which specified work is in any way dependent to ensure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work. 1. Report defects in work-in-place which may influence satisfactory completion of the

work. 2. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of work-in-place.

E. Field Measurement: 1. Take field measurements as necessary to verify or supplement dimensions

indicated on the Drawings. 2. Contractor responsible for the accurate fit of the work.

F. Check the elevations of all finished footings or foundations and the location and alignment of all anchor bolts before starting erection. 1. Use surveyor's level. 2. Notify Engineer of any errors or deviations found by such checking.

G. Framing member location tolerances after erection shall not exceed the frame tolerances listed in Article 3.3.

H. Erect plumb and level; introduce temporary bracing required to support erection loads.

I. Use light drifting necessary to draw holes together. 1. Drifting to match unfair holes is not allowed.

J. Welding: 1. Conform to AWS D1.1 and requirements of Article 2.4. 2. When joining two sections of steel of different ASTM designations, welding

techniques shall be in accordance with a qualified AWS D1.1 procedure.

K. Shore existing members when unbolting of common connections is required. 1. Use new bolts for rebolting connections.

L. Clean stored material of all foreign matter accumulated during erection period.

M. Bolt Field Connections: Where practicable, conceal fastenings.

N. Grind welds smooth where field welding is required.

O. Field cutting grating or checkered plate to correct fabrication errors is not acceptable. 1. Replace entire section.

P. Remove all burrs and radius all sharp edges and corners of miscellaneous plates, angles, framing system elements, etc.

Q. Unless noted or specified otherwise: 1. Connect steel members to steel members with 3/4 IN DIA ASTM A325 high strength

bolts. 2. Connect aluminum to aluminum with 3/4 IN DIA aluminum bolts. 3. Connect aluminum to structural steel using 3/4 IN DIA stainless steel bolts.

a. Provide dissimilar metals protection. 4. Connect aluminum and steel members to concrete and masonry using stainless

steel expansion anchor bolts or adhesive anchor bolts unless shown otherwise. a. Provide dissimilar materials protection.

5. Provide washers for all bolted connections.


6. Where exposed, bolts shall extend a maximum of 3/4 IN and a minimum of 1/2 IN above the top nut. a. If bolts are cut off to required maximum height, threads must be dressed to allow

nuts to be removed without damage to the bolt or the nuts.

R. Install and tighten ASTM A325 high-strength bolts in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design (ASD). 1. Provide hardened washers for all ASTM A325 bolts.

a. Provide the hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening.

b. Provide bearing type connection, except for applications where slip-critical is specified or required by the specification for structural joints.

S. After bolts are tightened, upset threads of ASTM A307 unfinished bolts or anchor bolts to prevent nuts from backing off.

T. Secure metal to wood with lag screws of adequate size with appropriate washers.

U. Do not field splice fabricated items unless said items exceed standard shipping length or change of direction requires splicing. 1. Provide full penetration welded splices where continuity is required or indicated.

V. Provide each fabricated item complete with attachment devices as indicated or required to install.

W. Anchor such that work will not be distorted nor fasteners overstressed from expansion and contraction.

X. Set beam and equipment base plates accurately on nonshrink grout as indicated on Drawings, or as required. 1. See Division 3 for non-shrink grout. 2. Set and anchor each base plate to proper line and elevation.

a. Use metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts for leveling and plumbing columns and beams. 1) Wedges, shims and setting nuts to be of same metal as base plate they

support. 2) Tighten nuts on anchor bolts.

b. Fill space between bearing surface and bottom of base plate with nonshrink grout. 1) Fill space until voids are completely filled and base plates are fully bedded

on wedges, shims, and grout. c. Do not remove wedges or shims.

1) Where they protrude, cut off flush with edge of base plate. d. Fill sleeves around anchor bolts solid with non-shrink grout.

Y. Tie anchor bolts in position to embedded reinforcing steel using wire. 1. Tack welding prohibited.

a. Coat bolt threads and nuts with heavy coat of clean grease. 2. Anchor bolt location tolerance:

a. 1/16 IN. b. Provide steel templates for all column anchor bolts.

Z. Install bollards in concrete as detailed. 1. Fill pipe with concrete and round off at top.

AA. Accurately locate and place frames for openings before casting into floor slab so top of plate is flush with surface of finished floor. 1. Keep screw holes clean and ready to receive screws.

BB. Attach grating to end and intermediate supports with grating saddle clips and bolts. 1. Maximum spacing: 2 FT OC with minimum of two per side.


2. Attach individual units of aluminum grating together with clips at 2 FT OC maximum with a minimum of two clips per side.

CC. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials in accordance with Section 09905.

DD. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780. 1. Prepare damaged surfaces by abrasive blasting or power sanding. 2. Apply galvanizing repair paint to minimum 6 mils DFT in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.

EE. Anchor ladder to concrete structure with minimum 3/4 IN stainless steel adhesive anchor bolts with minimum 6 IN embedment.


A. Tolerances (unless otherwise noted on the Drawings): 1. Frame placement, after assembly and before welding or tightening.

a. Deviation from plumb, level and alignment: 1 in 500, maximum. b. Displacement of centerlines of columns: 1/2 IN maximum, each side of

centerline location shown on Drawings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After erection, installation or application, clean all miscellaneous metal fabrication surfaces of all dirt, weld slag and other foreign matter.

B. Provide surface acceptable to receive field applied paint coatings specified in Section 09905.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Rough carpentry.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05505 - Metal Fabrications.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Forest and Paper Association (AF&PA):

a. NDS, National Design Specifications. 2. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):

a. Book of Standards. b. Use Category System.

3. APA - The Engineered Wood Association (APA): a. PRP-108, Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural Use

Panels. b. U450D, Storage and Handling of APA Trademarked Panels. c. Y510T, Plywood Design Specification.

4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D2898, Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-

Treated Wood for Fire Testing. b. D4442, Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of

Wood and Wood-Base Materials. c. D4444, Standard Test Methods for Use and Calibration of Hand-Held Moisture

Meters. d. E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

5. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 723, UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

7. U. S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST): a. PS 1, Construction and Industrial Plywood. b. PS 2, Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural Use Panels. c. PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard.

8. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 9. Building code:

a. International Code Conference (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2003 Edition

including all State of Colorado amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

B. Qualifications: 1. Wood Treatment Plant: AWPA M3. 2. Treated Wood Inspection: AWPA M2.


C. Miscellaneous: 1. Factory marking:

a. Lumber: 1) Identify type, grade, moisture content, inspection service, producing mill,

and other qualities specified. 2) Marking may be omitted, as allowed by Building Code, if certificate of

inspection is provided for each shipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Fabrication drawings of all fabricated items. 3. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions for all products specified. 4. Certifications:

a. Chemicals used in treatment process are registered with and approved by EPA. b. Moisture content of material prior to treatment: 25 percent maximum. c. Material has been kiln-dried after treatment (KDAT) to the moisture content

specified.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Delivery, storage and handling of untreated wood products: 1. Lumber: As recommended by the grading agency indicated on the grade stamp.

B. Delivery, storage, handling and disposal of treated wood products: AWPA M4.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Lumber (for framing, blocking, nailers, furring, grounds and similar members):

a. NIST PS 20. b. Species:

1) Treated material: As indicated in the appropriate AWPA Standard. c. Grade:

1) For nominal sizes up to and including 2 x 4: Standard and better. 2) For nominal sizes up to 2 IN thick and wider than 4 IN: #2 and better.

2. Moisture content: a. Kiln-dry, ASTM D4442/D4444. b. Lumber, 19 percent maximum.

B. Preservative Treated Material: 1. Moisture content:

a. Prior to treatment: 25 percent. b. Kiln-dry after treatment (KDAT), ASTM D4442/ D4444:

1) Lumber: 19 percent maximum. 2. Preservative:

a. Waterborne, AWPA P5. b. As indicated in the appropriate AWPA commodity standards.

3. Pressure-treat material in accordance with AWPA C1 and the following: a. Lumber: C2, C15.


4. Wherever practicable, material to be treated shall be manufactured in its final form prior to treatment.

C. Fasteners and Anchors: Proper type, size, material, and finish for application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify measurements, dimensions, and shop drawing details before proceeding.

B. Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports for attached work.

C. Eliminate sharp projections which would puncture roofing, flashing or underlayment material.

3.2 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Provide treated material in accordance with appropriate AWPA standard for

intended end use. 2. Provide preservative treated material for all wood used:

a. Outside building. b. In cavity walls.

3. Field treat cuts and holes in preservative treated material in accordance with AWPA M4.

B. Attach work securely by anchoring and fastening as indicated or required to support applied loading. 1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts. 2. Use galvanized nails and fasteners unless indicated otherwise. 3. Use common wire nails or screws for general work. 4. Use fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be

exposed to view or receive finish materials. 5. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 6. Do not drive threaded friction type fasteners. 7. Tighten bolts and lag screws at installation and retighten as required.

C. Set work to required levels and lines, plumb, true. 1. Shim as required. 2. Cut and fit accurately.

D. Provide wood grounds, nailers, or blocking where required for attachment of other work and surface applied items. Form to shapes indicated or required. 1. Grounds:

a. Dressed, key beveled lumber minimum 1-1/2 IN wide of thickness required to bring face of ground even with finish material.

b. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

E. When wood has been exposed to moisture allow to completely dry out prior to covering with additional wood or another material.

F. Correct or replace wood which shows bowing, warping or twisting to provide a straight, plumb and level substrate for applications of other materials.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07120 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fluid applied waterproofing. 2. Specific concrete finishing requirements.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Division 3 - Concrete.



a. C836, Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course.

B. Qualifications: 1. Applicator licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer. 2. Applicator shall have minimum of 10 years experience in application of products

specified.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. Manufacturer's authorized representative shall review substrate preparation and

provide written approval of substrate prior to installation of product.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 1. Installer and applicator are synonymous.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Details showing special conditions. 3. Product technical data including:


b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Certification of Applicator qualifications. 5. Applicator's experience record.

B. Warranty.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Manufacturer's written approval of substrate.


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranty signed jointly by Applicator and manufacturer.

B. Warranty for period of 5 years from date of acceptance by Owner.

C. Warranty waterproof integrity of installation, adhesion to substrate, and surface degradation.

D. Repair and/or replace waterproofing that fails during warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Waterproofing system:

a. "Scotch-Clad" buried Membrane System - 3M Co. b. "TREMproof 60" - Tremco Inc. c. "Vulkem 201/222" - Mameco Int. d. "Duramen H500, V500" - Pecora Corp.

B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01640.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer appropriate to substrate.

B. Waterproofing System: One component, moisture curing polyurethane elastomer meeting requirements of ASTM C836. 1. Flowing type for surfaces up to 5 percent slope. 2. Non-flow type for surfaces exceeding 5 percent.

C. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Flashing Reinforcement: Woven uncoated fiberglass mesh.

E. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard.

F. Protection Board: Fiberboard.

G. Below Grade Insulation: Extruded polystyrene, 3 IN thick acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer.

H. Backer Rod: Closed cell polyurethane foam rod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cure concrete and masonry in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Verify moisture content does not exceed manufacturer's maximum allowable.

B. Remove surface contamination by cleaning or abrasive blasting.

C. Patch holes and voids in accordance with Section 03348 and coating manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Prepare substrate per manufacturer's printed instructions.


3.2 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Provide minimum 60 mil dry film thickness. 2. Apply waterproofing to the exterior side of all vertical concrete wall surfaces

(surfaces against earth) where finished interior building space occurs on the opposite side of the wall and other locations where indicated on the Drawings.

B. Verify that concrete has been troweled and broomed, free of fins, ridges or voids. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of substrate.

C. Ensure that curing agents used are compatible with coating system.

D. Clean and prime all metal surfaces.

E. Protect adjacent surfaces.

F. Extend coating over all previously flashed areas.

G. Allow vertical applications to cure minimum of 12 HRS at 75 DegF prior to backfilling or as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Install extruded polystyrene insulation at perimeter below grade. 1. Provide insulation manufactured specifically for use in below grade applications. 2. Install insulation below grade outside foundation walls. 3. Install in mastic with tight joints. 4. Protect from damage and/or displacement during backfilling and/or pouring of floor

slab.

I. Install protection board.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07162 DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Dampproofing.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Division 3 - Concrete. 4. Division 4 - Masonry. 5. Section 07210 - Building Insulation.



a. D1227, Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used As a Protective Coating for Roofing.

B. Qualifications: 1. Licensed or approved in writing by coating manufacturer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS




B. Warranty.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Applicator qualifications.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide written warranty signed jointly by applicator and manufacturer.

B. Warranty for period of 5 years from date of acceptance by Owner.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Dampproofing system:

a. Karnak 83 or 86 - Karnak Chemical Corporation. b. Hydrocide 700 or 700B - Sonneborn. c. Sealmastic Type 2 or 3 - W. R. Meadows Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Dampproofing: 1. Fibrated asphalt emulsion coating for trowel, spray or brush application. 2. Primer as recommended by coating manufacturer. 3. ASTM D1227, Type 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Allow masonry and/or concrete to cure per manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 APPLICATION


B. Apply dampproofing to exterior face of exterior concrete walls where indicated as "DAMPPROOFING."

C. Apply two coats each at manufacturer's recommended coverage rates.

D. Remove coating from adjacent surfaces as required.


A. Test wet film thickness and comply with listed manufacturer's recommended coverage rates. Apply additional material as required.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07176 LIQUID WATER REPELLENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid water repellent Type 2.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04210 - Brick Masonry.


A. Material must not inhibit the adhesion of future paint coatings.

B. Mock-Ups: 1. Product shall be applied to sample wall erected under Section 04210.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Letter from manufacturer stating that product is suitable for intended use and is

compatible with and will not cause discoloration of brick units. 3. Field conducted water spray test results. 4. Warranty.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's standard 5-year performance warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Liquid water repellent:

a. L & M Construction Chemicals. b. Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. c. Hydrozo, Inc. d. Nox-Crete Chemicals Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Liquid Water Repellent Type 2:


1. Clear, deep penetrating sealer formulated for sealing vertical concrete and brick surfaces. a. Water based, VOC compliant, odorless.

1) VOC: <195 g/L. b. Non-yellowing, non-staining. c. Provides both surface barrier and penetrating chemical action barrier.

2. Surface barrier shall protect against water intrusion, mildew, dirt and airborne contaminants.

3. Product similar to L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "HYDROPEL WB."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to be covered.

B. Clean surfaces to be covered in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Make all mortar repairs at least 48 HRS prior to application.

D. Allow masonry surfaces to cure minimum of 10 days prior to application.


A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. At a minimum apply material in accordance with manufacturer's recommended

application rates. a. Apply two coats of material.

2. Apply material using procedures and equipment recommended by manufacturer.

B. Apply liquid water repellent "Type 2" to exterior brick surfaces.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07190 UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Under slab vapor retarder.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Division 3 - Concrete.



a. D882, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. b. D1709, Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the

Free-Falling Dart Method. c. E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. d. E1643, Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. e. E1745, Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with

Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




B. Miscellaneous Submittals: Manufacturer's recommendation on vapor retarder tape.

C. Samples: Provide 6 IN x 6 IN sample of vapor retarder material and vapor retarder tape.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Vapor retarder:

a. Fortifiber Corporation. b. Raven. c. WR Meadows, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Polyolefin film or reinforced polyethylene or new generation resin.

B. Vapor Retarder Tape: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturers.


2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Boots: Manufacturer's standard boot fabricated to maintain the integrity of the vapor retarder system.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Vapor Retarder: 1. ASTM E1745, Class A, minimum 15 mil thickness. 2. Water vapor permeance: 0.03 maximum per ASTM E96. 3. Puncture resistance: ASTM D1709, Method B, 2200 grams. 4. Minimum tensile strength: 45 LBS/IN, ASTM D882.

B. Vapor Retarder Tape: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643.

B. Place continuous vapor retarder above granular fill subgrade material.

C. Lap vapor retarder 3 IN at ends and edges of sheets and seal with tape.

D. Extend to extremities of area, turn up at perimeter to form bond breaker between slab and wall. 1. Tape in place. 2. Do not turn up at perimeter if slab is keyed into perimeter wall.

E. Provide pipe boot for all pipes penetrating the floor slab.

F. Trim off excess material even with top of slab after slab is placed.


A. Ensure proper precautions are implemented to prevent damage to installed vapor retarder membrane prior to and during pouring of concrete floor slab.

B. Patch all punctures, tears, holes, etc., with additional layer of vapor retarder and seal entire patch with vapor retarder tape.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Building insulation section. 2. Reference 07550 for roofing insulation.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04210 - Brick Masonry. 4. Section 07162 - Dampproofing. 5. Section 07120 – Fluid applied waterproofing.



a. C1289, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.


B. Mock-Ups: 1. Provide insulation for sample walls required in Section 04210.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's recommendations on sealants and mastics.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Certification from insulation manufacturer stating that insulation proposed is

acceptable for intended use per the Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contact Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rigid polyisocyanurate board insulation:

a. Dow Chemical Company. b. UC Industries.


c. Amoco Foam Products. d. Owens Corning.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sealant and Mastic (for setting polyisocyanurate insulation board): Manufacturer's recommended standard. Coordinate with Section 07162 Dampproofing.

B. Rigid Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: 1. ASTM C1289, Type I, Class 2. 2. Compressive strength: 25 psi minimum. 3. Density: 2 pcf nominal. 4. Vapor transmission: 0.03 perm-IN maximum. 5. Water absorption: 0.3 percent maximum. 6. Thermal resistance (r-value at 78 deg F): 6.5 IN. 7. Thermal conductivity (k-Value at 75 DegF): 0.14. 8. Reflective foil facer both sides at cavity walls 9. Minimum R-19 at cavity walls (nominal 3 IN thick). 10. Provide insulation designed for intended use. 11. Similar to Dow Chemical Company "Thermax Insulating Sheathing".

C. Vapor Retarder: 1. Minimum 1 mil thick aluminum foil between two layers of 1/2 mil thick mylar

polyester. 2. Perm rating: Not exceeding 0.02. 3. Similar to alumiseal "Zero-Perm Vapor retarder."

D. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.

E. Extruded polystyrene

1. Reference Section 07120 – Below greade waterproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. General: 1. Insulate full thickness over surfaces to be insulated. 2. Fit tightly around obstructions, fill voids. 3. Cover all penetrations with insulation. 4. Seal all joints with sealant or tape as applicable. 5. Seal or tape to abutting materials to maintain vapor retarder integrity. 6. Tape butted joints of insulation. 7. Apply single or double layer to achieve total thickness.

a. If double layer is provided stagger all joints minimum 12 IN. 8. Do not use broken or torn pieces of insulation. 9. Install so that completed installation is vapor tight. 10. If vapor retarder tape fails to adhere to any surface, apply sprayed-on adhesive as

recommended by tape manufacturer to promote adhesion.

C. Rigid Board Polyisocyanurate Insulation in Cavity Walls: 1. Provide insulation manufactured specifically for use in cavity wall construction.


2. Do not proceed with installation until subsequent work which conceals insulation is ready to be performed.

3. Extend insulation full thickness over entire area to be insulated. Cut and tightly fit around all penetrations.

4. Set each piece of insulation flush with the abutting piece to eliminate ledges in the face of the insulation.

5. Install mastic on face of concrete back-up in accordance with mastic and insulation manufacturer's recommendation.

6. Press courses of insulation between wall ties with edges butted tightly both ways. 7. Set units firmly into mastic. 8. Seal all horizontal and vertical joints with sealant recommended by insulation

manufacturer.


A. Repair or replace damaged insulation as directed by Engineer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07550 SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. SBS modified bitumen roofing systems including roof insulation. 2. Insulated curbs not provided under Division 15 for roof top mechanical equipment.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA). 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C1289, Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.

b. D41, Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.

c. D312, Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. d. D6163, Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified

Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements. e. D6164, Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified

Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcement. 3. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA):

a. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 580, Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

B. Qualifications: 1. Applicator licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer. 2. Contractor and applicator shall have a minimum of 10 years experience installing

roof membrane systems similar to system specified. a. Minimum of five (5) years of the 10 years experience shall have been spent

installing roof systems manufactured by company proposed for use.

1.3 DEFINITIONS




A. System consists of fire-rated ceramic granule coated cap sheet over intermediate ply over base sheet over insulation over vapor retarder over decking.


1.5 SUBMITTALS



a. Scaled outline of roof showing slopes, edge details, penetrations and details, and any special condition not covered on the Drawings. 1) Minimum plan scale: 1/8 IN = 1 FT. 2) Minimum detail scale: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT.

3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards

referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the

submittal process. 2. Certifications prior to installation:

a. Certification of Contractor and Applicator's qualifications. b. Documentation from roofing manufacturer and insulation manufacturer stating

that roof insulation being used is compatible with roofing system and will perform properly for intended use.

c. Documentation from roofing manufacturer and insulation manufacturer stating that treated wood specified is compatible with roofing system and is acceptable for intended use.

3. Certifications for final closeout: a. Certification by manufacturer's representative that roof has been installed

properly. b. Warranty.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:



A. Store roof insulation off ground under cover in accordance with insulation manufacturer's recommendations to prevent physical and moisture damage.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Furnish manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty on roofing system. 1. Warranty to include provision for Owner's personnel to make emergency repairs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Roofing materials:

a. CertainTeed. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF Corp.


d. Johns Manville. 2. Non-composite insulation:

a. Apache Foam Products Co. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF. d. Grefco. e. Hunter. f. Johns Manville. g. RMAX.

3. Composite insulation: a. Apache Foam Products Co. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF. d. Grefco. e. Hunter. f. Johns Manville. g. RMAX.

4. Tapered insulation: a. Apache. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF. d. Grefco. e. Hunter. f. Johns Manville. g. RMAX.

5. Piping and ducting penetration curbs: a. Pate. b. ThyCurb.


2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Roof Assembly Design Criteria: 1. Hail and wind uplift resistance:

a. UL 580, Class 90. 2. Fire resistance:

a. UL Class A.

B. Roofing System: Multiple ply SBS modified bitumen membrane in solid mopping of asphalt over insulation over vapor barrier.

2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Roofing Membranes - SBS Modified Bitumen: 1. Base ply: ASTM D6163, Type 1, Grade S.

a. Thickness: Minimum 80 mil. b. Weight: Minimum 45 LBS/SQ. c. Similar to Firestone "SBS" Base.

2. Intermediate ply: ASTM D6164, Type I, Grade G. a. Thickness: Minimum 85 mils. b. Weight: Minimum 54 LBS/SQ. c. Similar to Firestone "SBS Smooth."

3. Cap ply: ASTM D6164, Type II, Grade G. a. Factory applied white ceramic granules. b. Fire rated. c. Weight: Minimum 90 LBS/SQ. d. Thickness: Minimum 130 mil.


B. Vapor Retarder: 1. Non-fire rated:

a. Class A rated. b. Water vapor permeance: 0.03 maximum. c. Tensile strength: 45.0 LBF/IN. d. Puncture resistance: Minimum 2200 grams. e. Compatible with roofing system and acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

C. Composite Insulation: 1. ASTM C1289. 2. Board formed of polyisocyanurate foam with high density wood fiberboard on one

(1) side and asphalt saturated felt or fiberglass mat on opposite side. a. Facer materials shall be acceptable to roofing manufacturer. b. Density: Nominal 2 pcf. c. Flamespread (foam core): Less than 50. d. Compressive strength: Minimum 20 psi.

3. Minimum R-30 at roof. 4. 4 FT x 4 FT or 4 FT x 8 FT boards as recommended by roofing manufacturer. 5. Acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

D. Non-Composite Insulation: 1. ASTM C1289. 2. Rigid polyisocyanurate foam core with fiberglass mat facers on one (1) or both faces

as required by roofing manufacturer and installation conditions. a. Facer material shall be acceptable to roofing manufacturer. b. Density: 2 pcf. c. Compressive strength: Minimum 20 psi. d. Flame spread (foam core): Less than 50.

E. Tapered Insulation: 1. ASTM C1289. 2. Rigid polyisocyanurate foam core with glass reinforced facers.

a. Same physical and fire properties as composite insulation. 3. Minimum 1/4 IN per foot slope. 4. Acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

F. Roof Crickets: Tapered insulation per this Specification sloped to provide a minimum 1/4 IN per foot slope.

G. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.

H. Bitumen: Unless otherwise required by roofing manufacturer provide the following: 1. ASTM D312. 2. Type III for installation of insulation, and flashings on vertical surfaces. 3. Type III or IV for installation of base and cap sheet. 4. Approved by the roofing manufacturer.

I. Flashing: Ceramic granule coated SBS modified asphalt membrane as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

J. Flashing Fasteners: As recommended by roofing manufacturer.

K. Walking Surface: Additional layer of SBS cap sheet of a contrasting color adhered to roof membrane or other walkway material approved by roofing manufacturer.

L. Pipe Penetrations (For Pipes 6 IN DIA or Smaller): 1. Provide pitch pockets constructed in accordance with NRCA accepted standards.

M. Duct and Pipe Penetrations (For Pipe Penetrations Larger than 6 IN DIA): 1. Provide insulated pre-fabricated roof curb similar to ThyCurb Model TC-1.


2. Provide all sheet metal flashing and counterflashing as required for weather-tight installation. a. See Section 07600 for sheet metal flashing.

2.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide Owner with patch repair kit containing materials as required for emergency repairs as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

B. Instruct Owner's personnel on making emergency repairs to roof.

C. Owner to notify manufacturer within three (3) working days if emergency repairs are made by Owner's personnel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Prior to beginning installation of roof system, verify that all through deck penetrations have been completed.

B. Install all components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, recommendations of the NRCA and ARMA.

C. Installation of Vapor Retarder: 1. Prime deck in accordance with recommendations of roofing materials manufacturer.

a. Lap edges 6 IN, ends 6 IN. b. Seal all laps. c. Extend to outside edge of roof surface and turn up parapet wall to top of

insulation.

D. Install all treated nailers required but not indicated on Drawings.

E. Install insulation using solid moppings of asphalt. 1. Prime surface of vapor retarder as required by manufacturer. 2. Cut insulation neatly to fit around all roof penetrations and projections.

a. Butt joints tightly. b. When installing multiple layers of insulation, stagger all joints between layers.

3. Provide tapered insulation as shown on the Drawings.

F. Provide cricket behind all roof penetrations larger than 12 IN.

G. Install flashing at all vertical surfaces, roof interruption and penetrations.

H. Coordinate roofing work with work under Section 07600.


A. Install only as much insulation as can be covered with roofing membrane and completed before the end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural flashing and sheet metal work. 2. Prefinished downspouts and conductor heads. 3. Stainless steel scuppers.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04155 - Masonry Accessories. 4. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. 5. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA):

a. 2605, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. A176, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip. c. A653, Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. d. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): a. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sixth Edition, 2003.

B. Qualifications: 1. Sheet metal fabricator shall have minimum 10 years experience in fabrication of

sheet metal items similar to items specified. 2. Sheet metal installer shall have minimum five (5) years experience installing sheet

metal items specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



1.4 SUBMITTALS





Deleted: ¶¶¶¶


3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Scaled drawing showing expansion joint locations, special conditions, profile,

fastening and jointing details. 1) Minimum plan scale: 1/8 IN = 1 FT. 2) Minimum detail scale: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT.

4. Fabricator qualifications. 5. Installer qualifications.

B. Samples: 1. Finish and color samples for each product specified for Engineer preliminary color

selection. 2. For final color selection, provide two (2) 2 IN x 3 IN colored metal samples for each

color selected during the initial color selection.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the

submittal process. 2. Warranty: Manufacturer's sample warranty language.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five (5) year warranty on sheet metal work, signed jointly by Contractor and sheet metal installer. 1. Agree to repair or replace work which leaks water or, where applicable, air or

deteriorates excessively, including color failure, or otherwise fails to perform as watertight and, where appropriate, airtight flashing.

B. Factory applied high performance organic coatings utilizing PVDF resins shall be provided with manufacturer's standard 20 year warranty against color fade, chalking and film integrity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. PVDF resin:

a. PPG - DURANAR. b. Valspar - Fluropon. c. Arkema Inc. - KYNAR 500. d. Solvay Solexis - HYLAR 5000.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Factory Formed Aluminum Coping: 1. Coping piece: Aluminum, ASTM B209. 2. Coping chair and anchor plate: Steel, galvanized per ASTM A653 or stainless steel

per ASTM A167.

B. Sheet Metal: Steel, galvanized per ASTM A653.

C. Sheet Metal: Stainless steel, ASTM A167 or ASTM A176.

D. Fasteners: Non-ferrous compatible with sheet metal.

E. Retainer Clips and Continuous Cleats: Galvanized steel or stainless steel.

F. Solder: ASTM B32.


G. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Comply with Section 09905.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories as required to form a complete water and airtight system. 1. Conductor Head:

a. Conductor head profile as indicated on drawings. b. Provide 1 IN x 4 IN overflow opening with drip edge on front face of conductor.

2. 24 GA galvanized sheet metal. 3. 4 IN long outlet tube. 4. Provide debris screen on top of conductor head.

a. 1/4 x 1/4 IN aluminum mesh screen. b. Screen shall be removable without damage to screen or conductor head.

5. Scuppers: a. Stainless steel: 16 GA minimum. b. Size as indicated on drawings.

B. Downspouts: 1. Rectangular. 2. Size: 4 IN x 4 IN. 3. Seamless construction fabricated in longest practical lengths.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Sheet Metal (Steel): 1. Minimum 24 GA galvanized steel; G60 coating. 2. Match gage of surrounding sheet metal. 3. Finish: Meet requirements of AAMA 2605.

a. PVDF coating with minimum 70 percent resin content. 1) Color: To be selected from manufacturers standard colors.

B. Factory Formed Aluminum Coping: 1. Coping piece which locks to anchor plate fastened to top of wall. 2. Coping: Aluminum, minimum 0.050 IN. 3. Anchor plate: Galvanized steel, minimum 20 GA. 4. Splice plates: Aluminum, minimum 0.032 IN.

a. Continuous, minimum 6 IN long. b. Front and back legs with extruded butyl seal. c. Finish to match coping.

5. Finish: Meet requirements of AAMA 2605. a. PVDF coating with minimum 70 percent resin content.

1) Color: To be selected from manufacturers standard colors. 6. Factory mitered and welded corners. 7. FM approved.

C. Retainer Clips and Continuous Cleats: 1. Use 0.050 IN stainless steel with aluminum or stainless steel.

D. Shop fabricate items to maximum extent possible. 1. Fabricate true and sharp to profiles and sizes indicated on Drawings.

a. Shop fabricate and weld or solder all corners. Formatted: Indent: Left: 61.2 pt

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide items to be built into other construction to Contractor in time to allow their installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SMACNA, and as indicated on Drawings.

B. Solder steel and weld aluminum to achieve weathertight joints and required details; do not solder or weld slip joints and prefinished items.

C. Fasten materials at intervals recommended by SMACNA.

D. Install slip joints to allow for thermal movement as recommended by SMACNA and manufacturer. 1. Maximum spacing: 10 FT OC. 2. Provide slip joint 24 IN from corners. 3. Provide slip joint at each vertical expansion joint location in wall.

a. Provide break in continuous cleat at each vertical expansion joint.

E. Caulk slip joints with two (2) beads of sealant on each side of slip joint overlap. 1. Refer to Section 07900 for sealant.

F. Caulk all exposed joints of coping with sealant to match color of metal being sealed.

G. Form flashings to provide spring action with exposed edges hemmed or folded to create tight junctures.

H. Provide dissimilar metals and materials protection where dissimilar metals come in contact or where sheet metal contacts mortar, concrete masonry or concrete. 1. Refer to Section 09905 for dissimilar metals protection.

I. Provide all components necessary to create watertight junctures between roofing and sheet metal work.

J. Provide all miscellaneous sheet metal items not specifically covered elsewhere, as indicated or required to provide a weathertight installation.

K. Installation of Scupper and Conductor Head: 1. Flash the opening in the parapet wall and install the scupper and conductor head as

indicated in SMACNA Guidelines. 2. Seal all joints to provide complete weathertight installation. 3. Flash roofing material onto scupper per roofing manufacturer's recommendations.

L. Installation of Downspouts: 1. Install downspouts in locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide downspout anchor straps per SMACNA Figure 1-35 as appropriate for

downspout style. 3. Provide gutter to conductor head connection per SMACNA Guidelines. 4. Seal all joints in downspout for a complete watertight system. 5. Angle bottom of downspout out away from building. 6. Anchor hanger straps to building wall with stainless steel screws and anchor sleeves

appropriate for wall construction. a. Provide minimum of two (2) anchors per strap.


7. Maximum spacing of hanger straps shall be 10 FT with minimum of two (2) hanger straps per vertical piece of downspout.

8. Spacing and location of hanger straps shall be consistent from downspout to downspout.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sealant work.


C. Work included consists of but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Sealing all joints which will permit penetration of dust, air or moisture, unless sealing

work is specifically required under other sections. Work may include the following: a. Flashing reglets and retainers. b. Exterior wall joints. c. Masonry control joints, exterior and interior and between masonry and other

materials. d. Flooring joints. e. Isolation joints. f. Joints between paving or sidewalks and building. g. Concrete construction, control and expansion joints, exterior and interior. h. Sawed joints in interior concrete slabs. i. Joints between precast roof units, between precast roof units and walls, and all

exterior and interior joints between precast wall panels. j. Joints at penetrations of walls, floors and decks by piping and other services

and equipment. k. Exterior and interior perimeters of exterior and interior door and window frames,

louvers, grilles, etc. l. Thresholds at exterior doors. m. Sealing around piping, duct or conduit penetrations through roof, floors, interior

and exterior walls. n. Sealing perimeter and penetrations of sound insulated walls. o. Other joints where calking, sealant, expanding foam sealant or compressible

sealant is indicated.



a. 302.1R, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. b. C920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. c. E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. Qualifications: 1. Sealant applicator shall have minimum 5 years experience using products specified

on projects with similar scope.

C. Mock-Ups:


1. Before calking work is started, a sample of each type of joint shall be calked where directed by the Engineer. The approved samples shall show the workmanship, bond, and color of calking materials as specified or selected for the work and shall be the minimum standard of quality on the entire project.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. "Caulk(ing)," "calk(ing)," and "sealant": Joint sealant work.

B. "Interior wet areas": Pump room and similar areas.

C. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 1. Installer and applicator are synonymous.

D. Finish sealant: Sealant material per this specification applied over face of compressible sealant or expanding foam sealant specified, to provide a finished, colored sealant joint.

E. Defect(ive): Failure of watertightness or airtightness.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's recommendations for joint cleaner, primer, backer rod, tooling

and bond breaker. 3. Warranty. 4. Certification from sealant manufacturer stating product being used is recommended

for and is best suited for joint in which it is being applied. 5. Certification of applicator qualification.

B. Samples: 1. Cured sample of each color for Engineer's color selection. Color chart not

acceptable.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.


A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact: 1. Labels shall indicate contents and expiration date on material.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Material and Labor Warranty: 1. Sealant work free of defects for a period of 3 years from date of final acceptance. 2. Remove any defective work or materials and replace with new work and materials. 3. Warranty signed jointly by Applicator and sealant manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Polyurethane sealants:


a. Pecora. b. Sika Chemical Corp. c. Sonneborn - Rexnord. d. Tremco.

2. Silicone sealants: a. General Electric. b. Dow Corning Corp. c. Tremco.

3. Compressible sealant: a. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. b. Emseal. c. Norton. d. Sandell.

4. Polysulfide rubber sealant: a. Pecora. b. Sonneborn. c. Morton Polymer Systems.

5. Expanding foam sealant: a. Macklanburg Duncan. b. Convenience Products. c. FAI International, Inc.

6. Polyurea joint filler: a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corporation. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Sonneborn.

7. Backer rod, compressible filler, primer, joint cleaners, bond breaker: a. As recommended by sealant manufacturer.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sealants - General: 1. Provide colors matching materials being sealed. 2. Where compound is not exposed to view in finished work, provide manufacturer's

color which has best performance. 3. Nonsagging sealant for vertical and overhead horizontal joints. 4. Sealants for horizontal joints: Self-leveling pedestrian/traffic grade.

B. Polyurethane Sealant: 1. One or two components. 2. Paintable. 3. Meet ASTM C920 Type S or Type M, Grade NS or P, Class 25, Use NT, T, M, A

and O. a. Pecora Dynatrol-IXL, Dynatrol II, Urexpan NR-200, NR-201. b. Sika Chemical Corporation Sikaflex-1a, Sikaflex-2C NS/SL. c. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP-1, NP-II, SL-1 SL-2. d. Tremco Dymonic or Dymeric, Vulkem 116,227,45,245.

C. Silicone Sealant: 1. One component. 2. Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G, A, O.

a. General Electric: Silpruf, Silglaze II. b. General Electric: Sanitary 1700 sealant for sealing around plumbing fixtures. c. Dow Corning: 786 for sealing around plumbing fixtures. d. Dow Corning: 790, 795. e. Tremco: Spectrem 1, Spectrem 3, Tremsil 600.


3. Mildew resistant for sealing around plumbing fixtures.

D. Compressible Sealant: 1. Size so that width of material is twice joint width. 2. Foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polymerized polybutylene waterproofing

coated on front face with nonreactive release agent that will act as bond breaker for applied sealant. Polytite Manufacturing Corp. "Polytite-B."

3. Fire rated where required.

E. Joint Cleaner, Primer, Bond Breaker: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.

F. Sealant Backer Rod and/or Compressible Filler: Closed cell polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other flexible, nonabsorbent, nonbituminous material recommended by sealant manufacturer to: 1. Control joint depth. 2. Break bond of sealant at bottom of joint. 3. Provide proper shape of sealant bead. 4. Serve as expansion joint filler.

G. Adhesive, Compressible Sealant: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.

H. Expanding Foam Sealant: 1. One or two component fire rated moisture cured expanding urethane. 2. Shall not contain formaldehyde. 3. Density: Minimum 1.5 pcf. 4. Minimum 70 percent closed cell content. 5. R-value minimum 5.0/IN. 6. Flame spread: Less than 25. 7. Smoke developed: Less than 25.

I. Polysulfide Rubber Sealant: 1. One or two component. 2. Meet ASTM C920.

a. Pecora Synthacalk GC2+. b. Sonneborn - Sonolastic - two-part polysulfide sealant. c. Morton Polymer Systems - Thiokol Sealants.

J. Polyurea Joint Filler: 1. Two component, semi-rigid material for filling control, sawcut and construction joints

in interior concrete floors. a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp. "Joint Fill, Joint Seal, Joint Saver II"

as required for condition and recommended by manufacturer. b. Euclid Chemical Co. "EUCO QWIK" joint. c. L&M Construction chemicals "Joint Tite 750". d. Sonneborn "TF-100" control joint filler.

2. Comply with ACI 302.1R performance recommendations regarding control and construction joints.

3. Color: Gray.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before use of any sealant, investigate its compatibility with joint surfaces, fillers and other materials in joint system.

B. Use only compatible materials.

C. Where required by manufacturer, prime joint surfaces. 1. Limit application to surfaces to receive calking.


2. Mask off adjacent surfaces.

D. Provide joint depth for joints receiving polyurea joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements.

B. Clean all joints.

C. Make all joints water and airtight.

D. Make depth of sealing compounds, except expanding foam and polyurea sealant, not more than one-half width of joint, but in no case less than 1/4 IN nor more than 1/2 IN unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer.

E. Provide correctly sized backer rod, compressible filler or compressible sealant in all joints to depth recommended by manufacturer: 1. Take care to not puncture backer rod and compressible filler. 2. Provide joint backer rod as recommended by the manufacturer for polyurea joint

filler.

F. Apply bond breaker where required.

G. Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill all voids.

H. Upon completion, leave calking with smooth, even, neat finish.

I. Where piping, conduit, ductwork, etc. penetrate wall, seal each side of wall opening.

J. Install compressible sealant to position at indicated depth. 1. Take care to avoid contamination of sides of joint. 2. Protect side walls of joint (to depth of finish sealant). 3. Install with adhesive faces in contact with joint sides. 4. Install finish sealant where indicated.

K. Install expanding foam sealant to minimum 4 IN depth or thickness of wall being penetrated if less than 4 IN or as indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide adequate fire rated backing material as required. 2. Hold material back from exposed face of wall as required to provide backer rod and

finish sealant to finish the joint. a. Allow expanding foam sealant to completely cure prior to installing backer rod

and finish sealant. 3. Material shall be minimum of 70 DegF prior to and during installation. 4. Trim off excess material flush with surface of the wall if not providing finished

sealant.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Furnish sealant as indicated for the following areas: 1. Exterior areas:

a. Polyurethane. 2. Interior wet areas:

a. Silicone. 3. Interior nonwet, noncorrosive areas:

a. Polyurethane. 4. Compressible sealant: Where joint conditions require additional width thickness. 5. Sealant which will be subject to prolonged contact with or submersion in water

(except wastewater and sewage): a. Polysulfide or Polyurethane:

1) NSF-approved for use in potable water tanks. 6. Penetrations exterior wall above grade:


a. For non-corrosive areas, provide expanding urethane foam, with polyurethane finish sealant.

b. For corrosive areas, provide expanding urethane foam, bond breaker and polysulfide finish sealant on corrosive side with polyurethane finish sealant on non-corrosive side.

7. Interior concrete floor control joints, sawed joints and construction joints: a. Polyurea joint filler.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal doors and frames. 2. Grouting of door frames.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04110 - Cement and Lime Mortars. 4. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. A115.1G Through A115.W8 as referenced and applicable. b. A250.2, Nomenclature for Insulated Steel Door Systems. c. A250.4, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for

Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings. d. A250.5, Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors,

Frames and Frame Anchors. e. A250.6, Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement - Application). f. A250.7, Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors and Steel Frames. g. A250.8, SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames. h. A250.10, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for - Prime Painted Steel

Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A153, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A591, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light

Coating Weight (Mass) Applications. c. A653, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. d. A780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip

Galvanized Coatings. e. A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,

Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's (NAAMM):

a. Hollow Metal Manufacturer's Association (HMMA). 4. Steel Door Institute (SDI):

a. All SDI publications. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 6. Building code:

a. International Code Conference (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition,

referred to herein as Building Code.

B. Qualifications:


1. Manufacturer must be current member of SDI, and NAAMM (HMMA).

C. Wipe coat galvanized steel is not acceptable as substitute for galvanizing finish specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. As identified in ANSI A250.7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers as used on Drawings. 4. SDI certification.


A. Store doors and frames in accordance with SDI-105.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Metal doors and frames:

a. CECO Corporation. b. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. c. Curries Company.

B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Special Conditions.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvannealed steel, ASTM A653, A60 coating.

B. Frames: Hot-dipped galvannealed steel, ASTM A653, A60 coating.

C. Supports and Reinforcing: Hot-dipped galvannealed steel, ASTM A924, A60 coating.

D. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Primer: Manufacturer's standard coating meeting ANSI A250.10.

F. Galvanizing Repair: ASTM A780.

G. Grout: As specified in Section 04110.

H. Thermal Insulation: Polyurethane. 1. CFC free.

I. Sound Insulation: Fiberglass batt insulation or impregnated Kraft honeycomb.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Frame Anchors: 1. ANSI A250.5. 2. Jamb anchors:

a. Masonry wire anchors: Minimum 0.1875 IN wire, galvanized.


2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. ANSI A250.8. 2. Fabricate rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. 3. Form to sizes and profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Beveled edge. 4. Fit and assemble in shop wherever practical. 5. Mark work that cannot be fully assembled in shop to assure proper assembly at site. 6. Continuously wire weld all joints, dress exposed joints smooth and flush. 7. Fabricate doors and frames to tolerance requirements of SDI-117. 8. Fit doors to SDI clearances. 9. All doors shall be handed. 10. Hinge cut-out depth and size on doors and frames shall match hinge specified in

Section 08700.

B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. General:

a. 1-3/4 IN thick. b. Fabricate with flush top caps. Thickness and material to match door face. c. Continuously wire weld all joints and dress, smooth and flush. d. Galvannealed per ASTM A653, A60 coating.

2. Exterior: a. Doors 48 IN wide, or less: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, and physical performance

level A, Model 2. 1) Face sheet minimum thickness: 16 GA. 2) Insulated: Minimum R10.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Door frames:

a. Provide 2 IN face at all jambs and walls. b. Provide 4 IN face at head where noted on Drawings or required by wall

construction. c. 26 GA galvannealed steel boxes welded to frame at back of all hardware

cutouts. d. Steel plate reinforcement welded to frame for hinge, strikes, closers and

surface-mounted hardware reinforcing. 1) All plate reinforcement shall meet size and thickness requirements of ANSI

A250.8. 2) Galvannealed per ASTM A653, minimum A60.

e. Split type frames not acceptable. 1) All horizontal and vertical mullions and transom bars shall be welded to

adjacent members. f. Conceal all fasteners. g. Frames shall be set up, all face joints continuously wire welded and dressed

smooth. h. Exterior (up to 4 FT wide):

1) 16 GA steel galvannealed per ASTM A653, A60. i. Exterior (over 4 FT wide):

1) 14 GA steel galvannealed per ASTM A653, A60. j. Provide removable spreaders at bottom of frame.

D. Prepare for finish hardware in accordance with hardware schedule, templates provided by hardware supplier, and ANSI A250.6. 1. Locate finish hardware in accordance with ANSI A250.8. 2. See Section 08700 for hardware. 3. Prepare doors for swing direction indicated. Preparing doors for non-handed hinges

is not acceptable.


E. After fabrication, clean off mill scale and foreign materials, repair damaged galvannealed surfaces, and treat and prime with rust inhibiting primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with SDI-105 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where applicable, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.

C. Plumb, align, and brace securely until permanently anchored.

D. After completion of walls, remove temporary braces and spreaders.

E. Grout fill all door frames. 1. Grout fill frames prior to installation for all frames mounted in masonry wall

construction.

F. Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime and galvannealed coating.

G. Touch-up prime and galvannealed coating in accordance with Section 09905.

H. Where indicated to be painted leave finish smooth for finish painting.

I. Number and location of anchors shall be in accordance with frame manufacturer's recommendation with minimum of three anchors per jamb.

J. Provide adjustable base anchors.

K. Protect doors and frames during construction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08332 STEEL ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel rolling overhead doors.

a. Insulated.




a. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

b. A653, Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

c. E283, Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Building Materials Directory. b. 864, Standard for Safety Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

B. Qualifications: 1. Installer to be licensed or approved in writing by door manufacturer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS




b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's standard color charts.

3. Schedule of doors using same reference number for openings as indicated on Drawings.

4. Certifications: a. Certification of installer qualifications.

B. Samples: 1. Actual metal color samples of manufacturer's full line of colors available.


C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions for requirements for the mechanics

and administration of the submittal process.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions for requirements for:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Steel rolling overhead doors:

a. Atlas Door, Clopay Building Products Co. b. The Cookson Company. c. Cornell Iron Works. d. Wayne Dalton. e. Overhead Door Corp. f. Raynor.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Doors, Curtains and Hood: Galvanized steel, ASTM A653, G-60.

B. Insulation: Closed cell polyurethane foam.

C. Weatherproofing: Neoprene or vinyl.

D. Guides, Head Plates and Pipe Barrel: Galvanized steel, ASTM A123.

E. Fasteners: Same material as door construction.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Door Curtain: 1. Insulated flat profile with interlocking face sheets:

a. 2-5/8 IN high. b. Exterior face: Minimum 22 GA. c. Interior face: Minimum 24 GA. d. Galvanized steel endlocks. e. Core: Insulated.

2. Weather stripping: a. Guide sealing adjustable weatherstripping at jambs and lintel (exterior doors

only). 3. Finish: Factory prime and finish coats.

a. Prime coat: Minimum 0.2 mil baked-on prime paint. b. Finish coat: Minimum 0.6 mil baked-on polyester powder coat. c. Color: To be selected by Engineer from manufacturer's complete offering.

B. Hood: Minimum 24 GA. 1. Provide full length air baffle weatherstripping at all exterior doors. 2. Finish: Match door curtain.

C. Guides: 1. Mounting:

a. Interior face of wall.


2. Manufacturer's standard angle guide system for size of door specified. a. Rolled guides are not acceptable. b. Furnish wind locks.

3. Finish: Galvanized steel.

D. Head Plates: Galvanized steel plate mounted to guides. 1. Sized to support counter balance assembly, curtain and hood. 2. Finish: Galvanized.

E. Counterbalance Assembly: 1. Pipe barrel: Galvanized steel pipe shaft.

a. Maximum deflection: 0.03 IN/FT. 2. Torsion springs: Oil-tempered helical torsion springs on cast anchors.

a. 100,000 cycle. b. 25 percent safety factor.

3. Adjustable tension wheel.

F. Trim Pieces: Material and finish to match curtain.

G. Wind Load: 24 psf minimum.

H. Operation: 1. Chain operated.

I. Locking: 1. Slide bolts.

J. Insulated door system shall be similar to Overhead Door Corp. "625" Series.


A. Air Infiltration: 1.55 CFM/SF of opening maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 with 25 mph wind load.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Installation shall be done by manufacturer's authorized representative.

C. Provide all required trim, weatherstripping, closures etc. for complete weather tight installation.

D. Adjust for proper counter balance.

E. Seal along bottom of vertical track (guides), seal the vertical joint between the two separate track angles (if not filled by welding) and seal all holes in vertical track (not being used for fasteners) to provide a completely weather tight track and door system. 1. At fastener locations provide steel washers under bolt head to completely cover the

slotted holes in the vertical track. a. Finish of steel washer shall match finish of track (guides).

3.2 ADJUSTMENT

A. Prior to occupancy, adjust door for smooth operation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08525 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum windows.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing. 5. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

a. 904.1, Voluntary Specifications for Friction Hinges in Window Applications. b. 1503.1, Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance of Windows, Doors

and Glazed Wall Sections. c. 2605-02, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,

Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. b. C1363, Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building

Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. c. E90, Standard Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne - Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. d. E283, Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows,

Curtainwalls and Doors. e. E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences. f. E331, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. g. E405, Standard Test Methods for Wear Testing Rotary Operators for Windows. h. E413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS


and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data for framing system and major accessories including:



b. Hardware being provided by window manufacturer. c. Glass being provided by window manufacturer in factory glazed units. d. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

3. Elevation drawings indicating window dimensions and details. 4. Manufacturer's full line color chart for anodized units and painted finishes including

exotic colors for selection by Engineer.

B. Samples: 1. After initial color selection, provide 2 x 3 IN minimum sample of each color and finish

selected.


and administration of the submittal process. 2. Qualifications of testing laboratory. 3. Test results. 4. Warranty.


A. Store units in vertical position off ground with wood spacers between each unit.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. 5-year warranty of weathertightness of installation. Air and water integrity and structural adequacy of units and hardware, including sealants and calking within and around perimeter of installation. 1. Signed jointly by fabricator, installer, and contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Thermally broken windows:

a. Wausau Metals Corp., 2250-T Series. b. Kawneer Company Inc., 8225-T Series.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: 6063T5 alloy.

B. Sealants: As specified in Section 07900.

C. Thermal Insulator: Poured in place polyurethane, self-adhering to adjacent aluminum surfaces.

D. Weatherstripping: Sponge neoprene.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Flashing: 1. Minimum 0.040 IN aluminum. 2. Finish to match window frames. 3. Mill finish if concealed.


2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fully degrease and clean members prior to assembly or application of protective

coatings. 2. Weld by methods recommended by manufacturer and AWS D1.2 to avoid

discoloration at welds. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and restore finish. 4. Ease corners of cut edges to a radius of approximately 1/64 IN. 5. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 6. Fit and assemble work at shop to maximum extent possible. 7. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. 8. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joint, with hairline fit of

contacting members. 9. Reinforce work as necessary to withstand wind loadings and to support system. 10. Separate dissimilar metal with paint or preformed separators to prevent corrosion.

See Section 09905. 11. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other nonabrasive

concealed inserts to permanently prevent freeze-up of joint. 12. Reinforce frames for hardware. 13. Structural steel reinforcement hot-dip galvanized after fabrication meeting G-90,

ASTM A924, requirements.

B. Thermal Insulator: Provide minimum 1/4 IN separation between exterior and interior metal surfaces after bridge is removed.

C. Glass: See Section 08800 for types of glass to be installed under this Section.

D. Fasteners: 1. Finish exposed fasteners to match finish of system. 2. Provide Phillips flat head screws where exposed.

E. Finish: AAMA 2605-02 Fluoropolymer paint. 1. Color: To be selected from manufacturers standard color range.


A. General Test Requirements: 1. Utilize independent testing laboratories specifically qualified to conduct all

performance tests required. 2. Performance tests may be conducted in manufacturer's laboratories provided they

are witnessed and certified by qualified independent testing laboratory personnel. 3. Perform all tests on "Test Unit": Full-sized window unit for project or a minimum 5 x

8 FT unit mounted in test chamber in exact accordance with job conditions including anchorage system caulking, sealing, etc. Test unit to be completely assembled and glazed. Thermal tests may be conducted on 4 x 6 FT unit.

4. Test air infiltration first, water resistance second. Other tests may be in any order. 5. Test data on vertical pivot windows will be accepted for fixed windows for

condensation resistance, thermal, temperature exposure and acoustical tests provided the fixed windows are the same as the vertical windows tested in the following respects: a. Same frame section (or same family of extrusions). b. Same basic metal mass inside and outside. c. Identical thermal break. d. Same type of glazing.

B. Test Requirements: 1. Air infiltration test:

a. Test in accordance with ASTM E283.


b. Air infiltration, in CFM/FT of crack length, at pressure differential of 6.24 psf as follows: 1) Fixed windows: 0.06 maximum, all others 0.10 maximum.

2. Water resistance test: a. Mount glazed unit in its vertical position, continuously supported around outside

perimeter with sash and ventilators closed and locked. b. Test in accordance with ASTM E331. c. No uncontrolled leakage allowed, with pressure differential of 6.24 psf.

3. Uniform load deflection test: a. Test in accordance with ASTM E330. b. Subject unit to load of 25 psf applied to outside of window and 25 psf applied to

inside of window. c. Maximum allowable deflection of any unsupported span: L/175. d. No glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support

arms or activating mechanisms, or any other damage which would cause window to be inoperable will be allowed.

4. Uniform load structural test: a. Test in accord with ASTM E330. b. Subject unit to loads indicated below. c. Stabilize pressure and maintain it for minimum period of 10 seconds. d. No glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support

arms or activating mechanisms or any other damage which would cause window to be inoperable will be allowed.

e. Maximum permanent deformation of any main frame, sash or ventilator member: 0.4 percent of its span.

f. After performing Uniform Load Structural Test, increase loads 1-1/2 times and perform safety test.

g. Design unit to withstand following design pressures acting normal to plane of wall, at applicable heights and locations. 1) At height of 30 FT or less: 24 psf acting inward 24 psf acting outward.

5. Condensation resistance test: a. Perform on "test unit," except size may be 3 x 4 FT, minimum. b. Test in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. c. CRF (Condensation Resistance Factor): 50, minimum.

6. Thermal test: a. Perform on "test unit" except size may be 4 x 6 FT, minimum.. b. Test in guarded hot box ASTM C1363, with an exterior temperature of 18 DegF,

an interior of 68 DegF and 15 mph fan-generated wind velocity on exterior. c. "U" value: not to exceed 0.65 BTU/HR/SF/DegF. d. Calculated "U" values from smaller units or data or theoretical assumptions will

not be acceptable. 7. Structural thermal barrier tension test:

a. Test urethane filled sections of aluminum. b. Mechanically secure interior and exterior faces of 12 IN section in horizontal

position. c. Apply heat tape to exterior face to control surface temperature at 180 DegF 5

minutes before loading, as indicated by a thermocouple wire operated by an automatic controller.

d. Apply direct tension (pull) using a Universal testing machine set in 12,000 LB load range.

e. Test results: No loss of bond at 4000 LB IN/IN/MIN. 8. Structural thermal barrier shear test:

a. Test urethane filled sections of aluminum. b. Mechanically secure interior face of 12 IN section in vertical position.


c. Apply heat tape to exterior face to control surface temperature at 180 DegF 5 minutes before loading, as indicated by a thermocouple wire operated by an automatic controller.

d. Apply load to exterior face by a bearing plate resting on top of exterior face, using Universal Testing machine set in 12,000 LB load range at a strain rate of 0.050 IN/IN/MIN.

e. Test results: No loss of bond at 5500 LB loading. 9. Structural thermal barrier combined torsion and shear test:

a. Test urethane filled sections of aluminum. b. Secure interior face of 12 IN section in horizontal position. c. Apply heat tape to exterior face to control surface temperature at 180 DegF 5

minutes before loading, as indicated by a thermocouple wire operated by an automatic controller.

d. Apply load to bearing plate centered on portion of glazing pocket to exterior side of thermal barrier, using a Universal Testing machine set in the 12,000 LB load range.

e. Test results: No loss of bond at 3900 LB load applied at strain rate of 0.05 IN/IN/MIN.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line.

C. Anchor securely in place.

D. Separate metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action. See Section 09905.

E. Set sill and base members in a bed of sealant.

F. Provide joint fillers or gaskets for weathertight construction.

G. Calk all joints within and at perimeter of system.

H. Provide sealant color to match finish of system at exposed locations.

I. Provide sealants compatible with aluminum system and recommended for use with this type of installation.

J. See Section 07900 for sealants.


A. Installation supervised or inspected by manufacturer's authorized representative.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Finish hardware.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 08110 - Metal Doors and Frames.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):

a. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. A156.1, Butts and Hinges. b. A156.3, Exit Devices. c. A156.4, Door Controls (Closers). d. A156.5, Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. e. A156.6, Architectural Door Trim. f. A156.7, Template Hinge Dimensions. g. A156.8, Door Controls - Overhead Holders. h. A156.13, Mortise Locks and Latches. i. A156.15, Closer Holder Release Devices. j. A156.16, Auxiliary Hardware. k. A156.18, Materials and Finishes. l. A156.21, Thresholds.

3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA). 4. Steel Door Institute (SDI):

a. 107, Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement-Application). b. 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. c. 112, Galvanized Standard Steel Doors and Frames.



1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition including all City, County, and State of Colorado amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. All weather: Capable of operation from -50 to +120 DegF.

C. Active Leaf: Right-hand leaf when facing door from keyed side unless noted otherwise on Drawings.



1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Schedule of all hardware being used on each door. Number hardware sets and door

references same as those indicated on Drawings. 4. Technical data sheets on each hardware item proposed for use.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals. 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Locksets and latchsets:

a. Corbin/Russwin. b. Best Access Systems.

2. Closers: a. LCN. b. Norton. c. Corbin/Russwin.

3. Hinges: a. Stanley Works. b. Hager Hinge Co. c. McKinney Manufacturing Co.

4. Door stops and holders: a. Trimco/BBW/Quality. b. Rockwood. c. Glynn-Johnson Corp.

5. Weatherstripping and thresholds: a. Pemko Manufacturing Co. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. c. Zero Weatherstripping, Inc. d. National Guard Products, Inc.

6. Door bolts, coordinators and strikes: a. Ives Division/Leigh Products Inc. b. Trimco/BBW/Quality/Glynn-Johnson Corp. c. Rockwood. d. Stanley.

7. Other materials: As noted.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel or aluminum.

B. Locking, Latching and Retracting Mechanism and Lock Case: Corrosion resistant.


C. Closers: 1. Shell: Aluminum or cast iron. 2. Arms and piston: Forged steel.

D. Kickplates: Stainless steel.

E. Thresholds: Aluminum.

F. Keys: Brass or bronze.

G. Weatherstripping: Polyprene, neoprene, silicon, or EPDM.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Closer Mechanism Covers: 1. Match finish of adjacent hardware. 2. Full cover.

B. Arms, Brackets, and Plates: As required for complete installation of closers.

C. Strikes: 1. Stainless steel. 2. Provide with curved lips. 3. Extended lips when required. 4. Furnish strike boxes. 5. Appropriate for function and hardware listed.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Hardware - General: 1. Generally prepare for Phillips head machine screw installation. 2. Exposed screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to

match finish of other work as closely as possible. 3. For mineral core doors use screws which thread to head to apply butts. 4. Provide concealed fasteners unless thru bolted. 5. Through bolt closers on all doors. 6. Furnish items of hardware for proper door swing. 7. Furnish lock devices which allow door to be opened from inside room without a key

or any special knowledge.

B. Hardware: 1. Provide integral serrated knurling on lever for all doors (grit covered tape applied to

lever is not acceptable): 2. Provide stainless steel dustproof strikes for all doors with automatic or manual flush

bolts or other bolts into floor. 3. Provide following BHMA/ANSI A156.18 finishes:

a. Locks: 626. b. Door pulls, push bars, push plates: 626. c. Kickplates: 626. d. Exit devices: 626. e. Butts: 626. f. Door stops, dead locks, mortise bolts, and miscellaneous hardware: 626. g. Door overhead stops: 626. h. All parts of closers: Provide special rust inhibiting pretreatment.

C. Mortise Locks and Latches: 1. ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1. 2. Antifriction 2 piece mechanical latchbolt with stainless steel anti-friction insert.

a. One-piece stainless steel deadbolt, minimum 1-1/4 IN x 9/ 16 IN thick with 1 IN throw.

b. 2-3/4 IN backset.


c. Cylinder: Brass, 7 pin, with interchangeable core. d. ADA compliant thumb turn lever. e. Corbin/Russwin.

1) Trim design "NSP" for all doors requiring lever handle operation. f. Functions as indicated in following table in accordance with ANSI A156.13.

MORTISE LOCK NUMBERS

ANSI FUNCTION CORBIN/RUSSWIN Half Dummy Trim ML2050

F01 Passage ML2010 F19 Privacy ML2030 F05 Classroom ML2055 F05 Modified ML2072 F07 Storeroom ML2057 F13 Entrance or Office ML2065 F17 Deadlock ML2013

D. Door Closers: 1. ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. 2. Size door closers to comply with ANSI recommendations for door size and location. 3. Fabricate all closers with integral back check.

a. Provide all weather fluid for all closers used in exterior doors. 4. Closers similar to LCN 4000 Series, Norton 7500 Series or Corbin-Russwin 2000

Series. 5. Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty.

E. Butts and Hinges: 1. ANSI A156.1. 2. Hinge numbers:

HAGER STANLEY Type 1 BB1199 FBB199

3. Flat button tips on all butts. 4. Butt types:

a. Type 1. Provide NRP (non-removable pin) on all exterior doors. b. All other doors: Type 1.

5. Butt quantities: a. Doors 61-90 IN in height: Three butts. b. Doors 91-114 IN in height: Four butts. c. Doors 115-144 IN in height: Five butts. d. Doors 145-168 IN in height: Six butts. e. For doors over 168 IN in height, provide one additional butt for each 30 IN or

fraction thereof of additional height. 6. Butt sizes:

a. 1.75 IN doors: 4.5 x 4.5 IN for all doors up to and including 36 IN wide.

F. Door Stops: 1. ANSI A156.16.

a. Wall stops: Glynn Johnson 50C or 60C as required.

G. Kickplates: 1. ANSI A156.6. 2. 8 IN high x 2 IN less than door width. 3. Beveled on all edges. 4. 0.050 IN thick.


H. Thresholds: 1. ANSI A156.21. 2. One piece unit.

a. Maximum 1/4 IN high. Similar to Pemko 270 series. b. 6 IN wide.

3. Provide required bolt cutouts.

I. Weatherstripping: 1. At jambs and head: similar to Pemke #303AS. 2. At bottom of doors: Similar to Reese 701D.

J. Keying: 1. Establish keying with Owner.

a. Provide and set up complete visible card indexed system with key tags and control slips.

b. Tag and identify keys. c. Provide three keys for each lock or cylinder. d. Master key and key in groups as directed. e. Provide construction master keys for all exterior doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fit hardware before final door finishing.

B. Permanently install hardware after door finishing operations are complete.

C. Use SDI mounting heights for hardware.

D. Mount closers on push side of doors unless noted otherwise. 1. Provide extended arms and brackets as required. 2. Provide full cover for each closer.

E. Install closers with integral stop at all doors scheduled to receive closer unless noted otherwise. 1. Do not install integral stop on closers mounted on pull side of door.

F. Provide concealed overhead stop when corrosion resistant closer is specified.

G. Where interior doors swing more than 105 degrees without encountering a wall and which do not have a closer scheduled, provide overhead stop. 1. Provide concealed overhead stop on doors scheduled to receive closer mounted on

pull side of door.

H. Provide hold-open feature when required by Hardware Schedule.

I. Provide coordinator when required by hardware specified.

J. Provide weatherstripping and threshold at all exterior doors and where scheduled on interior doors. 1. Set thresholds in a full bed of sealant. 2. Mount door sweeps on exterior face of door. 3. Mount weatherstripping at meeting edges of pairs of doors on the exterior face of

the doors.

K. Mount kickplates on both sides of doors. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering



A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to assure proper operation or function. 1. Lubricate moving parts with lubricant recommended by manufacturer.

B. During week prior to startup, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items. 1. Clean and lubricate as necessary to assure proper function and operation. 2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for operation of heating and ventilating

equipment.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and glazing.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 08525 - Aluminum Windows.



a. Z97.1, Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C1036, Specification for Flat Glass. b. C1048, Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and

Uncoated Glass. c. C1172, Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. d. E773, Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. e. E774, Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

3. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): a. GM, Glazing Manual.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.

5. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's Association (SIGMA). 6. Building code:

a. International Code Conference (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2006 Edition

including all State of Colorado amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

B. Safety glazing shall be provided in all hazardous locations as defined by the Building Code.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS





b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Certification that glass has been tested and approved for use in fire rated doors

or walls. Copies of all test criterion.

B. Samples: 1. 8 x 8 IN sample of each type, color, and thickness specified except clear glass

(glass Type 1 and 2.)


and administration of the submittal process. 2. Warranty.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Written 5-year warranty signed by installer to cover air and weathertightness of installation.

B. Written 5-year warranty signed by manufacturer or fabricator of insulating glass units against failure of integrity of air space.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Insulating glass units - tinted and clear:

a. Libbey-Owens-Ford. b. PPG. c. Viracon. d. Visteon.

2. Gaskets, glazing compounds, setting blocks, spacers, sealant, sealant tape, etc., as recommended by glass manufacturer, glass unit fabricator, or as required by NFPA.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Insulating Glass Units: 1. ASTM E773, E774, Class A. 2. Two sheets of 1/4 IN thick glass separated by a 1/2 IN dehydrated air space

hermetically sealed. 3. Color: See schedule in PART 3.

B. Glazing Compounds: 1. Non-sag, non-stain type. 2. Pigmented to match frame units not requiring painting. 3. Compatible with adjacent surfaces. 4. One or two-part polyurethane or silicone sealant for use in setting glass.

a. Provide glazing compounds which will not be affected by chemicals stored in rooms where glazing compounds are used.

C. Sealant Tape: Butyl rubber sealant tape or ribbon having a continuous neoprene shim.

D. Gaskets: 1. Flexible polyvinyl chloride or neoprene.


a. Provide gaskets which will not be affected by chemicals stored in rooms where gaskets are used.

2. Extruded of profile and hardness required to receive glass and provide a watertight installation.

3. Provide gaskets in accordance with NFPA in fire rated glazing.

E. Setting Blocks and Spacers: 1. Neoprene or EPDM, compatible with sealants used. 2. Setting blocks: 70-90 durometer. 3. Spacers: 40-50 durometer.

F. Compressible Filler Stock: Closed-cell jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam.

G. Shims, Clips, Springs, Angles, Beads, Attachment Screws and Other Miscellaneous Items: As required by condition.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer, FGMA Glazing Manual and SIGMA Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

B. Install setting blocks in adhesive or sealant.

C. Install spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing.

D. Provide 1/8 IN minimum bite of spacers on glass.

E. Spacer thickness to equal sealant width.

F. Prevent sealant exudation from glazing channels of insulating glass which is more than 1/2 IN thick; colored, heat absorbing, coated or laminated glass sizes larger than 75 united inches; and other glass more than 9/32 IN thick or larger than 125 united inches. 1. Leave void at heel (or install filler) at jambs and head. 2. Do not leave void (or install filler) at sill.

G. Miter cut and bond gasket ends together at corners.

H. Immediately after installation, attach crossed streamers to framing held away from glass.

I. Do not use silicone-based glazing sealants in window assembly or as perimeter sealant around frames in areas which may be exposed to chlorine gas or chlorine liquid splash or spillage. These exposure areas shall be sealed with polysulfide-based sealants. 1. See Section 07900 for sealants.


A. Do not install glass with edge damage.

B. Do not apply anything to surfaces of glass.

C. Remove and replace damaged glass.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Maintain glass reasonably clean during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute to deterioration of other materials.

B. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 7 days prior to acceptance of work in each area. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations.


3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Glass Type 1: Insulating glass. 1. Outside glass: Tinted (color to be selected). 2. Inside glass: Clear.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09905 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Painting and protective coatings. 2. Minimum surface preparation requirements.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03348 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.



a. A250.10, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria For Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors.

b. Z535.1, Safety Color Code. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. D4258, Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. b. D4259, Practice for Abrading Concrete. c. D4261, Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for Coating. d. D4262, Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete

Surfaces. e. D4263, Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet

Method. f. E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 4. National Bureau of Standards (NBS):

a. Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 101, Life Safety Code. 6. National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF):

a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 7. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Joint Surface Preparation Standard:

a. PA-2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. b. SP-1, Solvent Cleaning. c. SP-2, Hand Tool Cleaning. d. SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning. e. SP-5/NACE No. 1, White Metal Blast Cleaning. f. SP-6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning. g. SP-7/NACE No. 4, Brush-off Blast Cleaning. h. SP-10/NACE No. 2, Near-White Blast Cleaning. i. SP-13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete.



B. Qualifications: 1. Coating manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide written statement

attesting that Applicator has been instructed on proper preparation, mixing and application procedures for coatings specified.

2. Contractor and applicators shall have minimum of 10 years experience in application of similar products on similar project. Provide references for minimum of three different projects completed in last 5 years with similar scope of work. Include name and address of project, size of project in value (painting) and contact person.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. Furnish paint through one manufacturer unless noted otherwise. 2. Coating used in all corridors and stairways shall meet requirements of NFPA 101

and ASTM E84.

D. Deviation from specified mil thickness or product type is not allowed without written authorization of Engineer.

E. Material may not be thinned unless approved, in writing, by paint manufacturer's authorized representative.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



B. Approved Factory Finish: Finish on a product in compliance with the finish specified in the section where the product is specified or in Section 11005.

C. Corrosive Environment: Immersion in, or not more than 6 IN above, or subject to frequent condensation, spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as water, wastewater, or chemical solution; or chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or solutions with pH range of 5 - 9.

D. Highly Corrosive Environment: Immersion in, or not more than 6 IN above, or subject to frequent condensation, spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as water, wastewater, or chemical solution; or chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or solutions with pH range below 5 or above 9.

E. Exposed Exterior Surface: Surface which is exposed to weather but not necessarily exposed to view as well as surface exposed to view. Exterior surfaces are considered corrosive environment.

F. Finished Area: One that has finish called for on Room Finish Schedule or is indicated, on Drawings, to be painted.

G. Paint includes fillers, primers, sealers, emulsions, oils, alkyds, latex, enamels, thinners, stains, epoxies, vinyls, chlorinated rubbers, urethanes, shellacs, varnishes, and any other applied coating specified within this Section.

H. Surface Hidden from View: Surfaces such as those within pipe chases, and between top side of ceilings (including drop-in tile ceilings) and underside of floor or roof structure above.

I. VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's application instructions. c. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions. d. If products being used are manufactured by Company other than listed in Article

2.2, provide complete individual data sheet comparison of proposed products with specified products including application procedure, coverage rates and verification that product is designed for intended use.

e. Contractor's written plan of action for containing airborne particles created by blasting operation and location of disposal of spent contaminated blasting media.

f. Coating manufacturer's recommendation on abrasive blasting. g. Manufacturer's recommendation for universal barrier coat.

3. Manufacturer's statement regarding Applicator instruction on product use. 4. Contractor and applicator experience qualifications.

a. No submittal information will be reviewed until Engineer has received and approved Contractor and Applicator qualifications.

5. Certification that coating systems proposed for use have been reviewed and approved by Senior Corrosion Specification Specialist employed by the coating manufacturer.

B. Samples: 1. Manufacturer's full line of colors for Engineer's color selection. 2. After initial color selection by Engineer provide two 3 x 5 IN samples of each color

selected.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Approval of application equipment. 3. Applicator's daily record:

a. Submit daily record at end of each week in which painting work is performed.


A. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows: 1. Name or type number of material. 2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number. 3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents. 4. Warning labels. 5. VOC content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, only the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Tnemec. 2. Ameron Protective Coatings Div. 3. ICI Devoe.


4. Carboline Protective Coatings. 5. Sherwin Williams. 6. Dampney Company, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. All materials used must contain not more than 2.8 LBS/GAL VOC.

B. For unspecified materials such as thinner, provide manufacturer's recommended products.

C. Paint Systems - General: 1. P=prime coat. F1, F2 . . . Fn = first finish coat,

second finish coat . . … . nth finish coat, color as selected by Engineer. 2. If two finish coats of same material are required, Contractor may, at his option and

by written approval from paint manufacturer, apply one coat equal to mil thickness of two coats specified.

D. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec.

E. Paint Systems (Systems not shown are not used): 1. SYSTEM #1 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy or

Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Finish Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=2.11

b. Finish coat(s): 1) Interior:

a) F1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy) b) F2=1 coat, 3 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy)

2) Exterior: a) F1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy) b) F2=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 1074 Endura-Shield (Aliphatic Acrylic

Polyurethane Enamel), VOC=1.81 2. SYSTEM #2 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy or

Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Finish Coat(s). a. Prime coat:



a) F1=1 coat, 5 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=2.11

2) Exterior: a) F1=1 coat, 5 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy) b) F2=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 1074 Endura-Shield (Aliphatic Acrylic

Polyurethane Enamel), VOC=2.45 3. SYSTEM #3 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy or

Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:



a) F1=1 coat, 5 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy) 2) Exterior:


a) F1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 1074 Endura-Shield (Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel), VOC=2.80

4. SYSTEM #4 - Zinc-rich Urethane Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy or Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (Zinc-Rich Urethane), VOC=2.67



2) Exterior: a) F1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 1074 Endura-Shield (Aliphatic Acrylic

Polyurethane Enamel), VOC=2.45 5. SYSTEM #5 - Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy

or Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 2.0 mils, Series 135 Chembuild (Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=1.16


a) F1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=2.11


Polyurethane Enamel), VOC=2.45 6. SYSTEM #6 - Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy

or Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series 135 Chembuild (Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=1.16



2) Exterior: a) F1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series 1074 Endura-Shield (Aliphatic Acrylic

Polyurethane Enamel), VOC=2.45 7. SYSTEM #7 - Zinc-Rich Urethane Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy or Aliphatic

Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (Zinc-Rich Urethane), VOC=2.67




Polyurethane Enamel), VOC=2.45 8. SYSTEM #8 - Air Dry Silicone Copolymer Primer with Silicone Copolymer Top

Coat. a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 2.0 mils, Dampney Thurmalox 260C Series (Air Dry Silicone Copolymer), VOC=3.20

b. Finish coat:


1) Interior or exterior: a) F1=1 coat, 2.0 mils, Dampney Thurmalox 260C Series (Air Dry Silicone

Copolymer), VOC=3.20 9. SYSTEM #9 - Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy.

a. Prime coat: 1) P1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series 135 Chembuild (Modified Polyamidoamine

Epoxy), VOC=1.16 10. SYSTEM #10 - Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Modified

Polyamidoamine Epoxy and/or Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series 135 Chembuild (Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=1.90


a) F1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series 135 Chembuild (Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=1.90


Polyurethane Enamel), VOC=2.45 11. SYSTEM #11 - Zinc-Rich Aromatic Urethane Primer.

a. Prime coat: 1) P1=1 coat, 3.0 mils, 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (Zinc-Rich Urethane), VOC=2.67

12. SYSTEM #12 - Acrylic Emulsion Primer and Top Coat. a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 29 Tufcryl (Acrylic Emulsion), VOC=1.53 b. Finish coat:

1) Interior: a) F1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 29 Tufcryl (Acrylic Emulsion), VOC=1.53

13. SYSTEM #13 - Modified-Acrylate Elastomer Primer and Top Coat. a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 8 mils, Series 156 Enviro-Crete (Modified-Acrylate Elastomer), VOC=1.19

b. Finish coat: 1) Exterior:

a) F1=1 coat, 8 mils, Series 156 Enviro-Crete (Modified-Acrylate Elastomer)

14. SYSTEM #14 - Waterborne Modified Polyamine Epoxy Primer with Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Top Coats. a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 1.5 mils, Series 151 Elasto-Grip FC (Waterborne Modified Polyamine Epoxy), VOC=2.03


a) F1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat (Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy), VOC=2.26

b) F2=1 coat, 3 mils, Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat (Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy)

15. SYSTEM #15 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy Top Coat. a. Block Filler: Epoxy compatible b. Prime coat:


c. Finish coat: 1) Interior:

a) F1=1 coat, 4 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy)


16. SYSTEM #16 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Prime and Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 80 to 110 SF/GAL/coat, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=2.11


a) F1=1 coat, 175-200 SF/GAL/coat, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy)

17. SYSTEM #17 - Acrylic Emulsion Primer with Acrylic Emulsion Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 7 mils, Series 180 W. B. Tneme-Crete (Acrylic Emulsion), VOC=0.92

b. Finish coat(s): 1) Exterior:

a) F1=1 coat, 7 mils, Series 180 W.B. Tneme-Crete (Acrylic Emulsion) 18. SYSTEM #18 - Alkyd Primer with Acrylic Emulsion Top Coat(s).

a. Prime coat: 1) P1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, 36-603 Undercoat (Alkyd), VOC=2.80

b. Finish coat(s): 1) Interior or exterior:

a) F1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 29 Tufcryl (Acrylic Emulsion), VOC=1.53 b) F2=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 29 Tufcryl (Acrylic Emulsion)

19. SYSTEM #19 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Coating. a. Prime coat:


20. SYSTEM #21 - Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy. a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 5 mils, 135-1243 Chembuild (Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=1.44

21. SYSTEM #22 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Modified Polyurethane Top Coat(s). a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 5 mils, Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus (Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=2.37


a) F1=1 coat, 25 mils, Series 264 Elasto-Shield (Modified Polyurethane), VOC=0.77

b) F2=1 coat, 25 mils, Series 264 Elasto-Shield (Modified Polyurethane), VOC=0.77

22. SYSTEM #23 - Zinc-Rich Urethane Potable Water Approved Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy Potable Water Approved Top Coats. a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 3 mils, Series 91 H20 Hydro-Zinc (Zinc-Rich Urethane), VOC=2.67


a) F1=1 coat, 5 mils, Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus (Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=2.21

b) F2=1 coat, 5 mils, Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus (Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=2.21

23. SYSTEM #24 - Vinyl Ester Primer with Vinyl Ester Top Coat. a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 17 mils, Series 120-5002 Vinester (Vinyl Ester), VOC=1.90 b. Finish coat:


1) F1=1 coat, 17 mils, Series 120-5001 Vinester (Vinyl Ester), VOC=2.20 24. SYSTEM #27 - Waterborne Acrylic Emulsion Prime and Top Coats.

a. Block Filler: Acrylic compatible b. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 6 mils, Series 180, W.B. Tneme-Crete (Acrylic Emulsion), VOC=0.98

c. Finish coat: 1) Exterior:

a) F1=1 coat, 6 mils, Series 180, W.B. Tneme-Crete (Acrylic Emulsion), VOC=0.98

25. SYSTEM #29 - Waterborne Epoxy-Amine Adduct Primer and Top Coat. a. Prime coat:

1) P1=1 coat, 4 mils, Series 287 Enviro-Tread (Waterborne Epoxy-Amine Adduct), VOC=1.78

b. Finish coat: 1) Interior:

a) F1=1 coat, 4 mils, Series 287 Enviro-Tread (Waterborne Epoxy-Amine Adduct), VOC=1.78

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ITEMS TO BE PAINTED

A. Exposed Exterior Surfaces including: 1. Smooth face concrete block, metal equipment supports, pipe supports. 2. Piping, valves, fittings, and hydrants and supports. 3. Ductwork and supports. 4. Conduit, device boxes, junction boxes and covers, pull boxes and covers and

supports when attached to a surface required to be painted or to a prefinished surface.

5. Exterior surfaces of ferrous metal tankage. 6. Miscellaneous ferrous metal surfaces. 7. Hollow metal doors and frames. 8. Steel pipe bollards. 9. Steel lintels and steel components of concrete lintels (plain or galvanized).

a. Steel components shall be completely painted (with both prime and finish coats) prior to installing in the wall.

10. Structural steel. 11. Galvanized metal surfaces. 12. Copper and brass surfaces.

B. Interior Finished Areas: 1. Refer to Room Finish Schedule on Drawings. If schedule requires wall surfaces to

be painted in a particular space, the space is considered to be a finished area, therefore, paint all appurtenant surfaces within the space unless specifically noted not to be painted in the Contract Documents. Appurtenant surfaces include: a. Pipe supports, and metal equipment supports

1) If walls do not require paint, the above listed surfaces do not require paint unless specifically noted otherwise.

b. Piping, valves, fittings and hydrants except when covered by pipe jacketing and supports.

c. Concrete walls as scheduled on the drawings. d. Concrete masonry walls as scheduled on the drawings.

C. Surfaces in Areas Not Considered Finished: 1. Paint following surfaces in areas not considered as finished area:


a. Piping, valves, fittings, and hydrants except when covered by pipe jacketing and supports.

b. Structural steel c. Miscellaneous ferrous metal surfaces. d. Steel lintels and steel components of concrete lintels (plain or galvanized).

1) Steel components shall be completely painted (with both prime and finish coats) prior to installing in the wall.

e. Outside of ferrous metal tankage. f. Hollow metal doors and frames.

3.2 ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED

A. General: Do not paint items listed in Article 3.2 unless specifically noted in the Contract Documents to be painted.

B. Items with Approved Factory Finish.

C. Electrical Equipment: 1. Do not field paint electrical equipment except where painting is specifically stated

elsewhere in these Contract Documents, or where the equipment is subject to a corrosive environment.

D. Surfaces Hidden from View except when in a corrosive or highly corrosive area, including: 1. When not in a corrosive or highly corrosive area:

a. Concrete, concrete masonry units. b. Conduit. c. Ducts. d. Insulation. e. Galvanized metal surfaces. f. Note: (Manufacturer's standard coatings, if any, may remain).

E. Other Items: 1. Stainless steel surfaces except:

a. Piping. b. Banding as required to identify piping.

2. Aluminum surfaces except: a. Where specifically shown in the Contract Documents. b. Where in contact with concrete. c. Where in contact with dissimilar metals.

3. Fiberglass surfaces except: a. Fiberglass piping. b. Piping supports.

4. Interior of pipe, ductwork, and conduits. 5. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units where painting would interfere with

the operation of the unit. 6. Code labels and equipment identification and rating plates. 7. Steel deck. 8. Contact surfaces of friction-type connections.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS TO BE PAINTED AND PAINTING SYSTEMS

A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Interior smooth faced standard (heavy) weight: SYSTEM #16. 2. Exterior smooth faced standard (heavy) weight: SYSTEM #27.

B. Interior Concrete walls: SYSTEM #15.

C. Structural Steel:


1. Non-immersion surfaces subject to corrosive or highly corrosive environment: SYSTEM #2.

2. All other (non-corrosive dry environment): SYSTEM #7. 3. Immersion surfaces subject to corrosive or highly corrosive environment:

SYSTEM #2. 4. Immersion surfaces subject to corrosive or highly corrosive environment requiring

NSF approval: SYSTEM #23.

D. Interior of steel water storage tanks and all ferrous metal items subject to contact with potable water requiring NSF approval: SYSTEM #23. 1. Includes all ferrous metal surfaces subject to splash, spillage, vapor, condensation

or other chronic potable water exposure. 2. Also includes ferrous metal surfaces within concrete tankage painted with SYSTEM

#22.

E. Miscellaneous ferrous metals (non-corrosive dry environment): SYSTEM #1. 1. Not for coating structural steel, steel joist, galvanized steel, steel (hollow metal)

doors, steel (hollow metal) door and window frames, and products with approved factory finishes.

F. Galvanized Metals: 1. Field touch-up where top coat is required: SYSTEM #4.

a. Prime paint only the damaged area. 2. Assembled galvanized steel items: SYSTEM #3. 3. Field touch-up of galvanized surfaces not requiring a finish top coat: SYSTEM #11.

a. Paint only damaged areas.

G. Steel (hollow metal) doors and frames primed in the factory: SYSTEM #5. 1. Shall be in conformance with ANSI A250.10

H. Steel equipment with existing paint coating or factory-applied prime or finish coating not complying with this Specification: SYSTEM #5. 1. Includes equipment specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be painted. 2. Factory-applied coats to remain.

I. Non-ferrous metals (except galvanized): SYSTEM #3. 1. Includes copper, brass, aluminum and aluminum flashing specifically indicated on

the Drawings to be painted.

J. Plastic Surfaces: 1. PVC, FRP, and CPVC surfaces: SYSTEM #3.

a. Includes tankage.

K. Electrical Conduit: 1. Galvanized: SYSTEM #3. 2. PVC coated: SYSTEM #3.

L. Pipe, Valves, and Fittings: 1. Pipe bollards: SYSTEM #2. 2. Steel, cast-iron, and uncoated ductile iron: SYSTEM #1. 3. Stainless: SYSTEM #1. 4. Brass and bronze: SYSTEM #3. 5. PVC, FRP, and CPVC: SYSTEM #3. 6. Steel aeration piping and blower equipment: SYSTEM #8.

M. Pipe and duct insulation when mounted on wall to be painted: SYSTEM #12.

N. Aluminum buried in concrete between dissimilar metals and dissimilar materials: SYSTEM #19.

O. Aluminum colored pipe thread touch-up, and aluminum colored finish where top coat is not required: SYSTEM #21.


1. Not for coating aluminum material.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with coating manufacturer's

instructions and this Section unless noted otherwise in the Specification. 2. Remove all dust, grease, oil, compounds, dirt and other foreign matter which would

prevent bonding of coating to surface.

B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding surfaces not to be coated. 2. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work, and

similar items; or provide ample in-place protection.

C. Prepare and Paint Before Assembly: Where component is subject to corrosive or highly corrosive environment, prepare and paint, before assembly, all surfaces which may be subject to environment which are inaccessible after assembly.

D. Ferrous Metal: 1. Prepare ductile iron pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations

and AWWA. 2. Complete fabrication, welding or burning before beginning surface preparation.

a. Chip or grind off flux, spatter, slag or other laminations left from welding. b. Remove mill scale. c. Grind smooth rough welds and other sharp projections.

3. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1 all surfaces scheduled to receive additional SSPC surface preparation.

4. Surfaces subject to corrosive or highly corrosive environment and all surfaces subject to immersion service: a. Near-white blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP-10/NACE No. 2.

5. All interior and exterior surfaces: a. Minimum commercial blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP-6/NACE No. 3.

6. Surfaces of steel joists and steel trusses: a. Commercial blast clean the major portion of the truss in accordance with SSPC

SP-6/NACE No. 3. b. Power tool or hand clean tight connection areas and other difficult to access

areas in accordance with SSPC SP-2 or SP-3. 7. Steel surfaces scheduled to receive paint system No. 24:

a. White metal blast in accordance with SSPC SP-5/NACE No. 1. 8. Restore surface of field welds and adjacent areas to original surface preparation. 9. All surfaces of steel lintels and steel components of concrete lintels used in wall

construction shall be completely painted with both prime and finish coats prior to placing in wall.

E. Hollow Metal: 1. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1.

F. Galvanized Metal: 1. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1 followed by abrasive brush blast in

accordance with SSPC SP-7/NACE No. 4 to provide 1 mil profile.

G. Abrasive blast clean the following equipment or surfaces regardless of previous finish, if any.

H. Concrete: 1. Cure for minimum of 28 days. 2. Verify that concrete surfaces have been cleaned and that voids have been patched

in accordance with Section 03348. a. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with ASTM D4258.


3. Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces in accordance ASTM D4259 as recommended by coating manufacturer.

4. Abrasive blast concrete surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-13/NACE No. 6 to provide profile recommended by coatings manufacturer.

5. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM D4262. a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required acceptable range,

use methods acceptable to coating manufacturer as required to bring pH within acceptable range.

b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained. 6. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating manufacturer's

recommended acceptable limits. a. Test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. After remedial measures have been taken to lower or raise moisture content,

retest surface until acceptable results are obtained.

I. Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Cure for minimum of 28 days. 2. Remove all mortar spatters and protrusions. 3. Verify that concrete unit masonry surfaces have been cleaned in accordance with

Section 04220 and ASTM D4261. 4. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM D4262.

a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required acceptable range, use methods acceptable to coating manufacturer as required to bring pH within acceptable limits.

b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained. 5. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating manufacturer's

recommended acceptable limits. a. Test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. After remedial measures have been taken to lower or raise moisture content,

retest surface until acceptable range is obtained.

J. Preparation by Abrasive Blasting: 1. All abrasive-blasted ferrous metal surfaces shall be inspected and approved in

writing by NACE certified coatings inspector immediately prior to application of paint coatings. a. Inspection shall be performed to determine cleanliness and profile depth of

blasted surfaces and to certify that surface has been prepared in accordance with these Specifications.

2. Schedule the abrasive blasting operation so blasted surfaces will not be wet after blasting and before painting.

3. Perform additional blasting and cleaning as required to achieve surface preparation required. Prior to painting, reblast surfaces allowed to set overnight and surfaces that show rust bloom. a. Surfaces allowed to set overnight or surfaces which show rust bloom prior to

painting shall be reinspected prior to paint application. 4. Profile depth of blasted surface: Not less than 1 mil or greater than 2 mils unless

required otherwise by coating manufacturer. 5. Provide compressed air for blasting that is free of water and oil. Provide accessible

separators and traps. 6. Confine blast abrasives to area being blasted.

a. Provide shields of polyethylene sheeting or other such barriers to confine blast material.

b. Plug pipes, holes, or openings before blasting and keep plugged until blast operation is complete and residue is removed.

7. Protect nameplates, valve stems, rotating equipment, motors and other items that may be damaged from blasting.

8. Reblast surfaces not meeting requirements of these Specifications.


9. Abrasive blasting media may be recovered, cleaned and reused providing Contractor submits, for Engineer's review, a comprehensive recovery plan outlining all procedures and equipment proposed in reclamation process.

10. Properly dispose of blasting material contaminated with debris from blasting operation not scheduled to be reused.

K. All Plastic Surfaces and Non-Ferrous Surfaces Except Galvanized Steel: 1. Sand using 80-100 grit sandpaper to scarify surfaces.

3.5 APPLICATION

A. General: 1. Thin, mix and apply coatings by brush, roller, or spray in accordance with

manufacturer's installation instructions. a. Application equipment must be inspected and approved in writing by coating

manufacturer. 2. Temperature and weather conditions:

a. Do not paint surfaces when surface temperature is below 50 DegF unless product has been formulated specifically for low temperature application and application is approved in writing by Engineer and paint manufacturer's authorized representative.

b. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. c. Do not paint on damp surfaces.

3. Immediately after surface has been inspected, apply structural steel and miscellaneous steel and steel joist and steel truss prime coat in the factory. a. Finish coats shall be applied in the field. b. Prime coat referred to here is prime coat as indicated in this Specification.

Structural steel and miscellaneous steel and steel joist and steel truss prime coating applied in factory (shop) as part of Fabricator's standard rust inhibiting and protection coating is not acceptable as replacement for specified prime coating.

4. Provide complete coverage to mil thickness specified. a. Thickness specified is dry mil thickness. b. All paint systems are "to cover." In situations of discrepancy between

manufacturer's square footage coverage rates and mil thickness, mil thickness requirements govern.

c. When color or undercoats show through, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish and color.

5. If so directed by Engineer, do not apply consecutive coats until Engineer has had an opportunity to observe and approve previous coats.

6. Apply materials under adequate illumination. 7. Evenly spread to provide full, smooth coverage. 8. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints, and other difficult to

work areas. 9. Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces and avoid intercoat

contamination. a. Clean contaminated surfaces before applying next coat.

10. Smooth out runs or sags immediately, or remove and recoat entire surface. 11. Allow preceding coats to dry before recoating.

a. Recoat within time limits specified by coating manufacturer. b. If recoat time limits have expired reprepare surface in accordance with coating

manufacturer's printed recommendations. 12. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other work to proceed. 13. Coat all aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 14. When coating rough surfaces which cannot be backrolled sufficiently, hand brush

coating to work into all recesses.


15. Backroll concrete and masonry surfaces with a roller if paint coatings are spray applied.

B. Prime Coat Application: 1. Prime all surfaces indicated to be painted. Apply prime coat in accordance with

coating manufacturer's written instructions and as written in this Section. 2. Ensure field-applied coatings are compatible with factory-applied coatings. Ensure

new coatings applied over existing coatings are compatible. a. Employ services of coating manufacturer's qualified technical representative.

1) Certify through material data sheets. 2) Perform test patch.

b. If field-applied coating is found to be not compatible, require the coating manufacturer's technical representative to recommend, in writing, product to be used as barrier coat, thickness to be applied, surface preparation and method of application.

c. At Contractor's option, coatings may be removed, surface reprepared, and new coating applied using appropriate paint system listed in paragraph 2.2 E. 1) All damage to surface as result of coating removal shall be repaired to

original condition or better by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Prime ferrous metals embedded in concrete to minimum of 1 IN below exposed

surfaces. 4. Back prime all wood scheduled to be painted, prior to installation. 5. After application of primer to gypsum board surfaces, inspect surface and repair in

accordance with Article 3.4. a. Re-prime repaired surfaces to uniform finish before application of finish coat(s).

6. Apply zinc-rich primers while under continuous agitation. 7. Ensure abrasive blasting operation does not result in embedment of abrasive

particles in paint film. 8. Brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access areas with primer prior to

primer application over entire surface. 9. Touch up damaged primer coats prior to applying finish coats. Restore primed

surface equal to surface before damage.

C. Finish Coat Application: 1. Apply finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions and

in accordance with this Section. 2. Touch up damaged finish coats using same application method and same material

specified for finish coat. Prepare damaged area in accordance with Article 3.4.

3.6 COLOR CODING

A. Color and band piping in accordance with Article 3.9 of this Section. 1. Band piping using maximum of three different colors at 20 FT maximum centers. 2. Place bands:

a. Along continuous lines. b. At changes in direction. c. At changes of elevation. d. On both sides of an obstruction (e.g., wall, ceiling) that painted item passes

through. 3. Band width for individual colors (pipe diameter measured to outside of insulation, if

applicable): a. Piping up to 8 IN DIA: 2 IN minimum. b. Piping greater than 8 IN up to 24 IN DIA: 4 IN minimum. c. Piping greater than 24 IN up to 48 IN DIA: 6 IN minimum. d. Piping greater than 48 IN DIA: 8 IN minimum.




A. Maintain Daily Record: 1. Provide the following information for each coat of paint applied:

a. Date, starting time, end time, and all breaks taken by painters. b. For exterior painting:

1) Sky condition. 2) Wind speed and direction.

c. Air temperature. d. Relative humidity. e. Moisture content of substrate prior to each coat. f. Provisions utilized to maintain work area within manufacturer's recommended

application parameters. g. Surface temperature of substrate to which paint is being applied.

2. Format for daily record to be computer generated.

B. Measure wet coating with wet film thickness gages.

C. Measure coating dry film thickness in accordance with SSPC PA-2 using Mikrotest gage calibrated against NBS "Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards." 1. Engineer may measure coating thickness at any time during project to assure

conformance with Specifications.

D. Measure surface temperature of items to be painted with surface temperature gage specifically designed for such.

E. Measure substrate humidity with humidity gage specifically designed for such.

F. Provide wet paint signs.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean paint spattered surfaces. Use care not to damage finished surfaces.

B. Upon completion of painting, replace hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, and similar items.

C. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding, and debris. Leave areas broom clean.

3.9 SCHEDULE

A. Piping and Pipe Banding Color Schedule: 1. Pipe color code to be in accordance with State of Colorado Design Criteria for

Potable Water Systems, latest revisions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Tag, tape and stenciling systems for equipment, piping, valves, pumps, ductwork

and similar items, and hazard and safety signs.



A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute

(NEMA/ANSI): a. Z535.1, Safety Color Code. b. Z535.2, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs. c. Z535.3, Criteria for Safety Symbols. d. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 1910.145, Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



a. Catalog information for all identification systems. b. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards

referenced. 3. Identification register, listing all items in Part 3 to be identified, type of identification

system to be used, lettering, location and color.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. W.H. Brady Co. 2. Panduit. 3. Seton. 4. National Band and Tag Co. 5. Carlton Industries, Inc.


B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01640.


A. Type A1 - Round Metal Tags: 1. Materials:

a. Aluminum or stainless steel. b. Stainless steel shall be used in corrosive environments.

2. Size: a. Diameter: 1-1/2 IN minimum. b. Thickness: 0.035 IN (20 GA) minimum.

3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 IN minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Stamped and filled with black coloring.

4. Color: Natural.

B. Type A2 - Rectangle Metal Tags: 1. Materials: Stainless steel. 2. Size:

a. 3-1/2 IN x 1-1/2 IN minimum. b. Thickness: 0.036 IN (20 GA) minimum.

3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 IN minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Stamped and filled with black coloring.

4. Color: Natural.

C. Type A3 - Metal Tape Tags: 1. Materials: Aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Size:

a. Width 1/2 IN minimum. b. Length as required by text.

3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 IN minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Embossed.

4. Color: Natural.

D. Type B1- Square Non-Metallic Tags: 1. Materials: Fiberglass reinforced plastic. 2. Size:

a. Surface: 2 x 2 IN minimum. b. Thickness: 100 mils.

3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 IN mounting hole with metal eyelet. b. Legend: Preprinted and permanently embedded and fade resistant.

4. Color: a. Background: Manufacturer standard or as specified. b. Lettering: Black.

E. Type B2 - Non-Metallic Signs: 1. Materials: Fiberglass reinforced or durable plastic. 2. Size:

a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 60 mils minimum.

3. Fabrication: a. Rounded corners. b. Drilled holes in corners with grommets. c. Legend: Preprinted, permanently embedded and fade resistant for a 10 year

minimum outdoor durability.


4. Color: a. Background: Manufacturer standard or as specified. b. Lettering: Black.

5. Standards for OSHA signs: NEMA/ANSI Z535.1, NEMA/ANSI Z535.2, NEMA/ANSI Z535.3, NEMA/ANSI Z535.4, OSHA 1910.145.

F. Type C - Phenolic Name Plates: 1. Materials: Phenolic. 2. Size:

a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 1/16 IN.

3. Fabrication: a. Two (2) layers laminated. b. Legend: Engraved through top lamination into bottom lamination. c. Two (2) drilled side holes, for screw mounting.

4. Color: Black top surface, white core, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs: 1. Materials: Vinyl tape or vinyl cloth. 2. Size:

a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 5 mils minimum.

3. Fabrication: a. Indoor/Outdoor grade. b. Weather and UV resistant inks. c. Permanent adhesive. d. Legend: Preprinted. e. Wire markers to be self-laminating.

4. Color: White with black lettering or as specified. 5. Standards for OSHA signs: NEMA/ANSI Z535.1, NEMA/ANSI Z535.2, NEMA/ANSI

Z535.3, NEMA/ANSI Z535.4, OSHA 1910.145.

H. Type E - Heat Shrinkable Tape Tags: 1. Materials: Polyolefin. 2. Size: As required by text. 3. Fabrication:

a. Legend: Preprinted. 4. Color: White background, black printing.

I. Type F - Underground Warning Tape: 1. Materials: Polyethylene. 2. Size:

a. 6 IN wide (minimum). b. Thickness: 3.5 mils.

3. Fabrication: a. Legend: Preprinted and permanently imbedded. b. Message continuous printed. c. Tensile strength: 1750 psi.

4. Color: As specified.

J. Type G - Stenciling System: 1. Materials:

a. Exterior type stenciling enamel. b. Either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade.

2. Size: As required. 3. Fabrication:

a. Legend: As required. 4. Color: Black or white for best contrast.


K. Underground Tracer Wire: 1. Materials:

a. Wire: 1) 12 GA AWG. 2) Solid.

b. Wire nuts: Waterproof type. c. Split bolts: Brass.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: 1. Bead chain: #6 brass, aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Plastic strap: Nylon, urethane or polypropylene. 3. Screws: Self-tapping, stainless steel. 4. Adhesive, solvent activated.


A. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion and include in extra stock, along with required stock of paints and applicators.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install identification devices at specified locations.

B. All identification devices to be printed by mechanical process, hand printing is not acceptable.

C. Attach tags to equipment with sufficient surface or body area with solvent activated adhesive applied to back of each tag.

D. Attach tags with 1/8 IN round or flat head screws to equipment without sufficient surface or body area, or porous surfaces. 1. Where attachment with screws should not or cannot penetrate substrate, attach with

plastic strap.

E. Single items of equipment enclosed in a housing or compartment to be tagged on outside of housing. 1. Several items of equipment mounted in housing to be individually tagged inside the

compartment.

F. Tracer Wire: 1. Attach to pipe at a maximum of 10 FT intervals with tape or tie-wraps. 2. Continuous pass from each valve box and above grade at each structure. 3. Coil enough wire at each valve box to extend wire a foot above the ground surface. 4. 1,000 FT maximum spacing between valve boxes. 5. If split bolts are used for splicing, wrap with electrical tape. 6. If wire nuts are used for splicing, knot wire at each splice point leaving 6 IN of wire

for splicing. 7. Use continuous strand of wire between valve box where possible.

a. Continuous length shall be no shorter than 100 FT.

3.2 SCHEDULES

A. Process Systems: 1. General:

a. Provide arrows and markers on piping. 1) At 20 FT maximum centers along continuous lines.


2) At changes in direction (route) or obstructions. 3) At valves, risers, "T" joints, machinery or equipment. 4) Where pipes pass through floors, walls, ceilings, cladding assemblies and

like obstructions provide markers on both sides. b. Position markers on both sides of pipe with arrow markers pointing in flow

direction. 1) If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers.

c. Apply tapes and stenciling in uniform manner parallel to piping. 2. Trenches with piping:

a. Tag type: Type F - Underground Warning Tape b. Location: Halfway between top of piping and finished grade. c. Letter height: 1-1/4 IN minimum. d. Natural gas or digester gas:

1) Color: Yellow with black letters. 2) Legend:

a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED GAS LINE BELOW”

e. Potable water: 1) Color: Blue with black letters. 2) Legend:

a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED WATER LINE BELOW”

f. Storm and sanitary sewer lines: 1) Color: Green with black letters. 2) Legend:

a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW”

g. (Nonpotable) water piping, except 3 IN and smaller irrigation pipe: 1) Color: Green with black letters. 2) Legend:

a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED NONPOTABLE WATER LINE BELOW”

h. Chemical feed piping (e.g., chlorine solution, polymer solution, caustic solution, etc.): 1) Color: Yellow with black letters. 2) Legend:

a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED CHEMICAL LINE BELOW”

i. Other piping (e.g., compressed air, irrigation, refrigerant, heating water, etc.): 1) Color: Yellow with black letters. 2) Legend:

a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED PIPE LINE BELOW”

3. Yard valves, buried, with valve box and concrete pad: a. Tag type: Type A2 - Rectangle Metal Tags. b. Fastener: 3/16 IN x 7/8 IN plastic screw anchor with 1 IN #6 stainless steel pan

head screw. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Valve designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “V-xxx”).

4. Valves and slide gates: a. Tag type:

1) Outdoor locations: Type B1 - Square Non-Metallic Tags. 2) Indoor non-corrosive:

a) Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Non-Metallic Tags.


3) Indoor corrosive: a) Stainless steel Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Non-Metallic Tags.

b. Fastener: 1) Type A1: Chain of the same material. 2) Type B1: Stainless steel chain.

c. Color: Per ASME A13.1 corresponding to the piping system. d. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Valve designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “V-xxx”).

5. Process equipment (e.g., pumps, pump motors, blowers, air compressors, bar screens, clarifier drive mechanism, etc.): a. Tag type:

1) Type B2 - Non-Metallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. 3) Type G - Stenciling System.

b. Fastener: 1) Self. 2) Screws. 3) Adhesive.

c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “Primary Sludge

Pump P-xxx”). 6. Piping systems:

a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type G - Stenciling System. 2) Indoor locations:

a) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b) Type G - Stenciling System.

b. Fastener: Self. c. Color: Per ASME A13.1. d. Legend:

1) Letter height: Manufacturers standard for the pipe diameter. 2) Mark piping in accordance with ASME A13.1. 3) Use piping designation as indicated on the Drawings. 4) Arrow: Single arrow.

7. Process tanks (over 1000 GAL) and basins, (e.g., chemical storage, clarifiers, trickling filters, digesters, etc): a. Tag type:

1) Type B2 - Non-Metallic Signs. 2) Type G - Stenciling System.

b. Fastener: 1) Screw. 2) Self.

c. Location as directed by Owner. d. Legend:

1) Letter height: 4 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “Clarifier CL-

xxx”). 8. Tanks (less than 1000 GAL) (e.g., break tanks, chemical tanks, hydro-pneumatic

tanks, air receivers, etc.): a. Tag type:

1) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. 2) Type G - Stenciling System.

b. Fastener: Self.


c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “Polymer

Storage Tank Txxx”) 9. Equipment that starts automatically:

a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Non-Metallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs.

b. Fastener: 1) Type B2 - Screw or adhesive. 2) Type D - Self.

c. Size: 5 IN x 7 IN d. Location: {Equipment name}. e. Legend:

1) OSHA Warning Sign. 2) Description of Warning: “THIS MACHINE STARTS AUTOMATICALLY”.

B. Instrumentation Systems: 1. Instrumentation Equipment (e.g., flow control valves, primary elements, etc.):

a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type B1 - Square Non-Metallic Tags. 2) Indoor non-corrosive:

a) Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Non-Metallic Tags.

3) Indoor corrosive: a) Stainless steel Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Non-Metallic Tags.

b. Fastener: 1) Type A1: Chain of the same material. 2) Type B1: Stainless steel chain.

c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Equipment ISA designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “FIT-xxx”).

2. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., PLC control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment name (e.g., "PLC CONTROL PANEL PCP-xxx").

3. Components inside equipment enclosure, (e.g., PLC’s, control relays, contactors, and timers): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "PLC-xxx” or “CR-xxx").

4. Through enclosure door mounted components (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Component ISA tag number as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “HS-xxx”).

C. HVAC Systems: 1. General:


a. Provide arrows and markers on ducts. 1) At 20 FT maximum centers along continuous lines. 2) At changes in direction (route) or obstructions. 3) At dampers, risers, branches, machinery or equipment. 4) Where ducts pass through floors, walls, ceilings, cladding assemblies and

like obstructions provide markers on both sides. b. Position markers on both sides of duct with arrow markers pointing in flow

direction. If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers. c. Apply tapes and stenciling in uniform manner parallel to ducts.

2. HVAC Equipment (e.g., unit heaters, exhaust fans, air handlers, etc.): a. Tag type:

1) Type B2 - Non-Metallic Signs. 2) Type C - Phenolic Name Plates.

b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., "EF-xxx").

3. Ductwork: a. Tag type:

1) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. 2) Type G - Stenciling System.

b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1 IN minimum. 2) Description of ductwork, (e.g., “AIR SUPPLY”). 3) Arrows: Single arrow.

4. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., fan control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., "FAN CONTROL

PANEL FCP-xxx"). 5. Wall mounted thermostats:

a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) Description of equipment controlled (e.g., "UH-xxx" or AHU-xxx").

6. Components inside equipment enclosure, (e.g., controller’s, control relays, contactors, and timers): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "CR-xxx").

7. Through enclosure door mounted equipment (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Component tag number as indicated on the Drawings or as defined by

contractor (e.g., “HS-xxx”). Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


D. Electrical Systems: 1. Trenches with ductbanks, direct-buried conduit, or direct-buried wire and cable.

a. Tag type: Type F - Underground Warning Tape. b. Letter height: 1-1/4 IN minimum. c. Location:

1) Where trench is 12 IN or more below finished grade: In trench 6 IN below finished grade.

2) Where trench is less than 12 IN below finished grade: In trench 3 IN below finished grade.

d. Electrical power (e.g., low and medium voltage): 1) Color: Red with black letters. 2) Legend:

a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION”. b) Second line: “BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”.

e. Communications (e.g., telephone, instrumentation, LAN, SCADA): 1) Color: Orange with black letters. 2) Legend:

a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION”. b) Second line: “BURIED COMMUNICATION LINE BELOW”.

2. Switchgear, switchboards and motor control centers: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Main equipment legend:

1) Letter height: a) First line: 1 IN minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/8 IN minimum.

2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "MAIN SWITCHBOARD MSBxxx"). 3) Second line:

a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx").

b) The source of power room number is only required when there are multiple electrical rooms, if the source is in another building, the building name or number shall be used.

4) Third line: System voltage and phase (e.g., “480/277 V, 3PH”). d. Main and feeder device legend:

1) Letter height: 3/8 IN minimum. 2) Description of load (e.g., “MAIN DISCONNECT”, "PUMP Pxxx" or

"PANELBOARD HPxxx"). 3. Panelboards and transformers:

a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: a) First line: 3/8 IN minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/16 IN minimum.

2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "PANELBOARD LPxxx" or "TRANSFORMER Txxx").

3) Second line (panelboards only): System voltage and phase (e.g., “208/120V, 3PH”).

4. Transfer switches: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height:


a) First line: 3/8 IN minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/16 IN minimum.

2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH ATSxxx").

5. Safety switches, separately mounted circuit breakers and motor starters, VFD’s, etc.: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) First line: Description of load equipment is connected to (e.g., "PUMP

Pxxx"). 6. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., lighting control panels,

etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment name (e.g., "LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL LCPxxx").

7. Components inside equipment enclosures (e.g., circuit breakers, fuses, control power transformers, control relays, contactors, timers, etc.): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "M-xxx”, “CR-xxx” or “TR-xxx").

8. Through enclosure door mounted equipment (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Component tag number as indicated on the Drawings or as defined by

contractor (e.g., “HS-xxx”). 9. Conductors in control panels and in pull or junction boxes where multiple circuits

exist. a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Tag conductor at both ends. d. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/8 IN minimum. 2) Circuit number or wire number as scheduled on the Drawings or as

furnished with the equipment. 10. Conductors in handholes and manholes.

a. Tag type: Type A3 - Metal Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Nylon strap. c. Tag conductor at both ends. d. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/8 IN minimum. 2) Circuit number or wire number as scheduled on the Drawings.

11. Grounding conductors associated with grounding electrode system in accordance with the following: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend:

1) Letter height: 1/8 IN minimum.


2) Function of conductor (e.g., "MAIN BONDING JUMPER", "TO GROUND RING", "TO MAIN WATER PIPE").

12. Flash protection for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels and motor control centers: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: Per NFPA 70.

13. Entrances to electrical rooms: a. Tag type: Type B2 - Non-Metallic Signs. b. Fastener: Screw or adhesive. c. Size: 5 IN x 7 IN. d. Location: Each door to room. e. Legend:

1) OSHA Danger Sign. 2) Description of Danger: “HIGH VOLTAGE, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL

ONLY”. 14. Equipment where more than one (1) voltage source is present:

a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Non-Metallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Signs.

b. Fastener: 1) Screw or adhesive. 2) Self.

c. Size: 1-3/4 IN x 2-1/2 IN. d. Location: Exterior face of enclosure or cubical. e. Legend:

1) OSHA Danger Sign. 2) Description of Danger: “MULTIPLE VOLTAGE SOURCES”.

3.3 HAZARD AND SAFETY SIGNS

A. Provide 25 Hazard and Safety Signs: 1. Type B2 or D. 2. Inscription as directed by Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 10444 SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Room identification signs. 2. Building signage (cast aluminum letters).




a. B26, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Color charts for Engineer's color selection.

3. Schedule of all signs indicating text and graphics. 4. Layout of room identification signage, and exterior building signage showing finish,

size, letter style, text, and installation detail.

B. Samples: 1. Sample of room identification signage, and exterior building signage, signage finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Room identification signs:

a. Andco. b. ASE - Architectural Signs and Engraving. c. ASI Sign Systems. d. Best Manufacturing Co. e. Mohawk Engraving Co., Inc. f. Nelson-Harkins. g. Southwell. h. The Supersine Co.

B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Special Conditions. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Room Identification Signs: 1. Interior: Melamine plastic suitable for raised lettering and Braille. 2. Exterior: Aluminum or fiberglass suitable for raised lettering and Braille.

B. Building Identification Signs: 1. Cast aluminum ASTM B26. 2. For machine cut letters, provide aluminum of 5052-H32 alloy and hardness.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Room Identification Signs: 1. General:

a. Raised text, border and graphics. 1) Minimum 1/32 IN height. 2) Provide international graphic symbology for all toilet, locker and shower

rooms or combinations thereof, and for unisex toilet rooms and stairs. 3) Provide handicap symbol on all signs for rooms meeting handicap

requirements. b. Grade 2 Braille. c. Finish: Eggshell.

1) Color: To be selected. d. Text: Minimum 3/4 IN high. e. Text as indicated in Paragraph 3.2 SCHEDULE. f. Exterior signs shall be rated for exterior use.

B. Building Identification Signage (Cast Aluminum Letters): 1. General:

a. Cast aluminum or machine cut aluminum. b. Finish: Anodized. c. Color: As requested by Owner. d. Mounting: 1 IN projected. Provide stainless steel mounting studs. e. Coordinate name and location with owner.

2. Letters: a. Size: Upper case, 8 IN high for building. name. 4 IN high for building address. b. Depth: 3/8 IN.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Room Identification Signs: 1. Install signs on walls adjacent to the latch side of doors using foam tape for interior

signs and stainless steel screws (minimum of two) for exterior signs. a. Stainless steel screws shall be painted to match sign color.

2. Where no adjacent wall space is available, mount signs on nearest adjacent wall. a. Mounting of signage shall be such that a person may approach to within 3 IN of

sign without encountering any protruding objects or standing in swing of door travel.

3. Mount 60 IN above finish floor to centerline of sign.

B. Building Identification Signs (Cast Aluminum Letters): 1. Install letters where indicated on Drawings. 2. Mount to walls with 1 IN projection in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


C. Site Signage: Set posts in concrete minimum 18 IN into earth or as recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 SCHEDULE

A. Room Identification Signage: 1. AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY 2. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOM

END OF SECTION


SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguishers.



A. Referenced Standards: 1. Federal Specification (FS):

a. CS-191-53. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 10, Standard on Portable Fire Extinguishers. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. Building Materials Directory. 4. FM Global (FM):

a. Approval Guide - Latest Edition. 5. Warnock Hersey.

1.3 SUBMITTALS






A. Deliver and install filled and charged extinguishers just prior to building occupancy.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Fire extinguishers:

a. J. L. Industries. b. Amerex Corporation. c. Ansul Fire Protection. d. Walter Kidde. e. Potter - Roemer Inc.

2. Fire extinguisher signs: a. Seton.




A. Wall Brackets: 1. Bracket type to fit specified extinguisher, with correct mounting accessories to fit

substrate. 2. Furnish bracket for each extinguisher not in cabinet. 3. Bracket to be finished in red or black enamel.

B. Fire Extinguisher (FEXT): 1. Steel bodied, all metal top (head) and valves. 2. Multi-purpose dry chemical, UL Rated, 20A-120BC. 3. Provide hose and horn on each. 4. Furnish one extinguisher for each fire extinguisher (FEXT) location. 5. Finish: Red with epoxy finish coat. 6. Provide "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" sign for each extinguisher location.

a. Similar to SETON #21999 for single face and #22001 for double-faced signs. 7. Meeting NFPA 10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install units with extinguisher top not over 48 IN above floor.

C. Fire extinguisher locations shown on Drawings are approximate locations. Verify all extinguisher mounting locations and quantities with local Fire Marshal.

D. Mount "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" sign above or adjacent to each extinguisher as directed by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11005 EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements of this Section apply to all equipment provided on the Project

including that found in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16, even if not specifically referenced in individual "Equipment" articles of those Specifications.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03308 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 4. Section 05505 - Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. 6. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 7. Section 10400 - Identification Devices. 8. Section 13442 - Primary Elements and Transmitters. 9. Section 13448 - Control Panels and Enclosures. 10. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements. 11. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 12. Section 16442 – Motor Control Equipment.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 3. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and System. c. MG 1, Motors and Generators.


7. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA Safety and Health Standards for General Industry

(referred to herein as OSHA standards).

B. Miscellaneous: 1. A single manufacturer of a "product" to be selected and utilized uniformly throughout

Project even though: a. More than one manufacturer is listed for a given "product" in Specifications. b. No manufacturer is listed.


2. Equipment, electrical assemblies, related electrical wiring, instrumentation, controls, and system components shall FULLY comply with specific NEC requirements related to area classification and to NEMA 250 and NEMA ICS 6 designations indicated on the Electrical Drawings and defined in Section 16010.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Product: Manufactured materials and equipment.

B. Major Equipment Supports - Supports for Equipment: 1. Located on or suspended from elevated slabs with supported equipment weighing

2000 LBS or greater, or: 2. Located on or suspended from roofs with supported equipment weighing 500 LBS or

greater, or: 3. Located on slab-on-grade or earth with supported equipment weighing 5000 LBS or

more.

C. Equipment: One or more assemblies capable of performing a complete function. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation or other devices requiring an electrical, pneumatic, electronic or hydraulic connection. Not limited to items listed under "Equipment" article within specifications.

D. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 1. Installer and applicator are synonymous.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. General for all equipment:

a. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. b. Data sheets that include manufacturer's name and complete product model

number. Clearly identify all optional accessories that are included. c. Acknowledgement that products submitted comply with the requirements of the

standards referenced. d. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling, and installation instructions. e. Equipment identification utilizing numbering system and name utilized in

Drawings. f. Equipment installation details:

1) Location of anchorage. 2) Type, size, and materials of construction of anchorage. 3) Anchorage setting templates. 4) Manufacturer's installation instructions.

g. Equipment area classification rating. h. Shipping and operating weight. i. Equipment physical characteristics:

1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical). 2) Materials of construction and construction details.

j. Equipment factory primer and paint data. k. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts list. l. Equipment lining and coatings. m. Equipment utility requirements include air, natural gas, electricity, and water. n. Ladders and platforms provided with equipment:

1) Certification that all components comply fully with OSHA requirements. 2) Full details of construction/fabrication. 3) Scaled plan and sections showing relationship to equipment.

2. Mechanical and process equipment: a. Operating characteristics:


1) Technical information including applicable performance curves showing specified equipment capacity, rangeability, and efficiencies.

2) Brake horsepower requirements. 3) Copies of equipment data plates.

b. Piping and duct connection size, type and location. c. Equipment bearing life certification. d. Equipment foundation data:

1) Equipment center of gravity. 2) Criteria for designing vibration, special or unbalanced forces resulting from

equipment operation. 3. Electrical and control equipment:

a. Electric motor information: 1) Documentation that motors provided are “NEMA Premium” energy efficient

type and not standard efficiency motors. a) When standard efficiency motors are submitted, provide documentation

why “NEMA Premium” energy efficient motors are not available. 2) Nameplate data as required by the NEC.

a) Manufacturer's name. b) Rated voltage. c) Full load current. d) Rated frequency. e) Number of phases. f) Rated full load speed. g) Insulation system class and rated ambient temperature or rated

temperature rise. h) Time rating: 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes or continuous. i) Rated HP. j) Code letter or locked rotor current. k) NEMA design letter. l) Marked "Thermally Protected" where applicable.

3) Motor service factor. 4) Motor enclosure type. 5) NEMA frame size. 6) Current, efficiency and power factor at no, 3/4 and full load. 7) Space heater data, if applicable. 8) Type of bearings and lubrication. 9) Net weight. 10) Motor thermostat, RTD, or thermistor data, if applicable. 11) Certification that motors are compatible with variable frequency drives,

where applicable. 12) Motor test reports, where applicable. 13) Motor conduit box data.

b. Electrical gear: 1) Equipment ratings: Voltage, continuous current, kVa, watts, short circuit

with stand, etc., as applicable. c. Control panels:

1) Panel construction. 2) Point-to-point ladder diagrams. 3) Scaled panel face and subpanel layout. 4) Technical product data on panel components. 5) Panel and subpanel dimensions and weights. 6) Panel access openings. 7) Nameplate schedule. 8) Panel anchorage.

4. Systems schematics and data: a. Provide system schematics where required in system specifications.


1) Acknowledge all system components being supplied as part of the system. 2) Utilize equipment, instrument and valving tag numbers defined in the

contract documents for all components. 3) Provide technical data for each system component showing compliance with

the Contract Document requirements. 4) For piping components, identify all utility connections, vents and drains

which will be included as part of the system. 5. For factory painted equipment, provide paint submittals in accordance with Section

09905.


C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Sample form letter for equipment field certification. 2. Certification that equipment has been installed properly, has been initially started up,

has been calibrated and/or adjusted as required, and is ready for operation. 3. Certification for major equipment supports that equipment foundation design loads

shown on the Drawings or specified have been compared to actual loads exhibited by equipment provided for this Project and that said design loadings are equal to or greater than the loads produced by the equipment provided.

4. Field noise testing reports if such testing is specified in narrow scope sections. 5. Field vibration testing reports if vibration testing is specified in narrow scope

sections. 6. Notification, at least 1 week in advance, that motor testing will be conducted at

factory. 7. Certification from equipment manufacturer that all manufacturer-supplied control

panels that interface in any way with other controls or panels have been submitted to and coordinated with the supplier/installer of those interfacing systems.

8. Motor test reports. 9. Certification prior to Project closeout that electrical panel drawings for manufacturer-

supplied control panels truly represent panel wiring including any field-made modifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Motors:

a. Baldor. b. General Electric. c. Marathon Electric. d. Reliance Electric. e. Siemens. f. Teco-Westinghouse. g. U.S. Motors.

2. Mechanical variable speed drives: a. Reeves. b. U.S. Motors (VariDrive).

B. No like, equivalent or "or-equal" item is permitted.

C. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Special Conditions. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering



A. Electric Motors: 1. Where used in conjunction with adjustable speed AC or DC drives, provide motors

that are fully compatible with the speed controllers. 2. Design for frequent starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven

equipment. 3. Design for full voltage starting unless specified or indicated otherwise. 4. Design bearing life based upon actual operating load conditions imposed by driven

equipment. 5. Size for altitude of project. 6. Furnish with stainless steel nameplates which include all data required by Article

430 of the National Electrical Code. 7. Use of manufacturer's standard motor will be permitted on integrally constructed

motor driven equipment specified by model number in which a redesign of the complete unit would be required in order to provide a motor with features specified.

8. AC electric motors 10 HP or less: a. Less than 1/3 HP: Single phase, 60 Hz. b. 1/3 to 10 HP: Single or three phase, 60 HZ. c. Designed for the supply voltage indicated on the Drawings. d. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. e. For single phase motors less than 1 HP and not provided with external motor

overload protection as indicated on the Drawings, provide built-in manual reset thermal protector or integrally mounted manual motor starter with thermal overload element with stainless steel enclosure.

f. For vertical motors provide 15 year, average-life thrust bearings conforming to ABMA standards.

9. AC electric motors greater than 10 HP: a. Single or three phase, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage indicated on the

Drawings. b. Oil or grease lubricated antifriction bearings conforming to ABMA standards.

Design bearing life for 90 percent survival rating at 50,000 HRS of operation for motors up to and including 100 HP. For motors greater than 100 HP, design bearing life for 90 percent survival rating at 100,000 HRS of operation.

c. For vertical motors provide 15 year, average-life thrust bearings conforming to ABMA standards.

d. Thermal protection: 1) Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, motors 50 HP and

above controlled from a variable frequency drive, and all other motors 200 HP and above, shall be provided with integral thermal detectors with normally closed contacts that will open on overtemperature. a) Two thermal sensing devices per phase in each phase hot-spot

location. b) Contacts rated for 120V AC. c) Thermostats shall be wired in series, with the leads brought out to a

separate conduit box. d) Thermostats shall automatically reset on falling temperature.

e. Space Heaters: Where specified, provide motor space heaters sized to prevent condensation. Heaters shall be rated 120V AC, and wired to a separate space heater conduit box.

f. Motors having a locked rotor inrush KVA greater than 6.3 times motor horsepower are not acceptable.

10. Severe duty motor to have the following minimum features: a. All cast iron construction.


b. Gasketed conduit box. c. Epoxy finish for corrosion protection. d. Hydroscopic varnish on windings for corrosion protection. e. Drain plug and breather. f. Power factor correction:

1) Correct motors 20HP and above to 94 to 96 percent lagging power with use of power factor correction capacitors. Do not use power factor correction capacitors on motors that are fed from variable frequency drives, solid state starters or controlled by reduced voltage, reversing or two speed motor starters unless the capacitors are disconnected from the circuit until all switching in the starter has been completed.

11. Motor enclosures: a. Unless specified otherwise in individual narrow scope specifications, totally

enclosed (TEFC or TENV) motors shall be furnished on: 1) Outdoor equipment. 2) Equipment for installation below grade unless otherwise specified. 3) Equipment operating in wet or dust-laden locations. 4) Chemical feeding and chemical handling equipment.

b. Drip-proof motors, or totally enclosed at the supplier’s option, shall be furnished on equipment located indoors, above-grade with clean and dry locations.

c. Corrosive or severe-duty rated motors shall be furnished for corrosive locations. d. Explosion-proof rated motors shall be furnished for motors installed in Class I,

Division 1 hazardous locations. Motors installed in Class I, Division 2 locations shall either be rated explosion-proof, or shall have no arc-producing devices and motor frame temperatures shall not exceed the Temperature Code for the particular gas under normal operating conditions.

B. NEMA Design Squirrel Cage Induction Motors 600V or less: 1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance with NEMA and IEEE for the

specific duty imposed by the driven equipment. 2. Motors to meet NEMA MG 1 (“NEMA Premium”) efficiencies. 3. For use on variable frequency type adjustable speed drives, provide induction

motors that are in compliance with NEMA MG-1, Part 31 and are labeled as “Inverter Duty”.

4. Design motor insulation in accordance with NEMA standards for Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise above a 40 DegC ambient at nameplate horsepower.

5. Design motors for continuous duty. 6. Size motors having a 1.0 service factor so that nameplate HP is a minimum of 15

percent greater than the maximum HP requirements of the driven equipment over its entire operating range. a. As an alternative, furnish motors with a 1.15 service factor and size so that

nameplate HP is at least equal to the maximum HP requirements of the driven equipment over its entire operating range.

MOTOR LOCATION MOTOR ENCLOSURE / WINDING INSULATION Unclassified Indoor Areas

DPFG (for horizontal motors), Standard Insulation, TEFC, Standard Installation

Wet indoor areas TEFC, Standard Installation, WP-II (for vertical motors) Wet outdoor areas TEFC, Extra Dip and Bake for Moisture, TEFC Encapsulated

Windings, WP-II (for vertical motors) 7. Provide oversize conduit box complete with clamp type grounding terminals inside

the conduit box. Conduit box shall be suitable for the number and size of conduits indicated on the Drawings.

C. Submersible Motors: Refer to individual narrow scope specifications for submersible motor requirements.

D. V-Belt Drive: Not allowed.


E. Medium Voltage Motors: Refer to individual narrow scope specifications for medium voltage motor applications.

F. V-Belt Drive: 1. Provide each V-belt drive with sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment. 2. Provide V-belt drives with a service factor of at least 1.6 at maximum speed. 3. Provide staticproof belts.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Gear Drives and Drive Components: 1. Size drive equipment capable of supporting full load including losses in speed

reducers and power transmission. 2. Provide nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer at least

equal to nameplate horsepower of drive motor. 3. Design drive units for 24 HR continuous service, constructed so oil leakage around

shafts is precluded. 4. Utilize gears, gear lubrication systems, gear drives, speed reducers, speed

increasers and flexible couplings meeting applicable standards of American Gear Manufacturers Association.

5. Gear reducers: a. Provide gear reducer totally enclosed and oil lubricated. b. Utilize antifriction bearings throughout. c. Provide worm gear reducers having a service factor of at least 1.20. d. Furnish other helical, spiral bevel, and combination bevel-helical gear reducers

with a service factor of at least 1.50.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Guards: 1. Provide each piece of equipment having exposed moving parts with full length,

easily removable guards, meeting OSHA requirements. 2. Interior applications:

a. Construct from expanded galvanized steel rolled to conform to shaft or coupling surface.

b. Utilize non-flattened type 16 GA galvanized steel with nominal 1/2 IN spacing. c. Connect to equipment frame with hot-dip galvanized bolts and wing nuts.

3. Exterior applications: a. Construct from 16 GA stainless steel or aluminum. b. Construct to preclude entrance of rain, snow, or moisture. c. Roll to conform to shaft or coupling surface. d. Connect to equipment frame with stainless steel bolts and wing nuts.

B. Anchorage: 1. Cast-in-place anchorage:

a. Provide ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steel anchorage for all equipment. b. Configuration and number of anchor bolts shall be per manufacturer's

recommendations. c. Provide two nuts for each bolt.

2. Drilled anchorage: a. Adhesive anchors per Section 05505. b. Epoxy grout per Section 03308. c. Threaded rods same as cast-in-place.

C. Data Plate: 1. Attach a stainless steel data plate to each piece of rotary or reciprocating

equipment. 2. Permanently stamp information on data plate including manufacturer's name,

equipment operating parameters, serial number and speed.


D. Gages: 1. Provide gages in accordance with Section 13442. 2. Provide at the following locations:

a. Inlet and outlet of all reciprocating, centrifugal and positive displacement mechanical and process equipment.

b. At locations identified on Drawings. 3. Utilize tapping sleeves for mounting per Section 15060.

E. Lifting Eye Bolts or Lugs: 1. Provide on all equipment 50 LBS or greater. 2. Provide on other equipment or products as specified in the narrow specifications.

F. Control Panels and Enclosures: See Section 13448.

G. Motor Control Equipment: See Section 16442.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accordance with modern engineering and shop practices.

B. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in field.

C. Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable.

D. Ensure that equipment has not been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.

E. Furnish equipment which requires periodic internal inspection or adjustment with access panels which will not require disassembly of guards, dismantling of piping or equipment or similar major efforts. Quick opening but sound, securable access ports or windows shall be provided for inspection of chains, belts, or similar items.

F. Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for equipment and equipment motor where said mounting is a manufacturer's standard option. Provide drain connection for 3/4 IN PVC tubing.

G. Machine the mounting feet of rotating equipment.

H. Fabricate equipment which will be subject to Corrosive Environment in such a way as to avoid back to back placement of surfaces that can not be properly prepared and painted. When such back to back fabrication can not be avoided, provide continuous welds to seal such surfaces from contact with corrosive environment. Where continuous welds are not practical, after painting seal the back to back surfaces from the environment in accordance with Section 07900.

2.6 SHOP OR FACTORY PAINT FINISHES

A. Electrical Equipment: 1. Provide factory-applied paint coating system(s) for all electrical equipment

components except those specified in Section 09905 to receive field painting.

B. See the following specification for additional equipment receiving factory painting: 1. Section 13448 - Control Panels and Enclosures.

C. Field paint other equipment in accordance with Section 09905.


A. Motor Tests: 1. Test motors in accordance with NEMA and IEEE standards. 2. Provide routine test for motors less than 100 hp. 3. Provide complete test for motors 100 HP and above.


a. Complete tests include all the requirements of the routine test: 1) Temperature rise at rated load. 2) Percent slip. 3) Locked rotor torque. 4) Breakdown torque. 5) Efficiencies tabulated at 100, 75, and 50 percent of full load. 6) Power factor tabulated at 100, 75, and 50 percent of full load.

4. The Owner reserves the right to select and have tested, either routine or complete, any motor included in the project. a. The Owner will pay all costs, including shipping and handling, for all motors

successfully passing the tests. b. The Contractor shall pay all costs, including shipping and handling, for all

motors failing the tests. c. If two successive motors of the same manufacturer fail testing, the Owner has

the right to reject all motors from that manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment as shown on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

B. Utilize templates for anchorage placement for slab-mounted equipment.

C. For equipment having drainage requirements such as seal water, provide 3/4 IN PVC or clear plastic tubing from equipment base to nearest floor or equipment drain. Route clear of major traffic areas and as approved by Engineer.

D. DO NOT construct foundations until major equipment supports are approved.

E. Extend all non-accessible grease fittings using stainless steel tubing to a location which allows easy access of fittings.

F. Construct subbases, either concrete, steel or cast iron, level in both directions. Particular care shall be taken at hold-down bolt locations so these areas are flat and level.

G. Machine Base: 1. Mount machine bases of rotating equipment on subbases in manner that they are

level in both directions according to machined surfaces on base. Use machinist level for this procedure.

2. Level machine bases on subbases and align couplings between driver and driven unit using steel blocks and shims. a. Size blocks and shims to provide solid support at each anchor bolt location.

Area size of blocks and shims shall be approximately 1-1/2 times area support surface at each anchor bolt point.

b. Provide blocks and shims at each anchor bolt. Blocks and shims that are square shape with "U" cut out to allow blocks and shims to be centered on anchor bolts.

c. After all leveling and alignment has been completed and before grouting, tighten anchor bolts to proper torque value.

d. Do not use nuts below the machine base on anchor bolts for base leveling.

H. Couplings: 1. Align in the annular and parallel positions.

a. For equipment rotating at 1200 rpm or less, align both annular and parallel within 0.001 IN tolerance for couplings 4 IN size and smaller. Couplings larger than 4 IN size: Increase tolerance 0.0005 IN per inches of coupling diameter, i.e., allow 6 IN coupling 0.002 IN tolerance, and allow a 10 IN coupling 0.004 IN tolerance.


b. For equipment rotating at speeds greater than 1200 rpm allow both annular and parallel positions within a tolerance rate of 0.00025 IN per inch coupling diameter.

2. If equipment is delivered as a mounted unit from factory, verify factory alignment on site after installation and realigned if necessary.

3. Check surfaces for runout before attempting to trim or align units.

I. Grouting: 1. After machine base has been shimmed, leveled, couplings aligned and anchor bolts

tightened to correct torque value, a dam or formwork shall be placed around base to contain grouting. Extend dam or formwork at least 1/2 IN above the top of leveling shims and blocks.

2. Saturate top of roughened concrete subbase with water before grouting. Add grout until entire space under machine base is filled to the top of the base underside. Puddle grout by working a stiff wire through the grout and vent holes to work grout in place and release any entrained air in the grout or base cavity.

3. When the grout has sufficiently hardened, remove dam or formwork and finish the exposed grout surface to fine, smooth surface. Cover exposed grout surfaces with wet burlap and keep covering sufficiently wet to prevent too rapid evaporation of water from the grout. When the grout has fully hardened (after a minimum of 7 days) tighten all anchor bolts and recheck driver-driven unit for proper alignment.

4. Power-Factor Correction Capacitors: a. Connect capacitors on the load side of the motor stating contacts and on the line

side of the overload relay. b. Mount capacitors on top of or on the wall above MCCs.

3.2 INSTALLATION CHECKS

A. For all equipment specifically required in detailed specifications, secure services of experienced, competent, and authorized representative(s) of equipment manufacturer to visit site of work and inspect, check, adjust and approve equipment installation. In each case, representative(s) shall be present during placement and startup of equipment and as often as necessary to resolve any operational issues which may arise.

B. Secure from equipment manufacturer's representative(s) a written report certifying that equipment: 1. Has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Is in accurate alignment. 3. Is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4. Has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.

Secure and deliver a field written report to Owner immediately prior to leaving jobsite.

C. No separate payment shall be made for installation checks. All or any time expended during installation check does not qualify as O&M training or instruction time when specified.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND HAZARD WARNING SIGNS

A. Identify equipment and install hazard warning signs in accordance with Section 10400.

3.4 FIELD PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

A. For required field painting and protective coatings, comply with Section 09905.

3.5 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATION

A. Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

B. Terminate motor circuit conductors with copper lugs bolted to motor leads.


C. Tape stripped ends of conductors and associated connectors with electrical tape. Wrapping thickness shall be 150 percent of the conductor insulation thickness.

D. Connections to carry full ampacity of conductors without temperature rise.

E. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.


A. Furnish equipment manufacturer services as specified in the individual equipment specifications.

B. Inspect wire and connections for physical damage and proper connection.

C. After installation and prior to energizing the motor, provide insulation resistance test of all motors 50 HP and above. 1. Conduct test with 500 or 1000 Vdc megger. 2. Test each phase separately. 3. Disconnect all extraneous leads to the motor. 4. Comply with NEMA MG-1 safety requirements and test procedures.

D. Bump motor to check for correct rotation: 1. Ensure motor has been lubricated. 2. Check prior to connection to driven equipment.

E. Subbase that supports the equipment base and that is made in the form of a cast iron or steel structure that has supporting beams, legs and cross member that are cast welded or bolted, shall be tested for a natural frequency of vibration after equipment is mounted. Keep the ratio of the natural frequency of the structure to the frequency of the disturbing force out of the range from 0.5 to 1.5.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Section 01650.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11060


PUMPING EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pumping equipment.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 11061 - Pumping Equipment: Non-Clog Centrifugal. 6. Section 11065 - Pumping Equipment: Sump. 7. Section 11072 - Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft). 8. Section 15605 - HVAC: Equipment.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Hydraulic Institute (HI):

a. Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps.

B. Fully coordinate all mechanical seal systems specified to ensure pump and seal compatibility.

C. For variable speed pumping applications, the pump manufacturer is designated to have single source responsibility for coordination of the pump and VFD drive system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The abbreviations are defined as follows: 1. IPS: Iron Pipe Size. 2. NPSHR: Net Positive Suction Head Required. 3. TDH: Total Differential Head. 4. TEFC: Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled. 5. VFD: Variable Frequency Drive.

B. Pump Service Category - Pump or pumps having identical names (not tag numbers) used for specific pumping service.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 11005. 2. Product technical data including:

a. Performance data and curves with flow (gpm), head (FT), horsepower, efficiency, NPSH requirements, submergence requirement.

b. Pump accessory data. c. Bearing supports, shafting details and lubrication provisions. d. Solids passage information.

3. Certifications: a. Certified pump performance curves as described in Article 2.5.

4. Test reports: a. Factory hydrostatic test.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:


1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. Certifications:

a. Statement relative to installation and start-up per Paragraph 3.2A.4.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pumps:

a. See individual pump specification sections. 2. Mechanical seals:

a. Chesterton. b. Garlock.


2.2 CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DESIGN

A. Provide units with increasing head characteristics from the end run out portion of the curve to shutoff condition.

2.3 ACCESSORIES


B. Each Unit: 1. Lifting eye bolts or lugs. 2. Plugged gage cock connection at suction and discharge nozzles. 3. Tapped and plugged openings for casing and bearing housing vents and drains. 4. Fittings for properly adding flushing lubricant. 5. Pressure relief fittings for grease lubrication.

C. Packing Seal: 1. Provide packing unless mechanical seal is specified in narrow-scope pump sections. 2. Minimum of five rings graphite impregnated synthetic packing. 3. Provide minimum 1/4 IN DIA supply tap and 1/2 IN DIA minimum drain tap. 4. Provide split teflon or bronze water seal ring. 5. Adjustable split follower cast iron or bronze gland.

D. Mechanical Seals: 1. Provide as specified in the narrow-scope pump sections. 2. Materials:

a. Metal parts except springs: 316 stainless steel. b. Springs: Hastelloy C. c. Seal faces: Unfilled carbon graphite versus silica-free Grade 99.5 ceramic. d. Elastomers: Viton.

E. Seal Water Systems: 1. Pressure Reducing Stations (PRS):

a. Individual (local) PRS for each drop leg off seal water header to individual pumps.

b. See Drawings for system components and arrangements. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


2.4 FABRICATION

A. Pump Support: 1. Design base to support weight of drive, shafting and pump. 2. Comply with HI vibration limitations. 3. Mount horizontal pump, motor and coupling on single piece drip lip type baseplate. 4. Mount vertical pumps on single piece pedestal baseplate. 5. Fabricate to withstand all operating loads transmitted from the pump and drive.


A. If specifically required in the individual pump specification sections, provide factory tests: 1. All units:

a. Hydrostatic test at 150 percent of shutoff head for a minimum of 5 minutes. 2. Adjustable speed units:

a. Head (FT) verses flow (gpm) pump curves: 1) Maximum, minimum and two equally spaced intermittent speeds. 2) Efficiencies along each curve. 3) Brake horsepower along each curve.

3. Constant speed units: a. Head (FT) versus flow (gpm) pump curves:

1) Efficiencies along curve. 2) Brake horsepower along each curve.

4. Results certified by a registered professional engineer.

B. Statically and dynamically balance each pump per HI standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Floor or Pad-Mounted Units (Non-Submersible): 1. Align vertically and horizontally level, wedge and plumb units to match piping

interfaces. 2. Assure no unnecessary stresses are transmitted to equipment flanges. 3. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate and manufacturer's recommended torque for

uniform gasket compression. 4. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over entire face area prior to

bolting pipe flange and equipment. 5. Permit piping connecting to equipment to freely move in directions parallel to

longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flange are tightened. 6. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not before initial fitting

and alignment. 7. Assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four bolts per

joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange with equipment connecting flange. Realign as necessary, install flange bolts and make equipment connection.

8. Field paint units as defined in Section 09905. 9. Provide pressure gage on discharge of all pumps and on suction and discharge of

all non-submersible units.

C. Submersible Units: 1. Comply with requirements defined in paragraphs 3.1-B.7, 8, and 9.




A. Provide services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 2. Supervise pre-start adjustments and installation checks. 3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed

properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for the specified minimum number of hours at jobsite per

Section 01060 on operation and maintenance of each of following pumping equipment: a. Section 11061 - Pumping Equipment: Non-Clog Centrifugal, 8 HRS. b. Section 11065 - Pumping Equipment: Sump, 4 HRS. c. Section 11072 - Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine, 8 HRS. d. Section 15605 - HVAC: Equipment, 4 HRS.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11065 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: SUMP

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Submersible type sump pumps. (SP-101, SP-102)

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11060 - Pumping Equipment: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

a. Steel Products Manual. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. See Section 11060. 3. Product technical data including:



B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Submersible type sump pumps:

a. Little Giant Pump Co. b. Fairbanks - Morse. c. Wilson - Snyder. d. Chicago Pump. e. Paco. f. Weil.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sump Pumps (SP-101, SP-102): 1. Pump casing:

a. Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 35A. 2. Impeller:

a. Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 35A. 3. Shaft:

a. AISI carbon steel. 4. Strainer:

a. Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 35A. 5. Mechanical Seal:

a. Carbon and ceramic faces. b. Stainless steel spring holder. c. Nitrile parts.

6. Packing: Non-asbestos. 7. 10 ft stainless steel lifting chain.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Performance and Configuration Requirements: 1. Sump Pumps (SP-101, SP-102):

a. Design condition: 40 gpm at 30 FT TDH. b. Secondary design condition: 60 gpm at 20 FT TDH. c. Shutoff condition: 50 FT. d. Maximum pump speed: 3450 rpm. e. Nameplate driver horsepower: 1/2 HP. f. Drive type: Constant speed. g. Drive configuration: Direct coupled 120 V, 60 Hz, single phase with 20 ft power

cord. h. Minimum solids passage: 3/4 IN.

2.4 ACCESSORIES


B. Controls: 1. Duplex pump control and alarm system. 2. Provide alternator. 3. Visual and audible alarm with silence switch. 4. 3 gas-tight floats:

a) High water “ALARM”. b) Pump “ON”. c) Pump “OFF”. d) 20 FT power cords.

5. NEMA 4X Enclosure with “HAND/OFF/AUTO” switch. 6. Provide dry contact for remote indication of high level alarm.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Pump casing uniform and free from blowholes or other defects and designed to

withstand 150 percent of shutoff head. 2. Equipped with bolted-on strainer with opening equal to specified solids passage of

pump.


B. Suction and Discharge: 1. Threaded NPT connections of the following diameters:

SERVICE CATEGORY

SUCTION (IN) DISCHARGE (IN)

Sump Pumps N/A 2

C. Impeller: 1. Dynamically balanced two-vane non-clog impeller with pump-out vanes. 2. Key to pump shafts with same material as shaft. 3. UL Listed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements of Section 11060.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 11072 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: VERTICAL TURBINE (LINE SHAFT)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vertical turbine pumps.(P-301, P-302, P-303, P-201, P-202)

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 11060 - Pump Equipment: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements. 6. Section 16265 – Variable Frequency Drives.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):

a. B16.1, Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800.

3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated

Welded and Seamless. c. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard

Quality. d. A120, Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and

Seamless for Ordinary Uses. e. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. f. B505, Standard Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous Castings. g. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications. 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. E101, Deep Well Vertical Turbine Pumps - Line Shaft Type. 5. Hydraulic Institute (HI). 6. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:


1. See Section 01062

B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Special Conditions.


A. Performance Parameters: 1. P-301, P-302, P-303:

a. Primary design condition: 5 MGD @ 175 ft and 81% efficiency b. Secondary design condition: 7.6 MGD @ 100 ft and 75% efficiency c. Maximum speed: 1200 rpm d. Maximum horsepower: 200 hp e. Minimum shutoff condition: 275 ft at 0 gpm f. Column size: 14 inch g. Discharge flange: 14 inch h. Suction flange: 20 inch i. Drive type: Variable frequency drive

2. P-201, P-202 a. Primary design condition: 9.4 MGD @ 83 ft and 83% efficiency b. Secondary design condition: 13 MGD @ 53 ft and 76% efficiency c. Maximum speed: 1200 rpm d. Maximum horsepower: 200 hp e. Minimum shutoff condition: 130 ft at 0 gpm f. Column size: 16 inch g. Discharge flange: 16 inch h. Suction flange: 30 inch i. Drive type: Variable frequency drive

B. Provide pumps with increasing head characteristics from secondary design conditions to shutoff condition.

C. Provide pumps with net positive suction head requirements (NPSHR) less than the net positive suction head available (NPSHA) at all operating conditions.

1. NPSHA: 30 FT

D. Provide pumps suspended into a pump suction can as shown on Drawings.

1. P-301, P-302, & P303 suction cans shall be 30 inch diameter.

2. P-201, P-202 suction cans shall be 42” diameter.

E. All pumps to have discharge head shown on Drawings.

1. Centerline elevation of inlet pipe to pump suction shall be as shown on Drawings.

2. Depth of can below the inlet pipe connection shall be as recommended by pump manufacturer.

F. Ensure adjustable speed pump operation in a stepless fashion over full operating range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. See Sections 11005 and 13440.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. General: 1. Furnish units consisting of a vertical shaft turbine, direct connected to a vertical

hollow shaft motor. Design unit with non-reversing ratchets. 2. Weight of revolving parts of pump including unbalanced hydraulic thrust of impeller

is carried by thrust bearing in driver. 3. Make provision at driver shaft for adjusting impeller with reference to bowls.


B. Column: 1. Construct discharge column pipe of steel and supply with threaded connections. 2. Provide top and bottom sections of column pipes to 5 FT lengths. 3. Provide intermediate column sections not exceeding 5 FT in length. 4. Sandblast column and coat with a minimum 15 mils dry film thickness epoxy system

at the factory. 5. Provide coating equal to that recommended by Tnemec or Koppers and approved

for use with potable water.

C. Open Line Shaft: 1. 416 stainless steel, rolled and ground. 2. Maximum length: 5 FT. 3. Furnish renewable shaft sleeves constructed from 416 stainless steel at each

bearing location. 4. Undercutting of shafting at sleeve locations is not permitted. 5. Provide rubber bearings at each column connection supported by retainers butted

between machined faces of discharge column. 6. Provide line shaft prelubrication system to water lubricate line shaft bearings prior to

pump startup.

D. Pump Bowl and Suction Bell: 1. Provide bowl and suction bell constructed of close grained cast iron, free from

imperfections and accurately machined and fitted. 2. Coat pump bowl water passages with an abrasion-resistant baked enamel, phenolic

or epoxy. 3. Provide coating suitable for potable water service. 4. Design to ensure easy removal of bearings and impeller. 5. Furnish suction bell with flared end to reduce entrance losses and with a sufficient

number of vanes to support lower guide bearings and weight of impeller and pump shaft when dismantling pump.

E. Bearings: 1. Provide units with sleeve bearings of bronze in each bowl and in suction bell. 2. In bowl, provide main bronze bearing immediately above impeller and a lower

bronze bearing immediately below impeller. 3. Provide for lubrication of bowl bearings with pumped liquid. 4. Furnish suction bell bearing having minimum length equal to five shaft diameters. 5. Ensure bell bearing is permanently packed type with packing to be a nonsoluble

grease. 6. Provide bronze collar for bell bearing to prevent abrasives from entering bearing.

F. Pump Shaft and Impeller: 1. Provide pump unit shaft constructed of rolled and ground 416 or 410 stainless steel. 2. Furnish enclosed type impellers constructed of bronze and securely attached to

impeller shaft. 3. Ensure impeller is accurately fitted and statically and dynamically balanced. 4. Provide bronze or cast iron replacement wear rings in each bowl to prevent wear on

bowls.

G. Discharge Head Assemblies: 1. Design discharge head assembly for 150 psi working pressure and 250 psi test

pressure. 2. Provide discharge head for above ground mounting constructed of fabricated steel

with integral discharge flange. 3. Construct discharge nozzle with a vertical vane to minimize turbulence. 4. Furnish ANSI B16.1 125/150 LB flange. 5. Mount discharge head on fabricated steel base plate which is of sufficient size to

span opening in support structure.


6. Supply base plate with lifting lugs capable of supporting weight of entire unit. 7. Weld flange to column pipe at specified elevation. 8. Provide mechanical seal. See Section 11060 for materials and acceptable

manufacturers.

H. Suction Strainer: 1. Supply basket type strainer constructed of galvanized steel with net open area of not

less than four times the throat area of the suction bell. 2. Maximum opening shall not be more than 75 percent of the minimum opening of the

water passage through the bowls and impellers.

I. Data Plates: 1. Provide stainless steel data plate securely attached to pump. 2. Include manufacturer's name, pump size and type, serial number, speed, impeller

diameter, capacity and head rating, and other pertinent data.

J. Pump Can:

1. Construct pump suction can of steel with flanged connections for pump monitoring and for inlet pipe.

2. Paint interior and exterior of pump suction can in accordance with Section 09905.

3. Pump suction can shall have minimum wall thickness of (1/4) inch and shall be capable of handling an internal pressure of 40 psi.

4. Provide vanes on inside of pump can to prevent vortexing as recommended by pump manufacturer.

K. Motors: 1. Supply motors of the vertical hollow shaft, squirrel cage, induction type. Motors

shall be inverter duty type. 2. 460 V, 60 HZ, 3 PH. 3. Open dripproof type with 1.0 service factor. 4. Size motor to drive pump continuously over the complete head - capacity range

without the load exceeding the nameplate rating. 5. Design motor for 40 DegC ambient. 6. Comply with Section 11005. 7. Coordinate installation with VFD per Section 16265.


A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish the Owner the following extra parts for each pump service category:

a. Lower bearing assembly: One set. b. Upper bowl bearing: One set. c. Line shaft bearing assemblies: One set. d. Lantern ring: One. e. Wearing rings: One set. f. Mechanical seals: One set.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering




B. Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer’s field service representative(s) to:

1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications

2. Supervise pre-startup adjustments and installation checks.

3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks.

4. Conduct field performance test at four points on pump curve from shutoff head to system operating head. Submit results to Engineer.

5. Provide Owner written statement that manufacturer’s equipment has been installed properly, started up and is ready for operation.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. See Section 01650

B. Personnel Training:

1. Provide minimum 8 hrs of the manufacturer’s factory technical representative’s time for on-site training of the Owner’s personnel.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11076 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: SUBMERSIBLE NON-CLOG

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Submersible non-clog pumps - wet pit application.

a. Foundation drain pump station (P101, P102)

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 11060 - Pumping Equipment: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

a. Steel Products Manual. 3. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 4. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 5. FM Global (FM). 6. Hydraulic Institute (HI):

a. Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps. 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 8. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 9. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).


A. Foundation drain pumps utilizing wet well level control.

B. Provide single source coordination responsibility through the pump manufacturer for the entire system including but not limited to the following: 1. Pumps. 2. Motors. 3. Pump removal, rail system, and connection base. 4. Control panel. 5. Level control switches.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. Requirements in Section 11060. 3. Source quality control test reports. 4. For soft start and variable speed applications, submit:

a. Critical speed and half critical speed data for each pump model.


b. Certification that the pump manufacturer is bearing coordination responsibility for the pump(s) and VFD(s) and soft starter(s) for their specific application to avoid overheating and harmonic vibrations caused by rotational speed and carrier-frequency-induced rotational "cogging".

c. Certified statement signed by a registered professional engineer that the ABMA L-10 bearing lives meet or exceed the specified requirements.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Submersible non-clog pumps - wet pit applications:

a. Flygt.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wet Pit Applications P101, P102: 1. Pump case: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30. 2. Motor housing: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30. 3. Impeller: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30. 4. Shaft:

a. Stainless steel, ANSI, Series 300 or 400. b. Carbon steel C1035 is acceptable if not contacting pumped fluid.

5. Wear rings: Corrosion and wear resistant materials. 6. O-rings: Nitrile (Buna-N) or fluorocarbon (Viton). 7. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 8. Guide rails: Stainless steel. 9. Lifting chains and cables: Stainless steel. 10. Lower ring seal: Tungsten-carbide both faces. 11. Upper ring seal: Tungsten-carbide both faces or carbon and ceramic or carbon and

Ni-resist. 12. Seal metal parts: Stainless steel.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Performance and Configuration Requirements: 1. Foundation Drain Pumps (P101, P102):

a. Design condition: 55 gpm at 35 FT TDH with minimum pump efficiency of 26 percent.

b. Secondary condition: 105 gpm at 24 FT TDH with minimum pump efficiency of 28 percent.

c. Maximum shutoff condition: 0 gpm at 65 FT. d. Minimum shutoff condition: 0 gpm at 50 FT. e. Pump configuration:

1) Submersible wet pit. 2) Clockwise rotation when viewed from the driver end.

f. Maximum pump speed: 3500 rpm. g. Nameplate driver horsepower: 2 HP. h. Drive type: Constant speed.


i. Discharge: 2 IN DIA. j. Motor requirements:

1) Service factor: 1.15. 2) Minimum motor efficiency: 75 percent.

k. Ambient conditions: 1) Wastewater maximum temperature: 80 DegF. 2) Air maximum temperature: 100 DegF.

l. NPSH available: 24.5 FT.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. General: 1. Provide pumps capable of handling moderate grit. 2. Where watertight sealing is required, machine and fit mating surfaces with O-rings. 3. Provide with heavy duty lift lugs or hoisting bail designed for lifting the entire pump

and motor assembly.

B. Impeller: 1. Provide nonclog-type dynamically balanced impeller in accordance with HI

standards. 2. Provide impeller and volute wear rings as necessary to assure efficient sealing

between volute and impeller.

C. Shaft: 1. Design pump shaft of sufficient size to transmit full driver output. 2. Use shaft which is accurately machined and constructed with sufficient materials. 3. Design shaft for a maximum deflection of 0.002 IN measured at the stuffing box.

D. Shaft Seal: 1. Seal shaft with double mechanical seal running in an oil filled chamber. 2. Provide seals requiring neither routine maintenance nor adjustment, but capable of

being easily inspected and replaced. 3. Hold interface in contact by its own spring system.

E. Bearings: 1. Support shaft on upper and lower permanently lubricated bearings with a minimum

ABMA L-10 life of 40,000 HRS.

F. Motors: 1. Provide pump with FM or UL listed motor designed for area classification shown on

Drawings. 2. Provide motor of totally submersible design, constructed with epoxy or poly-seal

encapsulated windings, air-filled or dielectric oil filled, with Class F insulation and rated for continuous duty operation.

3. Motor shall be 3 PH, 60 cycle, 480 V. 4. Assure motor is capable of running dry for extended periods without damage to

motor or seal.

G. Power and Control Cables: 1. Provide power cable and control cable to pump suitable for submersible applications

and indicate same by a code or legend permanently embossed on cables. 2. Size cables in accordance with applicable NEC specifications. 3. Provide power cable and control cable. Length as required to route cable to control

panel located in the Pump Station Electrical Room as shown on the Drawings. 4. Provide each cable with a strain relief, and cord grip.

H. Temperature Monitor: 1. Furnish each phase of the motor with a temperature monitor embedded in the motor

windings.


2. Arrange controls so as to shut the pump down and sound alarm should any one of the monitors detect high temperature with manual reset once the stator temperature returns to normal.

3. Set temperature of the temperature monitors at not higher than 90 percent of insulation temperature rating.

I. Coatings: 1. For wet pit applications, apply polyamidoamine epoxy system to the exterior of the

pump casing and motor housing that is equal to or better than that specified in Specification Section 09905.

2. Protect all metallic surfaces coming into contact with sewage except stainless steel and bronze by a corrosion-resistant coating.

J. Wet Pit Applications: 1. Provide sliding guide bracket integral to pump unit which properly aligns the pump

discharge with the discharge connection elbow for watertight seal during pumping. 2. Guide the entire weight of the pumping unit by guide rail(s). 3. The guide rail(s) shall not support any portion of the weight of the pump. 4. Provide chains or cable of sufficient strength to lift pumps from sump. 5. Furnish guiding rail assembly and the discharge flange assembly of nonsparking

components. 6. Design pump to allow for removal without entering the wet well and without removal

of bolts, nuts or other fastenings. 7. Provide pump unit connecting to discharge connection with a simple downward

motion without rotation. 8. Provide necessary sliding guide bracket and discharge connection which, when

bolted to the floor of the sump and to the discharge line, will receive the pump discharge connecting flange without need of adjustment, fasteners, clamp, or similar devices.

9. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the floor or the wet well.

2.5 ACCESSORIES


B. Controls: 1. Provide four sealed float-type mercury switches to control pumps and provide alarm

signal. 2. Seal mercury tube switches in a solid polypropylene float. 3. Provide float with large radius top at electrical cable connection to assure trouble-

free operation. 4. Suspend floats on their own cable. 5. Provide floats to operate at elevation shown on Drawings. 6. Design floats to be field-adjustable. 7. Three floats are to control pumps: One for lead pump start, one for lag pump start

and one for low water cutoff. An additional switch provides the signal for high level alarm.

C. Control Panel: 1. Furnish and install locally mounted automatic control panel at location shown on

Drawings. 2. A single main incoming power circuit shall be protected with a thermal magnetic

circuit breaker. Limit load to maximum of 80 percent of circuit breaker rating. Incoming power supply rated for 480 Volts 3 phase, 60 Hz.

3. Include combination circuit breaker type controller with short circuit, overload, and three overload relays, interior-mounted motor starter(s), and transformer with disconnect and overload protection for control circuit of 24 V.

4. Include a terminal board for connection of level sensors.


5. Provide the following features: a. NEMA 12 enclosure with locking mechanism complete with padlock. b. Hand-Off-Automatic selector switches. c. Automatic alternator. d. High level alarm with silence, alarm horn, and alarm light. e. Pump running lights. f. Elapsed time meters. g. Overload reset button to reset overload relays. h. Pump sequence selector switch which overrides automatic alternator. i. Lightning protection. j. Condensation heater. k. Power ON control relay. l. Power OFF control relay. m. Provide dry contact for remote indication of level high alarm. n. Wall mounting.

D. Access Doors and Frames: 1. Furnish and install single hinged door constructed of aluminum. 2. Furnish size shown on Drawings. 3. Equip with nonsparking upper guide rail support, float bracket, and flush locking

mechanism. 4. Door shall be able to remain in open position while work is being performed. 5. Securely place frame above pump(s). 6. Provide doors of skidproof design. 7. Provide doors with snap locks and removable handle. 8. Provide door hardware including latching mechanism and hinges of stainless steel

materials.

E. Winch: 1. Secure a manually operated, cable-type winch capable of lifting the pumps. 2. Provide winch with a fabricated steel support frame and with a minimum capacity of

1.5 times pump weight. 3. Fit cable end with a grab hook to properly link up with the lifting chain.


A. Secure from the pump manufacturer the following inspections and tests on each pump before shipment from factory: 1. Check impeller, motor rating and electrical connections for compliance with

Specification. 2. Test motor and cable insulation for moisture content or insulation defects. 3. Prior to submergence, run pump dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical

integrity. 4. Run pump for 30 minutes submerged, a minimum of 6 FT under water. 5. After operational test #4, perform insulation test (#2) again.

B. Factory test of head (FT) versus flow (gpm) for one pump of each service category as specified in Section 11060.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. For wet pit pumps, permanently install discharge connection elbow in wet well along with discharge piping.


C. Seal pump cable end with a high quality protective covering, to make it impervious to moisture or water seepage prior to electrical installation.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 13219 HYDROPNEUMATIC SURGE TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Two hydropneumatic bladder type surge tanks. 2. Miscellaneous instruments and valves.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 4. The Society for Protective Coatings/National Association of Corrosion Engineers

(SSPC/NACE): a. SSPC SP-5/NACE No. 1, White Metal Blast Cleaning. b. SSPC SP-6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The surge control system manufacturer shall provide the following submittals as a minimum:

1. Shop Drawings. a. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.

1) Show all taps, location of control equipment, supports and other appurtenant devices. a) Drawings shall include dimensions and cross sectional views of all

equipment showing detail of construction and tank weight. 2) Instrumentation description sheets verifying controls as specified herein:

level gage and air pressure gage. 3) Source quality control test reports.

2. O & M Manuals: a. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.

1.4 PERFORMANCE AND SURGE ANALYSIS

A. Surge tanks shall be designed to limit maximum pressure increase in the piping systems due to surge wave to less than the total pressure specified and to limit the minimum system pressures so that no liquid column separation occurs. 1. The tank shall be designed to protect the systems at the flow rate specified. 2. Surge tank performance will be verified by field tests at pumping rates determined

by Owner, but will not exceed rates defined above for piping system. 3. Surge tank level gage shall be monitored and recorded during pump trips as

directed by the Owner to verify level changes. Level changes shall be corresponded with predicted values from model.


B. The manufacturer shall conduct a surge analysis of the pumping station and piping system, utilizing the specified data. 1. Results of the analysis shall clearly indicate that the design and size of the tank

provided will adequately protect the system from excessive pressure surges, and shall show that the system will meet the performance guarantees outlined in Article 1.7.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Tank Supplier: Provide a minimum of five (5) references for a comparable installation.

B. Tank Welders: ASME certified.

1.6 SYSTEM GUARANTEE

A. The surge tank supplier shall guarantee that the performance of the equipment will meet the specified requirements, and that a safe operating system will result.

1. This guarantee will be in the form of a letter supplemented by the results from the pump trip test showing compliance with these specifications.

2. The letter shall be issued by the surge tank supplier, who will undertake unit responsibility, and not from any individual component manufacturer whose material has been supplied as a part of the system.

3. The guarantee letter and results from the pump trip test shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall be the sole responsibility of the surge tank supplier.

1.7 FIRST ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION

A. All work shall be guaranteed for a minimum of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance.

1. This guarantee shall be provided for in the Contractor’s performance bond or a separate maintenance bond.

2. The Contractor shall be present for the one year evaluation and shall furnish an experienced foreman, rigging, and assistance for the evaluation.

3. Repairs requiring extensive work and rigging may be delayed until a time mutually agreeable to the Owner and Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surge Tanks: 1. See Section 01062


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Tank: 1. Provide an ASME stamp for a working pressure and maximum design pressure. 2. The surge tank shall be of all welded steel construction, ASTM A36, built in

accordance with and meeting all the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Division 1, Section VIII for “Unfired Pressure Vessels”. a. Spot Radiography shall be provided as a minimum.

3. The tank shall be code stamped and code inspected. 4. All seams shall be double-welded butt joints.

B. Tank sizing: Final tank sizing shall be based on manufactures surge analysis.

C. Bladder: 1. Butyl rubber.


2. Size to conform to the inner shape of the tank.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Performance and Configuration Requirements: 1. Surge Tank ST-301:

a. Provide one 75 IN DIA horizontal tank with a minimum nominal capacity (full) of 3,170 GAL.

b. Pipeline diameter: 24 IN. c. Operating pressure: 130 psi.

1) No reactive load permitted through the inlet/outlet piping. d. Maximum pressure: 150 psi. e. Minimum Pressure: 0 psi. f. System flow rate: 12 MGD.

B. Nozzles/Manholes: 1. Surge Tank ST- 301:

a. One 150 LB ANSI flanged 16 IN water inlet/outlet with anti anti-extrusion grid. b. One 150 LB ANSI flanged 2-IN water drain. c. One 1/2 IN NPT gas charging valve/pressure gage. d. One 1/2 IN NPT purge valve for draining air side. e. Two 1/2 IN NPT access ports one on air side and one on water side for level

gage. f. One 20 IN end manhole with hinge and davit. g. One 1/2 IN NPT on water side for ASME relief valve.

C. Relief Valve: 1. An ASME safety pressure relief valve shall be installed on the water side and shall

be set at 10% above the operating pressure (143 psi).

D. Leg Extensions: 1. Tank manufacturer to provide leg extensions as required to position outlet piping as

shown on project plans.

2.4 LININGS/COATING

A. The surge tank shall be coated with protective coatings prior to being shipped to the job site. 1. This shall be the responsibility of the surge control tank supplier.

B. The interior surfaces of the surge tank shall be sandblasted to SSPC SP-5/NACE No. 1 (near white finish) after the completion of fabrication. 1. This surface finish quality will allow proper adhesion of the surface corrosion

protection coating.

C. All interior surfaces shall then receive a coating of Amercoat® 78 HB or manufacturer’s standard equivalent epoxy to a minimum dry film thickness of 8 mils. 1. The coating manufacturer's recommended application methods shall be used to

apply the coating.

D. The exterior surfaces of the surge arrestor vessel shall be sandblasted to SSPC SP-6/NACE No. 3 (commercial blast finish) after the completion of fabrication. 1. This surface finish quality will allow proper adhesion of the surface corrosion

protection coating.

E. All exterior surfaces shall then receive a coating of industrial red oxide primer, equal to Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II, to a minimum dry thickness of 4 mils. 1. The coating manufacturer's recommended application methods shall be used to

apply the coating. 2. Finish coating of the surge arrestor vessel shall be done by the Contractor at the job

site.


3. Alternatively, the manufacturer may apply their standard anti-corrosion polyurethane or epoxy coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils.

2.5 DISINFECTION 1. Jet wash the interior of the tank with a chlorine solution of 300 PPM to 500 PPM.

a. Use a chlorine product free of acid components. b. Provide the mixing water and remove the chlorine solution that accumulates in

the bottom of the tank the same workday it is applied. c. Rinsing with water is not required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Cast anchor bolts in concrete foundation as embedded items. 1. Use rigid template for each set of bolts.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install the surge tank to include, all necessary piping, valves, level gauge equipment and other related appurtenances including leg support extensions.

C. Surge tank shall be installed in accordance with manufactures recommendations.


A. Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 2. Supervise any adjustments and installation checks. 3. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 4. Provide Owner, through the Contractor, with a written statement that manufacturer's

equipment has been installed properly, started up, and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel.

5. Instruct Owner's personnel for a minimum of eight (8) hours at jobsite per Section 01060 on operation and maintenance of the piece of equipment.

3.3 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13440 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS CONTROL: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Basic requirements for complete instrumentation system for process control.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 10400 - Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging Systems. 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 6. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable - 600 Volt and Below.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. International Society for Measurement and Control (ISA):

a. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. b. S5.2, Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations. c. S5.3, Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation,

Logic and Computer Systems. d. S5.4, Standard Instrument Loop Diagrams. e. S20, Standard Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control

Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. f. RP7.1-56, Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test.

2. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

B. Miscellaneous: 1. Comply with electrical classifications and NEMA enclosure types shown on

Drawings.

C. Qualifications: 1. Instrumentation subcontractor:

a. Experience. 1) Have satisfactorily provided a control system for a minimum of five projects

of similar magnitude and function.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Instrument Air Header: The segment of air supply piping and tubing which transports air from the compressed instrument air source through the branch isolation valve of any takeoff (branch) line.

B. Branch Line: The segment of air supply piping and tubing which transports air from the outlet of the air header branch isolation valve through an air user's isolation valve.

C. Calibrate: To standardize a device so that it provides a specified response to known inputs.




A. Control System Requirements: 1. This Specification Section 13440 provides the general requirements for the

instrument and control system. 2. The instrument and control system consists of all primary elements, transmitters,

switches, controllers, computers, recorders, indicators, panels, signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special or shielded cable, special grounding or isolation, auxiliaries, software, wiring, and other devices required to provide complete control of the plant as specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Unless otherwise required for instrument compatibility, electric control signals shall be 4 to 20 mA, 24 V DC and pneumatic signals shall be 3 to 15 psi.

C. All signals shall be directly linearly proportional to measured variable unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Single Instrumentation Subcontractor: 1. Furnish and coordinate instrumentation system through a single instrumentation

subcontractor. The instrumentation subcontractor shall be responsible for functional operations of all systems, performance of control system engineering, supervision of installation, final connections, calibrations, preparation of drawings and operation and maintenance manuals, startup, training, demonstration of substantial completion and all other aspects of the control system.

2. Ensure coordination of instrumentation with other work to ensure that necessary wiring, conduits, contacts, relays, converters, and incidentals are provided in order to transmit, receive, and control necessary signals to other control elements, to control panels, and to receiving stations.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Submittals shall be original printed material or clear unblemished photocopies of

original printed material. Facsimile information is not acceptable. 3. Product technical data including:


b. Equipment catalog cut sheets. c. Instrument data sheets:

1) ISA S20 or approved equal. 2) Separate data sheet for each instrument.

d. Materials of construction. e. Minimum and maximum flow ranges. f. Pressure loss curves. g. Physical limits of components including temperature and pressure limits. h. Size and weight. i. Electrical power requirements and wiring diagrams. j. NEMA rating of housings. k. Submittals shall be marked with arrows to show exact features to be provided.

4. Loop diagrams per ISA S5.4. a. Each loop diagram on a separate sheet. b. Each sheet shall contain the following minimum information.

1) All loop devices clearly identified.


2) Identification of the loop and each loop component, including connections to such things as recorders and computers. Numbering and tagging must agree with the P&ID.

3) All interconnections with identifying numbers for: a) Electrical cables. b) Conductor pairs. c) Pneumatic or hydraulic tubing.

4) Identification of connections including: a) Junction boxes. b) Terminals. c) Bulkheads. d) Ports. e) Computer input/output connections. f) Grounding systems.

5) Signal levels and ranges. 6) Device location. 7) Energy sources designating voltage, pressure, and other applicable

requirements. 8) Enough process lines and equipment to clearly show the process side of the

loop and provide clarity of control action. This includes: a) What is being measured. b) What is being controlled. c) Other information required to complete the process loop.

9) Reference to supplementary records and drawings to show inter-relation to other control loops.

10) Controller action. 11) Control valve action upon electronic, hydraulic, or pneumatic failure.

5. Process connected instrument installation details containing the following minimum information: a. Bill of materials providing as a minimum the following information:

1) Tube material and size. 2) Connection size. 3) Fitting size, material, and rating. 4) Valve type and material. 5) Instrument description. 6) Pipe stand size and material.

b. Tube slope requirements. c. Required elevations and dimensions.

6. Comprehensive set of point-to-point wiring diagrams showing all interconnections between packaged systems or equipment control panels, motor control centers, instrumentation and all other electrical equipment as required to depict a complete and functional electrical control system. Instrumentation wiring already shown on loop diagrams need not be included on point-to-point wiring diagrams. a. Diagrams shall provide the following minimum information:

1) Terminal block identification (includes terminals on remote equipment furnished by Others).

2) Wire size. 3) Wire type. 4) Wire color. 5) Wire shielding and insulation type. 6) Conductor quantities and associated conduit size. 7) Ground points. 8) Interconnection requirements to existing systems or equipment furnished by

Others. b. Diagrams shall be provided on Drawings of sufficient size so as to minimize the

number of drawings.


1) Maximum drawing size 24 x 36. 2) Minimum drawing size: 11 x 17 IN.

7. Electrical schematic control diagrams. Diagrams shall include: a. Terminal identification. b. Unique identification of all control devices and contacts.

1) Utilize Owner's device identification numbers where applicable. c. Wire identification. d. Equipment identification. e. Indication of remote and local devices and wiring. f. Overcurrent protection indication. g. Voltage. h. All control logic.

8. Panel fabrication drawings. 9. PLC/DCS equipment drawings. 10. Graphic layouts. 11. Graphic component construction. 12. Nameplate layout drawings. 13. Drawings, systems, and other elements are represented schematically in

accordance with ISA S5.1 and S5.3. The nomenclature, tag numbers, equipment numbers, panel numbers, and related series identification contained in the Contract Documents shall be employed exclusively throughout submittals.

14. Certifications: a. Documentation verifying that calibration equipment is certified with NIST

traceability. b. Approvals from independent testing laboratories or approval agencies, such as

UL, FM or CSA. Certification documentation is required for all equipment for which the specifications require independent agency approval.

15. Testing reports: a. Source quality control reports.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Warranties: Provide copies of warranties and list of factory authorized service

agents.


A. Do not remove shipping blocks, plugs, caps, and desiccant dryers installed to protect the instrumentation during shipment until the instruments are installed and permanent connections are made.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. System Operating Criteria: 1. Stability: After controls have taken corrective action, as result of a change in the

controlled variable or a change in setpoint, oscillation of final control element shall not exceed two cycles per minute or a magnitude of movement of 0.5 percent full travel.

2. Response: Any change in setpoint or change in controlled variable shall produce a corresponding corrective change in position of final control element and become stabilized within 30 seconds.

3. Agreement: Setpoint indication of controlled variable and measured indication of controlled variable shall agree within 3 percent of full scale over a 6:1 operating range.


4. Repeatability: For any repeated magnitude of control signal, from either an increasing or decreasing direction, the final control element shall take a repeated position within 0.5 percent of full travel regardless of force required to position final element.

5. Sensitivity: Controls shall respond to setpoint deviations and measured variable deviations within 1.0 percent of full scale.

6. Performance: All instruments and control devices shall perform in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide instruments with manufacturer's identification nameplate showing: 1. Manufacturer's model number. 2. Manufacturer's serial number. 3. Range.

a. Utilize the same units of measurement as are utilized in the Contract Documents.

4. Power supply requirement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use bottom entry for all conduit entry to instruments and junction boxes.

B. Install electrical components per Division 16.

C. Panel-Mounted Instruments: 1. Mount and wire so removal or replacement may be accomplished without

interruption of service to adjacent devices. 2. Locate all devices mounted inside enclosures so terminals and adjustment devices

are readily accessible without use of special tools and with terminal markings clearly visible.

D. See Section 16120.



B. Maintain accurate daily log of all startup activities, calibration functions, and final setpoint adjustments. 1. Documentation requirements include the utilization of the forms located at the end of

this Section. a. Loop Checkout Sheet. b. Instrument Certification Sheet. c. Final Control Element Certification Sheet.

C. In the event that instrument air is not available during calibration and testing, supply either filtered, dry, instrument quality air from a portable compressor or bottled, dry, instrument quality air. Do not, under any circumstances, apply hydrostatic test to any part of the air supply system or pneumatic control system.

D. Pneumatic Signal Tubing Testing: 1. Before the leak test is begun, blow clean with dry air. 2. Test signal tubing per ISA RP7.1, except for tubing runs of less than 10 FT where

simple soap bubble testing will suffice. 3. If a leak is detected, repair the leak and repeat the leak test. 4. After completion of the leak test, check each signal line for obstructions. If any are

indicated, remove and retest.


E. Instrumentation Calibration: 1. Verify that all instruments and control devices are calibrated to provide the

performance required by the Contract Documents. 2. Calibrate all field-mounted instruments, other than local pressure and temperature

gages, after the device is mounted in place to assure proper installed operation. 3. Calibrate in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 4. Bench calibrate pressure and temperature gages. Field mount gage within 1 day of

calibration. 5. Check the calibration of each transmitter and gage across its specified range at 0,

25, 50, 75, and 100 percent. Check for both increasing and decreasing input signals to detect hysteresis.

6. Replace any instrument which cannot be properly adjusted. 7. Stroke control valves with clean dry air to verify control action, positioner settings,

and solenoid functions. 8. Mark range, date, setpoint and calibrator's initials on each instrument by means of

blue or black ink on a waterproof tag affixed to the instrument. 9. Calibration equipment shall be certified by an independent agency with traceability

to NIST. Certification shall be up-to-date. Use of equipment with expired certifications shall not be permitted.

10. Calibration equipment shall be at least three times more accurate as the device being calibrated.

F. Loop checkout requirements are as follows: 1. Check control signal generation, transmission, reception and response for all control

loops under simulated operating conditions by imposing a signal on the loop at the instrument connections. Use actual signals where available. Closely observe controllers, recorders, alarm and trip units, remote setpoints, ratio systems, and other control components. Make corrections as required. Following any corrections, retest the loop as before.

2. Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the local control station and from the control room operator interface.

3. Check all interlocks to the maximum extent possible. 4. In addition to any other as-recorded documents, record all setpoint and calibration

changes on all affected Contract Documents and turn over to the Owner.

G. Provide verification of system assembly, power, ground, and I/O tests.

H. Verify existence and measure adequacy of all grounds required for instrumentation and controls.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13441 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Instrumentation control loops.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements.




A. The control loop descriptions provide the functional requirements of the control loops represented in the Contract Documents. Descriptions are provided as follows: 1. Control system overview and general description 2. Major equipment to be controlled 3. Major field mounted instruments (does not include local gages) 4. Manual control functions 5. Automatic control functions/interlocks 6. Major indications provided at local control panels and motor starters/VFD's 7. Remote indications and alarms

B. The control loop descriptions are not intended to be an inclusive listing of all elements and appurtenances required to execute loop functions, but are rather intended to supplement and complement the drawings and other specification sections. The control loop descriptions shall not be considered equal to a bill of materials.

C. Provide instrumentation hardware and software as necessary to perform control functions specified herein and shown on drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Secure from instrumentation subcontractor and include with submittals control loop descriptions for each loop in system. Ensure that tag numbers cross reference with loop diagrams and tag numbers shown on instrument specification forms. Where tag numbers are not assigned, the control integrator shall assign tag numbers. Describe each element and include appropriate tag number in parenthesis. When additional elements are necessary, use and assign tag number not in conflict with others and in accordance with ISA procedures.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTROL LOOPS

A. Pump Station 1. Equipment

a. Vertical Turbine Pumps (P201, P202, P301, P302, P303) b. Motor Operated Valves (V102, V105) c. Pump Control Valves (V120, V121, V122, V123, V124) d. Valve (V131) e. Flow transmitters (FIT-201, FIT-301) f. Pressure transmitters (PIT-201, PIT-301) g. Existing Tank Level Transmitter

2. Control System Overview

a. Vertical Turbine Pumps

1) Zone 2 Pump Control, (P-201, P-202)

a) Control Description:

(1) P-201 and P-202 (Zone 2 pumps) shall operate based on water surface elevations in the Zone 2 tanks.

(2) When the water surface elevation decreases to 5435 ft, either P-201 or P-202 is started.

(3) When the water surface elevation increases to 5456 ft, the pump is shut off

(4) P-201 and P-202 shall alternate duty. (5) The Zone 2 discharge flow rate shall be operator adjustable

between 2000 gpm and 8000 gpm. The recommended start-up flow rate is 3200 gpm. (3200 gpm equals Zone 2 Max Day Demand in 2009) Keep in mind that 8000 gpm corresponds with 100% speed of the pump at the lowest possible head condition. As the Zone 2 tanks refills the head condition will increase and the flow rate will decrease. The maximum refill flow rate of the Zone 2 tanks is approximately 6500 gpm.

(6) The Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) on the pumps shall increase or decrease speed to maintain the operator selected flow rate measured by the Zone 2 flow meter (FIT-201)

(7) Any pump that generates a VFD FAULT alarm or that is switched out of AUTO initiates an alarm.

(8) If a pump fails to run, an alarm is initiated and the other pump is called to run.

2) Zone 3 Pump Control (P-301, P-302, P-303)

a) Control Description, Pump Sequencing:


(1) There shall be an on-screen operator selector switch to determine which of the existing or new Zone 3 pump stations is the lead and which is the lag. (Under normal operating conditions, the existing Zone 3 pump station shall be the lead station and the new Zone 3 pump station shall be the lag station.)

(2) In order for the lag pump station to be called to run, the lead pump station must be operating at maximum speed and capacity.

(3) In order for the lead pump station to decrease speed and flow, the lag station must be shutdown.

(4) P-301, P-302, and P-303 (Zone 3 pumps) shall operate based on a pump station discharge pressure setpoint measured by the Zone 3 pressure indicating transmitter (PIT-301). (Initial setpoint 65 psi)

(5) High and low discharge pressure setpoints shall initiate pump shutdown and startup. High and low initial pressure setpoints shall be 5 psi greater and 5 psi lesser, respectively, than the discharge pressure setpoint.

(6) P-301, P-302, and P-303 shall be programmed to rotate lead/lag duty.

(7) All pressure settings shall be operator adjustable. (8) When any pump is started, the PLC will start an operator adjustable

countdown timer (0-60 sec, initial setpoint 30 sec). For this timer period the PLC shall disregard the setpoint pressure.

(9) Any pump that generates a VFD FAULT alarm or that is switched out of AUTO, an alarm is initiated.

(10) If a pump fails to run, an alarm is initiated and the other pump is called to run.

(11) There shall be an on-screen operator selector switch to determine if the new Zone 3 pumps will have Zone 1 or Zone 2 suction. Refer to Motor Operated Butterfly Valves in this section. (Under normal operating conditions, the new Zone 3 pump station will have Zone 1 suction.)

b) Control Description, Increasing Demand: (Zone 1 Suction)

(1) As demand increases in Zone 3 such that the existing Zone 3 pump

station cannot maintain its low discharge pressure setpoint, one new 5 MGD Zone 3 pump shall be called to run at minimum speed (minimum speed equals 80%). This pump will increase speed to maintain the discharge pressure setpoint.

(2) As demand increases such that one 5 MGD pump running at maximum speed (maximum speed equals 100%) cannot maintain the low discharge pressure setpoint, the second 5 MGD pump is started. One 5 MGD pump will increase speed while the other decreases speed until their speeds match and the discharge pressure setpoint is reached. The two 5 MGD pumps speed will modulate together to maintain the discharge pressure setpoint.

c) Control Description, Decreasing Demand: (Zone 1 Suction)


(1) As demand decreases, pump speeds decrease equally and flow decreases to maintain the discharge pressure setpoint. As demand decreases to the point where more pumps are on-line than are necessary to maintain pressure, the lag pump is shutdown. The following logic describes this sequence as demand diminishes from a fully loaded station. This logic can be entered at any point when demand changes from an increasing direction to a decreasing direction.

(2) As demand decreases such that two 5 MGD pumps operating at minimum speed (80%) reaches the high discharge pressure setpoint, one 5 MGD pump will be shut off. At this point the operating 5 MGD pump will increase speed to maintain the discharge pressure setpoint.

d) Control Description, Increasing Demand: (Zone 2 Suction)

(1) As demand increases in Zone 3 such that the existing Zone 3 pump

station cannot maintain its low discharge pressure setpoint, one new 5 MGD Zone 3 pump shall be called to run at minimum speed (minimum speed under Zone 2 suction condition equals 55%). This pump will increase speed to maintain the discharge pressure setpoint.

(2) As demand increases such that one 5 MGD pump running at maximum speed (maximum speed under Zone 2 Suction condition equals 75%) cannot maintain the low discharge pressure setpoint, the second 5 MGD pump is started. One 5 MGD pump will increase speed while the other decreases speed until their speeds match and the discharge pressure setpoint is reached. The two 5 MGD pumps speed will modulate together to maintain the discharge pressure setpoint to a maximum speed of 100%.

e) Control Description, Decreasing Demand: (Zone 2 Suction)

(1) As demand decreases, pump speeds decrease and flow decreases

while the discharge pressure setpoint is maintained. As flow decreases to the point where more pumps are on-line than are necessary to maintain pressure, the lag pump is shutdown. The following logic describes this sequence as demand diminishes from a fully loaded station. This logic can be entered at any point when demand changes from an increasing direction to a decreasing direction.

(2) As demand decreases such that two 5 MGD pumps operating at minimum speed (55%) reach the high discharge pressure setpoint, one 5 MGD pump will be shut off. At this point the operating 5 MGD pump will speed up to maintain the discharge pressure setpoint.

(3) As demand decreases such that one 5 MGD pump operating at minimum speed (55%) reaches the high discharge pressure setpoint, it will be shut off.

b. Motor Operated Butterfly Valves 1) Valves V102 and V105 are operated manually from a remote location.

V102 is open and V105 is closed during normal operation. The valves are interlocked so that both valves cannot be opened simultaneously. V102 must be closed to enable V105 to open.


c. Pump Control Ball Valves (V-120, V-121, V-122, V-123, V-124) 1) Zone 3 Pump Control Ball Valves (V-120, V-121, V-122)

a) The pump control ball valves are interlocked with pump operation. The valves are initiated to open upon pump motor starting and pressure switch high closing.

b) The valves are initiated to close upon PIT-301 reaching the high discharge pressure setpoint. Upon 100% valve closure, the pumps shall be shut off.

2) Zone 2 Pump Control Ball Valves (V-123, V-124) a) The pump control ball valves are interlocked with pump operation. The

valves are initiated to open upon pump motor starting and pressure switch high closing.

b) The valves are initiated to close upon the Zone 2 tanks reaching a maximum water surface elevation. Upon 100% valve closure, the pumps shall be shut off.

d. Electronic Control Valve (V131)

1) Valve operation is interlocked with FIT-201 when flow is being directed from Zone 2 to Zone 1. The flow signal is sent to the valve controller which modulates the valve based on the operator selected flow.

2) Valve does not operate and is to remain closed when flow is being directed from Zone 1 to Zone 2.

3. Pump Operation

a. Remote 1) Auto Mode - Remote operation of the pumps and valves can be achieved by

placing the local HOA selector switch in the AUTO position. 2) Manual Mode – The operator can control the pumps and valves manually

from a remote location. b. Local

1) Manual a) Local HOA Switch - Pump runs when HOA switch is in HAND position. b) Local HOA Switch – Valve can be opened/closed manually when HOA

switch is in HAND position. 4. Indications, Alarms and Controls

a. Remote 1) Indications

a) Pump running. b) Pump HOA switch in AUTO c) Pump speed indication d) Motor Operated Valves - open/close status e) Motor Operated Valves - HOA switch in AUTO f) Pump Control Valves – Open/Close position g) V131 Valve - Position (% open) h) Pressure i) Flow

2) Alarms a) Pump fail. b) Zone 2 Pressure Low c) Zone 3 Pressure Low d) V131 Controller Alarm e) Pump Control Valves – Fault

3) Controls a) Motor Operated Valves - Open/Close command b) Flow to V131 c) Zone 2 Pressure operator adjustable setpoint – Pressure Low Alarm


d) Zone 3 Pressure operator adjustable setpoint – Pressure Low Alarm e) Existing tank level operator adjustable setpoint – Zone 2 Pump Run

Command f) Existing tank level operator adjustable setpoint – Zone 2 Pump Stop

Command g) Zone 2 flow MD demand operator adjustable setpoint – Zone 2 Pump

Speed Command h) Zone 3 pressure operator adjustable setpoint – Zone 3 Pump Run

command i) Zone 3 pressure operator adjustable setpoint – Zone 3 Pump Stop

Command j) Zone 3 pressure operator adjustable setpoint – Zone 3 Pump Speed

Command k) Pump Discharge Pressure Switch high – Pump Control Valve

b. Local 1) Indications

a) Pump running – red light. b) Pump off – green light. c) Pump HOA position. d) VFD speed

2) Alarms a) Pump fail – Amber light

5. General Alarms a. Intrusion Alarms (ZS-101, ZS-102, ZS-103) b. Smoke Detector Alarm (YS-101) c. Sump Level High (LSH-201) d. Foundation Drain Level High (LSH-103) e. Foundation Drain Intrusion Alarm (ZS-104)

B. Existing Clearwell #2 RTU 1. All programming for these IO points shall remain the same. Provide integration into

new RTU.

3.2 IO LIST

Equipment Description Type New/ExistingFIT-201 Flow AI New FIT-301 Flow AI New PIT-201 Pressure AI New PIT-301 Pressure AI New P201 VFD Speed Feedback AI New P202 VFD Speed Feedback AI New P301 VFD Speed Feedback AI New P302 VFD Speed Feedback AI New P303 VFD Speed Feedback AI New V131 Position Feedback AI New P201 VFD Speed Control AO New P202 VFD Speed Control AO New P301 VFD Speed Control AO New P302 VFD Speed Control AO New P303 VFD Speed Control AO New V131 Flow AO New P201 VFD Fail DI New


P201 VFD HOA in Auto DI New P201 VFD Running DI New P202 VFD Fail DI New P202 VFD HOA in Auto DI New P202 VFD Running DI New P301 VFD Fail DI New P301 VFD HOA in Auto DI New P301 VFD Running DI New P302 VFD Fail DI New P302 VFD HOA in Auto DI New P302 VFD Running DI New P303 VFD Fail DI New P303 VFD HOA in Auto DI New P303 VFD Running DI New V102 HOA in Auto DI New V102 Closed Position DI New V102 Open Position DI New V105 HOA in Auto DI New V105 Closed Position DI New V105 Open Position DI New V131 Alarm DI New ZS-101, ZS-102, ZS-103 Intrusion Alarm DI New ZS-104 Intrusion Alarm DI New YS-101 Smoke Alarm DI New LSH-201 Level High DI New LSH-103 Level High DI New V120 Open/Closed Position DI New V120 Fault DI New V121 Open/Closed Position DI New V121 Fault DI New V122 Open/Closed Position DI New V122 Fault DI New V123 Open/Closed Position DI New V123 Fault DI New V124 Open/Closed Position DI New V124 Fault DI New PSH-301 Pressure High DI New PSH-302 Pressure High DI New PSH-303 Pressure High DI New PSH-201 Pressure High DI New PSH-202 Pressure High DI New P201 VFD Run Command DO New P202 VFD Run Command DO New P301 VFD Run Command DO New P302 VFD Run Command DO New P303 VFD Run Command DO New V102 Open/Close Command DO New


V105 Open/Close Command DO New V120 Open Command DO New V120 Close Command DO New V121 Open Command DO New V121 Close Command DO New V122 Open Command DO New V122 Close Command DO New V123 Open Command DO New V123 Close Command DO New V124 Open Command DO New V124 Close Command DO New Security Count Trip Timer AI Existing V24 Valve Position Feedback AI Existing V30 Valve Position Feedback AI Existing V24 Valve Position Command AO Existing V30 Valve Position Command AO Existing Vault Flood Level High DI Existing Vault Intrusion Intrusion Alarm DI Existing Vault Power Fail Power Fail DI Existing V24 Remote DI Existing V24 Valve Full Open DI Existing V24 Valve Full Closed DI Existing V30 Remote DI Existing V30 Valve Full Open DI Existing V30 Valve Full Closed DI Existing Zone 1 Motion Detector Intrusion Alarm DI Existing Zone 2 Motion Detector Intrusion Alarm DI Existing Zone 3 Motion Detector Intrusion Alarm DI Existing Zone 4 Motion Detector Intrusion Alarm DI Existing Zone 5 Motion Detector Intrusion Alarm DI Existing

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13442 PRIMARY ELEMENTS AND TRANSMITTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Flow components. 2. Pressure components. 3. Pipe, tubing and fittings. 4. Instrument valves.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 4. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 13441 - Control Loop Descriptions. 6. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements. 7. Section 15061 - Pipe: Steel.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Gas Association (AGA):

a. Gas Measurement Committee Report #3. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. b. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.

4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B31.1, Power Piping. b. SEC II-A SA-182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy Steel Pipe

Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature. c. SEC II-A SA-479, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel

Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels. d. Fluid Meters, Sixth Edition.

5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A106, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-

Temperature Service. b. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. c. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy - Steel Pipe Flanges,

Forged Fittings and Valves and Parts for High Temperature Service. d. A234, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. e. A240, Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-

Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. f. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless

Steel Tubing for General Service. g. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.


h. A479, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for use in Boilers and other Pressure Vessels.

i. B16, Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines.

j. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. k. B68, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed. l. B75, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. m. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube n. B124, Standard Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Forging Rod, Bar,

and Shapes. o. B283, Standard Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die Forgings (Hot-

Pressed). p. B453, Standard Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded-Brass) Rod. q. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.

6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.


A. The instruments specified in this Section are the primary element components for the control loops shown on the "I" series Drawings and specified in Section 13441. These instruments are integrated with other control system components specified under the 13440 specification series to produce the functional control defined in the Contract Documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Sections 01340 and 13440.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the Manufacturers listed in the articles describing the elements are acceptable.

B. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Specification Special Conditions.

2.2 FLOW COMPONENTS

A. Magnetic Flow Meters: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Bailey-Fischer and Porter. b. Rosemount. c. Endress-Hauser

2. Materials: 3. Design and fabrication:

a. Utilize characterized field principle of electromagnetic induction to produce signal directly proportional to flow rate.

b. High input impedance pre-amplifiers. 1) Minimum impedance: 1010 ohms.

c. Provide flanged end connections per ANSI B16.5 rated for piping system operating and test conditions.

d. Operating pressure: 150 psi.


e. Operating temperature: 35-65 DegF. f. Grounding requirements:

1) Nonmetallic or lined pipe: a) Inlet and outlet grounding rings of same material as electrode.

2) Conductive piping: a) Conductive path between the meter and the piping flanges.

g. Provide cable between magnetic flow meter and transmitter. h. Pulsed DC magnetic field excitation. i. Automatic zero. j. Adjustable low flow cutoff. k. Minimum signal lock (empty tube zero) to prevent false measurement when tube

is empty. l. Inaccuracy:

1) Above 10 percent of range: ±1.0 percent of rate. 2) Below 10 percent of range: ±0.1 percent of range setting. 3) Add +0.1 percent of range to above inaccuracies for analog outputs.

m. 4-20 mA DC isolated output into maximum 800 ohms. n. Power supply: 117 V ±10 percent, 60 HZ. o. Indication of flow rate and totalized flow at transmitter. p. Meter operable as specified in liquids with 5.0 micro mho/cm or more

conductivity. q. Transmitter electronics shall use microprocessor based architecture and be

configured using parameters. 4. Schedule:

TAG NUMBER

SERVICE FLOW RANGE METER SIZE (IN)

FIT-201 Pump Station – Zone 2-Bi-directional

0-15 MGD 18

FIT-301 Pump Station – Zone 3 0-15 MGD 18

TAG NUMBER

LINER MATERIAL ELECTRODE MATERIAL

INTEGRAL, FIELD OR PANEL-MOUNTED TRANSMITTER

FIT-201 Hard Rubber 316 Stainless Steel

Field Mounted

FIT-301 Hard Rubber 316 Stainless Steel

Field Mounted

2.3 PRESSURE COMPONENTS

A. Pressure Transmitters: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Rosemount, Model 3051. b. Endress Hauser. c. Honeywell 100e.

2. Materials: 3. Design and fabrication:

a. Smart transmitters utilizing microprocessor based electronics. b. Output: 4-20 mA DC proportional to pressure. c. Nonvolatile EEPROM memory. d. Power supply: 24 V DC. e. Adjustable zero and span. f. Temperature limits: -20 to 180 DegF.

1) -4 to 175 DegF for LCD indicators. g. Overpressure limits: Withstand 150 percent of stated maximum service pressure

without damage.


h. Humidity limits: 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. i. Damping: Adjustable between 0 and 32 seconds. j. Inaccuracy (includes effects of linearity, repeatability and hysteresis): ±0.10

percent of calibrated span for 15:1 rangeability. k. Stability: ±0.2 percent of upper range limit for 12 months. l. Temperature effect:

1) Total effect including span and zero errors: ±0.2 percent of upper range limit per 100 DegF for minimum 15:1 rangeability.

m. Minimum 1/2 IN pressure connection. n. Equip with test jacks or accessible terminals for testing output. o. Equip with isolation valve and test connections with isolation valves and/or

plugs. 4. Schedule:

TAG NUMBER

SERVICE

SPAN

PIT-201 Pump Station – Zone 2 0-150 psiPIT-301 Pump Station – Zone 3 0-150 psi

B. Pressure Switches: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Mercoid. b. Automatic Switch Company. c. United Electric.

2. Materials: a. Wetted switch elements: 316 stainless steel. b. Diaphragm seal housing: 316 stainless steel. c. Pressure snubber:

1) Filter disc: 316 stainless steel. 2) Housing: 316 stainless steel.

3. Accessories: a. Provide ball valve to isolate pressure switch from source. b. Utilize pressure snubbers with porous metal discs to provide pulsation

dampening on pressure switch as shown on schedule. c. On applications where a pressure switch and a pressure gage are used at the

same location, it is permissible to utilize one (1) pulsation dampener and diaphragm seal to isolate both elements from the process fluid.

4. Design and fabrication: a. Utilize hermetically sealed mercury contact switches. b. Two (2) SPDT contacts rated:

1) 1 amp inductive at 125 Vdc. 2) 5 amp inductive at 120 Vac.

c. Switch set points: 1) Below 1,000 psi:

a) Set points between 30 and 70 percent of switch rated working range. b) Operating pressure not to exceed 75 percent of switch rated working

range. d. Accuracy: Better than 1 percent of full scale. e. Process connection: Minimum of 1/4 IN.



5. Schedule:

TAG

NUMBER SERVICE LOW

SETTING HIGH

SETTING PSH - 201 P – 201 Discharge N/A 25 PSI

PSH -202 P – 202 Discharge N/A 25 PSI

PSH - 301 P – 301 Discharge N/A 50 PSI PSH - 302 P – 302 Discharge N/A 50 PSI PSH – 303 P – 303 Discharge N/A 50 PSI

C. Pressure Gage: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Ashcroft. b. Ametek.

2. Materials: a. Bourdon tube, socket, connecting tube: 316 stainless steel. b. Case: Phenolic. c. Diaphragm seal housing: 316 stainless steel. d. Pressure snubber:

1) Filter disc: 316 stainless steel. 2) Housing: 316 stainless steel.

3. Accessories: a. Provide valve at point of connection to equipment and at panel if panel mounted. b. Utilize pressure snubbers with porous metal discs to provide pulsation

dampening on gage applications as shown on schedule. c. Provide 1/2 IN stainless steel antisiphon pigtail inlet connection for hot water

and steam applications. 4. Design and fabrication:

a. All components suitable for service at: 1) 250 DegF. 2) The maximum process temperature to which the gage is to be exposed.

b. Provide viewer protection from element rupture. c. Calibrate gages at jobsite for pressure and temperature in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. d. Unless otherwise required by codes, provide stem mounted or flush mounted,

as required, with dial diameter as follows:

PIPE SIZE DIAL SIZE GAGE CONNECTION

1-1/2 IN or less 2-1/2 IN 1/4 IN Larger than 1-1/2 IN

4-1/2 IN 1/2 IN

e. Equip with white faces, black numerals and black pointers. f. Gage tapping position to be clear of equipment functions and movements, and

protected from maintenance and operation of equipment. Gage to be readable from an accessible standing position.

g. Gage accuracy: 1 percent of full range. h. Select gage range so that:

1) The normal operating value is in the middle third of the dial. 2) Maximum operating pressure does not exceed 75 percent of the full scale

range.


i. Provide pressure gages on suction and discharge of each pump and at locations indicated on Drawings or otherwise specified.

j. Provide compound type on pump suction gages which show at least 10 psi vacuum.

D. Diaphragm Seal: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Ashcroft. b. Ametek. c. Or equal.

2. Materials: a. Lower housing: 316 stainless steel b. Diaphragm material: 316 stainless steel

3. Design and fabrication: a. Isolates instrument from process fluids which are corrosive or contain solids. b. Upper housing with bleed screw. c. Lower housing with flushing connection. d. Fill fluid:

1) Utilize halocarbon fill for process applications involving strong oxidizing agents. Agents include but are not limited to: Cl2, KMNO4, FeCl, NaOH, and NaOCl.

2) Utilize manufacturer's standard fill for other applications. Ensure fill is suitable for application temperatures.

e. Process connections: 1) Instrument: As required. 2) Process: 0.5 IN female NPT. 3) PVC pipe applications: Use a socket weld connection.

2.4 PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers

are acceptable: a. Tube fittings:

1) Parker CPI. 2) Swagelok.


C. Instrument Tubing and Fittings: 1. Material:

a. Tubing: ASTM A269, Grade TP 316 stainless steel. b. Straight fittings: 316 stainless steel per ASME SA-479 or ASTM A276. c. Shaped bodies: ASME SA-182 F316 stainless steel.

2. Design and fabrication: a. Tubing:

1) Seamless. 2) Fully annealed. 3) Maximum hardness: 80 Rb. 4) Free from surface scratches and imperfections. 5) Diameter: 1/2 IN OD unless specified otherwise. 6) Wall thickness:

a) Meet requirements of paragraph 122.3 of ASME B31.1. b) Minimum 0.049 IN for 1/2 IN OD tubing.

b. Fittings: 1) Flareless. 2) Compression type.


D. Instrument Piping: 1. For applications where the instrument is supported solely by the sensing line, ( e.g.

pressure gauge directly mounted to process line) utilize piping as specified below. a. Diameter: 1/2 IN unless specified otherwise. b. Schedule 80. c. 316 stainless steel.

E. Pneumatic Signal Tubing: 1. Material: Copper per ASTM B75. 2. Design and fabrication:

a. Soft annealed. b. Free from surface scratches and imperfections. c. Wall thickness:

1) 0.030 IN for 1/4 IN OD. 2) 0.035 IN for 3/8 IN OD.

F. Pneumatic Tube Fittings: 1. Material:

a. Straight fittings: Brass per ASTM B16 and B453. b. Shaped bodies: Brass per ASTM B124 Alloy 377 or ASTM B283.

2. Design and fabrication: a. Flareless. b. Compression type.

2.5 INSTRUMENT VALVES

A. Process instrument multi-valve manifolds, isolation, vent and blow-down valves: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1) Whitey Co. 2) Anderson-Greenwood USA, Inc.

b. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Special Conditions.

2. Materials: a. Packing:

1) 450 DegF and above: Graphite. 2) Below 450 DegF: Graphite or Teflon.

b. Body: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A479. c. Stem: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276. d. Ball: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276. e. Support rings: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276. f. Seats:

1) Metal: a) 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276.

2) Soft: a) Teflon, Delrin, or equivalent. b) Only utilized on applications where manufacturer's temperature and

pressure ratings exceed process design conditions. 3. Design and fabrication:

a. Either of the following: 1) Ball valve with 1/4 turn activation. 2) Free-swiveling ball stem.

b. Provide body wall thickness sufficient for process design conditions per ASME B31.1.

c. Temperature: Manufacturer's temperature rating for all components shall exceed process design conditions.


B. Isolation Valves in Copper Instrument Air Tubing: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1) Whitey Co. 2) Or equal.

b. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Special Conditions.

2. Materials: a. Packing: Graphite or Teflon. b. Body: Brass per ASTM B16. c. Stem: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276. d. Ball: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276. e. Support rings: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276. f. Seats:

1) Metal: a) 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276.

2) Soft: a) Teflon, Delrin, or equivalent. b) Only utilized on applications where manufacturer's temperature and

pressure ratings exceed process design conditions. 3. Design and fabrication:

a. Ball valve with 1/4 turn activation. b. Provide body wall thickness sufficient for process design conditions per ASME

B31.1.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Furnish all mounting brackets, hardware and appurtenances required for mounting primary elements and transmitters. 1. Materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be as follows:

a. Bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors: 316 stainless steel. b. Mounting brackets:

1) Standard: 316 stainless steel. 2) Highly corrosive areas: Aluminum.

c. Mounting plates, angles: 1) Standard: Carbon steel. 2) Corrosive areas: Aluminum.

d. Instrument pipe stands: 1) Standard: Hot-dip galvanized 2 IN schedule 40, ASTM A106, Grade B

carbon steel. 2) Corrosive areas: Aluminum.

B. Tubing Support Angles and Brackets 1. Any of the following materials are acceptable:

a. Aluminum support with dielectric material between support and tubing b. Type 316 stainless steel c. Fiberglass

C. Tubing Tray or Channel: Aluminum 1. Provide dielectric material between tray or channel and tubing

D. Provide handheld communicator compatible with all intelligent transmitters furnished. Hand held communicator shall provide capability to check calibration, change transmitter range, and provide diagnostics. If these features are provided with the intelligent transmitter, the hand held communicator is not required.


E. Cable lengths between sensors and transmitters shall be continuous (without splices) and as required to accommodate locations as shown on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install instrument mounting pipe stands level and plumb.

C. Instrument Valves: 1. Orient stems for proper operation. 2. Install arrays orderly and neat in appearance with true horizontal and vertical lines. 3. Provide a minimum of 2 IN clearance between valve handle turning radii where

there are multiple valve handles appearing in a straight line. 4. Valves shall have bonnets and any soft seals removed during welding or soldering

into the line. When cool, reassemble the valves. 5. Support each valve individually. The tubing system does not qualify as support for

the valve.

D. Locate instrument piping and tubing so as to be free of vibration and interference with other piping, conduit, or equipment.

E. Keep foreign matter out of the system.

F. Remove all oil on piping and tubing with solvent before piping and tubing installation.

G. Plug all open ends and connections to keep out contaminants.

H. Tubing Installation: 1. General:

a. Install such that tube shows no sign of crumpling, bends of too short a radius, or flattening, etc.

b. Make tube runs straight and parallel or perpendicular to the floor, equipment and piping runs.

c. For liquid and steam applications, slope continuously from the process to the instrument with a minimum slope of 0.50 IN per foot.

d. For gas and air applications, slope continuously from the instrument to the process with a minimum slope of 0.50 IN per foot.

e. If the sensing line cannot be continuously sloped, install high point vents and low point drains.

f. Keep instrument tubing clean during all phases of work. g. Blow out with clean, dry, oil-free air immediately before final assembly. h. Cut by sawing only and debur.

2. Bending: a. Make each bend with tube bender of the correct size for the tube. b. Make all bends smooth and continuous. c. Rebending is not permitted. d. Make bends true to angle and radius. e. Maintain a true circular cross section of tubing without buckling or undue stretch

of tube wall. f. Allowable tolerance for flattening out of tubing bends: Maximum of 8 percent of

the OD for stainless steel tubing. g. Minimum bending radius for stainless steel tubing:



TUBE OD INCHES

MINIMUM BENDING

RADIUS, INCHES 1/4 9/16 3/8 15/16 1/2 1-1/2

h. Minimum bending radius for type L, hard (drawn) copper.

TUBE OD INCHES

MINIMUM BENDING

3/8 1-3/4 1/2 2-1/2

3. Tubing support:

a. Intermittently support by clamping to support angle. b. Install supports to be self-draining, supported by hangers, or cantilevered from

walls or structural beams. c. Support at 5 FT-0 IN maximum spans for horizontal or vertical runs. d. Use tubing trays in areas where spans between supports are greater than 5 FT

and for all signal tubing support. e. Support each tubing tray at 10 FT maximum spans. f. Align tubing in orderly rows and retain in the tray by bolted clips. The use of

spring or speed clips is not acceptable. g. Maintain order of the tubing throughout the length of the tray. h. Locate angle, channel and tray installation to protect tubing from spills and

mechanical damage. i. Locate support members to clear all piping, conduit, equipment, hatchways,

monorails, and personnel access ways and allow access for equipment operation and maintenance.

j. Support trays to prevent torsion, sway or sag. k. Permanently attach supports to building steel or other permanent structural

members. l. Arrange supports and trays so that they do not become a trough or trap.

4. Routing and orientation: a. Route to maintain a minimum headroom clearance of 8 FT. b. Locate and orient valves and specialties so that they are accessible for

operation and maintenance from the operating floor. Do not route through or over equipment removal areas, below monorails or cranes nor above or below hatches.

5. Expansion and vibration provisions: a. Provide horizontal expansion loops at the process connections. b. Route tubing parallel to relative motion through sleeved supports that allow

linear tube movement. c. Cold springing of tubing to compensate for thermal expansion is prohibited. d. Utilize flexible hoses to connect pneumatic tubing to air users which may move

or vibrate.

I. Air Supply: 1. Connect all instruments requiring air to air supply piping and tubing. Provide

connections as follows: a. Terminate branch supply line not more than 36 IN from the device with a 1/2 IN

isolation valve. b. For remaining line, use 1/4 or 3/8 IN tubing of a length to allow for normal

equipment movement and vibration.


c. Use flexible hoses to connect pneumatic tubing to air users which may experience significant movement or vibration.

d. Make branch connections to individual instruments from the top of the supply header.

e. Purge instrument air piping of extraneous material by blowing clean, dry, oil-free air through the system prior to final connection.

J. Threaded Connection Seals: 1. Use Tite-Seal or acceptable alternate. 2. Use of lead base pipe dope or Teflon tape is not acceptable. 3. Do not apply Tite-Seal to tubing threads of compression fittings.

K. Capillary Tubing: 1. Route capillary tubing in tubing tray. 2. Install capillary tubing with a 2 IN minimum bend radius which does not kink or pinch

the capillaries. 3. Do not cut or disconnect at any point. 4. Coil excess capillary tubing and secure at the instrument.

L. Instrument Mounting: 1. Mount all instruments where they will be accessible from fixed ladders, platforms, or

grade. 2. Mount all local indicating instruments with face forward toward the normal operating

area, within reading distance, and in the line of sight. 3. Mount instruments level, plumb, and support rigidly. 4. Mount to provide:

a. Protection from heat, shock, and vibrations. b. Accessibility for maintenance. c. Freedom from interference with piping, conduit and equipment.

3.2 TRAINING

A. Provide on-site training in accordance with Section 01650.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13446 CONTROL AUXILIARIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pilot devices.

a. Selector switches. b. Pushbuttons. c. Indicating lights.

2. Relays. a. Control relay.

3. Termination equipment. a. Terminal blocks. b. Fuse holders.

4. Power supplies. a. DC power supplies. b. Isolation transformers.

5. Voltage surge protection devices.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: General Requirements. 4. Section 16493 – Control Equipment Accessories


A. Referenced Standards: 1. The International Society for Instrumentation and Control (ISA):

a. S18.1, Annunciator Sequences and Specifications. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. ICS 2, Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.

B. Miscellaneous: 1. Assure units comply with electrical area classifications and NEMA enclosure type

shown on Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 13440.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers as listed in the articles describing the devices are acceptable.


B. Provide similar components from the same manufacturer for uniformity of appearance, operations, and maintenance.

C. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Special Conditions.

2.2 PILOT DEVICES

A. Selector Switches: See Section 16493.

B. Pushbuttons: See Section 16493.

C. Indicating Lights: See Section 16493.

2.3 RELAYS

A. Control Relays: See Section 16493.

2.4 TERMINATION EQUIPMENT

A. Terminal Blocks: See Section 16493.

B. Fuse Holders: See Section 16493.

2.5 POWER SUPPLIES

A. DC Power Supplies: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Condor. b. International Power.

2. Design and fabrication: a. Converts 120 V AC input to DC power at required voltage. b. Linear, open-frame power supply. c. Sized as required by the load. Minimum 2.4 A output. d. AC input: 120 V AC +10 percent -13 percent; 47 to 63 HZ. e. Line regulation: ±0.05 percent for a 10 percent change. f. Load regulation: ±0.05 percent for a 50 percent load change. g. Output ripple: 3 mV +0.05 percent of output voltage, peak to peak maximum. h. Transient response: Less than 50uS for 50 percent load change. i. Short circuit protection: Automatic current limit/foldback. j. Stability: ±0.05 percent for 24 HRS after warm-up. k. Temperature rating: 0 to 50 DegC full rated, derated linearly to 40 percent at 70

DegC. l. Temperature coefficient: +0.01 percent/DegC maximum.

B. Isolation Transformers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Topaz Noise Suppressor Noise Isolator. b. MGE UPS Systems, Topaz T1. c. Or equal;

2. Design and fabrication: a. Protects sensitive electronic equipment from electrical noise. b. Common-mode noise attenuation: 146 dB at 0.0005 pF coupling capacitance. c. Normal-mode attenuation: 60 dB. d. Input voltage range: ±10 percent of rated. e. Regulation: 3.5 percent or less from full-load to no-load. f. Dielectric strength: 2,500 V AC minimum. g. Harmonic distortion: 1 percent maximum. h. Electromagnetic interference: 0-1 gauss maximum at 18 IN. i. UL listed.



2.6 VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. See Specification Section 16491.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION


SECTION 13447 TELEMETRY SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Remote Telemetry Unit (RTU) with Remote I/O rack.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 – General Requirements. 3. Section 13440 – Instrumentation: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. See Section 13440. 3. Equipment description, dimensions, wiring diagrams showing external connections. 4. Control panel front and interior modifications. 5. Bill of material with manufacturer and part number of all components.


C. Certifications: 1. Provide qualifications and documentation that instrumentation and controls

subcontractors have been trained and are certified in installing, programming, and operating RTU equipment.

2. Letter documenting UL508 capabilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

A. The Modicon Quantum programmable logic controller (PLC) will be both a PLC and RTU. The RTU shall accept the I/O as required in the I/O List and shall accomplish the control requirements of the Control Loop Descriptions, Section 13441, Drawings and Specifications. The signals from the PLC shall be transmitted to the main control host station at Wes Brown Water Treatment Plant via a radio connected to the PLC. The radio frequencies are TX 467.36250MHz/Rx467.21250MHz antenna. The host system shall be programmed to receive the signals from the PLC site and graphically display the indications and alarms. All equipment shall be compatible with the City of Thornton’s existing UHF radio and telemetry system.

2.2 TELEMETRY SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment 1. Microwave Data Systems (MDS) Radio 4710, Idec PS5R-C12 power supply and

Yagi Antenna.


2. Modicon Quantum – CPU, Power Supply, I/O Cards, Remote I/O Interface Card, UPS.

3. Antenna coaxial cable and connectors. 4. Fiber Optic Connectors.

B. Enclosure: 1. Section 13448.

C. All radio work shall be done by Communications Systems Inc. All work and programming required for the PLC and host computer shall be performed by a qualified instrumentation and controls subcontractor. Installation supervisor shall have had experience in overseeing installation and startup of at least three similar installations. The following firms have been approved: 1. AmWest Control Inc. 2. Automation Services 3. Browns Hill Engineering & Controls, LLC 4. Custom Control Mfr

D. UPS 1. Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to sustain full power to UPS powered

loads for a minimum of 30-minutes following loss of primary power and to ensure that the transient power surges and dips do not affect the operation of the PLC system.

E. Surge and Voltage Transient Protection: 1. Furnish and install transient voltage protection devices for all electronic equipment in

the instrumentation and control systems. Protect the equipment at its connections to both the antenna and power lines. Locate voltage transient protection devices inside or within a distance of one foot of the protected electronic equipment. See Section 13449.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall install a telemetry system including, but not limited to, RTU control panel, Remote I/O Control Panel, radio, antenna with cable, power supply, UPS, conduit and mounting, programming at RTU and main control host station.

B. The Contractor shall contact: The City of Thornton’s construction coordinator to coordinate programming of main control host station.

C. Install system components in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Programming shall be documented and factory tested.

E. The Contractor, prior to shipment, shall furnish a complete list of all equipment and materials that will be supplied. The Contractor shall supply three copies of the following: 1. System Test Plan and Procedures. 2. Equipment Instruction Manual. 3. Installation Drawings. 4. Wiring Diagrams. 5. Test Data. 6. The software used to program the PLC is Concept 2.6. The PLC shall be

programmed using function block. Both software and the software development will be turned over to the city.

F. HMI-SCADA Tag groups will not be allowed.


G. System performance shall be demonstrated by the Contractor. The acceptance testing shall consist of putting the system through all phases of its functional capability. Acceptance of the system shall be made by the Engineer on the basis of the above acceptance tests and the completeness of the documentation.

H. On-Site Training: 1. Provide 2 days of operating and maintenance training at the Project site after the

system has successfully undergone all field testing and acceptance procedures. a. As a minimum, training shall cover:

1) Hardware overview. 2) Software overview 3) Maintenance 4) Trouble shooting. 5) Operation, e.g. changing set points, passwords, etc.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13448 CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for control panels and enclosures utilized as follows:

a. Unless noted otherwise, all control panels and enclosures housing control components that are specified in Sections 13442, 13446, or 13447.

B. This Section is only applicable to panels furnished with Division 11 equipment packages when so stated in the applicable Division 11 Specification Section.

C. This Section is only applicable to panels housing Division 16 specified equipment (e.g., motor starters, lighting controls, etc.) when so stated in the applicable Division 16 Specification Section.

D. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 10400 - Identification Devices. 4. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 13447 – Telemetry System.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. B75, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 4, Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electric Code (NEC).

5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508A, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels.

B. Miscellaneous: 1. Approved supplier of Industrial Control Panels under provisions of UL 508A.

a. Entire assembly shall be affixed with a UL 508A label "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" prior to shipment to the jobsite.

b. Control panel(s) without an affixed UL 508A label shall be rejected and sent back to the Contractor’s factory.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The term "panel" refers to control panels or enclosures listed in the schedule included in this Specification Section.

B. Foreign Voltages: Voltages that may be present in circuits when the panel main power is disconnected.

C. Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing either building wire or instrumentation wire.

D. Instrumentation Cable:


1. Multiple conductor, insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath. 2. Instrumentation cable is typically either TSP (twisted-shielded pair) or TST (twisted-

shielded triad), and is used for the transmission of low current or low voltage signals.

E. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): A type of device (e.g., circuit breaker or receptacle) which detects an abnormal current flow to ground and opens the circuit preventing a hazardous situation.

F. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): A specialized industrial computer using programmed, custom instructions to provide automated monitoring and control functions by interfacing software control strategies to input/output devices.

G. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU): An industrial data collection device designed for location at a remote site, that communicates data to a host system by using telemetry such as radio, dial-up telephone, or leased lines.

H. Input/Output (I/O): Hardware for the moving of control signals into and/or out of a PLC or RTU.

I. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA): Used in process control applications, where programmable logic controllers (PLCs) perform control functions but are monitored and supervised by computer workstations.

J. Digital Signal Cable: Used for the transmission of digital communication signals between computers, PLCs, RTUs, etc.

K. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): A backup power unit that provides continuous power when the normal power supply is interrupted.

L. Loop Calibrator: Portable testing and measurement tool capable of accurately generating and measuring 4-20ma DC analog signals.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. See Section 13440. 3. Prepared with computer aided design (CAD) software. 4. Printed on 11 by 17 IN sheets. 5. Drawings shall include a title block containing the following:

a. Plant or facility name where panel(s) are to be installed. b. Drawing title. c. Drawing number. d. Revision list with revision number and date e. Drawing date. f. Drawing scale. g. Manufacturer name, address, and telephone number.

6. Cover sheet for each drawing set shall indicate the following: a. Plant or facility name. b. Project name. c. Submittal description. d. Revision number. e. Issue date.

7. Table of contents sheet(s) shall indicate the following for each drawing in the set: a. Drawing number. b. Drawing title. c. Sheet number.

8. Legend and abbreviation sheet shall indicate the following: a. Description of symbols and abbreviations used.


b. Panel construction notes including enclosure NEMA rating, finish type and color, wire type, wire color strategy, conductor sizes, and wire labeling strategy.

c. Confirmation that the panel(s) are to be affixed with a UL 508A label prior to shipment from the factory.

9. Bill of Material for each panel shall include the following component information: a. Instrument tag number. b. Quantity. c. Functional name or description. d. Manufacturer. e. Complete model number. f. Size or rating.

10. Panel exterior layout drawings to scale and shall indicate the following: a. Panel materials of construction, dimensions, and total assembled weight. b. Panel access openings. c. Conduit access locations. d. Front panel device layout. e. Nameplate schedule:

1) Nameplate location. 2) Legend which indicates text, letter height and color, and background color.

f. Alarm annunciator window engraving schedule. g. Layouts of graphic panels or mosaic displays.

11. Panel interior layout drawings shall be drawn to scale and shall indicate the following: a. Sub-panel or mounting pan dimensions. b. Interior device layouts. c. PLC/RTU general arrangement layouts. d. Wire-way locations, purpose, and dimensions. e. Terminal strip designations. f. Location of external wiring and/or piping connections. g. Location of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles.

12. Wiring diagrams shall consist of the following: a. Panel power distribution diagrams. b. Control and instrumentation wiring diagrams. c. PLC/RTU I/O information:

1) Model number of I/O module. 2) Description of I/O module type and function. 3) Rack and slot number. 4) Terminal number on module. 5) Point or channel number. 6) Programmed point addresses. 7) Signal function and type.

d. Wiring diagrams shall identify each wire as it is to be labeled.

B. Manufacturer catalog cut sheets for enclosure, finish, panel devices, control auxiliaries, and accessories.

C. Electrical load calculations for each panel: 1. Total connected load. 2. Peak electrical demand for each panel.

D. Climate control calculations for each panel. 1. Verify that sufficient dissipation and/or generation of heat is provided to maintain

interior panel temperatures within the rated operating temperatures of panel components.

E. Miscellaneous: 1. Record Drawings:


a. Updated panel drawings delivered with the panel(s) from the Contractor’s factory.

b. Drawings shall be enclosed in transparent plastic and firmly secured within each panel.

F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:


2. See Section 13440.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Enclosures:

a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Rittal. c. Hammond Manufacturing. d. Millbank Mfg. Co.

2. Panel heaters: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc. b. Rittal. c. Hammond Manufacturing.

3. Heat exchangers and air conditioners: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc. b. Rittal. c. Hammond Manufacturing.

4. Cooling fans and exhaust packages: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc. b. Rittal.

5. Internal corrosion inhibitors: a. Hoffman Enclosures, Inc.; Model A-HCI. b. Northern Technologies International Corporation (NTIC); Model Zerust VC. c. Cortec Corporation; Model VpCl Emitting Systems.


2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Panel Nameplates and Identification: 1. See Section 10400.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fabricate panels with instrument arrangements and dimensions identified in the

Contract Documents. 2. Provide panel(s) with the required enclosure rating per NEMA 250 to meet

classifications identified in the Contract Documents. 3. Devices installed in panel openings shall have a NEMA enclosure rating at least

equal to the panel enclosure rating. a. Devices that cannot be obtained with an adequate NEMA rating shall be

installed behind a transparent viewing window. b. The window shall maintain the required NEMA rating of the enclosure.

4. Panel(s) shall be completely assembled at the Contractor’s factory.


a. No fabrication other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage shall be performed on panels at the jobsite.

5. Painting: a. Panels fabricated from steel shall have their internal and external surfaces

prepared, cleaned, primed, and painted. 1) Mechanically abrade all surfaces to remove rust, scale, and surface

imperfections. 2) Provide final surface treatment with 120 grit abrasives or finer, followed by

spot putty to fill all voids. 3) Utilize solvent or chemical methods to clean panel surfaces. 4) Apply surface conversion of zinc phosphate prior to painting to improve

paint adhesion and to increase corrosion resistance. 5) Electrostatically apply polyester urethane powder coating to all inside and

outside surfaces. 6) Bake powder coating at high temperatures to bond coating to enclosure

surface. a) Panel interior shall be white with semi-gloss finish. b) Panel exterior shall be ANSI 61 gray with flat finish.

7) Application of alkyd liquid enamel coating shall be allowed in lieu of polyester urethane powder for wall mounted NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 rated panels.

b. Panels fabricated from stainless steel, aluminum, or fiberglass shall not be painted.

6. Finish opening edges of panel cutouts to smooth and true surface conditions. a. Panels fabricated from steel shall have the opening edges finished with the

panel exterior paint. 7. Panel shall meet all requirements of UL 508A.

a. If more than one disconnect switch is required to disconnect all power within a panel or enclosure, provide a cautionary marking with the word "CAUTION" and the following or equivalent, "Risk of Electric Shock-More than one disconnect switch required to de-energize the equipment before servicing."

8. Provide control panel in accordance with NEC Article 409 - Industrial Control Panels. a. In the event of any conflict between NEC Article 409 and UL 508A, the more

stringent requirement shall apply.

B. Wall Mounted Panels: 1. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 2. Rolled lip around all sides of enclosure door opening. 3. Gasketed dust tight. 4. Three-point latching mechanism operated by oil tight key-locking handle. 5. Key doors alike. 6. Continuous heavy GA hinge pin on doors.

a. Hinges rated for 1.5 times door plus instrument weight. 7. After cutouts have been made, finish opening edges to smooth and true surface

condition. 8. Front full opening door. 9. Brackets for wall mounting.

C. Internal Panel Wiring: 1. Panel wire duct shall be installed between each row of components, and adjacent to

each terminal strip. a. Route wiring within the panel in wire-duct neatly tied and bundled with tie wraps. b. Follow wire-duct manufacturer's recommended fill limits. c. Wire-duct shall have removable snap-on covers and perforated walls for easy

wire entrance.


d. Wire-duct shall be constructed of nonmetallic materials with rating in excess of the maximum voltage carried therein.

2. Wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from one device, source of power will not be disrupted to other devices.

3. Splicing and tapping of wires permitted only at terminal blocks. 4. Wire bunches to doors shall be secured at each end so that bending or twisting will

be around longitudinal axis of wire. a. Protect bend area with sleeve.

5. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, with surplus wire removed. a. Arrange wiring with sufficient clearance. b. Provide abrasion protection for wire bundles that pass through openings or

across edges of sheet metal. 6. AC circuits shall be routed separate from analog signal cables and digital signal

cables. a. Separate by at least 6 IN, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device

terminations. 7. Provide at least 6 IN of separation between intrinsically safe devices and circuits

and non-intrinsically safe devices and circuits. 8. Wiring to pilot devices or rotary switches shall be individually bundled and installed

with a "flexible loop" of sufficient length to permit the component to be removed from panel for maintenance without removing terminations.

9. Conductors for AC and DC circuits shall be type MTW stranded copper listed for operation with 600 V at 90 DegC. a. Conductor size shall be as required for load and 16 AWG minimum. b. Internal panel wiring color code:

1) AC circuits: a) Power wiring: Black. b) Control interconnections: Yellow. c) Neutral: White. d) Ground: Green.

2) Low voltage DC circuits: a) Power wiring: Blue. b) Control interconnections: Violet.

3) Foreign voltage circuits: Pink. 4) Annunciator circuits: Red. 5) Intrinsically safe circuits: Orange.

10. Analog signal cables shall be of 600 V insulation, stranded copper, twisted-shielded pairs. a. Conductor size: 18 AWG minimum. b. Terminate shield drain conductors to ground only at one end of the cable.

11. High precision 250 ohm resistors with 0.25 percent accuracy shall be used where 4-20 mA DC analog signals are converted to 1-5 Vdc signals. a. Resistors located at terminal strips. b. Resistors terminated using individual terminal blocks and with no other

conductors. c. Resistor leads shall be un-insulated and of sufficient length to allow test or

calibration equipment (e.g., HART communicator, loop calibrator) to be properly attached to the circuit with clamped test leads.

12. Analog signals for devices in separate enclosures shall not be wired in series. a. Loop isolators shall be used where analog signals are transmitted between

control enclosures. 13. Wire and cable identification:

a. Wire and cables numbered and tagged at each termination. b. Wire tags:

1) Slip-on, PVC wire sleeves with legible, machine-printed markings. 2) Adhesive, snap-on, or adhesive type labels are not acceptable.


c. Markings as identified in the Shop Drawings.

D. Grounding Requirements: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be separated from incoming power

conductors at the point of entry. 2. Minimize grounding conductor length within the enclosure by locating the ground

reference point as close as practical to the incoming power point of entry. 3. Bond electrical racks, chassis and machine elements to a central ground bus.

a. Nonconductive materials, such as paint, shall be removed from the area where the equipment contacts the enclosure.

4. Bond the enclosure to the ground bus. a. It is imperative that good electrical connections are made at the point of contact

between the ground bus and enclosure. 5. Panel-mounted devices shall be bonded to the panel enclosure or the panel

grounding system by means of locknuts or pressure mounting methods. 6. Sub-panels and doors shall be bonded to ground.

E. Termination Requirements: 1. Wiring to circuits external to the panel connected to interposing terminal blocks. 2. Terminal blocks rigidly mounted on DIN rail mounting channels. 3. Terminal strips located to provide adequate space for entrance and termination of

the field conductors. 4. One side of each strip of terminal blocks reserved exclusively for the termination of

field conductors. 5. Terminal block markings:

a. Marking shall be the same as associated wire marking. b. Legible, machine-printed markings. c. Markings as identified in the shop drawings.

6. Terminal block mechanical characteristics, and electrical characteristics shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 4.

7. Terminal blocks with continuous marking strips. a. Each terminal block shall be identified with machine printed labels.

8. Terminals shall facilitate wire sizes as follows: a. 120 Vac applications: Conductor size 12 AWG minimum. b. Other: Conductor size 14 AWG minimum..

9. Analog signal cable shield drain conductors shall be individually terminated. 10. Install minimum of 20 percent spare terminals. 11. Bladed, knife switch, isolating type terminal blocks where control voltages enter or

leave the panel. 12. Fused terminal blocks shall be used in the following circuits:

a. Control voltage is used to energize a solenoid valve. b. DC power is connected to 2-wire, loop-powered instruments.

13. Fused terminal blocks shall be provided with blown fuse indicators. 14. When control circuits require more than one field conductor connected to a single

wiring point, a sufficient number of terminal points shall be connected internally to allow termination of only one field conductor per terminal block.

15. DIN rail mounting channels shall be installed along full length of the terminal strip areas to facilitate future expansion.

16. Connections to devices with screw type terminals shall be made using spade-tongue, insulated, compression terminators.

F. Component Mounting and Placement: 1. Components shall be installed per manufacturer instructions. 2. Control relays and other control auxiliaries shall be mounted on DIN rail mounting

channels where practical. 3. Front panel devices shall be mounted within a range of 40 to 70 IN above the

finished floor, unless otherwise shown in the Contract Documents.


4. PLC/RTU and I/O rack installation: a. Located such that the LED indicators and switches are readily visible with the

panel door open. b. Located such that repair and/or replacement of component can be

accomplished without the need to remove wire terminations or other installed components.

5. Locate power supplies with sufficient spacing for circulation of air. 6. Where components such as magnetic starters, contactors, relays, and other

electromagnetic devices are installed within the same enclosure as the PLC/RTU system components, provide a barrier of at least 6 IN of separation between the “power area containing the electromagnetic devices” and the “control area”.

7. Components mounted in the panel interior shall be fastened to an interior sub-panel using machine screws. a. Fastening devices shall not project through the outer surface of the panel

enclosure. 8. Excess mounting space of at least 20 percent for component types listed below to

facilitate future expansion: a. Fuse holders. b. Circuit breakers. c. Control relays. d. Time delay relays. e. Intrinsically safe barriers and relays.

9. Components installed on sub-panels shall be provides with a minimum spacing between component and wire duct of 1 IN. a. Minimum of 2 IN separation between terminal strips and wire ducts.

10. Pneumatic tubes and appurtenances: a. Connect panel air piping and tubing penetrations with bulkhead fittings. b. Pneumatic control tubing shall be 1/4 IN OD.

1) Tubing material: Either soft annealed ASTM B75 copper or flame-resistant polyethylene.

c. Main headers within panels shall be minimum 1 IN. d. Compression-type pressure fittings. e. Equip panel instrument leads with ball type isolation valve. f. Route tubing neatly and mount securely. g. Do not route tubing in front of or in wire ducting. h. Code terminal plates. i. Pneumatic devices shall be served by a dual function filter regulator.

G. Power Distribution: 1. Main incoming power circuits shall be protected with a thermal magnetic circuit

breaker. a. Limit load to maximum of 80 percent of circuit breaker rating.

2. Component types listed below shall be individually fused so that they may be individually de-energized for maintenance: a. PLC/RTU power supply modules. b. Single-loop controllers. c. Recorders. d. Alarm annunciators.

3. Each control panel with PLC/RTU components shall be furnished with power protection in the form of a double conversion UPS.

4. Equip each panel with necessary power supplies with ratings required for installed equipment and with minimum 25 percent spare capacity.

5. Constant voltage transformers, balancing potentiometers, and rectifiers as necessary for specific instrument requirements.



H. Internal Panel Lighting and Service Receptacles: 1. Panels less than or equal to 4 FT wide:

a. One electrical GFCI duplex receptacle. b. One compact fluorescent light fixture with manual switch(es).

2. Panels or panel faces greater than 4 FT wide: a. One duplex electrical GFCI receptacle per 6 FT of length. b. Continuous fluorescent lighting strip with manual switches.

I. Environmental Controls: 1. Indoor panels located in a designated electrical room or control room:

a. Thermostat controlled cooling fans with exhaust louvers if required to maintain temperature inside panel(s) below the maximum operating temperature rating of the internal components.

b. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 2. Indoor panels not located within a designated electrical room or control room:

a. Thermostat controlled heaters to maintain temperature approximately 10 DegF above ambient for condensation prevention inside the panels.

b. Automatically controlled, closed-loop heat exchangers or closed-loop air conditioners where required to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the components inside the panel(s).

c. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 3. Outdoor panels:

a. Outdoor temperature range of 0 DegF through 120 DegF. b. Thermostat controlled heaters to maintain temperature approximately 10 DegF

above ambient for condensation prevention inside the panels. c. Outdoor temperature range of 0 DegF through 120 DegF. d. Thermostat controlled closed-loop heat exchangers or closed-loop air

conditioners if required to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the components inside the panel.

e. Internal corrosion inhibitors. 4. Environmental control components:

a. Panel heaters: 1) Thermostat controlled. 2) Fan driven. 3) Components mounted in an anodized aluminum housing. 4) Designed for sub-panel mounting. 5) Powered from 120 Vac and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker.

b. Cooling fans and exhaust packages: 1) Cooling fan with louver or grill and replaceable filter. 2) Designed to be mounted within a panel cutout to provide positive airflow

through the panel. 3) Cooling fan and exhaust louvers shall be designed and listed to maintain a

NEMA 12 enclosure rating. 4) Fitted with replaceable, high-density foam or synthetic fiber. 5) Cooling fan controlled with a separately mounted thermostat with bi-metal

sensor and adjustable dial for temperature setting. 6) Powered from 120 Vac and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker.

c. Heat exchangers and air conditioners: 1) Dual-loop design to isolate panel interior air from exterior air. 2) Thermostat controlled. 3) Operate from 120 Vac and protected with a dedicated circuit breaker.

d. Internal corrosion inhibitors: 1) Contains chemical which vaporizes and condenses on surfaces in the

enclosure.


2) Inhibitor shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer instructions for the enclosure volume.

3) Inhibitor shall be applied in the panel(s) prior to shipment from the Contractor’s factory.


A. Extra Materials: 1. Quantity of 25 percent replacement lamps for each type installed (minimum of 12 of

each type). 2. Minimum 12 replacement filters for each type installed. 3. One quart of exterior finish touch-up paint. 4. One complete set of replacement corrosion inhibitors in sealed packages for each

panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FACTORY TESTING

A. Scope: Inspect and test entire panel assembly to verify readiness for shipment.

B. Location: Contractor’s factory.

C. Factory Tests: 1. Tests shall be fully documented and signed by the Contractor’s factory supervisor. 2. The panel shop shall fully test the control panel for correct wiring.

a. Each I/O point shall be checked by measuring or connecting circuits at the field terminal blocks.

3. Burn-in test: Panel(s) shall be fully energized for a minimum period of 48 HRS. 4. A PLC Central Processing Unit (CPU) shall be obtained and connected to the

panel(s) if necessary for testing purposes. 5. Testing equipment (such as digital multi-meters, analog loop calibrators, and laptop

computers with PLC programming software) shall be used as required for testing. 6. The following functions shall be tested as a minimum:

a. Demonstrate functions of the panel(s) required by the Contract Documents. b. Correctness of wiring from all panel field terminals to all I/O points and to all

panel components. c. Simulate and test each discrete signal at the field terminal strips. d. Simulate and test each analog signal using loop calibrators. e. Correct operation of communications between PLC system Central Processing

Units (CPUs) and Remote I/O bases. f. Correct operation of single-loop controllers (including digital communication to

microprocessor based devices). g. Correct operation of all digital communication devices. h. Demonstrate online and offline diagnostic tests and procedures. i. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing a minimum of 15 calendar

days prior to the Factory Tests. 1) Engineer has the option to witness all required tests.

7. Make following documentation available to the Engineer at test site during the tests: a. Contract Documents. b. Factory Demonstration Testing procedures. c. List of equipment to be testing including make, model, and serial number. d. Shop Drawing submittal data for equipment being tested.

8. Deficiencies shall be corrected prior to shipment from the Contractor’s factory. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor panel fronts rigidly into wall system with approved anchorage devices.

B. Anchor panels in a manner to prevent the enclosure from racking, which may cause the doors to become misaligned.

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. Schedule:

TAG NUMBER

LOCATION TYPE ACCESS COLOR

RTU Pump Station NEMA 12 Wall Gray

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13449 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) FOR INSTRUMENTATION

AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Type IC1 SPD - Dedicated 120 Vac circuit, series connection, control panel

mounted. 2. Type IC3 SPD - Discrete 120 Vac control signal, control panel mounted. 3. Type IC5 SPD - Analog instrumentation signal, control panel mounted.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

a. C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

b. C62.41.1, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

c. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

d. C62.45, Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. LS 1, Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 497B, Standard for Safety Protectors for Data Communications and Fire-Alarm

Circuits. b. 1283, Standard for Safety Electromagnetic Interference Filters. c. 1363, Standard for Safety Relocatable Power Taps. d. 1449, Standard for Safety Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

B. Qualifications: 1. Provide devices for a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the

development, design, testing, listing and manufacturing of SPDs of the types and ratings required for a period of ten years or more and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service.

2. Upon request, suppliers or manufacturers shall provide a list of not less than three customer references showing satisfactory operation.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Clamping Voltage: The voltage measured at the end of the 6 IN output leads of the SPD and from the zero voltage reference to the peak of the surge when the applied surge is induced at the 90 degree phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage.

B. Let-Through Voltage: The voltage measured at the end of the 6 IN output leads of the SPD and from the system peak voltage to the peak of the surge when the applied surge is induced at the 90 degree phase angle of the applied system frequency voltage.

C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum steady state voltage at which the SPD device can operate and meet it specification within its rated temperature.

D. Maximum Surge Current: 1. The maximum 8 x 20 microsecond surge current pulse the SPD device is capable of

surviving on a single-impulse basis without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10 percent deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current.

2. Listed by mode, since number and type of components in any SPD may vary by mode.

E. Protection Modes: This parameter identifies the modes for which the SPD has directly connected protection elements, i.e., line-to-neutral (L-N), line-to-line (L-L), line-to-ground (L-G), neutral-to-ground (N-G).

F. Surge Current per Phase: 1. The per phase rating is the total surge current capacity connected to a given phase

conductor. 2. For example, a wye system surge current per phase would equal L-N plus L-G; a

delta system surge current per phase would equal L-L plus L-G. a. The N-G mode is not included in the per phase calculation.

G. System Peak Voltage: The electrical equipment supply voltage sine wave peak (i.e., for a 120 V system the L-N peak voltage is 170 V).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. For named products, submit only a catalog cut sheet.

a. For all other products, submit the data required below. 3. See Section 13440. 4. Product technical data for non-specified models:

a. Manufacturer’s experience. b. Standard catalog cut sheet. c. Electrical and mechanical drawing showing unit dimensions, weights, mounting

provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. d. Create a Product Data Sheet for each different model number of SPD provided.

1) Data in the Product Data Sheet heading: a) SPD Type per PART 2 of the Specification. b) Manufacturer’s Name. c) Product model number.

2) Data in the Product Data Sheet body: a) Column one: Specified value/feature of every paragraph of Part 2 of the

Specification. b) Column two: Manufacturer’s certified value confirming the product

meets the specified value/feature.


3) Data in the Product Data Sheet closing: a) Signature of the manufacturer’s official (printed and signed). b) Title of the official. c) Date of signature.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:


1.5 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum of a 5-year Limited Warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers model numbers listed in the individual product paragraphs below are acceptable.

2.2 TYPE IC1 SPD

A. Approved Products: 1. Cutler Hammer AGSHW CH-120N-15-XS. 2. EDCO HSP121BT-1RU. 3. MTL MA15/D/1/SI. 4. Phoenix Contact SFP 1-20/120AC (2856702).

B. Standards: UL 1449.

C. Design: 1. General:

a. Mounted internally to control panels for point-of-use loads. b. MOV based or multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression

system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for each phase,

neutral and ground that will accept #14 through #12 conductors. f. Device monitoring: Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators that

monitors the on-line status of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases.

2. Operating voltage: 120 Vac. 3. Operating current: 15 A minimum. 4. Operating frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. 5. Modes of protection: All modes, L-N, L-G and N-G. 6. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130 percent of system peak

voltage. 7. Maximum surge current: 20,000A per phase, 10,000A per mode minimum. 8. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity: 1000 impulses with no degradation of

more than 10 percent deviation of the clamping voltage. 9. Fusing: Optional integral unit level and/or component level short circuit and/or

thermal overload protection. a. External protection as recommended by manufacturer.


10. Maximum clamping voltages, dynamic test with voltages measured from the zero voltage reference and 90 degree phase angle:

IEEE C62.41 System

Voltage Test Mode B Comb. Wave A Ring Wave UL 1449 L-N 400 V 300 V 330 V L-G 500 V 400 V 400 V

L-N = 120 V

N-G 500 V 400 V 400 V

2.3 TYPE IC3 SPD

A. Approved Products: 1. EDCO DRS-130RMS. 2. MTL MA-15/D/1/SI. 3. MTL SD-150X. 4. Phoenix Contact PT 2x1VA-120AC-ST (2839185) with PT BE/FM (2839282) base

for non-isolated wiring. 5. Phoenix Contact PT-2 PE/S-120 AC-ST (2839334 with PT-BE/FM (2839282) base

for isolated wiring.

B. Standards: UL 497B or UL 1449.


a. Mounted internally to control panels for point-of-use loads. b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: Provide unit with external terminal screws for each phase,

neutral and ground that will accept #14 through #12 conductors. f. Device monitoring: Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators that

monitors the on-line status of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases.

2. Operating voltage: 120 Vac. 3. Operating current: 3 A minimum. 4. Operating frequency: 45 to 65 Hz. 5. Modes of protection: L-N; when ground conductor is present L-G and N-G. 6. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130 percent of system peak

voltage. 7. Maximum surge current: 6000 A per phase, 3000A per mode minimum. 8. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity:

a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200A, 10x1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500A, 10x1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400A, 10x700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000A, 8x20 microsecond waveform.

9. Maximum clamping voltages, measured from the zero voltage reference: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following:

1) 400A, 10x700 microsecond waveform: 200 percent of system voltage. 2) IEEE B3 combination wave: 250 percent of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 ring wave: 200 percent of system peak voltage. 4) IEEE A3 ring wave: 200 percent of system peak voltage. 5) Mode N-G clamping voltage may be 175 percent higher than the L-G levels.



2.4 TYPE IC5 SPD

A. Approved Products: 1. Cutler Hammer DHW2P036. 2. EDCO DRS-036 or PC642C-036 with PCB1B base. 3. MTL SD32 or SD32X. 4. Phoenix Contact PT 2x2-24DC-ST (2838228) with PT 2x2-BE (2838208) or PT

2x2+F-BE (2839224) base.

B. Standards: UL 497B.


a. Mounted internally to control panels for protection of equipment connected to analog signal loops.

b. Multi-stage hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. c. Designed for series connection. d. Enclosure: Metallic or plastic, flange or DIN rail mounting. e. Field connection: The unit shall have external terminal screws for line and

ground conductors. 2. Operating voltage: 24 Vdc or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Modes of protection: All modes, L-L and L-G. 4. Maximum continuous operating voltage: Less than 130 percent of system peak

voltage. 5. Maximum surge current: 10,000 A. 6. Minimum repetitive surge current capacity:

a. The SPD shall meet one of the following: 1) 1000 occurrences of a 200A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 2) 400 occurrences of a 500A, 10 x 1000 microsecond waveform. 3) 100 occurrences of a 400A, 10 x 700 microsecond waveform. 4) 100 occurrences of a 2000A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. 5) 10 occurrences of a 10,000A, 8 x 20 microsecond waveform.

7. Maximum clamping voltages, L-L: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following:

1) 400A, 10x700 microsecond waveform: 400 percent of system voltage. 2) 10,000A, 8x20 microsecond waveform: 400 percent of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 225 percent of system voltage.

8. Maximum clamping voltages, L-G: a. The SPD shall meet one of the following:

1) 400A, 10x700 microsecond waveform: 200 percent of system voltage. 2) 10,000A, 8x20 microsecond waveform: 200 percent of system voltage. 3) IEEE B3 combination wave: 300 percent of system voltage.


A. Performance tests to be performed or independently verified by a certified testing laboratory.

B. The SPD are to be tested as a complete SPD system including: Integral unit level and/or component level fusing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



B. Type IC1 SPD: 1. Application examples:

a. Incoming 120 V power to control panels. b. Line side of 120 V power terminals to equipment (e.g., PLCs, transmitters).

2. Connected in series with the equipment’s branch circuit. 3. Provide fuse protection as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 5. Connect all SPDs in the panel to the same grounding point.

C. Type IC3 SPD: 1. Application examples:

a. Outdoor field mounted float switches, position switches, etc., where the conductors are routed overhead or underground.

2. Connected in series with the equipment. 3. Provide fuse protection as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 5. Connect all SPDs in the panel to the same grounding point.

D. Type IC5 SPD: 1. Application examples:

a. Outdoor field mounted transmitter (flow, level, etc.) where the conductors are routed overhead or underground.

b. Indoor mounted transmitter located in a separate building from the control panel and the conductors are routed overhead or underground.

2. Connect in series with the equipment. 3. Flange mount or DIN rail mount in control panel. 4. Connect all SPDs in the control panel to the same grounding point. 5. Verify SPDs series resistance and capacitance does not interfere with the

transmitters signal.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 14305 BRIDGE CRANES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Electric, top running bridge cranes.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association ABMA). 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 3. American Welding Society (AWS). 4. Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Inc. (CMAA):

a. 70, Standard Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes. b. 74, Standard Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder

Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

B. Qualifications: 1. Welding shall be done by certified welders and shall be in accordance with the AWS

standards. 2. Bridge crane system supplier shall have at least 5 year’s experience in designing

and installing systems similar in scope to the systems specified.

C. Coordinate installation to assure proper operation within the confines dictated by structural, equipment, mechanical and electrical installations.

D. Verify hook and lifting heights for each application to assure each system is completely operational over range intended.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hook Height: The minimum acceptable distance in feet from bottom of hook in full raised position to the nearest floor surface.

B. Lift Height: The distance in feet from the bottom of the hook in full raised position to the surface of the lowest floor from which items may be hoisted.

C. Ultimate Load-Carrying Capacity: Live load, weights of all equipment and an allowance for impact.

D. Total Trolley Capacity: The ultimate load-carrying capacity of the trolley based on the ultimate strength of the material used (with a 5:1 safety factor) and the bearing life.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


submittal process.


2. See Section 11005. 3. Girder layout including supports, connections, rail, and appurtenances. 4. Load test results. 5. Qualifications of bridge crane system supplier.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Bridge crane hoists and trolleys:

a. Acco. b. P & H. c. Wright. d. Or approved equal.

2. Bridge crane assembled system: a. Proserv Anchor Crane Group. b. Any supplier/manufacturer meeting the requirements of the Contract

Documents.



A. Performance and Configuration Requirements: a. Duty cycle rating: Class D, H3 for hoist system. b. Lifting speed: 15/5 to 24/4 FT/min. c. Hoist Trolley speed: 50/17 to 60/15 FT/min. d. Bridge Trolley speed: 100 FPM. e. Type:

1) Under-running, dual-drive electric. 2) Direct drive end trucks.

f. Rated capacity: 3 tons. g. Span: See Drawings. h. Drive horsepower: ½ HP maximum each drive. i. Power source: 460 Vac, 3 PH, 60 Hz. j. Crane overhead clearance: 3 IN minimum to nearest obstruction. k. Hook height: 13 FT – 0 IN (minimum) from pump room finish floor. l. Lift height: 24 FT (minimum). m. See Drawings for required hook travel area.

B. Design load carrying parts, except structural members and gears, so that the calculated stress in the material, based on rated load, shall not exceed 20 percent of the published average ultimate strength of the material.

C. Comply with CMAA #70 and CMAA #74.

D. Runway Rails: 1. Install straight, parallel and level as shown on the Drawings; installation and

connections to coordinate with the runway structure shown. 2. See Section 05120 for runway installation requirements.



E. Girder: 1. Structural steel from standard structural shapes. 2. Design girder to resist vertical, lateral and torsional forces and stresses as defined

by CMAA #74. 3. The maximum vertical deflection of the girder produced by the dead load, weight of

the trolley and hoist and the rated load shall not exceed 1/600 of the span. 4. Locate safety stops at each end of bridge girder to prevent overtravel of trolley hoist.

F. End Trucks: 1. Carry crane bridge on end trucks sized to carry the rated load when it is lifted at one

(1) end of the crane bridge. 2. End truck wheelbase minimum of 1/8 of the crane span. 3. Construct from structural channels welded and bolted into a rigid box section. 4. Assure proper alignment of axles. 5. Design so that drop of truck is limited to 1 IN in case of axle or wheel failure.

G. Crane Wheels: 1. Top-running double flanged wheels of forged steel, cast-iron, cast carbon or alloy

steel. 2. Support each wheel on roller bearings mounted on stationary axles suitable to take

radial and thrust loads. 3. Factory lubricate and seal bearings. 4. Wheels may be heat treated.

H. Crane Drives: 1. Provide each end truck with a helical gear motor reducer. 2. Motors integral with fully-enclosed oil splash lubricated gear reducers. 3. Support gear reduction shaft by precision ball or roller bearings. 4. Design motors and drives to supply the crane speed specified. 5. Permanently lubricate and seal motor ball-bearings.

I. Bearings: 5000 HRS ABMA L-10.

J. Gearing: 1. All gearing except the final reduction at the wheels shall run in oil or be splash

lubricated. 2. Comply with AGMA specifications for load ratings. 3. Gears not enclosed in gear boxes.

a. Safety guards. b. Provisions for lubrication and inspection.

K. Bridge Brake: 1. Capable of stopping bridge within a distance in feet equal to 10 percent of full load

speed (in fpm) when traveling at full speed with full load.

L. Bumpers and Stops: 1. Capable of stopping the crane at a rate of deceleration not to exceed 3 FT per

second when traveling in either direction at 20 percent of rated speed. 2. Sufficient energy absorbing capacity to stop the crane when traveling at full speed

with full load. 3. Stops designed to resist full load speed. 4. Locate stops at limit of bridge travel. 5. Runway stops shall not engage wheel treads.

M. Electrical: 1. Provide disconnect device mounted on crane with overcurrent protection for the

controllers. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


N. Hoists: 1. Electric wire rope hoists:

a. Low headroom models, as required. b. Hoist frames of welded heavy steel plate construction. c. Oiltight gear casing for oil bath lubrication of gears. d. Construct rope drum and surrounding units to minimize abrading, crushing or

jamming of the rope during usage. e. Drum diameter not less than 18 times the diameter of the rope used. f. Assure that two (2) complete wraps of rope remain on the drum after lowering

the load hook through its rated lift distance, unless a lower limit device is provided, in which case provide a minimum of one (1) complete wrap.

g. Double reeving for hoists with total lift height greater than hook height. h. Sheave and drum grooves shall be smooth and free from surface irregularities

which could cause rope damage. i. Provide running sheaves with means for lubrication. j. Bearings:

1) Antifriction type. 2) Minimum ABMA L-10 life of 1250 HRS for Class H1, 2500 HRS for Class

H2, and 5000 HRS for Class H3, based on full rated speed and mean effective load K of 0.65.

k. Mechanical load brake. l. Lower limit switch to stop hoist when hook reaches its lower limit. m. Motor:

1) Motor brake. a) Internal disc magnetic type. b) Rated for 150 percent of motor torque. c) Delivers rapidly with minimal hook drift.

2) TENV motors operable on 460 V, 3 PH, 60 cycle power. 3) Permanently lubricate and seal motor ball-bearings. 4) Provide an upper limit switch to stop the hoist motor and apply the holding

brake when the hook reaches its upper limit. n. Controls:

1) Motor starters, electric conduit, control stations, magnetic reversing contactors and low-voltage transformer, necessary for a complete and totally functional conveying system.

o. Mark the hoist with the following information: 1) Name and address of manufacturer. 2) Manufacturer's unit identification number. 3) Rated load. 4) Voltage of AC or DC power supply and phase and frequency of AC power

supply. 5) Rated amperage.

O. Trolleys: 1. Motor-driven. 2. Completely compatible with hoists, cranes, and monorails specified. 3. Meet NEC standards according to classifications shown on Drawings. 4. Minimum ABMA L-10 bearing life of 5000 HRS based on 75 percent of the wheel

load, excluding impact. 5. Motor Driven:

a. Operate at a variable speed as scheduled. b. Enclose internal gears in oiltight housing. c. Design motors to operate with 460 V, 3 PH, 60 cycle power supply.

6. Plain trolleys:


a. Frame consisting of thick rolled steel sections extending beyond wheel flanges to protect wheels.

b. Alloy steel hardened axles, ball-bearings and pressed steel wheels. 1) Carburized and hardened ball tread wheels. 2) Factory lubricated requiring no additional lubrication.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Electrification and Controls: 1. Provide electrical power to the motor-driven hoists and trolleys using the following

method as scheduled: a. Festoon tagline system:

1) Include all components needed for a complete and operable system. 2. Controls:

a. Radio-controllers with backup pendant-operation. b. Two complete sets of radio controls provided. c. Clearly mark the function of each button.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install runway rails with center-to-center distance and elevation within +1/8 IN.

B. Warning Signs: 1. Maximum 10 FT intervals along rails with electrical conductors. 2. At stairs or ladders located 6 FT or less from the rail(s). 3. Warning sign legend and colors:

a. DANGER (red). b. HIGH VOLTAGE (black). c. 480 Vac (black). d. KEEP OFF (red).


A. Test each crane using 110 percent rated load.

B. Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 2. Supervise pre-startup adjustments and installation checks and all field tests. 3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed

properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for 8 HRS at jobsite on operation and maintenance of the

hoist, trolley, and crane equipment.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Process piping systems. 2. Utility piping systems. 3. Plumbing piping systems.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities. 4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 5. Section 10400 - Identification Devices. 6. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 7. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements. 8. Section 13442 - Primary Elements and Transmitters. 9. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems. 10. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements. 11. Section 15183 - Pipe, Duct and Equipment Insulation.



a. M36, Corrugated Steel Culverts and Underdrains. b. M190, Standard Specification for Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert

Pipe and Pipe Arches. c. M252, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing. d. M294, Interim Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe 12 to 24 Inch

Diameter. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. c. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings. d. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. e. B16.26, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. f. B36.19, Stainless Steel Pipe. g. B40.100, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.

4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless. b. A74, Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. c. A106, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-

Temperature Service. d. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. e. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges,

Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service. f. A197, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron.


g. A234, Standard Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.

h. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.

i. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.

j. A518, Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings. k. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. l. A587, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel

Pipe for the Chemical Industry. m. A774, Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel

Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures. n. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel

Tubular Products. o. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. p. C14, Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. q. C76, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and

Sewer Pipe. r. C425, Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and

Fittings. s. C443, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using

Rubber Gaskets. t. C564, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings. u. C700, Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard

Strength and Perforated. v. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80, and 120. w. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 40. x. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 80. y. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion

Materials. z. F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. aa. F441, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. bb. F491, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride)(PVDF) Plastic-Lined

Ferrous Metal Pipe and Fittings. 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. B300, Standard for Hypochlorites. b. C200, Steel Water Pipe 6 IN and Larger. c. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN

through 144 IN. d. C208, Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. e. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. f. C651, Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. g. C800, Standard for Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.

6. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): a. C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 IN through 48 IN for Water

and Other Liquids. b. C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure

Pipe and Fittings. c. C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges.


d. C151/A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast In Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds for Water or Other Liquids.

e. C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 IN Through 16 IN, for Water and Other Liquids.

7. Chlorine Institute, Inc. (CI): a. Pamphlet 6, Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine.

8. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): a. 301, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for

Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 9. International Plumbing Code (IPC). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 54, National Fuel Gas Code. b. 69, Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems.

11. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

B. Coordinate flange dimensions and drillings between piping, valves, and equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hazardous Gas Systems: Digester gas, chlorine gas, sulfur dioxide gas, carbon dioxide gas, lab gases.


A. Piping Systems Organization and Definition: 1. Piping services are grouped into designated systems according to the chemical and

physical properties of the fluid conveyed, system pressure, piping size and system materials of construction.

2. See PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES in PART 3.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



a. Exterior yard piping drawings (minimum scale 1 IN equals 10 FT) with information including: 1) Dimensions of piping lengths. 2) Invert or centerline elevations of piping crossings. 3) Acknowledgement of bury depth requirements. 4) Details of fittings, tapping locations, thrust blocks, restrained joint segments,

harnessed joint segments, hydrants, and related appurtenances. 5) Acknowledge designated valve or gate tag numbers, manhole numbers,

instrument tag numbers, pipe and line numbers. 6) Line slopes and vents.

b. Interior piping drawings (minimum scale 1/8 IN equals 1 FT) with information including: 1) Dimensions of piping from column lines or wall surfaces. 2) Centerline dimensions of piping. 3) Centerline elevation and size of intersecting ductwork, conduit/conduit

racks, or other potential interferences requiring coordination. 4) Location and type of pipe supports and anchors. 5) Locations of valves and valve actuator type. 6) Details of fittings, tapping locations, equipment connections, flexible

expansion joints, connections to equipment, and related appurtenances. 7) Acknowledgement of valve, equipment and instrument tag numbers. 8) Provisions for expansion and contraction.


9) Line slopes and air release vents. 10) Rough-in data for plumbing fixtures.

c. Schedule of interconnections to existing piping and method of connection. 3. Product technical data including:


b. Copies of manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling, delivery, storage and installation.

c. Separate schedule sheet for each piping system scheduled in this Section showing compliance of all system components. 1) Attach technical product data on gaskets, pipe, fittings, and other

components.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Qualifications of lab performing disinfection analysis on water systems. 2. Test reports:

a. Copies of pressure test results on all piping systems. b. Reports defining results of dielectric testing and corrective action taken. c. Disinfection test report. d. Notification of time and date of piping pressure tests.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:



A. Protect pipe coating during handling using methods recommended by manufacturer. 1. Use of bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars or narrow skids in contact with coated

pipe is not permitted.

B. Prevent damage to pipe during transit. 1. Repair abrasions, scars, and blemishes. 2. If repair of satisfactory quality cannot be achieved, replace damaged material

immediately.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Insulating unions:

a. "Dielectric" by Epco. 2. Dirt strainers (Y type):

a. Mueller (#351). b. Sarco. c. Armstrong.

3. Chemical strainers (Y type): a. Chemtrol. b. Asahi.

4. Dry disconnect couplings: a. Kamlock.

5. Dielectric flange kit: a. PSI. b. Maloney.


c. Central Plastics. 6. Pipe saddles (for gage installation):

a. Dresser Style 91 (steel and ductile iron systems). b. Dresser Style 194 (non-metallic systems).


2.2 PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES

A. Piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances are subject to requirements of specific piping specification schedules located at the end of PART 3 of this Section.

2.3 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Insulating Components: 1. Dielectric flange kits:

a. Flat faced. b. 1/8 IN thick dielectric gasket, phenolic, non-asbestos. c. Suitable for 175 psi, 210 DegF. d. 1/32 IN wall thickness bolt sleeves. e. 1/8 IN thick phenolic insulating washers.

2. Dielectric unions: a. Screwed end connections. b. Rated at 175 psi, 210 DegF. c. Provide dielectric gaskets suitable for continuous operation at union rated

temperature and pressure.

B. Dirt Strainers: 1. Y-type. 2. Composition bronze. 3. Rated for test pressure and temperature of system in which they are installed. 4. 20 mesh Monel screen. 5. Threaded bronze plug in the blowoff outlet. 6. Threaded NPT end connections.

C. Strainers for Chemical Applications: 1. Y-type. 2. Strainers of same material, test pressure, and temperature rating as system in which

strainer is placed.

D. Reducers: 1. Furnish appropriate size reducers and reducing fittings to mate pipe to equipment

connections. 2. Connection size requirements may change from those shown on Drawings

depending on equipment furnished.

E. Protective Coating and Lining: 1. Include pipe, fittings, and appurtenances where coatings, linings, paint, tests and

other items are specified. 2. Field paint pipe in accordance with Section 09905.

F. Underground Warning Tape: 1. See Section 10400.

G. Pressure Gages: 1. See Section 11005 and Section 13442.

H. Dry Disconnect Couplings: 1. Adapters:

a. Male adapters: Size shown on Drawings. b. Adapters:


1) Female NPT end connection for sludge and flush applications. 2) Male NPT end connection for chemical applications.

c. Construct adapters for sludge applications from cast iron or steel. d. Construct adapters for chemical and PVC system applications 3 IN and below

from polypropylene. 1) Above 3 IN size, provide stainless steel units.

2. Couplers: a. Built-in valve and spring loaded poppet which close automatically when

disconnected. b. Designed to remain with only one (1)arm locked in closed position. c. Construct couplers for sludge applications fabricated from material utilized for

adapters. d. Construct couplers for chemical and PVC system applications 3 IN and less

from polypropylene with stainless steel arms and pins. 1) Above 3 IN, provide stainless steel units.

e. Gasket: Compatible with conveyed liquid. 3. Dust caps: For all adapters.

I. Valves: 1. See schematics and details for definition of manual valves used in each system

under 4 IN in size. a. See Drawings schedule for valve types 4 IN and above and for automatic valves

used in each system. 2. See Section 15100.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXTERIOR BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide a minimum of 4 FT and maximum of 8 FT earth cover over exterior buried piping systems and appurtenances conveying water, fluids, or solutions subject to freezing.

B. Enter and exit through structure walls, floors, and ceilings by using penetrations and seals specified in Section 01800 and as shown on Drawings.

C. When entering or leaving structures with buried mechanical joint piping, install joint within 2 FT of point where pipe enters or leaves structure. 1. Install second joint not more than 6 FT nor less than 4 FT from first joint.

D. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion and contraction movement.

E. Laying Pipe In Trench: 1. Excavate and backfill trench in accordance with Section 02221. 2. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to Specifications. 3. Grade trench bottom and excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on trench bottom. 4. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's directions after joints

have been thoroughly cleaned and examined. 5. Except for first two (2) joints, before making final connections of joints, install two (2)

full sections of pipe with earth tamped along side of pipe or final with bedding material placed.

6. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions. a. Never lay pipe in water except where approved by Engineer.

7. Seal open end of line with watertight plug if pipe laying stopped. 8. Remove water in trench before removal of plug.

F. Lining Up Push-On Joint Piping: 1. Lay piping on route lines shown on Drawings.


2. Deflect from straight alignments or grades by vertical or horizontal curves or offsets. 3. Observe maximum deflection values stated in manufacturer's written literature. 4. Provide special bends when specified or where required alignment exceeds

allowable deflections stipulated. 5. Install shorter lengths of pipe in such length and number that angular deflection of

any joint, as represented by specified maximum deflection, is not exceeded.

G. Anchorage and Blocking: 1. Provide reaction blocking, anchors, joint harnesses, or other acceptable means for

preventing movement of piping caused by forces in or on buried piping tees, wye branches, plugs, or bends.

2. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid undisturbed earth wall. a. Concrete blocks shall not cover pipe joints.

3. Provide bearing area of concrete in accordance with drawing detail.

H. Install underground hazard warning tape per Section 10400.

I. Install insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together.

3.2 INTERIOR AND EXPOSED EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment as shown on Drawings.

B. Alignment of piping smaller than 4 IN may not be shown; however, install according to Drawing intent and with clearance and allowance for: 1. Expansion and contraction. 2. Operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving equipment. 3. Headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles. 4. System drainage and air removal.

C. Enter and exit through structure walls, floor and ceilings using penetrations and seals specified in Section 01800 and as shown on the Drawings.

D. Install vertical piping runs plumb and horizontal piping runs parallel with structure walls.

E. Pipe Support: 1. Use methods of piping support as shown on Drawings and as required in Section

15090. 2. Where pipes run parallel and at same elevation or grade, they may be grouped and

supported from common trapeze-type hanger, provided hanger rods are increased in size as specified for total supported weight. a. The pipe in the group requiring the least maximum distance between supports

shall set the distance between trapeze hangers. 3. Size pipe supports with consideration to specific gravity of liquid being piped.

F. Locate and size sleeves and castings required for piping system. 1. Arrange for chases, recesses, inserts or anchors at proper elevation and location.

G. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems. 1. Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically approved.

H. Equipment Drainage and Miscellaneous Piping: 1. Provide drip pans and piping at equipment where condensation may occur. 2. Hard pipe stuffing box leakage to nearest floor drain. 3. Avoid piping over electrical components such as motor control centers, panelboards,

etc. a. If piping must be so routed, utilize 16 GA, 316 stainless steel drip pan under

piping and over full length of electrical equipment. b. Hard pipe drainage to nearest floor drain.

4. Collect system condensate at drip pockets, traps and blowoff valves.


5. Provide drainage for process piping at locations shown on Drawings in accordance with Drawing details.

6. For applications defined above and for other miscellaneous piping which is not addressed by a specific piping service category in PART 1, provide 304 stainless steel piping and fittings. a. Size to handle application with 3/4 IN being minimum size provided.

I. Unions: 1. Install in position which will permit valve or equipment to be removed without

dismantling adjacent piping. 2. Mechanical type couplings may serve as unions. 3. Additional flange unions are not required at flanged connections.

J. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion/contraction movement.

K. Provide full face gaskets on all systems.

L. Anchorage and Blocking: 1. Block, anchor, or harness exposed piping subjected to forces in which joints are

installed to prevent separation of joints and transmission of stress into equipment or structural components not designed to resist those stresses.

M. Equipment Pipe Connections: 1. Equipment - General:

a. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket pressure at connection or would cause unnecessary stresses to be transmitted to equipment flanges.

b. Where push-on joints are used in conjunction with flanged joints, final positioning of push-on joints shall not be made until flange joints have been tightened without strain.

c. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform gasket compression over entire area of joint. 1) Provide tightening torque in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. d. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over their entire face area

prior to installation of any bolt between the piping flange and equipment connecting flange.

e. Permit piping connected to equipment to freely move in directions parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flange are tightened.

f. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and alignment of connecting piping.

g. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not before initial fitting and alignment.

h. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of alignment, assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four (4) bolts per joint installed and tightened. 1) Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in

relationship of piping flange with equipment connecting flange. 2) Realign as necessary, install flange bolts and make equipment connection.

i. Provide utility connections to equipment shown on Drawings, scheduled or specified.

2. Plumbing and HVAC equipment: a. Make piping connections to plumbing and HVAC equipment, including but not

limited to installation of fittings, strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow control valves and relief valves provided with or as integral part of equipment.


b. Furnish and install sinks, fittings, strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow control valves, pressure relief valves, and shock absorbers which are not specified to be provided with or as integral part of equipment.

c. For each water supply piping connection to equipment, furnish and install union and gate or angle valve. 1) Provide wheel handle stop valve at each laboratory sink water supply. 2) Minimum size to be 1/2 IN.

d. Furnish and install "P" trap for each waste piping connection to equipment if waste is connected directly to building sewer system. 1) Size trap as required by IPC.

e. Stub piping for equipment, sinks, lavatories, supply and drain fittings, key stops, "P" traps, miscellaneous traps and miscellaneous brass through wall or floor and cap and protect until such time when later installation is performed.

N. Provide insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together.

O. Instrument Connections: 1. See drawing details.

3.3 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING

A. Where connection between new work and existing work is made, use suitable and proper fittings to suit conditions encountered.

B. Perform connections with existing piping at time and under conditions which will least interfere with service to customers affected by such operation.

C. Undertake connections in fashion which will disturb system as little as possible.

D. Provide suitable equipment and facilities to dewater, drain, and dispose of liquid removed without damage to adjacent property.

E. Where connections to existing systems necessitate employment of past installation methods not currently part of trade practice, utilize necessary special piping components.

F. Where connection involves potable water systems, provide disinfection methods as prescribed in these Specifications.

G. Once tie-in to each existing system is initiated, continue work continuously until tie-in is made and tested.

3.4 ACCESS PROVISIONS

A. Provide access doors or panels in walls, floors, and ceilings to permit access to valves, piping and piping appurtenances requiring service.

B. Size of access panels to allow inspection and removal of items served, minimum 10 x 14 IN size.

C. Fabricate door and frame of minimum 14 GA, stretcher leveled stock, cadmium plated or galvanized after fabrication and fitted with screw driver lock of cam type.

D. Provide with key locks, keyed alike, in public use areas.

E. Furnish panels with prime coat of paint.

F. Style and type as required for material in which door installed.

G. Where door is installed in fire-rated construction, provide door bearing UL label required for condition.



3.5 CATHODIC PROTECTION

A. Isolate, dielectrically, all piping from all other metals including reinforcing bars in concrete slabs, other pipe lines, and miscellaneous metal.

B. Make all connections from wire or cable by Thermit Cadwelding accomplished by operators experienced in this process.

C. Install all cables with a loop and overhead knot around each pipe and slack equal to at least 50 percent of the straight line length.

D. After cadwelding, coat all exposed metallic surfaces with hot applied tape.

3.6 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Provide at locations shown on the Drawings and specified.

B. See Section 11005.


A. Pipe Testing - General: 1. Test piping systems as follows:

a. Test exposed, non-insulated piping systems upon completion of system. b. Test exposed, insulated piping systems upon completion of system but prior to

application of insulation. c. Test concealed interior piping systems prior to concealment and, if system is

insulated, prior to application of insulation. d. Test buried piping (insulated and non-insulated) prior to backfilling and, if

insulated, prior to application of insulation. 2. Utilize pressures, media and pressure test durations as specified on Piping

Specification Schedules. 3. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test conditions. 4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages and calibrated volumetric

measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. a. Select each gage so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of

the gage's range. b. Notify the Engineer 24 HRS prior to each test.

5. Completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipe systems.

6. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to Engineer prior to final acceptance.

7. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks and any necessary retesting and re-examination.

B. Pressure Testing: 1. Testing medium: Unless otherwise specified in the Piping Specification Schedules,

utilize the following test media. a. Process and plant air systems:

PIPE LINE SIZE SPECIFIED TEST PRESSURE TESTING MEDIUM 2 IN and smaller 75 psi or less Air or water 2 IN and smaller Greater than 75 psi Water Greater than 2 IN 3 psi or less Air or water Greater than 2 IN Greater than 3 psi Water


b. Laboratory gases and natural gas systems: Cylinder nitrogen. c. Liquid systems:

PIPE LINE SIZE (DIA)

GRAVITY OR

PUMPED SPECIFIED TEST

PRESSURE TESTING MEDIUM

Up to and including 48 IN

Gravity 25 psig or less Air or water

Above 48 IN Gravity 25 psig or less Water All sizes Pumped 250 psig or less Water

2. Allowable leakage rates:

a. Hazardous gas systems, all exposed piping systems, all pressure piping systems and all buried, insulated piping systems which are hydrostatically pressure tested shall have zero leakage at the specified test pressure throughout the duration of the test.

b. Hydrostatic exfiltration and infiltration for sanitary and stormwater sewers (groundwater level is below the top of pipe): 1) Leakage rate: 200 GAL per inch diameter per mile of pipe per day at

average head on test section of 3 FT. 2) Average head is defined from groundwater elevation to average pipe crown. 3) Acceptable test head leakage rate for heads greater than 3 FT: Acceptable

leakage rate (gallons per inch diameter per mile per day) = 115 x (actual test head to the 1/2 power).

c. Hydrostatic infiltration test for sanitary and stormwater sewers (groundwater level is above the top of pipe): 1) Allowable leakage rate: 200 GAL per inch diameter per mile of pipe per day

when depth of groundwater over top of pipe is 2 to 6 FT. 2) Leakage rate at heads greater than 6 FT: Allowable leakage rate (gallons

per inch diameter per mile of pipe per day) = 82 x (actual head to the 1/2 power).

d. Large diameter (above 48 IN) gravity plant piping systems shall have a maximum exfiltration of 25 gpd per inch-mile.

e. Non-hazardous gas and air systems which are tested with air shall have a maximum pressure drop of 5 percent of the specified test pressure throughout the duration of the test.

f. For low pressure (less than 25 psig) air testing, the acceptable time for loss of 1 psig of air pressure shall be:


PIPE SIZE (IN DIA) TIME, MINUTES/100 FT 4 0.3 6 0.7 8 1.2

10 1.5 12 1.8 15 2.1 18 2.4 21 3.0 24 3.6 27 4.2 30 4.8 33 5.4 36 6.0 42 7.3 48 7.6

3. Hydrostatic pressure testing methodology:

a. General: 1) All joints, including welds, are to be left exposed for examination during the

test. 2) Provide additional temporary supports for piping systems designed for vapor

or gas to support the weight of the test water. 3) Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints for additional pressure

load under test. 4) Isolate equipment in piping system with rated pressure lower than pipe test

pressure. 5) Do not paint or insulate exposed piping until successful performance of

pressure test. b. Soil, waste, drain and vent systems:

1) Test at completion of installation of each stack or section of piping by filling system with water and checking joints and fittings for leaks.

2) Eliminate leaks before proceeding with work or concealing piping. 3) Minimum test heights shall be 10 FT above highest stack inlet.

c. Larger diameter (above 36 IN) gravity plant piping: 1) Plug downstream end of segment to be tested.

a) Provide bracing as required. 2) Fill segment and upstream structure to normal operating level as per

hydraulic profile. 3) Allow 24 HRS for absorption losses.

a) Refill to original level. 4) Provide reservoir to maintain constant head over duration of test. 5) Record reservoir water volume at beginning and end of test.

4. Natural gas systems - testing methodology: a. Maintain specified test pressure until each joint has been thoroughly examined

for leaks by means of soap suds and glycerine. b. Wipe joints clean after test.

5. Air testing methodology: a. General:

1) Assure air is ambient temperature. b. Low pressure air testing:

1) Place plugs in line and inflate to 25 psig. 2) Check pneumatic plugs for proper sealing.


3) Introduce low pressure air into sealed line segment until air pressure reaches 4 psig greater than ground water that may be over the pipe. a) Use test gage conforming to ASME B40.100 with 0 to 15 psi scale and

accuracy of 1 percent of full range. 4) Allow 2 minutes for air pressure to stabilize. 5) After stabilization period (3.5 psig minimum pressure in pipe) discontinue air

supply to line segment. 6) Record pressure at beginning and end of test.

C. Dielectric Testing Methods and Criteria: 1. Provide electrical check between metallic non-ferrous pipe or appurtenances and

ferrous elements of construction to assure discontinuity has been maintained. 2. Wherever electrical contact is demonstrated by such test, locate the point or points

of continuity and correct the condition.

3.8 CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND PURGING

A. Cleaning: 1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing. 2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation. 3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and then

properly dress and make joint. 4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal cuttings, dirt,

or other foreign materials which may have entered the system. 5. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean work installed

under these Specifications. a. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings,

and sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from testing, or from other causes.

b. Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to Owner.

6. After erection of piping and tubing, but prior to installation of service outlet valves, blow natural gas {liquefied petroleum gas} and digester gas systems clear of free moisture and foreign matter by means of air, nitrogen or carbon dioxide. a. Oxygen shall never be used.

7. Clean chlorine piping in accordance with CI Pamphlet 6.

B. Disinfection of Potable Water Systems: 1. After favorable performance of pressure test and prior to Final Acceptance,

thoroughly flush entire potable water piping system including supply, source and any appurtenant devices and perform disinfection as prescribed.

2. Perform work, including preventative measures during construction, in full compliance with AWWA C651.

3. Perform disinfection using sodium hypochlorite complying with AWWA B300. 4. Flush each segment of system to provide flushing velocity of not less than 2.5 FT

per second. 5. Drain flushing water to sanitary sewer.

a. Do not drain flushing water to receiving stream. 6. Use continuous feed method of application.

a. Tag system during disinfection procedure to prevent use. 7. After required contact period, flush system to remove traces of heavily chlorinated

water. 8. After final flushing and before placing water in service, obtain an independent

laboratory approved by the Owner to collect samples and test for bacteriological quality.


a. Repeat entire disinfection procedures until satisfactory results are obtained. 9. Secure and deliver to Owner, satisfactory bacteriological reports on samples taken

from system. a. Ensure sampling and testing procedures are in full compliance to AWWA C651,

local water purveyor and applicable requirements of State of Colorado.

3.9 LOCATION OF BURIED OBSTACLES

A. Furnish exact location and description of buried utilities encountered and thrust block placement.

B. Reference items to definitive reference point locations such as found property corners, entrances to buildings, existing structure lines, fire hydrants and related fixed structures.

C. Include such information as location, elevation, coverage, supports and additional pertinent information.

D. Incorporate information on "As-Recorded" Drawings.

3.10 PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulate pipe and pipe fittings in accordance with Section 15183.

3.11 SCHEDULES

A. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 3 1. General:

a. Piping symbol and service: 1) Pump Station Suction Piping. 2) 24” Zone 2 Connection. 3) 24” Zone 3 Waterline. 4) Pump Station Discharge Piping.

b. Test requirements: 1) Test medium: Water. 2) Pressure: 125 psig. 3) Duration: 6 HRS.

c. Gaskets: 1) Flanged, push-on and mechanical joints (ductile iron): Rubber,

AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11. 2) Grooved coupling joints (ductile and steel): Rubber, AWWA C606. 3) Flanged joints (steel): AWWA C207.

2. System components: a. Pipe size 3 IN through 24 IN (Ductile Iron):

1) Exposed service: a) Material:

(1) Flanged: Ductile iron, Class 53. (2) Grooved type joint system: Use pipe thickness per AWWA C606.

b) Reference: AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15. c) Lining: Cement. d) Coating: Paint. e) Fittings: Either AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 ductile or gray iron. f) Joints:

(1) Flanged or grooved type mechanical coupling (AWWA C606) joints. (2) With both systems, provide screwed-on flanges at equipment,

valves and structure penetrations. 2) Buried service:

a) Materials: Ductile iron, Class 50. b) Reference: AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. c) Lining: Cement.


d) Coating: Bituminous. e) Provide polyethylene encasement:

(1) DIP, fittings, harness rods, valves and valve boxes shall be hand wrapped using polyethylene with a minimum wall thickness of eight (8) mils and two (2) inch wide, ten (10) mil thick, polyethylene pressure sensitive tape to close seams or hold overlaps.

(2) Polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Standard C-105. The raw material used to manufacture polyethylene film shall be Type 1, Class A, Grade E-1 in accordance with ASTM Standard Designation D-1248.

f) Fittings: (1) Either AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 ductile or gray iron. (2) Optional: AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53 ductile iron compact fittings

for sizes 3 IN to 16 IN. g) Joints: Push-on with mechanical (stuffing box type) joints at fittings and

valves. b. Pipe size 3 IN through 42 IN: (Steel)

1) Exposed service: a) Material: Steel, fabricated pipe. b) Reference: AWWA C200. c) Lining: Fusion Bonded Epoxy. d) Coating: Paint. e) Fittings: AWWA C208. f) Joints: Butt-welded with rigid AWWA C207 flanges at equipment,

valves, and structure penetrations. 2) Buried service:

a) Material: Steel, fabricated pipe. b) Reference: AWWA C200. c) Lining: Fusion Bonded Epoxy. d) Coating: Tape Wrap. e) Fittings: AWWA C208. f) Joints: Butt welded.

B. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 17 1. General:

a. Piping symbol and service: 1) Foundation Drain.

b. Test requirements: 1) Test medium: Water. 2) Pressure: None, observed for free flow. 3) Duration: 6 HRS.

2. System components: a. Pipe size 3 IN to 15 IN:

1) Buried service: a) Material: Corrugated polyethylene, perforated. b) Reference: AASHTO M252. c) Lining: None. d) Coatings: None. e) Fittings: Corrugated, AASHTO M252. f) Joints: Split or snap type couplings.

C. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 19 1. General:

a. Piping symbol and service: 1) Refrigerant.

b. Test requirements: 1) Test medium: R-22 refrigerant.


2) Pressure: Normal full load operating pressures as specified by cooling equipment manufacturer.

3) Duration: 6 HRS. 4) Leak location method: Test all fittings with bubble solution followed by

Halide torch or electronic platinum diode meter. 2. System components:

a. Pipe size up to 2 IN: 1) Exposed service:

a) Material: Factory pre-charged copper line sets sized per manufacturer recommendations for 2 DegF line loss.

b) Solder: High temperature (melting point not less than 1000 DegF) silver solder compatible with tubing and fittings.

c) Lining: None. d) Coating: Paint. e) Fittings: Copper, as required to adapt line sets to equipment. f) Joints: Soldered.

D. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 21 1. General:

a. Piping symbol and service: 1) Waste Piping.

b. Test requirements: 1) Test medium: Water. 2) Pressure: See Article 3.7. 3) Duration: 6 HRS.

c. Gaskets: Rubber, ASTM C564. 2. System components:

a. Pipe size 1-1/4 IN and 1-1/2 IN: 1) Exposed service.

a) Material: Galvanized steel, Schedule 40. b) Reference: ASTM A53. c) Lining: Galvanized. d) Coating: Paint. e) Fittings: Cast iron drainage.

(1) ASTM A126, Class B. f) Joints: Threaded.

b. Pipe size 2 IN and larger: 1) Exposed service.

a) Material: Cast iron soil pipe. b) Reference: ASTM A74, CISPI 301. c) Lining: None. d) Coating: Paint. e) Fittings: ASTM A74. f) Joints: No-hub with elastomeric sealing sleeve and stainless steel

clamp assembly conforming to CISPI 301. 2) Buried service (to 5 FT outside of structure):

a) Material: Cast-iron soil pipe. b) Reference: ASTM A74. c) Lining: None. d) Coating: Bituminous. e) Fittings: ASTM A74. f) Joints: Hub and spigot.

Soil and Waste Piping Installation:

3. Install horizontal soil or waste lines less than 4 IN diameter with a slope of not less than 1/4 IN/FT or 2 percent toward the point of disposal.


4. Install 4 IN and larger piping at 1/8 IN per foot. 5. Install as close to construction as possible to maintain maximum head room. 6. Make changes of direction with 1/8 bends and junctions with wye fittings. 7. Use short wye fittings in vertical pipe only. 8. Install handhole test tee at base of each stack. 9. Install cleanouts at dead ends, at changes of direction and at 50 FT intervals on

horizontal runs. a. Where cleanouts occur in concealed spaces, provide with extensions to floors

above or to walls as required. 10. Install piping true to grade and alignment.

a. Begin at the system low point. 11. Locate vertical extensions of underground piping below partition walls for

concealment in wall. a. In locations where hubs are wider than partition, set hubs 1 IN below final floor.

12. Install concealed in finished structures such as administration and office facilities and at locations shown on Drawings.

13. For hub and spigot joints, install hub facing flow.

Vent Piping Installation: 14. Run vent stack parallel to each soil or waste stack to receive branch vents from

fixtures. 15. Originate each vent stack from soil or waste pipe at its base. 16. Where possible, combine soil, waste or vent stacks before passing through roof so

as to minimize roof openings. 17. Offset pipes running close to exterior walls away from such walls before passing

through roof to permit proper flashing. 18. Provide pipes passing through roofs with cast iron increasers minimum of 12 IN

below roof one size larger than pipe but in no case less than 4 IN. 19. Terminate each vent with approved frostproof jacket. 20. Carry vent stacks 4 IN and larger full size through roof.

a. Extend vent stacks at least 12 IN above roofing. 21. Pipe vents from pressure regulating devices in compliance with local codes. 22. Install concealed in finished structures such as administration and office facilities

and at locations shown on Drawings.

E. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 27 1. General:

a. Piping symbol and service: 1) Sump.

b. Test requirements pressure lines: 1) Test medium: Water. 2) Pressure: 100 psig. 3) Duration: 6 HRS.

c. Gaskets and O-rings: 1) O-rings and flanged joints: Neoprene or rubber.

2. System components: a. Pipe size 12 IN and smaller:

1) Exposed service: a) Material: PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 80. b) Reference: ASTM D1785. c) Lining: None. d) Coating: Paint. e) Fittings: Solvent welded socket type complying with ASTM D2467. f) Joints: Solvent welded with unions at valves, penetrations through

structures and equipment connections for pipe 2 IN and less and flanges at those locations for pipe above 2 IN.


2) Buried service: a) Material: PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 40. b) Reference: ASTM D1785. c) Lining: None. d) Coating: None. e) Fittings: Solvent welded socket type complying with ASTM D2466. f) Joints: Solvent welded.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15061 PIPE: STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe, fittings, and appurtenances.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 4. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements.



a. B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). b. B2.1, Gages and Gaging for Unified Inch Screw Threads. c. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. d. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. e. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings. f. B16.11, Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded. g. B31.1, Power Piping. h. B31.3, Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping. i. B31.9, Building Services Piping.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated

Welded and Seamless. c. A106, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-

Temperature Service. d. A181, Standard Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for General-Purpose

Piping. e. A234, Standard Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. f. A283, Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. g. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi

Tensile Strength. h. A570, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled,

Structural Quality. i. A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium

Structural Steel. j. B6, Standard Specification for Zinc. k. D1330, Rubber Sheet Gaskets.

3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C200, Steel Water Pipe 6 IN and Larger. b. C203, Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel water Pipeline -

Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied. c. C205, Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe 4 IN

and Larger Shop Applied. d. C206, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.


e. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 IN through 144 IN. f. C208, Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. g. C209, Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections,

Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines. h. C210, Standard for Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for Interior and Exterior of

Steel Water Pipelines. i. C213, Standard for Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of

Steel Water Pipelines. j. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. k. Manual M11, Steel Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation.

4. Military Specifications: a. QQ-P-416F, Plating, Cadmium Electro Deposited.

B. Qualifications: 1. Use only certified welders meeting procedures and performance outlined in Section

9 of the ASME, Section 3.3.3 of AWWA C200 and other codes and requirements per local building and utility requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 15060. 2. Factory test reports. 3. If mechanical grooved type coupling system is used, submit piping, fittings, and

appurtenant items which will be utilized. 4. Coating manufacturer's qualifications. 5. Welders certificates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Dismantling joints:

a. Smith-Blair (Style 975). b. Dresser (Style 131). c. Viking Johnson.

2. Insulating couplings: a. Smith-Blair (Style 416). b. Dresser (Style 39).

3. Reducing couplings: a. Smith-Blair (Style 415). b. Dresser (Style 62).

4. Transition coupling: a. Smith-Blair (Style 413). b. Dresser (Style 62).

5. Compression sleeve coupling: a. Smith-Blair (Style 411 (steel)) or (Style 431 (cast)). b. Dresser (Style 38 (steel)) or (Style 53 (cast)).

6. Mechanical couplings and fittings: a. Victaulic (Style 07 or 77). b. Guston Bacon (Series 100).

7. Vibration isolation equipment connections for natural gas: a. Flexonics (Model 401H).



8. Flexible connectors for hot water equipment:

a. Flexonics (FLG Series). b. Thermo Tech (F/J/R Series).

9. Factory-applied plastic or epoxy coatings: a. "Encoat" Division of Energy Coating Company. b. "Scotchkote" Division of 3M Company.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. All materials used in steel piping systems defined in Section 15060 shall meet or exceed pressure test requirements specified for each respective system.

B. Steel Pipe (Fabricated Type): 1. AWWA C200:

a. ASTM A36, Grade C Steel Plate. b. ASTM A283, Grade D Steel Plate. c. ASTM A570, Steel Sheet. d. ASTM A572, Steel Plate.

C. Steel Pipe (Mill Type): 1. ASTM A53, Type E or S.

D. Fittings (For Fabricated Pipe): 1. AWWA C208.

E. Fittings (For Mill Type Pipe): 1. ASTM A234. 2. ANSI B16.3. 3. ANSI B16.5. 4. ANSI B16.9. 5. ANSI B16.11.

F. Flanges: 1. Flange material: ASTM A283, Grade C or D, ASTM A181 Grade 1. 2. Flange finish: Flat faced. 3. Determine the pressure class of the flanges based on the test pressures shown in

Section 15060. For test pressures 200 psi and less, use Class 150 flanges. For test pressures 200 through 375 psi, use Class 300 flanges. a. Class 150 flanges shall comply with AWWA C207, Class D. b. Class 300 flanges shall comply with AWWA C207, Class F, or ANSI B16.5 for

flanges 24 inches and smaller. Flanges 30 inches through 48 inches shall comply with AWWA C207, Class F. For flanges larger than 48 inches, the flanges shall be fabricated to the dimensions of ANSI B16.1, Class 250.

G. Nuts and Bolts: 1. Buried: Cadmium-plated meeting Military Specification QQP416F, Type 1, Class 2

(Cor-Ten) for buried application. 2. Exposed: Mechanical galvanized ASTM B695, Class 40 and rated for the test

pressure for the specified system. 3. Heads and dimensions per ANSI B1.1. 4. Threaded per ANSI B1.1. 5. Project ends 1/4 to 1/2 IN beyond nuts.

H. Gaskets: See individual piping systems in Section 15060. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering



A. Couplings: 1. Dismantling joints:

a. Steel or carbon steel spigot, flange adapter, and followers gaskets. b. BUNA or EPDM. c. ASTM A193 Tie bars. d. Provide units equal to those specified in Article 2.1. e. Flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges. f. Entire assembly to be rated for test pressure specified on Piping Schedule for

each respective application. 2. Compression sleeve coupling:

a. Steel sleeve, followers Grade 30 and rubber gaskets. b. Provide units equal to those specified in Article 2.1. c. Flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges. d. Tie bolt assembly.

1) For pipe 14 IN and larger. 2) Minimum four bolts equally spaced around the pipe and extending from cast

steel lugs welded on the pipe to lugs welded on the coupling middle ring. e. Entire assembly to be rated for test pressure specified on Piping Schedule for

each respective application. f. Provide field coating for buried couplings per AWWA C203.

3. Mechanical coupling joint: a. Use of mechanical grooved (AWWA C606) type couplings and fittings in lieu of

flanged joints is acceptable where specifically specified in Section 15060. b. Utilize units defined in Article 2.1.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Natural Gas Equipment Isolator: 1. 316L stainless steel, T-321 stainless steel braid with connections compatible with

joints in piping system.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Provide piping (mill or fabricated) for use in this Project with minimum wall thicknesses as follows: 1. 1/8 - 5 IN DIA pipe: Schedule 40. 2. 6 - 10 IN DIA pipe: 3/16 IN. 3. 12 - 14 IN DIA pipe: 7/32 IN. 4. 16 - 48 IN DIA pipe: 1/4 IN. 5. Sizes through 24 IN are nominal OD. Sizes greater than 24 are ID. 6. Wall thicknesses indicated are for standard weight pipe. Design pipe in accordance

with operating pressures shown in Piping Schedules for a design stress limited to 50 percent of yield.

B. Furnish cast parts with lacquer finish compatible with finish coating.

C. Any exposed pipe scheduled to be painted shall be furnished without outside coating.

D. Fabricated Fittings: 1. AWWA C208. 2. Assure ratio of radius of bend to diameter of pipe equal to or greater than 1.0. 3. Minimum number of pieces:

a. Less than 30-Deg deflection: 2. b. 30-Deg to less than 45-Deg deflection: 3. c. 45-Deg to less than 60-Deg deflection: 4.


d. 60-Deg through 90-Deg deflection: 5.

E. Taper cement mortar linings as required for valve interfacing.

F. Protective Coatings and Linings: 1. Provide cement mortar lining and coating in accordance with AWWA C205. 2. Provide fusion bonded epoxy lining and coating in accordance with AWWA C213. 3. Galvanize surface in accordance with hot dip method using any grade of zinc

acceptable to ASTM B6. 4. Wrap pipe in accordance with AWWA C209. 5. Field paint pipe in accordance with Section 09905.


A. Testing: 1. Shop hydrostatic test fabricated steel pipe and fittings. 2. Field hydrostatic test all pipe as specified in Section 15060.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Joining Methods - Flanges: 1. Facing method:

a. Insert slip-on flange on pipe. b. Assure maximum tolerances for flange faces from normal with respect to axis of

pipe is 0.005 IN per foot of flange diameter. c. Test flanges after welding to pipe for true to face condition and reface, if

necessary, to bring to specified tolerance. 2. Joining method:

a. Leave 1/8 to 3/8 IN of flange bolts projecting beyond face of nut after tightening. b. Coordinate dimensions and drillings of flanges with flanges for valves, pumps,

equipment, tank, and other interconnecting piping systems. c. When bolting flange joints, exercise extreme care to assure that there is no

restraint on opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression or cause unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains being applied to cast flanges or flanged fittings. Allow one flange free movement in any direction while bolts are being tightened.

d. Do not assemble adjoining flexible coupled, mechanical coupled or welded joints until flanged joints in piping system have been tightened.

e. Gradually tighten flange bolts uniformly to permit even gasket compression. f. Do not overstress bolts to compensate for poor installation.

C. Joining Method - Welded Joints: 1. Perform welding in accordance with AWWA C206 and this Section. 2. For flange attachment perform in accordance with AWWA C207. 3. Have each welding operator affix an assigned symbol to all his welds. Mark each

longitudinal joint at the extent of each operator's welding. Mark each circumferential joint, nozzle, or other weld into places 180 degrees apart.

4. Welding for all process piping shall conform with ANSI B31.3. Welding of utility piping 125 psi and less shall be welded per ANSI B31.9. Utility piping above 125 psi shall conform to ANSI B31.1.

5. Provide caps, tees, elbows, reducers, etc. manufactured for welded applications. 6. Weldolets may be used for 5 IN and larger pipe provided all slag is removed from

inside the pipe.


7. Weld-in nozzles may be used for branch connections to mains and where approved by Engineer.

8. Use all long radius welding elbows for expansion loops and bends. 9. Use long radius reducing welding elbows 90 degree bends and size changes are

required.

D. Joining Method-Couplings: 1. Compression sleeve:

a. Install coupling to allow space of not less than 1/4 IN but not more than 1 IN. b. Provide harnessed joint. Use joint harness arrangements detailed in AWWA

M11. c. Design harness assembly with adequate number of tie rods for test pressures

indicated in Section 15060 and allow for expansion of pipe. d. Provide ends to be joined or fitted with compression sleeve couplings of the

plain end type. e. Grind smooth welds the length of one coupling on either side of joint to be fitted

with any coupling. f. Assure that outside diameter and out-of-round tolerances are within limits

required by coupling manufacturer. 2. Mechanical coupling:

a. Arrange piping so that pipe ends are in full contact. b. Groove and shoulder ends of piping in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. c. Provide coupling and grooving technique assuring a connection which passes

pressure testing requirements.

E. Joining Method-Threaded and Coupled (T/C): 1. Provide T/C end conditions that meet ANSI B2.1 requirements. 2. Furnish pipe with factory-made T/C ends. 3. Field cut additional threads full and clean with sharp dies. 4. Leave not more than three pipe threads exposed at each branch connection. 5. Ream ends of pipe after threading and before assembly to remove burrs. 6. Use teflon thread tape on male thread in mating joints.

F. Support exposed piping in accordance with Section 15060.

G. Install buried piping per Section 15060.


A. Test piping systems in accordance with Section 15060.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15062 PIPE: DUCTILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ductile iron piping, fittings, and appurtenances.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements.



a. B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). b. B16.1, Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and

800. c. B16.21, Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A183, Carbon Steel Track Bolts. b. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting

Materials for High-Temperature Service. c. A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-

Pressure and High-Temperature Service. d. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi

Tensile Strength. e. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on

Iron and Steel. f. D1330, Rubber Sheet Gaskets.

3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C104, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. b. C105, Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Piping for Water

and Other Liquids. c. C110, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 IN through 48 IN for Water and

Other Liquids. d. C111, Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. e. C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. f. C150, Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. g. C151, Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast-In-Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds,

for Water or Other Liquids. h. C153, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. through 16 in. for Water and Other

Liquids. i. C203, Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines-

Enamel and Tape-Hot Applied. j. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

4. Military Specification (Mil Spec): a. QQ-P-416F, Plating, Cadmium Electro Deposited.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 15060. 2. Certification of factory hydrostatic testing. 3. If mechanical coupling system is used, submit piping, fittings, and appurtenant items

which will be utilized to meet system requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Dismantling joints:

a. Smith-Blair (Style 975). b. Dresser (Style 131). c. Viking Johnson.

2. Compression sleeve coupling: a. Rockwell (Style 431 (cast)) or (Style 411 (steel)). b. Dresser (Style 153 (cast)) or (Style 38 (steel)). c. Or approved equal.

3. Mechanical coupling: a. Victaulic (Style 31). b. Tyler. c. Or approved equal.

4. Insulating couplings: a. Rockwell (Style 416). b. Dresser (Style 39).

5. Reducing couplings: a. Rockwell (Style 415). b. Dresser (Style 62).

6. Transition coupling: a. Rockwell (Style 413). b. Dresser (Style 62). c. Or approved equal.

7. Polyethylene encasement tape: a. Chase (Chasekote 750). b. Kendall (Polyken 900). c. 3 M (Scotchrap 50). d. Or approved equal.

8. Restrained joints: a. American (Lock Fast) - 12 IN and below. b. US Pipe (TR-Flex) - 4 IN to 54 IN. c. American (Lock Fast) - Above 12 IN. d. Or approved equal.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1. AWWA C115. 2. AWWA C150. 3. AWWA C151.



B. Fittings and Flanges: 1. AWWA C110. 2. AWWA C115. 3. Flanges drilled and faced per ANSI B16.1 for both 125 and 250 psi applications.

Determine the pressure rating of the flanges based on the test pressures shown in Section 15060. For test pressures 200 psi and less, use Class 125 flanges. For test pressures greater than 200 psi, but less than 300 psi, use Class 250 flanges. Flanges on pipe shall be either cast or threaded.

C. Nuts and Bolts: 1. Buried: Cadmium-plated meeting Military Specification QQP416F, Type 1, Class 2

(Cor-Ten) for buried application. Exposed: Mechanical galvanized ASTM B695, Class 40.

2. Heads and dimensions per ANSI B1.1. 3. Threaded per ANSI B1.1. 4. Project ends 1/4 to 1/2 IN beyond nuts.

D. Gaskets: See individual piping system requirements in Section 15060.

E. If mechanical coupling system is used, utilize pipe thickness and grade in accordance with AWWA C606.

F. Polyethylene Encasement: See AWWA C105.

G. See Piping Schedules in Section 15060.


A. Couplings: 1. Dismantling joints:

a. Unit consisting of steel or carbon steel spigot, flange adapter, and followers. b. BUNA or EPDM. c. ASTM A193 Tic bars. d. Provide units equal to those specified in Article 2.1. e. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges. f. Rate entire assembly for test pressure specified on piping schedule for each

respective application. 2. Compression sleeve coupling:

a. Unit consisting of steel sleeve, followers, Grade 30 rubber gaskets. b. Provide units equal to those specified in Article 2.1. c. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges. d. Entire assembly to be rated for test pressure specified on piping schedule for

each respective application. e. Provide field coating for buried couplings per AWWA C203.

3. Mechanical couplings: a. Use of mechanical couplings and fittings in lieu of flanged joints is acceptable

where specifically specified in Section 15060. Utilize units defined in Article 2.1.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Furnish and install without outside coatings of bituminous material any exposed pipe scheduled to be painted.

B. Furnish cast parts with lacquer finish compatible with finish coat.


2.5 LININGS AND COATINGS

A. Where specified in piping schedule, provide linings to a minimum thickness of 40 mils. 1. Polyethylene, "Polybond" by American Pipe. 2. Polyurethane, "Polythane" by U.S. Pipe. 3. Ceramic epoxy, "Protecto 401" by U.S. Pipe. 4. Calcium aluminate, "Sewper Coat" by Griffin Pipe.


A. Factory Test: 1. Subject pipe to hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi with the pipe under the full

test pressure for at least 10 seconds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Joining Method - Push-On Mechanical (Gland-Type) Joints: 1. Install in accordance with AWWA C111. 2. Assemble mechanical joints carefully according to manufacturer's

recommendations. 3. If effective sealing is not obtained, disassemble, thoroughly clean, and reassemble

the joint. 4. Do not overstress bolts. 5. Where piping utilizes mechanical joints with tie rods, align joint holes to permit

installation of harness bolts.

B. Joining Method - Push-On Joints: 1. Install in accordance with AWWA C151. 2. Assemble push-on joints in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3. Bevel and lubricate spigot end of pipe to facilitate assembly without damage to

gasket. Use lubricant that is non-toxic, does not support the growth of bacteria, has no deteriorating effects on the gasket material, and imparts no taste or odor to water in pipe.

4. Assure the gasket groove is thoroughly clean. 5. For cold weather installation, warm gasket prior to placement in bell. 6. Taper of bevel shall be approximately 30 degrees with centerline of pipe and

approximately 1/4 IN back.

C. Joining Method - Flanged Joints: 1. Install in accordance with AWWA C115. 2. Extend pipe completely through screwed-on flanged and machine flange face and

pipe in single operation. 3. Make flange faces flat and perpendicular to pipe centerline. 4. When bolting flange joints, exercise extreme care to ensure that there is no restraint

on opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression or would cause unnecessary stress, bending or torsional strains to be applied to cast flanges or flanged fittings.

5. Allow one flange free movement in any direction while bolts are being tightened. 6. Do not assemble adjoining flexible joints until flanged joints in piping system have

been tightened. 7. Gradually tighten flange bolts uniformly to permit even gasket compression.



D. Joining Method - Mechanical Coupling Joint: 1. Arrange piping so that pipe ends are in full contact. 2. Groove and shoulder ends of piping in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. 3. Provide coupling and grooving technique assuring a connection which passes

pressure testing requirements.

E. Flange Adapters 12 IN and Less: 1. Locate and drill holes for anchor studs after pipe is in place and bolted tight. 2. Drill holes not more than 1/8 IN larger than diameter of stud projection.

F. Cutting: 1. Do not damage interior lining material during cutting. 2. Use abrasive wheel cutters or saws. 3. Make square cuts. 4. Bevel and free cut ends of sharp edges after cutting.

G. Support exposed pipe in accordance with Section 15060.

H. Install buried piping in accordance with Sections 15060.

I. Install restrained joint systems where specified in Section 15060 under specific piping system.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 15063 PIPE: COPPER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Copper piping, fittings, and appurtenances.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities. 4. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems.



a. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. b. B16.23, Cast Bronze Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. c. B16.26, Cast Bronze Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. b. B42, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. c. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. d. B306, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.8, Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Copper Tubing: 1. Pressure non-buried: ASTM B88, Type L hard. 2. Pressure buried: ASTM B88, Type K. 3. Non-pressure: ASTM B306.

B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, regular strength.

C. Fittings: 1. Pressure non-buried: ASME B16.22. 2. Pressure buried: ASME B16.22 or ASME B16.26. 3. Non-pressure: ASME B16.23

D. Soldering and Brazing:


1. Non-buried: a. ASTM B32 solder with a tin/antimony ratio of 95/5 and non-corrosive flux up to

180 DegF water temperature. b. At 180 DegF and above, use brazing alloy with melting temperature above 1000

DegF and suitable flux. 2. Buried: Silver solder per AWS A5.8.

E. See Piping Schedules in Section 15060.

F. Unions: 1. Pipe sizes 2 IN and smaller: Copper, ground joint. 2. Pipe sizes 2-1/2 IN and larger: Brass flanged unions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION




B. Utilize only annealed (soft) type tubing where flared joints are used and drawn temper (hard) type tubing where soldered or brazed joints are used.

C. Support exposed piping in accordance with Section 15060 and Section 15090.

D. Install buried piping in accordance with Section 02221 and Section 15060.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15064 PIPE: PLASTIC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic pipe.




B. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials: 1) D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2) D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) PVC Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 3) D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 80. 4) D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 5) D3139, Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using

Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 6) D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes

Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 7) F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,

and Studs. 8) F679, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter

Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 9) F794, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity

Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 10) F949, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated

Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings. b. Installation:

1) D2321, Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermosplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.

2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials:

1) C900, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 in. Through 12 in. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution.

2) C905, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameter 14 IN through 36 IN.

b. Polyethylene (PE) materials: 1) C901, Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe Tubing and Fittings, 1/2 through 3

IN for Water. 3. National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF).


1.3 SUBMITTALS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PRESSURE PIPING (EXPOSED & UNDERGROUND)

A. General: 1. Provide Schedule 80 pipe with Schedule 80 fittings and appurtenances to locations

shown on Drawings. 2. Furnish materials in full compliance to following material specifications:

a. Manufacture pipe, fittings and appurtenances from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound which meets the requirements of Type 1, Grade 1 (12454-B) Polyvinyl Chloride as outlined in ASTM D1784.

b. Manufacture pipe, fittings and valves from materials that have been tested and approved for conveying potable water by the NSF.

B. Pipe: 1. Furnish pipe meeting requirements of ASTM D1785. 2. Pipe 2 IN and less to be solvent welded. 3. Pipe larger than 2 IN may be either flanged or solvent welded unless shown

otherwise on Drawings.

C. Fittings: Provide ASTM D2467 PVC socket type fittings having the same pressure and temperature rating as the pipe.

D. Flanges/Unions: 1. Furnish flanges and unions at locations shown on Drawings. 2. Provide either flanges or unions at valves, penetrations through structures and

equipment connections. 3. For pipe larger than 2 IN, provide 150 LB socket type PVC flange. 4. For pipe 2 IN and less, provide socket type PVC union with Buna O-rings. 5. Use flat, full faced natural rubber gaskets at flanged connections.

a. Furnish heavy hex head bolts, each with one (1) heavy hex nut, ASTM F593 Type 316 stainless steel.

6. Use spacers supplied by pipe manufacturer when mating raised-faced flanges to other flanges.

E. Installation (Exposed): 1. Field threading PVC will not be permitted.

a. Perform required threaded connections or attachments by the use of factory molded socket by threaded adapters.

b. Female adapters are not acceptable. 2. Employ installation and pipe support practices and solvent welding all in compliance

to the manufacturer's printed recommendation. a. Continuously support PVC piping at liquid operating temperatures in excess of

100 DegF. b. For vertical piping, band the pipe at intervals to rigidly support load of twice

vertical load. c. Support riser clamps on spring hangers. d. Do not clamp PVC tightly or restrict movement for expansion and contraction.


F. Installation (Underground): 1. Field threading of PVC pipe will not be permitted. 2. Perform installation procedures, handling, thrust blocking, connections, and other

appurtenant operations in full compliance to the manufacturer's printed recommendations and in full observance to plan details when more stringent.

2.2 PVC DRAINAGE, SEWER PIPING AND UNDERGROUND AIR DUCTS

A. Materials: 1. Furnish materials in full compliance to the following material specification. 2. PVC pipe shall be rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) made of PVC plastic

having a cell classification of 12454-B or 12454-C as described in specification ASTM D1784.

3. The requirements of this Specification are intended to provide for pipe and fittings suitable for non-pressure drainage of wastewater and surface water.

4. Joining systems shall consist of an elastomeric gasket joint meeting requirements of ASTM D3212.

5. Supply to the Engineer all information and sample of joining method for his evaluation. a. Only jointing methods acceptable to the Engineer will be permitted.

6. Provide pipe and fittings meeting or exceeding the following requirements: a. 4-27 IN DIA: ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679, SDR 35. b. 8-30 IN DIA: ASTM F794. c. 4-18 IN DIA: ASTM F949.

7. Ensure impact strengths and pipe stiffnesses in full compliance to these Specifications.

B. Installation: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D2321 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Provide for a maximum deflection of not more than 3 percent.

C. Infiltration and Exfiltration: 1. The maximum allowable infiltration measured by test shall not exceed 100 GAL per

inch of pipe diameter per mile per 24 HRS. 2. For exfiltration, all the pipe and fittings shall exceed performance requirements by

an air test procedure as specified in Section 15060. 3. Observe full instructions of the Engineer for carrying of testing procedures.

a. Perform tests only during presence of the Engineer or his authorized representative.

4. Should any test on any section of pipe line disclose either infiltration rates greater than allowed or disclose air loss rate greater than that permitted, locate and repair the defective joints or pipes at no cost to Owner and retest until requirements stated are met.

D. Deflection: 1. After backfilling, each section of pipe shall be checked for deflection by pulling a

mandrel through the pipe. 2. Pipe with deflection exceeding 5 percent of the inside diameter shall have backfill

removed and replaced to provide a deflection of less than 5 percent. 3. Any repaired pipe shall be retested.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each length of pipe clearly at intervals of 5 FT or less. 1. Include manufacturer's name and trademark. 2. Nominal size of pipe, appurtenant information regarding polymer cell classification

and critical identifications regarding performance specifications and NSF approvals when applicable.

3.2 PVC DRAINAGE, SEWER PIPING AND UNDERGROUND AIR DUCTS

A. Installation: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D2321 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Provide for a maximum deflection of not more than 3 percent.

B. Infiltration and Exfiltration: 1. The maximum allowable infiltration measured by test shall not exceed 100 GAL per

inch of pipe diameter per mile per 24 HRS. 2. For exfiltration, all the pipe and fittings shall exceed performance requirements by

an air test procedure as specified in Section 15060. 3. Observe full instructions of the Engineer for carrying of testing procedures.

a. Perform tests only during presence of the Engineer or his authorized representative.

4. Should any test on any section of pipe line disclose either infiltration rates greater than allowed or disclose air loss rate greater than that permitted, locate and repair the defective joints or pipes at no cost to Owner and retest until requirements stated are met.

C. Deflection: 1. After backfilling, each section of pipe shall be checked for deflection by pulling a

mandrel through the pipe. 2. Pipe with deflection exceeding 5 percent of the inside diameter shall have backfill

removed and replaced to provide a deflection of less than 5 percent. 3. Any repaired pipe shall be retested.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15065 CATHODIC PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor shall hire an independent corrosion specialist, certified by NACE, to design the cathodic protection system, including the maximum spacing between anode beds, number of anodes per bed and recommended locations for anode beds and test stations. Design shall be based on the soil resistivity data given in the geotechnical report included with the Contract Documents. The work to be performed under this section includes provision for cathodic protection of ductile iron and/or steel water piping furnished.

B. All materials shall conform to the requirements set forth herein or as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise specified. All materials must be new, free from defects, and shall be of the best commercial quality for the purpose specified. All necessary items and accessories not shown on the drawings or specified herein but which are required to fully carry out the specified intent of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.

C. Reference Specifications: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 4. Industrial Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall include design and recommendations of anode bed spacing, number of anodes per bed and locations of beds and test stations, catalogue cuts, product data sheets, or shop drawings to clearly define all materials to be furnished and to demonstrate full compliance with the plans and this section of the standard provisions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Galvanic anodes shall be 5 IN by 5 IN by 20 IN long Galvomag magnesium ingots, weighing 32 pounds. Each anode shall be cast with a galvanized steel core and the core shall protrude from one end with sufficient length to permit attachment of an anode cable. 1. Each anode shall conform to the following chemical composition:

a. Aluminum: 0.01% max. b. Manganese: 0.50 to 1.3%. c. Iron: 0.03% max. d. Zinc: .05% max. e. Nickel: 0.001% max. f. Copper: 0.02% max. g. Total impurities: 0.30%. h. Si: .05% max. i. Other impurities: 0.05%. j. Magnesium: Balance.


2. Each anode shall be furnished with a lead wire attached to one end of the steel core and the wire shall be of sufficient unspliced length to attach to the terminal in the terminal box as shown on the drawings. The wire shall be connected to the steel core by silver soldering and the connection shall be mechanically secure by soldering with at least two turns of wire to the steel core. The entire connection shall be insulated with an electrical potting compound. The cable attached to the anode shall be No. 10 AWG, Type CP, stranded, single conductor, and shall conform to the requirements for underground cables.

3. The anode shall be packaged in a permeable cloth bag filled with a mixture of 75% ground hydrated gypsum, 20% powdered bentonite, and 5% anhydrous sodium sulfate. Backfill grain size shall pass 100% through a 100-mesh sieve. The mixture shall be firmly packed around the anode within the cloth bag by vibration so that the magnesium ingot is completely surrounded with a minimum 1 IN of backfill material.

B. Reference Electrodes: Furnish portable copper sulfate electrode. Place near test site to read IR drop.

C. Cables: All underground cables used for the cathodic protection testing and bonding cables shall be sized as shown on the drawings and shall be stranded, single conductor, copper, Type CP, and shall be insulated with an extruded plastic insulation. The cable shall be insulated for 600 volts, high molecular weight polyethylene, 110 mil minimum thickness, in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D-1248, Type I, Class C, Grade 5, and ICEA/NEMA S-61-402.

D. Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings shall be Schedule 40, manufactured to NEMA TC-2 and WC-1094 specifications and shall be UL approved.

E. Insulating Flexible Couplings: Insulating type flexible couplings shall comply with all requirements for fittings furnished for the pipeline, shall be provided with synthetic rubber boots (sleeves) which electrically isolate the ends of the attached pipe from the fitting as shown on the drawing and shall be fusion epoxy coated with 10 mil minimum thickness.

F. Flexible Couplings (Non-Insulating): All non-insulating flexible couplings shall be bonded as shown on the drawings and shall be fusion epoxy coated with 10-mil minimum thickness.

G. Ducseal Putty: Putty used in sealing around welder while installing the cable to pipe connection shall be as manufactured by Duco Company or approved equal.

H. Polyethylene Tape: Polyethylene tape shall be 15 mil thick adhesive backed No. 930-15 Polyken applied over Polyken 927 primer.

I. Exothermic Welds: All cable connections to pipe or fittings shall be accomplished by using "Cadweld" by Erico Products, Inc., or approved equal. Each cable shall be fitted with a copper sleeve at the weld. Cartridge (weld metal) sleeves and molds for each weld shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Weld material used for welds to ductile iron or malleable iron shall be the same as required by the manufacturer for cast iron.

J. Terminal Boxes: Terminal boxes shall be constructed of high impact, molded, Lexan plastic, and furnished with a PVC conduit as shown. Each box shall be furnished with an integral high impact Lexan terminal board and hardware with sufficient number of terminals for each cable. All boxes shall be blue color for easy identification.

K. Terminal Hardware: Nuts, bolts, and washers, shall be nickel-plated brass and bonding straps shall be nickel-plated copper.


L. Shunts: Anode metering shunts shall be .01 ohm rated for 6 amperes with 2% accuracy. Shunts furnished for the service installations shall be manganin wire, Type RS, Holloway, or approved equal.

M. Test Boxes: Box and lid shall be cast iron or approved equal. The cover shall be manufactured with "CTS" cast in 2 IN high letter markings for easy identification.

N. Cable Markers: Cables shall be marked with a heat shrinkable polyolefin sleeve which is furnished as a flat tube. Cables shall be clearly marked in accordance with the plans with permanent marker in 1/4 IN high letters. Markings shall be on both sides of the label. The sleeve shall meet the requirements of MIL-1-23053/5 Class I and shall be part No. TMS-SCE 1/2-2.0-9 (white) manufactured by Raychem Corporation or approved equal.

O. Insulating Flanged Joints: Each insulating flange set shall consist of a full face central gasket, a full length sleeve for each flange bolt, and two insulating washers with two steel washers for each bolt. The ring type central gasket shall be 1/8 IN thick sheet packing, having a high dielectric constant. Bolt sleeves shall be fabric reinforced phenolic resin and insulating washers shall be constructed of fabric reinforced phenolic resin. The complete assembly shall have an ANSI pressure rating equal to that of the flanges between which it is installed.

P. Epoxy Putty: Putty used for the cable to pipe connection seal dam shall be "Epoxolite 9901" A+B epoxy putty as manufactured by Hexcel Corporation or approved equal.

Q. Epoxy: Epoxy used for sealing anode to cable and cable to pipe connections shall be Concresive No. 1011, as manufactured by Adhesive Engineering; Scotchcast Resin No. 4, as manufactured by 3M Company; or CC-1 Potting Compound, manufactured by PSI Products; or approved equal.

R. Bitumastic: Bitumastic for coating couplings and insulating flanged joints shall conform to the requirements of Bureau of Reclamation Specification CA-50.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CATHODIC PROTECTION

A. General: All workmanship, installation, and materials shall conform with all requirements of the legally constituted authority having jurisdiction. These authorities include, but are not limited to, the National Electric Code, General Construction Safety Orders of the Industrial Accident Commission; and all other applicable state, county, or city codes and regulations. Nothing in the specifications or drawings is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these regulations and codes. Where larger size or better grade materials than required by these regulations and codes are specified, the specifications and drawings shall have precedence.

B. Storage of Materials: All equipment and materials to be used in construction shall be stored in such a manner as to be protected from detrimental effects from the elements. Damaged or defective equipment and materials shall not be used or stored on the site.

C. Cables: Cables buried in the ground shall be laid straight, without kinks, and shall have a minimum cover of 30 IN. Each cable run shall be free of joints or splices and continuous in length. Care shall be used during installation avoid cuts, punctures, or similar damage to insulation. Any damage to insulation will require replacement of the entire cable length. Pull boxes and splice boxes shall be installed where shown and where otherwise required to facilitate installation of conductors and to comply with code requirements. Backfill surrounding the cables shall be native soil free of rocks, gravel, or foreign materials.


D. Galvanic Anodes: Galvanic anodes shall be placed in a vertical trench at the proper depth. Prior to placing anodes, paper or plastic bags shall be removed, but the cloth bag shall remain around the anode. Care shall be exercised during installation to prevent damage to the cloth bag and loss of backfill material. After placing anodes, the anodes should be flooded with water. Remainder of the hole shall be backfilled with native soil in unimproved areas and select native backfill or import material to pavement subgrade. During installation, anodes shall not be supported or handled by use of attached wires. Backfill and compaction shall be equal to or greater than 90% relative density.

E. Joint Bonding: All pipe and fitting joints shall be bonded for electrical continuity in accordance with details shown on the drawings. The bond cable shall be installed with a cable loop with sufficient length to allow maximum movement of the pipe without producing tensile stress in the cable.

F. Bonding Flexible Couplings: After installation, all non-insulating flexible type couplings shall be bonded as shown on the drawings. The overall length of each conductor shall be sufficiently greater than the distance between weld connections to permit maximum pullout of pipe ends from the coupling without transferring any tensile stress to the cable or welds. Connections of cable to pipe shall be in accordance with the requirements specified herein.

G. Cable to Pipe and Coupling Connections: Cable to pipe and coupling connections shall be installed in the manner and at the locations shown on the drawings. Coating materials shall be removed from the surface over an area just sufficient to make the connection. The iron and steel surface shall be cleaned to white metal by grinding or filing prior to welding the conductor. Grinding with resin impregnated wheels shall not be allowed. The conductor shall be welded to the pipe by the exothermic process with a copper sleeve fitted over the conductor, and only sufficient insulation shall be removed from the conductor to allow placing in the welding mold. After the weld has cooled, all slag shall be removed and the weld shall be tested with a sharp hammer blow to assure proper metallurgical bond. All defective welds shall be removed and replaced. All exposed surfaces of copper and steel shall be covered with a minimum thickness of a 1/4 IN of insulating materials as shown on the drawings.

H. Test Boxes: Test boxes shall be installed at locations designated on the drawings. Exact location of test boxes shall be determined by the Engineer in the field. Each test box shall be furnished with a terminal box for the proper hook-up of the cables as shown. The terminal box shall rest upright in the test box and the cables shall have sufficient slack that the terminal box can be lifted at least 1 FT above the top of the test box. All terminals shall be soldered to a spade connector. Each cable shall be marked to identify the cable as shown.

I. Cable Markers: Cable markers shall be installed approximately a 1/2 IN from the end of the cables as shown. The markings shall be put on the heat shrink tube while in a flat condition, slipped into place, and shrunk with the heating equipment recommended by the manufacturer. Temporary markers which are the same as the permanent cables markers shall be maintained on the various cables at all times after the cables are installed. If the cables are trimmed, a new permanent marker shall be put into place.


J. Insulating Flanged Joints: All insulating components of the insulating flanged gasket set shall be cleaned of all dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign materials immediately prior to assembly. Bolt holes in mating flanges shall be properly aligned at the time bolts and insulating sleeves are inserted to prevent damage to the insulation. After flanged bolts have been tightened, each insulating washer shall be inspected for cracks or other damage. All damaged washers shall be replaced. After assembly, resistance between each bolt and flange shall be measured with an approved ohmmeter and the minimum resistance shall be 50,000 ohms. Where the insulating joint is assembled in the shop and shipped as a unit, resistance shall be measured in the shop between the flanges and between each bolt and flange, and shall meet the above requirements.

K. Mechanical Couplings: All buried mechanical couplings shall be bitumastic coated after placement. Pipe ends and all coupling components shall be cleaned of dirt and foreign materials prior to placement of the coating. After installation of the fitting and cable connections are completed, a bitumastic coating shall then be applied to all bare metal such as bolt threads and chipped paint and shall be completely encased in polyethylene wrap.

L. Fire Hydrant Services: Fire hydrant services must be bonded for electrical continuity with the main and shall be polyethylene wrapped up to the surface including the hydrant bury and riser.

M. Service Connections (if required): Copper services connected to the main shall be electrically isolated from the main by insulating corporation stops or nylon bushing.

N. Electrical Continuity Testing: Electrical continuity testing shall be performed by utilizing both of the following procedures. 1. Measure voltage drops between electrical contact points on the pipeline by stringing

an electrical conductor over the ground surface between test points and inserting a highly sensitive voltmeter into the circuit after which the "line drop" voltage is read and recorded. Readings should be relatively consistent throughout pipeline segments and generally be less than 1.0 millivolt.

2. Place the pipe under protective potentials utilizing a temporary cathodic protection system and current interrupter after which pipe-to-soil potentials are recorded and analyzed for detection of electrical continuity deficiencies. The pipeline potentials should be shifted by a minimum of 300 millivolts negative over native potentials (i.e. a -100 millivolt potential should be shifted to a minimum of -400 millivolt during testing).

3. Testing, location of discontinuities, repair, and retesting shall be done at the Contractor's expense.

4. A complete technical report containing test data, observations, conclusions, and recommendations concerning the acceptability of continuity and the corrosion control system in general shall be prepared and submitted to the Engineer in charge.

5. All testing shall be done under the supervision of a registered Corrosion Engineer in California or a NACE Corrosion Specialist. The testing agency selected by the Contractor shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer in charge before commencing work activities.



3.2 ENERGIZING AND TESTING

A. After installation of the cathodic protection facilities, the system shall be energized, tested, and adjusted by the Engineer to assure conformance with the specifications. Testing will include a determination of proper operation of each anode, adequacy of test stations, proper operation of each insulating joint, and electrical continuity of bonded pipe and fittings. Upon completion of tests, a detailed report will be submitted describing any deficiencies detected. Any and all deficiencies shall be corrected by the Contractor and retested by the Engineer prior to final acceptance. All testing and retesting and correction of deficiencies shall be at the Contractor's expense.

3.3 CLEANUP

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup and removal of all debris, extra material, and equipment used in installation of the cathodic protection system.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15073 PIPE: CAST-IRON SOIL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-iron soil piping, fittings, and appurtenances.




B. Provide joint type specifically approved by applicable plumbing code.

C. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A74, Standard Specification for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. b. C564, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings. 2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):

a. 301, Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.

b. 310,Standard for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.

3. Federal Specifications (FS): a. QQ-C-40, Calking: Lead Wool and Lead Pig.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


and administration of the submittal process. 2. See Section 15060.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pipe (General Application): 1. ASTM A74.

a. SV service. 2. No hub: CISPI 301.

B. Joints (General Application): 1. Standard:

a. Oakum. b. Lead, FS QQ-C-40 Type 1.

2. Compression joint: Neoprene gasket, ASTM C564. 3. Mechanical: No hub, CISPI 310.


C. See Piping Schedules in Section 15060.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: SV service rated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Observe manufacturer's recommendation for handling, cutting, jointing, installing, and testing.

B. Install products in accordance with CISPI.

C. Support exposed piping in accordance with Section 15060.

D. Install buried piping in accordance with Section 15060.

E. If "standard joint" is used, assure lead is run in one continuous pour. 1. No second pouring or driving of lead is permitted. 2. Provide minimum of 12 OZ of lead per inch of pipe diameter per joint.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 15090 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe support and anchor systems.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings.



a. B31.1, Power Piping. b. B31.3, Process Piping.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A510, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and

Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel. c. A575, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-

Grades. d. A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality.

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.

4. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS): a. SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture. b. SP-69, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Itemized list of wall sleeves, anchors, support devices and all other items related

to pipe support system. d. Scale drawings showing guides, hangers, supports, anchors, structural

members and appurtenances to describe the pipe support system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hanger Rods: 1. Material:

a. ASTM A36. b. ASTM A510, Grade 1020.


c. ASTM A575, Grade M1020. d. ASTM A576, Grade 1020. e. Minimum allowable tensile stress of 12,000 psi at 650 DegF per MSS SP-58.

2. Continuously threaded. 3. Electro-galvanized or cadmium plated after threads are cut. 4. Load limit:

NOMINAL ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SAFE LOAD, (LBS)

3/8 IN DIA (min) 610 1/2 IN DIA 1,130 5/8 IN DIA 1,810 3/4 IN DIA 2,710 7/8 IN DIA 3,770 1 IN DIA 4,960

B. Hangers: 1. Hangers for use directly on copper pipe: Copper or cadmium plated. 2. Hangers for use other than directly on copper pipe: Cadmium plated or galvanized. 3. Hanger type schedule:

APPLICATION PIPE SIZE HANGER TYPE

All except noted 4 IN and less ANVIL Figure 108 with Figure 114 All except noted Over 4 IN ANVIL Figure 590 Steam, condensate and hot water

All ANVIL Figure 181 Figure 82 or equal

C. Concrete Inserts for Hanger Rods: 1. Continuous slots: Unistrut #P1000. 2. Individual inserts: ANVIL Figure 281. 3. Self-drilling expansion anchors: Phillips flush-end or snap-off end type.

D. Beam Clamps for Hanger Rods: 1. Heavy duty. 2. ANVIL Figure 134.

E. Trapeze Hangers for Suspended Piping: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Galvanized. 3. Angles, channels, or other structural shapes. 4. Curved roller surfaces at support point corresponding with type of hanger required.

F. Vertical Pipe Supports: 1. At base of riser. 2. Lateral movement:

a. Clamps or brackets: 1) ANVIL Figure 103.

G. Expanding Pipe Supports: 1. Spring hanger type. 2. MSS SP-58.

H. Pipe Support Saddle: 1. For pipe located 3 FT or less from floor elevation, except as otherwise indicated on

Drawings. 2. ANVIL Figure 264.



I. Pipe Support Risers: 1. Schedule 40 pipe. 2. Galvanized. 3. As recommended by saddle manufacturer.

J. Pipe Support Base Plate: 1. 4 IN larger than support. 2. Collar 3/16 IN thickness, circular in shape, and sleeve type connection to pipe. 3. Collar fitted over outside of support pipe and extended 2 IN from floor plate. 4. Collar welded to floor plate. 5. Edges ground smooth. 6. Assembly hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

K. Pipe Covering Protection Saddle: 1. For insulated pipe at point of support. 2. ANVIL Figure 167, Type B.

L. Wall Brackets: 1. For pipe located near walls and 8 FT or more above floor elevation or as otherwise

indicated on the Drawings. 2. ANVIL Figure 199.

M. Pipe Anchors: 1. For locations shown on the Drawings. 2. 1/4 IN steel plate construction. 3. Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. 4. Designed to prevent movement of pipe at point of attachment.

N. Pipe Guides: 1. For locations on both sides on each expansion joint or loop. 2. To ensure proper alignment of expanding or contracting pipe. 3. ANVIL Figure 256.

O. Substitutions: 1. Submit request for substitutions in accordance with Specification Special Conditions.

2.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Supports capable of supporting the pipe for all service and testing conditions. 1. Provide 5 to 1 safety factor.

B. Allow free expansion and contraction of the piping to prevent excessive stress resulting from service and testing conditions or from weight transferred from the piping or attached equipment.

C. Design supports and hangers to allow for proper pitch of pipes.

D. For chemical and waste piping, design, materials of construction and installation of pipe hangers, supports, guides, restraints, and anchors: 1. ASME B31.3. 2. MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. 3. Except where modified by this Specification.

E. Check all physical clearances between piping, support system and structure. 1. Provide for vertical adjustment after erection.

F. Support vertical pipe runs in pipe chases at base of riser. 1. Support pipes for lateral movement with clamps or brackets.

G. Place hangers on outside of pipe insulation. 1. Use a pipe covering protection saddle for insulated pipe at support point.


2. Insulated piping 1-1/2 IN and less: Provide a 9 IN length of 9 LB density fiberglass insulation at saddle.

3. Insulated piping over 1-1/2 IN: Provide a 12 IN length of 9 LB density fiberglass insulation on saddle.

H. Provide 20 GA galvanized steel pipe saddle for fiberglass and plastic support points to ensure minimum contact width of 4 IN.

I. Pipe Support Spacing: 1. General:

a. Factor loads by specific weight of liquid conveyed if specific weight is greater than water.

b. Locate pipe supports at maximum spacing scheduled unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

c. Provide at least one support for each length of pipe at each change of direction and at each valve.

2. Steel, stainless steel, cast-iron pipe support schedule:

PIPE SIZES - IN MAXIMUM SPAN - FT 1-1/2 and less 5

2 thru 4 10 5 thru 8 15

10 and greater 20

3. Copper pipe support schedule:


3 thru 6 10 8 and greater 15

4. PVC pipe support schedule:


1-1/2 thru 3 4 4 and greater 5

* Maximum fluid temperature of 120 DegF.

5. Support each length and every fitting: a. Bell and spigot piping:

1) At least one hanger. 2) Applied at bell.

b. Mechanical coupling joints: 1) Place hanger within 2 FT of each side of fittings to keep pipes in alignment.

6. Space supports for soil and waste pipe and other piping systems not included above every 5 FT.

7. Provide continuous support for nylon tubing. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide piping systems exhibiting pulsation, vibration, swaying, or impact with suitable constraints to correct the condition. 1. Included in this requirement are movements from:

a. Trap discharge. b. Water hammer. c. Similar internal forces.

B. Weld Supports: 1. AWS D1.1. 2. Weld anchors to pipe in accordance with ASME B31.3.

C. Locate piping and pipe supports as to not interfere with open accesses, walkways, platforms, and with maintenance or disassembly of equipment.

D. Inspect hangers for: 1. Design offset. 2. Adequacy of clearance for piping and supports in the hot and cold positions. 3. Guides to permit movement without binding. 4. Adequacy of anchors.

E. Inspect hangers after erection of piping systems and prior to pipe testing and flushing.

F. Install individual or continuous slot concrete inserts for use with hangers for piping and equipment. 1. Install concrete inserts as concrete forms are installed.

G. Welding: 1. Welding rods: ASTM and AWS standards. 2. Integral attachments:

a. Include welded-on ears, shoes, plates and angle clips. b. Ensure material for integral attachments is of good weldable quality.

3. Preheating, welding and postheat treating: ASME B31.3, Chapter V.

H. Field Painting: 1. Comply with Section 09905.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15100 VALVES: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Valving, actuators, and valving appurtenances.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements. 6. Section 15101 - Gate Valves. 7. Section 15103 - Butterfly Valves. 8. Section 15114 - Miscellaneous Valves.



a. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose. b. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. c. B16.18, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. d. B16.34, Valves-Flanged, Threaded and Welding End.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. b. D256, Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact

Resistance of Plastics. c. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. d. D648, Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under

Flexural Load. e. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. f. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.

3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C111, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings. b. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN through 144 IN. c. C500, Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems. d. C504, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. e. C507, Ball Valves, 6 IN through 48 IN (150 MM through 1200 MM). f. C509, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves 3 through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewage

Systems. g. C540, Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates. h. C550, Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. i. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

4. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.(MSS). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum). b. MG 1, Motors and Generators.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are definitions of abbreviations used in this section or one of the individual valve sections: 1. CWP: Cold water working pressure. 2. SWP: Steam working pressure. 3. WOG: Water, oil, gas working pressure. 4. WWP: Water working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Valve pressure and temperature rating. d. Valve material of construction. e. Special linings. f. Valve dimensions and weight. g. Valve flow coefficient. h. Wiring and control diagrams for electric or cylinder actuators.

3. Test reports.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to individual valve Specification Sections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual valve Specification Sections.

2.3 VALVE ACTUATORS

A. Valve Actuators - General: 1. Provide actuators as shown on Drawings or specified. 2. Counter clockwise opening as viewed from the top. 3. Direction of opening and the word OPEN to be cast in handwheel or valve bonnet. 4. Size actuator to produce required torque with a maximum pull of 80 LB at the

maximum pressure rating of the valve provided and withstand without damage a pull of 200 LB on handwheel or chainwheel or 300 foot-pounds torque on the operating nut.

5. Unless otherwise specified, actuators for valves to be buried, submerged or installed in vaults or manholes shall be sealed to withstand at least 20 FT of submergence.

6. Extension Stem: a. Install where shown or specified. b. Solid steel with actuator key and nut, diameter not less than stem of valve

actuator shaft. c. Pin all stem connections. d. Center in valve box or grating opening band with guide bushing.

B. Buried Valve Actuators:


1. Provide screw or slide type adjustable cast iron valve box, 5 IN minimum diameter, 3/16 IN minimum thickness, and identifying cast iron cover.

2. Box base to enclose buried valve gear box or bonnet. 3. Provide 2 IN standard actuator nuts complying with Section 3.16 of AWWA C500. 4. Provide at least two teehandle keys for actuator nuts, with 5 FT extension between

key and handle. 5. Extension Stem:

a. Provide for buried valves greater than 4 FT below finish grade. b. Extend to within 6 IN of finish grade.

6. Provide concrete pad encasement of valve box as shown for all buried valves unless shown otherwise.

C. Exposed Valve Manual Actuators: 1. Provide for all exposed valves not having electric or cylinder actuators. 2. Provide handwheels for gate and globe valves.

a. Size handwheels for valves in accordance with AWWA C500. 3. Provide lever actuators for plug valves, butterfly valves and ball valves 3 IN DIA and

smaller. a. Lever actuators for butterfly valves shall have a minimum of 5 intermediate lock

positions between full open and full close. b. Provide at least two levers for each type and size of valve furnished.

4. Gear actuators required for plug valves, butterfly valves, and ball valves 4 IN DIA and larger.

5. Provide gearing for gate valves 20 IN and larger in accordance with AWWA C500. 6. Gear actuators to be totally enclosed, permanently lubricated and with sealed

bearings. 7. Provide chain actuators for valves 6 FT or higher from finish floor to valve centerline.

a. Cadmium-plated chain looped to within 3 FT of finish floor. b. Equip chain wheels with chain guides to permit rapid operation with reasonable

side pull without "gagging" the wheel. 8. Provide cast iron floor stands where shown on Drawings. Stands to be furnished by

valve manufacturer with actuator. a. Stand or actuator to include thrust bearings for valve operation and weight of

accessories.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. End Connections: 1. Provide the type of end connections for valves as required in the Piping Schedules

presented in Section 15060 or as shown on the Drawings. 2. Comply with the following standards:

a. Threaded: ANSI B1.20.1. b. Flanged: ANSI B16.1 Class 125 unless otherwise noted or AWWA C207. c. Bell and spigot or mechanical (gland) type: AWWA C111. d. Soldered: ANSI B16.18. e. Grooved: Rigid joints per Table 5 of AWWA C606.

B. Refer to individual valve sections for specifications of each type of valve on Project.

C. Nuts, Bolts, and Washers: 1. Wetted or internal to be bronze or stainless steel. Exposed to be zinc or cadmium

plated.

D. On Insulated Piping: Provide valves with extended stems to permit proper insulation application without interference from handle.

E. Epoxy Interior Coating: 1. Provide epoxy interior coating for all ferrous surfaces in accordance with AWWA

C550.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Painting Requirements: 1. Comply with Section 09905 for painting and protective coatings.

C. Setting Buried Valves: 1. Locate valves installed in pipe trenches where buried pipe indicated on Drawings. 2. Set valves and valve boxes plumb. 3. Place valve boxes directly over valves with top of box being brought to surface of

finished grade. 4. Install in closed position. 5. Place valve on firm footing in trench to prevent settling and excessive strain on

connection to pipe. 6. After installation, backfill up to top of box for a minimum distance of 4 FT on each

side of box.

D. Support exposed valves and piping adjacent to valves independently to eliminate pipe loads being transferred to valve and valve loads being transferred to the piping.

E. For grooved coupling valves, install rigid type couplings or provide separate support to prevent rotation of valve from installed position.

F. Install electric or cylinder actuators above or horizontally adjacent to valve and gear box to optimize access to controls and external handwheel.

G. For threaded valves, provide union on one side within 2 FT of valve to allow valve removal.

H. Install valves accessible for operation, inspection, and maintenance.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust valves, actuators and appurtenant equipment to comply with Section 01650. Operate valve, open and close at system pressures.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to Drawings for schedule of valves 4 IN and larger. 1. Valves less than 4 IN are not scheduled but type and size are defined on Drawings

in plan, section, or schematic.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15103 BUTTERFLY VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Butterfly valves.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.



a. B16.1, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specifications for Gray Iron Castings. b. A126, Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. c. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. d. A395, Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining

Castings for use at Elevated Temperatures. e. A436, Austenitic, Gray Iron Castings. f. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C504, Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves.

4. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS): a. SP-67, Butterfly Valves.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 15100. 2. For valves 8 IN and larger, furnish "Affidavit of Compliance" with Owner in

accordance with AWWA C504.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:


1. See Section 01062


2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES (AWWA C504)

A. Comply with AWWA C504.

B. Materials: 1. Valve bodies:

a. ASTM A126, Class B or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. b. Wafer valves may be constructed of ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron.

2. Valve shafts: a. Stainless steel, 18-8, Type 304 or 316.

3. Valve discs: a. Potable and nonpotable water:

1) ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron. 2) ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. 3) ASTM A436, Type 1 alloy cast iron. 4) Bronze in accordance with AWWA C504.

b. Air and similar applications: ASTM A48, Class 40 cast iron. 4. Valve seats:

a. Potable and nonpotable water and wastewater and air below 180 DegF: 1) Buna-N.

5. Mating surfaces: a. Valves less than 30 IN: ASTM A276, 18-8, stainless steel or bronze. b. Valves 30 IN and larger: ASTM A276, 18-8, stainless steel.

C. Design Requirements: 1. Seat type: Resilient. Comply with AWWA C504. 2. Exposed and submerged valves 3 through 20 IN.

a. Body type: Wafer or short body flange (laying length may vary from AWWA C504).

b. Equip wafer type with fully tapped anchor lugs drilled per ANSI B16.5. 3. Exposed and submerged valves 24 IN and larger:

a. Body type: Short body flange. b. Working pressure: Rated for 150 psi (Class 150B per AWWA C504).

4. Direct buried valves: a. All valves: Working pressure rated for 150 psi (Class 150B per AWWA C504).

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Refer to Drawings and/or valve schedule for type of actuators. Furnish actuator integral with valve.

B. Refer to Section 15100 for actuator requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION


SECTION 15104 BALL VALVES (Pump Control Valves)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ball valves and ball valve actuators.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.



a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings.

2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C507, Ball Valves 6 Inch through 48 Inch Diameter.

3. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS): a. SP-72, Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. See Section 15100. 3. Test results for AWWA valves.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. See Section 01062.


2.2 AWWA C507 BALL VALVES: 6 IN TO 48 IN DIA

A. Comply with AWWA C507.


B. Materials: 1. Body:

a. Cast iron ASTM A126, Class B (Pratt). b. Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 35 (Willamette).

2. Ball: a. Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 40 (Pratt). b. Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 35 (Willamette).

3. Shaft: a. Stainless steel 18-8 Type 304 (Pratt) b. Forged steel, chrome plated at seal tensile yield 82,000 psi (Willamette).

4. Bearings, sleeve type, non-metallic: a. Teflon lined (Pratt). b. Sleeve type, bronze (Willamette).

5. Ball seat: Stainless steel Type 304 (Pratt and Willamette). 6. Body seat:

a. Buna-N (Pratt). b. Monel (Willamette).

C. Design Requirements: 1. Design pressure: 150 psi. 2. Flanges: Class 125. 3. Ball shall provide two (2) direction seal or closure. 4. Provide pipe tap for body drain and air vent and legs or base for support. 5. Ball and body seats: Field adjustable and replaceable. 6. Operational requirements: suitable for pump stop-check service. 7. Special actuators:

a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Sipos Aktorik. 2) Or approved equal.

b. Provide factory-mounted electric motor actuators capable of varying the valve rotational speed during the 90 degree stroke via programmable integral frequency converter.

c. Actuators shall operate on 230 V, 60-hertz, single phase ac power. Panel shall be equipped with 24V DC power supply.

d. During normal operation, actuator shall move disc from fully-open to fully closed position, or reverse, in approximately 90 seconds.

e. Actuator supplier shall develop a program within the actuator for valve rotational speed adjustments to create a linear increase in flow rate versus time through the valve based on valve Cv characteristics, system head curve and pump curve.

f. During emergency operation, actuator shall move disc from fully open to fully closed in 30 seconds.

g. Emergency operation shall be selectable between either constant rotational speed or a proportionally scaled version of the normal operation speed curve.

h. Provide indicator on primary gearing to show position of disc. i. Motor frequency converter shall be an integral part of the valve actuator and

shall be the foundation upon which the actuator functions. No external frequency converters, drives, third parts hardware or components will be acceptable.

j. Provide local controls for push button electrical operation of the actuator. Local operation shall follow the programmed speed-time curve.

k. Operate valve actuator to perform following control functions: I. Open valve after pump has reached a preset operating pressure. II. Close valve and shut off pump after valve has reached 100% closed

position and be adjustable between 90-100% of full closure.


III. Provide rapid (emergency) closure of valve in case of power failure. IV. Provide independent adjustment of normal opening, closing , and

emergency closure rates. V. Provide manual override hand-wheel on electric actuator.

l. Dry contacts for remote indication shall be provided for the following: 1) Valve fully open. 2) Valve fully closed. 3) Valve fault.

m. Actuator panel shall accept dry contacts for valve open command and valve close command and power failure.

n. Each actuator shall be supplied power from a common uninterruptible power supply (UPS) capable of operating the actuator for 10 minutes at full load. UPS units to be supplied in a NEMA 12 cabinet. Cabinet shall include separate overload protection for each valve actuator and main disconnect switch.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Refer to Section 15100 for additional actuator requirements.


A. Shop test AWWA C507 ball valves in accordance with AWWA C507.

B. Furnish record of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



A. For AWWA C507 ball valves, and in accordance with Section 01650 employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. 3. Provide test equipment, tools, and instruments necessary to accomplish equipment

testing. 4. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 5. Provide Owner with a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been

installed properly, has been started up, and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15106 CHECK VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ball check valves.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.



a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125 and 250). 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C508, Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 IN through 24 IN NPS.

3. Manufacturer's Standardization, Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS): a. SP-71, Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. b. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. See Section 15100.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, manufacturers listed under the valve with types are acceptable.


2.2 BALL CHECK VALVES: 1/2 IN TO 4 IN

A. 150 psi at 73 DegF.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. R&G Sloane. 2. Corr Tech.


3. Or approved equal.

C. Materials: 1. Body: PVC, CPVC, or PVDF. 2. Ball: Glass filled or polypropylene. 3. Seals: Viton or EPDM.

D. Design Requirements: 1. Connectors: Double union.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15107 DUCKBILLED FLANGED-END CHECK VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product literature that includes information on the performance and operation of the valve, materials of construction, dimensions and weights, elastomer characteristics, headloss and flow data, and pressure ratings.

B. Upon request, provide shop drawings that clearly identify the valve dimensions.


A. Supplier shall have at least ten (10) years experience in the manufacturer of “duckbill” style elastomeric valves, and shall provide references and a list of installations upon request.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 “DUCKBILL” ELASTOMERIC CHECK VALVES

A. Check Valves are to be all rubber and flow operated check type with a sleeve type connection. The port area shall contour down to a duckbill, which shall allow passage of flow in one direction while preventing reverse flow.

B. The valve shall easily slip over the plain end of a pipe and be affixed with heavy-duty stainless steel clamps. The valve can be installed in a vertical or horizontal position.

C. Manufacturer must have available flow test data from an accredited hydraulics laboratory to confirm pressure drop data. Company name, plant location, valve size and serial number shall be bonded to the check valve. Valves shall be manufactured in the USA.

D. Valve needs to be NSF approved.

2.2 FUNCTION

A. When line pressure inside the valve exceeds the backpressure outside the valve by a certain amount, the line pressure forces the bills of the valve open, allowing flow to pass. When backpressure exceeds the line pressure by at the same amount, the bills of the valve are forced closed.

2.3 MANUFACTURER

A. All valves shall be of the Style 730 as manufactured by Proco Products or approved equal.

B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Special Conditions. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Valve shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s written Installation and Operations Manual and approved submittals.

3.2 MANUFACTURER’S CUSTOMER SERVICE

A. Manufacturer’s authorized representative shall be available for customer service during installation and start-up, and to train personnel in the operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the valve.

B. Manufacturer shall also make customer service available directly from the factory in addition to authorized representatives for assistance during installation and start-up, and to train personnel in the operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the valve.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15114 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Air release and vacuum relief valves. 2. Automatic control valves:

a. Electronic Control Valve 3. Solenoid valves.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings - Classes 25, 125 and 250. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C512, Air-Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service.

b. C550, Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. See Section 15100.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed under the specific valve types are acceptable.


2.2 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES

A. General: Conform to AWWA C512.

B. Alternate 1:


1. Water a. Air Release Valve: (AV130, AV131)

1) Acceptable manufacturers: a) A.R.I. (Model # S-050-C)

2) Operation: The valve shall release accumulated air from the system while it is under pressure and operating.

3) Pressure: 3 – 250 psi. 4) Testing pressure: 360 psi. 5) Ends: Male threaded size: 1” NPT 6) Body Material: Reinforced Nylon with metal casting cover. 7) Nozzle Seal: Rubber E.P.D.M.

b. Combination Air Valves: (AV125, AV126, AV127, AV128, AV129) 1) Acceptable manufacturers:

a) A.R.I. (Model # D-060-C HF NS) 2) Operation: The valve shall discharge air at high velocity during filling of the

system and admit air during its drainage. Also, the valve shall release accumulated air from the system while it is under pressure and operating.

3) Pressure: 3 – 250 psi. 4) Testing pressure: 360 psi. 5) Ends: 3” flanged connection. 6) Body Material: Cast Iron ASTM-A-48 7) Nozzle seat: Stainless Steel SAE 104 8) Nozzle Seal: Rubber E.P.D.M.

2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Basic Valve: 1. Type:

a. Diaphragm-actuated hydraulically operated. 1) Acceptable manufacturers (Model as shown for specific valve):

a) Cla-Val b) Or approved equal.

2) Materials: a) Body: Ductile iron. b) Seat insert: Stainless steel. c) Disc: Buna-N. d) Diaphragm: Nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber.

3) Design requirements: Do not use diaphragm as seating surface.

B. Control: 1. Type:

a. Electronic Control Valve: (V131) 1) Acceptable manufacturers:

a) Cla-Val, Model 131 (Angle Style). b) Or approved equal.

2) Design requirements: a) Modulate basic valve to provide a minimum flow of 1 MGD and a

maximum flow of 7 MGD from Zone 2 to Zone 1. b) Dual solenoid pilot controls to be activated by an electronic valve

controller (Cla-Val, Model 131VC-1) furnished with valve. c) Provide a NEMA 12 cabinet for electronic valve controller. d) Electronic valve controller shall be wired to the main control system.

(1) Output contact for remote alarm indication. (2) 4 - 20 mA Analog output for valve position. (3) 4 – 20 mA Analog input for flow.

e) The valve shall have fail-safe capability to close upon a maximum Zone 1 tank level.


2. Design requirements: a. Assembles all control features and hardware on basic valve at factory. b. Use corrosion-resistant metal for all exposed portions of the control. c. Include with valve control:

1) Stop valves. 2) Strainer. 3) Valves for opening and closing speed control. 4) Pilot valves. 5) Solenoid valves. 6) Pressure switches as necessary to provide control function.

d. Electric components: 1) 110 V, 1 PH. 2) In weatherproof enclosure unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

2.4 SOLENOID VALVES (1 IN AND SMALLER)

A. General Service (Air - Water): 1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. ASCO. b. Or approved equal.

2. Materials: a. Body: Brass. b. Seat: Buna-N. c. Insulation: Class F.

3. Design requirements: a. 110 Vac. b. Two-way, normally closed. c. Enclosure: Compatible with area classifications indicated on Drawings. d. Working pressure, air and water: 125 psig.

4. Accessories: Provide strainer on supply.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Furnish any accessories required to provide a completely operable valve.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Completely shop assemble unit including any interconnecting piping, speed control valves, control isolation valves and electrical components.

B. Provide internal epoxy coating suitable for potable water for all iron body valves in accordance with AWWA C550.


A. Shop hydrostatically test to piping system test pressure.


A. Provide one (1) set of any special tools or wrenches required for operation or maintenance for each type valve.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: See Section 11005 and Section 15100.

B. Air Release, Vacuum Relief, combination air and Pressure Relief Valves: 1. Pipe exhaust to a suitable disposal point. 2. Where exhausted to a trapped floor drain, terminate exhaust line 6 IN minimum

above floor.


A. Clean, inspect, and operate valve to ensure all parts are operable and valve seats properly.

B. Check and adjust valves and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and place into operation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15183 PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation:

a. Piping insulation.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.



a. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 255, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 723, Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Submit complete specification of insulation materials, adhesives, cement,

together with manufacturer's recommended methods of application and coverage for coatings and adhesives.

3. Submit itemized schedule by building of proposed insulation systems showing density, thermal conductivity, thickness, adhesive, jackets and vapor barriers.

4. Certifications: Products will meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Elastomeric insulation:

a. Armstrong. b. Rubatex.



2.2 PIPING INSULATION - ELASTOMERIC

A. General: 1. Insulation fire and smoke hazard ratings for composite (insulation, jacket or facing,

and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation), as tested by procedure ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding: a. Flame spread: 25. b. Smoke developed: 100.

2. Accessories (adhesives, mastics, cements, and tapes: Same component ratings as listed above.

3. Indicate on product labels or their shipping cartons: Flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements.

4. Permanent treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety is required. a. Water-soluble treatments are prohibited.

5. Insulated shields at pipe support points.

B. Pipe, Fitting, and Valve Insulation: 1. Flexible elastomeric closed cell pipe insulation.

a. Average thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.27 (Btu-IN)/(HR-FT2-DegF) at mean temperature of 75 DegF, temperature range -40 to 220 DegF; permeability not to exceed 0.20 by ASTM E96; water absorption 3 percent by ASTM D1056 and ozone resistance.

2. Provide minimum insulation thickness conforming to schedules or as shown on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. General: 1. Consider piping as exposed, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Consider piping in walls, partitions, floors, pipe chases, pipe shafts and duct shafts

as concealed. a. Consider, piping above ceilings as concealed.

3. Provide release for insulation application after installation and testing is complete. a. Apply insulation on clean, dry surfaces after inspection.

4. Provide insulation continuous through wall, roof and ceiling openings, pipe hangers, supports and sleeves.

5. Provide insulation with vapor barrier for piping where surfaces may be cooler than surrounding air temperatures. a. Provide vapor barrier (0.17 perm-IN; ASTM C553) continuous and unbroken. b. Hangers, supports, anchors, and related items that are secured directly to cold

surfaces must be adequately insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation.

6. Apply specified adhesives, mastics and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended coverage per unit volume.

C. Piping Insulation - Elastomeric: 1. Slip insulation on pipe prior to connection.

a. Whenever the slip-on technique is not possible provide insulation neatly slit and snapped over the pipe.


2. Fabricate and install fitting cover insulation according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Seal joints, slits, miter-cuts and other exposed edges of insulation with adhesive, recommended by the insulation manufacturer, to ensure complete vapor barrier.

3.2 SCHEDULES

A. Refrigeration Lines (35-60 DegF): 1. Elastomeric. 2. 1/2 IN thickness for lines 1 IN and smaller.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Plumbing fixtures, trim, and equipment.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


and administration of the submittal process. 2. See Section 11005 and Section 15060. 3. Color selection charts for Owner color selection. 4. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:

a. Layout plan(s) showing dimensions, elevations, etc. b. Details showing connections, installation, rough-in locations, etc.


referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Chemical-resistance data.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions for requirements for:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Drains, carriers, and shock absorbers:

a. Wade. b. Josam. c. Zurn. d. Smith.



A. Drains: 1. Floor drain (FD):

a. Bottom outlet. b. Clamping seepage flange.


c. Seepage openings. d. Size as shown on Drawings. e. Type:

1) Cast iron body: a) FD-1 (unfinished area) sediment bucket, bucket shall support grate:

(1) Wade W-1200-TD.

B. Traps: 1. Floor and equipment drains:

a. Same material and coating as the piping system. b. 3 IN minimum seal.

C. Cleanouts (CO): 1. Cleanouts for cast-iron pipe:

a. Tapped extra heavy cast-iron ferrule. b. Calked into cast-iron fittings. c. Extra heavy brass neoprene seal screw plug with solid hexagonal nut.

2. Cleanouts for steel pipe: a. Extra heavy brass screw plug in drainage fittings.

3. Access housing with adjustable anchor flange and secured scoriated cast: Wade W 380 MF.

4. Cleanouts turning out through walls and up through floor shall be made by long sweep ells or "y" and 1/8 bends with plugs and face or deck plates to conform to architectural finish in room. a. Where definite finish is not indicated, wall plates shall be chrome-plated cast-

brass and floor plates polished brass. 5. Code:

a. Provide cleanouts of same size as pipe up to 4 IN, and not less than 4 IN for larger pipes.

b. Close access openings for concealed cleanouts with flush floor or flush wall cover plates or flush ceiling access panels.

c. Provide wall plates with chrome plated cast-brass round cleanout cover with flanged ring.

d. Provide screws which match cover plate material. 6. Cleanouts installed in floor with ceramic tile, concrete, or Terrazzo finish: Wade W-

6000-SB. 7. Cleanouts installed in completely accessible pipe chases or where piping is exposed

do not require special covers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Drains: 1. Install drains at locations indicated on Drawings and in compliance with local codes. 2. In uncovered concrete slabs:

a. Install at the low points of surface areas to be drained or as indicated. b. Set tops of drains flush with the finished floor. c. Install drain flashing collar or a flange so that no leakage occurs between the

drain and the adjoining surfaces. d. Maintain the integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

B. Cleanouts: 1. Install cleanouts:

a. Above floor in each vertical riser that connects to horizontal branch below floor. b. At test tee to receive proper test plugs in each vertical riser at least every other

floor.


c. As required by local code.


A. Test piping for leaks per Section 15060.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15605 HVAC: EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Heating, ventilating, and cooling equipment.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 13448 - Control Panels and Enclosures. 5. Section 15890 - HVAC: Ductwork. 6. Section 15970 - Instrumentation and Control For HVAC Systems. 7. Section 15990 - HVAC Systems: Balancing and Testing. 8. Division 16 - Electrical.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA). 2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):

a. 410, Force-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. b. 430, Central Station Air-Handling Units.

3. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): a. HVAC Applications Handbook, Chapter entitled "Sound and Vibration Control." b. 52, Method of Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for

Removing Particulate Matter. 4. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA). 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 507, Standard for Safety Electric Fans. 9. Building code:

a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, {2000}{2003}{2006}

Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

B. Miscellaneous: 1. Gage thickness specified herein shall be manufacturer's standard gage for steel and

Brown and Sharpe gage for non-ferrous metals. 2. Corrosion protection of equipment to be as specified herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings.



referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Wiring diagrams. d. Control diagrams. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts and technical data. f. Corrosion-protection information. g. Fan curves. h. Sound data. i. Vibration isolation. j. Control description. k. Performance data on all equipment.

4. Certifications: a. Provide certification of thickness of corrosion-protection coating.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Vibration isolation assemblies:

a. Mason. b. Vibration Mounting and Controls Co.

2. Fan coils: a. Carrier. b. McQuay.

3. Unit heater - electric: a. ILG Industries, Inc. b. Brasch. c. Chromalox. d. Qmark

4. Air-cooled condensing units - split system: a. Carrier.

5. Roof-mounted centrifugal exhaust fans: a. Loren Cook. b. Greenheck. c. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.


2.2 GENERAL

A. All manufactured units shall be factory wired and assembled. 1. Use fasteners made of same material as unit.


A. Equipment Coils: 1. Cooling coils - direct expansion:

a. ARI certified. b. Material:


1) Aluminum. 2) Copper with aluminum fins for use in administration units only.

c. Fin spacing: Minimum 80 fins per foot. d. Minimum standard operating limit: 250 psi. e. Size and capacity as scheduled.

B. Fan Coils: 1. ARI certified. 2. Coils: See paragraph(s) in Article 2.3, Equipment Coils. 3. Blower:

a. Fan wheels: Centrifugal forward-curved, double width. b. Fan housing: Galvanized steel. c. Statically and dynamically balanced. d. Motor:

1) See Section 11005. 2) Integral overload protection.

4. Cabinet: a. Material: Galvanized steel, 18 GA minimum. b. Exposed units equipped with hinged access panel, intake and discharge grilles. c. Concealed units equipped with return plenum, filter section and discharge duct

collar. 5. Drain pans:

a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Equip with drain connection. c. Insulated.

6. Filters: See Section 15890. 7. Size and capacity as scheduled on Drawings.

C. Unit Heater - Electric: 1. Type: Horizontal 2. UL listed for non-rated areas. 3. Material:

a. Cabinet: 18 GA steel. b. Heating elements: Copper-clad steel.

4. Fan motors: a. See Section 11005. b. Built-in automatic reset overload protection.

5. Dynamically balanced fan. 6. Built-in automatic reset cutout protection. 7. Accessories:

a. Mounting bracket. b. 40 to 90 DegF, 5 DegF differential internal thermostat.

8. Electrical, fan motor, and airflow data as scheduled on Drawings.

D. Air-Cooled Condensing Units - Split System: 1. ARI rated. 2. UL listed. 3. Materials:

a. Casing: Galvanized steel. b. Mounting/lifting rails: Steel. c. Outdoor coil: Seamless aluminum tubing and aluminum fins. d. Fan blades: Aluminum.

4. Weatherproof casing: a. Hail screen for condenser coil. b. Access panels.

5. Compressor: a. Hermetically sealed.


b. Internal pressure protector. c. Crankcase heater. d. Internal spring mounts. e. Centrifugal oil pump. f. Built-in overload protection.

6. Condenser fans and motors: a. Direct drive. b. Statically and dynamically balanced. c. Motor: See Section 11005.

1) Permanently lubricated bearings. 2) Built-in current and thermal overload protection.

7. Built-in refrigerant filter dryer. 8. Built-in liquid line and gas line service valves with gage ports. 9. Outdoor coil:

a. Fins mechanically bonded to tubing. b. Lab tested to 2000 psi.

10. 24 V factory-wired controls to include fusing and control power transformer. 11. Size and capacity as scheduled on Drawings.

E. Roof-Mounted Centrifugal Exhaust Fans: 1. AMCA certified. 2. Non-overloading horsepower capability. 3. Materials:

a. Top cap: Spun aluminum. b. Wheel and inlet shroud: Aluminum. c. Baffle: Aluminum. d. Base: One-piece aluminum. e. Drive assembly supports: Steel. f. Drive shaft: Solid stainless steel.

4. Backward inclined blades. 5. Tapered inlet shroud. 6. Statically and dynamically balanced wheel. 7. Bearings:

a. Permanently sealed, flange type, ball-bearings. b. Five-to-one load capability to actual load ratio. c. 200,000 HR average life.

8. Weathertight compartment for motor and drives. a. Separated from airstream.

9. Motor: See Section 11005. a. Driver and driven sheaves:

1) Keyed hub type. 2) Drive sheaves: Fixed pitch diameter. 3) Driver:

a) Shipped with variable pitch diameter sheave. b) Fixed pitch diameter size based on approved test and balance reports.

4) V-belt drives sized for 150 percent motor horsepower. 10. Vibration isolated drive assembly. 11. Accessories:

a. Prefabricated insulated aluminum roof curb. b. Backdraft damper: See Section 15890. c. Bird screen.

12. Size and capacity as scheduled on Drawings. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with Section 11005.

B. Install fixed pitched drive sheave after sheave has been sized based on accepted test and balance report.



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Install new filters on units which have been running prior to acceptance of Project.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15890 HVAC: DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: HVAC ductwork and accessories.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 15970 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC Systems.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): 2. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA):

a. 2605-02, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): a. 52, Method of Testing Air Conditioning Devices Used in General Ventilation for

Removing Particulate Matter. 4. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA): a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

7. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): a. Building Materials Directory.

B. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product, of

type, size required, whose products have been in use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

2. Installers: Firm with at least 5 years installation experience on products similar to that required for this Project.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS


and administration of the submittal process. 2. See Section 11005. 3. Efficiency ratings per ASHRAE 52 for factory built and assembled filter units.


4. Scaled ductwork Drawings (1/4 IN equals 1 FT) showing duct and accessory layout and support.

B. Miscellaneous Submittal: 1. Documentation of qualifications for fabricators and installers.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions for requirements for:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Transverse joints (factory fabricated aluminum):

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Or approved equal.

2. Flexible duct connections: a. Duro-Dyne. b. Vent fabrics. c. Or approved equal.

3. Flexible connector thrust restraint: a. Mason WB. b. Or approved equal.

4. Grilles and registers: a. Anemostat. b. Carnes. c. Titus. d. Or approved equal.

5. Air filters: a. American Air Filter. b. Continental. c. Farr. d. Or approved equal.

6. Duct sealers: a. Benjamin Foster. b. Chicago Mastic. c. 3M Co. d. Permatex. e. Or approved equal.

7. Temperature control and automatic dampers: a. Air Balance. b. American Warming. c. Ruskin. d. Or approved equal.


2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Duct and Fittings (Metallic): 1. Materials: 3003 H-14 aluminum alloy. 2. Fabrication:

a. Minimum sheet material thickness:


1) Ducts with largest side or diameter to 30 IN: 0.05 IN thick. 2) Ducts with largest side or diameter greater than 30 IN: 0.08 IN thick.

b. Utilize SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for minimum of 2 IN water gage static pressure for the minimum sheet material thickness specified herein. 1) Heavier gage sheet material may be used with associated reinforcement as

an alternate to minimum thickness specified. 2) Lighter gage sheet material with associated reinforcement shall not be used

as an alternate to minimum thickness specified. c. Continuously weld seams on factory assembled units. d. Transverse joints (Alternate A):

1) SMACNA T-22 companion flange. 2) Gasketed. 3) Rigidity class:

a) Ducts with largest side or diameter to 30 IN: SMACNA Class D (1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/8 IN angles).

b) Ducts with largest side or diameter greater than 30 to 54 IN: SMACNA Class H (2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 3/16 IN angles).

e. Transverse joints (Alternate B): 1) Materials and fabrication:

a) Angles: Aluminum. (1) Ductmate 35 or equal.

b) Corners: Aluminum. (1) Ductmate DC 35 or equal.

c) Snap cleats: Aluminized or stainless steel. d) Gaskets: Closed cell neoprene. e) Bolts: Stainless steel. f) Sheet metal screws: Self-drilling stainless steel with unthreaded section

under head. 2) Fabrication:

a) Rigidity class: SMACNA Class H. b) 3/8 IN DIA x 1 IN bolts.

B. Supports and Hangers: 1. Materials:

a. Support angles: Aluminum or stainless steel. b. Hanger rods: Stainless steel. c. Anchors: Stainless steel wedge type.

2. Fabrication: a. Trapeze type units.

C. Flexible Connections: 1. Materials: Hypalon, double coated closely woven glass fabric. 2. Fabrication:

a. Withstand 4.5 IN water column, positive and negative pressure.

D. Drain Pan: 1. Materials: Aluminum. 2. Fabrication: 0.080 IN.

E. Air Grille and Register Assembly: 1. Materials:

a. Assembly: Extruded aluminum. b. Gaskets: Sponge rubber.

2. Fabrication: a. Supply registers:

1) Two sets individually adjustable louvers. b. Exhaust and return registers:

1) 45-degree deflection front blades.


c. Dampers: 1) Key-operated opposed blade.

d. Screws, duct collars, and transitions as required. e. Finish for units installed in finish areas where ductwork is concealed: Prime

painted with primer compatible with paint specified in Section 09905.

F. Roof-Mounted Intake Hood: 1. Materials:

a. Hood: Aluminum. b. Screen: Expanded aluminum.

2. Fabrication: a. Type indicated on Drawings. b. 0.080 IN thick material. c. Insulated. d. 85 percent free area bird screen. e. Design to withstand 30 LBS/SF snow load and 100 mph winds.

3. Air Filter: a. Washable.

4. Roof Curb.

G. Temperature Control, Automatic and Manually Operated Dampers: 1. Material:

a. Body: 6063 T5 aluminum. b. Seal blade edge: Extruded vinyl.

2. Fabrication: a. Frame thickness: 0.125 IN minimum. b. Blades:

1) Two-position parallel blade. 2) Mixing and volume: Opposed blade. 3) Airfoil shape. 4) Maximum 6 IN width.

c. Linkage: Concealed in frame. d. Axles: 1/2 IN plated steel hex. e. Bearings: Molded synthetic. f. Seals:

1) Jamb: Flexible compression type. g. Control shaft: Removable, 1/2 IN DIA. h. Air leakage (4 FT SQ damper) at 4 IN WG pressure: 99 cfm maximum. i. Motors for motor operated damper: See Section 15970. j. Provide outboard support for operator linkage where damper motor is to be

installed outside of duct. k. Provide fold out operator mounting bracket where damper motor is to be

installed on face of damper or inside duct. l. Finish: 215 R1 anodized.


A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish Owner with the following extra materials:

a. Three complete filter media changes for each filter unit. b. Filter media used during construction is in addition to this requirement.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Metal Ductwork: 1. Install with longitudinal seams sealed for zero leakage.

a. Welded seams may be used upon acceptance of welded seam samples by Engineer.

2. Install gaskets at each transverse joint and fasten sections together with bolts. a. Tighten for zero leakage.

3. Install supports and hangers with anchors in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

4. Install turning vanes in square elbows: a. Unsupported vane length not to exceed 48 IN. b. Position vanes at proper angle to meet specified pressure drop.

5. Install flexible connections at fans: a. Locate as close as possible to fan. b. Allow 1 IN of slack to prevent vibration transmission. c. Install thrust restraints across connectors.

6. Install access doors where indicated on Drawings and at smoke and fire damper in accordance with NFPA requirements.

7. Volume extractors: a. Install at supply registers, grilles, diffusers and supply branch connections from

ducts. b. Provide branch duct extensions into main duct above and below extractor when

branch duct is narrower than main duct.

C. Drain Pans: 1. Install at fan coil cooling coils, control valves above finished ceilings and at other

sources of moisture. 2. Install metal tubing at drain and terminate above floor drain, equipment drain and as

shown on Drawings.

D. Air Grille and Register Assemblies: 1. Install where shown on Drawings of size and capacities scheduled on Drawings. 2. Install prime painted grilles and registers in areas where duct work is concealed.

Field paint to match adjacent surface finish.

E. Air Filters: 1. Install where shown on Drawings of size and capacity scheduled on Drawings. 2. Do not operate equipment during construction without filters.


END OF SECTION


SECTION 15970 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Instrumentation and control for HVAC systems. 2. Temperature control. 3. Ventilation control. 4. Heating control. 5. Cooling control. 6. Control wiring. 7. Panels and accessories. 8. Miscellaneous.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 10400 -Identification Devices. 4. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 15605 - HVAC: Equipment. 6. Section 15890 - HVAC: Ductwork. 7. Division 16 - Electrical.



B. Referenced Standards: 1. The Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA):

a. S5.4, Standard Instrument Loop Diagrams. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA):

a. PM C20.1, Process Measurement and Control Terminology.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. Controls to be in compliance with Section 16010 for NEMA and NEC enclosure

class requirements unless noted or specified otherwise. 2. Unless specifically noted otherwise, components of systems shall be industrial duty

suitable for moist, corrosive environments. 3. Express control device performance requirements in terminology in accordance with

SAMA PM C20.1. Process measurement and control terminology. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering



A. Work shall be provided as an integrated operating system.

B. Provide a complete system of automatic temperature control, thermostats, relays, valves, damper operators and other associated controls and appurtenances required to maintain minimum conditions described in detail herein and on Drawings, together with thermometers, gages and other accessory equipment. 1. Assemble control system with complete system of wiring and air piping to fulfill

requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Install system using competent mechanics under direct supervision of control manufacturer.

D. Controls, as set out in "Sequence of Operations," are designed to illustrate operating functions only. 1. Control sequence shall be considered supplementary to sequence of operation. 2. These minimum specified items, and any additional controls, not indicated but

required to meet performance as outlined in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to Owner to make a complete system.

E. Sequence of Operation - General: 1. Sequence of operations indicated illustrates basic operating functions only.

Contractor shall review Drawings and submit complete installation data, including minor details, to provide proper operation in his proposal. Where an item differs from specifications, control manufacturer shall submit manufacturer's recommendations subject to Engineer's approval. a. Exhaust Fan (EF-02-1):

1) Circuited from main power panel. 2) Controlled through VFD by room temperature sensor/transmitter.

a) Room temperature above 85 DegF: Fan "STARTS" at low speed. b) Fan speed varies to maintain temperature at setpoint. c) Room temperature below 83 DegF: Fan is "OFF".

b. Electric Heaters (EUH-02-1 thru EUH-02-5): 1) Circuited from main power panel. 2) Individually controlled by unit-mounted thermostat:

a) Room temperature below setpoint 65 DegF (adjustable), Electric Unit Heater is “ON”.

b) Room temperature above setpoint, Electric Unit Heater is "OFF". c. Fan Coil Unit (FC-02-1) and Condensing Unit (ACCU-02-1):

1) Circuited from main power panel. 2) Controlled by wall-mounted thermostat (furnished with unit):

a) "COOL": Cooling coil will cycle to maintain setpoint of 75 DegF (adjustable).

d. Motor-Operated Dampers (MOD-02-1): 1) Circuited from lighting panel. 2) Controlled by HAND-OFF-AUTO switch:

a) "HAND": Dampers are open. b) "OFF": Dampers are closed. c) "AUTO": Dampers shall be interlocked with Exhaust fan (EF-02-1 room

controller). (1) Room temperature above thermostat setpoint 85 DegF (adjustable):

Exhaust fan is “ON” and dampers open. (2) Room temperature below setpoint: Exhaust fan is "OFF" and

dampers are closed.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


and administration of the submittal process. 2. Wiring diagrams showing point to point termination with auxiliary interlocks for each

item in each control loop. 3. Instrument loop diagrams and word description of loop function for each individual

unit controlled including auxiliary interlocks in full compliance with ISA S5.4.

B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Secure from equipment manufacturers, detailed and complete control and power

wiring diagrams, word descriptions of controls provided as part of the HVAC equipment or equipment interfaced or interlocked thereto, and submit with equipment manufacturer's submittals. a. Provide the above information to control manufacturer.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions for requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Manufacturer's catalog numbers hereinafter are for reference to type, style,

dimension, related items and to establish a standard of quality. Reference to a manufacturer's number hereinafter does not imply full compliance to these Specifications.

2. Instrumentation and control systems: a. Honeywell. b. Johnson Control Co.


2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Dampers: 1. Refer to Section 15890.

B. Damper Operators: 1. Provide operators of proper size and number to secure true throttling or two-position

action as required. 2. Furnish damper operators for installation inside ductwork and attached to frame of

damper, or installed outside ductwork and connected to extended shaft as required. 3. Provide operators for outside air, spring-loaded with sufficient power to assure tight

closing of dampers on fan shutdown or in the fail safe position indicated by "Sequence of Controls."

4. Provide electric operators with fully immersed in oil gear train, in closed cast aluminum housing. a. Provide damper operators with integral spring return motor springs to make

controls fail safe in position specified under "Sequence of Controls." b. Provide fully modulating operators from proportional electric controllers. c. Provide end switches or proportioning controllers permitting simultaneous

operation or interlocking with other equipment.


d. Provide separate electrical circuits for damper operators with no more than four operators on a circuit.

5. Ensure coordination to provide for the installation of tight closing dampers low leakage type (6 cfm per square foot at 4 IN WC pressure across damper) with compatible dampers, damper operators and related controls.

C. Room Temperature Sensor/Transmitter: 1. Provide Kele temperature transmitter Model ST-T91E or equal. 2. Temperature Transmitter shall be CE appoved. 3. Provide in full compliance with the listed Specifications below:

a. Sensing element: 1000 ohm thin film platinum TCR 0.00375 ohm/ohm/ Deg C b. Configuration: Two-wire, loop-powered c. Standard Range:

1) 40 Deg F to 90 Deg F. d. Max range:

1) 0 Deg F to 140 Deg F e. Output: 4-20mA f. Output Limit: 25mA (sensor leads open) g. Loop calibration output: 20 mA ± 0.2 percent h. Max Impedance: 675ohm @ 24 VDC i. Transmitter accuracy: 0.1 F or 0.2 percent of span j. Sensor accuracy: ± 0.2 percent of 1000 ohm at 0 Deg C k. Approximate sensitivity: 2.1 ohm / Deg F @ 32 Deg F l. For corrosive environments provide thermostats with stainless steel sensing

elements. m. Ensure element is installed to sense coldest point should stratification occur.

4. Label temperature transmitter with identification tag of HVAC equipment controlled using phenolic nameplate in accordance with Section 10400.

D. Power Supply: 1. Supply voltage: 10.5 VDC -45 VDC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements of Section 16120 and Section 16130.

B. Identification: See Section 10400.

C. Connect control devices to perform functions indicated and perform in required sequence.

D. In general, locate thermostats for room control immediately inside door, above light switch, unless shown otherwise. 1. Where light switch is in an entryway to room, locate thermostat on wall within room

so it is capable of sensing true space conditions. 2. Prior to installation, coordinate thermostat location with Engineer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15990 HVAC SYSTEMS: BALANCING AND TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Adjusting, balancing, and testing of all heating, ventilating and air conditioning

(HVAC) systems, including the following systems:

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 15605 - HVAC: Equipment. 4. Section 15890 - HVAC: Ductwork. 5. Section 15970 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC Systems.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC):

a. National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB):

a. Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.

B. Qualifications: 1. Work of this Section to be accomplished by an independent testing and balancing

firm certified by one of the following: a. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). b. National Environmental Balance Bureau (NEBB). c. Other certification entity approved by Engineer.

2. The independent firm shall not be the same firm as the firm installing the HVAC equipment, nor under contract to the firm installing the equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


and administration of the submittal process. 2. Certifications:

a. Letter stating the name and qualifications of the firm proposed. b. Evidence that relevant subcontractors have been notified of the requirement to

coordinate balance and test elements in the work with the testing and balancing firm.

3. Report forms: a. Procedures and forms to be used in calibrating of test instruments, balancing

systems, and recording and reporting test data.

B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Completed test reports and data forms upon completion of installation, balance and

testing of HVAC systems. a. Insert recorded information on report forms required by specifications and

approved for use on project. b. Additional written verification and other related information clearly identifying

project, date and specifics of verification.


c. Utilize report forms similar to those shown in Section V of AABC Standard. d. Provide forms typed and signed by the testing and balancing firm.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Secure approved Shop Drawings of all HVAC equipment.

B. Procedures and Forms: 1. Submit procedures and forms to be used in calibration of test instruments, balancing

systems, and recording and reporting test data. 2. Obtain approval before beginning balancing and testing.

C. Do not begin balancing and testing until HVAC systems are complete and in full working order. 1. Place HVAC systems into full operation and continue their operation during each

working day of balancing and testing.

D. Provide qualified heating and ventilating Engineer(s) to supervise and perform balancing and testing.

E. Review design Drawings, specifications, approved Shop Drawings and other related items to become thoroughly acquainted with the design of HVAC systems.

F. Check all installed systems against Contract Drawings, Specifications and Shop Drawings to see that system is installed as required. 1. Report deficiencies to the Engineer. 2. Report deficiencies to Contractor for remedial action including providing corrective

measures required in the function of any part of system to complete balancing.

G. Make necessary adjustments as required to balance the systems.


A. Balance and Test Air Systems: 1. Adjust equipment RPM to design requirements. 2. Report motor full load amperes. 3. Obtain design CFM at fans.

a. Make pilot tube traverse of main supply and exhaust ducts within 5 percent. 4. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. 5. Obtain design CFM for recirculated air. 6. Obtain design CFM outside air. 7. Test and record entering air temperatures, (DB, heating and cooling). 8. Test and record leaving air temperatures, (DB, heating and cooling). 9. Test and record leaving air temperatures, (WB, cooling). 10. Adjust dampers in supply, exhaust and return air ducts to design CFM. 11. Test diffusers, grilles, and registers as follows:

a. Adjust to comply with design requirements within 10 percent. b. Identify location and area of each. c. Adjust face velocity to establish required CFM. Retest after initial adjustments. d. Adjust to minimize drafts and to ensure uniform air distribution in all areas.

12. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers, and HVAC equipment. a. Use manufacturer's ratings on equipment to make required calculations.


13. Adjust and assure that the operation of automatically operated dampers are as specified. Check and calibrate controls.

14. Prepare and submit reports.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL: BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Basic requirements for electrical systems.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05505 - Metal Fabrications. 4. Section 10400 - Identification Devices. 5. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. For the purposes of providing materials and installing electrical work the following definitions shall be used. 1. Outdoor area: Exterior locations where the equipment is normally exposed to the

weather and including below grade structures, such as vaults, manholes, handholes and in-ground pump stations.

2. Architecturally finished area: Offices, laboratories, conference rooms, restrooms, corridors and other similar occupied spaces.

3. Non-architecturally finished area: Pump, chemical, mechanical, electrical rooms and other similar process type rooms.

4. Corrosive areas: Rooms or areas identified on the Drawings where there is a varying degree of spillage or splashing of corrosive materials such as water, wastewater or chemical solutions; or chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agents, chemicals, chemical fumes or chemical mixtures.

5. Shop fabricated: Manufactured or assembled equipment for which a UL test procedure has not been established.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA):

a. 1, Aluminum Standards and Data. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code. 4. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

c. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

d. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.



B. Where Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) test procedures have been established for the product type, use UL or ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL) approved electrical equipment and provide with the UL or ETL label.


A. Coordinate installation of the service transformer and metering with the serving utility. 1. The serving utility for this Project is Xcel Energy. Contact: Ron Whitlow 303-425-

3890. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all work with the utility. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install 200A load break, 15kV elbow for terminating

at primary utility interface. Provide protective caps and any additional appurtenances for this installation.

3. The Contractor shall meet all requirements of “The Xcel Energy Standard for Electric Installation and Use”.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. See Section 11005 and individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements

for equipment. 3. Non-equipment requirements:

a. Provide manufacturer's technical information on products to be used, including product descriptive bulletin.

b. Include data sheets that include manufacturer's name and product model number. Clearly identify all optional accessories.

c. Acknowledgement that products are UL or ETL listed or are constructed utilizing UL or ETL recognized components.

d. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling and installation instructions. e. Product installation details. f. See individual Specification Sections for any additional requirements.


C. When a Specification Section includes products specified in another Specification Section, each section shall have the required Shop Drawing transmittal form per General Conditions and Special Conditions and all sections shall be submitted simultaneously.



B. Protect nameplates on electrical equipment to prevent defacing.

1.7 AREA DESIGNATIONS

A. Designation of an area will determine the NEMA rating of the electrical equipment enclosures, types of conduits and installation methods to be used in that area. 1. Outdoor areas: Wet. Also, corrosive when specifically designated on the Drawings

or in the Specifications. 2. Indoor areas: Dry. Also, wet, corrosive when specifically designated on the

Drawings or in the Specifications. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to specific Division 16 sections and specific material paragraphs below.

B. Provide all components of a similar type by one manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Electrical Equipment Support Pedestals and Racks: 1. Approved manufacturers:

a. Modular strut: 1) Unistrut Building Systems. 2) B-Line. 3) Globe Strut.

2. Material requirements: a. Modular strut:

1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153. 2) Stainless steel: AISI Type 316. 3) PVC coat galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 and 20 mil PVC

coating. b. Structural members:

1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A123. 2) Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6.

c. Mounting plates: 1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A123. 2) Aluminum: AA Type 6063-T6.

d. Mounting hardware: 1) Galvanized steel. 2) Stainless steel.

e. Anchorage per Section 05505.

B. Field touch-up of galvanized surfaces. 1. Zinc-rich Aromatic Urethane Primer.

a. One coat, 3.0 mils, 90-97 Tneme-Zinc, VOC = 2.67

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and wire all equipment, including prepurchased equipment, and perform all tests necessary to assure conformance to the Drawings and Specifications and ensure that equipment is ready and safe for energization.

B. Install equipment in accordance with the requirements of: 1. NFPA 70 (NEC). 2. ANSI C2. 3. The manufacturer's instructions.

C. Do not use equipment that exceed dimensions or reduce clearances indicated on the Drawings or as required by the NFPA 70.

D. Install equipment plumbed, square and true with construction features and securely fastened.


E. Install electrical equipment, including pull and junction boxes, minimum of 6 IN from process, gas, air and water piping and equipment.

F. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance, is not blocked or concealed and does not interfere with normal operating and maintenance requirements of other equipment.

G. Avoid interference of electrical equipment operation and maintenance with structural members, building features and equipment of other trades. When it is necessary to adjust the intended location of electrical equipment, unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, the Contractor may make adjustments in equipment locations in accordance with the following without obtaining the Engineer's approval: 1. 1 FT at grade, floor and roof level in any direction in the horizontal plane. 2. 1 FT for equipment other than lighting at ceiling level in any direction in the

horizontal plane. 3. 1 FT for lighting fixtures at ceiling level in any direction in the horizontal plane. 4. 1 FT on walls in a horizontal direction within the vertical plane. 5. Changes in equipment location exceeding those defined above require the

Engineer's approval.

H. Provide electrical equipment support system per the following area designations: 1. Dry areas:

a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware.

b. Field touch-up cut ends and scratches of galvanized components with the specified primer during the installation, before rust appears.

2. Corrosive and/or wet areas: a. Stainless steel system consisting of: Stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts

and hardware. b. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated steel channels and fittings

with stainless steel nuts and hardware. c. Aluminum system consisting of: Aluminum channels and fittings with stainless

steel nuts and hardware.

I. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports rated for the equipment load based on dimensions and weights verified from approved submittals, or as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. See Section 05505. 2. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members. 3. Do not mount safety switches or other equipment to equipment enclosures, unless

enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment.

J. Provide corrosion resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 IN separation between equipment and mounting surface in wet areas, on below grade walls and on walls of liquid containment or processing areas such as Clarifiers, Digesters, Reservoirs, etc.

K. Do not place equipment fabricated from aluminum in direct contact with earth or concrete.

L. Screen or seal all openings into equipment mounted outdoors to prevent the entrance of rodents and insects.

M. Do not use materials that may cause the walls or roof of a building to discolor or rust.

N. Identify electrical equipment and components in accordance with Section 10400. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering



A. Verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to electrified equipment, provided by others. 1. See Section 01800 for openings and penetrations in structures.

B. Replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and re-test.

C. Cleaning: 1. See Section 01710.

D. Apply touch-up paint as required to repair scratches and other marks.

E. Replace nameplates damaged during installation.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Section 01650.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16060 GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for grounding system(s).

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable - 600 Volt and Below. 5. Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes.



a. Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. 2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.

3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 837, Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.


5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

B. Assure ground continuity is continuous throughout the entire Project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


a. Plan drawing(s) showing type, size and locations of all grounding system components.

B. Miscellaneous: 1. Ground rod and/or grounding system resistance and continuity test reports signed

by the Project's supervising electrical foreman.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Ground rods and bars and grounding clamps, connectors and terminals:

a. Burndy. b. Harger Lightning Protection.


c. Heary Brothers. d. Joslyn. e. Robbins Lightning Protection. f. Thompson.

2. Exothermic weld connections: a. Erico Products Inc., Cadweld. b. Harger Lightning Protection. c. Thermoweld.


2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Wire and Cable: 1. Bare conductors: Soft drawn stranded copper meeting ASTM B8. 2. Insulated conductors: Color coded green, per Section 16120.

B. Conduit: As specified in Section 16130.

C. Ground Rods: 1. 3/4 IN x 10 FT. 2. Copperclad:

a. Heavy uniform coating of electrolytic copper molecularly bonded to a rigid steel core.

b. Corrosion resistant bond between the copper and steel. c. Hard drawn for a scar-resistant surface.

D. Grounding Clamps, Connectors and Terminals: 1. Mechanical type:

a. Standards: UL 467. b. High copper alloy content.

2. Compression type for interior locations: a. Standards: UL 467. b. High copper alloy content. c. Non-reversible. d. Terminals for connection to bus bars shall have two bolt holes.

3. Compression type suitable for direct burial in earth or concrete: a. Standards: UL 467, IEEE 837. b. High copper alloy content. c. Non-reversible.

E. Exothermic Weld Connections: 1. Copper oxide reduction by aluminum process. 2. Molds properly sized for each application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Size grounding conductors and bonding jumpers in accordance with NFPA 70

Article 250, except where larger sizes are indicated on the Drawings. 3. Remove paint, rust, or other nonconducting material from contact surfaces before

making ground connections. 4. Where ground conductors pass through floor slabs or building walls provide non-

metallic sleeves and install per Section 01800. 5. Do not splice grounding conductors except at ground rods.


6. Install ground rods and grounding conductors in undisturbed, firm soil. a. Provide excavation required for installation of ground rods and ground

conductors. b. Use driving studs or other suitable means to prevent damage to threaded ends

of sectional rods. c. Unless otherwise specified, connect conductors to ground rods with compressor

type connectors or exothermic weld. d. Provide sufficient slack in grounding conductor to prevent conductor breakage

during backfill or due to ground movement. e. Backfill excavation completely, thoroughly tamping to provide good contact

between backfill materials and ground rods and conductors. 7. Do not use exothermic welding if it will damage the structure the grounding

conductor is being welded to.

B. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Provide a grounding electrode system in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 250 and

as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Grounding conductor terminations:

a. Ground bars in electrical gear, use compression type terminal and bolt it to the ground bar.

b. Piping systems, use mechanical type connections. c. Building steel, below grade and encased in concrete, use compression type

connector or exothermic weld. d. At all above grade terminations, the conductors shall be labeled per Section

16010. 3. Ground ring grounding system:

a. Ground ring consists of ground rods and a grounding conductor looped around the structure.

b. Placed at a minimum of 10 FT from the structure foundation and 2 FT-6 IN below grade.

c. Provide a minimum of four ground rods placed at the corners of the structure and additional rods so that the maximum distance between ground rods does not exceed 50 FT.

d. Grounding conductor: Bare conductor, size as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Supplemental Grounding: 1. Provide the following grounding in addition to the equipment ground conductor

supplied with the feeder conductors. 2. Metal light poles mounted on a concrete base:

a. Connect metal pole and pole concrete base reinforcing steel to ground rod. b. Grounding conductor: Bare #6 AWG minimum.

3. Equipment support racks and pedestals mounted outdoors: a. Connect metallic structure to a ground rod. b. Grounding conductor: #6 AWG minimum.

D. Low Voltage Transformer Separately Derived Grounding System: 1. Ground separately mounted step-down transformers XO terminal to one of the

following: a. Closest grounding electrode, or building steel using mechanical type terminal

bolted to the steel, compression type connection or exothermic weld. b. Closest water pipe using a mechanical type connection.

2. Ground step-down transformer integrally mounted in motor control center to motor control center ground bus.

E. Raceway Grounding: 1. All metallic conduit shall be installed so that it is electrically continuous. 2. All conduits to contain a grounding conductor with insulation identical to the phase

conductors, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.


3. Provide grounding-type insulating bushings: a. For all equipment not supplied with a conduit hub. b. On ends of metallic ductbank conduit.

4. Provide double locknuts at all panels. 5. Bond all conduit, at entrance and exit of equipment, to the equipment ground bus or

lug. 6. Provide bonding jumpers if conduits are installed in concentric knockouts. 7. Make all metallic raceway fittings and grounding clamps tight to ensure equipment

grounding system will operate continuously at ground potential to provide low impedance current path for proper operation of overcurrent devices during possible ground fault conditions.

F. Equipment Grounding: 1. Ground all equipment supplied from electrical gear through the gear's equipment

ground bus. Provide an equipment grounding conductor connected to the ground bus and equipment ground lug. a. Grounding conductor insulation shall be identical to phase conductor insulation. b. Where green-colored insulated wire is not available, green electrical tape shall

be applied to all equipment grounding conductors where exposed, to include, but not be limited to, in manholes and handholes, pull and junction boxes, wireways, and inside equipment enclosures. Tape shall be applied continuously where exposed.

G. Manhole and Handhole Grounding: 1. Provide a ground rod in each manhole and handhole with a minimum of 4 IN of rod

exposed above the floor for connection to the rod. 2. Connect all exposed metal parts (e.g., conduits and cable racks) to the ground rod. 3. Connect any separate bare grounding conductors run underneath ductbanks to the

ground rod.


A. Leave grounding system uncovered until observed by Owner.

B. Provide a continuity test on the components of the grounding electrode system.

C. Complete grounding system: Resistance of 5 ohms or less.

D. Test resistance of installed ground system after backfilling and before connection to any other grounded system including underground piping, utility services or other building ground systems. 1. Test ground grid resistance by fall-of-potential method. 2. Perform test at the main ground bar or at the ground rod test station, as applicable.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE - 600 VOLT AND BELOW

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Material and installation requirements for:

a. Building wire. b. Instrumentation cable. c. Fiber optic cable. d. Wire connectors. e. Insulating tape. f. Pulling lubricant.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 10400 – Identification Devices. 4. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Insulated Cable Engineers Association:

a. S-58-679, Control Cable Conductor Identification. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/Insulated Cable Engineers

Association (NEMA/ICEA): a. WC 57/ICEA S-73-532, Standard for Control Cables. b. WC 70/ICEA S-95-658, Standard for Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2000

Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 44, Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. b. 83, Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. c. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. d. 486A, Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper Conductors. e. 486C, Splicing Wire Connections. f. 510, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape. g. 910, Test for Cable Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for Electrical

and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air. h. 1277, Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber

Members. i. 1581, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. j. 1666, Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables

Installed Vertically in Shafts. k. 2250, Instrumentation Tray Cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Instrumentation Cable: 1. Multiple conductor, insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath. 2. The following are specific types of instrumentation cables:


a. Analog signal cable: 1) Used for the transmission of low current (e.g., 4-20mA DC) or low voltage

(e.g., 0-10 Vdc) signals, using No. 16 AWG and smaller conductors. 2) Commonly used types are defined in the following:

a) UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. b) TSP: Twisted shielded pair. c) TST: Twisted shielded triad.

b. Digital signal cable: Used for the transmission of digital signals between computers, PLC's, RTU's, etc.

B. Building Wire: Single conductor, insulated, with or without outer jacket depending upon type.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 16010. 2. Test reports:

a. Fiber optic cable test reports.

B. Samples 1. Provide sample of largest size of each type of wire or cable for review prior to

installation. a. Sample shall have a legible and complete surface printing of identification.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Building wire:

a. American Insulated Wire Corporation. b. General Cable. c. Manhattan/CDT. d. Southwire Company.

2. Instrumentation cable: a. Analog cable:

1) Alpha Wire Corporation. 2) American Insulated Wire Corporation. 3) Belden Wire and Cable. 4) General Cable. 5) Manhattan/CDT.

3. Wire connectors: a. Burndy Corporation. b. Buchanan. c. Ideal. d. Ilsco. e. 3M Co. f. Teledyne Penn Union. g. Thomas and Betts. h. Phoenix Contact.

4. Insulating tape: a. 3M Co.


b. Plymouth Bishop Tapes. c. Red Seal Electric Co.

5. Fiber optic cable: a. Alpha Wire b. Belden c. General Cable d. Pirelli e. Approved equal.



A. Building Wire: 1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 2. Conductors shall be stranded.

a. Conductors, sized #12 AWG used only in lighting and receptacle circuits, may be stranded or solid.

3. Surface mark with manufacturers name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label.

4. When direct buried, UL Listed and marked as suitable for direct burial. 5. When exposed to sunlight, UL Listed and marked as sunlight resistant. 6. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 for type THHN/THWN and

THHN/THWN-2 insulation. 7. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 for type XHHW and XHHW-2

insulation.

B. Instrumentation Cable: 1. Surface mark with manufacturers name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type

and UL label. 2. Analog cable:

a. Copper conductors. b. 600 V PVC insulation with PVC jacket. c. Twisted pair(s) or triad(s) with 100 percent aluminum-polyester foil shield

coverage with stranded drain wire. d. When direct buried, UL Listed and marked as suitable for direct burial. e. When exposed to sunlight, UL Listed and marked as sunlight resistant. f. Individual conductor color coding: ICEA Method 1, Table K-1. g. Conform to UL 2250, UL 1581, UL 1277 and NFPA 70 Type ITC.

3. Digital cable: a. As recommended by equipment (e.g., PLC, RTU) manufacturer.

C. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Design and fabrication:

a. Type: 1) Indoor: Tight buffered or loose tube with a dry gel water blocking system. 2) Outdoor: Loose tube with a wet or dry gel water blocking system.

b. Multi-mode. c. Number of fibers: 4. d. Fiber size: 62.5/125 micrometer (core diameter/cladding diameter). e. Glass fiber core. f. Step index. g. Maximum attenuation:

1) At 850 nm: 3.75 dB/km. 2) At 1300 nm: 1.5dB/km.

h. Minimum bandwidth: 1) At 850 nm: 160 MHz/km. 2) At 1300 nm: 500 MHz/km.


i. Maximum tensile load: 1) Installation: 225 LBS. 2) Long term: 67 LBS.

j. Cable shall be resistant to spread of fire in accordance with NEC. k. Cable jacket material:

1) In rigid steel conduit: PVC, or polyethylene. 2) In plenum or riser: Flame retardant material, PVC not allowed.

a) Plenum applications: Cable materials shall pass UL 910 and NFPA 262 requirements.

b) Riser applications: Cable materials shall pass UL 1666 requirements. l. Cables shall be listed and marked in accordance with the requirements of NEC. m. Optical fiber cable type utilized shall be in accordance with NEC. n. Utilize ST type connectors:

1) Tip material: Ceramic or ceramic/glass composite. 2) Utilize connectors which do not require adhesive, epoxy, or polish.

D. Wire Connectors: 1. Twist/screw on type:

a. Insulated pressure or spring type solderless connector. b. 600 V rated. c. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 486C and/or UL 467 when required by local

codes. d. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486C.

2. Compression and mechanical screw type: a. 600 V rated. b. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 467. c. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486A.

3. Terminal block type: a. High density, screw-post barrier-type with white center marker strip. b. 600 V and ampere rating as required, for power circuits. c. 600 V, 20 ampere rated for control circuits. d. 300 V, 15 ampere rated for instrumentation circuits. e. Conform to NEMA ICS 4 and UL 486A.

E. Insulating Tape: 1. Pressure sensitive vinyl. 2. Premium grade. 3. Heat, cold, moisture, and sunlight resistant. 4. Thickness, depending on use conditions: 7, 8.5, or 10 mil. 5. For cold weather or outdoor location, tape must also be all-weather. 6. Comply with UL 510.

F. Pulling Lubricant: Cable manufacturer's standard containing no petroleum or other products which will deteriorate insulation.

G. Wire Markers: See Section 10400.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Permitted Usage of Insulation Types: 1. Type XHHW and XHHW-2:

a. Building wire No. 6 AWG and larger. 2. Type THHN/THWN and THHN/THWN-2:

a. Building wire No. 8 AWG and smaller.

B. Conductor Size Limitations:


1. Feeder and branch power conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2. Control conductors shall not be smaller than No. 14 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

3. Instrumentation conductors shall not be smaller than No. 18 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

C. Color Code All Wiring as Follows: 1. Building wire:

240 V, 208 V, 240/120

V, 208/120 V 480 V,

480/277 V Phase 1 Black Brown Phase 2 Red * Yellow Phase 3 Blue Purple Neutral White White or

Gray Ground Green Green

* Orange when it is a high leg of a 120/240 V Delta system.

a. Conductors #6 AWG or smaller: Insulated phase, neutral and ground conductors shall be identified by a continuous colored outer finish along its entire length.

b. Conductors larger than #6 AWG: 1) Insulated phase and neutral conductors shall be identified by one of the

following methods: a) Continuous colored outer finish along its entire length. b) 3 IN of colored tape applied at the termination.

2) Insulated grounding conductor shall be identified by one of the following methods: a) Continuous green outer finish along its entire length. b) Stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length. c) Using green tape to cover the entire exposed length.

3) The color coding shall be applied at all accessible locations, including but not limited to: Junction and pull boxes, wireways, manholes and handholes.

D. Install all wiring in raceway unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

E. Feeder, branch, control and instrumentation circuits shall not be combined in a raceway, cable tray, junction or pull box, except as permitted in the following: 1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. Where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the Engineer. 3. AC control circuits shall be isolated from all DC circuits. 4. Instrumentation circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and AC

control circuits but combining of instrumentation circuits is permitted. The combinations shall comply with the following: a. Analog signal circuits may utilize a common raceway. b. Digital signal circuits may utilize a common raceway but isolated from analog

signal circuits. 5. For lighting and receptacle circuits, multiple branch circuits may be installed in a

raceway as allowed by the NEC, with the wire ampacity derated in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. Raceway fill shall not exceed the limits established by the NEC.

F. Ground the drain wire of shielded instrumentation cables at one end only. The preferred grounding location is at the load (e.g., control panel), not at the source (e.g., field mounted transmitter).


G. Splices and taps for the following circuit types shall be made in the indicated enclosure type using the indicated method. 1. Feeder and branch power circuits:

a. Device outlet boxes: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors.

b. Junction and pull boxes and wireways: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on #8 and smaller wire. 2) Compression, mechanical screw or terminal block or terminal strip type

connectors for use on #6 AWG and larger wire. c. Motor terminal boxes:

1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on #10 AWG and smaller wire. 2) Mechanical screw type connectors for use on #8 AWG and larger wire.

d. Manholes or handholes: 1) Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy for use on #8 AWG

and smaller wire. 2) Watertight compression or mechanical screw type connectors for use on #6

AWG and larger wire. 2. Control circuits:

a. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector. b. Manholes or handholes: Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy. c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strips provided

within the equipment or field installed within the equipment by the Contractor. 3. Instrumentation circuits can be spliced where field conditions dictate and written

permission is obtained from the Engineer. Maintain electrical continuity of the shield when splicing twisted shielded conductors. a. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector. b. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strip provided

within the equipment or field installed within the equipment by the Contractor. 4. Non-insulated compression and mechanical screw type connectors shall be

insulated with tape or hot or cold shrink type insulation to the insulation level of the conductors.

H. Insulating Tape Usage: 1. For insulating connections of #8 AWG wire and smaller: 7 mil vinyl tape. 2. For insulating splices and taps of #6 AWG wire or larger: 10 mil vinyl tape. 3. For insulating connections made in cold weather or in outdoor locations: 8.5 mil, all

weather vinyl tape.

I. Kellums, or equal, woven grips shall support wire and cable in vertical risers where necessary to prevent heavy loading on wire or cable connections.

J. Wire and cable shall not be pulled tight against bushings nor pressed heavily against enclosures.

K. After wire and cable have been installed and connected, conduit ends shall be sealed with a non-hardening sealing compound (Duxseal or equal), forced into conduits to a minimum depth equal to the conduit diameter. This shall apply for all conduits entering any structures or electrical enclosures from underground.

L. Tag wires with wire markers in control panels, electrical gear, terminal boxes: See Section 10400.

M. Tag wires with wire markers in manholes and handholes: See Section 10400.

N. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, install all fiber optic cable in conduit. 2. Splicing:

a. Optical fibers shall not be spliced. 3. Utilize dust tight wall-mounted interconnect center to provide the following:


a. Interconnect fiber optic cable to jumper cable assemblies for connection to the opto-electronic interface.

4. Where exposed to contact with electric light or power conductors, the noncurrent carrying metallic members (if applicable) of optical fiber cables entering buildings shall be grounded as close to the point of entrance as practicable in accordance with NEC.

5. Install cables in accordance with the requirements of NEC. 6. Test installed fiber optic cable system to verify the following:

a. Continuity of all installed fibers and associated connectors. b. Maximum attenuation requirements of specification are not exceeded.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16121 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


a. Medium voltage cable (601 V and above). b. Cable terminations and splices.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC).

a. CS8, Extruded Dielectric, Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 46kV. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. 400, Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems.

b. 400-3, (Draft No. 5-1) Partial Discharge Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems in a Field Environment.

c. 510, High-Voltage and High-Power Testing. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc./American National Standards

Institute (IEEE/ANSI): a. 48, Alternating-Current Cable Terminations 2.5kV Through 756kV. b. 386, Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems

Above 600V. c. 404, Cable Joints for use with Extruded Dielectric Cable Rated 5000 - 138,000V

and Cable Joints for use with Laminated Dielectric Cable Rated 2500 - 500,000V.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/Insulated Cable Engineers Association (NEMA/ICEA): a. WC 74/S-93-639, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission

and Distribution of Electric Energy. 5. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA):

a. Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.

7. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. 8. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 486B, Standard for Safety Wire Connectors for use with Aluminum Conductors. b. 1072, Standard for Safety Medium Voltage Power Cables.

B. Qualifications: 1. Cable technician:


a. Three (3) years experience in handling, terminating and splicing medium voltage cables.

b. Specifically trained by a factory representative on the terminations and splices to be used on the project. 1) If not trained on the products to be used, on-site training by the factory

representative shall be performed before any terminations or splices are made.

2. Cable testing : a. The independent testing organization shall have been engaged in full practice in

the final inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting of electrical distribution systems, for a minimum of five (5) years.

b. The independent testing organization shall have a calibration program with accuracy traceable every six (6) months in an unbroken chain, to NIST.

c. The independent testing organization shall have a designated safety representative for the project. 1) The standards followed shall include OSHA, NFPA 70E and IEEE 510.

d. Inspection, testing, and calibration shall be performed by an engineering technician, certified by a national organization, such as the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, with a minimum of five (5) years experience inspecting, testing, and calibrating electrical equipment, systems and devices. 1) Information on the certified engineering technician shall be submitted to the

Engineer for approval prior to the start of work. e. The qualifications of the independent testing organization shall be submitted to

the Engineer for approval prior to the start of testing. 1) Full membership to the InterNational Electrical Testing Association

constitutes proof of meeting all of the above requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. Product data:

a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification. b. See Section 16010 for additional requirements.

B. Miscellaneous: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the

submittal process. 2. Cable pulling calculations and measurements. 3. Submit the following before testing:

a. Cable Technician qualifications. b. Independent testing organization qualifications. c. Engineering Technician qualifications. d. Detailed testing procedures.

4. Provide a comprehensive report that identifies numerically and graphically the magnitude of partial discharge leakage current detected for each circuit and each cable section tested.

5. Cable test report(s) shall include, at a minimum, the following: a. Summary of Project. b. Date tests were performed. c. Description of equipment/components tested. d. Visual inspection report. e. Description of tests. f. Test results including appropriate test forms. g. Conclusions and recommendations for corrective action as appropriate.


h. Identification of test equipment used. i. Identification of company and person that performed the tests. j. Reports signed by the engineering technician or engineer interpreting the data.


A. Ship cable with removable watertight end seals, and store in dry place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Wire and cable:

a. Cablec Corporation. b. American Insulated Wire Corporation. c. The Okonite Company. d. Pirelli Cable Corporation. e. Southwire Company. f. Tamaqua Cable Products.

2. Lugs, connectors and terminations: a. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. b. Raychem. c. Elastimold. d. Joslyn. e. RTE.


2.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

A. Ratings: Voltage class as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Standards: 1. NEMA/ICEA WC 74/S-93-639. 2. AEIC CS8. 3. UL 1072.

C. Conductor Material: 1. Regular or compressed concentric stranded copper.

D. Insulation: 1. Temperature rating: Type MV-90 per NFPA 70. 2. Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene (XLP). 3. 133 percent insulation level.

E. Shielding: 1. Shielding on cables rated above 2 kV consists of:

a. Semiconductor conductor screen. b. Semiconductor insulation screen. c. Copper concentric neutral.

F. Neutrals: 1. Cables with a concentric neutral shall have full concentric neutral.

G. Jackets: 1. Direct buried cables shall be rated for direct bury. 2. Jacket: PVC.

2.3 CABLE ACCESSORIES


A. Lugs and Connectors: 1. Lugs:

a. Compression type. b. Standard: UL 486B for aluminum and copper cables. c. Voltage rating: Up to 35 kV. d. Current rating: Continuous operation at the rating of the cable. e. Material: Aluminum with bronze underplating, tin outerplating and aluminum

anti-oxide paste. f. Number of holes: Two (2), except one (1) on motor leads.

2. Splice connectors: a. Standard: UL 486B for aluminum and copper cables. b. Voltage rating: Up to 35kV. c. Current rating: Continuous operation at the rating of the cable. d. Material: Aluminum with bronze underplating, tin outerplating and aluminum

anti-oxide paste.

B. Terminations: 1. End caps:

a. Cold or hot shrink. b. Used to environmentally seal and mechanically protect exposed cable ends.

2. Cold shrink kits: a. Standard: IEEE/ANSI 48, Class 1 termination. b. Voltage rating: Same as the cable rating. c. Current rating: Continuous operation at the rating of the cable. d. One-piece design, where high-dielectric constant stress control is integrated

within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber. e. Suitable of contaminated indoor and outdoor locations.

3. Molded rubber kit: a. Standard: IEEE/ANSI 48. b. Voltage rating: Same as the cable rating. c. Current rating: Continuous operation at the rating of the cable. d. One-piece design or modular with stress cone and skirts, where high-dielectric

constant stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of EPDM rubber.

e. Suitable of contaminated indoor and outdoor locations. 4. Elbow connectors:

a. Standard: IEEE/ANSI 386. b. Voltage rating: Same as the cable rating. c. Current rating: 200A or 600A as required. d. One-piece design, comprised of an insulation shield, insulation layer and an

outer shield constructed of EPDM rubber. e. Deadfront, loadbreak type with hot stick pulling eye, grounding tab and test

point. f. Accessories to be constructed in a similar manner as the elbow connector:

1) Bushing inserts. 2) Bushing well plugs. 3) Feed thru inserts. 4) Protective caps.

C. Splices: 1. Cold shrink kits:

a. Standard: IEEE/ANSI 404. b. Voltage rating: Same as the cable rating. c. Current rating: Continuous operation at the rating of the cable. d. One-piece design, comprised of an insulation shield, insulation layer and a

silicone rubber body. e. Suitable for indoor, direct burial or submersible applications.


2. Molded rubber kit: a. Standard: IEEE/ANSI 386 or IEEE/ANSI 404. b. Voltage rating: Same as the cable rating. c. Current rating: Continuous operation at the rating of the cable. d. One- or multi-piece design, comprised of an insulation shield, insulation layer

and an outer shield constructed of EPDM rubber. e. Suitable for indoor, direct burial or submersible applications.

3. Modular separable molded rubber: a. Standard: IEEE/ANSI 386. b. Voltage rating: Same as the cable rating. c. Current rating: 600A. d. One-piece design, comprised of an insulation shield, insulation layer and an

outer shield constructed of EPDM rubber. e. Deadfront, deadbreak type. f. Components: T-body, insulating plug with cap, insulating plug with cap and

stud, and connecting plug. g. Suitable for submersible applications.

4. Motor lead kits: a. Voltage rating: Same as the cable rating. b. Current rating: Continuous operation at the rating of the cable. c. Material: EPDM rubber boot with nylon pin. d. On shielded cables provide and additional EPDM rubber cold shrink sleeve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install cable during wet conditions. 1. Prior to pulling cables, drain or pump out manholes and other low points if standing

water is present. 2. Blow out conduits with dried compressed air if moisture is present in conduits. 3. Install end caps immediately on all cut ends of cable prior to pulling, and maintain

end caps while pulling in cable. a. If end caps are damaged, remove and install new end caps. b. Do not remove end caps until ready to terminate or splice cable.

B. Arc-proof all cables in manholes. 1. Apply in spiral, half-overlap fashion to full exposed length of each cable in manhole. 2. Secure in place with glass cloth electrical tape.

a. Apply in reverse spiral to arc-proofing tape, at maximum interval of 9 IN and double wrapped at each end.

C. Do not install conductors when ambient temperature is near minimum as recommended by manufacturer for installation of the type of conductor insulation.

D. Provide components in kit form, complete with instructions, supplied by a single approved manufacturer and suitable for each shielded cable termination. 1. Select correct termination to match cable diameter and construction. 2. Form and install terminations in strict accordance with instructions of cable

manufacturer and termination manufacturer.

E. Splices: 1. Provide components in kit form, complete with instructions, supplied by a single

approved manufacturer and suitable for the type of cable being used. 2. Prepare cable ends, provide materials and follow all application steps in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions. a. As a minimum requirement:


1) The cable ends shall be cut squarely. 2) The insulation shall be free from nicks or burrs after removal of jacket. 3) The conductors shall be cleaned and an oxide inhibitor applied. 4) For splices, connector indents shall be filled with insulating putty to eliminate

voids. 5) Attach grounding lead to system ground.

3. Splices shall be avoided whenever possible. a. No more than one (1) splice is permitted between termination points. b. No splices are permitted in runs less than 100 FT long. c. Splices will be made only at manholes or other accessible locations. d. Do not pull splices into ductbanks or conduits or leave them under tension.


A. Provide cable pulling calculations and measurement of tensions during the pull.

B. After all terminations and splices have been made, and prior to connections to equipment, provide the following acceptance tests in accordance with NETA's Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems: 1. Shield continuity test. 2. DC high-potential test or time domain partial discharge test.

C. Non-destructive Partial discharge test. 1. Perform the work while the medium voltage circuits and equipment are energized.

a. The cables shall not be disconnected or de-energized and the testing shall not expose the cables to voltages that exceed normal operating voltage.

2. Use a frequency domain detection process incorporating a spectrum analyzer with radio frequency current transformer (RF CT) sensors. a. The detection system, including sprctrum analyzer, RF CTs and interconnecting

cable, shall have a partial discharge detection range that at least covers the frequency range of 10 khz to 300 Mhz.

b. Testing shall be performed in a manner that complies with the requirements of IEEE 400 and IEEE 400-3.

D. See Section 16080 for acceptance testing requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


a. Conduits. b. Conduit bodies and fittings. c. Conduit supports. d. Wireways. e. Outlet boxes. f. Pull and junction boxes.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03400 and 03500 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 4. Section 05505 - Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 6. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 7. Section 16135 - Electrical: Exterior Underground. 8. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA):

a. 1, Aluminum Standards and Data. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc-Coated (RGS). b. C80.5, Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (RAC).

4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products. b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. c. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds

and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. d. D2564, Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. e. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. f. F512, Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. OS 1, Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. b. RN 1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. c. TC 3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.


d. TC 6, PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations. e. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).


7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1, Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 6, Rigid Metal Conduit. c. 50, Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. d. 360, Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. e. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. f. 514B, Fittings for Cable and Conduit. g. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit. h. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. i. 1660, Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 16010. 2. Identify dimensional size of pull and junction boxes to be used.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rigid metallic conduits:

a. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation. b. Triangle PWC Inc. c. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. d. Wheatland Tube Company. e. LTV Steel Company. f. ALUMAX Extrusions, Inc. g. EASCO Aluminum. h. VAW of American, Inc.

2. PVC coated rigid metallic conduits and repair kits: a. Occidental Coating Company. b. Perma-Cote. c. Rob-Roy Ind. d. Raychem "GelTek" tape.

3. Rigid non-metallic conduit: a. Carlon. b. Certainteed Corporation. c. Canadian General Electric Company. d. Western Plastics Corporation. e. CanTex.

4. Flexible conduit: a. AFC Cable Systems. b. Anamet, Inc. c. Electri-Flex. d. Flexible Metal Hose Company. e. International Metal Hose Company.


f. Triangle PWC Inc. g. LTV Steel Company.

5. Wireway: a. Hoffman Engineering Company. b. Wiegmann. c. Square D.

6. Conduit bodies and fittings, and accessories: a. Appleton. b. Carlon. c. Crouse-Hinds. d. Killark. e. OZ Gedney Company. f. RACO. g. Steel City. h. Thomas and Betts. i. Western Plastics Company.

7. Support systems: a. Unistrut Building Systems. b. B-Line Systems Inc. c. Kindorf. d. Minerallac Fastening Systems. e. Caddy.

8. Outlet, pull and junction boxes: a. Appleton Electric Co. b. Crouse-Hinds. c. Killark. d. O-Z/Gedney. e. Steel City. f. Raco. g. Bell. h. Hoffman Engineering Co. i. Wiegmann. j. B-Line Circle AW. k. Adalet.


2.2 RIGID METALLIC CONDUITS

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam. 2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing. Threads

galvanized after cutting. 3. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish or enamel for a smooth surface. 4. Standards: ANSI C80.1, UL 6.

B. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS): 1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride Exterior Coating:

a. Coating: Bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1.

b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of the coating.

2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating. 3. Urethane coating on threads. 4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings. 5. Female Ends: Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2

IN, whichever is less beyond the opening. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it.


6. Standards: ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1.

C. Rigid aluminum conduit (RAC): 1. AA-6063 aluminum alloy, T-1 temper. 2. Maximum copper content of 0.10 percent. 3. Extruded, seamless. 4. Standards: ANSI C80.5, UL 6.

2.3 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT

A. Schedules 40 (PVC-40) and 80 (PVC-80): 1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) plastic compound which meets, as a minimum, ASTM

D1784 cell classification PVC 12233-A, B, or C. 2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure. 3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission. 4. Shall be suitable for use with 90 DegC wire and shall be marked "maximum 90

DegC". 5. Standards: ASTM D1784, NEMA TC 2, UL 651.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

A. Flexible Galvanized Steel Conduit (FLEX): 1. Formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive

convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Standard: UL 1.

B. PVC-Coated Flexible Galvanized Steel (liquid-tight) Conduit (FLEX-LT): 1. Core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with

successive convolutions securely interlocked. 2. Extruded PVC outer jacket positively locked to the steel core. 3. Liquid and vaportight. 4. Standard: UL 360.

2.5 WIREWAY

A. General: 1. Suitable for lay-in conductors. 2. Designed for continuous grounding. 3. Covers:

a. Hinged or removable in accessible areas. b. Non-removable when passing through partitions

4. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out except for stainless steel type.

5. Standards: UL 870, NEMA 250.

B. Watertight (NEMA 4X rated) Wireway: 1. 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10

GA stainless steel flanges. 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with captive clamp type latches. 3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted.

C. Dusttight (NEMA 12 rated) Wireway: 1. 14 GA steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 GA steel flanges. 2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with captive clamp type latches. 3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted.

2.6 CONDUIT BODIES AND FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings for Use with RGS and RAC: 1. Locknuts:

a. RGS: Threaded steel or malleable iron.


b. RAC: Stainless steel. c. Gasketed or non-gasketed. d. Grounding or non-grounding type.

2. Bushings: a. Threaded, insulated metallic. b. Grounding or non-grounding type.

3. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection. 4. Couplings:

a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on.

5. Unions: a. RGS: Threaded galvanized steel or zinc plated malleable iron. b. RAC: Copper free cast aluminum.

6. Conduit bodies (elbows and tees): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron (RGS) or cast copper free aluminum (RAC) with

threaded hubs. b. Standard and mogul size. c. Cover: Clip-on type with stainless steel screws. Gasketed or non-gasketed

galvanized steel or zinc plated cast iron (RGS), or cast copper free aluminum (RAC).

7. Conduit bodies (round): a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron (RGS) or cast copper free aluminum (RAC) with

threaded hubs. b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, galvanized steel or zinc plated cast

iron (RGS), or cast copper free aluminum (RAC). 8. Sealing fittings:

a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron (RGS) or cast copper free aluminum (RAC) with threaded hubs.

b. Standard and mogul size. c. With or without drain and breather. d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting.

9. Expansion couplings: a. 2 IN nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction. b. Insulated bushing. c. Gasketed for wet locations. d. Internally or externally grounded.

10. Expansion/deflection couplings: a. 3/4 IN nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction. b. 30-degree nominal deflection from the normal in all directions. c. Metallic hubs, neoprene outer jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. d. Internally or externally grounded. e. Watertight, raintight and concrete tight.

11. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B, UL 886.

B. Fittings for Use with PVC-RGS: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings

for Use with RGS and RAC" and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS)."

C. Fittings for Use with FLEX: 1. Connector:

a. Zinc plated malleable iron. b. Squeeze or clamp-type.

2. Standard: UL 514B.

D. Fittings for Use with FLEX-LT: 1. Connector:


a. Straight or angle type. b. Metal construction, insulated and gasketed. c. Composed of locknut, grounding ferrule and gland compression nut. d. Liquid tight.

2. Standard: UL 467, UL 514B.

E. Fittings for Use with Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: 1. Coupling and adapters shall be of the same material, thickness, and construction as

the conduits with which they are used. 2. Standards: UL 651, NEMA TC 3. 3. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as

the conduit and fittings. a. Standard: ASTM D2564.

F. Weather and Corrosion Protection Tape: 1. PVC based tape, 10 mils thick. 2. Protection against moisture, acids, alkalis, salts and sewage and suitable for direct

bury. 3. Used with appropriate pipe primer.

2.7 ALL RACEWAY AND FITTINGS

A. Mark Products: 1. Identify the nominal trade size on the product. 2. Stamp with the name or trademark of the manufacturer.

2.8 OUTLET BOXES

A. Cast Outlet Boxes: 1. Zinc plated cast iron (RGS) or die-cast copper free aluminum (RAC) with

manufacturers standard finish. 2. Threaded hubs and grounding screw. 3. Styles:

a. "FS" or "FD". b. "Bell". c. Single or multiple gang and tandem.

4. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating when used in conjunction with PVC coated rigid conduit systems.

5. Standards: a. UL 514A

B. See Section 16140 for wiring devices, wallplates and coverplates.

2.9 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. NEMA 1 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 GA, galvanized steel or steel finished with rust inhibiting primer

and manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 2. With or without concentric knockouts on four sides. 3. Flat cover fastened with screws.

B. NEMA 4X Rated (metallic): 1. Body and cover: 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Hinged door and stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Door with oil-resistant gasket.

C. NEMA 4X Rated (non-metallic):


1. Body and cover: Ultraviolet light protected fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes. 2. No knockouts. 3. External mounting flanges. 4. Hinged door with quick release latches and padlocking hasp. 5. Door with oil resistant gasket.

D. NEMA 12 Rated: 1. Body and cover: 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers

standard paint inside and out. 2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 3. No knockouts. 4. External mounting flanges. 5. Non-hinged cover held closed with captivated cover screws threaded into sealed

wells or hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps. 6. Flat door with oil resistant gasket.

E. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 SF or heavier than 25 LBS. 2. Split covers when heavier than 25 LBS. 3. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits.

F. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 50.

2.10 SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support and pull or junction box supports: 1. Material requirements.

a. Galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153. b. Stainless steel: AISI Type 316. c. PVC coat galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 and 20 mil PVC

coating.

B. Single conduit and outlet box support fasteners: 1. Material requirements:

a. Zinc plated steel. b. Stainless steel. c. Malleable iron. d. PVC coat malleable iron or steel: 20 mil PVC coating. e. Steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish.

2.11 OPENINGS AND PENETRATONS IN WALLS AND FLOORS

A. Sleeves, smoke and fire stop fitting through walls and floors: 1. See Section 01800.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Size of Raceways: 1. Raceway sizes are indicated on the Drawings, if not indicated on the Drawings, then

size in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the minimum raceway size shall be:

a. Conduit: 3/4 IN. b. Wireway: 2-1/2 IN x 2-1/2 IN.

C. Field Bending and Cutting of Conduits:


1. Utilize tools and equipment recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit, designed for the purpose and the conduit material to make all field bends and cuts.

2. Do not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit when making conduit bends. 3. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent damage to the PVC coating. 4. Degrease threads after threading and apply a zinc rich paint (RGS). 5. Debur interior and exterior after cutting.

D. Male threads of conduit systems shall be coated with an electrically conductive anti-seize compound.

E. The protective coating integrity of conduits, fittings, and accessories shall be maintained. 1. Repair RGS utilizing a zinc rich paint. 2. Repair PVC-RGS utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the

coating, provided by the manufacturer of the conduit; or a self-adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked silicone composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape. The total nominal thickness: 40 mil.

3. Repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation.

F. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire is pulled into place. 1. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally 1/4 IN smaller than the interior of the conduit,

to remove obstructions. 2. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit. 3. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until wire is

pulled.

G. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull wire and cable in conduit systems.

H. Where portions of a raceway are subject to different temperatures and where condensation is known to be a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings or where passing from the interior to the exterior of a building, the raceway shall be sealed to prevent circulation of warm air to colder section of the raceway.

I. Fill openings in walls, floors, and ceilings and finish flush with surface. 1. See Section 01800.

3.2 RACEWAY ROUTING

A. Raceways shall be routed in the field unless otherwise indicated. 1. Conduit and fittings shall be installed, as required, for a complete system that has a

neat appearance and is in compliance with all applicable codes. 2. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angles to building lines. 3. Do not route conduits:

a. Through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat. b. In suspended concrete slabs.

4. Conduit shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for operation, maintenance and repair.

5. Provide pull boxes or conduit bodies as needed so that there is a maximum of 360 degrees of bends in the conduit run or in long straight runs to limit pulling tensions.

B. All rigid conduits within a structure shall be installed exposed except as follows: 1. As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concealed above gypsum wall board or acoustical tile suspended ceilings. 3. Concealed within stud frame, poured concrete, concrete block and brick walls of an

architecturally finished area. 4. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor serving equipment in non-

architecturally finished areas that are not located on or near a wall or column and the ceiling height is greater than 12 FT.

5. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor slabs where shown on the Contract Drawings or with the Engineer's permission.


C. Maintain minimum spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs in accordance with the following when the runs are greater than 30 FT: 1. Between instrumentation and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 IN. 2. Between 24 Vdc and 600 V and less AC power or control: 2 IN. 3. Between 600 V and less AC and greater than 600 Vac: 2 IN. 4. Between process, gas, air and water pipes: 6 IN.

D. Conduits shall be installed to eliminate moisture pockets. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run.

E. Conduit shall not be routed on the exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the Drawings.

F. Where sufficient room exists within the housing of roof-mounted equipment, the conduit shall be stubbed up inside the housing.

G. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. See Section 01800.

H. Conduit embedded in columns and floor slabs or buried under slab-on-grade: 1. Run in the most direct, practical route. 2. Not to be installed under equipment pads. 3. No crossovers. 4. Secured in place to prevent movement during the backfill and pour.

I. Conduits and accessories embedded in concrete where shown on the Contract Drawings: 1. Shall not be considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete except as

indicated in the following: a. Conduit and fittings shall not displace more than 4 percent of the area of the

cross-section of a column on which stress is calculated or which is required for fire protection.

b. Size and locate sleeves or conduits passing through floors, walls, or beams so as not to significantly impair the strength of the construction.

c. Sleeves or conduits passing through floors, walls or beams may be considered as replacing the displaced concrete structurally in compression. 1) Shall not be exposed to rusting or other deterioration. 2) Nominal inside diameter shall not exceed 2 IN. 3) Minimum spacing: 3 DIA OC.

2. Shall not be larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of the slab, column or beam.

3. Shall have a minimum spacing of 3 DIA OC. 4. In reinforced concrete construction:

a. Conduit shall not be run in beams. b. Place conduit after reinforcing steel has been laid. c. The reinforcement steel shall not be displaced by the conduit. d. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 IN of cover over conduit, excluding surface finish. e. Conduits parallel to main reinforcement shall be run near the center of the wall. f. Conduits perpendicular to main reinforcement shall be run midway between wall

or slab supports.

3.3 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS

A. Permitted raceway types per wire or cable types: 1. Power wire or cables: All raceway types. 2. AC control wire or cables: All raceway types. 3. 24 VDC instrumentation cables: Metallic raceway. 4. Motor leads from a VFD: Metallic conduits.

B. Permitted raceway types per area designations:


1. Dry areas: a. RGS. b. RAC.

2. Wet areas: a. RAC.

3. Corrosive areas: a. PVC-RGS. b. RAC.

C. Permitted raceway types per routing locations: 1. In concrete block or brick walls:

a. PVC-40. 2. Embedded in poured concrete walls and floors:

a. PVC-40. b. RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape when

emerging from concrete into areas designated as dry, wet, or corrosive. c. PVC-RGS when emerging from concrete into areas designated as wet or

corrosive. 3. Beneath floor slab-on-grade:

a. PVC-40. 4. Through floor penetrations, see Section 01800:

a. RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape when emerging from concrete into areas designated as dry, wet, or corrosive.

b. PVC-RGS in areas designated as wet or corrosive. 5. Direct buried conduits and ductbanks:

a. PVC-80. b. PVC-RGS for instrumentation circuits. c. 90 degree elbows for transitions to above grade:

1) RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape. 2) PVC-RGS.

d. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees: 1) RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape. 2) PVC-RGS.

6. Concrete encased ductbanks: a. PVC-40. b. RGS for instrumentation circuits. c. 90 degree elbows for transitions to above grade:

1) RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape. 2) PVC-RGS.

d. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees: 1) RGS for sizes 2 IN and larger.

D. FLEX conduits shall be installed for connections to light fixtures, HVAC equipment and other similar devices above the ceilings. The maximum length shall not exceed: 1. 6 FT to light fixtures. 2. 3 FT to all other equipment.

E. FLEX-LT conduits shall be installed as the final conduit connection to light fixtures, dry type transformers, motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements, and other electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. The maximum length shall not exceed: 1. 6 FT to light fixtures. 2. 3 FT to motors. 3. 2 FT to all other equipment.

F. NEMA 4X Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and or corrosive.


G. NEMA 12 Rated Wireway: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in architecturally and non-

architecturally finished areas.

H. Underground Conduit: See Section 16135.

3.4 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings shall be joined utilizing solvent cement. 1. Immediately after installation of conduit and fitting, the fitting or conduit shall be

rotated 1/4 turn to provide uniform contact.

B. Install Expansion Fittings: 1. Where conduits span structural expansions joints. 2. Where conduits are exposed to the sun and conduit run is greater than 200 FT. 3. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings.

C. Install Expansion/Deflection Fittings: 1. Where conduits enter a structure.

a. Except electrical manholes and handholes. b. Except where the ductbank is tied to the structure with rebar.

2. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings.

D. Threaded connections shall be made wrench-tight.

E. Conduit Joints shall be watertight: 1. Where subjected to possible submersion. 2. In areas classified as wet. 3. Underground.

F. Terminate Conduits: 1. In outlet boxes:

a. With an insulated grounding bushing and locknut. b. With an insulated compression type connector.

2. In NEMA 1 rated enclosures: a. With an insulated grounding bushing and locknut.

3. In NEMA 12 rated enclosures: a. With an insulated grounding bushing a gasketed locknut.

4. In NEMA 3R and 4X rated enclosures: a. With a threaded, insulated and gasketed hub.

5. When stubbed up through the floor into floor mount equipment: a. With an insulated grounding bushing.

3.5 CONDUIT SUPPORT

A. Permitted multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support system per area designations and conduit types: 1. Dry areas:

a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and conduit clamps.

2. Wet and corrosive areas: a. Stainless steel system consisting of: Stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts

and hardware and conduit clamps. b. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels

and fittings and conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware. 3. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support system material.

a. Galvanized steel system may be used with RGS. b. Stainless steel system may be used with PVC-RGS and RAC. c. PVC coated galvanized steel system may be used with PVC-RGS.

B. Permitted single conduit support fasteners per conduit types:


1. RGS: a. Material: Zinc plated steel, or steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish. b. Types of fasteners: Spring type hangers and clips, straps, hangers with bolts,

clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps. c. Provide anti-rattle conduit supports when conduits are routed through metal

studs. 2. RAC:

a. Material: Stainless steel. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on

beam clamps. 3. PVC-RGS:

a. Material: Stainless steel and PVC coat malleable iron or steel. b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on

beam clamps.

C. In seismic locations provide required sway bracing per local building codes.

D. Conduit Support General Requirements: 1. Maximum spacing between conduit supports per NFPA 70. 2. Support conduit from the building structure. 3. Do not support conduit from process, gas, air or water piping; or from other conduits. 4. Provide hangers and brackets to limit the maximum uniform load on a single support

to 25 LBS or to the maximum uniform load recommended by the manufacturer if the support is rated less than 25 LBS. a. Do not exceed maximum concentrated load recommended by the manufacturer

on any support. b. Conduit hangers: Continuous threaded rods combined with struts or conduit

clamps. Do not use perforated strap hangers and iron bailing wire. c. Do not use suspended ceiling support systems to support raceways. d. Hangers in metal roof decks:

1) Utilize fender washers. 2) Not extend above top of ribs. 3) Not interfere with vapor barrier, insulation, or roofing.

5. Conduit support system fasteners: a. Use sleeve-type expansion anchors as fasteners in masonry wall construction.

Do not use concrete nails and powder-driven fasteners.

3.6 OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. See Section 16010 and the Drawings for area classifications. 3. Fill unused punched-out, tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs. 4. Size boxes to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed and quantity of

conduits connected to the box.

B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Permitted uses of cast outlet boxes:

a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, and corrosive.

b. Pull and junction box surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet, and corrosive.

2. Mount device outlet boxes where indicated on the Drawings and at heights as scheduled in Section 16010.

3. Set device outlet boxes plumb and vertical to the floor. 4. Outlet boxes recessed in walls:

a. Install with appropriate stud wall support brackets or adjustable bar hangers so that they are flush with the face of the wall.


b. Locate in ungrouted cell of concrete block with bottom edge of box flush with bottom edge of block and flush with the face of the block.

5. Place barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases. 6. Back-to-back are not permitted. 7. Cast outlet boxes in PVC-RGS conduit systems shall be PVC coated in the same

manner as the conduit.

C. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Install pull or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate

pulling of wires or making connections. Make covers of boxes accessible. 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure:

a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive.

3. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as dry.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL: EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Handhole. 2. Underground conduits and ductbanks.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting for Utilities. 4. Section 03311 - Concrete. 5. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 6. Section 16130 – Raceways and Boxes. 7. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable - 600 Volt and Below. 8. Section 16060 - Grounding.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

a. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

a. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Direct-buried conduit means individual (single) underground conduits without concrete encasement.

B. Direct-buried ductbank means multiple underground conduits, arranged in one or more planes, in a common trench, without concrete encasement.

C. Concrete encased ductbank means an individual (single) or multiple conduit(s), arranged in one or more planes, encased in a common concrete envelope.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Sidewalk type handhole.


a. Crouse-Hinds. b. OZ-Gedney. c. Appleton Electric Company. d. Killark.

2. Prefabricated composite handholes: a. Quazite Composolite. b. Armorcast Products Company. c. Or equal.

3. Precast handholes: a. Utility Vault Co. b. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. c. Or equal.

4. Handhole and ductbank accessories: a. Neenah. b. Unistrut. c. Condux International, Inc. d. Underground Devices, Inc. e. W. H. Brady Company. f. Seton Nameplate Company.


2.2 HANDHOLES

A. Sidewalk Type Handholes: 1. Cast-iron box and cover, hot-dip galvanized. 2. Flange for flush mounting. 3. Checkered cover with neoprene gasket, pry bar slots and stainless steel screws. 4. Drilled and tapped holes. 5. Watertight NEMA 4 classification.

B. Prefabricated Composite Material Handholes: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete. 2. Body and cover shall sustain a minimum vertical load test of 22,000 LBS over a 10

IN square or be H-20 rated per AASHTO. 3. Solid bottom. 4. Stackable design as required for specified depth. 5. Cover shall have an engraved legend of “ELECTRIC” or “COMMUNICATIONS”.

C. Precast Handholes: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete or steel reinforced cement concrete

structures. 2. Shall have an AASHTO live load rating of H-20. 3. Mating edges shall be tongue and groove type.

2.3 PRECAST HANDHOLE ACCESSORIES

A. Unless otherwise detailed on the Drawings: 1. Cover and frame:

a. Cast ductile iron: ASTM A536. b. AASHTO live load rating: H-20. c. Diameter: 24 IN. d. Cast the legend "ELECTRICAL" or “COMMUNICATIONS” into handhole

covers.

B. Cable Racks and hooks: 1. 3/16 IN hot-dipped galvanized steel nylon or PVC coated. 2. 120 LBS minimum loading capacity. 3. Minimum 7 1/2 IN long hooks with three-point locking to resist twisting.


C. Cable Pulling Irons: 1. 7/8 IN DIA hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. 6000 LB minimum pulling load.

D. Ground Rods and Grounding Equipment: See Section 16060.

2.4 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

A. Concrete: Comply with Section 03311.

B. Duct Terminators: 1. Window type. 2. ABS plastic. 3. Provide for conduit entrance. 4. Designed for installation into handhole walls for a watertight seal. 5. Sufficient space between terminator walls to allow for placement of rebar and

concrete.

C. Conduit: See Section 16130.

D. Duct Spacers/Supports: 1. High density polyethylene or high impact polystyrene. 2. Interlocking. 3. Provide 2 IN minimum spacing between conduits.

E. Warning Tape: 1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers:

a. W H Brady Company, Catalog S-10, #91296. 2. Material: Polyethylene. 3. Thickness: 3.5 mils. 4. Tensile strength: 1750 psi. 5. Size: 6 IN wide (minimum). 6. Metallic tape shall be provided on underground ducts containing only fiber optic

cable. 7. Legend:

a. Preprinted and permanently imbedded. b. Message continuously printed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Drawings indicate the intended location of handholes; and routing of ductbanks and direct buried conduit. Field conditions may affect actual routing.

B. Handhole locations. 1. Approximately where shown on the Drawings. 2. As required for pulling distances. 3. As required to keep pulling tensions under allowable cable tensions. 4. As required for number of bends in ductbank routing. 5. Shall not be installed in a swale or ditch. 6. Determine the exact locations after careful consideration has been given to the

location of other utilities, grading, and paving. 7. Locations are to be approved by the Engineer prior to excavation and placement or

construction of handholes.

C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install handholes in conduit runs where indicated or as required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections.


E. Comply with Section 02221 for trenching, backfilling and compacting.

3.2 HANDHOLES

A. Sidewalk Type Handholes: 1. For use in on grade sidewalks and bridge deck sidewalks where not subjected to

vehicular traffic. 2. Install flush with concrete surface and embedded in the concrete with a minimum of

1-1/2 IN of concrete. 3. Place handhole after reinforcement steel has been laid. The reinforcing steel shall

not be displaced without approval by the Engineer. 4. Size: As indicated on the Drawings or in accordance with the NEC for the number

and size of conduits entering.

B. Prefabricated Composite Material Handholes: 1. For use in non-vehicular traffic areas. 2. Place handhole on a foundation of compacted 1/4 to 1/2 IN crushed rock or gravel a

minimum of 8 IN thick and 6 IN larger than handholes footprint on all sides. 3. Install so that the surrounding grade is 1 IN lower than the top of the handhole. 4. Size: As indicated on the Drawings or in accordance with the NEC for the number

and size of conduits entering.

C. Precast Handholes: 1. For use in vehicular and non-vehicular traffic areas. 2. Construction:

a. Grout or seal all joints, per manufacturers instructions. b. Covers and frames: Paint with two coats asphalt paint before setting. c. Support cables on walls by cable racks:

1) Provide a minimum of two racks, install symmetrically on each wall of handholes. Provide additional cable racks, as required, so that both ends of cable splices will be supported horizontally.

2) Equip cable racks with adjustable hooks: Minimum of two cable hooks per rack or as required by the number of conductors to be supported with one spare hook on each rack.

d. Install a cable-pulling iron in each wall opposite each ductbank entrance. e. In each handhole, drive 3/4 IN x 10 FT long copper clad ground rod into the

earth with approximately 6 IN exposed above finished floor. 1) Drill opening in floor for ground rod. 2) Connect all metallic conduits, racks, and other metallic components to

ground rod by means of #8 AWG minimum copper wire and approved grounding clamps.

f. Provide french drain in the bottom of each handhole. 3. Place handhole on a foundation of compacted 1/4 to 1/2 IN crushed rock or gravel a

minimum of 8 IN thick and 6 IN larger than handholes footprint on all sides. 4. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings install so that the top of cover is 1 IN above

finished grade. Where existing grades are higher than finished grades, install sufficient number of courses of curved segmented concrete block between top of handhole frame to temporarily elevate cover to existing grade level.

5. After installation is complete, backfill and compact soil around handholes. 6. Handhole size:

a. As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and size of conduits entering.

b. Minimum floor dimension of 4 FT x 4 FT and minimum depth of 4 FT. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering


3.3 UNDERGROUND CONDUITS:

A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Do not place concrete or soil until conduits have been observed by the Engineer. 2. Ductbanks shall be sloped a minimum of 4 IN per 100 FT or as detailed on the

Drawings. Low points shall be at handholes. 3. During construction and after conduit installation is complete, plug the ends of all

conduits. 4. Provide conduit supports and separators of concrete, plastic, or other suitable

nonmetallic non-decaying material designed for that purpose. a. Place supports and separators for rigid nonmetallic conduit on maximum centers

as indicated for the following trade sizes: 1) 1 IN and less: 3 FT. 2) 1-1/4 to 3 IN: 5 FT. 3) 3-1/2 to 6 IN: 7 FT.

b. Place supports and separators for rigid steel conduit on maximum centers as indicated for the following trade sizes: 1) 1 IN and less: 10 FT. 2) 1-1/4 to 2-1/2 IN: 14 FT. 3) 3 IN and larger: 20 FT.

c. Securely anchor conduits to supports and separators to prevent movement during placement of concrete or soil.

5. Stagger conduit joints at intervals of 6 IN vertically. 6. Make conduit joints watertight and in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. 7. Accomplish changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 15 degrees by long

sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 FT. Sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections or combinations thereof.

8. Furnish manufactured bends at end of runs. Minimum radius of 18 IN for conduits less than 3 IN trade size and 36 IN for conduits 3 IN trade size and larger.

9. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with the proper tools and shall match factory tapers.

10. After the conduit run has been completed, pull a standard flexible mandrel having a length of not less than 12 IN and a diameter approximately 1/4 IN less than the inside diameter of the conduit through each conduit. Then pull a brush with stiff bristles through each conduit to remove any foreign material left in conduit.

11. Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in lead wire. a. Install a heavy nylon cord free of kinks and splices in all unused new ducts. b. Extend cord 3 FT beyond ends of conduit.

12. Transition from rigid PVC conduit to rigid metallic conduit, per Section 16130, prior to entering a structure or going above ground. Rigid PVC conduit may be extended directly to handholes, pad mounted transformer boxes and other exterior pad mounted electrical equipment. a. Terminate rigid PVC conduits with end bells. b. Terminate steel conduits with insulated bushings.

13. Place warning tape in trench directly over ductbanks, direct-buried conduit, and direct-buried wire and cable. a. 6 IN below finished grade where conduit or ductbank is 12 IN or more below

finished grade. b. 3 IN below finished grade where conduit or ductbank is less than 12 IN below

finished grade. c. Trenches containing electrical power:

1) Legend: CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION (1st line), BURIED ELECTRIC LINE (2nd line).

2) Letters: 1-1/4 IN minimum.


3) Interval: Continuous. 4) Color: Red and black letters.

B. Concrete Encased Ductbank: 1. Ductbank system consists of conduits completely encased in minimum 2 IN of

concrete and with separations between different cabling types as required in Section 16130 or as detailed on the Drawings.

2. Install so that top of concrete encased duct, at any point: a. Is not less than 24 IN below grade. b. Is below pavement sub-grading.

3. Under traffic areas (roadways, parking lots, etc.) and for a distance 10 FT either side of the traffic area, and elsewhere as defined on the Drawings, the concrete shall be reinforced. The reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 03311 and as detailed on the Drawings.

4. Conduit supports shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 2 IN between the bottom of the trench and the bottom row of conduit.

5. Conduit separators shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 2 IN between conduits or as required in Section 16130 for different cabling types.

C. Direct-Buried Ductbank: 1. Ductbank system consists of conduits directly buried in earth with separations

between different cabling types as required in Section 16130 or as detailed on the Drawings.

2. Install so that the top of the uppermost conduit, at any point: a. Is not less than 24 IN below grade. b. Is below pavement sub-grading.

3. Provide a uniform minimum clearance of 2 IN between conduits or as required in Section 16130 for different cabling types. Maintain the separation by: a. The use of conduit supports and separators. b. Installing the multilevel ductbank one level at a time. Each level is backfilled with

the appropriate amount of soil to maintain the required separations.

D. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Ductbank system consisting of a conduit directly buried in earth. 2. Install so that top of conduit, at any point:

a. Is not less than 24 IN below grade. b. Is below pavement sub-grading.

E. Conduits embedded in concrete structure (e.g., sidewalks, bridge decks) where shown on the Contract Drawings: 1. Shall not be considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete except as

indicated in the following: 2. Shall not be larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of concrete. 3. Shall have a minimum spacing of 3 DIA OC. 4. In reinforced concrete construction:

a. Place conduit after reinforcing steel has been laid. b. The reinforcement steel shall not be displaced by the conduit. c. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 IN of cover over conduit.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


a. Light switches. b. Receptacles. c. Device wallplates and coverplates.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. WD 1, Wiring Devices. c. WD 6, Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 20, General Use Snap Switches. b. 498, Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. c. 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes. d. 943, Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Light switches and receptacles:

a. Hubbell. b. Bryant. c. Pass & Seymour. d. Arrow Hart. e. General Electric. f. Leviton. g. Crouse-Hinds. h. Appleton Electric Co. i. Killark.



2.2 LIGHT SWITCHES

A. General requirements unless modified in specific requirements paragraph of switches per designated areas or types: 1. Toggle type, quiet action, Standard Specification grade. 2. Self grounding with grounding terminal. 3. Back and side wired. 4. Solid silver cadmium oxide contacts. 5. Rugged urea housing and one-piece switch arm. 6. Rated 20 A, 120/277 VAC. 7. Switch handle color: Ivory. 8. Types as indicated on the Drawings:

a. Single pole. b. Double pole. c. 3-way. d. 4-way.

9. Standards: UL 20, UL 514A, NEMA WD 6.

B. Architecturally Finished Areas: 1. Wallplate: Type 302 stainless steel. Single or multiple gang as required.

C. Dry Non-architecturally Finished Areas: 1. Coverplate: Type 302 stainless steel. Single or multiple gang as required.

D. Wet Non-architecturally Finished Areas: 1. Coverplate: Gasketed zinc plated malleable iron or aluminum with stainless steel

screws utilizing rocker, front mounted toggle or pull type switch. Single or multiple gang as required.

E. Corrosive Areas: 1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts. 2. Coverplate: Gasketed, PVC coated malleable iron or copper free aluminum with

stainless steel screws utilizing rocker, front mounted toggle or pull type switch. Single or multiple gang as required.

2.3 RECEPTACLES

A. General requirements unless modified in specific requirements paragraph of receptacles per designated areas: 1. Straight blade, Standard Specification grade. 2. Brass triple wipe line contacts. 3. One piece grounding system with double wipe brass grounding contacts and self

grounding strap. 4. Back and side wired. 5. Rated 20 A, 125 V AC. 6. High impact nylon body. 7. Receptacle body color:

a. Normal power: Ivory. b. Generator or UPS power: Red.

8. Types as indicated on the Drawings: a. Normal: Self grounding with grounding terminal. b. Ground fault circuit interrupter: Feed-through type with test and reset buttons.

9. Duplex type, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 10. Configuration: NEMA 5-20R. 11. Standards: UL 498, UL 514A, UL 943, NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6.

B. Architecturally Finished Areas: 1. Wallplate: Type 302 stainless steel.


C. Dry Non-architecturally Finished Areas: 1. Coverplate: Type 302 stainless steel. Single or multiple gang as required.

D. Wet Non-architecturally Finished Areas: 1. Coverplate: Weather resistant zinc plated or aluminum, gasketed, self-closing cover

using stainless steel spring.

E. Exterior Locations: 1. Coverplate: Weatherproof (NEMA 3R) while in use, gasketed, flame retardant, UV

stabilized polycarbonate, 2.5 IN minimum cover depth.

F. Corrosive Areas: 1. Corrosion resistant nickel plated metal parts. 2. Receptacle body color: Yellow. 3. Coverplate: PVC coated malleable iron or copper free aluminum, gasketed, self-

closing cover using stainless steel spring. Use PVC coated malleable iron for PVC coated rigid conduit systems.

G. Special Purpose Receptacles: 1. NEMA configuration as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Coverplate: See requirements per area designations herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Mount devices where indicated on the Drawings: 1. Light switch (to center): 48 IN. 2. Receptacle in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 IN. 3. Receptacle on exterior wall of building (to center): 18 IN. 4. Receptacle in non-architecturally finished areas (to center): 48 IN. 5. Data/telephone outlet in architecturally finished areas (to center): 18 IN unless

otherwise noted on the Drawings.

C. See Section 16130 for device outlet box requirements.

D. Where more than one receptacle is installed in a room, they shall be symmetrically arranged.

E. Provide blank plates for empty outlets.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16265 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - LOW VOLTAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Variable frequency drives (VFDs) for operation of squirrel cage induction motors

rated 460 V AC or less, 3 PH, 60 Hz .

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 10400 - Identification Devices. 4. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 5. Section 16490 - Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices.



a. C62.41, Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits. b. C62.45, Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low Voltage AC

Power Circuits. 2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 3. ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL). 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

a. 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems.

5. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): a. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. b. MG-1, Motors and Generators.

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code.

7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508, Industrial Control Equipment.

B. Qualifications: 1. Provide drives that have the standard factory configuration of the variable speed

drive listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL), or that shall be capable of field inspection and subsequent field labeling by a UL-recognized field inspector. Where drives and controlling equipment are mounted in a custom enclosure, UL listed components shall be furnished.

2. VFD Supplier shall maintain an authorized service organization within 100 miles of the project site.

3. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.

C. Coordination: 1. VFD manufacturer shall verify with the driven equipment manufacturer that the VFD

and the drive motor are compatible and that the VFD will operate the driven equipment motor over its required operating range and will do so without exceeding the motor or VFD safety factors.

2. VFD shall be supplied complete with all required control components.


a. VFD manufacturer shall review the application and provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, the hardware and software necessary to allow the VFD to control the driven equipment motor over its required operating range. These may include, but are not limited to, analog and digital interface modules, communication interface modules, feeder circuit power output filters or chokes which may be required due to VFD-to-motor feeder length, switches, lights and other devices.

3. Verify plan dimensions with equipment space requirements as indicated on the Drawings. a. Equipment which exceeds the allotted maximum dimensions may not be

acceptable. b. Equipment which reduces clear space below the minimums established by the

NEC will not be acceptable. 4. Contractor shall coordinate submittal with submittals from the motor manufacturer

and the equipment manufacturer to provide concurrent submittals.

D. VFD manufacturer shall clearly identify conditions that will limit the operation of, or cause damage to, the VFD. These shall include, but are not limited to: 1. Line side overvoltage. 2. Line side voltage imbalance. 3. Line side surge magnitude and duration. 4. Location of VFD enclosure with respect to external cooling air flow.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 16010. 2. Product technical data:

a. Rated VFD input kVA and current. b. Rated output kVA and current. c. Overload current. d. Percent efficiency and power factor at 50, 75, and 100 percent speed. e. Maximum BTU heat release data and verification of the drive cooling

requirements. f. Panel interior, and front and side exterior views, with details showing maximum

overall dimensions of VFD and isolation transformer (if provided). g. Locations and sizes of electrical connections, ground terminations, and shielded

wire usage. h. Harmonic calculations by the VFD manufacturer with detailed drawings and/or

information showing how protection is applied to comply with harmonic limits. i. Identification and location of closest authorized service organization.

3. Certifications: a. Submit with Shop Drawings:

1) Compliance with IEEE 519. 2) Compliance with "Factory Tests". 3) That the VFD can withstand the same level of fault current as that imposed

on the equipment feeding the VFD. b. Submit prior to shipment:

1) From the VFD manufacturer and each VFD driven equipment manufacturer that the specific application has been reviewed and that the combination will satisfy the drive duties required with the actual motor furnished.

2) That the testing described under "Factory Tests" in Part 2 has been successfully completed.

c. Submit after installation: 1) That the critical frequency of the drive system has been identified and the

VFD has been set to lockout these frequencies. 2) Installation test reports that show:


a) Each VFD is operational. b) Each VFD and its driven equipment motor is compatible. c) Each VFD responds correctly to the input control signals.

3) That by on-site field measurements the VFD is not introducing harmonics to the power distribution system in excess of those recommended by IEEE 519.

B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Troubleshooting procedures with a cross-reference between symptoms and

corrective recommendations. 3. Connection data to permit removal and installation of recommended smallest field-

replaceable parts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. See Section 01062


2.2 TYPE OF DRIVE

A. Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) type with IGBT transistors.


A. Application: 1. VFD(s) shall be of sufficient capacity and shall provide a quality output waveform for

stepless motor control from 10 to 100 percent of base speed for NEMA Design B squirrel cage induction motors complying with NEMA MG-1, Part .

2. The drives shall be suitable for Constant Torque (CT) or Variable Torque (VT) applications. VFD manufacturer shall coordinate with the manufacturer of the driven equipment to identify CT and VT applications.

3. VFD(s) shall be designed to operate successfully under the following conditions: a. Ambient:

1) Temperature: 0-40 DegC. 2) 95 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

b. Elevation: 5500FT above MSL. c. Input power to VFD:

1) 480 VAC (+10 to – 15 percent). 2) 3 PH, 60 Hz (+3 percent).

d. Line voltage imbalance +5 percent of rated voltage.

B. Performance: 1. The VFD shall have the following capabilities:

a. Continuous output current rating: 1) VFD current rating shall be equal to or greater than the current required of

the motor nameplate horsepower including motor service factor. a) Motor service factor: 1.15 minimum.

b. Current overload capacity: 1) VT: 110 percent for 1 min. 2) CT: 150 percent for 1 min.

c. Efficiencies: 1) At full speed and full load:


a) Motors 15 HP and above: 97 percent. b) Motor less than 15 HP: 95 percent.

2) 90 percent at 1/2 speed and load. 3) Efficiency shall be determined excluding isolation transformer and input and

output reactor losses. d. Line side power factor:

1) 96 percent regardless of speed and load. e. Frequency drift:

1) + 0.5 percent of set frequency. f. Speed regulation (motor dependent):

1) 3 percent. g. Speed range:

1) 10:1. h. Critical frequency lockout:

1) Minimum of three. i. Continued operation with momentary voltage dips of 25 percent of rated voltage

for a 4 second duration. j. Volts/Hertz ratio; constant over the entire operating range of the VFD except:

1) When operating under voltage boost. 2) At frequencies over 60 Hz.

k. Automatic restart with one restrike following a power outage. l. Spinning load restart: Synchronization of VFD starting frequency with spinning

or coasting load. 2. The VFD shall be supplied with line side and load side reactors:

a. Minimum nominal impedance: 1) 3 percent.

b. Current overload: 1) 150 percent for 1 min.

c. Insulation temperature rating: 1) 180 DegC.

d. Copper windings. e. Saturation current rating:

1) 3.5 to 5 times rated current. f. Hi-potential rating:

1) 2500 VAC line to ground and line to line, for 1 min. g. Noise reducing:

1) Epoxy over cast coil. 2) Extra dips and bakes of varnish over continuous wound coil.

C. The VFD shall be provided with the following adjustments: 1. Independent maximum and minimum speed. 2. Independent linear acceleration and deceleration time. 3. Volts/Hertz ratio. 4. Voltage boost. 5. Process follower gain, offset and bias. 6. Torque limit. 7. Overcurrent trip point.

D. The VFD shall have the power circuit designed such that the power circuit components are protected: 1. Input protection:

a. Line side thermal-magnetic circuit breaker disconnect. 1) Fault current interrupting rating equal to or greater than the interrupting

rating of the equipment feeding the VFD as indicated on the Drawings. 2) Padlockable in the OFF position. 3) See Section 16490.

b. Undervoltage trip:


1) Manual restart. 2) Ride through a momentary power dip, magnitude and duration as previously

specified. 3) Ride through a one cycle loss of power.

c. Incoming line transient suppression. d. Loss of phase trip:

1) Manual restart. e. Reverse phase trip:

1) Manual restart. f. Overvoltage trip:

1) Manual restart. 2. Internal protection:

a. Surge suppression and power device snubbers. b. Power devices rated at 2.5 times line voltage. c. Instantaneous overcurrent trip with manual reset. d. DC bus overvoltage trip with manual reset. e. Power device overtemperature trip with manual reset. f. Control logic circuit malfunction trip with manual reset. g. Microprocessor failure. h. Inverter fault.

3. Output protection: a. Overcurrent trip. b. Overvoltage trip. c. Overfrequency trip. d. Ground fault trip:

2.4 OPERATOR AND REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE

A. Control circuits shall be 115 VAC supplied by CPT in the VFD. 1. CPT shall have minimum additional capacity of 60 VA greater than that required by

control devices. 2. CPT shall have two fuses on the primary side and one fuse on the secondary side. 3. CPT shall have surge protection on the primary side independent of any other surge

protection in the VFD.

B. Operator interface: 1. Door mounted sealed keypad, membrane type with LED or LCD display.

a. Messages shall be in English and engineering units. b. Drive operating parameters shall be programmable. c. Menu driven. d. Password security. e. Display fault and diagnostic data. f. Operating parameters, fault and diagnostic data maintained in non-volatile

memory with historic log of fault and diagnostic data. g. Gold plated plug-in contacts.

2. Hand-Off-Auto control and speed reference selector switch. 3. Manual speed adjustment. 4. Manual start and stop control. 5. Indicating lights:

a. POWER ON. b. VFD RUN. c. VFD FAULT.

6. Speed indication: a. Calibrated in percent. b. Open-loop, function of VFD frequency.


7. Diagnostic indicators located externally on the face of the drive shall show the type of fault responsible for drive warning, shutdown or failure. On occurrence of more than one condition each shall be recorded or indicated by the diagnostics.

C. Remote Interface: 1. Serial communications port:

a. Capability to: 1) Start-Stop VFD. 2) Control VFD Speed. 3) Access fault and diagnostic data.

2. RS232 programming and operation interface port. 3. Analog and discrete inputs:

a. Isolated process follower with offset, gain and span adjustment for accepting a remote 4-20 mA DC speed reference signal.

b. Drive disable permissive: 1) Per Section 13441.

4. Analog and discrete outputs: a. 4-20 mA DC output for remote speed indication, as a function of frequency,

calibrated 0 to 100 percent. b. Drive FAULT contacts. c. Drive RUNNING contacts. d. Drive selector switch in AUTO status contacts.

5. Contacts: a. Contacts shall be rated 2 A inductive at 120 Vac. b. All contacts shall be wired to terminal boards.

6. Drive shutdown on motor winding overtemperature: a. Manual reset. b. Motor winding overtemperature switch to initiate VFD shutdown. Wire to terminal

board in the VFD.

2.5 HARMONIC PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Each VFD shall be designed and provided with all necessary equipment to protect the VFD and the power system ahead of the VFD from voltage and current distortion. The VFD manufacturer shall provide input line reactors and/or harmonic filters as required. 1. In accordance with and as defined by IEEE 519:

a. Each VFD shall be designed to operate from a power bus that may contain up to 5 percent voltage distortion.

b. Each single or multiple set of VFDs powered from the same bus shall be designed to limit percent distortion factor to a maximum total of 5 percent voltage distortion.

c. Current distortion limits shall not exceed the values listed in Table 10.3 of IEEE 519.

d. Line-to-line notching at the input to the drive shall have a maximum notch depth of 20 percent and a maximum notch area of 22,800 volt-microseconds reflected back to the power source.

2. The Point of Common Coupling (PCC) for all harmonic calculations and field measurements for both the voltage and current distortion shall be defined as the primary (line side) connection of each VFD.

B. In lieu of performing harmonic calculations and taking field measurements for both voltage and current distortion, and subsequently providing harmonic filters and/or input line reactors, the drive manufacturer may provide drives utilizing 18-pulse clean power technology.



2.6 EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Each VFD system shall be shop assembled for installation in an MCC or in an

enclosure for remote mounting, and shall utilize interchangeable plug-in printed circuit boards and power conversion components wherever possible. Shop assembly shall be performed by the VFD manufacturer or his authorized agent. Systems fabricated or assembled in whole or in part by parties other than the VFD manufacturer or his authorized agent will not be acceptable. The VFDs shall be mounted within standard 20 IN wide motor control center sections, and included as part of the overall motor control center.

2. Reactors and/or filters, where required, shall be mounted within or in an ancillary enclosure adjacent to the drive enclosure, or with the Engineer's permission may be mounted in a separate enclosure.

3. Cooling fans shall be provided to run when drive is running. 4. Enclosures for separately mounted VFD's:

a. NEMA Type 1 for installation in Electrical Rooms. b. NEMA Type 12 for installation in other unclassified areas.

B. Wiring: 1. The wiring in the VFD shall be neatly installed in wire ways or with wire ties where

wire ways are not practical. Where wire ties are used, the wire bundles are to be held at the back panel with a screw-mounted wire tie mounting base. Bases with a self-sticking back will not be allowed.

2. All plug-in contacts shall be gold-plated. 3. Terminal blocks shall be complete with marking strip, covers and pressure

connectors. They shall be non-brittle, interlocking, track-mounted type. Screw terminals will not be allowed. A terminal shall be provided for each conductor of external circuits plus one ground for each shielded cable. For free-standing panels, 8 IN of clearance shall be provided between terminals and the panel base for conduit and wiring space. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be provided. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with identification indicated on the supplier’s submittal drawings. Each control loop or system shall be individually fused, and all fuses or circuit breakers shall be clearly labeled and located for easy maintenance.

4. All grounding wires shall be attached to the enclosure sheet metal with a ring tongue terminal. The surface of the sheet metal shall be prepared to assure good conductivity and corrosion protection.

5. Wiring shall not be kinked or spliced. 6. Wire markers shall comply with the manufacturer's drawings. See Section 10400 for

required wiring identification. 7. With the exception of electronic circuits, all interconnecting wiring and wiring to

terminals for external connection shall be stranded copper, insulated for not less than 600 V, with a moisture-resistant and flame-retardant covering rated for not less than 90 DegC.

C. Nameplates: 1. All devices mounted on the face of the drive shall be provided with a suitable

nameplate as specified in Section 10400. Push buttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall have the device manufacturer's standard legend plate. All other devices shall have an engraved, laminated plate. All lettering shall be a minimum of 3/16 IN high and shall be white or silver on a black background.

2. Relays, terminals and special devices inside the control enclosure shall have permanent markings to match identification used on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. See Section 10400.


3. Use stainless steel screws to attach nameplates.

D. Painting: Equipment, after being phosphate washed, shall be thoroughly cleaned and given at least one coat of rust-inhibiting primer on all inner surfaces prior to fabrication.


A. Factory Tests: 1. Conduct all standard tests in accordance with NEMA and ANSI standards to ensure

conformance to Specification requirements. 2. Prior to final assembly:

a. Inspect incoming components. b. Test and inspect power devices. c. Circuit cards:

1) Component and functional tests: 2) Burn-in chamber or temperature cycling test. 3) System test after burn-in, or temperature cycling.

3. After final assembly: a. Continuity and insulation test of 480 VAC circuits.

1) Test voltage shall be 2500 VDC. b. Continuity and insulation test of 120 VAC circuits.

1) Test voltage shall be 500 VDC. c. Drive tests:

1) Burn-in complete drive at full load for 24 HRS. 2) Verify all auxiliary circuits operation. 3) Monitor output variables.

d. Systems test: 1) Provide inputs to field connections and simulate on-site operation. 2) Test all auxiliary equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Verify the installed motor nameplate electrical requirements do not exceed the VFD capacity.

C. Provide services of manufacturer's representative to perform start-up services.

3.2 START UP

A. Pre-startup services: 1. Shall be completed a minimum of 30 days prior to the startup and demonstration

period described in Section 01650. 2. Shall consist of:

a. Physical and electrical installation check. b. Final adjustments and calibration of drive parameters. c. VFD operation from simulated input signals.

3. Shall be complete when VFD(s) are fully operational.

B. Startup and demonstration services: 1. Supervise startup of all units including recheck of settings made during the pre-

startup tests. a. Perform all work in the presence of the Owner's designated representatives.

2. Simulate operation of the VFD and its associated control and instrumentation system in both the manual and automatic modes.


a. Ensure compatibility of VFD with associated control and instrumentation signals. 3. Simulate VFD failures and demonstrate troubleshooting aids. 4. Instruct Owner's designated personnel:

a. Minimum of 8 hours at the jobsite. b. Include both field and classroom instruction. c. Instructions shall include proper operation and maintenance procedures

including, but not limited to: 1) Lubrication. 2) Troubleshooting. 3) Repair and replacement. 4) Parts inventory. 5) Maintenance records.

C. Perform onsite field measurement of harmonics at the PCC. 1. For each individual VFD. 2. For the maximum number of VFDs that will be operational at the same time. 3. Not required if supplied with 18-pulse clean power technology.

D. Perform onsite field measurement of the maximum voltage peak, measured line-to-line, at the terminals of each motor fed from a VFD. 1. Use a high speed oscilloscope to produce a plot of Voltage (Y axis) versus Time (X

axis). a. Time shall be measured in microseconds.

2. Tests shall be performed at full voltage and speed. a. Peak voltage shall not exceed 1200 V line-to-line. b. Peak voltage in excess of 1200 V line-to-line:

1) Contractor shall coordinate with the VFD manufacturer to solve the problem and at no cost to the Owner. a) VFD manufacturer shall provide an output dv/dt filter, to limit the motor

terminal voltage peak to 1200 V or less, line-to-line. b) Contractor shall perform a complete retest of all affected drives.

E. Record all data necessary for the preparation of required test reports.

3.3 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts.

B. When not included in the recommended spare parts provide for each type and rating of drive: 1. Complete set of all plug-in drive components. 2. One set of 3 of each type power fuse. 3. One set of 12 of each type control fuse. 4. One main control board. 5. One inverter module. 6. One inverter snubber module. 7. One inverter base drive module. 8. One set of other field replaceable components.

C. Spare parts shall be labeled and packed in containers suitable for storage.

D. Spare parts utilized during pre-startup or startup and demonstration testing shall be immediately restocked, at no cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16275 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution pad-mounted transformers.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Conditions. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16121 - Cable: Medium Voltage.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers (IEEE):

a. C57.12.00, General Requirements for Liquid-immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers.

b. C57.12.26, Standard for Pad-Mounted Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers for Use with Separable Insulated High-Voltage Connectors.

c. C57.12.70, Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and Power Transformers.

3. Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers/American National Standards Institute (IEEE/ANSI): a. 386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power

Distribution Systems Above 600 V. b. C57.12.80, Terminology for Distribution and Power Transformers. c. C57.12.90, Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and

Regulating Transformers. d. C62.11, Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power

Circuits. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. Product technical data:

a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification: b. See Section 16010 for additional requirements.

3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Nameplate drawing.

4. Test reports: a. Factory tests.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. ABB. 2. Cooper Power Systems. 3. General Electric Company. 4. Square D Company. 5. Cutler Hammer.


2.2 THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER

A. General: 1. Transformer to be designed and constructed in accordance with:

a. IEEE C57.12.00, IEEE C57.12.26, IEEE C57.12.70, IEEE/ANSI C57.12.80.

B. Ratings: 1. Type: Outdoor, pad-mounted, liquid-immersed, self-cooled, compartmental type. 2. Operation and application: Step-down operation. 3. Configuration:

a. Dead-front, loop-feed primary. 4. Voltage and kVA Ratings: As specified on the Drawings. 5. Number of phases: Three (3). 6. Frequency: 60 Hz. 7. Polarity: ANSI standard. 8. Percent impedance: ANSI standard. 9. Basic impulse level (BIL): 95 kV. 10. Temperature rise: 65 DegC. 11. Connections:

a. Delta or Wye: As indicated on the Drawings. b. Primary: 200 ampere bushing wells and insert for loadbreak elbows. c. Secondary:

1) Less than 750 kVA: Six-hole, spade-type minimum or as required. 2) 750 kVA and greater: 12-hole, spade-type minimum or as required.

12. Tap-changer: De-energized type on H-winding, five (5) total with: a. Two (2)2.5 percent above and two (2) 2.5 percent below nominal tap.

13. Sectionalizing oil immersed load break primary switch: a. Two (2) position, with the switch positions labeled:

1) "XFMR OPEN" when the coil is de-energized. 2) "XFMR CLOSED" when the coil is energized.

b. Four (4) position, 'V' blade, with the switch positions labeled: 1) "SOURCE A" (Loop is open and the coil is energized by Source A). 2) "SOURCE B" (Loop is open and the coil is energized by Source B). 3) "SOURCE A & B" (Loop is closed and the coil is energized by both

sources). 4) "LOOP & XFMR OPEN" (Loop is open and the coil is de-energized).

c. Four (4) position, 'T' blade, with the switch positions labeled: 1) "SOURCE A" (Loop is open and the coil is energized by Source A). 2) "SOURCE B" (Loop is open and the coil is energized by Source B). 3) "SOURCE A & B" (Loop is closed and the coil is energized by both

sources). 4) "LOOP CLOSED & XFMR OPEN" (Loop is closed and the coil is de-

energized).


C. Components: 1. Windings: Aluminum or copper. 2. Tank:

a. Sealed-tank construction with welded main cover and bolted tamper-resistant handhole.

b. Steel divider between high-voltage and low-voltage compartments. c. No exposed screws, bolts, or other fastening devices that are externally

removable. d. No openings through which foreign objects such as sticks, rods, or wires may

contact live parts. e. 24 IN deep cabinet (minimum) f. 1 IN upper fill plug. g. 1 IN drain valve with sampling device. h. Automatic pressure relief device. i. Stainless steel NEMA 2-hole ground pads.

3. Door: a. Each compartment will have removable, three-point latching hinged doors

equipped for latching in the open position. b. The high-voltage compartment door will have a fastening device that is

accessible only through the low-voltage compartment. c. The hinge assemblies made of corrosion-resistant material.

1) Provide stainless-steel hinge pins of 3/8 IN minimum diameter. d. Both compartment doors capable of securing with a single padlock having a

maximum 1/2 IN DIA shackle. 4. Unit protection:

a. Provide unit protection with a partial-range current limiting fuse on each primary phase (under oil, factory replaceable only).

b. Provide an expulsion-type, bayonet fuse (under oil, user serviceable) in series with the current limiting fuse.

5. Finish: a. Manufacturer's standard corrosion protection system. b. Dark "padmount" green.

6. Insulating oil: a. Mineral oil. b. Permanently affix nameplate to outside of tank stamped "Non PCB".

7. Accessories: a. Liquid level indication. b. Dial-type thermometer. c. Provisions for pressure vacuum gage. d. Stainless steel or laser-scribed anodized aluminum nameplate, with date of

manufacturer.

2.3 SURGE ARRESTORS

A. Standards: IEEE/ANSI 386 and IEEE/ANSI C62.11.

B. MOV gapless elbow type.

C. Elbow Connector: 1. One-piece design, comprised of an insulation layer and outer shield constructed of

EPDM rubber. 2. 200A, dead front, load break type with hot stick pulling eye and grounding tab.

D. Voltage Class: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Arrestor MCOV Rating: As indicated on Drawings. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering



A. Factory Tests: Test transformers in accordance with IEEE/ANSI C57.12.90.


A. Touch-up paint, two (2) separate one (1) quart containers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install on pad as detailed on Drawings and in accordance with manufacture's instructions.

B. Transformer locations as shown on drawings are intended to be used as a guide. 1. Field conditions may affect actual transformer location. 2. Coordinate final location with Owner.

C. Install three-phase transformers on concrete pad per detail on the Drawings.

D. See Section 16121 for cable termination requirements.


A. Acceptance Testing: See Section 16080.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16410 SAFETY SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Safety switches.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16490 - Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices.



a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum). b. KS-1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches.


3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 16010. 2. Associate safety switch type and rating with associated equipment tag number.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following safety switch manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D Company. 4. Siemens. 5. Appleton Electric Company. 6. Crouse-Hinds. 7. Killark.


2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. General: 1. Non-fusible or fusible as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Rated for service entrance when required by the Drawings. 3. NEMA Type HD heavy-duty construction.


4. Switch blades will be fully visible in the OFF position with the enclosure door open. 5. Quick-make/quick-break operating mechanism. 6. Deionizating arc chutes. 7. Double-break rotary action shaft and switchblade shall be manufactured as one

common component. 8. Clear line shields to prevent accidental contact with line terminals. 9. Operating handle:

a. Red and easily recognizable. b. Padlockable in the OFF position c. Interlocked to prevent door from opening when the switch is in the ON position

with a defeater mechanism.

B. Ratings: 1. Horsepower rated of connected motor. 2. Voltage and amperage: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Short circuit withstand: Equal to or greater than the upstream equipment (where

fused switches are provided).

C. Accessories: 1. Provide when indicated in PART 3 or on the Drawings:

a. Neutral kits. b. Ground lug kits. c. Auxiliary electrical interlock contact kits with 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact, 10 amp,

120 volt.

D. Enclosures: 1. NEMA 4X rated (metallic):

a. Body and cover: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door.

2. NEMA 12 rated: a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and

manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door.

E. Overcurrent and short circuit protective devices: 1. Fuses. 2. See Section 16490 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements.

F. Standards: NEMA KS-1, UL 98.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

B. Switches shall be installed adjacent to the equipment they are intended to serve unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1. Mounting height: 54 IN to center of operating handle.

C. Provide auxiliary contact kit on local safety switches for motors being controlled by variable frequency drives. The VFD is to be disabled with the switch in the open position.

D. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive.

E. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: 1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in non-architecturally finished areas.


END OF SECTION


SECTION 16440 SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Low voltage switchboards.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16490 - Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices. 5. Section 16491 - Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (SPD). 6. Section 16492 - Electrical Metering Devices.



a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 891, Standard for Safety Dead-Front Switchboards.

B. Verify the space required for the switchboard is equal to or less than the space allocated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. Product technical data.

a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification: 3. See Section 16010 for additional requirements. 4. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:

a. Switchboard layout with alphanumeric designation, protective devices size and type, as indicated in the one-line diagram or switchboard schedule.

b. Front elevation and plan drawing of the assembly. c. Three-line or single line and schematic diagrams. d. Conduit space locations within the assembly.



C. Miscellaneous: 1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the

submittal process. 2. Ground fault protection system test report signed by the projects supervising

electrical foreman.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D Company. 4. Siemens.


2.2 SWITCHBOARDS

A. Ratings: 1. Voltage, number of phases, number of wires, and main bus current rating as

indicated on the Drawings. 2. Assembly short circuit current and interrupting device rating as indicated on the

Drawings. 3. Service Entrance Equipment rated.

B. Construction: 1. Standards: NEMA PB 2, UL 891. 2. Completely enclosed, dead-front, self-supporting metal structure. 3. Vertical panel sections bolted together. 4. Frames bolted together to support and house bus, cables and other equipment. 5. Frames and insulating blocks to support and brace main buses for short circuit

stresses up to ratings indicated on the Drawings. 6. All sections front and rear aligned. 7. Devices front removable and load connections front accessible for mounting

switchboard against a wall. 8. NEMA 1 rated enclosure. 9. Interior and exterior steel surfaces cleaned and painted with rust inhibiting primer

and manufacturers standard paint.

C. Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or silver-plated copper. 2. Main horizontal bus:

a. Fully rated and continuous over length of switchboard with all three (3) phases arranged in the same vertical plane.

b. Sufficient size to limit temperature rise to 65 DegC over average air temperature outside the enclosure of 40 DegC.

3. Neutral bus: Fully rated and continuous over length of switchboard. 4. Ground bus: 1/4 x 2 IN copper, continuous over length of switchboard and solidly

grounded to each vertical section structure. 5. Bus joints connected using through bolts and conical spring-type washers for

maximum conductivity.

D. Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices: 1. Main overcurrent protective device:

a. Individually mounted molded case circuit breaker. 2. Feeder overcurrent protective devices:

a. Group mounted molded case circuit breaker. 3. See Section 16490 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. 4. Factory installed. 5. Means to padlock all main and feeder devices in the open position.

E. Surge Protective Device: Integrally mounted, see Section 16491.


F. Metering: 1. Utility:

a. Separate barriered-off compartment with hinged sealable door. b. Bus work with provisions for required current and potential transformers and

meter mounting. 2. Power monitor:

a. Separate compartment with hinged door. b. See Section 16492 for meter requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Arrange switchboard as shown on the Drawings.

C. Indoor Locations: 1. NEMA 1 enclosure. 2. Install on concrete housekeeping pad, align front of switchboard with top edge of

pad chamfer and securely fasten to pad.

D. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide circuit protective devices and other associated equipment as indicated on

the Drawings. 2. All control wiring shall be neatly laced and have flexibility at hinge locations.


A. Test the ground fault protection system as indicated in Section 16490.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16441 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16490 - Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices.



a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. PB 1, Panelboards.


3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 50, Cabinets and Boxes. b. 67, Panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


a. Panelboard layout with alphanumeric designation, branch circuit breakers size and type, as indicated in the panelboard schedules.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D Company. 4. Siemens.




A. Standards: NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, UL 50, UL 67.

B. Ratings: 1. Current, voltage, number of phases, number of wires as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Panelboards rated 240 Vac or less: 10,000 amp minimum short circuit rating unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Panelboards rated 480 Vac: 14,000 amp minimum short circuit rating unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

C. Construction: 1. Service entrance rated where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Interiors factory assembled and designed such that switching and protective devices

can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors.

3. Multi-section panelboards: Feed-through or sub-feed lugs. 4. Main lugs: Solderless type approved for copper wire.

D. Bus Bars: 1. Main bus bars: Copper sized to limit temperature rise to a maximum of 65 DegC

above an ambient of 40 DegC. Drilled and tapped and arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices.

2. Ground bus and isolated ground bus, when indicated on Drawings: Solderless mechanical type connectors.

3. Neutral bus bars: Insulated 100 percent rated or 200 percent rated, when indicated on the Drawings and with solderless mechanical type connectors.

E. Enclosure: 1. Boxes: Code gage galvanized steel, furnish without knockouts. 2. Trim assembly: Code gage steel finished with rust inhibited primer and

manufacturers standard paint inside and out. 3. Lighting and appliance panelboard:

a. Trims supplied with hinged door over all circuit breaker handles. b. Trims for surface mounted panelboards, same size as box. c. Trims for flush mounted panelboards, overlap the box by 3/4 IN on all sides. d. Doors lockable with corrosion resistant chrome-plated combination lock and

catch, all locks keyed alike. e. Nominal 20 IN wide and 5-3/4 IN deep with gutter space in accordance with

NEC. f. Clear plastic cover for directory card mounted on the inside of each door. g. NEMA 3R or 12 rated: Door gasketed.

F. Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices: 1. Main overcurrent protective device:

a. Molded case circuit breaker. 2. Branch overcurrent protective devices:

a. Mounted molded case circuit breaker. 3. See Section 16490 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. 4. Factory installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with the NEC, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions:


1. Mounting height: 72 IN to top.

B. Support panelboard enclosures from wall studs or modular channels support structure, per Section 16010.

C. Provide NEMA 1, 3R or 12 rated enclosure as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide panelboard labeling as specified in Section 16010.

E. Provide each panelboard with a typed directory: 1. Identify all circuit locations in each panelboard with the load type and location

served. 2. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by Owner-furnished designation if different

than designation indicated on Drawings. 3. Room names and numbers shall be final building room names and numbers as

identified by the Owner if different than designation indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16442 MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Separately mounted motor starters (including those supplied with equipment).

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16490 - Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices. 5. Section 16493 - Control Equipment Accessories.


A. Referenced Standards: 1. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum). b. ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. c. ICS 3, Industrial Systems.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 508, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment.

B. Miscellaneous: 1. Verify motor horsepower loads, other equipment loads, and controls from approved

shop drawings and notify Engineer of any discrepancies. 2. Verify the required instrumentation and control wiring for a complete system and

notify Engineer of any discrepancies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


submittal process. 2. Product technical data:

a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification. b. See Section 16010 for additional requirements.

3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Separately mounted combination starters:

1) Unit ladder logic wiring for each unit depicting electrical wiring and identification of terminals where field devices or remote control signals are to be terminated as indicated on the drawings and/or loop descriptions.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Allen-Bradley. 2. Cutler Hammer. 3. General Electric Company. 4. Square D Company. 5. Siemens.


2.2 SEPARATELY MOUNTED COMBINATION STARTERS

A. Standards: 1. NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 2. 2. UL 508.

B. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 12 rated:

a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturer's standard paint inside and out.

b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed door.

C. Operating Handle: 1. With the door closed the handle mechanism allows complete ON/OFF control of the

unit disconnect and clear indication of the disconnect status. 2. Circuit breaker and MCP operators includes a separate TRIPPED position. 3. Mechanical interlock to prevent to prevent the opening of the door when the

disconnect is in the ON position with a defeater mechanism for use by authorized personnel.

4. Mechanical interlock to prevent the placement of the disconnect in the ON position with the door open with a defeater mechanism for use by authorized personnel.

5. Padlockable in the OFF position.

D. External mounted overload relay pushbutton.

E. Control Devices: 1. Provide control devices as indicated on the Drawings per Section 16493. 2. Devices will be accessible with the door closed.

F. Control Power Transformer: 1. 120V secondary. 2. Fused on primary and secondary side. 3. Sized for 140 percent of required load.

G. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to the rating of the electrical gear from which it is fed.

H. Motor Starters: See requirements within this Section.

I. Disconnect Switch, Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices: 1. Motor circuit protector. 2. See Section 16490 for overcurrent and short circuit protective device requirements. 3. Factory installed.



2.3 MOTOR STARTERS

A. Standards: 1. NEMA ICS 2. 2. UL 508.

B. Full Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR) Magnetic Starters: 1. NEMA full size rated contactor.

a. NEMA half sizes and IEC contactors are not permitted. 2. Double-break silver alloy contacts. 3. Overload relays:

a. Ambient compensated, bimetallic type with interchangeable heaters, 24 percent adjustability, single phase sensitivity, an isolated arm contact and manual reset.

b. Ambient insensitive, adjustable solid state type with phase loss protection, phase imbalance protection and manual reset.

4. Interlock and auxiliary contacts, wired to terminal blocks: a. Holding circuit contact, normally open. b. Overload alarm contact, normally open. c. Normally open auxiliary contact, for remote run status. d. Additional field replaceable auxiliary contacts as required per the Sequence of

Operation. e. Two (2) additional normally open spare field replaceable auxiliary contacts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

B. Mounting height for surface mounted equipment: See Section 16010.

C. Overload Heaters: 1. Size for actual motor full load current of the connected motor.

D. Combination Starter Enclosures: 1. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure:

a. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16460 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Dry-type transformers, 1000 kVA and less.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16060 - Grounding.



a. C57.96, Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers. b. C89.2, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications. b. TP-1, Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 506, Specialty Transformers. b. 1561, Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


a. UL nameplate data. 3. Certifications:

a. Sound level certifications.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D Company. 4. Siemens. 5. Sola/Hevi-Duty.


2.2 GENERAL PURPOSE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. Ventilated or non-ventilated, air cooled, two winding type.


B. Cores: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point.

C. Coils: Continuous wound with electrical grade aluminum.

D. Ventilated Units: 1. Core and coils assembly impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish

and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture and completely isolated from the enclosure by means of vibration dampening pads.

2. Dripproof, NEMA 1, steel enclosure finished with weather-resistant enamel, and ventilation openings protected from falling dirt.

E. Furnish Taps for Transformers as Follows: 1. 1 PH, 2 kVA and below: None. 2. 1 PH, 3 to 25 kVA: Two 5 percent FCBN. 3. 1 PH, 25 kVA and above: Two 2.5 percent FCAN and four 2.5 percent FCBN. 4. 3 PH, 3 to 15 kVA: Two 5 percent FCBN. 5. 3 PH, 15 kVA and above: Two 2.5 percent FCAN and four 2.5 percent FCBN.

F. Sound Levels: Manufacturer shall guarantee not to exceed the following: 1. Up to 9 kVA: 40 dB. 2. 10 to 50 kVA: 45 dB.

G. Efficiency: 1. Ventilated, 15 kVA and larger: Energy efficient meeting NEMA TP-1 requirements.

H. Insulating Material (600 V and below): 1. 3 to 15 kVA units: 185 DegC insulation system with a 115 DegC rise. 2. 15 kVA and above units: 220 DegC insulation system with a 150 DegC rise.

I. Ratings: 60 Hz, Voltage, KVA and phase, as indicated on the Drawings.

J. Finish: Rust inhibited primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out.

K. Standards: ANSI C57.96, ANSI C89.2, NEMA ST 20, NEMA TP-1, UL 506, UL 1561.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Indoor Locations: 1. Provide ventilated type for 15 kVA units and above. 2. Provide non-ventilated type for 9 kVA units and below. 3. Mount 9 kVA units and below on wall. 4. Mount 15 kVA units and above on chamfered 4 IN high concrete housekeeping pad

or from wall and/or ceiling, at 7 FT above finished floor, using equipment support brackets per Section 16010.

5. Provide rubber vibrations isolation pads.

C. Enclosures: Painted steel in all areas except stainless steel in corrosive areas.

D. Ground in accordance with Section 16060.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16490 OVERCURRENT AND SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Low voltage circuit breakers. 2. Low voltage fuses.



A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. 242, Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (Buff Book).

b. 399, Power System Analysis (Brown Book). 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. b. 943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. Ground fault protection system test reports signed by the project’s supervising

electrical foreman.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Circuit breakers:

a. Cutler-Hammer. b. General Electric Company. c. Square D Company. d. Siemens.

2. Fuses:


a. Bussmann, Inc. b. Littelfuse, Inc. c. Gould Shawmut.


2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded Case Type: 1. General:

a. Standards: NEMA AB 1, UL 489. b. Unit construction. c. Over-center, toggle handle operated. d. Quick-make, quick-break, independent of toggle handle operation. e. Manual and automatic operation. f. All poles open and close simultaneously. g. Three position handle: On, off and tripped. h. Molded-in ON and OFF markings on breaker cover. i. One-, two- or three-pole as indicated on the Drawings. j. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings. k. Bolt on type.

2. Thermal magnetic type: a. Inverse time overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a

thermal magnetic element. b. Frame size 150 amp and below:

1) Non-interchangeable, non-adjustable thermal magnetic trip units. c. Frame sizes 225 to 250 amp:

1) Interchangeable and adjustable instantaneous thermal magnetic trip units. d. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Listed:

1) Standard: UL 943. 2) One- or two-pole as indicated on the Drawings. 3) Class A ground fault circuit. 4) Trip on 5 mA ground fault (4-6 mA range).

e. HACR listed: 1) Heating, air conditioning and refrigeration applications.

3. Solid state trip type: a. Inverse time overload, instantaneous short circuit and ground fault protection by

means of a solid state trip element, associated current monitors and flux shunt trip mechanism.

b. Frame size 400 amp to 1200 amp: 1) Standard rating. 2) Interchangeable current sensor or rating plug. 3) Adjustable long time pick-up setting. Adjustable from 50 to 100 percent of

the current sensor or rating plug. 4) Adjustable short time pick-up setting. 5) Adjustable instantaneous pick-up. 6) Fixed ground fault pick-up, when indicated on the Drawings.

c. Frame size 1600 amp and above: 1) 100 percent rated. 2) Interchangeable current sensor or rating plug. 3) Adjustable long time pick-up setting. Adjustable from 50 to 100 percent of

the current sensor or rating plug. 4) Adjustable long time delay setting. 5) Adjustable short time pick-up setting. 6) Adjustable instantaneous pick-up setting. 7) Adjustable ground fault pick-up setting, when indicated on the Drawings. 8) Adjustable ground fault delay setting, when indicated on the Drawings.


4. Motor circuit protector: a. Adjustable instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a magnetic or

solid state trip element. b. Sized for the connected motor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Series rated systems not acceptable.

C. Devices shall be ambient temperature compensated.

D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall incorporate the following, unless indicated

otherwise on the Drawings: a. Frame sizes 250 amp and less shall be thermal magnetic type. b. Frame sizes 400 amp and larger shall be solid state trip type.

1) Current sensor or rating plugs long time pick-up setting shall be set so that the indicated trip level is near the 75 percent trip point.

c. Frame sizes 1000 amp and above shall include integral ground fault protection, when indicated on the Drawings.

d. Motor circuit protectors sized for the connected motor.


A. Adjustable Circuit Breakers: 1. Set all circuit breaker adjustable taps as defined on the Drawings. 2. Test and verify all circuit breaker trip functions using a test set provided by the

manufacturer for that purpose for circuit breakers 1200 A and above.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16491 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Type 1 SPD - High exposure locations (motor control center), integrally mounted. 2. Type 3 SPD - Medium exposure locations (panelboard), integrally mounted.



A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

a. C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

b. C62.41.1, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

c. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.

d. C62.45, Guide on Surge Testing For Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. LS 1, Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices.


4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1283, Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. b. 1449, Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

B. Qualifications: 1. Provide devices from a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the

development, design, testing, listing and manufacturing of SPDs of the types and ratings required for a period of ten years or more and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service. a. Upon request, suppliers or manufacturers shall provide a list of not less than

three customer references showing satisfactory operation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Clamping Voltage: 1. The applied surge shall be induced at the 90 degree phase angle of the applied

system frequency voltage. 2. The voltage measured at the end of the 6 IN output leads of the SPD and from the

zero voltage reference to the peak of the surge.

B. Let-Through Voltage: 1. The applied surge shall be induced at the 90 degree phase angle of the applied

system frequency voltage.


2. The voltage measured at the end of the 6 IN output leads of the SPD and from the system peak voltage to the peak of the surge.

C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum steady state voltage at which the SPD device can operate and meet it specification within its rated temperature.

D. Maximum Surge Current: 1. The maximum 8 x 20 microsecond surge current pulse the SPD device is capable of

surviving on a single-impulse basis without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10 percent deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current.

2. Listed by mode, since number and type of components in any SPD may very by mode.

E. MCC: Motor Control Center.

F. Protection Modes: This parameter identifies the modes for which the SPD has directly connected protection elements, i.e., line-to-neutral (L-N), line-to-line (L-L), line-to-ground (L-G), neutral-to-ground (N-G).

G. Surge Current per Phase: 1. The per phase rating is the total surge current capacity connected to a given phase

conductor. a. For example, a wye system surge current per phase would equal L-N plus L-G;

a delta system surge current per phase would equal L-L plus L-G. The N-G mode is not included in the per phase calculation.

H. System Peak Voltage: The electrical equipment supply voltage sine wave peak (i.e., for a 480/277 V system the L-L peak voltage is 679V and the L-N peak voltage is 392 V).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


a. Manufacturer's qualifications. b. Standard catalog cut sheet. c. Electrical and mechanical drawing showing unit dimensions, weights, mounting

provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. d. Testing procedures and testing equipment data. e. Create a Product Data Sheet for each different model number of SPD provided

(i.e., Model XYZ with disconnect and Model XYZ without disconnect, each require a Product Data Sheet). 1) Data in the Product Data Sheet heading:

a) SPD Type Number per Part 2 of the specification. b) Manufacturer’s Name. c) Product model number.

2) Data in the Product Data Sheet body: a) Column one: Specified value/feature of every paragraph of PART 2 of

the Specification. b) Column two: Manufacturer’s certified value confirming the product

meets the specified value/feature. c) Name of the nationally recognized testing laboratory that preformed the

tests. d) Warranty information.

3) Data in the Product Data Sheet closing: a) Signature of the manufacturer’s official (printed and signed). b) Title of the official.

4) Date of signature.


B. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. See General Conditions and Special Conditions. 2. Warranty.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Minimum of a 5-year Warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TYPE 1 SPD

A. Product: 1. Integrally mounted in switchgear, switchboards or MCCs. 2. Hybrid solid-state high performance suppression system.

a. Do not use a suppression system with gas tubes, spark gaps or other components which might short or crowbar the line resulting in interruption of normal power flow to connected loads.

3. Do not connect multiple SPD modules in series to achieve the specified performance.

4. Designed for parallel connection. 5. Field connection: Use mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and

ground that will accept bus bar or #10 through #1/0 conductors. 6. Device monitor:

a. Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators and Form C dry contact(s) that monitors the on-line status of each mode of the units suppression filter system and power loss in any of the phases.

b. A fuse status only monitor system is not acceptable.

B. Operating Voltage: The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as indicated on Drawings.

C. Modes of Protection: All modes. 1. Three phase (delta): L-L, L-G. 2. Three phase (wye): L-N, L-L, L-G and N-G. 3. Single phase (2 pole): L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G. 4. Single phase: L-N, L-G and N-G.

D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Less than 130 percent of system peak voltage.

E. Operating Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz.

F. Short Circuit Rating: Equal to or greater than rating of equipment SPD is connected too.

G. Maximum Surge Current: 240,000 A per phase, 120,000 A per mode minimum.

H. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: 4000 IEEE C High waveform impulses with no degradation greater than 10 percent deviation of the clamping voltage.

I. SPD Protection: 1. Integral unit level and/or component level overcurrent fuses and sustained

overvoltage thermal cutout device. 2. An IEEE C High waveforms shall not cause the fuse to open and render the SPD

inoperable.

J. Maximum Clamping Voltages: Dynamic test at the 90 degree phase angle including 6 IN lead length and measured from the zero voltage reference:


IEEE C62.41

System Voltage Test Mode

C High V & I Wave

B Combination Wave UL 1449

L-L 1470 V 1000 V 800 V L-N 850 V 600 V 500 V L-G 1150 V 800 V 600 V

L-L < 250 V L-N < 150 V

N-G 1150 V 800 V 600 V L-L 2700 V 2000 V 1800 V L-N 1500 V 1150 V 1000 V L-G 2000 V 1550 V 1200 V

L-L > 250 V L-N > 150 V

N-G 2000 V 1550 V 1200 V

K. EMI-RFI Noise Rejection: Attenuation greater than 30 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz.

2.2 TYPE 3 SPD

A. Product: 1. Integrally mounted in a panelboard. 2. Hybrid solid state high performance suppression system.

a. Do not use gas tubes, spark gaps or other components in suppression system which might short or crowbar the line resulting in interruption of normal power flow to connected loads.

3. Do not connect multiple SPD modules in series to achieve the specified performance.

4. Designed for parallel connection. 5. Field connection: Use mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and

ground that will accept bus bar or #10 through #1/0 conductors. 6. Device monitor:

a. Long-life, solid state, externally visible indicators and Form C contact(s) that monitor the on-line status of each mode of the units suppression filter system or power loss in any of the phases.

b. A fuse status only monitor system is not acceptable.

B. Operating Voltage: The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Modes of Protection: All modes. 1. Three phase (delta): L-L, L-G. 2. Three phase (wye): L-N, L-L, L-G and N-G. 3. Single phase (2 pole): L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G. 4. Single phase: L-N, L-G and N-G.

D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Less than 130 percent of system peak voltage.

E. Operating Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz.

F. Short Circuit Rating: Equal to or greater than rating of equipment SPD is connected too.

G. Maximum Surge Current: 160,000 A per phase, 80,000 A per mode minimum.

H. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: 4000 IEEE C High or B combination waveform impulses with no degradation of more than 10 percent deviation of the clamping voltage.

I. SPD Protection:


1. Integral unit level and/or component level overcurrent fuses and sustained overvoltage thermal cutout device.

2. An IEEE B combination wave shall not cause the fuse to open and render the SPD inoperable.

J. Maximum Clamping Voltages: Dynamic test at the 90 degree phase angle including 6 IN lead length and measured from the zero voltage reference:

IEEE C62.41

System Voltage Test Mode B Comb. Wave B3 Ring Wave UL 1449

L-L 1000 V 700 V 800 V L-N 600 V 400 V 500 V L-G 800 V 550 V 600 V

L-L < 250 V L-N < 150 V

N-G 800 V 550 V 600 V L-L 2000 V 1400 V 1800 V L-N 1150 V 800 V 1000 V L-G 1550 V 1000 V 1200 V

L-L > 250 V L-N > 150 V

N-G 1550 V 1000 V 1200 V

K. EMI-RFI Noise Rejection: Attenuation greater than 30 dB for frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz.


A. SPD approvals and ratings shall be obtained by manufacturers from nationally recognized testing laboratories.

B. The SPD are to be tested as a complete SPD system including: 1. Integral unit level and/or component level fusing. 2. Neutral and ground shall not be bonded during testing. 3. Six inch lead lengths. 4. Integral disconnect switch when provided.

C. The “as installed” SPD system including the manufacturers recommended circuit breaker, the SPD is connected to, will not open when tested with a IEEE C3 combination waveform.

D. Tests to be performed in accordance with IEEE C62.45: 1. Clamping voltage performance testing using IEEE C62.41 Category waveforms. 2. Single pulse surge current capacity test. 3. Repetitive surge current capacity testing. 4. Spectrum analysis for EMI-RFI noise rejection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Type 1 and 3 SPD: 1. Connected in parallel to the equipment. 2. Install in dedicated electrical equipment compartment, bucket or panelboard box at

the factory before shipment. 3. Provide leads that are as short and straight as possible. 4. Maximum lead length: 12 IN. 5. Minimum lead size: #2 stranded AWG or bus bar. 6. Connect leads to the equipment to be protected by one of the following means:


a. Through a circuit breaker or molded case switch mounted in the equipment. b. Use manufacturer recommended circuit breaker size. c. Circuit breaker or switch to be operable from the equipment exterior or from

behind a hinged door.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16492 ELECTRICAL METERING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Digital metering equipment.




a. C12.16, Solid-state Electricity Meters. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. 508, Industrial Control Equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cutler Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D Company. 4. Siemens.


2.2 DIGITAL METERING DEVICES

A. General: 1. Direct reading metered or calculated values. 2. Microprocessor based. 3. Integral LED or LCD display. 4. Current and potential transformers as required. 5. Integral fusing. 6. Operating temperature: 0 DegF to 150 DegF. 7. Standards:

a. ANSI C12.16. b. UL 508.



B. Display the following minimum electrical parameters (accuracy): 1. RMS current per phase (+0.2 percent full scale). 2. RMS voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral (+0.2 percent full scale). 3. Real power (W): Three phase total (+0.4 percent full scale). 4. Apparent power (VA): Three phase total (+0.4 percent full scale). 5. Reactive power (VAR): Three phase total (+0.4 percent full scale). 6. Power factor (+1.0 percent). 7. Frequency (+0.04 percent). 8. Percent current total harmonic distortion (50th). 9. Percent voltage total harmonic distortion (50th). 10. Watt-hours (0.5 percent). 11. VAR-hours (1.0 percent). 12. VA-hours (0.5 percent). 13. Ampere demand (+0.2 percent full scale). 14. Watt demand (+0.4 percent full scale). 15. VAR demand (+0.4 percent full scale). 16. VA demand (+0.4 percent full scale). 17. ANSI C12.16 accuracy.

2.3 TRANSFORMERS

A. Current Transformer (CT): 1. Dry, indoor type. 2. 600 V, with ratio as required by the main bus rating, unless otherwise noted on the

Drawings. 3. Short circuiting device. 4. Minimum ANSI metering accuracy class of 0.3 thru B-0.5. 5. Mount and brace to withstand mechanical stresses resulting from short circuit

currents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

B. Current transformers shall be connected to shorting type terminal blocks.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16493 CONTROL EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Operator control devices (selector switches, pushbuttons, indicator lights, etc.). 2. Control devices (timers, relays, contactors, etc.). 3. Control panels and operator stations. 4. Alarm devices.




a. ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. b. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum).

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Application b. 508, Industrial Control Equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Relays:

a. Idec. b. Potter & Brumfield. c. Time Mark. d. ATC Diversified Electronics.

2. Pilot Devices: a. Cutler-Hammer. b. General Electric. c. Square D Company. d. Allen Bradley.

3. Contactors: a. Automatic Switch Company (ASCO). b. Cutler-Hammer. c. General Electric Company.


d. Square D Company. e. Siemens. f. Allen Bradley.

4. Terminal blocks: a. Phoenix Contact. b. Allen-Bradley.

5. Enclosures: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Wiegmann. c. B-Line Circle AW. d. Adalet.


2.2 PILOT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: 1. Standards: NEMA ICS 2, UL 508. 2. Heavy-duty, NEMA 4/13 watertight/oiltight. 3. Heavy-duty, NEMA 4/4X corrosion resistant. 4. Heavy-duty, factory sealed explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof (Class I and II). 5. Mounting hole: 30.5 mm. 6. Contact blocks: 10 amp, NEMA A600 rated, number as required to fulfill functions

shown or specified. 7. Legend plate marked as indicated on Drawings or specified.

B. Selector Switches: 1. Two, three- or four-position rotary switch as required to fulfill functions indicated on

the Drawings or as specified. 2. Maintained contact type, unless otherwise noted. 3. Knob or lever type operators.

C. Pushbuttons: 1. Non-illuminated type:

a. Protective boot. b. Momentary contact. c. Standard flush and mushroom operators. d. Red colored buttons for START or ON and green color for STOP or OFF. e. Emergency stop pushbuttons: Mushroom head operator and maintained

contact.

D. Indicating Lights: 1. Allowing replacement of bulb without removal from control panel. 2. Lamp: LED, 120 V or 24 V as required. 3. Full voltage type. 4. Push-to-test indicating lights. 5. Glass lens. 6. Legend plate engraved for each light. 7. Color code lights as follows:

a. Green: OFF or stopped ; valve closed. b. Amber: Standby; auto mode; ready. c. Red: ON or running ; valve open.

2.3 RELAYS

A. General Requirements: 1. Standards: NEMA ICS 2, UL 508.

B. Control Relays: 1. General purpose (ice cube) type:


a. Plug-in housing. b. Clear polycarbonate dust cover with clip fastener. c. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. d. Contacts:

1) 10 amp continuous. 2) Silver cadmium oxide. 3) Minimum of 3 SPDT contacts.

e. Sockets: DIN rail mounted. f. Internal neon or LED indicator is lit when coil is energized. g. Manual operator switch.

2. Industrial type: a. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. b. Contacts:

1) 10 amp, NEMA A600 rated. 2) Double break, silver alloy. 3) Convertible from normally open to normally closed or vice versa, without

removing any wiring. 4) Expandable from 2 poles to 12 poles.

c. Provide contacts for all required control plus two spares.

2.4 CONTACTORS

A. General Requirements: 1. Standards: NEMA ICS 2, UL 508.

B. Lighting and Remote Control Switches: 1. Electrically operated, electrically held. 2. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. 3. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break silver-cadmium-oxide. 4. Rated for ballasted lighting, tungsten and general use loads. 5. Number of poles, continuous ampere rating and voltage, as indicated on the

Drawings or as specified. 6. Auxiliary control relays, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified. 7. Auxiliary contacts, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified.

C. Definite Purpose: 1. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or as required. 2. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break silver-cadmium-oxide. 3. Resistive load and horsepower rated. 4. Number of poles, continuous ampere rating and voltage, as indicated on Drawings

or as specified. 5. Auxiliary contacts, as indicated on the Drawings or as specified.

2.5 ALARM DEVICES

A. Smoke Alarm 1. Manufacturer and Model No. shall be Simplex 2098 Series or approved equal. 2. Operating Voltage: 120Vac. 3. Aux contact for remote alarm indication. 4. U.L. 268 5. Smoke detectors located as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Smoke detector shall utilize photoelectric type sensor. 7. Functional test switch which, when operated, shall test the electronics and simulate

an alarm condition. 8. Red LED which shall indicate power on.


2.6 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Magnetic Door Switch 1. Provide a two-part switch assembly consisting of a magnetic unit and a switch unit

suitable for mounting on a gate or hatch made of wood or metal. 2. Provide a flexible metal clad cable attached to the switch unit. 3. Provide a “Form C” SPDT contact. 4. Provide NEMA 4X housing. 5. U.L. listed. 6. Gap distance up to 3 inches. 7. Sentrol Model Series 2507A. 8. Provide mounting brackets. Mount switch toward hinge side of door.

B. Hatch Limit Switch 1. Square D, Type 9007C or equal. 2. Heavy duty industrial. 3. Rotary head. 4. Suitable for wet environment. 5. Low temperature operation minimum 0 deg F. 6. Switch shall spring return to normal when hatch is open. Contact is normally open

when hatch is closed.

C. Run Time Meters: 1. Six-digit wheels including a 1/10 digit. 2. Non-reset type. 3. Time range in hours. 4. Automatic recycle at zero. 5. Accuracy: 1 percent. 6. Sealed against dirt and moisture. 7. Tamperproof.

2.7 TERMINATION EQUIPMENT

A. General Requirements: 1. Modular type with screw compression clamp. 2. Screws: Stainless steel. 3. Current bar: Nickel-plated copper alloy. 4. Thermoplastic insulation rated for -40 to +90 DegC. 5. Wire insertion area: Funnel-shaped to guide all conductor strands into terminal. 6. End sections and end stops at each end of terminal strip. 7. Machine-printed terminal markers on both sides of block. 8. Spacing: 6 mm. 9. Wire size: 22-12 AWG. 10. Rated voltage: 600 V. 11. DIN rail mounting.

B. Standard-type block: 1. Rated current: 30 A. 2. Color: Gray body.

C. Bladed-type disconnect block: 1. Terminal block with knife blade disconnect which connects or isolated the two sides

of the block. 2. Rated current: 10 A. 3. Color:

a. Panel control voltage leaves enclosure - normal: Gray body, orange switch. b. Foreign voltage entering enclosure: Orange body, orange switch.


D. Grounded-type block: 1. Electrically grounded to mounting rail. 2. Terminal ground wires and analog cable shields. 3. Color: Green and yellow body.

E. Fuse Holders: 1. Blocks can be ganged for multi-pole operation. 2. Spacing: 9.1 mm. 3. Wire size: 30-12 AWG. 4. Rated voltage: 300 V. 5. Rated current: 12 A. 6. Fuse size: 1/4 x 1-1/4. 7. Blown fuse indication. 8. DIN rail mounting. 9. UL Listed.

2.8 ENCLOSURES

A. Control Panels: 1. NEMA 4X rated:

a. Body and cover: 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. b. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. c. No knockouts. d. External mounting flanges. e. Hinged door and stainless steel screws and clamps. f. Door with oil-resistant gasket.

2. NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Body and cover: 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and

manufacturers standard paint inside and out. b. No knockouts. c. External mounting flanges. d. Non-hinged stainless steel cover held closed with captivated cover screws

threaded into sealed wells or hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps.

e. Flat door with oil resistant gasket. 3. Control panel miscellaneous accessories:

a. Back plane mounting panels: Steel with white enamel finish or Type 304 stainless steel.

b. Interiors shall be white or light gray in color. c. Wire management duct:

1) Bodies: PVC with side holes. 2) Cover: PVC snap-on. 3) Size as required.

d. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 SF or heavier than 25 LBS. e. Split covers when heavier than 25 LBS. f. Floor stand kits made of same material as the enclosure. g. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits.

4. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 508.

B. Operator Control Stations: 1. NEMA 4/13 rated:

a. Die cast aluminum body with manufacturer’s standard finish. b. Gasketed die cast aluminum cover with manufacturer’s standard finish. c. Number of device mounting holes as required.

2. NEMA 4X rated: a. Type 304 or 316 stainless steel body. b. Gasketed Type 304 or 316 stainless steel cover. c. Number of device mounting holes as required.



A. Provide 100 percent replacement lamps for indicating lights.

B. Provide 10 percent replacement caps for indicating lights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 1. Control station mounting height: 48 IN to center.

B. Control Panels: 1. Size as required to mount the equipment. 2. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X enclosure:

a. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive or highly corrosive.

3. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure: a. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry architecturally or non-

architecturally finished areas.

C. Operator Control Stations: 1. Permitted uses of NEMA 4/13 enclosure:

a. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry architecturally or non-architecturally finished areas and wet.

2. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X enclosure: a. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive or highly

corrosive.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 16500 LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


a. Interior building lighting fixtures. b. Exterior building and site lighting fixtures. c. Lamps. d. Ballasts.

B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable - 600 Volt and Below.



a. C82 Series, Standards for Electric Lamp Ballasts. 2. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM). 3. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

a. 47 CFR 18, Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

a. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

5. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000Volts Maximum). b. LE 4, Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility.

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 101, Life Safety Code.

7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 198C, High-Interrupting-Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting Type. b. 924, Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. c. 935, Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. d. 1029, High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts. e. 1570, Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures. f. 1571, Incandescent Lighting Fixtures. g. 1572, High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures.

8. United States Department of Energy (USDOE): a. EPACT, the National Energy Policy Act.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


a. Identify fixtures by Fixture Schedule number.


b. Fixture data sheet including: 1) Photometric performance data including candlepower distribution and

coefficient of utilization (CU) table.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Lighting fixtures: See Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Drawings. 2. Lamps:

a. Osram/Sylvania. b. General Electric. c. Philips.

3. Ballasts: Fixture manufacturer's standard. 4. Emergency ballasts: Bodine. 5. Poles: Fixture manufacturer's standard.


2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All lighting fixtures and electrical components: 1. UL labeled. 2. Fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts.

B. Provide all recessed fixtures with gaskets of rubber, fiberglass, or equivalent material to prevent light leaks around flush trim. Provide recessed fixtures with trim gaskets cemented in proper position.

C. Reflector coating having a minimum 89 percent reflectance factor.

D. No live parts normally exposed to contact.

E. When intended for use in wet areas: Mark fixtures "Suitable for wet locations."

F. When intended for use in damp areas: Mark fixtures "Suitable for damp locations" or "Suitable for wet locations."

2.3 LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Incandescent: 1. UL 1571. 2. Lamp base.

a. Less than or equal to 300W: Medium base. b. Greater than 300W: Mogul base.

3. Visibly marked to indicate maximum lamp wattage that can be used with the fixture.

B. Fluorescent: 1. UL 1570. 2. NEMA LE 4 for recessed locations. 3. Lenses: As indicated in Fixture Schedule, with the following minimums:

a. Troffer: 100 percent virgin acrylic, conical shaped, female 0.1875 IN, square based prisms, aligned 45 degrees to the length and width, 0.125 IN nominal thickness.

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard polyester, acrylic enamel or epoxy powder coating applied after fabrication. Manufacturer's standard color or special color specified in Fixture Schedule.


5. Prewired and provided with lamps that are properly mated to the ballast operating characteristics.

C. High Intensity Discharge: 1. UL 1572. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard polyester, acrylic enamel or epoxy powder coating

applied after fabrication. Manufacturer's standard color or special color specified in Fixture Schedule.

3. Prewired and provided with lamps that are properly mated to the ballast operating characteristics.

4. Provided with safety chain.

D. Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units: 1. UL 924. 2. NFPA 101.

2.4 LAMPS

A. Incandescent: 1. Type as indicated in fixture schedule. 2. Meet the current Federal Energy Standards (EPACT 1992).

B. Fluorescent: 1. T8 (265 mA) rapid-start medium bipin lamps.

a. Correlated color temperature of 3500 degrees Kelvin. b. Minimum color rendering index (CRI) of 70. c. Minimum initial lumen ratings for each lamp type shall be:

1) 1300 lumens for 24 IN, 17 watt F17T8 lamp. 2) 2025 lumens for 36 IN, 25 watt F25T8 lamp. 3) 2800 lumens for 48 IN, 32 watt F32T8 lamp. 4) 5700 lumens for 96 IN, 59 watt F96T8 lamp.

C. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: 1. Metal halide lamps:

a. Correlated color temperature of 4000 degrees Kelvin. b. Minimum color rendering index (CRI) of 65. c. Metal halide lamps are designated on the lighting Fixture Schedule by the

following prefixes: 1) MH: standard metal halide. 2) MP: metal halide rated for open fixtures. 3) MS: super metal halide (high-efficacy or pulse start).

2. High pressure sodium lamps: a. Correlated color temperature of 2100 degrees Kelvin. b. Minimum color rendering index (CRI) of 21. c. High pressure sodium lamps are designated on the lighting Fixture Schedule by

the prefix HPS. 3. Uncoated (clear) unless identified as coated in the fixture schedule. 4. The specified fixture in the fixture schedule shall dictate the required lamp operating

position and base type. 5. Provide lamps that have the correct bulb shape for the fixture specified.

2.5 BALLASTS

A. Fluorescent Electromagnetic Ballasts: 1. UL 935. 2. High-efficiency energy saving electromagnetic core and coil design. 3. CBM certification for full light output. 4. Operate lamps at a frequency of 60 Hz. 5. Power factor: Greater than 90 percent.


6. Input current with Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 32 percent. 7. Lamp current crest factor: Less than 1.7, in accordance with lamp manufacturer's

recommendations and ANSI C82.1. 8. Ballast factor: Greater than 0.925 for rapid start 265 mA (T8) and 430 mA (T12)

ballasts per ANSI C82.1. 9. Audible noise rating: Greater than or equal to Class A for rapid start 265 mA (T8)

and 430 mA (T12) ballasts. 10. Coil temperature not to exceed 65 DegC (150 DegF) temperature rise over 40 DegC

(105 DegF) ambient. Maximum case temperature not to exceed 90 DegC (195 DegF).

11. Meet the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and Regulations, Part 18 (47 CFR 18), for non-consumer equipment for EMI and RFI.

12. Meet all applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding harmonic distortion and transient protection such as IEEE C62.41, Cat. A, for transient protection.

13. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed (Class P). 14. Fully encapsulated (potted) to ensure maximum thermal and structural integrity. 15. Contain no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's).

B. Fluorescent High Frequency Electronic Ballasts: 1. UL 935. 2. "High Frequency" electronic operating lamps at a frequency of 20 KHz or higher

without visible flicker. 3. Power factor: Greater than 90 percent. 4. Input current total harmonic distortion (THD) of less than 20 percent. 5. Lamp current crest factor: Less than 1.7, in accordance with lamp manufacturer's

recommendations and ANSI C82.11. 6. Instant start with lamps wired in parallel. 7. Support a sustained short to ground or open circuit of any output leads without

damage to the ballast. 8. Ballast Factor: Greater than 0.85 per ANSI C82.11. 9. Audible noise rating: Class A or better. 10. Operation in ambient temperatures up to 40 DegC (105 DegF) without damage. 11. Light output to remain constant for a line voltage fluctuation of +5 percent. 12. Meet the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and

Regulations, Part 18 (47 CFR 18), for non-consumer equipment for EMI and RFI. 13. Meet ANSI C82.11 standards regarding harmonic distortion. 14. Meet IEEE C62.41 Cat. A for transient protection. 15. Comply with all applicable state and federal efficiency standards. 16. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listed (Class P). 17. Contain no Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's).

C. Fluorescent Emergency Ballasts: 1. UL 924, NFPA 101. 2. High temperature, 24 Watt-hour, maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery with

charger. 3. Charging indicator light (LED) to monitor the charger and battery. 4. Double-pole test switch. 5. Light one lamp for 90 minutes in 1, 2 and 3-lamp fixtures. Light two lamps for 90

minutes in 4-lamp fixtures. 6. Dual input voltage (120/277V), 4 Watts input. 7. Compatible with the install lamp type. 8. Initial lumen output: 975 to 1400. 9. Contain no Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's).

D. High Intensity Discharge Ballasts: 1. ANSI C82.4, UL 1029. 2. Metal halide:


a. Input voltage variation: +10 percent. b. Maximum lamp regulation spread: 20 percent. c. Minimum power factor: 90 percent. d. Starting current: Not greater than operating current. e. Maximum input voltage dip: 40 percent. f. Crest factor: 1.5 to 1.8. g. Types:

1) Lead-type regulators: Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) and pulse start.

2) Lag-type regulators: Magnetic regulator and pulse start. h. Contain no Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's).

3. High pressure sodium: a. Input voltage variation: +10 percent. b. Maximum lamp regulation spread: 30 percent. c. Minimum power factor: 90 percent. d. Starting current: Not greater than operating current. e. Maximum input voltage dip: 20 percent. f. Crest factor: 1.6 to 1.8. g. The Volts-Watts trace shall be within the lamp manufacturer's trapezoid. h. Types:

1) Lead-type regulators: Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA). 2) Lag-type regulators: Magnetic regulator and regulated lag.

i. Ballast shall not contain Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's). 4. Ballasts for interior use:

a. Encased and potted type. b. Audible noise rating of B or better. c. Built-in automatic resetting thermal protection switch.

5. Ballasts for exterior use: a. Starting temperature: -20 DegF.

2.6 POLES

A. As scheduled or noted on the Drawings.


A. Furnish a minimum of 2 or 10 percent of total of each type and wattage of lamps, whichever is greater.

B. Furnish a minimum of 10 percent of total of each type and amperage of fuses for fixtures indicated to be fused.

C. Spare parts are to be stored in a box clearly labeled as to its contents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate fixture types with ceiling construction. Provide mounting hardware for the ceiling system in which the fixture is to be installed.

B. Fasten lighting fixtures supported by suspended ceiling systems to ceiling framing system with hold down clips.

C. Provide mounting brackets and/or structural mounting support for wall-mounted fixtures. 1. Do not support fixture from conduit system. 2. Do not support fixture from outlet boxes.


D. Provide pendant incandescent, compact fluorescent, and/or HID fixtures with swivel hangers which will allow fixture to swing in any direction but will not permit stem to rotate. 1. Provide hangers with enclosure rating (NEMA 1, 4, or 7) equal to enclosure

requirements of area in which they are installed. 2. Swivel hangers for fixtures in mechanical equipment areas: Shock absorbing type. 3. Secure HID fixtures with safety chain.

E. Pendant mounted, open, industrial fluorescent fixtures: 1. Not in continuous rows, shall be supported by conduit or by approved chains:

a. Hardwired to ceiling mounted junction box. 2. In continuous rows, shall be rigidly supported with conduit and fasten fixtures to

each other or mount on continuous metal channel per Section 16010. a. Hardwired to ceiling mounted junction box. b. Provide reflector alignment clips.

F. Locate fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling plans.

G. Locate in exact center of tile when indicated. Relocate misplaced fixtures and replace damaged ceiling materials.

H. Mount lighting fixtures at heights indicated in Section 16010 or per fixture schedule or as indicted on Drawings.

I. Install exterior fixtures so that water can not enter or accumulate in the wiring compartment.

J. Where indicated provide 2-level control of 3 and/or 4 lamp fluorescent fixtures. Provide 2 ballasts per fixture and control inside lamp(s) in each fixture by one switch or set of switches and the outside 2 lamps by a second switch or group of switches.

K. Ground fixtures and ballasts.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Steel and Aluminum Poles: 1. Mounted on cast-in-place foundations, as detailed on Drawings.

a. Concrete and reinforcing steel, in accordance with Section 03108, 03208, 03308 and 03348.

2. Protect pole finish during installation. Repair damage to pole finish with manufacturer approved repair kit.

B. Ground poles as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Conductors: 1. See Section 16120 for required underground conductors. 2. Use interior building wire, as specified in Section 16120, from pole base to fixture,

#12 AWG minimum.

D. Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protection: 1. Protect each phase with a UL Class CC fuse:

a. Size: 3 times load current. b. Standard: UL 198C.

2. Fuseholder: a. Watertight, in-line and break-a-way style. b. Accept up to a 30 A, 600 V fuse. c. Neutral conductor shall utilize a fuseholder with a solid copper rod. d. Conductor terminal: Adequate size for the installed conductors.


3.3 LIGHTING CONTROL

A. Exterior wall mounted and pole mounted fixtures controlled as detailed on Drawings.

3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Replace all inoperable lamps with new lamps prior to final acceptance.

B. Aim all emergency lighting units, so that, the path of egress is illuminated.

END OF SECTION

of 768

S\CP\07-690 Zones 2 & 3 Pump Station\07-690 & 06-688 Project Manual

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Project 06-688 Downing Street Traffic Circle Modification

The 2005 CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction are referenced for construction of this project within these Technical Specifications. The list on Page T-2 identifies those CDOT Standard Specifications used in this project. Project-specific Technical Specifications that supplement or modify the Standard Specifications and plans are listed below.

INDEX

Description Index Page List of Referenced CDOT & COT Standard Specifications Revision of Section 208 – Erosion Control Revision of Section 208 – Storm Drain Inlet Protection Revision to Section 412 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Revision to Section 602 – Reinforcing Steel Revision to Section 630 – Traffic Control Revision to Section 630 – Construction Zone Traffic Control Revision to COT Section 16 – Pavement Markings Protection of Existing Vegetation Protection of Existing Irrigation Utilities


LIST OF REFERENCED CDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

The following sections of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (2005 Edition) are specifically referenced within the plans and Technical Specifications and are considered included in their entirety as requirements for the construction of this project. Subsection 105.10 – Cooperation with Utilities Subsection 107.25 – Water Quality Control Section 208 – Erosion Control Section 304 – Aggregate Base Course Section 401 – Plant Mix Pavements - General Section 412 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Section 601 – Structural Concrete Section 602 – Reinforcing Steel Section 608 – Sidewalks and Bikeways Section 614 – Traffic Control Devices Section 626 – Mobilization Section 630 – Construction Zone Traffic Control Section 709 – Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope Section 713 – Traffic Control Materials If any language within the referenced Standard Specifications conflicts with the City of Thornton contract requirements, the City contract language shall govern.

LIST OF REFERENCED COT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS The following sections of the COT Standards and Specifications for the Design and Construction of Public Improvements are specifically referenced within the plans and Technical Specifications and are considered included in their entirety as requirements for the construction of this project. Section 505 – Concrete Pavements Section 600 - Concrete Work


REVISION OF SECTION 208 EROSION CONTROL

Section 208 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:

Subsection 208.04 (c) shall include the following:

Temporary erosion control facilities and/or permanent facilities intended to control erosion of an earth disturbance operation shall be installed before any earth disturbance operations take place.

At the end of construction, all concrete, asphalt, and construction debris shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of at an approved waste site. Sediment basins shall be installed before any land disturbance takes place in the drainage area. The area under the embankment shall be cleared, grubbed, and stripped of all vegetation and root mat. Sediment shall be removed when it has accumulated to ½ the wet storage depth of the basin and disposed of at an approved location as directed by the Engineer. Earth disturbances shall be conducted in such a manner so as to effectively reduce accelerated soil erosion and resulting sedimentation, and shall not exceed the erosion expected to occur for the site in its totally undeveloped state. Persons engaged in earth disturbances shall design, implement, and maintain acceptable soil erosion and sedimentation control measures in conformance with the erosion control technical standards adopted by the City of Thornton. Earth disturbances shall be designed, constructed and completed in such a manner so that the exposed area of any disturbed land shall be limited to the shortest possible period of time. Sediment caused by accelerated soil erosion shall be removed from runoff water before it leaves the site of the earth disturbance. Any temporary or permanent facility designed and constructed for the conveyance of water around, through, or from the earth disturbance area shall be designed to limit the water flow to a non-erosive velocity.

REVISION OF SECTION 208

EROSION CONTROL

Temporary soil erosion control facilities shall be removed and earth disturbance areas graded and stabilized with permanent soil erosion control as approved by the City of Thornton.

Subsection 208.04 (e) shall include the following:

The Contractor shall continuously maintain all silt fencing so that it functions properly during construction and work suspensions. All silt fencing shall be removed by the Contractor upon substantial permanent stabilization unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

The BMPs implemented in the project area may need to be modified by the Contractor to adapt to changing conditions or to ensure that potential pollutants are being properly managed at the project site. The Contractor shall provide all such required modifications if so directed by the Engineer .


All inlet/outlet protection shall be checked for maintenance and failure. Sediment shall be removed and properly disposed of once it has accumulated to half the design of the trap. If applicable, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the Vehicle Tracking Control during the entire time it is in use in the project. The Vehicle Tracking Control shall be removed at the completion of the project unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. All spills shall be cleaned up immediately after discovery, or contained until appropriate clean-up methods can be employed. Manufacturer’s recommended methods for spill clean-up shall be followed, along with proper disposal methods as defined by City of Thornton ordinances.

Subsection 208.04(f) shall include the following: All sediment shall be removed upon initial acceptance from temporary sediment basins and storm sewer facilities (i.e. pipes, outlets and inlets). This sediment shall not be flushed off-site, but shall be captured on-site and disposed of at an approved location as directed by the Engineer. 208.08 Pay Item Pay Unit Silt Fence Linear Foot Landscape Restoration Lump Sum

REVISION OF SECTION 208 STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION

Section 208 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows: In subsection 208.05(j), add the following:

Storm drainage inlet protection shall be installed at the nearest downstream inlet from excavation areas. The inlet protection unit shall be sewn geotextile fabric unit enclosing a porous structure in the form of a cylindrical tube placed in front of and extending beyond the inlet opening on both sides. Inlet protection shall be as depicted in the Stormwater and Erosion Control Plan. Contractor shall submit Technical Specifications of proposed inlet protection to the Engineer for approval prior to deployment. 208.08 Pay Item Pay Unit Storm Drain Inlet protection Each



PORTLANDS CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Section 412 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows: In subsection 412.03, add the following:

Concrete for the raised intersection shall conform to the requirements for Class P concrete as specified in Section 601. Include Fiber Reinforcing as indicated in City of Thornton Specification 602.6. Saw cutting existing asphalt is incidental to installation of the Concrete Pavement and will not be measured or paid separately. Saw cutting new concrete, installation of joint filler and joint sealant are incidental to installation of the Concrete Pavement and will not be measured or paid separately. 412.24 Pay Item Pay Unit Concrete Pavement Class P (8-inches) Square Yard

REVISION OF SECTION 602 REINFORCING STEEL

Section 602 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows:

The contractor is responsible for providing final jointing and reinforcement layout to the City for approval.

In subsection 602.08, add the following:

Concrete pavement joint reinforcing shall be incidental to the unit price for Concrete Pavement Class P (8-inches) and will not be measured or paid separately.


TRAFFIC CONTROL

Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows: In Subsection 630.14, delete the seventh paragraph and replace with the following:

Traffic Control Inspection shall be provided on the project in accordance with the Contractor’s MHT and as directed by the Engineer. The cost of Traffic Control Inspection shall be included in the unit price for Traffic Control and will not be otherwise measured and paid separately.

In Subsection 630.14, the final paragraph, delete the first two sentences and replace with the following:

Flagging shall be provided on the project in accordance with the Contractor’s MHT and as directed by the Engineer. The cost of Flagging shall be included in the unit price for Traffic Control and will not be otherwise measured and paid separately.


Add the following to Subsection 630.14:

The Contractor shall be required to provide Flagging and Traffic Control Inspection in accordance with its own MHT; however these two items shall be considered included in the unit price for Traffic Control and will not be measured and paid for separately. The intersection of Downing Street and 96th Drive may be closed for a period not to exceed four weeks. The contractor is required to display two variable message boards one week prior to the intersection closure and during the closure. Cost to close the intersection shall be considered included in the unit price for Traffic Control and will not be measured and paid separately.

Pay Item Pay Unit Traffic Control LS

REVISION OF SECTION 630 CONSTRUCTION ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL

Section 630 of the Standard Specifications is hereby revised for this project as follows: Subsection 630.01 shall include the following:

The components of the TCP for this project are included in the following documents: 1. These Technical Specifications and Section 630 of the Standard Specifications; 2. Standard Plan S-630-1 (6/10/05 Revised Standard), Traffic Controls for Highway

Construction; 3. Schedule of Construction Traffic Control Devices; 4. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) (2003 Edition); and 5. Guide for Work Area Traffic Control, American Traffic Safety Services Association (ATSSA). Construction traffic control shall be as required by, in descending order of precedence: 1] the MUTCD; 2] the ATSSA Guide, 3] the plans and Technical Specifications for this project; 4] CDOT Standard Specifications (2005 Edition); and 5] CDOT Standard Plans (2000 Edition) as applicable.

In Subsection 630.09, delete the first, second and third paragraph as well as Item #3 of the fourth paragraph and replace with the following:

Prior to construction, the Contractor shall develop Traffic Control Plans (TCP) and supporting Method of Handling Traffic (MHT) to be approved by the City of Thornton for the work areas identified in the Contract. Traffic Control Permits will be issued accordingly. The Contractor shall submit all TCP and MHT to the City for approval within 10 days after formal award of the Contract. Failure of the Contractor to submit detailed, comprehensive and clearly legible TCP and MHT will constitute grounds for rejection of TCP and MHT without extensive elaboration or comment from the City. The City will return approved or “redlined” TCP and MHT to the Contractor within 5 days from receipt of submittal. The Contractor shall then present final corrected TCP and MHT to the City of Thornton for final approval and issuance of a Traffic Control Permit.

Pedestrian movements shall be fully addressed in the TCP and MHT. No plan will be approved that unreasonably impedes or restricts pedestrian movements.



No devices required to implement the Contract requirements will be permitted to be installed on or above sidewalk surface areas unless otherwise approved by the City in the respective TCP or MHT.

Subsection 630.10 shall include the following after the first paragraph:

The Contractor’s Superintendent and all others serving in similar supervisory capacity shall have completed a CDOT-approved two day Traffic Control Supervisor training as offered by Colorado CCA. The one-day CCA Traffic Control Technician (TCT) training along with the two-day ATSSA Traffic Control Supervisor training will serve as an alternate. If the alternate is chosen, the Contractor shall provide written evidence that at least 80 percent score was achieved in both of the two training classes. The certifications of completion or certifications of achievement for all appropriate staff shall be submitted to the Engineer at the preconstruction conference.

Subsection 630.12 shall include the following:

A. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS During construction of this project, traffic shall use the present traveled roadway at all times in each direction unless otherwise directed or authorized by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide full intersection movements for vehicular and pedestrian traffic at all times, unless otherwise authorized or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not have construction equipment or materials in the lanes open to traffic at any time unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. All personal vehicle and construction equipment parking is prohibited where it conflicts with safety, access or the flow of traffic. Personal vehicles and construction equipment parking is prohibited in all private parking lots without the respective property owner’s permission. Contractor shall install construction traffic control devices in locations where they do not block or impede other existing traffic control devices; or sidewalks for pedestrians, disabled persons or bicyclists. Excavations or holes shall be backfilled or fenced when unattended. During non-construction periods (weekends, holidays, etc.), all work shall be adequately


protected to provide for the safety of vehicular and pedestrian traffic, as detailed in the Contractor’s approved TCP and MHT. Contractor and subcontractors shall equip their construction vehicles with flashing amber lights. Flashing amber lights on vehicles and equipment shall be visible from all directions. Contractor shall maintain access to all roadways, side streets, walkways, alleyways, driveways, and hike/bike paths at all times unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Access to individual properties shall be maintained at all times unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.


Contractor shall be required to coordinate temporary closures of any private driveways with homeowners in the construction area. Traffic control devices used on this project shall be kept clean and in good working order at all times. Existing signs, traffic signals or other City-owned traffic control devices damaged due to the Contractor’s operations shall be replaced in-kind or repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the project. All advanced construction signing shall be installed prior to any construction activity and remain in place for all work periods. Road Work Ahead advance signs shall be reset as required to match the location of the work. Resetting construction signs during construction as required by the work is considered incidental to the project and will not be paid separately. Masking of existing or temporary signs as may be required by the work is considered incidental to the project and will not be paid for separately. All flaggers used on this project shall be certified. Night flagging is not allowed on this project. The Contractor is required to use Uniformed Traffic Control in lieu of flagging for any required controller deactivation periods. Contractor shall obtain all required permits from the City of Thornton prior to initiating work along City rights of way. Contractor shall have copies of applicable permits in-hand at all times while on site. The Contractor shall submit required MHT, all appropriate Traffic Control Supervisor and Flagger documentation to the Engineer for approval prior to setting any traffic control device.


The Contractor shall maintain frequent communication with the Engineer regarding all aspects of the daily and weekly work schedule.

All construction traffic control devices including signs installed under this project shall be installed as depicted in the MUTCD and other supporting documentation referenced for this project within this Technical Specification. Construction signing shall be removed unless work is in progress or equipment has been left on the job site. All portable signs shall be removed at the end of each work day. Costs of removing, resetting or reinstalling construction traffic control devices shall be considered included in the work and will not be paid for separately. Traffic control devices shall not be stored on the project site.

Contractor shall maintain continuous access through the project for pedestrians, bicycles and disabled persons. When the existing access route is disrupted by construction or construction-related activities, a temporary access shall be provided. All pedestrian access shall be delineated through the work area using proper channelizing devices. All on-site Contractor personnel including superintendents are required to wear appropriate colored, reflective safety vests.


Contractor personnel shall not direct traffic through a signalized intersection at any time. See the Project Technical Specification for Uniformed Traffic Control. When existing traffic signals require power-down, the Contractor shall coordinate all such work with the City of Thornton. B. WORK RESTRICTIONS This project includes restrictions to work times and days that affect traffic during peak traffic times and days, holidays, holiday evenings, holiday weekends, and other circumstances as described in this Technical Specification. Wherever other laws, ordinances, regulations or orders are more restrictive, they shall take precedence over these requirements. Work that interferes with traffic on any day of a holiday or holiday weekend shall not be permitted. Holidays shall be as defined in the Contract. No weekend work shall be allowed unless directed or authorized by the Engineer.


No nighttime work shall be allowed unless directed or otherwise authorized by the Engineer. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate fully with the City of Thornton, utility owners and other contractors; to assure adequate and proper traffic control is provided at all times. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate fully with any others providing traffic control for other operations to assure that work or traffic control devices do not interfere with the free flow of traffic except as allowed by the approved MHT.

In Subsection 630.12, first paragraph, delete the fifth sentence and replace with the following: When storing portable signs or supports within the project they shall be removed beyond the clear zone and shall not be visible to traffic. All storage areas shall be approved. The minimum clear zone distance shall be 18 feet, measured from the edge of the traveled way. If the signs cannot be stored at least 18 feet from the traveled way, they shall be removed. Signs shall not be stored on paved surfaces.


COT Section 16 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

16.0 General This Work consists of furnishing and applying pavement marking in accordance with these specifications, the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), the Colorado supplement, thereto, and in conformity to the lines, dimensions, patterns, locations, and details shown on the plans or established. Paint will not be used. Preformed Plastic Pavement Markings shall be used. The contractor shall field layout pavement markings for installation, via chalk or paint lines, for approval of owner prior to installation of material. Permanent pavement markings on new concrete pavement shall be recessed in a 1/4-inch groove not to exceed ½ inch wider nor 2 inches longer than the tape being laid and shall be glued with an epoxy binder unless another method is approved in writing by the Owner’s Traffic Engineer. Permanent pavement markings on existing asphalt pavement shall have an epoxy binder applied and be tape unless another material is approved in writing by the Traffic Engineer. Permanent markings on existing concrete pavements shall be the same as for new concrete pavement. 16.1 Preformed Plastic Pavement Markings 16.1.1 General The prefabricated markings described shall consist of white pigmented plastic films with reflective glass spheres, uniformly distributed throughout their entire cross-sectional area, and shall be capable of being affixed to Portland cement concrete pavements by either a pressure sensitive precoated adhesive or a liquid contact cement. The markings shall be provided in complete, a form that shall facilitate rapid application and protect the markings in shipment and storage. The contractor shall use proper solvents and/or adhesives for application, all equipment

PAVEMENT MARKINGS

necessary for proper application, and recommendations for application that shall assure an effective performance life. The marking film shall have resealing characteristics such that it shall fuse with itself and with previously applied marking materials of the same composition under normal conditions of use.

Prefabricated legends and symbols shall conform to the applicable shapes and sizes as outlined in the MUTCD.


COT SECTION 16 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

16.1.2 Classification The markings shall be highly durable retroreflective pliant polymer materials, designed for longitudinal and word/symbol markings subjected to high traffic columns and severe wear conditions, such as shear action from crossover, or encroachment on typical longitudinal configurations such as edge lines, barrier lines and lane lines. 16.1.3 Material Symbols, legends, long lines, stop bars and crosswalks shall be 3M Series 270 ES or approved equal. 16.3 Measurement and Payment Payment for pavement markings shall be per type of marking required and shall include all labor, materials, and surface preparation required to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner. Payment shall be made as follows:

Pay Item Pay Unit Preformed Plastic Striping Square Foot

PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION

The Contractor shall protect all existing vegetation (including trees, shrubs, ground cover, grasses, wetland and riparian vegetation) adjacent to project work areas, except for vegetation that must be removed to accommodate construction of the project. Specific areas of vegetation to be protected shall be as directed by the Engineer and shall be delineated with temporary orange construction fencing with metal posts. Fencing shall be installed at the drip line of trees or as designated by the Engineer. Equipment shall not be installed or material stockpiled within 15 feet of existing trees designated to remain. The Contractor shall perform all work in a manner that minimizes environmental damage. Questions about specific areas or vegetation shall be directed to the Engineer for resolution prior to any removal or activity damaging the vegetation in question. The Contractor shall promptly report any vegetation within protected areas that is damaged by construction activities to the Engineer for assessment of damages. If vegetation within fenced areas is damaged or destroyed, it shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Vegetation of replaceable size shall be replaced. The determination of whether a plant is of replaceable size will be made by the Engineer. If trees or shrubs larger than replaceable size are damaged or destroyed, the Contractor shall be liable for the appraised value, based on the current official publication of the International Society of Arboriculture, Guide for Plant Appraisals. A consulting arborist may be retained by the Engineer to determine value of the trees and shrubs. This value and the arborist fee will be deducted from any monies due to the Contractor. The value of such trees or shrubs will be based on tree size, species, location and condition.


If the delineating fence is knocked down or destroyed by the Contractor, the Engineer may suspend the work, wholly or in part, until the fence is repaired to the Engineer’s satisfaction at the Contractor’s expense. Time lost due to such suspension of work will not be considered a basis for adjustment of time charges, but will be charged as contract time. Protection of existing vegetation, including all costs subsidiary and incidental to the foregoing requirements shall be included in the original contract prices for the project and will not otherwise be paid for separately.

PROTECTION OF EXISTING IRRIGATION The Contractor shall protect all existing yard irrigation system adjacent to project work areas, except for irrigation that must be removed and replaced to accommodate construction of the project. Protection and replacing the existing irrigation, including all costs subsidiary and incidental to the foregoing requirements shall be included in the original contract prices for the project and will not otherwise be paid for separately.

UTILITIES

The known utilities within the limits of this project are: Utility Owner / Address Contact Phone XCEL Energy – Street Lighting & Electric 5460 W. 60th Avenue Arvada, CO 80003-5708

Ronald Whitlow [email protected]

303-425-3890

Qwest Communications 12121 Grant Street, Suite 301 Thornton, CO 80241

Bart Campbell 303-441-7124

Comcast Cable 8490 N. Umatilla Street Federal Heights, CO 80260

Glen Nelson [email protected]

720-490-3843

City of Thornton – Water & Sewer Infrastructure Maintenance Center 12450 Washington Street Thornton, CO 80241

Mike Chandler [email protected]

720-977-6257

The work described in these plans and specifications requires full cooperation between the Contractor and the utility owners in accordance with the Contract and Section 105.10 of the Standard Specifications, in conducting their respective operations, to complete the utility work with minimum delay to the project. The referenced Standard Specification is included herein as the Project Technical Specification entitled “Cooperation with Utilities.” See Zone 2 -3 Pump Station drawing OIC304 for known existing utilities. It is the contractors responsibility to locate and protect all utilities within the worksite.